JP2019126367A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of maintaining game interest.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes start pockets capable of receiving a game ball driven onto a game area. When a game ball enters a start pocket, determination processing for winning is performed. Then, variation display corresponding to the determination processing result is started, and a winning game is played when a winning pattern is displayed in the variation display. In this respect, the Pachinko machine can perform special display as a performance relating to operation means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 410

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a "slot machine").

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as can be seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game in which a large amount of prizes can be obtained when winning is won.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is first determined whether or not there is a winning game ball at the starting port. Then, when there is a winning of the game ball to the starting opening, a determination process is performed in which a hit or the like is determined. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined display for a predetermined fluctuation time. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode in which it is shown that the player wins the win, and the opening and closing member of the big winning opening is operated to increase the number of players. A special game that can be awarded a prize is offered.

JP 2010-187791 A

  In such a conventional gaming machine, although effects by the operation means are often executed, it is required to further improve the game interest when the effects by the operation means are performed.

  This invention is made in view of such a situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a decrease in amusement can be suppressed.

Means 1: determination means for performing determination;
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means;
An operation receiving section for receiving an operation by a player;
An operation accepting means capable of generating an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity is given in a predetermined gaming state, and causing a display change when the operation is accepted in the acceptance permission state;
When the acceptance-permitted state occurs, the cocoon image showing the operation receiving unit to which an operation opportunity is given is displayed as an integrated cocoon image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the cocoon image Possible integrated 摸 image display means,
As the integrated bag image, a plurality of modes including a special mode are prepared,
Upon the occurrence of the acceptance-permitted state, an acceptance-permitted sound suggesting that the operation acceptance is allowed or the operation acceptance is allowed can be output.
At least a part of the period during which the acceptable sound for reception is output overlaps with the acceptable state for reception. A game machine characterized in that the output state is ended based on.

In the above configuration, the cocoon image showing the operation receiving unit is displayed as an integrated cocoon image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the cocoon image, and the integrated cocoon image includes a plurality of special modes. Since it can be displayed in any one of the modes, it can be displayed as an image with high decorativeness and performance, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment when an operation opportunity is given. (See paragraphs 5202 and 5207 and FIGS. 410 (a) to (d)).
In addition, although the operation acceptance is permitted because the operation acceptance is permitted or the operation acceptance is permitted or the operation acceptance is permitted is output. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation that you forget to operate.
In addition, when the operation is accepted when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state, the output state is ended based on the acceptance of the operation, so that it is easily recognized that the operation acceptance is performed. Thus, it becomes possible to pay attention to what content appears as a post-operation effect in response to the operation reception (see paragraph 5228 and FIG. 428 (e)).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.34 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of a production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the rendering operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.51 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 56 taken along the line PP. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit from the front in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, as viewed from the front together with the front component, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from the rear. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control substrate and the peripheral control substrate. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payment control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. 90 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection fault judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection confirmation signal with respect to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for upper plate side liquid crystals. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 2nd starting port passage process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about jackpot determination processing (step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a common motorized prize control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a gate part passage process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a figure showing judgment table T1 of a production pattern (variation production) referred to by the above-mentioned production symbol fluctuation start processing when it is in a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area | region for AUTO group channel control provided in peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a search process of the free channel at the time of performing sound control at the time of defining only one AUTO group in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search process in the case of performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the conditions which select the channel which replaces sound output (stops sound reproduction) when the channel is not empty at the time of output of new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half fluctuation | variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound effect, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the fluctuation | variation second half of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (sound volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control process which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by sound effects which shows volume (sound volume) control for every total reproduction | regeneration time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is the first half of a flow chart showing the procedure of volume control processing that performs sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a second half of the flowchart showing the procedure of volume control processing of performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the conditions (cancellation conditions) by which alerting | reporting is complete | finished according to the kind of alerting | reporting sound illustrated in FIG. 155 besides alerting | reporting content, alerting | reporting aspect, alerting | reporting time. (A) shows an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced Is a figure. (B) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about a process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alarm | sound belonging to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled, when the notification sound which belongs to 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated It is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (C) is a figure showing an example of processing when output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (D) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure which illustrates separately about the information state of the said pachinko machine 1 about the contents of the information progress under production processing. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process concerning the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the content of restrictions defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when channel special release processing is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when operation sound output processing under control is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when processing related to channel assignment cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the assignment status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the jackpot determination, and the state on the movable decorative body side It is a time chart which shows. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected not within the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit judgment, It is a time chart which shows an example about the condition by the side of a decoration body. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at the specific timing in the period when pattern change is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. . In the time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at two different timings in the period in which symbol variation is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side is there. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of control in order to realize automatic plural operation operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example about the display content when operation is performed in multiple times. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of control in order to realize automatic plural operation operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of a presentation using the automatic several times operation function (automatic consecutive hit function). It is a time chart which shows the example of a presentation using the automatic several times operation function (automatic consecutive hit function). It is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a selection table of a production pattern in production mode which can perform a blowout production, (A) It shows an example of a selection table which chooses existence of a blowout preparation shift production according to classification of a fluctuation pattern. ) An example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword book effect. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword decoration body in case an aura member is provided in a sword part (blade part) itself, (A) A sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd Indicates the extracted state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation | movement of an aura member. It is a state transition figure explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body in case an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) a knapsack state, (B) the 1st gutter state, and (C) the 2nd gutter state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation | movement of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of a sword ornament, and the operation effective period concerning the operation means. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. FIG. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. FIG. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of the sword decorative body of modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of an effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the post-operation effect of the sword ornament (the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse)) during the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) common to all the effect patterns. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation transition used as the feature of a false revival sword LV1 presentation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production pattern which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo-series effect, showing a false sword LV1 weak effect pattern (false sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of the 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of the 1st suggestion pattern is performed. As in the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during the reach effect, in the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Even though the second suggestion pattern has been performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the step decoration is temporarily activated without the sword decoration becoming effective, and the operation button becomes effective once, and then the sword decoration becomes effective. It is a figure showing about the indication production before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows a 1st presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 1st presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure explaining the example about an effect when "the specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of a timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the contents of production for every production about a production when a plurality of types (prediction production A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a production of indication. It is a figure which shows those production examples about the production content when the precursor production which is not a specific operation relevant production is performed, and the production content when the precursor production as a specific operation related production is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the contents of an effect when specific operation related rendition is performed as a omen effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by which the button image BTG is displayed in the aspect (specific effect aspect) to which the princess character was added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation when displaying sword decoration image SYG in a special aspect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of presentation when the first precursor production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the presentation by which the expectation degree is shown by the automatic presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the presentation by which the expectation degree is shown by the automatic presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the presentation by which the expectation degree is shown by the automatic presentation function. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic presentation process in the case of an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic presentation process in the case of an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic presentation process in the case of an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. (A) is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when it is operated several times in the mode of single operation when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, and (b) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when it is operated by the aspect of a long press when not done. (A) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when the automatic effect function functions in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the example of presentation when operation is started by the mode. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, the symbol variation is started with “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears” can be set, It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation (cancellation operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state or the operation (setting operation) for setting is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of reservations is in the 3 effect states, the symbol in the second effect pattern (loss of variation) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears can not be set " The time chart which shows the example of a process when a fluctuation | variation is started and the operation (cancellation operation) for canceling | releases an automatic button effect state and the operation (setting operation) for a setting are performed within the execution period of this symbol fluctuation | variation is there. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period (specific effective period) in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” is set, and the symbol change execution period It is a time chart which shows the example of a process when operation for setting to an automatic button effect state is performed in the inside. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation when production is advanced by a 3rd production pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "specific processing in connection with presentation such as presentation setting". It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "specific processing in connection with presentation such as presentation setting". It is a time chart which shows an example about the production processing about a special production reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example concerning the effect development at the time of starting the production after operation, maintaining "the image which suggests the classification of operation object" as a display state. FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating an effect display example that appears in the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern in which an effect is developed in the aspect illustrated in FIG. 285 is executed. FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating an effect display example that appears in the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern in which an effect is developed in the aspect illustrated in FIG. 285 is executed. It is a figure which shows the example when displaying a haze image as a moving image by displaying a some haze image sequentially, when the specific reception effect generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which production | generation reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which production | generation reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which production | generation reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st receptionist production and the 2nd receptionist production from which the time from the period which the production | presentation acceptance is permitted generate | occur | produces until the production | presentation reception generate | occur | produces automatically differs. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st receptionist production and the 2nd receptionist production from which the time from the period which the production | presentation acceptance is permitted generate | occur | produces until the production | presentation reception generate | occur | produces automatically differs. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect suggested whether the reception effect in which an "automatic effect function" is validated generate | occur | produces with the aspect of a sign effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect suggested whether the reception effect in which an "automatic effect function" is validated generate | occur | produces with the aspect of a sign effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect suggested whether the reception effect in which an "automatic effect function" is validated generate | occur | produces with the aspect of a sign effect. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic presentation function" is activated only in reception presentation among pre-event production and reception presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic presentation function" is activated only in reception presentation among pre-event production and reception presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic presentation function" is activated only in reception presentation among pre-event production and reception presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating novel directivity using an automatic directing function. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of a channel. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of a channel. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of a channel. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decoration body when specific conditions are satisfied. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing a modification to the example shown in FIG. 304. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol fluctuation | variation starts comes in the condition where a specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special production pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode when new restoration operation time (symbol change start timing, end timing, etc.) comes during execution of restoration operation. It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode when new restoration operation time (symbol change start timing, end timing, etc.) comes during execution of restoration operation. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process until a sword ornament 5001 returns to an original position. It is a time chart which shows the example about the restriction | limiting with respect to the volume setting and brightness | luminance setting when generating a penalty with respect to operation with respect to the sword part 5010. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example about the light emission aspect of the lamp for production | presentation in the abnormality alerting | reporting period according to specific abnormality detection. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline | summary of the function for performing presentation control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the periphery control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a structure until it acquires data required for presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp | ramp and the sound in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of functions, such as a sound and a motor, in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the notice effect performed in a series of change display from the change start of the special symbol in this embodiment to a stop, and shows an example of the scheduler and scheduler data used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting / blink control of the lamp | ramp in step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls the lamp | ramp in the button cut-in notification of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow and the left star character in star character thing preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls a right star character in star character preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls the middle star role in the star role notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in the logo combination thing fall notice of this embodiment. It is drawing explaining the scheduler data executed at the time of power-on of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing a command and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the game machine of this embodiment, and the relationship of these structures. It is a figure explaining the process of performing scheduler data at the time of power activation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect in a series of fluctuation | variation display until it stops from the fluctuation | variation start of the special symbol in this embodiment, (A) performs the effect performed from a fluctuation | variation start to completion | finish, and the said effect | production. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining the position of the winning combination in the winning combination fall notice. It is a figure explaining the content of button 鉈 combination first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that performs motor control in the first half drop notice of the 鉈 combination that is the first half of the combination drop notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the late combination fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for performing the motor control in the late fall notice of the late combination that is the latter half of the advance notice of the fall of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the second half of the late combination fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for performing the motor control in the late fall notice of the late combination that is the latter half of the advance notice of the fall of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to change pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of presentation control of the first half fluctuation | variation (normal fluctuation | variation 12 second) of fluctuation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control starting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control update process of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs advance notice production in the change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, and (A) is the timing which performs advance notice production, and the execution time of the notice effect concerned, (B) is The scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute the notice effect is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data classified by variation pattern of this embodiment and the liquid crystal design block data classified by variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which produces the data file for drawing for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment by the step-up production unit (step-up 1 production-4 productions) with the image composition / motion creation graphic tool. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the structure of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub effect block data. Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for scheduler functions for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for scheduler functions for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of effect SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production SW starting command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the step in which a step-up notice effect is performed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device in each step. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment, (A) is liquid-crystal rendering scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, (B) is step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect A drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining master SW defined on liquid crystal effect scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and effect SW corresponding to replacement data replaced with the master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production | presentation switch of this embodiment, and the evaluation procedure which sets production | presentation SW to ON is shown especially. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the production SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detail of the structure of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines an effect SW information table, (B) is a bit assignment of effect SW control information, (C). Is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production SW number corresponding to the production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the presentation SW flag of this embodiment, and a presentation SW information table, (A) shows a presentation SW flag, (B) shows a presentation SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines presentation SW replacement table information and presentation SW replacement table included in the presentation SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is presentation SW replacement table information, (B) is presentation SW Indicates a replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list | wrist which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of a layer information table (for background) Indicates It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice) Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid-crystal layer table and liquid-crystal production common block in this embodiment, (A) is a liquid-crystal layer table of step-up notice production, (B) shows the structure of a liquid-crystal production common block. . It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal presentation block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the button mini character effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block data for performing the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be judged within the callback function at the time of callback execution by effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of an individual layer at the time of notice effect execution of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all the layers. It is a figure explaining an example of a common block which spans a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) is the display timing of a symbol display and a notice effect, (B) is a configuration of a liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block, (C) Indicates a configuration of a liquid crystal notice effect block by common blocks extending over a plurality of periods. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image in a frame buffer by writing the image written in each layer, respectively. It is a figure explaining the procedure which writes in a frame buffer after converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which memorize | stores the display list command group in this embodiment temporarily in peripheral control RAM, and transfers to sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure which transfers the display list command group in this embodiment to VDP with built-in sound source, without memorize | storing in peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when changing a state between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows a display example when the expectation effect that a princess character is largely displayed as a background image is performed during execution of a specific effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a help image is displayed in the state in which the expectation production | presentation shown in FIG. 378 is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when character image PG is displayed so that a display position may be changed by operation by a player. It is a time chart for demonstrating the example about the process when generating a production | presentation limitation period in a non-game state. It is a time chart for demonstrating the example about the process when a production | presentation limitation period is terminated at an early stage. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process concerning a special period (opening exclusive period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the process when a game is started when it is set to the opening special period (special period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1st operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2nd operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the example about special operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data containing a reception allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data containing a reception allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of an effect when low expectation control reception effects are performed by an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of an effect when high expectation control reception effects are performed by an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of an effect when high expectation control reception effects are performed by an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the modification when high expectation suppression receptionist effect is performed by the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example of presentation in which the 1st permission sound is outputted in a specific mode, at the time of generation | occurrence | production of "non-suppression operation reception production (here non-control / non-automatic reception presentation production)." It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in a case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the effect according to the high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in a case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the effect according to the high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in a case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the effect according to the high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect (suppressing movement reception effect under suppression) which appears in "when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as operation object" in suppression / automatic reception effect. It is a time chart which shows the contents of an effect which appear when fluctuation pattern 1 is chosen by fluctuation pattern judgment. It is a time chart which shows the contents of an effect which appear when fluctuation pattern 2 is chosen by fluctuation pattern judgment. It is a time chart which shows the contents of an effect which appear when fluctuation pattern 3 is chosen by fluctuation pattern judgment. "Inherent reception effect" is a time chart showing the contents of the effect that appears when the effect sound of "BGM playback" is generated in the "non-suppression mode". It is a time chart which shows as an example the process procedure when realizing various display effects using scenario data and a block as an example. It is a flowchart which shows the example about the process when there is no operation detection before and behind an effect reception period (effective period). FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m + 1” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404; FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404; FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404; FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started from the “m-3” -th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404; Regarding the effect reception period (effective period) in the case where the timing at which the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state is performed in the frame is performed after the determination process for receiving the effect It is a flowchart which shows an example. It is a figure which shows the example about an integrated haze image. It is a figure which shows the example of a display about the integrated bird's-eye view image from the start of an effective period until it is complete | finished. It is a figure which shows the example of a display about the integrated bird's-eye view image from the start of an effective period until it is complete | finished. It is a figure which shows the example about the presentation progress when a 1st effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about the presentation progress when a 1st effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about the presentation progress when a 1st effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about the presentation progress when a 1st effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example about the presentation progress when a 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about the presentation progress when a 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about the presentation progress when a 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about the presentation progress when a 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about the presentation progress when a 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure explaining the modification about the production which suggests the degree of expectation concerning an integrated bird's-eye view in steps. It is a figure which shows the example about an integrated haze image. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation progress in the effective period when an integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation progress in the effective period when an integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation progress in the effective period when an integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 2nd acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 1st acceptance permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the presentation content when a 2nd acceptance | permission acceptance | permission state generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example about the presentation content when a 1st acceptance | permission acceptance | permission state generate | occur | produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 4th acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 5th acceptance acceptance state occurs.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a quadrangle in which the external shape of the front view extends vertically and which has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which penetrates back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the front lower right corner below the side 111 and operable by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is attached to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game unit being attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and the dish unit 320 which are attached to the lower front on the lower side and the dish unit 320 It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the presentation operation unit 400 capable of presenting participatory effects. A door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530 And a door frame top unit 570 attached to a front upper portion above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 in a front view. 4, A lock unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped character attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player -Like payout unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 openably and closably And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full-ball path unit 850 which causes the game balls to be released from either the normal outlet 850d or the full tank outlet 850e according to the storage state of the gaming balls in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320 and the payout unit A normal guiding path 861 and a full guiding path 861 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the gaming ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 in a front view left side of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and the lower portion for bass inside A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls are housed in the inside A payout control board box 950 There.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launcher 680. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. Then, when the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a are received by the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a disassembled (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from the rear side position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface. A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. Yes. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 of a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. The

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. Fig.17 (a) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally offset and opposed It is in a state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. Yes. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  Note that even if the shape of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the forward extension portion 62. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, and therefore the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upright wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the gaming ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Because the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross section taken along the line C-C in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the dish unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left of the 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view are hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; A door frame 3 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and a main body frame 4 and an outer frame 2 An open / close cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending gaming balls to the ball launcher 680, and a ball attached to the lower surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with an extra strength.

  The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for extracting the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a cash obtained by subtracting a game ball loaned from a ball lending machine or a return button 329 for returning a prepaid card, a cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player It is something that can be done. Although this effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, a door frame side effect capable of displaying the effect image, which is disposed so as to be visible from the player side in the operation button 410 and the large operation button 410 operable by the player Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes to the front more largely than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both right and left sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the left and right sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the front center, and the top middle decoration member 576 A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 300 is attached to the front lower corner, and the plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 which has a rectangular shape whose front view outline extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 are projected forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640, and a front face of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the penetration opening 111 formed in the substantially rectangular shape which the inner peripheral shape in the plain view extended up and down. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front view, and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 112, and the through hole 111. The cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is attached is recessed toward the front from the rear surface in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting portion 113 penetrates back and forth The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114, the cylinder insertion hole 114, and the handle mounting surface 112 in a front view on the left side, and penetrates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 forward. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, The lower plate passage port 116 and the front side of the door frame base 110 are penetrated forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the vicinity of the left end, and the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270 is faced forward A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and recessed from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and both left and right sides of the door frame base 110 And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110, thereby enhancing the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a laterally extending middle reinforcement attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side in a front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in the front surface on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending a metal sheet. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 which are bent in the front-rear direction, This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrates the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame And a lock spring 144 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of projecting pieces 141a although not shown, and the shape of the side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper projecting piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. The upper end is in contact with the wedge member 143, and the lower end is in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By coming into contact with the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 to open the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved entirely downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it down. Can do. Thereby, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is obtained. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 described later. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1 e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side in a front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161 a and 162 a capable of emitting light forward on the front surface. The LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161 a and 162 a provided on the front surface By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit attachment member 170 has a disk-like base 171 rotatably mounted about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a bar-like projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  By setting the glass unit attachment member 170 to rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is more outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 is glass The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 projects from the disk-like base 171 rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located in the projection 172 . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. And, in the glass unit attachment member 170, since the projection 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171, the glass unit attachment Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the projection 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the projection 172 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 from the rear end of the cylindrical cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181. A plurality of annular flanges 182 extending, and a plurality of protruding into the cylindrical portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and disposed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, the three protruding ridges 183 are provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1 h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated to make the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 a mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110.

[3-1 i. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The crime prevention cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that project forward relative to the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer periphery of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear projection 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the gaming ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the gaming ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not abut the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and the inside of the gaming area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the crime prevention cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1 j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending in the front and rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and locking operation of a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a rectangular plate-like front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend in a flat plate shape rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right in front view is of the reinforcing unit 130 Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  In the open / close cylinder unit 210 assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are accommodated in a box-like cylinder mounting portion 113 which is inserted into the housing 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35 (a) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the rendering operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 34 (b). Fig.39 (a) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present a rendering image to the player It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 is formed on the front side of the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 and the outer periphery of the button lens 411, which are formed in a curved surface (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b provided.

  The first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state to the operation button 410 as shown, and a group of both right and left sides is a group of upper and lower sides Longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decorative portions 411 b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three by three on each of the left and right sides. The second button decorative portion 411 b is formed to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration parts 411 b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic gloss on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer periphery of the main body 413a, and a plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape along the outer periphery of the body and arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction; A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d projecting in the shape of a band plate to the rear and arranged in the circumferential direction and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outer side than the main body portion 413a and having a predetermined length along the outer periphery And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and cylindrically extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. The gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made less visible to the player by the portion 411a.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion visible in the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  Further, in a state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. Thus, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 42 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is a button The inside of the base 413 can be prevented from leaking inward, and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower area It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration substrate unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a plurality of (six) peripheral opening portions 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the frame, and notches 416c cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening portion 416a It is equipped with. The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be in contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylindrical portion 416d, when the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metal on the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 is formed to have a smooth surface without irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 is formed to be smooth on the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and is arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the light emitting decoration is possible by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them. .

[3-4 c. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Moreover, in the state assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is formed between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4 f. Operation effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A part of the operation button is cut away to hide it by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player is operated. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. Thus, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the dish unit 320 (rendering operation unit 400) Since the game board 5 is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his eyes from the game area 5a to the rendering operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 or the like in the operation button 410 can be viewed in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the outlined arrows in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper portion is dished so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player is relatively easy to press (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the player who presses the operation button 410 is operated. The strong vibration can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the bottom surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck down, the frame is held between the abutment of the lower surface of the leg portion 442a with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is presented when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400 is presented to the player. Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the in-operation button decorative member 432 are formed of transparent members, as shown in FIG. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the rendering operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration of the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to view the rear at a portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 There is a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button in-operation decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the depressible operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 is seen. While being able to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden and concealed It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the entire rendering operation unit 400.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative part 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative part 432g intersect each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, the unevenness of the first button decorative portion 411a occurs when the player's eyes move. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  Thus, the effect operation unit 400 allows the player to have a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. It can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. The light emission decoration can be performed well only in the operation button 410.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light by emitting light from the LED. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably decorated by light emission.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 47C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 at 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened, and has a plurality of openings 531 a penetrating in the front and rear directions on the front surface. The plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically as shown. The left unit base 531 includes the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face the front. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective upright wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that is erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the near side. ing. The left reflection upright wall portion 538 has a flat surface shape, and an inner side surface facing the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided by providing the inner side surface of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner side surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective upright wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion that bears a part (left side portion) of the reflective upright wall portion 33 described above.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a square lens 532a in a front view, which corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square in a front view, which corresponds to a square opening 531a. And a lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be emitted forward in a point-like manner by the circular lens portion 532a. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532 f inclined to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflection portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed into a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed rearwardly. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Substantially all can be directed to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In the square lens portion 532b, and travels from the center side to the outer side along the front surface. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflection portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b becomes thinner as it goes away from the center (See Figure 50). As a result, light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front surface diffusing lens portion 532 d is formed to have a wave-like cross section, it can diffuse light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532 f in various directions, and the prismatic lens portion 532 b Light can be emitted to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  In the front lens unit 532d and the front reflection unit 532f, the rectangular lens unit 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the front of the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 And a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends forward and backward. In the multifaceted decorative part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular solid extending in the vertical direction, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular solid. It is formed in the same shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-sided decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the multi-sided decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faced decorative portion is directed forward from the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. Each of the lights is decorated by light emitted.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and is formed in a square tube shape extending in the front and rear direction. In the left unit upper decorative base 534, a portion constituting the lower surface in the outer periphery is inclined so as to protrude downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape which is opened upward in a front view. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves upward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534; A V-shaped portion whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 and a lower end of the upper V-shaped portion and an upper end of the lower V-shaped portion are connected And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line N-N in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line O-O in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat light unit right diffusion lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions and a right unit side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are decorated and decorated A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557; Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a right unit right light shielding member 560 in the form of a flat plate.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 mounted on the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay substrate 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a rectangular shape which is elongated in the vertical direction in a front view, extends in a short and short rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape closed near the center in the longitudinal direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting upright wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. The right side reflective upright wall portion 568 has a flat surface shape, and an inner side surface provided to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner side surface of the left reflection upright wall portion 538, in addition to providing the inner side surface of the right reflection upright wall portion 568 itself from a material for reflection such as metal or resin, the reflection surface reflects the inner side surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for the like. And although mentioned later, this right side reflective standing wall part 568 is formed of the right unit base 551, and serves as a part which bears a part (right side part) of the reflective standing wall part 33 mentioned above.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending band plate. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for emitting and decorating the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552 b is for emitting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552 c is for emitting and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Both front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided up and down into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a as a whole moves to the right from the rear end side toward the front, so that the main body 553a is moved to the right in the front view with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emit the right unit decoration lens member 561 Can be decorated.

  The bottom of the accommodation recess 553 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. The input lens portions 553 e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side surface reflection portions 553 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion It extends perpendicularly to the plane of the surface 553a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, with the mountain portion between the grooves facing the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and in the main portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves toward the right in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main portion 553a strikes the flat left surface in the main portion 553a. However, direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main portion 553a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided into a plurality of radially extending grooves, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated to the outside (left) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. Thus, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553 d on the left surface of the main body portion 553 a can emit and decorate substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side in the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decoration member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a rear wall short in a plan view left from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. A portion 556b and a plurality of notches 556c which are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction A front view of the main body portion 556a, an accommodation concave portion 556d recessed so as to be able to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a A plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are disposed in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view, with the upper corner of the front end side of the rectangular shape extending up and down being beveled in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side going upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the whole of the main body portion 556a moves with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the left in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 556 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening which is penetrated back and forth by the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The bottom surface of the accommodation recess 556 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decoration member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556 e project rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 556 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. These input lens portions 556 e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552 b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main portion 556a in each groove, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 556e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e such that a mountain portion between the groove and the groove is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e is formed in the main portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by the radially extending plural lines, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form concentric circular arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. Can be emitted to the right with more uniform light. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body portion 556a (the side on which the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decoration member 557 Parts can be decorated by the side reflectors 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations provided to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front and right sides are open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. And a plurality of flat plate-like reinforcements 559 d extending from the wall 559 b to the front end of the main body 559 a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending rectangular is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upwardly directed toward the front It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and its outer shape is formed in substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The left end of the rear wall 559 b extends to the right more than the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 559 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c and 556 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. It can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a pair of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending square is notched like a C-chamfer and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. 55, and the main unit 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 The left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed in proximity to each other. Thus, the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . The light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration The light is irradiated to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-light transmitting members, and are emitted forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 respectively. Left light 552a, right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561, respectively. The light can be decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

  Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559 d. The light can be prevented from interfering between the spaces by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 which is located, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide into plural (four) areas in the vertical direction and emit and decorate each of them independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561 b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 largely protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, an island facility The pachinko machine 1 can be made visible in the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are lighted and decorated, the present from a distance even if not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1 The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens By making the members 561 and the like emit light and decorate in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the staff in the game hall of the occurrence of the problem and make it possible to quickly respond to the problem. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a view of the door frame top unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 271 that has 574b and is attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and closes the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) respectively have internal spaces opened only toward the side on which the opening window is provided. In the inner space of the opening window so as to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window (the left outer periphery outer emitting unit 34a, the right outer periphery outer emitting unit 34b) and the inner periphery of the opening window The outer-periphery light detector 35 (the left-hand outer light detector 35a and the right-hand outer light detector 35b) that detects the light outside the outer periphery is provided.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front face of the unit main body 271, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 being closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both right and left side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and the LED is mounted on the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 at the portions facing the lateral outer end. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction A door with a pair of substrate bases 585 attached to each of the parts and a front face of the pair of substrate bases 585 with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271 Frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587, and door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 attached to the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit body 271 and the door frame top unit relay substrate 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271 And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572 respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, such that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the square extending in the left and right direction bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending left and right by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right and a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid which protruded forward, and the quadrangle which protruded short for the front by making the front end side of the trapezoid into a long side. Accordingly, the unit main body 271 is a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the front-projecting portion. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit body 271 is a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a diagonally extending portion of the front side projecting in a trapezoidal shape in the front. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  Further, the unit body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is notched in a square from the rear end to the front in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end in the horizontal direction on the lower surface. And. The upper opening 574 c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574 d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit body 271 further includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decoration 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in the shape which combined the substantially right-angled triangle which connected the front-end | tip of the edge and the lower end of the right and left of a side pentagon. The top middle decoration member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making the LEDs emit light, it is possible to make the top middle decoration member 576 emit light and decorate.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion projecting forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevennesses formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the light guide member 578 assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction face the LED frame 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the LEDs 586a and 587a of the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thus, the portion located in front of the circular arc portion 578 b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 and the door frame top middle decoration substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to emit and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center of the front of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a each accommodating three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574 f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a in the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583. It can be decorated to emit light.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the right front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. It can be decorated to emit light.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 in which the plurality of slits 574 b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and back and forth, a rear wall of a front view rectangular shape extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall The upper wall of a substantially right triangle with the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse and the lower side of the side wall with the lower wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open part is closed by the unit body 271. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it goes to the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 with respect to the laterally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front side of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center. Approximately parallel to the

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached on the rear side on the right of the left and right center in the unit body 271 It is done. The right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 in the door frame top, so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the horizontally extending surface Inclined state. Thus, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b right of the center of the unit body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 on the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle middle decoration member 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially in left-right symmetry with each other by an opaque member. A light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of a plurality of LEDs 586 a and 587 a of a left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top and a plurality of right decorative substrates 587 in the door frame top arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574 b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guiding member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guiding member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration Luminescent decoration can be performed in a state where the respective decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is attached to the front of the center base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, a door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a door frame top right decoration substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and a door The connection between the frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is covered by a relay substrate cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 turn to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes largely forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed to extend from the both sides to the top left decoration portion 574e and the top right decoration portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 271. Thereby, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be made to be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is a door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580 The light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580, and the top left decoration lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is made smaller. Thereby, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible visible to the player (forward) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through hole 111 (second effect operation unit 400A) And the front half of the lower half (the lower part of the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the front of the lower front decoration part 326c) is recessed to turn backward (dish unit The front surface of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned backward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and ing. As a result, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the front in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to be largely protruded forward, so that the rendering operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized for the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so that when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. It is possible to touch any part of the operation button 410, and "early pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The presentation using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) across the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the front center of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 below is not noticeable, it can be made easy to make the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine clearly recognize that it is clearly different, and the player's attention is strongly attracted A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 forms the lower plate 322 so as to wrap around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening portion 326 d opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 in the front surface of the plate unit 320 Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower plate opening portion 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear of the lower plate 322 turns to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts the left hand in the lower plate 322 or places the left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can also be recognized that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than the height by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the gaming balls of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray 322 from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 into the lower portion of the tray unit 320 or the like. The countersink holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front and rear direction, and are arranged on the right outside (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) of the lower plate opening 326d in front view. That is, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball extraction hole 322a, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326, the front end of the lower plate cover 340 Since the player is disposed behind the side, etc., the player can not see the lower ball supply port 323c and the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, since the lower countersink hole 322a is disposed below (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322, the lower frame ball opening 322a is opened. Then, the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a can not be seen from the player side, the flow of gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box is also I can not see it. In this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the payout device 830 in a state that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the upper plate 321 are full for the player are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the troublesomeness of passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower flat ball opening hole 322a at the front left position of the lower flat ball supply opening 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands upright on the right side of the lower flat ball opening 322a. Since the upper wall portion is bent obliquely so as to face the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is directly moved to the lower ball ball. The light can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be reflected to the right side wall and indirectly guided to the lower circular ball hole 322a. Thus, in the state where the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is a region on the lower plate 322 on the left side of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a. (The lower plate first area A1) can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 without showing the gaming balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes the lower plate opening portion 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward, between the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player places his hand on the lower plate 322 or approaches it, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. The player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrudes forward largely from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an operation effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing a game with this pachinko machine 1 can play a game in a private room It is possible to give an illusion of a feeling of being present, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation to other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can emit light and decorate the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 lined up Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can be informed of the presence of the pachinko machine even from a distance from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal for the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  In the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 A shape recessed so as to be turned backwards (A top middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 The front surfaces of the left and right sides of the 576 are formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be positioned rearward. As a result, only the decorative member 576 at the top of the door frame top unit 570 appears to be projected forward largely, so that the decorative member 576 can be made to be highlighted and highlighted to the player, The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the left and right ends. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right direction ends are provided with the speaker 573, The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper portion of the door frame 3, and a decoration distinctly different from conventional pachinko machines is provided It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. Because each of the left and right direction is largely projected forward, it is possible to show the player a decoration having a sense of unity in the upper and lower sides where the virtual line passing through the left and right direction center is noticeable, and by the refined decoration. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front face of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 A large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the left side of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center product 2500 attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located outside the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005, In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1008 has a rear projection 202 protruding to the rear of the crime prevention cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  The front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rails 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 to position between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 of the unit 860 are adapted to face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, FIG. 64 and FIG. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Further, panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion It is equipped with. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are disposed outside the game area 5 a and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1115 having a front side depressed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are not cut to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a, similarly to the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114, This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1121 in the front-rear direction And a through-hole 1122 that penetrates through.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120 It is almost flush with the front surface. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1121 is formed in a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A plurality of projecting pins 1123 which are extended and which can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 which engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed on the upper side of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends from the front of the holding step 1121 to the front. It projects toward the end and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so as not to protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws 1124 and the engagement piece 1125.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and between the front component member 1000, the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above-described game panel 1100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, as viewed from the front together with the front component, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from the rear. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

  The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 includes an out-port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side when viewed from the lower end and is opened downward. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front and rear directions in which the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the game panel can be connected to the front component member 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Furthermore, although the illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings which are penetrated back and forth for attaching the front unit 2000 like the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the above-mentioned game panel 1100. ing.

  When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in the assembled state to the game board 5. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface The discharged discharge part 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520 and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as members having transparency so as to allow visual confirmation from the outside. There is. That is, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a surface that is inferior in fraud suppression performance particularly in the payout control substrate 951 in the payout control substrate box 950 and the main control substrate 1310 in the main control substrate box 1320. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various functions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the gaming status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by passing the gaming ball against the gate unit 2003. , A normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003 The first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and the first special reservation composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the acceptance of the game balls to the first starting port 2002 Number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs that display the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, the first special lottery result or the second The special lottery result mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 when the result is "big hit" or the like.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling an effect to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially at the center. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, after inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached from the front to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front face of the panel board 1110 and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that enables the reception of game balls in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning ports 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed substantially immediately below the stop unit 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first start opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the left side of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view A top 2300 and a frame-shaped center product 2500 attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 are provided.

  In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time, and the big winning port 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, four to six) can be extended to the left and right in an acceptable size, and can be opened and closed according to the game state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in a circular arc along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

  The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the lower side unit 2200 in the gaming area 5a. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, and the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a). To the center in the left-right direction).

  The center role 2500 is located slightly above the center of the front view slightly above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5 a, and is located on the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is attached. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes from the front the effect units and the like provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to. The center product 2500 has a gate unit 2003 and a second start port 2004.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It can not be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. It has a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left and right direction and then discharges it into the gaming area 5a. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately below the stage 2530. When the gaming ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In addition, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is open at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending leftward and rightward along the axis and housing the effect drive board.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view left side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b in the rear view.

  The opening 3010 a is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back unit 3000 is appropriately used using a rear-behind movable effect unit 3100, a rear-upper left movable effect unit 3200, a rear-left movable effect unit 3300, a rear-upper movable effect unit 3400, a lower-bottom front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[6. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, so that the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  The gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when entering the left side in a front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, The region to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth and are discharged forward. When the gaming ball is released into the gaming area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since it is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from outside the center into the gaming area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn to the center side in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 and the first There is a possibility that it can be accepted by the starting opening 2002 and the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right strike), Downstream from that, the region where the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided will flow down.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it is in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result can not be started, so the normal lottery The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous regular lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", " A drawing of a special drawing result is generated which generates a middle hit, a small hit, a probability change, a time reduction, and the like. Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, “lost”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “5 There are 15R big hit, "per probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction) per hit", "probability change time per shot", "probability change time for short loss", etc.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of gaming balls are taken from the payout device 830 by the main control substrate 1310 and the payout substrate. Is dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball, many game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 becomes open state which can receive the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) The opening and closing pattern to be closed is repeated several times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of accepting gaming balls, or to the big winning opening 2005. When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that closes a game ball in an unacceptable state is predetermined. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being put on hold. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbol rows in the symbol row are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols of the three symbol rows displayed in a stopped state become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the lottery special lottery result occurs.

  The time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol string varies). The time until the fixed image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by gaming board side effect display device 1600, effect operation unit 400 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decoration bodies of center character 2500, various decoration bodies of back unit 3000, back bottom back movable effect unit 3100, back top left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400, the back-down front movable effect unit 3500, etc. The player can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment covers the window portion of the present embodiment, and the bulging part of the present invention corresponds to the operation button 400 in the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

  Further, the decorative member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention. The second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention. .

  Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 in this embodiment. LED 477a of 477 is a light emitter of the present invention, door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is a back side decoration means of the present invention, frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, unit base 431 of base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Such as the decoration in which the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc. overlapped, the decoration in which the first button decorative part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of perspective that is full of perspective, so that it can attract the player's attention strongly. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  In addition, the decoration member 432 in the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) move closer to or further from each other. The first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub The first button decorative part 411a and the second in-button decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478) according to a change in the distance to the clean decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) , Etc.) can be changed, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration) can be changed. The decoration (cross mode) by the member 478, etc. can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly on the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button internal decorative member 432 when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will vary greatly, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even if the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be satisfactorily viewed through and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a can be seen through. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the operation button, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame are passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed toward the side effect display device 460.

  In addition, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 includes the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 intersect each other, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g stand out can be surely exhibited. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g By decorating, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Further, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are mounted on each LED (or sub screen decoration substrate 477). When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the light can be decorated by the light in the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the sub screen decoration member 476), and furthermore, the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light decoration. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button internal decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner area by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button inner decoration portion 432g, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button While the inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration section 411a has the second button inner decoration. The light is adorned by indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub screen decoration member 476). Since the first button decoration 411a is weakly decorated while the second button inner decoration 432g (the sub screen decoration member 476) is strongly lighted and decorated, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, With each LED (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 lit, the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a Looking at the two-button inner decoration 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), it is possible to show the player a decoration with a more emphasized sense of appearance, and it is an appealing ability that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

  Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame). The side second effect display device 460A) can be widened to the outside and made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device can be enlarged). 460A) can stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, the frame unit 415 is disposed outside the button lens 411, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 is arranged. The decorativeness can be enhanced, the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is made flat. Compared with the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to break). Therefore, the button lens 411 is broken during the game, so that the game is interrupted, and it can be avoided that the player feels frustrated and lowers the interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By becoming difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the present pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized through the through-hole 111 from the front, On the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side, the outer diameter is 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advancing and retreating) by a player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ˜30 cm, and an operation button interior that can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the operation button 410 are disposed in the frame The frame-shaped frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 having the operation button 410 as large as possible at the position where the storage ball of the game ball is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine (the second Since the production operation unit 400A) is visible, the player can recognize that the player is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 includes a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are provided on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417. Inside the frame body 416 that partitions the decoration portion 411b Since the cylinder portion 416d, and the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 that divides the second button decorative portion 411b from the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion Light from the first LED 422a, 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 or the button lens 411 due to the 413a and the inner extension portion 413f, and light from the second LED 422b, 423b makes the second button decorative portion 411b. It can be prevented from being illuminated, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be made to emit light and be decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be light-emittingly decorated, respectively, and a light-emitting effect with a good appearance can be performed. In addition, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed by appropriately combining light off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like with the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, the first LED 422a and 423a emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b and 423b emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are one operation button left outer decoration Since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided on the substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (the operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far as possible from the second button decoration part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is sufficiently It can be irradiated to the second button decoration part 411b in a diffused state . Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly emitted and decorated, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the interest of the player is strongly drawn. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not disconnected. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be operated. The player can entertain the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 are provided. When the (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edge of the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached to the second button decoration part 411b. Can be decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. And by making 1st LED422a, 423a and 2nd LED422b, 423b emit light suitably, the transparent member in which the in-operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind Since the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 decorating the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be illuminated with various patterns as described above, the player's interest is controlled by the operation buttons 410 and The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A). The effect image etc. by the effect display device 460A) can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) having the second button decoration portion 411b at the outer edge, the player can operate the operation button 410 while the player participation type effect is being executed. By causing the player to operate, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Then, at the time of execution of the player participation type effect, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 may be lighted and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 and to entertain the player by participating in the player participation type effect.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with a light-transmitting main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411f of the operation button 410 is provided. A portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged at the rear side by becoming brighter. It can prevent that the decorative member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) are hard to see from the front. Accordingly, the second button decoration portion 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect are provided) through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect and the like sufficiently to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416 d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second side of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is decorated on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can completely separate the portion 411b from the portion 411b. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 in the inner cylindrical portion 416d, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a or the second LED 422b, 423b Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LED 422 a, 423 a illuminates the frame side lens 417, or the light from the second LED 422 b 423 illuminates the second button decoration 411 b Never do. Therefore, light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), on the rear side of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not go behind the rear end of the main body portion 413a, it completely blocks the entry of light to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can do. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a can be used to decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a favorable state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be viewed in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like sufficiently to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration in front of the region outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411) Since the part 411b is positioned, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is arranged from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 in the operation button (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The second button decoration part 411b can make the member on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (the back side) less visible and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. At this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect is produced with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A are relatively darkened, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made less visible. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation member in the operation button 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, light emission effects such as light rounds the outer edge of the operation button 410, and light emission such that light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 Since it is possible to show the player an effect or light emission effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored by various light emission effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is obtained by placing the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321, and a predetermined installation space is provided behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and a portion corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 in the lower plate body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j from the portion. A portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower tray 322 capable of storing gaming balls. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the lower plate 322 looks small, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively easy to stand out. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can attract the player's interest strongly. it can.

  Further, at the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. The lower bowl cover 340, 340A for restricting the movement of the gaming ball prevents the gaming ball in the lower tray 322 from coming in contact with the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the gaming ball does not abut on the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the gaming ball does not damage the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  In addition, lower dish cover 340, 340A which restricts the movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of main body standing wall portion 325b and mounting space 326j in the lower dish second region A2 portion of lower dish main body 325 of lower dish 322. And the game ball can be prevented from invading (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or feeling unpleasant by intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j by the game ball being inserted into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 splashes in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion of the lower plate main body 325). 326d), when the hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips or the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Can prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), etc., and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can do.

  Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. by the contact of the game ball to the lower plate cover 340, 340A Is not transmitted from the lower cover 340, 340A to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is assured. It can be prevented.

  Further, since the lower disc ball opening hole 322a is provided in front of the lower ball ball supply port 323c at the lower dish second region A2 in the lower dish main body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is opened. In this state, the gaming ball discharged from the lower ball feeding hole 323c can be made to enter the lower ball dropping hole 322a as it is and discharged downward (dollar box), and the gaming ball can be discharged to the main body of the lower plate main body 325 It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower ball ball release hole 322a, as described above, the lower ball cover 340, 340A is provided, so that the game ball is of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, damage to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be prevented, and interruption of the game is reduced to reduce the interest of the player in the game Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. The bottom surface is to be climbed, and the movement speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the gaming ball in contact with the lower plate cover 340, 340A can be reduced, movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j is surely restricted by the lower plate cover 340, 340A. In addition to the above, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls abut on the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b and to suppress them from being broken.

  Further, since at least the lower plate cover 340, 340A is a separate member, when the lower plate cover 340, 340A is damaged, it can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate cover 340, 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the gaming hall side where 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction on the front is swelled forward most below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game ball is received in the general prize opening 2001 or the like. The tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 that has been taken out is provided with the stage operation unit 400 and the second stage operation unit 400 </ b> A detachably attached to the most bulging portion of the tray unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with a storage bowl capable of storing game balls, and is viewed outward of the rendering operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view A space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) in the lower tray first region A1 located and the front view Because the lower tray second region A2 is positioned at the front panel, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more visible when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper tray 321) And the lower plate 322) can be made small to make it less noticeable. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that is conspicuous can be seen in the portion where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal that can make it possible to recognize at a glance that it is, and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is The first lower pan body 325 having a lower pan second region A2 located in the rear space of the attachment space 326j that is behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in front view is smaller. Since the expansion unit 325B, the second expansion unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range (the lower plate second region A2) that cannot be seen from the front in the lower plate 322. it can. Therefore, the storage amount of the game balls can be secured sufficiently against the appearance from the front, so the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to make the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the lower plate body 325 and the main body 325A having the lower plate first area A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second area A2, the first extension part 325B and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. The lower plate cover 340, 340A or the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C have a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the tray unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (changing) the lower cover 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to cope with the size of the rear portion of the mounting space 326j. Since the width of the rear space depends on the rearward projecting amount of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), various rendering operation units 400 (second It can be set as the lower plate 322 which can respond to production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward, Can be stored reliably. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A has the cover upright wall 340a rising from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, 340A of various shapes is prepared in advance. In addition, it is made to correspond to various forms by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above.

  Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Thus, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the gaming balls are placed is the lower plate main body 325, the portion of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A The boundary (joint, dividing line PL) is never located. Therefore, since the weight of the stored gaming balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, the force is such that the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are pulled away from the lower tray main body 325 even if many gaming balls are stored. It does not act and can prevent the lower cover 340, 340A from being removed from the lower main body 325.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed to receive a game ball at the general winning opening 2001 etc. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball opening hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) provided with the lower plate 322 and the lower plate 322 and arranged at the center in the left-right direction. And the lower plate 322 is difficult to see from the front (player) (it is difficult to see), so the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, and the player's interest Can be made a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball going from the lower ball supply opening 323c to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game in the lower plate 322 This makes it difficult to notice the flow of the sphere and can prevent distraction, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball release hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open. The game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and discharged smoothly (immediately) downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. An illusion can be made that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front, it is probable. The lower counter ball supply port 323c, the lower counter ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is circulated to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate with respect to the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 as compared to the appearance.

  Further, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are transferred to the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the part between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, and discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower dish 322. The game balls can be prevented from circulating around the lower plate 322, and the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 can be reliably made difficult to visually identify from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, when the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, the ball guide portion 322c etc. immediately sends the game ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 without causing the player to notice it. Since it is possible to discharge the lower balls from the lower ball ball removal holes 322a downward, it is possible for the player to illusion that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plates 322. Can. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front half or more of the storage area (storage area) of the gaming ball in plan view of the lower tray 322. The actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size of the visible one with respect to the size of 322. Therefore, as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward under the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received such that the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. A production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 And a dish front lower decoration portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. Because it has a shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large-sized production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, At first glance, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal. Then, the lower dish 322 is recessed backward from the dish front lower decoration part 326c that is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. A portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is circulated to the rear, and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, the player can be dedicated to the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is placed on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall 322 (the front of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. This allows the player to recognize that a sufficient amount of game balls has been secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the finger of the hand put in the lower plate 322 is hard to touch the back wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., it gives the player the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine can be prevented from giving a sense of incongruity, and the player can be relieved and a decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even when the front side is small. In other words, since the part of the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, the player covers the lower plate 322 because the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper part of the part of the lower plate 322 which is located behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). When putting a hand, it is possible to prevent a finger tip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) etc. It can be played in a safe state. In addition, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from intruding (spinning) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and can attract the player's interests, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the decoration by the stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. Then, the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321, and a lower plate ball hole 322a that is vertically opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine is provided. Because the player has the same function as the lower plate in the game, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused with the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with the pachinko machine 1, and it will be the same as in the past. It is possible to play the game with a feeling like this, and allow the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower dish ball hole 322a is not visible from the player side, can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 clear, and can attract the player's attention strongly. Machine 1 can be used.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 bulging forward under the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. The door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the player. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached and the outer operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded so as to surround the outer periphery. The diameter is about 15cm and the center is away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 on the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. Reduces the visibility of the outer edge and back side (rear side) and the like of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the like from the gap between the member 432 (screen unit 470) And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410 are separated from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is increased to increase the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit). 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, the first button decoration portion 411a and the like can be favorably concealed, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented while preventing the appearance from deteriorating. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player is strongly interested. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be attracted.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (body part 413a) cylindrically protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation member inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the button lens 411 is located near the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the forward / backward direction of the operation button 410 The light is likely to be refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to Accordingly, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape which bulges outward, the volume in the operation button 410 is increased, so the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame disposed in the operation button 410 It becomes possible to make the side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger and easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device in which the player can be enjoyed by the operation button 410 It is possible to facilitate the provision of the 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player.

  Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, designability (decorability) is given to the operation button 410. Therefore, the operation button 410 in the present pachinko machine 1 is made conspicuous to interest the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Further, in the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide that the back side of the operation button 410 or the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470) can be seen from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

  Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411, and in cooperation with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, Since the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body part 413a and the operation button internal decoration member 432 ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and accordingly, a space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because the outer periphery has no directivity compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the size of the operation button 410 is increased, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate without confirming the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make the player easily touch the operation button 410 to perform a pressing operation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, and to entertain the player and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the gaming state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is used. It is possible to entertain an effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by an effect image, a light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). A drop in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player participation type effect and have fun. In addition, by performing the production within the operation button 410, it can be thought that there is something good depending on the player, and the expectation for the game is raised and the decrease in the interest is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and has high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 are enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 in which the first button decoration portion 411a is not formed may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the button frame 412 is not attached. You may make it form the decoration part for concealing a rear side over the perimeter in the site | part corresponding to the button frame 412 in the lens 411. FIG.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (ie, the entire periphery of the outer periphery of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is surrounded from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411) Although the thing provided with the button base 413 (main-body part 413a) which protruded cylindrically to the 2 base unit 450 side was shown, it is not limited to this, but the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side second production At least one base unit 430 (second base unit 450) may be protruded so as to surround only part of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a seal, a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief, etc.) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. In addition, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as a texture, a slit, and a prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate 322 is shown as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. It is not limited to this, but a lower dish that is recessed backward from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or only recessed from the right outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps behind. It may be

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed backward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a polygonal column surface or a front surface recessed in a polyhedron shape.

  Moreover, although said example showed the example which attached the presentation operation unit 400 (2nd presentation operation unit 400A) in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, it does not limit to this, "an operation dial, a touch panel etc. "Having the operation device of", "having the rotating body having the decoration on the surface", "having the decoration having the decoration and the movable device for moving the decoration", "the game Characters, items, logos in accordance with the concept of the machine, and decorations with a three-dimensional appearance of the scene (diorama), etc. " A member such as a unit or a panel provided with a decoration or the like that is decorated by sticker or printing or the like may be attached. Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a) need not be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

  In the above embodiment, the pan unit cover 326 is formed with the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward to mount the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-like cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed in the rear of the pan unit cover. In addition, decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined bag-like shapes, etc. in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine may be applied to the front surface of such a dish unit cover by sealing, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. desirable.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (reserved area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although an example in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 may be difficult to visually recognize from the front. You may make it difficult to visually recognize the whole plate 322 from the front.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. The second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button decoration element 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410 and the second effect on the door frame side Although a rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member disposed in front and rear (or upper and lower) under predetermined conditions It is good also as a structure which has the variable light transmission means which a rear side becomes visible by satisfying. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a device such as a magic mirror that allows the rear side to be visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side", and "such as a liquid crystal film, transparent when the power is turned on / off. Or the like so that the rear side can be visually recognized. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By providing the variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in the normal state, only the front member or the front and rear members can be viewed. It is possible to show the player the decoration of the visible member. And in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen. The members and the back member, or the front and back members and the members on the back side of the back member can show the overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decoration effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, so that the player can be made hard to get tired, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of

  Specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member is made by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be made visible to the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear is passed through the front member. The members become visible, and it is possible to show the player the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

  Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. It is possible to show the player the decoration by the surface of the player. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the members, it is possible to show the player a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character).

  Furthermore, when both the front and rear members are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be viewed through the front member. The player can show the decoration with the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or the space between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as LED ) And the satisfying conditions of the respective variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Thus, by appropriately selecting the site to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the range that can be viewed can be changed in multiple steps, and a player can enjoy various decorations.

  In the above example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror in the state where the rear side is darkened. You can show the glittering decorations to the players.

  Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror. However, even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be obtained. In addition, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (having translucency), so that it can be provided between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or light-decorated) by the light from the light-emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player various effects such as light-emitting effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. 73 is a schematic view of various detection signals input to and output from the game apparatus connection terminal board for gaming balls etc. relaying the electrical connection with the display board, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control related to a game including payout of prize balls, in addition to generation processing of a control power source (for example, +5 V). And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect relating to a game that is progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The controller SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, as shown in FIG. 69, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the process at the time of power on at the time of power on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the time of power on. The main control MPU 1310a is a microprocessor that incorporates various control programs such as a main control program that controls the game operation and is executed after execution, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids , And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors a predetermined voltage blackout or an indication of a momentary power failure; Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310 an ′ ′) is incorporated. The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the process is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a judgment random number.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcing reset of the stored information, and the reset function main control output circuit 1310 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb has the information for outputting the various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  60, a first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and general The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball entering the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b. Has been entered. Further, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects an illegal act using a magnet attached thereto is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the port input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a driving signal from the output terminal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1403 A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. .

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the substrate 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. For the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 4005 also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifespan than the proximity switch are used for the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. Main control MPU 1310a, upon completion of normal reception of various commands from payout control board 951 as serial data, main control output with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) notifying that. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. There is no reset function, and various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310 cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, and the like connects the bus 1310ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310 aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec, the serial management unit 1310 a ec sets the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310 aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). The main control MPU 1310 can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and when this occurs, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

7-2. Disbursement control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout and an operation switch 954 having various functions. And an error LED indicator 860 b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310 a based on a detection signal outputted by being operated. Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in ..).

[7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls relating to payout, controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU952a, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 CR unit input for exchanging various signals between 952d and CR unit 6 It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control program serializes a variety of game information from the main control board 1310 and various commands for payout from the main control board 1310 as a main payout serial data reception signal through the payout control input circuit 952b under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the payout operation of the gaming ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and these error generation command and error cancellation navigation command are transmitted to the serial serial data of the payer. As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program also receives the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the detection signal (the door frame closing detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 according to the closing operation. While outputting, when the detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset information based on detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 952 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 952 cb not having a reset function and not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 952 ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a dispensing control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the later-described payout control system reset, the payout function-free payout control output circuit 952cb does not reset the information. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  Out-of-balls detection sensor 827 for detecting out-of-balls of gaming balls in the supply passage of ball induction unit 820 of payout unit 800, and payout detection sensor 842 for detecting gaming balls discharged from payout outlets 831b and 832b of payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data mode, or operates the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (detection Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952 ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952 ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminal of the serial output port, whereby the payout function-free payout control is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function is output. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is indicated by an error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, out of the ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. To notify that When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” When it is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (the electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is determined in advance). Informing that it has reached the number of balls).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc. to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls of the game ball, etc. and various information (game information, details of errors or errors relating to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 which advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 which controls the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are firstly the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board It is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal in a serial manner to the payout control board 951 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is a CR unit The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent game balls, and at the same time, the game ball displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the ball rental return display unit 330. The signal is output to the ball lending return display unit 330 by outputting the signal to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 952a. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function.

7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game device connection terminal board for game balls etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and in addition to the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , CR unit 6 and the game ball connection device board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball connection device board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the substrate of CR unit 6 and the game device connection terminal board 869, between the game device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control substrate 951, the game device connection terminal board 869 and main door relay The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. Further, an AC 24 V described later from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 is generated from the supplied AC 24 V to a predetermined voltage VL (in the embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown). The game balls are supplied to the payout control board 951 through the loan device connection terminal plate 869, while the game balls are supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 that is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329, which is a segment display unit, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display portion 363 of the rental ball unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicator is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting system that sequentially drives each one-digit segment indicator. The segment display of the digit is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the sphere rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the LED, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input via the board 880, according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted, and these three-digit segment displays. The contents of the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. When it is input, it is configured to output BRDY, which is a rental ball request signal, to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. And CR unit 6 is a single payout operation start request signal to pay out a predetermined number of balls to be rented (in this embodiment, it is 25 balls and corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has started or ended, to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. , A signal indicating that it is possible or impossible to output to the CR unit 6 or that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible, such as a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6 or the like. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like in the hall sets in advance in the CR unit 6 that the gaming ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, one payout operation Will be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, then 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply substrate 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a and the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility when the power switch 934 is operated. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing power whose power factor is improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. And a single button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped by the player's will and a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not the finger is touching. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and performs control to output to the firing solenoid 682 While the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320 by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315; Control is performed to send the game balls received by the ball transport member to the ball striking device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 in the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door While performing the drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs sound control of music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time, hour and minute A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying the second, and a lower speaker 92. And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in a sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data that prescribes Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the backup power is supplied by the large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By this, it is possible to hold the stored content for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 This detection signal is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, and this serialized rendering operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, peripheral control MPU 1511a has peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It comprises an / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511 ak.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak via internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 1511ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, and WDT 1511 af In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 1511 ah while peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa between the devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad and external bus 1511 h are provided to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. The peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511 ad and the peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad controls internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral bus 1511 ai, and external bus 1511 h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes a lamp drive board serial I / O port, a motor drive board serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). It will take When the peripheral CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count and therefore does not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, and the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a is rotated to change the resistance value, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob is The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is set, and music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the store clerks in the hall of occurrences of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and cheating against the pachinko machine 1 and contents concerning a game effect and the like are notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, from the mute to the maximum volume Can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects are defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and copied when the power is turned on in various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 1511b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lighted.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy areas 1511 cd, which exclusively store the copied various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc., stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b A variety of control data copy area 1511ce, which exclusively stores the copied data, and a backup non-management target, which exclusively stores, among the various types of information updated by execution of various control programs, ones that are not subject to backup And a work area 1511cf.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a gaming state (for example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means that it has a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, a reception command storage area 1511 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the received various commands are received. It is a storage area to be set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC information storage Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable object information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 is set. ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like is set. If the effect display drive substrate 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of Bank 0 (1 fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf of Bank 0 (1 ms) The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 1511 cag When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second region of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc that store specially copied production information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) Each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed to execute the peripheral control DMA controller 15 in the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 1511 cc, a total of 2 pairs, where Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) form one pair and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair, are managed as one page in total. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs as production backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means that it has a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4” (also used for the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later have the same meaning).

  Next, a first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and the backup second area 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc.

7-4-2. Liquid Crystal Display Controller]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. A sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a for performing control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various data such as music and sound effects Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data Audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits toward the decorative drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 with drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 Serial data output from door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of device 460 and transmitted toward effect display drive board 4450 housed in dish unit 320, and peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e Signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is inputted, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not inputted, the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512 f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Mode screen image data used for the break, break used to display the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The screen data at the top of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 After extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae Output to VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). Of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) the door frame side effect display device 460, synchronization between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is achieved.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay A terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a display on the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 mounted on the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the dish unit 320 It is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the periphery as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Whereas the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The wiring length from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to the channel CH1 and thus is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, in the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, “V-by-One (Sine Electronics Co., Ltd.) By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
The channel CH2 uses an interface according to the parallel method, while the serial interface according to the Signaling method is used. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (not shown). It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame effect display device 460.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. After (transmission), a V-blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the V blank signal being input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, when the sound command data described above is input from peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from main control board 1310, sound source built-in VDP 1512a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set, the music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value to adjust the volume, adjust the sound data of the notification sound and its volume to notify the store clerk etc. of the occurrence of the trouble of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is In practice, the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the adjusted substrate volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified effect sound is amplified and serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and for the notification sound, sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, Volume control set as a sub volume value to adjust the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track used It does not depend on the volume adjustment at all based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a, and synthesizes the maximum sound volume, and the sound volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 The amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when an effect sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, control for sending an alarm sound so as to notify a store clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 is simple. First, the sub-volume value of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track into which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually lower. The master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and this amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound having the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period elapses, sound generation forcibly set to mute is performed. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the schedule data for use is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to be rotated (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 is dialed). When the mode is shifted to the setting mode and is adjusted by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 It comes to flow.

  Thus, when the notification sound flows to notify the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 when the effect sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, Although the volume of the effect sound is muffled and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muffled effect sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound has a predetermined period When no sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it went.

7-4-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b draws game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. While upper character character data is stored in advance, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-4-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-4-2 d. Transmitter IC for door frame side effect]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, and therefore the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three synchronization signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization. Three synchronization signals, signals and clock signals, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only one differential pair cable These various signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the closing side which is the side, the effect display drive board 4450 etc. housed in the pan unit 320 provided on the door frame 3 It is necessary to pass through various wirings which electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Also, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to the game ball It is in an environment where it receives noise etc.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting the differential communication of V-by-One (registered trademark), the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1 pair cable is used as a wire for electrically connecting between the connection of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1 pair cable has two wires Is not a parallel line merely provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. The twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one pair cable electrically connecting between the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source in which the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source Even if a differential-type communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted to make it hard to be affected by noise, the configuration by such hardware alone is due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball When serial data in a parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering a power supply line supplied from a pachinko machine with pachinko machine 1 installed, effect display stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by Shiba ICSDIC0, it will be received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 with the serial data affected, and output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source Image data is received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, an image like a so-called sandstorm is displayed to indicate what image There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 with VDP 1512a with built-in sound source In addition to the configuration using such hardware, while adopting a differential system communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. in the transmitter IC 1512 d for effect, the system is less susceptible to noise. The transmitter and receiver are electrically connected to each other through a twisted pair cable capable of canceling (eliminating) the noise on the receiving side even if differential serial data is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame The noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3 and thus the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal display control unit 151 in door frame side effect display device 460. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that can not be recognized at all what the image is like sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 intervene between the connection of, and between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the operation of attaching the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wiring from various substrates provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3 'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the differential communication of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the structure that is not easily affected by noise, in addition to the configuration using such hardware, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has invaded the wiring, that noise is canceled (removed The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the boards of peripheral control board 1510 and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral frame of relay terminal board 868 and the board of peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and with peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and effect display driving The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 by being separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. A plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are straddled along the route from the transmitter to the receiver. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting the serial data according to the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected to become noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, each is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring that supplies power is red and the other multiple wirings are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitters, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when receiving a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the parallel signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the LOCKN signal input, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600 Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not have a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. It can be determined that no problem has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the 320, but a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a defect has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. "), The sound source built-in VDP1512a is controlled by the game board side In addition to being output to the display device 1600, a notification sound indicating that effect (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device”) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the year, month, day, and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a turns ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only. It is supposed to be.

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the LED type, input date information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability and high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information and date. Acquire the time information to specify minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range over which the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. And when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510 a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by turning the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is a portion of the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (with built-in sound source VDP 1512 a) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (E.g., to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, muffling The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the rendering operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400. Yes. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or a customer waiting state is entered and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and music or sound effects are felt, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player who was playing the game, and to hear the music and sound effects, this time, he sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and play the game by sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time If the player who is playing feels loud and the music and sound effects are felt loudly, the player who is sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game plays the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931 and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply substrate 931 includes a power control unit 935 and a emission control unit 953. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The part 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter, described as "+37 V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935 c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power supply, and the game area 5a shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the direction and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the constant current is output to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 to thereby control the ball of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball hitting device 650.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. +24 V (DC + 24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) is respectively created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system supplied with + 5V is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied with the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied with the + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The +5 V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is supplied to the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 through the payout control substrate 951. The +5 V production circuit 1310 g produces +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a from +12 V from the payout control board 951. The +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control filter circuit 1310 h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control substrate 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951, and then returns again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power control terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951. And the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control substrate 1310. That is, +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a and causes the diode MD0 to forward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with +5 V by the electrical connection method in which +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Can be done. As a result, +12 V created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g can create +5 V When the main control substrate 1310 is depleted, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 as the main VBB, so the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying the backup power to the main control built-in RAM is configured by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935 d of the power source substrate 931 are supplied to the payout control substrate 951 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Also, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, peripheral It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 are, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the drive source drive circuit of the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive substrate 4170 and the motor drive substrate 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

  Peripheral control board 1510 is provided with +3.3 V creation circuit 1510 b for creating +5 V to 3.3 V DC (DC +3.3 V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3 V”) supplied from frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3 V produced by the +3.3 V production circuit 1510 b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600 a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600 b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. A total of four voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decoration substrates of the door frame 3 together with +9 V created by the +9 V creation circuit 194 a.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper-disc-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates +12 V to +3.3 V. In addition to being supplied to the various electronic components making up the liquid crystal module circuit 4450 V shown in FIG. 74, +3.3 V produced by the upper dish side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450 x is also supplied to the upper dish liquid crystal module backlight power circuit 4450 y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame-side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. For example, +12 V from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 952 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784 a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control substrate 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the game hall. It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping, from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, a power supply system to which +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g is applied and supplied is a +5 V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The +5 V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310 g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is supplied with +12 V and +24 V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951, and monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V power failure or short interruption. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. In addition, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Also, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the blackout notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board of the door frame.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e applies the voltage to one of the +12 V power line or the +24 V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines of the +12 V power line and the +24 V power line. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 to FIG. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply created by the main control board 1310, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to and from, and an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  69 and 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz ) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and noise components are removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). The ripple is further removed and smoothed by being connected to. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It should be noted that when the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off due to a power failure or momentary interruption at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the electric charge in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 becomes a power failure or an instantaneous stop It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and a capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded with the ground (GND) Is electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and via the resistor MR0, the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the As a result, as described above, +12 V generated by the power generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310 g can not generate +5 V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC 0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 as the main VBB, and therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC5 connected to ground, and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5 It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (eg, 4.25 V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control substrate 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and main control of the main control substrate 1310 It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error, A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on and an error release after power on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, ie after a predetermined period from the time of power on) And the ability to Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic from the payout control board 951 is input. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control substrate 951 within a predetermined period after power on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and is a non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10 A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 The line is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When this is the case, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned on to switch the switch The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic becomes LOW. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 inputted to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, it is higher than the control reference voltage + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are set to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general prize opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 that are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of + 12V and + 24V, and detects a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, when it detects a blackout or a blackout indication. This is output to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set), which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC20 grounded at one end, and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 AC component is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24 V blackout or momentary interruption]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21, is an open collector output, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR 23 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, One end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24, and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. 78, the positive terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied, as shown in FIG. Are connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is +12 V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 24 and MR 25 and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC 25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47 V) which is set in advance when the +12 V causes a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts dropping from the +12 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is set to the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2 pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is ground (GND) The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D terminal by the change of the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal, and this stored value (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the same as the logic of the signal inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Also, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to input a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal to set the latch state, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal that is input is input, the state in which the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal is stored and not output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure, and the + 12V power failure. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

  In this embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the main control side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic thereof becomes HI via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a through main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22 A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR28 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 because the logic thereof is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notification signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the payout control board 951 as the payout blackout notification signal is open. The output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR31 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR34 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC26 grounded. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via the (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control substrate 951 through a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control substrate 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor of the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned ON by being input. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control substrate 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35 And are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR36 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In FIG. 7, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). It is input to 1510.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 1310 b which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1 Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, and there is one transistor in each, and the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and peripheral While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is dispensed to the payout control board 951 Reset function to output as a power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage, and the logic of the payout blackout notice signal is the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral blackout notice signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 Is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is connected Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control input circuit 1310b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is implemented in 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a, between the boards 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The serial data input terminal of the serial control port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payment serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payout serial data transmission signal and have no reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the circuit 1310cb, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main circuit serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function as a peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, or detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input etc.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is outputted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. To output various driving signals from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) regarding the game to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and the main function with reset function The control output circuit 1310 ca outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 951 or the like.

9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12 V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through the payout control board 951, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12 V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is influenced by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 47 μF), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) are incorporated. Is mainly configured.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (.mu.F)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and electrically connected to the anode terminal (No. 1 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when the power from power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to main control substrate 1310 via discharge control substrate 951 due to a power failure or a momentary stop, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC50 is generated. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41 aea by the unit 1310 aec and transmission complete as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310 aea.

  As described above, the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is to the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aa by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control substrate 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the same. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR52 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (the sixth terminal) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main cycle serial data transmission signal, and the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is input to the input terminal of.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 by a power failure or a momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 by applying +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to the main control MPU 1310a when a power or momentary interruption occurs is generated. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the built-in main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae can be completely transmitted, and the main cycle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main cycle serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the +5 V power supply line to which +5 V as the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a is applied, and the +12 V power supply line to which +12 V as the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a, a +5 V power supply line, and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310 h as the first auxiliary power, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is configured from resistance MR50, resistance MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, +12 V applied to the +12 V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main periphery serial data. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the reset function-free main control output circuit 1310cb that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb are reset to function as interface circuits as main cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the function-free main control output circuit 1310 cb, the peripheral control board 1510 may drop without dropping or disconnecting a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. And can be received reliably.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control substrate 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of capacitor PC0 grounded. The capacitor (PC0) first removes +5 V from the power supply substrate 931 from the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) and smoothes it. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which the noise component is removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to ground (GND), the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like. . In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure at the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a. After generation, it is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing further ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the payout control built-in RAM includes the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 is reset as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. 80 in addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. Reset is applied to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC7, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded with the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the blackout monitor circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit to which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, so here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is other than the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded. Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC20 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 20 A)) payout control The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24, and is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. It is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is an input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952 a by turning on the door frame open switch 618. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, In the state where the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, when the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which detection signal from main frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. When 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is the other of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and connected with the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  The No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 1310 is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  A circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  When the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned off. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in a state where main body frame 4 is opened from outer frame 2, since main body frame open switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. When the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 1310 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 The main frame door open signal whose logic has become HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF to Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Even in this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it can not be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state where the player does not occur during normal game that the main frame 4 is open has occurred, and an external terminal frame 784 has an outer end frame door open information output signal. This outer edge because it is designed to be entered The door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, Or although it can not be determined whether the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, there is a state where the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open does not occur during normal gaming. It can be determined that it has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . When the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conductive) and when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body due to some cause. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 1310 even when a normally open switch is used, or at the time of disconnection, An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of two voltages of +12 V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 931, and when it detects signs of blackouts or blackouts, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the + 24V voltage is larger than the blackout detection voltage V1pf, and the + 12V voltage is higher than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When both conditions of large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 951 through the wiring (harness), and the logic is LOW. While the paid out blackout notification signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When the condition is met, the output of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. Sometimes, since a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of + 12V or + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is a payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank detection sensor three terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 951, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The signal applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. The transistor PTR41 is turned on by inputting the signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, the full signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In 951, when the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR47, and a full signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The detection signal from various detection switches such as the ball breakage detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is transmitted from a T-type filter circuit such as a full-terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. It has a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 270 is full with the gaming balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the storage space is full by storing the gaming space, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout rotating body is stopped. It comes to perform control. That is, when noise intrudes into the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not full of the gaming balls with the storage space stored, but In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming balls by the payout rotating body is stopped, and it is possible to drive the payout motor 834 despite the fact that the storage space is full with the reserved gaming balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body and continuing the payout of the gaming ball, the payout rotary body itself can not rotate and the payout motor 834 Load is applied abnormally, and the discharge motor 834 is overloaded to generate abnormal heat and malfunction, or the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational movement of the discharge rotor. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first selected so that noise components are removed from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the three terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR50 whose ground is grounded. Further, the fourth terminal, which is an output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC41 which is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR53 whose ground is grounded. The emitter terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40 C) without inverting it). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is changed by turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages, and the signal becomes an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 through the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact constituting the operation switch 954 repeats ON / OFF for a short time. The circuit is also configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit at the former stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit at the latter stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44 Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. On the other hand, after turning on the power (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power is turned on) In the function to perform the error cancellation in the above, it becomes an error cancellation signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned ON while the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the previous stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after power on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge not to indicate.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal of which the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is pulled down to the main control board 1310 when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness). Entered. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic “LOW” shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW becomes the transistor of the previous stage. The transistor PTR42 at the front stage is turned off and the switch circuit at the front stage is also turned off when input to the base terminal of the PTR42, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RWMCLR signal whose voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is applied to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the command is to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge that it is something to indicate

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation becomes logic LOW by the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic HI shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it instructs to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It has come to be. The power supply output terminal of voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals which are the cathode terminals of drive IC PIC 60 via Zener diode PZD 60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of payout motor 834. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952 da. While supplying to the terminal and the 10th terminal respectively, it supplies to the payout motor 834.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second, fourth, ninth, and eleventh terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, which are collector terminals, are the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 respectively via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is used. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 834 to rotate the dispensing motor 834. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the BRDY as a ball rental request signal and the BRQ as a single payout operation start request signal via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as described above. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and also via the resistor PR72 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR74 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 through ICPIC80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80A)). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. As the transistor PTR70 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and that signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Electrically connected to the other end of the As the transistor PTR71 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit configured of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and switching circuit It will turn on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR73 to turn on the transistor PTR71 and also the switch circuit It will turn on. Thus, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same logic as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photo coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned on, while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic is HI EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal which indicates that the dispensing operation for dispensing the lent ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic is HI PRDY is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb It is the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Is done. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as a payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 cb without reset function from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) In addition to the input of the signal 1 and the like), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. 70, and detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are respectively output to the payout control output no payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a, and the EXS signal from the reset function no payout control output circuit 952cb The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 through the payout motor drive circuit 952 d In addition to The main control of the payout ACK signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with the reset function is outputted to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, the payment ACK signal notifying the completion of the normal reception completion of the main payment serial data reception signal described above. The drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca as shown in FIG. And so on.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310 b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 951, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output signal, game such as starting opening winning information output signal A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, etc. are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-described outer frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The winning ball number information output signal that is output every time, the main winning ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the two round big hit information output signal Outputs game information signals such as output signals, probability fluctuation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time information output signals, start opening winning information output signals, etc. to external terminal board 784 To do. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. In other words, two signals are outputted to the external terminal board 784, the outer end frame door open information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, and start opening prize information Eight signals called output signals are outputted (passed) through the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). The number of times of occurrence of the jackpot), the number of times of big hit when the round has become 15 times (number of times of occurrence of big hit of 15 rounds), and the sum is the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the combined number of big hits. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits will occur. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hall computer generates two rounds of big hit occurrences by separately outputting 15 round big hit information output signals and two round big hit information output signals to the hole computer as big hit information output signals. The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the 2 round big hit or the 15 round big hit, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of the big hit and the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period until the 2 round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is also 15 round big hits. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. As in the present embodiment, in addition to the method of outputting the 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information output signal to the hall computer, for example, when 2 round big hit occurs, the 2 round big hit information output signal is only for a predetermined period. Such a two round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information such that the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period when it is output to the hole computer and 15 round big hit occurs A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Output terminal arrangement of external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 shows an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes an outer end frame door open information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal and a 2 round big hit information output signal. When the big hit information output signal, the probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time in-short information output signal, and the starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A prize ball number information output signal is a signal indicating that a state has occurred, and the payout ball number information output signal shown in FIG. 5 is generated every time the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal shown in FIG. 8 is a variety of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that tells you that the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls based on the gaming ball entered to 10 reaches 10, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is a 15 round big hit In a state 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal to tell that it is in the state where 2 round big hit is occurring, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is in the state where probability fluctuation occurs The special symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped state, and the variation display of the normal symbol is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that there is a time-shortage is a signal indicating that a time-short state has occurred, and the start-port winning information output signal is the first start-port 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  On the external terminal plate 784, as shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the award ball number information output signal is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the award ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 as the prize ball for the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the award ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls are paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls paid out.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not generate a normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that indicates that it is in the state, and in this embodiment, the end (the stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and counting the number of times, the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405.

  The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow to output a starting opening winning combination information output signal. As described above, the starting opening winning combination information output signal is a signal that indicates the fact that the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 and, in this embodiment, Each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning combination information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning combination information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the start port 2004 and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of balls of the game ball which has entered the ball.

  The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15 round big hit information output signal is a signal indicating that 15 round big hit is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the 15 round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15 round big hit information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates 15 round big hits in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round big hit information output signal is being input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times that the 15 round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the 15 rounds of big hit have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. The two-round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round big hit has occurred, as described above, and in the present embodiment, while a two round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times the two-round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the pachinko machine 1 has generated two round big hits.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol, In this embodiment, output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted, and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal for a short time. The time-shortening information output signal is a signal that indicates that the time-shortening state is occurring, as described above, and in the present embodiment, is outputted from the output terminal PT8 while the time-shortening state is occurring. ing. When an information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is generating a time-spacing state when the information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input. In addition, the total number of times that the time-short state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the time-short-time information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided with an orange color and outputs a probability changing information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal indicating that probability fluctuation is occurring, and in the present embodiment, is outputted while the probability fluctuation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates a probability fluctuation in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. While being able to grasp a certain thing, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has a probability fluctuation.

  The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main winning ball number information output signal is input to various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have been balled, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as the prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is planned to pay out the game ball as a prize ball, counting the number of balls of the game ball which is due to be paid out, it grasps the total number of balls of the game ball which is intended to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 can do. In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls entered in various prize openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2011, and the big winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main award ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main award ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds, As with one continuous signal, it is output with an interval of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 have the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors as these colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, other wirings are mistakenly electrically connected. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a line from the center left side toward the right side, also in this respect, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs output on the main control board 1310 side. Incorrect wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 are respectively halls from the external terminal board 784 It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the gaming ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the gaming ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the jackpot happens to hit 15 rounds on the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the number of gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the gaming balls as prize balls runs out, so payout is made (If, for example, a ball clogged or a ball clogged in the payout device 830, the game ball can not be paid out if it can not be eliminated). Then, as described above, the winning ball number information output signal outputted on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 balls the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. Since it is a signal that indicates that each time, the payout control board 951 can output the prize ball number information output signal and can transmit it to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784 by not being able to pay out the gaming balls. become unable. When the gaming ball is not paid out, the player calls a store clerk or the like in the hall. A clerk in the hall, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle or the like for supplying gaming balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720, and specifies the position of the ball jam (also, for example, occurs in the dispensing device 830). In this case, the game ball is returned to a state in which the game ball is paid out.

  However, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall is working, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, the game ball is paid out by the work of the store clerk or the like after 15 rounds of big hit When it returns to the ready state, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid gaming balls one after another, and even though it is a time when 15 rounds of big hits have ended and 15 rounds of big hits have not occurred, the payout control boards 951 Outputs an award ball number information output signal to notify that effect each time the number of game balls actually paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls by the payout motor 834 and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 It will be. Then, although it is a time when 15 rounds of jackpots are not generated, a very large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of balls of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 There arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control substrate 951 to actually pay out as a winning ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control substrate 951. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 receives the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are set. The system of passing to the hall computer was adopted. As a result, even if the above-described trouble (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the relationship with the hall computer can be accurately transmitted. Therefore, the hole computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive substrate 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320, A liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 by the differential method “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. Is transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and minus signal from which noise has been separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. Restore to three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) (that is, parallel signals before being serialized). The red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are, as described above, those in which the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the built-in VDP 1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, they are upper 6 bits in each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which certain LOCKN signal output request data are differentiated into plus signal and minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the differential circuit 1512e receives two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect as shown in FIG. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forced switching circuit 1512 f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e are not input, that is, the door frame A serial signal (serial data) based on a differential method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of “S-Electronics Inc.'s“ V-by-One (registered trademark) ”from the transmitter IC 1512 d for side effect as a plus signal and minus signal And 868, and are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and to the RXIN + and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When the two signals differentiated into the source signal and the negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and then input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is an output request for the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512e, A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, produces the start screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on During a period displayed on the display device 1600 or a period in which a demonstration is performed by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and effect display The door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Shine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of the company's “V-by-One (registered trademark)” differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that it is data, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output, LOCKN signal output request data having a data format different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has a VDD terminal, a VDDO terminal, an LVDSVDD terminal, a PLLVDD terminal, and a PDWN terminal supplied with + 3.3V respectively created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDSGND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminal of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal to the GND terminal serving as the ground for the digital circuit, and a +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal tells that the logic is HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), and that the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. This terminal is used to designate either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and in the present embodiment, the terminal As such, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, the rising edge can be specified.

  The OE terminal instructs whether to allow the output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, the output is always possible by grounding the OE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. And a normal operation mode in which the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In this mode, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to be switched automatically.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal): a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with simple data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the peripheral control board 1510. Via the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is established based on the inputted LOCKN signal, transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of that fact. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is used for the door frame side effect included in the effect display drive board 4450. Transmit to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 include the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between them. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive substrate 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the periphery The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is input via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal restored are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that reports that a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  Terminals D0 to D17 are three video signals (18 red, green and blue video signals restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN + and RXIN− terminals, respectively (18 It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals such as D0 to D5 terminals, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and the signal lines of the red video signals R0 to R5 are damping resistors. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described, and the main control board receives The various commands from the payout control board will be described.

13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for delivering a gaming ball of a predetermined number of balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage trays, are driven by driving the dispensing motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing device 830) by communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (pachinko machine 1). When an apparatus for paying out game balls as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the payout control board 951 from 1310, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H Then, two prize balls are designated,..., And fifteen prize balls are designated in command 1 EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and a ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), a payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H.
By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, various commands are special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit relation, power on, spread figure tuning effect related, general electric circuit board production related, notification display, status It is classified into the display and others.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and short time states, a low probability time short state indicating a low probability state and a short time state, a high probability time short state indicating a high probability state and a short time state, and a low probability It consists of a low probability non-short state which indicates that it is a state and not a short state, and a high probability non-short state which indicates that it is a high probability state and not a short state (as normal gaming state, Low probability non-short state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. The time for fluctuating display of symbols is shortened compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state), and stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery in a predetermined time will be described. The number of stop display times is increased compared to the non-short time state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is further extended compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state). State that it is possible to obtain the lottery opportunity of the special symbol without reducing balls by raising the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2004 which is shown (in other words, non-short time state In addition, the number of determinations as to whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and in the case of opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, the period of the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is lengthened. It is a state which raises the acceptance rate (ball entering rate) of the game ball to the mouth 2004).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. In these various commands, “B * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number).
("*" Indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 89, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening to start, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is starting while the 1st to 16th round big winning opening 1 is open (shown in FIG. 8, the starting opening unit 2100 The grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates that the grand prize opening 1 is closed during the round (the start opening unit 2100 is large). The winning prize opening 2005 is closed during the round or the closing start is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls of 0 to 10 is counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 at the small hit or The small hit count display command is a small hit medium large winning opening winning combination effect (in the small hit, when the gaming ball entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005) The small hit ending command is an instruction to start small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is 1 to 16 round of big winning opening 1 open (starting opening unit 2100 Sent at the opening of the N round of the winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the closing time of the winning opening 1 (start closing of the winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), Large winning opening 1 count display command, when the large winning opening 1 opening and count change to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the game ball entered the large winning opening 2005 Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the big hit ending command is sent at the beginning of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  Also, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the small hit opening (at the opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered the large winning hole 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005), the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of a small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes a command at the time of power-on and a name of the main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command includes the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 at power-on (including power-on and power-on recovery as well as power on and power failure). Information that indicates that the RAM is cleared when the operation switch 954 is operated, and also includes power recovery (in addition to power recovery, power recovery may occur due to power failure or momentary power outage) Information indicating which one of the low probability and short status, the high probability and short status, the low probability non-short status, and the high probability non-short status above (state and short status) to return. , And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the condition is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is specified whether it is (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like. In other words, the information of the model code of the pachinko machine is a series code for identifying which type among max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. In addition to the game code of the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the probability fluctuation with the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited. And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.).

  The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure) Is also sent). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general figure synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is comprised from the command of the name of common drawing tuning production start, common design designation, common drawing tuning production completion, and fluctuation state specification regarding vessel 1402. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The popular drawing tuning effect start command instructs the starting of the common pattern tuning effect in the rendering pattern specified in the mode, and the common symbol designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the short time state include a low probability short time state that indicates a low probability state and a short time state, and a high probability short time state that indicates a high probability state and a short time state. A low-probability non-time-short state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-short state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-short state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-shorting state is set).

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hitting opening, public power open display, and ending per common figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the release of the power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal map is an instruction to start ending per universal map.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (the pair of movable pieces The ending command per common map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display divisions are composed of commands such as a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door closed. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  In the prize failure display command, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the player wins a big winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device) (even if it is not even a big hit) When the count sensor 4005 detects that the count error is detected), the connection error display command is, for example, an electrical signal in a route between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection error, the start of connection error notification is instructed, and for example, the disconnection / short circuit error display command includes a main control board 1310, a first start port sensor 4002, a second start port sensor 4004, a count sensor This command instructs the start of the break / short circuit display when there is a break or short circuit in the electrical connection with the 4005 etc. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  Further, the door opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is in the state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. In the closed state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed to end.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is transmitted to the terminal, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section comprises a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error release navi command (corresponding to an error release command), and a command named frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that these shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test related category is composed of various commands named test. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive substrate 4170, the motor drive substrate 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. Inspects various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-10. Others]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, starting opening winning, variation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is comprised from the command of the name of special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening start winning effect start, and based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first start opening 2002 , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 holds 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls not yet used for display (the number of holdings) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0-4 pieces (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and transmits the number of balls (number of pending) not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol memory command is the ordinary symbol 1 Hold 0 to 4 (The game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shows the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of normal symbols (number of held)) The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400. It is intended to instruct the start of pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the special symbol 1 suspension, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command of the special symbol 2 suspension is the function display unit 1400 Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 1405, pre-read and instruct pre-reading effect start to notify the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 suspension To do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, when the starting ball winning command is when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor (when the starting ball is winning, or the second When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting opening sensor 4004), mainly from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. Transmitted to notify the effect, and the fluctuation shortening operation termination designation command is transmitted at the termination of the stop period (after the lapse of the suspension termination period) after the fluctuation is determined after settling the fluctuation shortening of the specified number of times, and the high probability termination designation command is , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the elapse of the stoppage period), and the special symbol 1 storage command is stored. When the ball number changes (In the state where the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and there is a reserved number not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, When the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases using the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 1403 from the number of reservations) The special symbol 2 memory command is sent to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 When the number of game balls enters the second starting hole 2004 and the number of reservations increases further while there is a number of reservations not yet used in the variable display, the second special symbol indicator 1405 makes it special from the number of reservations Pattern The normal symbol memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is reduced (used when the variable number display is reduced), and when the number of the symbol 1 operation ball is changed (the game ball passes through the gate 2003 and the function display unit 1400 is normal) In the state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display in the symbol display 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, the normal symbol indicator is displayed from the reserved number. 1402 is used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and when the number of reserved symbols decreases), the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is received when the number of special symbol 1 actuated reserved balls increases (game ball at the first start port 2002). The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the special symbol 2 actuated reserve ball number increases (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number). But Sent) when it increases. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given when the start opening is won (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are transmitted mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of a specification that is used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud in addition to notifying by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not make a sound notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 includes commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2; frame status 1, error release navigation, and so on. Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  In the frame status 1 command (corresponds to the error generation command), out of sphere, full, in 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR non-connection are prepared, and in out of sphere bit 0 (B0, "B" Represents a bit)), the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) if full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 in more than 50 stocks, and A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), the ball is detected, and the payout detection sensor error and the retry error are prepared. In error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not a failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred. The "retry error" indicates that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, And the value 0 is set to B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set to B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in deciding whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not reach is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated The random number for reach determination for use in the determination, and the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. 69 A random number for display pattern, a random number for a big hit symbol for use in determining a big hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a big hit gaming state, and this big hit A big hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the first special symbol indicator 1 when generating a small hit gaming state 03 and second special symbol display 1405 for a small hit symbol random number for use in the determination of the small hit symbol displayed in derived display, an initial value for the small hit symbol for use in the determination of the initial value of this small hit symbol random number A random number for decision etc. is prepared. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine the initial value of an ordinary symbol determination random number per pattern for use in determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol for the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random number for determining the jackpot is updated by hardware, and the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an first uses a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to be a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at a high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are obtained. When the extraction is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a judgment random number.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one to count up. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The value (sum value) of the checksum obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (during power-off) When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the normal value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol per symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Takes out an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this taken out ID code, it is always from the fixed numerical range of the counter which usually updates the random number for judgment per symbol. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is designed to always overwrite and update the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if the external device is stored if the ID code is stored in the ID code, and the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM The second security measure that derives the same fixed value on the basis of and the two-step security measure by the second security measure is prevented from being analyzed by being taken.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the starting opening 2004 can not be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the above-mentioned main control program performs processing at the time of main control power on as shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). Update to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU 1310a is reached by the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, when the timer clear set value is not set in “WDT clear register”, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e shown in FIG. 78 starts outputting a power failure clear signal. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. The comparison result is that when no power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary interruption occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clear process, first, output of a power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, thereby starting output of the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This blackout clear signal is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310 a. Is done. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is set until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted to be output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the electric power clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). It is done. Whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure warning signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notification signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure notification voltage and stabilized after power on, the main control program outputs a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic to HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when a state in which the logic becomes LOW to be input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on) Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs, to the main control MPU 1310a, an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. Depending on whether or not it is done. The main control program determines that the RAM clear is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI based on the logical value of the operation signal, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The state is set (game control side power on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to delete game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag indicating that it is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information, and a value of 0 when not deleting gaming information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Wait until In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot.

  Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When a power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notification signal is not input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (power-off) described later and the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM (that is, main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device is irradiated to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310 a itself, and also includes a state where it is restored thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value (sum value) of the checksum, etc. are changed by performing various processes after this, so the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing for when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not finished normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the normal value determining random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol determining random value described above. To do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 built in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state by hardware The random number is latched and acquired, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined in advance at a high speed based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 5, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect a detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) that should have been originally used for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time from power-on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs non-attrition random number update processing (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the main control program returns to step S54 again, determines whether or not there is an input of a power failure advance notification signal, and if there is no input of this power failure notification signal, non-falling random number update processing is performed in step S56. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the second special hold number indicator 1406, the normal symbol indicator 1402, the normal symbol memory indicator 1188, the state indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Following step S66, the main control program performs setting of RAM access prohibition (step S68). By the setting of the RAM access prohibition, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can not be accessed, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be prevented from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or an instantaneous power failure is performed, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. Explain the problems in

  As described above, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is charged to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary interruption. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is applied by applying +5 V as the charge stored in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after it is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs and a pachinko island facility When the power is cut off, the main control side power-off process can be completed with certainty.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Just before the system that performs the drawing control of the device 460 starts (boots) starts to wait (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) and immediately before reaching the waiting time. Thus, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. Interrupt initialization is performed, and then, in step S52, interrupt permission setting is performed. Even if the main control side timer interruption process described below is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control-side power-on process may not be completed. . For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S28. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by a store clerk or the like at the time of power recovery and there is no intention indication by the store clerk or the like in the hall of RAM clear, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (clear ).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, Since it is possible to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and restart the main control board 1310 by repeatedly performing the determination of step S24, it is possible to proceed with the game It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and there is no change in the calculation result of the checksum. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the pachinko machine Even if the power supply to 1 is shut off, backup processing for storing game information according to the progress of the game by supplying power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a The main system constituted by the process of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process at the time of power-off on the main side, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a restarts, the checksum calculation result in step S28 Since it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) in the backup processing matches, the instantaneous interruption stored and held in the main control internal RAM The game information just before a power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, thereby causing the contents of the main control built-in RAM. It is possible to start the main control side power-off process again without updating the key at all, but immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko facility is shut off, and the main control MPU 1310 a The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. In the case where the main control side power-off process can not be completed within the "instant power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after that, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the determination again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to clear the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by setting the set value and clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT 1310af so that it cannot be started again. . Since the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af by such software, a step after step S 24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S 42, and thereafter, in step S 52 It is possible to prevent the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt processing described later. Adopted the mechanism. In this way, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a power failure or momentary stoppage, the portion covered by software so that the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all The contents of the main control internal RAM by dividing it into two parts to ensure complete completion of interrupt processing and that the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM are not changed at all The game information can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, the point will be described where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89, which are classified into power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start-port solenoid 2107 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. Yes. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start-up solenoid 2107 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on in step S50 is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored. Starting driving the solenoid 2108 to shift from the state where the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state where it is opened That.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a big hit gaming state as the gaming state, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main power control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display the screen in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and return according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from. It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. That is, for example, a game winning ball 1 enters a big winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the ball number of the gaming ball which is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives, the peripheral control board 1510 is the ball of the gaming ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it can not be displayed at all which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is).

  In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 ends, for example, the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (the fourth round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 Control from the main control board 1310 a large winning a prize opening 1 closed display command instructing to shift from a closed state to a closed state (that is, start of closing between big winning opening 2005 rounds of starting opening unit 2100) When transmitted to the substrate 1510 and the main control substrate 1310 starts five rounds (fifth round) of the big hit gaming state, the actuation of the attachment solenoid 2108 is started and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 That the state is to be released (that is, 5 of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

  Further, for example, a screen (for example, indicating that the movable piece is expanded) that indicates that the gaming state where the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is in an advantageous gaming state for the player. 8 is displayed when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to drive the start port solenoid 2107. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 displays the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the start port solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating that it is present in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when power is restored. As a result, there is also a problem that the player can not understand what kind of game the player plays.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there has been a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can not be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are to be transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the fourth round of the big hit gaming state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main solenoid valve 2108 starts driving the main control board 1310 as a return destination, and the big winning opening 2005 is released from being closed by the opening / closing member 2107 The peripheral control board 1510 can notify the peripheral control board 1510 that it will shift to the off state, and the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many round it is. ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, A screen (for example, “big hit. Big winning opening is open. Big winning opening is open. A game has been opened on the big winning opening. The screen shows that the large winning opening 2005 is open by the opening and closing member 2107. Play a game to make the ball enter the game. ”The message is displayed to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600) and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored the power. After that, it is possible to instruct a game to make the game ball enter the big winning opening 2005, and for example, in the above-mentioned example, the game becomes a game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a game state advantageous to the user and then power is restored, the start-up solenoid 2107 serves as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs that the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction after driving is started (for example, “The movable piece has been expanded. The peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 a message telling the player the message “Please play the game.” To the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine after power recovery The game of entering the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 can be instructed. As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of a manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, a main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68 which is the backup processing described above and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off process at one time, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. By storing in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information, only the two commands of the power on status command and the power on main control return destination command as transmission information transmit information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information Will be stored in the In these commands, a power on state command is first transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, and then a power on main control return destination command is transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power on state command from the main control board 1310 is taken as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is as shown in FIG. 70 at the time of power-on (in addition to the case of power-on, it also includes power-on recovery due to power failure or momentary power outage). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, (Including the time of recovery to recover)) In any of the above states (probability and short-time state) among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state It is composed of information indicating whether or not to do, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, the problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of gaming specifications (for example, if the probability variation occurs, the state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of variations of special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specifications (so-called ST machine, etc.)) in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). The main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of a work of movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works can not be known whether the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310 Although the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for the work of cartoon F). There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control substrate 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexists, the main control substrate for the copyrights of multiple types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while 1310 is mixed. Therefore, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5 in some cases. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the power recovery due to a power failure or a momentary power outage). To transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 the power-on state command shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are to be transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 turn on in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process Payout control board 951 various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) in addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal motor combination control process. When it is determined whether or not the customer ACK signal that indicates the normal reception is received is determined, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, a detection signal from general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 which detects gaming balls entered into general winning openings 2001 and 2201 shown in FIG. Detecting the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 detects the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, a magnetic detection sensor that detects fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 is transmitted which indicates that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the detection signal from 024 and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later , And stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 which detects the game ball which entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection from the second starting opening sensor 4004 which detects the game ball which entered the second starting opening 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 90 and corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004. The start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and count sensors 4005 for detecting gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2005. Detection signal from the first starting opening 2002, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 for detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2002, second starting opening sensor 4004 for detecting the gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 for detecting gaming balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program detects the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 The effect of chattering, noise, etc. is achieved by performing two readings in total: two readings comparing the first to third times and two readings comparing the second to fourth times. Since false detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a false random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number per pattern determination is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for big hit determination is updated by this success random number update process. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol And, it may be a mechanism to update the random number for small hit design initial value determination only in the non-falling random number update process of step S56

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out a game ball based on this input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact and stored as output information in the output information storage area, The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection between the control substrate 1310 and the delivery control substrate 951 is created. Then, the prize ball command and the self-check command that have been created are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball Is set to 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal output is set in order to notify that, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or when the payout ACK signal notifying that the payout control substrate 951 has received the award ball command normally is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 is confirmed. A self-check command to be generated is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program is various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) divided into the status display shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame status 2 command) Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navi command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as the payee serial data, the information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as the output information of the output information of the main control internal RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reshapes the command normally received as the sender serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraudulent operation detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005) Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, whether or not the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit decision value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether the jackpot gaming state is to be generated or not (referred to as "special lottery") or the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches with the probability variation determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range (big hit determination range) of the above-described big hit determination values with low probability and are read out from the normal determination table, while the value is 31768 with high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special motorized product control process in step S114, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control When it is determined whether or not the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot judgment random number (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is determined by whether or not is included in the big hit determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is set so that the indicator 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. To do. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands classified into the big hit relationship shown in FIG. Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is two times, 2 to turn on the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10 When the output of the lighting signal to the wind display lamp 1407a is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The lighting signal output to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be lit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence / absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal motorized product control processing (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per symbol for determination is extracted and gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM as gate information To remember.

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether to open and close the movable piece or not is determined based on the determination result (lottery result from the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. It becomes gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output information is described above as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the common electric circuit production shown in FIG. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. If the value of the random number for determining the selected standard symbol is not identical to the standard symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is made based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above The display pattern is determined, and various commands classified into the general drawing tuning effect related shown in FIG. 89 are created, and the transmission information described above as the transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is set so that the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is illuminated according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the memory area, and the output information storage area mentioned above as output information Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program is, for example, based on the output information, and when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951. When it is a big hit game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the start aperture solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to the game, such as short and medium information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. And it outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process, which is this routine, and shown in FIG. Various commands classified into commands and jackpot relations (for example, when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, the big prize is based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69). 90 winning command 1 count display command corresponding to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands related to ordinary drawing synchronization effects, various commands classified as ordinary electric role effects, FIG. The various commands (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) classified into the notification display, and the state display Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configures various commands as main cycle serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as + 5V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main cycle serial data. When power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. The power-on state command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value as main cycle serial data, and then the power-on main control return destination command is formed, status, It transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the mode and then the sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) And the frame state 1 command (second error generation command) is transmitted (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, if the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navi command (second error release command) is transmitted to the (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  Note that, as described above, when the main control board 1310 is in the process of proceeding with the game, the above-described backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 89, the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 for instructing the drive state of the start-up solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, is set to the peripheral control board 1510. Can be output to. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 93, the main control board 1310 mainly sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process. Based on power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, a power on status command classified as power on in FIG. 89 and a power on status are transmitted to notify that power has been switched on (power recovery). A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power on state command as the main cycle serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 returns the game progress by the main control board 1310 at the time of power return to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to display effects in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, so-called freeze Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for the failure due to the appearance of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, thereby providing two commands: a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and thumb value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command about control of game production production, a command about a state of pachinko machine 1, etc.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and compare Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the effect backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) ms) are compared, and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) with respect to Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73. Copy back the effect backup information (1fr) that is the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), and compare them as hot start, and compare When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of peripheral control RAM 1511 c. And cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 73. The (SRAM) is compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 1511 cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73 and cleared to zero. Then, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs this initialization setting process, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try to prevent it.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and in the time information storage unit as current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is set to have the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is performed. As described above, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included.

  Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 When lighting up, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is lit. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is supposed not to be done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. It is to prevent being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once at power-on. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a as a peripheral control described later. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 so that peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for a lamp drive substrate is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 are created by a lamp data creation process described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus does not use a bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , And frame decoration through the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED uses the data of the written transmission buffer register as the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting data of 1 byte of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, bit by bit, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Determine whether to reflect on

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although a so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and a sound data output process described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the production of music and sound effects tailored to.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. While transmitting, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. Thus, in addition to stereo reproduction of music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, the screen data of the first screen data from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether it is an aspect.

  In the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the top of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the scheduler updating process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the driving data to be essentially designated.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, start opening winning command for instructing the start of the start opening winning effect, the number of pending normal symbols A normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4 pieces), a symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, a symbol memory command which is output when the number of start pending changes, and the special winning opening 2005 A special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) which is output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, which indicates the contents of full shown in FIG. 90) It is analyzed whether or not it is a full error occurrence command (command analysis means), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently in effect. Also, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command or the door frame closed Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511 cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 89 are classified into various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect, various commands classified into big hit relation, and power on. Various commands to be displayed, various commands to be classified to general drawing tuning effect related, various commands to be classified to regular electric terminal production related, various commands to be classified into notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , For displaying status such as door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. The data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. Various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal performance mode accompanying the performance operation, for example, on the game board side Visually warn the outside using an effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device), or audibly warn the outside using a speaker ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board, and various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the game board side effect display device 1600 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively. Audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0-6 is obtained. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and the sound source built-in of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is programmed by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. For example, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is making a fraudulent act, an alarm sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents of the effect control program stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 are stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and As the effect backup information (1fr), the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), copy the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr), specify the end address of Bank0 (1fr) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified as request factors for A controller 1511ac, and copying of backup first area 1511cb to Bank 2 (1fr) is specified, and Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 The contents stored in the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 3 (1 fr). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 4 (1 fr) The Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the bank 3 (SRAM) and the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) in backup second area 1511 dc The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. P2 is designated, and the backup second area 1511dc is continuously written by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is triggered by the fact that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the following will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether steady-state processing-in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. In order to prevent this by forcibly canceling on the way and starting execution of peripheral control unit steady processing from the beginning, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 95 is powered on. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control portion power-on processing (peripheral control portion steady processing) of FIG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 97, peripheral control MPU 1511 a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times or not. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially Will occur.

  If it is determined in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33, that is, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally arranged as shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. 72. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. While updating the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and updating the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 is performed. Here, serial I / O port serial transmission of frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a In order to output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series to configure The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and frame decoration drive of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511 caf is sent via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request for the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor (in the present embodiment, the frame I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate-side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf for 1 byte, external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transmitting and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial drive I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register Transfer to 1-byte data of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and start transmission one bit at a time, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for motor drive boards is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, electrical drive source schedule data set in schedule data storage area 1511 cae of peripheral control MPU 1511 a and peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached is configured. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the motor or solenoid is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown in 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stores it at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag The first 1 byte of the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT thus processed is transmitted via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai, as a transmission buffer for the motor drive board serial I / O port. Transfer and write to register. Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). It is triggered by the fact that the written 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty due to the lack of 1 byte data.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and In synchronization, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information Movable position history information etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, original positions, movable positions and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this rendering operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the rendering operation unit 400 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) Operation history information of the button 410 etc.) is created and set in the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. The presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the periphery shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the control MPU 1511 a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Judging, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on peripheral control board 1510, and receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect provided on effect display drive board 4450 , And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is acquired from the history of LOCKN signals set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak, from the frequency of the trouble between the connection of the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 and the occurrence state of the trouble. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d provided externally are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. Further, the production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), copy the backup first area 1511 cb to Bank 1 (1 ms), and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms), specify the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of backup second area 1511 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1 ms). The From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy all in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is triggered to transmit various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, and is triggered thereby to incorporate the main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this taking, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within a period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I / O port incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is taken (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value 2 is obtained, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from a pachinko facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other to be charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 It is determined whether or not. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 1511 a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the received command storage area 1511cac in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer 1511 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the received data in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The stored mode is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit blackout notification signal which is executed when the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification signal) from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310 The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 starts the 2 microsecond timer first (step S1320), and the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification) It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are stored in Bank1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 2 (1 fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

  The high-speed copy of the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb Content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr), and the end address of the reception command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr). Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core. The content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. From the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The specified contents (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The PU core 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All of the data is copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Can not be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, while when a power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and peripheral control external WDT 1511 e Output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, a LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are provided. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creating process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 having a capacity and provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST It is memorized.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. A transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data)) and No transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that

  When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0 and so on are shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500. Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, etc. 1 bit to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment process]
Next, the connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether a failure has occurred in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is, as shown in FIG. 101, of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. As described above, in the LOCKN signal, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that the signal is output to convey that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Subsequently to step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. The connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And exit this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value in step S1522, peripheral control board 1510 Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d for preparing the frame and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 for the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the state where a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver each time this routine is executed. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication check counter CC-CNT is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and the power recovery is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure occurs.

  Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is the cumulative number If it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the cumulative number determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1526 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, it is determined that a problem occurs in connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the accumulated number has reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is a flag indicating whether or not there is a malfunction in the value, and value 1 when there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a malfunction occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reaching the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the power recovery is restored. At this time, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. While outputting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal Report that fact.

  When connection recovery processing is started, as shown in FIG. 102, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs peripheral control steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is active, while the screen generation schedule When the presentation is completed along with the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state of the customer. It is possible to judge based on the screen generation schedule data whether or not it is a period, and display the start screen at the time of powering on of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600 If the game board is in a waiting state or a period during which a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. The period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the waiting state for the customer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all the pointer updating is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is provided for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the same process as the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times of determining that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is even one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S 1542, that is, when the number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is not once, this is left as it is. While the routine is finished, the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, This flag indicates whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the receiver and the value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Then (step S1548), this routine ends. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 in order to reliably convey that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Do the drawing process. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message “A problem has occurred with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.” Is displayed. Also, in the communication error display process, the demonstration screen by the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 or in waiting for customers. Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period being performed, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In order to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display request of the door frame side effect display device 460, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is LOCKN As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, When the LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the LOCKN signal is not input, the door frame side effect display device 460 has a failure as a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is judged that the notification is being made, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition to the processing described above, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device") is repeatedly flowed from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to turn on all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various kinds of LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, to briefly describe the decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the process at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady process etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main processing or the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94 or the second shown in FIG. 8 When the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening 2004 becomes "big hit", the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) Then, the round is to be digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second start port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left decorative pattern is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative graphic is in the center. On the right side, the change display of the right decorative design is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result Can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed From the upper left to the lower left of the area, the central decorative symbol rotates from the upper center of the display area to the lower central, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol correspond to the stopped decorative display. The left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in an opaque aspect so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second lot selected by receiving the game ball into the second start port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the result of the special lottery, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on process of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, schedule data storage area 151 of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data set in cae, the pointer is used to indicate what number of screen data is output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Because it is updated, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  Thus, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped before being displayed in the communication check counter CC-CNT. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (that is, Even if it is determined that the connection with the receiver is in a state where a failure has occurred even once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver Process to recover the connection between the client and the For example, the message “The liquid crystal display device on the upper tray has a problem. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 without performing the communication error display process of step S1548. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to notify that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data, and the door frame side effect display device In 460, an image is displayed based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process in step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the presentation is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not started and the screen generation schedule data is not started, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. The warning of step S1024 in peripheral control unit steady processing of clock processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is the value 0, that is, When the number of times it is determined that there is no failure in connection with the receiver is one, the routine is ended as it is, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times it is determined that there is a problem with the connection between the device and the receiver is also one, the process proceeds to the process of step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG has the value 0 When there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number determined to have not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the processing proceeds to step S1546 in the same processing, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output processing is performed, and the routine is ended. When the value of FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the above-mentioned communication error is displayed. Process and exit the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver When there is a failure in the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even when there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, by always performing the SYNC pattern output processing, between the connection of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, In other words, while processing to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, "A problem has occurred with the upper side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to notify that the message “is displayed and to notify that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. Is activated.

  In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. Since the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the interval period until the game is started, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated, and the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect A fault occurs in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of occurrences is at least one, and the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be defective has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, SYNC While the pattern output processing is always performed, processing for recovering the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is performed, while the transmitter and receiver When the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a fault occurs in the connection between has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, there is a fault in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) For example, by performing the communication error display process, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, the screen generation schedule data is active, so the left side decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol , And until the right-hand decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if the number of times is the same, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is performed , The process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is an abnormal data. While invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that tells that there is a drawing, the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Display an image based on.

  In this way, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right side decoration are displayed again. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to convey that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. Between the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display on the door frame side effect display between the start of variation display of the left side decoration symbol, the center decoration pattern, and the right side decoration symbol. Receiver ICSD for door frame side effect that conveys that the drawing data received from IC 1512 d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. This is a combination result of the stop display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 being information most of interest to the player, and a profit to the player Since the player can determine whether or not a big hit gaming state to be awarded is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol change display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed by the influence of noise and the like until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, it is not left to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect midway and performing processing to recover to the state where it can be drawn correctly. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this point, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays a start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a customer waiting state This is largely different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration period by the game board side effect display device 1600. The LOCKN signal output request data is a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or becomes a customer wait state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period of time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, differential Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the merging circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, so that the two signals are transmitted. One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is transmitted to the game board side effect display device by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. An alarm sound to be output to 1600 and to that effect (for example, Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forcible switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0. The door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN The signal is input When it not can be determined that the defect on the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the hall by executing the notification process. Hall clerk and the like can very easily check whether there is a problem in the door frame side effect display device 460 before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without taking time and effort.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is judged that there is, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 Since it is a signal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the ICSDIC 0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, for door frame side effect Receiver ICSDIC0 is a transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect When the transmitted image cannot be received normally, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the drawing data received becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input doors the connection confirmation signal for informing that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting the data to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is possible to eliminate the communication failure between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect the failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to the communication failure between the image communications at an early stage, and act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the failure. It is supposed to be. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception is impossible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal indicating that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that a communication failure occurs because it can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511. Telling you To generate a message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper plate. Please call a clerk.” And display the generated image on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification. Can be done. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can directly notify the store clerks in the hall or notify the store clerk in the hall that took the front of the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the store clerk in the hall suffers from the problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by detecting and solving the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from the timing K1 to the timing K2. Even if there is a failure in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0 for the side effect, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate communication failure between image communication From the transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect A connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission is to be started to the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be continuously output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It has become. Thus, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during a period in which the game is not progressed by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move in the direction in which the communication failure is resolved.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 in a period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. If the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken even once, the connection between the transmitter and receiver fails When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication malfunction between image communications is displayed. Door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to door When the connection confirmation signal informing the start of transmission to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame effect transmitter IC 1512d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and confirms that the game progress is started again When the signal output is stopped and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and no connection confirmation signal is input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame. Controlling liquid crystal display by stopping transmission to the receiver ICSDIC0 for side effects The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a failure resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not started by displaying the start and stop, the communication failure can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 and stops and displays it. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control board 1 Even if ten main control MPUs 1310a start changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and start executing the game again, the door frame When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the game again and ends (period of timing K1 to timing K2), the distortion of the image (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460. Every time (interval period), it can be made to go away.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 or a second start which is a start area in which a game ball launched by the ball striking device 650 is directed toward the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on entering the mouth 2004, is implemented. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The 70 dispensing control MPU 952a is implemented.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information related to the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on the payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated during the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from the time of power on, the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased 77 is output from the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period in which the payout control unit performs processing at power on from when the power is turned on, to the payout control internal RAM. The RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information regarding the payout being stored, and the main control side power supply of FIG. A period (or power supply) during which the determination process of step S16 in the on-time process is performed 82. The RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is used as an error cancellation signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830 when it is operated after the period when the payout control unit power on processing has been performed since the time of entry has elapsed. And an error canceling function for outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from the time of power on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period when the payout control unit power on processing is performed from the time of power on, The RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. Period in which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process of 82 (or a period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after power-on) has passed, the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is used as an error cancel signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830. The RAM clear function is also operated by one operation switch 954 because it is combined with an error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a that is the payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is the game control microprocessor. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, i.e., and an error release function. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input part of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning port sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. Do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area, etc. to manipulate the flow state of the game ball as desired and obtain an unfair profit There is no end to unfair gaming practices.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such illegal gaming activities and to control the illegal activity by the light emitting means or the alarm by sound or the like. Yes.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and effects will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process result. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a display mode (a symbol, various background images, characters, display images of characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, The display mode and operation mode of various members (production operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) contributing to the production are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning is made, the number of pending special symbol sides is increased by one. To be done.

  If the process flag is 0 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, after the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested and executed on condition that the number of holds is 1 or more, the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored The processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the fluctuation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator based on the stored result of the big hit judgment and the current gaming state etc. The processing flag is updated to “2” after determining and setting a stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) after a special symbol variable display is started and stopped.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, processing during variation is executed. In this changing process, the change time determined and set in the change pattern setting process is monitored by the timer, and the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the time-out. Stop. After that, when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is not a big hit (losing) Then, the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the big hit game processing is executed. In this big hit game processing, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game is operated, and the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the big hit game determined based on the type of the winning big hit, Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, processing to stop the operation of the condition device is performed, or when the winning big hit type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a short time state or a probable change state. After updating the gaming state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored as the fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of symbol variation of the special symbol, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, an effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for outlying reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation. The big hit fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In the effect display device 1600, after reaching the reach effect, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed in a fixed stop state. Production is performed. The loss reach variation is a variation performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach determination is performed based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 performs the decoration through the reach effect. An effect is developed in which the change display of the symbols is finally lost and the symbols are displayed in a fixed stop state. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number is not determined to reach, and the effect display device 1600 does not reach the reach effect. An effect is carried out in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally released so as to display the off symbol for a final decision. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is defined so as to be able to identify which fluctuation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to this, it is possible to make such a variation pattern of the decorative symbol appear. In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the effect display device 1600 causes the decorative pattern variation pattern to appear, and the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed. Control is performed to change the mode (display or movement) in the operation unit 400, or to operate a movable member such as the back and back movable effect unit 3100.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special motorized prize control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, in the main control program, when it is shifted to the special symbol and special motorized item control processing (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is firstly, as shown in FIG. A random number for the first jackpot determination is acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter on condition that the detection signal by the one starting opening sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (YES in step S5231) The first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). On the condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number (second special symbol) A second start-port passing process is performed such that the second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R probability variation big hit A" or "8R normal big hit", the big prize opening 2005 Opening / closing pattern (round game) which is closed when the game is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R big hit gaming state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 or not, and is controlled to a 16R big hit game state that repeats 16 times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the game is received by the count sensor 4005 after 9 game balls have been won in the grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to an 8R big hit game state that is repeated eight times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed after being closed is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state which is repeated twice.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time reduction control is executed, the right hitting is more advantageous for the player than the left hitting, and in the situation where the time saving control is not executed As described above, the left hand is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a big win is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a maximum of 8 rounds of long-open big hit game Only the state (about 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004, the probability of approximately 50% (allocation ratio of winning types The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained when winning a big hit, such as that a big hit game state (generally 2,000 game balls can be obtained) of 16 rounds of long time opening is executed. In the case of being controlled to shift to the right, it is possible to expect to obtain a greater amount of prize balls than in the left.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the open control of such big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

  Also, in the jackpot control process, after performing the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, according to the winning type of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game, a high probability Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

  The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit judgment processing shown in FIG. 109 described later, and a big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 16R) which performs probability change control after the end of the big hit gaming state. Certain variation big hit, 8R certain variation big hit B) is set when you end the big hit gaming state based on B), when the next big hit will be the first special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 114 described later or the second special symbol stop processing not shown It is reset by.

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time reduction control (high probability time reduction state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. 114. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is set when the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit B, 8R probability variation big hit B) is terminated. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated. Alternatively, when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning a jackpot after a low probability short-time state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated.

  The fluctuation number counter is a counter that indicates the fluctuation number of the special symbol after the fluctuation number counter is reset, and is used in a first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later It is updated when variation of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed (for example, counting up) and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit B) It is reset when starting the jackpot gaming state based on.

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set as the processing of step S5236. Is determined. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such open control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a short time flag, a short time Each set process such as a count counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the big hit determination is not won.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is “0” (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process concerning the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, when the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S5237), The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is performed so that the lottery for the second special symbol placed on hold is not lost (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is “0”), the first special symbol Regardless of the holding status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be continuously performed without interruption (preferential execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time saving state (high probability time short state), the player can maintain the hitting (right hitting) of the game ball to the right of the center character 2500, It becomes possible to continuously perform only the lottery (judgment process) on the random numbers for the two big hit judgments without interruption.

  In addition, it is limited to the special figure game (pattern change) using the second special figure (second special symbol) to be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). For example, execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and from the stored data, the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started. It is good if you can decide

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first start port passage processing (step S5232).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first start port sensor 4002 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (a big hit determination random number, a reach determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, a variable display pattern random number) ) Is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the processing of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is used as a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in

  Next, the first special figure prefetch process for executing the prefetch effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the prefetching effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is started. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed and the contents of the effecting on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information relating to the winning for prefetching determination, symbol type for prefetching judgment) Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5242 that the first special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5243 to S5245, the first special symbol variation display is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S5234).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is on and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (second big hit determination random number, second reach determination random number, second big hit symbol for The random number and the second variable display pattern random number) are acquired from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations for the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control for the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly reserved. In order to achieve the state of (5), the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

  That is, first, as the processing of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S5254, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S5251. To store.

  Then, next, a second special drawing pre-reading process for executing pre-reading effect on the second special drawing side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the second special view side prefetching effect is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol before starting variable display of the second special symbol. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence / absence of prefetching and the contents of the presentation on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5252 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5253 to S5255, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  A command for instructing the number of reserved special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) when the number of retained special balls changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002. (First pending number specification command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of second special symbols held changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) indicates the number of second special symbols held. Command (second pending number specification command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and the special motor symbol control process and the second special symbol process processing executed in the step S5239 of the special symbol and special motor symbol control processing are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process processings will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read out big hit determination random number, the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol etc. First special symbol normal processing to be performed (step S5280)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the determination process on the display mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop )

  3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for variation display pattern, or the special effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 is executed corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like for the variation mode of the effect display to be displayed is performed (step S5282)

  4. First special symbol variation processing that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283).

  5. The first special symbol display mode 1403 is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 as the first special symbol display mode is determined based on the result of the determination process on the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5301. As a process of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a change display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302 next. First random number related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special reserved number stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. First-in first-out (First-In, First-In) random numbers (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped The shift operation is performed in the First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol hold storage area a to first special symbol hold storage area d), and the start winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). . Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  After that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process that is a determination process for the big hit is based on the read first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), the process ends.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 110A if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short state) (step S5311). The big hit determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the big hit determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 110A is selected (step S5313) and selected The jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the game state is low in probability for each type of special random numbers (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). (Low probability non-short time state, low probability short time state) and low probability jackpot judgment table and high used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-time short state, high probability short time state) And a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the jackpot determination table at low probability that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, it matches with the jackpot determination value indicating that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers have won the jackpot, 65332 The first big hit determination random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the first big hit determination random number of the type matches the loss determination value indicating that it is the loss (a big hit probability at a low probability; “1/321”). On the other hand, in order to compare with the jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing In the jackpot determination table at the time of the low probability to be referenced, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 65332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately “1/321”).

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at high probability referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value and 63634 types of first jackpot determination The first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63396 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination value) The number of jackpot judgment values may be different with the same number (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the jackpot determination table at the low probability and the jackpot determination table at the high probability may be different (both may be different). .

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and determines that it is a jackpot (step S5315). ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation has been won in big hit is set (step S5316), it ends big hit decision processing.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that a big hit has been lost, the read big hit determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won based on the selected big hit determination table. It is judged whether or not it is (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) in this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; In this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit is not won (judgment is determined).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the loss occurs, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in a high probability non-short-time state, and when the gaming state is in a high-probability short time state And a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-short state state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number indicates reach is reached, and the reach determination value indicates that the 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The reach determination random numbers are associated with one another so as to coincide with the above. However, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, in order to maximize the progression speed of the game in the time reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that all 72 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach is matched In this case, it may not coincide with the reach determination value indicating reach.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state are reached The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 reach reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than that in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state and the low probability state The random numbers for reach determination are associated with one another such that the random number for reach matches the reach determination value indicating that the 67 random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating that the reach will not be reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is the same as the low probability non-short state.

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319), it determines that reach loss has occurred (YES in step S5120) Then, a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S5121).

  FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B), and the random number for the first big hit symbol read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is determined by comparing with the selected symbol determination table (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the random number for the first big hit symbol (here, a total of 200) for the determination result (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) Of the first jackpot symbol) is stored in an associated manner. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side includes a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) Here, a total of 200 second big hit symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the first jackpot symbol random number and the type of the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number are set to be different . More specifically, the distribution ratio (allocation) between the high probability probability transition probability odd hit and the normal probability hit that does not become the high probability status transition is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number is greater than the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the random number ing.

The following is a concise summary of the specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.
1. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Next, the game is controlled to the high probability time reduction state until the big hit gaming state occurs, and a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state is performed. Are controlled to the effect mode indicated in the effect display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the low probability time short state until the variation display of special symbol is digested 100 times (or won in the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state A battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in a low probability time reduction state, the effect display device is relatively in a disadvantageous state 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 16 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) and control it to 16R big hit gaming state, and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it will be 16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state (successful production) ) Will be added, and a relatively advantageous state will be given after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high probability short-time state. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the high probability time and short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, during the execution period of 8R big hit gaming state the effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (will 16 rounds) ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high-probability time-short state, this is a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600 or for a long time. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected at 2 is repeated twice to control the game ball to a 2R big hit game state that is difficult to enter the big prize opening 2103. After this 2R big hit game state, Control the low probability time short state until the variable display of the symbol is digested 100 times (or win a big hit within the period until it is digested 100 times), and a specific character during the execution period of the 2R big hit gaming state In the production display device 1600, a battle production (battle defeat production) is defeated, and in a low probability short-time state, the state is relatively disadvantageous. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol display 1403, and the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball is not won at the first start port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 in the second special symbol display 1186 except for the case where there is a first special symbol holding ball. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and big hits (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol are generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the maximum winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), and the opening / closing pattern is repeated 8 times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. With a big hit related to the second special symbol, a maximum of 2000 game balls can be paid out by repeating an open / close pattern that opens the grand prize winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 8R probability variable big hit A is determined, the 8R probability variable big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R normal big hit is determined, the 8R normal big hit symbol is changed to the 8R normal big hit symbol. decide. Although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is decided, the 8R probability variation big hit is decided as the big hit symbol. When it is decided to B design and decided to 2R normal big hit, it decides to 2R normal big hit design as big hit design.

  In addition, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as processing in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small special symbol ( After determining to the specific pattern stop mode) (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the special symbol is in the lost pattern as the variation stop state (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337 To do.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 performs the above-mentioned lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach is out of place, out of place as processing in step S5337) The determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set such that an instruction (which may indicate the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) as the process of step S5338, this process is ended.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and change pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration symbols are displayed in a variable manner and left decoration symbol → right decoration symbol → The stop display is made in the order of the middle decoration pattern (in addition, the left, middle and right decoration symbols may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and may be displayed simultaneously and stopped). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when winning as a big hit is a type other than 2R normal big hit. On the other hand, when the 2R normal big hit is obtained, it is decided to a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols). In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols having the same left and right decorative designs of “0” to “9” but having a different middle decorative design; reach lose When the design is determined and the design is specified, the design with no reach is determined (combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns having at least the left and right decorative patterns different). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect is ended).

  In any case, when the winning is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the winning effect display (special display mode) to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game After the game is started, an effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S5341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided at step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), small hit flag Is set (step S5343), a small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a reach variation pattern table ( (Not shown) (step S5346), and the big hit flag and the small hit flag If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation display pattern random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this processing is ended. Thereby, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed in the first special symbol display 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a big hit determination random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) and a big hit symbol random number (first big hit symbol random number, second big hit symbol random number) A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the above. The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The first change display pattern random numbers are stored in a form associated with each other. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process in step S5302 among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number. The above-mentioned special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing the variable display pattern random number with the random number for variable display pattern read out and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern from this table. Determine the change pattern of Thereby, the determination process about the change pattern of the said special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) comes to be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small win is not won, but the small win may be won.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, the type of reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is executed with the random number for the variable display pattern. Has been. For example, in the non-short-time state, 164 types of random display pattern random numbers among the 241 types of random display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the random numbers for the variable display pattern is to execute any one of the super-reaching effects having a low jackpot expectation level, and the 18 random display pattern random numbers have a high jackpot expectation level. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

  The super reach production (SP production) is higher in the expectation of a big hit than the normal reach production, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit gaming state, the player for the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. Expectations are rising. That is, such a super reach effect is the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit, and the expectation of the player for the big hit gaming state even if the loss is finally displayed by this Will be able to raise However, actually, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state, a high expectation advance notice effect of being drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears while the super reach effect is being executed. It is required to do (composite).

  In addition, it is provided corresponding to the random number for the first jackpot determination and the random number for the first jackpot symbol, and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds is commonly set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to The variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-short-time state. Thus, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short time state and in the non short time state, and in the short time state, during the variation of the first special symbol, the game ball wins the second starting hole 2004. At the same time, the player has secured a time for the player to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2004.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of the second special symbol loss, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) It will be suppressed that it is discharged | emitted without being provided to a lottery process.

  That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the area immediately above the gate unit 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area to the gate unit 2003 while in a time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state), a hit as an ordinary symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). Thereby, in a situation where it can be successively received in the second start opening 2004 (a short time in which substantially all of the game balls hit to the right of the center character 2500 can be received in the second start opening 2004). Even if these game balls are accepted, a control is performed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of “approximately 1/32”. Become possible.

  In this example, when the player operates the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) The game ball can be received more frequently at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the starting opening 2004. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely variable as the fluctuation time of the short time state (high probability short time state etc.). It can be set to a short 0.1 second. In other words, in this case, when the losing is obtained, the symbol variation will be completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are successively received by the second start port 2004, it is possible to prevent such game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5371. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, as a result, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned drawn fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284) in the process of step S5373, this process is ended.

  In addition, even if the fluctuation timer has been decremented by 1 (step S5371), when the fluctuation time timer has not become 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped), Every time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5381. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol indicator 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as the command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is to be started (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (the time for displaying the jackpot gaming state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, When the time-short flag is reset (step S5389), the variation counter is further reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process that is the initial value (step S5389). In step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is executed in the above big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The big hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of big hit. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8R positive change big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 16R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, the jackpot gaming state effect (battle effect or extra challenge effect) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the low probability time-short state is present (step S5390). Then, when in the low probability time short state, it is determined whether or not the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time short state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time short state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition to end the low probability time short state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-short playing state) (step S5392).

  Then, after the processing related to the time-shortening function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), the small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is performed. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process of the first special symbol process flag is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. When updated to (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit executing flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240 b) is performed. The small hit gaming state will be executed. By the way, unlike when a big hit is won, there is no case where the gaming state is changed when executing such a small hitting gaming state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without processing for the big hit or the small hit, assuming that it is a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process can be shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S5394), this processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is executed according to the status of suspension. A process according to the progress of (lottery, symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S5402. Do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal symbol normal processing in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out and the lottery processing for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403)
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 1402 is stopped (step S5405).
4. The pattern at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1402 as the mode at the time of the variation control stop Normal symbol stop processing to stop the key (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “per-common”, the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing the process for controlling the machine (step S5407)

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated such that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S5402).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the on state in the process of the step S5401, and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. It will process. That is, first, as the processing of step S5412, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5413, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common-use variation random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, in step S5414, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of step S5412 to step S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, then, as the processing of step S5422, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol storage area of the main control MPU 1310a is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of the steps S5423 and S5424, the ordinary holding number counter is counted down, and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol stored in each storage area of the ordinary storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the random number extracted to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal time hit table determination table (not shown) if the current gaming state is a short time state (high probability short time state) (step S5426) ( In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S5425), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) is selected ( In step S5427), the selected common drawing determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

  It should be noted that the per-common-figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the per-common-pattern determination table used when the game state is short (high probability time short state) and the game state is non-short And a non-time / short-time normal figure determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-time short state, high probability non-time short state). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table, which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it corresponds to the common-mode-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the 255 types of normal random numbers have been selected per common diagram. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the deviation judgment value which is a deviation. As described above, when the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2003, the winning ball is always won by the usual time, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. Controls acceptance. Instead of all 255 types, a larger number of ordinary random numbers than in the non-time-saving state may coincide with the determination value per universal figure indicating that it is won per universal figure.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won. Instead, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value. As described above, in the short time, even if the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003, the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting opening, since the player can not win the winning game. There is no possibility to control the reception of gaming balls to 2004. However, as described above, the hit of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-short time condition, and in this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than the short time condition, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the hit. The movable piece of the second start opening 2004 is opened for a time shorter than the short time, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start opening 2004, and then advanced again. The reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 may be disabled.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that it is normal symbol (step S5429). ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S5430), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal symbol) at the time of change control stop of normal symbol The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected normal symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A common figure as a mode (a stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of control stop determines a shift symbol (step S5432). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

  While the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby obtaining the peripheral control unit steady process (received command analysis process ( In step S1022)), the game situation in each case is grasped, and effects corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, effect symbol variation start process, effect symbol variation in process, effect symbol variation stop process, jackpot display process Performs either a jackpot in-game process or a jackpot end effect process.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process: It takes an effect (demonstration effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a. When the control is performed and the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process.

  Effect symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decoration symbol change is started based on the determined effect contents. To control. Then, after that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process of rendering symbol variation. Of the variation patterns (effect patterns), many of the “variation patterns stopped with jackpot symbols (effect patterns)” are prepared in pairs with the “variation patterns stopped with loss symbols (effect patterns)”. Since they function as the same variation pattern (effect pattern), it is possible to provide an effect as to whether a big hit symbol or a lost symbol appears. Therefore, hereinafter, when describing the variation pattern (effect pattern), when “predetermined variation pattern”, “specific variation pattern”, etc. are described, unless otherwise noted, “stops at the big hit symbol” It means both “predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)” and “predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) stopped by losing symbol”, and as a result of the development of the production in the same manner It will arrive at the branch point where either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Effect symbol variation processing: Various effects determined in the effect symbol variation start process are controlled at each timing during the symbol variation period, and the process flag value is determined when the variation time ends. Update to a value corresponding to the change stop process.
Production symbol variation stop processing: Control of deriving and displaying the display result (stop symbol) by stopping the variation of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the command (design determination command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped. If the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing, and if the decorative symbol is stopped at the loss symbol symbol, the process flag value is changed to a waiting process for receiving the variation pattern designation command. Update to a value corresponding to.

  Big hit display processing: It controls the effect in the period from the stop of the decorative symbol with the big hit symbol to the start of the big hit game (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit). After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

  During the big hit game processing: Control concerning various effects during the occurrence period of the big hit game state is performed. When the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process.

  Big-hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the player that the big-hit gaming state has ended) is controlled in a period from the end of the big-hit gaming state to the variation allowed state. . Then, the process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the effect symbol fluctuation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (the fluctuation effect) associated with the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the effect pattern determined It will control so that the fluctuation of a decorative symbol is started based on (the fluctuation production).

  Note that the effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily correspond one-to-one with the change number indicated by the change pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variation effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may do it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is also configured such that a plurality of effect patterns are associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  In addition, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the effect pattern (variation effect) in this way, performs a lottery (notice effect determination process) based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By performing the control (process during effect symbol variation) for causing the notice effect won in the notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the determined effect pattern (variable effect) is performed, a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. The expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears is suggested by the appearance mode etc. as those that can be combined.

  In the past, among such combined effects, there may be a plurality of occurrences while the same specified notice effect (for example, timer effect) is being performed while one effect pattern (variation effect) is being executed. As a result, it is expected to maintain amusement interests. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation of the big hit design is high, the frequency at which a plurality of timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variation effect) is being executed will naturally be low. Therefore, it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve the game entertainment.

  Although described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect appearing during the execution of the effect pattern (variation effect), and the count display toward the timing when the predetermined effect is performed is a first predetermined value. (E.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined numerical value (e.g., "0 second") or a count effect display, or a standby display (such as in preparation) before starting the count display It is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, the countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, a presentation (for example, a conversation announcement or a cut-in A) that causes the player to appear either in a relatively disadvantageous presentation mode (a presentation mode with a low degree of expectation) or an advantageous presentation mode (a presentation mode with a high degree of expectation). , B, etc.) are targeted for timer production, it is guaranteed that an advantageous production result will surely occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (in particular, the advance side timer effect performed as a result of the advance lottery), at least when the count display is started, it is concealed as to which effect is the effect target It is desirable to do so. In addition, “effect object of timer effect” is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, the countdown) from the first predetermined value as the timer effect becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) In the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

  In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time since the start of counting is displayed up to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds and the like. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect. If it is executed as a count effect in which a count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to indicate the number of seconds) correctly.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as effect contents appearing only when winning in the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect). That is, in this case, if only the notice-side timer effect is executed, the count effect display is executed as "advantage effect of the advance effect which functions to increase the jackpot expectation degree with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, it is also executed as “the content of the effect of the effect pattern itself determined based on the change pattern command”, and the expectation from the big hit expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the change pattern command It is possible to cause the count effect display (the timer effect) to appear without wasting the item in vain (the increase in the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the advance notice lottery"). For example, when the big hit expectation when the specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", when the advance side timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation is increased by the function of the combined effect. For example, it becomes “40%” and the frequency of appearance must be lowered by that amount, but when the fluctuation side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, the big hit is expected It is possible to execute the timer effect while keeping the degree at “20%” (it is possible to appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and it is possible to preferably maintain the appearance frequency.

  In the determination table T1, the jackpot expectation when the rendering pattern (variation rendering) appears differs depending on the variation number (further, the rendering pattern), and basically, as the variation number increases, the jackpot expectation There is a tendency to become higher. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10) and 17 (18), the fluctuation-side timer effect is executed in which "conversation announcement" is the effect target as the effect contents. While the appearance ratio is fluctuation number 5 (6)> fluctuation number 9 (10)> fluctuation number 17 (18), the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is fluctuation number 5 (6) <fluctuation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Here, for convenience of description, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state is described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time short state or the high probability time short state, the contents of the effect pattern itself As an effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the fluctuation-side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, all of the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but in the variation numbers 5 and 6, the variation timer effect can be executed for the presentation of conversation announcement. This is different from the variation numbers 3 and 4. The variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. However, the variable numbers 9 and 10 execute the variable timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice, In 12, the fluctuation-side timer effect for the cut-in A is performed, and for the fluctuation numbers 13 and 14, the conversation announcement and the cut-in A are executed, and the fluctuation-side timer effect for the effects is performed. It differs in that it can be done. In addition, although the variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, the variation numbers 17 and 18 perform the variation-side timer effect for the presentation of the conversation announcement, and the variation numbers 19 and 18 In 20, the variable-side timer effect for the cut-in B is executed, and for the fluctuation numbers 21 and 22, the conversation announcement and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable-side timer effect for the effects is performed It is different in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation rate is higher in the case where the fluctuation-side timer effect directed to the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the fluctuation-side timer effect directed to the conversation announcement is executed. Is set so that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the variable timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

  In addition, with "conversation notice", it is possible to appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (the change effect of the decorative symbol) is executed, and the effect that the relatively low expectation degree is often made On the other hand, the cut-in A and B are allowed to appear at a relatively late stage after the production pattern (decorative production of the decorative design) is executed, and the expectation level is relatively high. This is often an effect (or an effect in which a relatively high expectation is always added). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than that of other effects (cut-in A, B, and later-described accessory A action, B, etc.) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be In addition, "Cut in" that appears as the content of the fluctuation effect is executed to correspond to the cut in A that appears as the effect content of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the "cut in" appears. It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A that appears as production contents of the production.

  Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect contents (reproduction pattern) for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) ) Is assigned as the variable timer production. On this basis, if the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (such as variation numbers 1 to 6) such as a shortened variation or a low-expected normal reach effect”, a count effect display as a notice timer effect is displayed. While the effect is not won (by increasing the premium level) and the expected level UP when the notice timer effect appears, the change pattern is “change pattern (execution of change side timer effect ( Variation number 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) ”, the variation pattern is the above-described predetermined type (for example, variation) compared to the case where the variation number is not such a count variation pattern. The ratio corresponding to the numbers 1 to 6) is made low.

  Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are prepared as the count variation patterns in which the variation timer effect is executed. Since only variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) which may be set individually may correspond to the above predetermined type (variation numbers 1 to 6 etc.), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. In contrast, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation timer presentation is not executed, and four variation patterns (variations) Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined type (variable numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

  In such a configuration, when the effect content of the fluctuation pattern is one capable of performing count effect display (fluctuation timer effect) (count fluctuation pattern), a notice is given rather than the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation timer effect is not performed. The rate at which it is determined that the count effect display (notice timer effect) can not be executed as the effect content of the effect decreases. Therefore, it is possible to urge the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one rendering pattern (variation rendering) without unnecessarily accumulating the expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is a count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) ), The proportion of occurrence of the notice side timer effect varies depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variable numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the notice timer effect is not displayed at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When it happens, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the above notice timer effect can appear with a high draw probability. ing.

  Even when the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect may appear with low probability. In addition, even when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, it is actually a big hit than in the case of a loss The above-mentioned notice effect timer effect can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability in the effect pattern which has been won, and the fluctuation number 22 can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability than the fluctuation number 16 ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is displayed in advance according to whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio to be executed as the production contents (notice timer production) is different. Therefore, among the above-described count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type thereof Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In particular, although it will be described later, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if it is a rendering pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the rendering content of the same reach type appears, the fluctuation side timer rendering is included as the rendering content In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variable timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which it is determined in the advance notice lottery that the advance notice timer effect is to be executed) is increased. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuating timer effect and advance timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation for winning only one forward timer effect in the advance lottery. As a result, the opportunity to produce a double timer can be realized without wasteful accumulation of the big hit expectation.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (the change effect) determined in the effect pattern change start process is the count change pattern (the change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). Even in this case, the fluctuation-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) in which “conversation announcement” is the target of rendering and the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) in which the “cut-in” is the rendering target In the above, the aspect of the count display (the form and color of the count number, etc.) is made different. That is, in this case, even when the effect pattern (for example, the change numbers 9, 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the change side timer effect (change side count effect display) is confirmed In combination with "the rate at which the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count fluctuation pattern is made", it is recognized that the notice-side timer effect is likely to appear. You will be able to expect.

  In addition, about the aspect of the count display which appears by advance notice side timer production (notice side count production indication), fluctuation side timer production (fluctuation side regardless of whether the production object is the same (conversation notice, cut in) or not It may be different from (or at least different from) the aspect of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same aspect (or at least the same as at least one). .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (notice side count effect display) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be produced. This is useful for making it possible for the player to recognize that the notice-side timer effect set to a high degree is appearing and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more preferable that the notice side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). About the common aspect as the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of aspects (for example, a blue count and a red count) having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do it.

  In order to make it possible to more appropriately recognize that the advance notice timer effect is being executed, the count display when the advance notice timer effect is executed and the count display when the fluctuation timer effect is executed It is desirable to make the counting speed different (for example, the speed at which the number changes in counting up or down). In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is focused on even during a period in which the count display is in progress, and the fluctuation-side timer effect and the relative degree are relatively low. Thus, it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the highly anticipated advance notice timer effects is being executed, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest during the timer digestion period.

  Also, in this case, in the variable-side timer effect, according to the object (conversation notice, cut-in), the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the advance-timer function. If the count display is made with a cut-in) and an aspect (conversation announcement) in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the count speed of the advance notice side timer effect, whether or not the advance notice timer effect is executed It is possible to make the judgment difficult and to impart an interest. Also, while the count display is performed by repeating the appearance and deletion of the count number in the fluctuation-side timer effect (or the notice-side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed in the notice-side timer effect (or the fluctuation-side timer effect). You may make it count display by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the advance timer function are simultaneously executed, it is easily grasped whether or not the advance timer function is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment counts the change patterns corresponding to the change-side timer effect (count change patterns such as change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.). A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation-side timer effect is acquired, the count display of the fluctuation-side timer effect and the notification-side timer are performed so that any one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on random numbers for effect. If the ease of performing the same with the count display of the effect (for example, the larger the total number is easier to overlap, etc.) is made different, it may be different in the ease of judging whether or not the advance side timer effect is being executed. I am trying to give it an interest

  In this embodiment, the count display start timing or end timing (total count, or time required for all counts) differing from one variation pattern, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect targets and reach) The content of the production is the same), but multiple production patterns with different count display start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for all counts) (however, they are subject to production of timer production) A plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and corresponded one-on-one with the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern.

  In addition, even if the count display number (count total number) when appearing in the fluctuation side timer effect and the notice side timer effect is made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the fluctuation side timer effect and the advance notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different depending on the side timer effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the advance side timer effect is being performed and to make the difficulty different to impart an interest. .

  In addition, while the advance side timer effect is executed by the countdown display, if the variable side timer effect is executed by the count up display, it is determined whether or not the advance side timer effect is executed. It is expected that it will be possible to greatly improve the fun of gaming. Also, while the advance side timer effect is executed by the countdown display, the variable side timer effect for the specific effect (for example, conversation advance announcement) is executed by the count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the change-side timer effect for the cut-in) is executed by the countdown display, it is determined whether or not the advance timer-side effect is executed, and the difficulty is made different according to the effect object It becomes possible to grant.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is used as the production target for the variable timer production and the notice timer production, and there are cases where different productions are used as the production target. To control. And, when the same production (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for production in the variable timer production and the notice timer production, compared with the case where the production different in the variation timer production and the notice timer production is targeted. Even if it is set so that the rate at which the big hit expectation is lowered is high, and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is used for the effect on the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation announcement) is set as the target of the variable timer effect and the advance timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the advance timer effect is set to a predetermined value first. Because the other count display will be continued while it is terminated and reached, at this point in time, it is as if different effects are targeted (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation mode) Looks like). Then, after this, the other count display being continued also comes to a predetermined numerical value and ends in a mode in which it is clarified that the same effect (for example, conversational announcement) is targeted for the effect, so Even when it is revealed that a conversation announcement with a relatively low degree of expectation is targeted for the effect by the timer effect on the side that has ended, it is targeted for a different outcome that is allowed to appear later ( It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved while maintaining a sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a mode with relatively high expectations.

  In addition, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice timer effect is determined in advance. It is desirable to make each count end corresponding display (for example, "count success!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear at timing when the numerical value is reached.

  More specifically, a variable side timer effect and a notice side timer effect with “conversation notice” executed as an effect on the variable side or the notice side appearing in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the notice timer effect are simultaneously performed. In the variable timer effect, the variable side effect is related to the “conversation notice”. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production that occurs (such as “count success!” And effects that match the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice timer production is related to the “conversation notice”. A count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect ("chance UP!") That occurs as the notice side effect, or the timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect). By progressing, separate count end corresponding displays are made to appear at different timings.

  By the way, it is required that the conversation announcement and the cut-in effects are always executed when they are targeted for the effect of the variation timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation announcement and the cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, when the effect of the variable-side timer effect is targeted, the relative indication occurs when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effects to be produced for the variation timer production are incorporated in advance as the production contents of the production pattern (fluctuation production), and only the production pattern is executed, It is desirable that each of the effects (a relatively high expectation mode) can be made to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that the effect (the aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the effect target in the advance notice lottery is always selected when the variable side timer effect is executed. .

  In addition, when each presentation of the conversation announcement and the cut-in is not set as the presentation object of the fluctuation side timer presentation, from the fact that it is judged whether it is made to appear as the presentation contents of the announcement side in the announcement lottery described later A determination is made as to what aspect (a relatively high-expectation aspect or a low-expectation aspect) to appear as the side effect content, and control related to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination .

The process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 118 will be summarized below.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, and the like from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, etc. Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, bias (expected degree) can be given to the probability variation expectation degree when the specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, etc. become.

  Next, as the production pattern associated with the variation number, a plurality of production patterns (a plurality of production patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display appearing in the variation timer production) are prepared so as to be selectable. If it is determined, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different count display start timing or end timing is selected based on the success of the big hit determination. At this time, if the big hit determination is won, the production pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed becomes high, and thereby the start timing or end timing of the count display It is made to have a tendency that the possibility of the jackpot pattern appearing becomes higher as

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in the case, among the plurality of effect patterns, the effect pattern set so as not to appear the fluctuation-side timer effect is selected.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern that appears during the symbol variation (the effect from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the variation stop) is selected in this way, what kind of notice effect is performed within the execution period of the effect pattern. It will be determined whether to execute additionally (in combination) in the following manner (notice lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) which has already been described, the explanation regarding the automatic channel sound control which is a part thereof will be described later. Therefore, automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, I will briefly explain the background.

  In a general pachinko machine, an effect that attracts the player's interest is output by outputting various sounds from a speaker in each scene as the game progresses. For example, even if the reach is to improve the player's expectation, some reach various sounds depending on the type and others do not. In such a typical pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound corresponds to each corresponding default. Reproduction is performed using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel assignment. There is a problem that it is impossible to realize various sound effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds) for the purpose of realizing a variety of sound effects by effectively utilizing empty channels and enhancing the interest of the player. While each channel is dynamically allocated and managed for each sound to be output from the output means and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), the number of combinations of sounds to be output is When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in the present embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via the channels dynamically allocated within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means) . The details will be described below.

12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIG. 119 (A) and FIG. 119 (B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison object with respect to the present embodiment. FIG. 119A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural.

  As for "informing sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the drawing, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has been started should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. As a channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and sound are assigned exclusively as a pair so that sound overwriting does not occur. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled. As a channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so as not to suffer from the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. With regard to sounds that would be harmful if overwritten, separate channels are assigned, or sounds with non-overlapping play timings are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. This sound definition table manages the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound classification and sound name. Yes. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description is omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 122 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122 (C) cannot be reproduced when attempting to reproduce each sound. An example of a problem is shown. In these FIGS. 122A to 122C, the horizontal axes are mutually common time axes.

  In FIG. 122 (A), the game state is sequentially along the time axis which is the horizontal axis as "the first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be “medium”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 in FIG. 122 (C), a new sound is given as a new sound during the playback time of “first notice A” (“hold” shown in the figure). 119 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “first half notice A”, as shown in FIG. The “previous first-notice A” sound output is stopped because the reproduction sound of “1” is overwritten with the hold winning sound (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 in FIG. 122 (C), a new sound is generated during the playback time of “Full Screen Notice” (“Pending” shown in the figure). 119 (B), as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen notice”. "" Is reproduced by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen advance notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 123 (A) and 123 (B) respectively show an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment.

  FIG. 123A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel classification as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the drawing). The point is different. Here, the channel classification is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed and variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned in accordance with a rule described later (described above). Corresponded to “automatic channel sound control”).

  In the automatic channel system sound control according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the above-described fixed channel system sound control. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 123B shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned a priority. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure should not be muted in the middle of the sound that has been started to be played back until the end of playback. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sounds for the AUTO group. When sound is assigned to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for specifying a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, it is reproduced immediately if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

  In the above case, if there is no empty channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound being played back, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and plays a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no vacant channel in the AUTO group whose priority is lower than or equal to the priority of the sound itself being reproduced.

  FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound classification and sound name, the playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, etc. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying an AUTO group (also referred to as “playback priority”), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definition of number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. The priority indicates that the larger the numerical value is the sound to be reproduced with priority, while the smaller the numerical value is a sound to be reproduced without priority. In the present embodiment, as an order of types of sound to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sound having a priority of “25” (“informing sound 1”, “informing sound 2” and “informing sound 3”) , Sound effects with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmed sound" and "button press sound"), BGMs with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10" Sound effects (such as “full-screen notice sound effects”), sound effects with a priority of “05” (“first half notice sound effects” to “second half notice sound effects”), hold winning sounds with a priority of “01” It is said. As a result, for example, when a notification sound is to be reproduced in a state where there is no empty channel, there is no need to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and a lower priority sound (for example, a reserved winning sound) The notification sound is to be preferentially reproduced using the channel currently being reproduced).

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the sound from the left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, setting “0x00” indicates that only the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and setting “0x80”, for example, indicates that the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Also, as described above, upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, upper and lower upper and lower speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). The sound localization initial position of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, and additionally “1” (0x1FF in the third byte) ) Is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided on the gaming machine, and is always played at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, for example, “0” is set as “seek point” in the “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect” as this seek point, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect” Each sound is set to [1]. Such seek points allow registration of sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered when exceeding the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source.

  The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority order. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. In FIGS. 126 (A) and 126 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), as the gaming state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “ It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be “big hit”.

  In “the first half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), for example, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction” is reproduced from start to end in reproduction channels 00 to 01 Equivalent to range A). Here, when trying to reproduce the on-hold winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting opening winning (corresponding to the “on-hold winning” in the figure), reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), for example, the “reach BGM playback” sound is played all the time on the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponding to range B). Here, for example, if there is a start winning (corresponding to “holding winning” shown in the figure) and the player tries to play the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without being overwritten by the pending winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure).

  In the “second half of the change” shown in FIG. 126 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is generated. When trying to reproduce “information 2” shown in the figure, as a result of the search for the empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels that are reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the figure) is set. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control is, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a required sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic allocation group, an automatic allocation priority, an elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a workpiece for work and a workpiece for pan control, and has respective information corresponding thereto.

  The setting reservation flag has a value other than “0” to indicate that setting reservation is made. The required sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if “−1” is not stopped and other than “−1”. The sounding number during reproduction indicates the sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced if "-1" is not stopped and is other than "-1".

  In the automatic assignment group, when “0”, the channel is fixedly assigned, while when “1”, the channel is automatically assigned (“sound control by automatic channel method” described later). Equivalent). Here, for example, if the automatic allocation group is “1”, it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is “2”, it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time when the desired reproduction sound is registered as “0”. Note that the elapsed time since the registration is one of the plurality of sounds being reproduced when trying to reproduce a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic assignment are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

  The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the top and bottom pans described above.

  FIG. 128 shows an example of an empty channel search process when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. In FIG. 128, the channel is also abbreviated as “ch”.

  When there is a request for reproduction of a new sound (step S1100A), the production control program checks an automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102A), and when this automatic allocation group is “0”, fixed allocation is performed. It is determined that is, and reproduction of a new sound is started on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that the allocation is automatic allocation, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). .

  The effect control program determines whether a vacant (monaural) channel (one channel) exists if the new sound is monaural (step S1108A), and if there is a vacant sound (monophonic), the vacant space (monaural) ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound in the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound in the (mono) channel being reproduced It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110A).

  The effect control program ends the processing when there is no reproduced sound channel that is the same as or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, while it exists when it exists. It is determined whether there is a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

  When there are multiple corresponding channels, the production control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time since registration based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are a plurality of corresponding channels but not one (step S1116A).

  On the other hand, in the above-described step S1106A, when the production control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120A). When it is determined that there is an empty channel, the effect control program selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproduction of the new sound (step S1122A).

  On the other hand, if the effect control program determines that there is no empty channel, it determines whether or not the (stereo) channel of the sound being played back has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step S1124A) Since the process is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten with the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, when the effect control program exists, the effect control program determines whether a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1126A).

  The production control program starts outputting the new sound with a (stereo) channel satisfying a desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, and when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, Based on the elapsed time from registration, reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel with the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

  As described above, the effect control program searches for an available channel in order to reproduce a new sound. The process of searching for such free channels will be explained more visually and intelligibly.

  FIGS. 129 (A) and 129 (B) to 132 (A) and 132 (B) respectively show an example of the specific contents of the free channel search process. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playback of normal BGM having a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice A, which has a priority of 05, and reproduces the reproduced channel 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for a button pressing sound having a priority of 20, and sets the playback channels 04 to 05 to the search channels. Since there is a vacancy, playback of the button press sound is started in stereo using these playback channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice B, which has a priority of 05, as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy in .about.07, reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06.about.07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a jackpot definite sound playback request with a priority of 20, and sets playback channels 08-09 to Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the big hit definite sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first half notice_C having a priority of 05 is generated, and plays channel 10 Since there is a vacancy of ̃11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing a reserved winning tone with a priority of 01 is generated, and sets the playback channels 12 to 13 to be free. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the on-hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the retrieval channels 14-15. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  133A and 133B to 136A and 136B each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 133 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a reach BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (B), the effect control program performs a search for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playing the annunciation sound 1 having a priority of 25 and makes available an available channel in the playback channels 02 to 03. As it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the processing as described above, the effect control program next, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), vacant channels are triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the full-screen warning sound with the priority of 10. Since there is a free space in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 with priority 25 is generated, and FIG. 134 (A) shows. As shown, since there is a space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the drawing), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25, and plays channels 04 to 05 ( Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the drawing), reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using the reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a trailer sound with a priority of 10 as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacant)” (shown), reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 which are reproducing the "preserved winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

  In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is searched. Each sound of will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the free channel can be effectively utilized as described above, but each sound including the output schedule is as many as possible using each channel including the free channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

  FIG. 137 (A) and FIG. 137 (B) to FIG. 138 (A) and FIG. 138 (B) show examples of specific contents of the empty channel search processing, respectively. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, and the playback channel 00 to 01 becomes vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (B), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a right symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce a medium symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 is generated, and plays channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (B), the effect control program searches for a vacant channel triggered by the generation of a jackpot BGM reproduction request having a priority of 15, and makes the reproduction channel 00 to 01 vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the jackpot BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  In addition, when the replacement control of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that it is good to do so.

12-3. Variations of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed as an example using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound control by the fixed channel described above is used. You may make it perform sound control as follows by a combination.

  FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (F) are diagrams each showing a variation example of channel assignment in sound control by the two types of channel schemes described above or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 139 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control according to the fixed channel scheme for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 139 (B) The present invention corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel assignment in the case where sound control is performed by the automatic channel method by the maximum number of channels. The sound control based on these two channel allocations has already been described, so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 139 (C) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are allocated to reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN 2” in the figure) . FIG. 139 (D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used to perform channel assignment for the maximum number of playback channels and to perform sound control by the fixed channel method described above for some playback channels. (Corresponds to "PTN3" shown).

  FIG. 139 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the maximum number of playback channels using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for a part of the playback channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponds to "PTN 4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 140 and subsequent drawings.

  FIG. 139 (F) shows that automatic channel control is performed by assigning channels for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound according to the above-mentioned fixed channel system is performed for some reproduction channels. Although the control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel method shown in FIG. 139F will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting the automatic channel system in which all the channels are in one group, it is possible to assign free channels or replace the channels in the output based on the previously specified criteria. Sound can be output only by determining the priority of Therefore, unlike the conventional control method in which a channel is designated to output a sound, the management of the channel is not required, so that the control relating to the sound output can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as the automatic channel method, the sound allocation to each channel is dynamically changed so that a lot of sounds can be played back by effectively utilizing the empty channels. Since diversified gaming machines in recent years select and output hundreds or thousands of sounds, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  In addition, by superimposing and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to perform a preliminary announcement effect redundantly or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and by assigning a plurality of sounds and playback channels dynamically for each group, the sound is reliably duplicated and output. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that the management becomes easy by dividing the sound into types.

  Furthermore, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the effect sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start winning or the fluctuation display is Output by automatic channel method.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively utilize an idle channel by the automatic channel method and to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary channel switching control by the fixed channel method. In addition, since it is possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 139 (C) and 139 (D), and has the advantages of each method. The sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be specifically described below.

[15-1. Sound control that mixes fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 (ch), and a channel for reproducing a sound by a fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing a sound by an automatic channel method are included. . In addition, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, this will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in the sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of this embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for channel numbers, “classification” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “purpose of use” of each channel. Note that “remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 140 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is that the channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0”, and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound etc. which is displayed while displaying a maker's logo at the time of game machine activation. Also, channel 1 is a channel that makes a pair with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during game play or waiting for customers. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  In the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are output at the same time, thereby improving the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be simultaneously output. Further, as will be described later, since BGM can be output also on channel 20 (and channel 21), four BGMs can be output simultaneously using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. For this reason, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of an empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output at the time of the execution of the advance presentation effect. In the notice effect, the sound selected by lottery according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, etc. is output each time. As described above, for the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel system.

  In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound during the notice effect is AUTO group 1.

  In the case of outputting a sound at the time of execution of the preview effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for an available channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a vacant channel, it is set to output the designated sound from the vacant channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, the channel in use is opened and a new sound is output or the output of the designated sound is canceled based on a predetermined condition. A detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. This is used when four sounds are superimposed and BGM is output, or when a specific performance sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect that is output by the automatic channel method.

  Channels 22 and 23, like channels 20 and 21, are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels for outputting a hold sound. The on-hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority such as when a big hit is confirmed. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning are output from channels 24 to 29 as will be described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied. Channels 24 to 29 play sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel manner, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot determination even if there is no empty channel in channels 24 to 29, and draw the player's attention. Can.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound at the time of volume change and a notification sound at the time of payout of game media. Also, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel system channel is assigned when output is continuously continued as in BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably as in an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel method is applied to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., thereby preventing the sound from being output while there is an empty channel, and a channel with a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of free channel search processing in the case of executing control of outputting a sound according to the present embodiment. Although FIG. 128 describes the case of one AUTO group, FIG. 141 is different in having a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

  In the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 141, it is determined whether or not there is an empty channel in the same group of channels when the new sound is the automatic channel method in the processes of step S1108B and step S1120B. That is, even if different groups of channels are available, if the same channel group is not available, the results of step S1108B and step S1120B are “No”.

  Further, in the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 141, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, the channel selection condition for stopping sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The production in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping or releasing sound reproduction) when a channel is not empty when a new sound is output in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and the sound of higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume, the amount of change in the sound being played back, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection, Includes remaining playback time. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the reproduction time (elapsed time) from the start of reproduction. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A in FIG. 128, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. In this manner, the output of the effect sound sufficiently executed is ended by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time after the start of reproduction, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been performed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire performance. For example, since an effect with a long reproduction time can be an effect with a high degree of expectation, an effect with a short reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by stopping the effect with a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total playback time without depending on the playback time from the start of playback.

  Although the condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, for example, the sound output of the effect with a short (or long) effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress ratio of the effect. By setting the conditions in this manner, it is possible to stop the sound output at the initial stage or the final stage of the presentation.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, since an effect in which a large volume of sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, a channel with a small volume of output sound is selected with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected, and the player may be made to recognize that an effect is newly executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being played back. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect having a higher degree of importance, and a channel with a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speakers, it is possible to produce a more important effect by the effect that produces a more three-dimensional sound effect, a channel with less dynamic sound image localization position Select with priority. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, a large (small) number is selected. At this time, priority may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs monaural sound is selected on the assumption that the effect produced by stereo sound with high sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is released, select a channel for outputting stereo sound in order to increase vacant channels. It may be.

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that volume adjustment cannot be performed may be higher in importance, or an effect set so that volume adjustment can be performed may be higher in importance.

  In addition to the above-described conditions, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning unique priorities to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  In the table shown in FIG. 142, conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied alone or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example in which channel assignment control is performed based on priority assigned to newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel through which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority order of sound effects in the effect example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 143, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the first half notice_A occurs. At this time, when an instruction instruction for the effect button is displayed on the display screen and the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Furthermore, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice _A and the first half notice _B are being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 144, the priority of the first-half notice A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice C is 20. Furthermore, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice _B and the first half notice _C, the volume is selected based on the suppression volume value when the low priority preliminary announcement effects in the same group are executed in duplicate. Reduced.

  The first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and a character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output from the channels 08 and 09 in stereo.

  The first half advance notice B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button depression sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice B is started, and the effects from the channels 10 and 11 are in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice C, the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), and the sound with lower priority than the first half notice C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporary. The sound is muted (blackout effect). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half advance notice C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half advance notice A is started at time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

  Thereafter, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half advance notice B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority of the first-half notice _B is higher than the priority of the first-half notice _A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice _A is suppressed to 50%.

  It should be noted that the volume may not be lowered if the priority of the preview effect performed later is lower than or equal to the priority of the preview effect being executed, or even if there are few sound effects being output simultaneously You do not have to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Furthermore, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the effect sound of the first half notice A and the first half notice B, which are muffled from time t3, is resumed at time t5. The button pressing sound is originally output until time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half notice_C ends at time t8, and the first half of the change ends.

  Note that during the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (subvolume) for each channel may be set to 0, the main volume for controlling the volume of the overall effect sound effect is set to 0, and the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by control by the main volume. Further, even in the state where the output of another sound effect is suppressed by the first half advance notice C, the sound effect, the warning sound, and the notification sound having higher priority are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being reproduced, the volume of the sound being reproduced on all the channels is selected instead of lowering the volume of the sound designated by the volume suppression flag or the like. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). In addition, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the channel in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output a sound having a high priority. The sound with high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for reliably transmitting to the player or the game arcade employee, or the expectation for the result of the variable display to be a big hit is high. The sound effects are for enhancing the sense of expectation of the game, and the sound effects can be highly effective and can improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by grouping each channel used in sound source control into a plurality of groups, it becomes possible to facilitate management of effect data relating to effect sound. As a result, it is possible to improve the development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of a bug due to the execution of systematic tests. Also, by making stable gaming possible, the interest of gaming can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel method are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs the sound effects of the preview effect and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs the hold-related sound effects. The number of sound effects of the preliminary presentation effect is huge compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously at the same time. In particular, during the first half of the change, there may be a case where output of the effect sound exceeding the allocated number of channels may be requested by executing a pre-reading notice of the pending change together with the change notice. In such a case, the fun of the game can be maximized by outputting the rendering effect sound with low priority while replacing the rendering effect sound with high priority in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1 .

  Furthermore, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound along with the change of the suspension display of the variable display and the effect display along with this can greatly enhance the player's sense of expectation, and it is desirable to be executed surely . In this embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the notice effect with variable display, since the number of effect sound effects that are output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the output of effect sound effects is stopped. There is less chance of being Moreover, even if it is a case where it is canceled, the output of the effect sound with a low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a high-effect effect that enhances the player's sense of expectation.

  In this embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, while effectively utilizing a limited number of channels by searching for free channels, priority output is given to output high-representation effects and sounds with high importance by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case where the sound is continuously output as in the case of BGM, or the sound is preferentially output in order to notify of the breakdown of the gaming machine, the fraud, and the like. As described above, by applying the channel system suitable for the characteristics of the sound and the application, it is possible to effectively use each channel and to perform appropriate control in accordance with the sound output situation. For example, in control to output BGM, a sound may be output to a channel assigned in advance regardless of the gaming state, and in control to output an alarm sound, a designated channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. The sound should be output directly to. On the other hand, as described above, in the automatic channel method, it is possible to make the best use of empty channels and to preferentially output a sound with a high effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue while lowering the volume without interrupting the effect being executed. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the previously executed effect with the lower priority is continuing even after the effect with the higher priority is completed. In addition, as described in the embodiment, by stopping the other effect and executing the specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modification of sound control with fixed channel method and automatic channel method]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset. In this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels set in the fixed channel scheme are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same kind of sound can be temporarily assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that can execute an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of parts (for example, nine parts), and a different scene is displayed on each divided screen. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a screen configuration of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 146 is the advance notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after reach occurrence.

  In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect (multi-screen effect) for displaying different scenes on each screen is executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is performed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene are simultaneously output. The scene may be selected by lottery or selected by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control as in the embodiment described above. Further, the default channel assignment is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM simultaneously. Therefore, in this modification, a channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and the channel arrangement is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control in a modification of the embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when multi-screen effect execution is performed. The default configuration of FIG. 147 (A) is similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 140 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the channel arrangement shown in FIG. 147 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 147 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if different preview effects are performed while the multi-screen effect is being performed.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced while all scenes are displayed. At this time, if all BGMs are output at a normal volume, the sound volume becomes too high, and therefore the sound is output with the sound volume set lower than normal. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (latter half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. . In addition, when the player selects a scene, for example, he selects the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine, and selects the BGM of the selected scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of a scene, or the volume of BGM of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 148 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Indicates

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 147 (A)) to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 147 (B) at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation). It is changed to)). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the second half fluctuation, multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 146, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 147 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 is smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the BGM volume corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 148, the scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and further, the second half notice _ 5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  Note that, after the end of the multi-screen effect, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When continuing the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the start of the execution of the multi-screen effect, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the gaming state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the configuration described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 139 (F)) that perform sound control by the fixed channel method and automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. The number of “variable AUTOch” 139 (F) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects can be made reproducible depending on the situation. For example, in a situation where no game is played, more types of notification sounds are output. In addition, it is possible to flexibly respond such as suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds and increasing the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced on presentation.

[16. Control of sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, the example in which the channels are grouped and the sound to be output is managed by being associated with each group has been described. Also, when the number of sounds that can be assigned simultaneously in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being generated is stopped based on a predetermined condition, and a new sound is output, or the output of a new sound is stopped. And, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, in the case where sound is newly assigned to a channel and output is performed, control of changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel or the like will be described.

  In the state before the occurrence of reach after the start of the special symbol variation (during the first half variation), the output of the sound of the BGM being played and other effects is regulated (muted) for a predetermined time together with the output of the predetermined sound effect. As a typical effect that performs such control, there is a blackout effect that controls the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after the elapse of a predetermined time after the output of the sound effect is restricted, the darkening of the screen is canceled, and the sound output by the BGM or other effects is resumed, whereby the newly output sound (the sound concerned) To draw the player's attention and to increase the player's expectation for the change.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which assignment of a new sound to an empty channel is not performed, but the assignment of a channel from which sound effects are output is not canceled and a new sound is assigned. In this case, in order to restore the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassignment of sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sound of different group is being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and priorities are set for each group. A description will be given of a case where a sound is newly output from a channel belonging to a higher priority group when a sound is output from a channel belonging to a lower priority group.

[16-1-1. Channel group volume control table]
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a channel group-specific volume control table indicating the priority order of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, each channel is fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) It is divided into five groups of three.

  For each group, a group volume priority order and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, one or more numerical values are set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect in which the volume of another sound being played is changed when the sound is played on a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the other sound being reproduced. When “0” is set, control is performed to mute other sounds being reproduced. When a numerical value other than “0” is set, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the other sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. Note that control may be performed to set a numerical value of 100 or more to make the volume larger than normal.

  Further, each set value will be described with reference to FIG. 149. In the present embodiment as well, the fixed channel system channel and the automatic channel system channel are mixed in the same manner as the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, a sound such as a notification sound or BGM that is output with priority or is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of effects are assigned.

  In fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. Further, since “0” is set in the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced with the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or a game hall employee as shown as a reference reproduction sound. It may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound such as a ball jam. That is, when a sound is output from the fixed ch1, because of an illegal act or a failure, the output of the effect sound is stopped and only the notification sound is output. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

  In the fixed ch2, in FIG. 149, the group volume priority is set to “4”, which is the lowest. In addition, since the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, even if the sound reproduction on the fixed ch 2 is started, the other sound being reproduced is not affected. The sound played on the fixed ch 2 is mainly BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the BGM is being output, and the effect sound etc. that draws the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol etc. Is output.

  In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to “2”. In addition, since “0” is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone.

  Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in the reference playback sound. The big hit definite sound is a sound for notifying that the result of the variation display is a big hit at a predetermined timing such as at the time of starting winning a prize, and is a production effect sound that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound notifying that the game ball has won the V zone, for example, that it is decided to shift to the high probability state, and the player's sense of expectation is greatly improved similarly to the big hit determined sound. Can be made.

  The blackout effect sound is an effect sound which is output in a silent state by suppressing the output of other effect sound at the time of executing the blackout effect described above. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be performed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot sound and V winning sound are output in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the case of the blackout sound effect, the player is focused on the blackout effect by setting no sound effect by another effect for a predetermined time after outputting the blackout effect sound. In addition, after execution of the blackout effect, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed by the change, for example, the blackout effect is executed by the first half fluctuation, and the corresponding effect is executed by the second fluctuation You may

  In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to “3”. In addition, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sounds are played in the AUTO group 2, all sounds being played in the groups whose priority is “4” or less are halved (50% Output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect that draws the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds outputted by the AUTO group 2 are, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice sound effect.

  In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to “2”. Further, as in the case of the AUTO group 2, “50” is set as the suppression volume value, so when a sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group whose priority is “3” or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is reduced to half. At this time, when the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch 2 is already halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, and the volume is further halved (one-fourth of the original volume). May be.

  The specific sound output in the AUTO group 3 is, for example, a hold winning sound at the start winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button press sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed, etc. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same, the sound is output as it is with a normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when a game ball enters a start winning opening, a pending winning sound is output even when a blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control process]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to a group to which the output sound belongs in this embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control part steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control part power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a reproduction request of a new sound (step S1401). If there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1401 is “No”), the processing from step S1420 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (result of step S 1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a specifies the channel group from the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and the volume control table by channel group From FIG. 149, the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order have been registered (the result of step S1404 is “Yes”), the processes after step S1406 are executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result in step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, parameters (sound number, suppression volume value and group volume priority) of the sound with the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

  The control for the sound being reproduced will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). If the sound parameter that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced has not been registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set (step S1407).

  The sound control performed in step S1410 and subsequent steps will be described. If the sound to suppress the output of the sound being reproduced has already been registered (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a new reproduction request The group volume priority order of the sound is compared with the group volume priority order already stored in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a The volume of sound that has been dropped is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is higher than the group volume priority stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the new playback. The work area is overwritten with the sound number of the requested sound, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Furthermore, if the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound that is already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processes of step S1415 and step S1416 have been executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417) or after the process of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are a work It is determined whether it is registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result at step S 1420 is “No”), this processing ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a plays the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether the process has ended (step S1421). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1421 is "No"), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result at step S1421 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority to the work area. Are erased (step S1422). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (steps S1423 and S1424), and the process ends.

  The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Next, sound volume control will be described in time series. FIG. 151 is a timing chart for explaining, in chronological order, the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment, in which (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 151, an example of executing the advance notice effect and the blackout effect will be described.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed ch 2). In the fixed ch 2, as shown in FIG. 149, the group volume priority is “4” and the suppression volume value is “−1”. In the normal BGM, since the suppression volume value is “−1”, the sound is reproduced without the sound number of the normal BGM, the group volume priority, and the suppression volume value being recorded in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of holding prize is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2 and the group volume priority is "3" and the suppression volume value is "50" (steps S1402 and S1403 result is "No") . Since no parameters were recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first half notice A, normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is made in advance. A set volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being played back and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half variation (result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound is based on the effect sound effect parameter of the first half notice A. Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the normal BGM volume is reduced (suppressed) to an output of 50%.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is changed to the blackout effect. The above parameters are updated (step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1413).

  Furthermore, since the group priority of the effect sound of the normal BGM and the first half notice A being played is lower than the group priority of the effect sound of the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), these The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, since the suppression volume value is 0, the sound is muted.

  Furthermore, the second half notice B is started during the blackout effect execution (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of the step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in the muted state and the blackout effect Continue until the end of the

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, a reserved winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and output in a predetermined volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect is being executed, the pending winning sound is output as usual.

  Then, when the blackout effect ends (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the restricted volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half advance notice A and the second half advance notice B are returned to predetermined volumes. Thereafter, the output of the sounds of the first half notice A and the second half notice B is ended (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while sound effects with high group priority are being output, it is possible to highlight a specific effect by suppressing the output of sound effects with low group priority. Furthermore, with the volume control based on the suppression volume value, it is possible to make the player recognize that a plurality of effects are progressing at the same time, and a group effect effect sound that greatly enhances the player's sense of expectation like a big hit decision sound By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute the effect without impairing the effect.

  In addition, when a sound with a high priority is newly output and the output of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is suppressed, in the embodiment described above, the volume of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is immediately output based on the suppression volume value The volume of other effect sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppressed volume value) and faded out from the timing when the high priority sound is output. It is also good. In this case, the start value (the volume currently being reproduced), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined, or based on the contents of effects such as the length of reproduction time of the effect sound. You may make it set the time to reach and the amount of change. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to highlight the effect sound, or if the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target A time reaching the value may be set long to reduce a sense of discomfort that may occur when the effect sound switches.

  For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output, such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time, It is possible to make the newly produced effect sound more prominent without destroying the game tempo.

  Furthermore, when the output of a new effect sound ends and the output of another effect sound is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value) Instead, the start value (volume during regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the normal BGM output is suppressed to 50% during the sound effect reproduction of the first half notice A, but when the normal BGM output is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (the volume currently being reproduced. Then, the volume is controlled to 50%, and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of discomfort while enhancing the switching of the effect sound effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the rendering effect sound as an example, the present invention can be applied to the case of an alarm sound or an alarm sound as well. As an example, when outputting a notification sound having a high importance (priority order) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraud), not only a production effect sound but also a notification sound having a relatively low importance (priority order) ( For example, the output of an alarm sound of a ball jam may be regulated. On the other hand, if an illegal act is performed while a low-priority (priority) notification sound is being output, output of the notification sound is interrupted, and a high-priority (priority) notification sound (alarm) Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set to the output time of the sound like the effect sound, and the output of the sound is continued until the cause of the alarm and the notification is eliminated. Therefore, when a plurality of types of alarm sounds and alarm sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, another alarm sound is output. . At this time, the next higher priority sound may be output to restrict the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long / short)
In the above, the control of the sound output overlappingly by the priority between groups was demonstrated. Subsequently, a control example of controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long and short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume Control Table by Sound Effect]
FIG. 152 is a view showing an example of a sound effect-based volume control table showing volume (sound volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sound in the present embodiment. For each sound effect, a used playback channel (ch), a total playback time, and a suppression volume value are set.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 149, the used reproduction channels are divided into five groups of fixed ch 1, fixed ch 2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

  The total playback time is the time from the start to stop of the sound effect output. When -1 is set as the total reproduction time, the effect sound is output with a volume set in advance without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effects to be output. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect can not be suppressed.

  When the total playback time is set to 0, loop playback is repeatedly output, and output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is any other number (positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. The unit of the total reproduction time is millisecond (ms).

  Similar to the example shown in FIG. 149, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect of changing the volume of another sound effect that is simultaneously output. Specifically, in the case of “−1”, the sound is continuously reproduced without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of “0”, the sound effect being reproduced (− Suppress (silence) the output of 1) except for sound effects that are set. In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 152. Also in the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the allocated sound effects are also the same. It is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total playback time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch 1, when these sound effects are played back, All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the player or the employee of the game arcade to the outside, and is an effect sound to be outputted since it is caused by the occurrence of an illegal act or a failure etc. And the output of sound effects during other playback is forcibly suppressed (cancelled, muted).

  Since the total reproduction time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" in the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effects are repeatedly output from the start of the output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound effects assigned to the fixed ch 2 are mainly BGM in games.

  In the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 1, a value (reproduction time) set for the total reproduction time for each sound effect, and “0” for the suppression volume value, the notification sound output from fixed ch 1 All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone. As shown in FIG. 149, the specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 are a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, and the like.

  The sound effects assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3 have the total playback time set for each sound effect (playback time) and the suppression volume value “50”. When a sound is reproduced, all other sound outputs being reproduced are halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as a specific sound to be output in the AUTO group 2 which can make the effect stand out while halving the output of BGM and continue the flow of the game, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect Sounds, etc., and specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 3 include, for example, the hold winning sound at the start winning, the hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and the pressing of the effect button It is a button depression sound etc. to inform.

[16-2-2. Volume control process]
In the present embodiment, the output of sound effects reproduced in duplicate is controlled according to the reproduction time of the sound effects. FIG. 153A and FIG. 153B are flowcharts showing a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure of sound effect output control in this embodiment will be described.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a reproduction request for a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no reproduction request for a new sound (the result at step S1501A is "No"), the processing at step S1530A and subsequent steps is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and the volume by sound effect The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 152) (step S1502A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1503A). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1506A and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the reproduction of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result at step S1504A is "Yes"), the processing at step S1506A and the subsequent steps is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total playback time of the sound requested to be played. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result at step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1510A and subsequent steps.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested for new reproduction is “−1”. (Step S1510A). If the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output at the time of occurrence of abnormality, etc. The volume of the playback sound is prohibited from being suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Furthermore, the work number is overwritten with the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1512A).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1513A). When the volume of all sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing after step S1530A is executed (step S1514A).

  On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is not “−1” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the total playback time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether a sound number is not set in “−1” or the work area (step S 1520 A). When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “Yes”), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

  When the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is determined whether the suppression volume value of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

  When the suppression volume value of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value already held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is shorter than the total reproduction time already stored in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of sounds for which a new playback request has been made is shorter or the same as the total playback time already stored in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is longer than the total reproduction time already stored in the work area (the result at step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced The volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area, for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). Then, when the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing of step S1526A and step S1527A on all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processing of step S1530A and subsequent steps (step S1528A).

  When volume control for the sound requested for new reproduction and sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. It is determined whether or not is registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (the result at step S1530A is "No"), this processing ends.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not (step S1531A). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erasing is performed (step S1532A). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (steps S1533A, S1534A), and the process is ended.

  The above is the processing for controlling the sound volume based on the total sound effect playback time in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be specifically described along a time series. FIG. 154 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume according to this embodiment in time series. (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 154 describes an example in which the first half notice effect and the blackout effect are executed.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started and a normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output with the fixed ch2, and as shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set to “−1”. Also, normal BGM is loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until BGM is switched, and 0 is set in the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a volume value set in advance is set, and a normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

  After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is “No”).

  Further, since no parameters are registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

  Furthermore, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and new The parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a reproduction request has been made has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”, the result of step S1521A is “No”, and the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, at this point, the normal BGM is being played back, and the volume is not suppressed yet, so the suppression volume value is "100" and is larger than the suppression volume value "50" of the previous notice A recorded in the work area. (The result at step S1526A is “No”), and the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

  Subsequently, the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), and the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”). , This process ends.

  Thereafter, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total playback time is “8000” and the suppression volume value is “0” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of Step S1504A is “Yes”), and the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is being output (Step S1506A). The result is “Yes”).

  Furthermore, the blackout effect sound effect requested for new reproduction has a total reproduction time of “8000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is “15000” (result of step S 1520 A is “No”).

  Next, the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is “50”, and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound requested for the new reproduction is “0” (step The result of S1521A overwrites the work area with the sound number of the blackout effect sound for which the new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0" and the total reproduction time "8000" (step S1522A).

  In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (black in the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the preliminary presentation effect sound (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is normally “50” for BGM, “100” for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and “0” for the sound effect volume of the blackout notice effect effect already recorded in the work area. (“NO” at step S 1526 A), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half advance notice A is set to “0” (step S 1527 A).

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins the start winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total playback time is “2000” and the suppression volume value is “50” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

  Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of “2000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “8000”. (Result of step S1520A is "No").

  Next, the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is “0”, and the suppression volume value of the hold winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is “50” (the result at step S1521A is "No"), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the on-hold winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the pending winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is "Yes"). Then, even when the output of the hold winning sound ends (time t34), since the parameter of the blackout effect sound is recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound is continued.

  After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the blackout stored in the work area The parameters of the effect sound are erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A whose sound reproduction has been suppressed (volume has been reduced) is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the BGM is normally suppressed at the time of reproducing the sound effects of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of another sound effect being reproduced and to make it possible to highlight a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) while the effect sound of the effect sound is generated during the muffling period. Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, when the output of the sound effect is completed during the muffling period, the sound effect is output even while the specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of the other effects is suppressed. To notify the player while the output of sound effects is continued until after the end of the mute period, by suppressing the output of the sound effects of the corresponding effect during the mute period, the execution of a specific effect is made distinctive be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a new sound is generated when there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated (the number of empty channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game-related interest will be reduced due to the appearance of an unintended sound output in the effect design.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when new sound data allocation conditions are satisfied when there is no space in the channel (the number of empty channels is 0), the setting is made in advance. Based on the priority order, by controlling to discard the sound output of lower importance more selectively, it is avoided that the aspect of the sound output unintended in the effect design appears, and the game interest is reduced. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it is also important to apply a technical device in terms of how to make it difficult to appear in a situation where there is no space in the channel (a situation where the number of free channels is zero).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to effect sound (effect sound), various types of output are not made as long as proper gaming is performed. As for the notification sound, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving control structure is adopted for output of various notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 155 shows various types of notification sounds (payout notification sounds and abnormality notification sounds) excluding effect sounds as sound control by a fixed channel method, and a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) of a finite number of prepared channels. An example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above-mentioned manner is shown. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, manage the priority of playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and definition of output type setting doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the descriptions of other definitions such as the notification sound and the effect sound are omitted. In addition to the definition based on the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the production sound is defined based on the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 124 for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter that is used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X for output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is allocated to and output from the channel X regardless of the state of the notification sound to which the numerical value of the priority is low for the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. It will be done.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 156 is a table showing notifying contents, notifying mode, and notifying time, as well as conditions (cancellation conditions) for notifying each notifying sound exemplified in FIG. 155, for each kind of notifying sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is used as much as possible in order to effectively use a single channel X. It is a treatment for maintaining in the state and for suppressing the subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state where magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state where there is a high possibility that an illegal act using a magnet is being performed). It is to notify that there is. As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnet has been detected”). ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed. As the notification time, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is 60 seconds from the detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions). As for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition “power on again” is satisfied. It has become.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of a fraudulent act due to a dodging action is high). Alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormal) to notify that it is in the state), and the count sensor 4005 (the first large winning opening sensor or the second large despite being not in the big hit gaming state (the state that the big winning opening is opened) Notification sound to notify that detection by the winning opening sensor is being performed (high probability that cheating is forced to open the big winning opening in the closed state and the game ball is made to win) 3 (Large winning abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud has been performed, and the notification sound belonging to the first notification group These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “boost vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is performed as a notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of the occurrence, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps As for the lighting by the above, the execution is continued until the release condition “power on again” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “boooo big prize abnormality detected”, and in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A display (for example, “A big prize abnormality has been detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time when the detection by the count sensor 4005 is detected, the loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is terminated. The display and the lighting by the various lamps will continue to be performed until the release condition "power on again" is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group, but the door With regard to lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group) It does not have to be an aspect). In addition, with regard to the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing, the notification sound 1 such as “booboo” that plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (a state in which the possibility of fraud is high). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and a message sound (unique sound) which plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the contents of notification is made is adopted. The warning sound is a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a severe unfair situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to do so.

  In other words, when reporting information belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been performed), rather than specifying which notification type it is, the hall side response to fraud It is important to speed up the initial action. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, only the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (the fraudulent acts are It is expected that the initial response of the hall side response to the fraudulent act will be expedited. In addition, a message sound for informing which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of “boo-boo”, or display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hall side is performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility of fraudulent acts due to door opening). However, it is reported that it is in a state where the door may be opened by the abnormal handling by the hall side. As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the door is open” And the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is 30 seconds after the detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (corresponding to three repetitions of the notification sound). ), The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release condition “door closing detection (door frame opening switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to On the other hand, the execution is continued until the detection that the door frame 3 is closed) is satisfied.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame open switch 619 ( Although there is a possibility that cheating by opening the main body frame may be performed, the notification sound 5 (open frame) notifying that the main body frame may be opened by the error handling procedure by the hall side) There is an intermediate possibility that some fraudulent activity has taken place, and this is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when it is in a state where it can not be denied. With regard to notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notification The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to a common one.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open" and lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, the main body frame open switch The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, while the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 30 seconds (corresponding to 3 times of notification sound repetition) from the time when the detection by 619 is performed, As for lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame closing detection (the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619. Until the detection of it) "is satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group, but the door About the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which content of the notification and a sound belonging to the second notification group (injustice) A combination of sequential output with alarm sounds used in either of the notification sounds 4 and 5, such as “ping-pong ping-pong”, which plays a role of notifying that the possibility of the occurrence of the error is moderate) There is.

  That is, when notifying those belonging to the second informing group (a state in which there is an intermediate possibility that fraudulent acts have been made), it is possible to prevent the person who is playing the appropriate game from feeling disgust. It is important to be able to perform the hole side abnormal treatment promptly to some extent. In this respect, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to a third notification group described later, a message sound notifying which notification type is to be output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing appropriate games will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the alarm sound such as “ping pong ping pong” is continued to the message sound although it is an alarm sound different from that belonging to the first notification group. So that it makes it difficult for the person who is playing a proper game to feel disgusted, it is an output mode when it belongs to the third notification group although it is a lighting mode different from the case where it belongs to the first notification group By performing notification by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hall side will be accelerated to some extent.

  On the other hand, although the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the non-time-short state, the game ball is provided with the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center role 2500 in the game area 5a. Passing is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in an appropriate manner (left-handed)) This is to be notified. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “return to the left” )) Are executed. In addition, as the notification time, in a non-time-short state, both the loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound "Please return to the left" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 When the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed, the process is ended in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for two times).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in addition to the notification sound 6 (left hitting guide) (lower plate Informing sound 7 (ball removal guidance) notifying that it is in the state where it is necessary to perform the ball removal of the game ball in 322, perform the game guidance for appropriately advancing the game although the possibility of fraud is low It is regarded as belonging to the 3rd informing group when it is in the proper state, and regarding the informing sound belonging to the 3rd informing group, setting the informing mode, the informing time, and the cancellation condition to those in common. And

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please remove the ball of the lower plate” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, “please remove the ball on the lower plate”) and a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as “please remove the ball on the lower plate” as a notification time, and a game board Both the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to repeated notification sounds for two times) from when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. .

  However, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), the sensors 2401 and 2401 are terminated when 20 seconds have elapsed after detection by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279. When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. Data is assigned to channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silent output), and a loop process is repeated for repeating the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silent data as a set. It has become. And, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are all configured to output silence data for the same time, the notification sounds 6 and 7 function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the portion of the silent data, not the portion of the message sound that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including a message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

  By the way, although there can be silence in the notification sounds (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these are very short in order to have a “between”. It is clear that it is a time thing and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent part (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” or “ping-pong ping-pong” is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. In this way, it is possible to give a notice on game guidance without making the user feel disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, regarding the notification sound belonging to the same notification group, the priority order is set to be the same, but the priority order is made different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group You may do it. In addition, loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played is adopted as the playback type setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, “boo-boo” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and “ping-pong ping-pong” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are connected with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and the sound data that combines the message sound and the alarm sound is created at the time of output. After that, it may be assigned to the channel.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), assuming that there is magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 at which no alarm sound is output now, In the control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating the presence of magnetic detection is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that magnetism has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, and In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is sent to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. , The notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the “loop of magnet detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is allocated to the channel X, sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and peripheral control is performed. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed together. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously performed until the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality is performed.

  Through such processing, an alarm sound such as "booboo magnetic detection detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic detection is detected And the lighting by the various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the first notification group) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), at the timing tα2 in which the notification sound that “60 seconds have been detected” has not been passed since the timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “boobing magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state, It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is determined that vibration detection information is included, alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to channel X in the warning process of step S 1024 (FIG. 95). I won't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side of the allocated state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is output (reproduction state), when the timer (60 seconds) has not expired, a sound corresponding to vibration detection is set. Set the schedule data for generation, assign the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “Boom vibration detected”) Playback is to be executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. The above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display or lamp is extracted by extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. These are executed for lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. In the lamp lighting, although the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection already in the set state will be reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection will be reflected in various types. It is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data contents. Even in the case of reflecting, there is no change in lamp lighting.

  After that, at timing tα3 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having timed up. The loop processing to be executed is ended. In this case, since the time required to reproduce a single notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has a time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and is well cut off.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest thereof By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for a time (a time obtained by subtracting a time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds) to the channel X, the notification mode (here, “booboo vibration ”Is detected” loop), the notification sound reproduction is executed.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) expires, “Boo-boo vibration is detected. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “boobing vibration”) in the notification sound such as “Done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being reproduced and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied (see FIG. 157 (a), the sixth alarm sound (here “booboo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic detected”) have been reproduced, the seventh alarm sound (here Then, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if “boo-boo”) was reproduced. As a result, “Boo-boo magnetism was detected” and “Boo-boo vibration was detected” would be connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example, If the alarm sound 1 ends with “Boo-boo magnet” and the alarm sound 2 starts with “Motion detected”, an unknown notification such as “Boo-boo magnet detected” The occurrence of content that may confuse the site) can be suitably suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer according to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up and finished at the alarm sound of “boooo”, and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is ended and is not reproduced at a halfway timing. In the case of a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good turn off). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at a halfway timing, it is prompted to confirm the display in the liquid crystal, and “displayed magnetism” and “detected vibration” are displayed on the liquid crystal display respectively. By being displayed, it can be properly recognized that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

  FIG. 157 (b) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) Is almost the same as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), at the timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Then, information indicating that there is a frame open detection is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tβ1 (or immediately thereafter) where no alarm sound is output, If it is determined that the information is included, the alarm sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 156 is allocated (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Start notification sound reproduction in a mode (here, a loop of "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong") and set a timer (30 seconds) for measuring notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open) .

  When the notification sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, sound generation schedule data corresponding to frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the screen generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the frame closing detection which is the cancellation condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “ And “lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group)” are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from timing tβ1, and at timing tβ2 when the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S110. Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door opening detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the door opening detection information is included, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side that has already been assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the door opening at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) in a state where the channel X is not assigned is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out, it corresponds to the door open detection. Set the schedule data for sound generation, and assign the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, the “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) Notification sound reproduction is executed.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the screen generation schedule data according to the door open detection, The above-mentioned liquid crystal is extracted by extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the door opening appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. In the lamp lighting, although the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the door open detection is set, the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the frame open detection is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the set state is reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection have the same data contents, In any case, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After this, at timing tβ3 when 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is issued based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame opening). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) for the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At time t.beta.3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been reproduced three times, and the timing is good.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, By assigning the notification sound 4 (door opening) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door There will be an announcement sound playback in the (loop of ping-pong).

  That is, while the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection is not set but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the alarm sound of “the door is open ping pong pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the alarm sound 4 (door open) times out, “the door is open” It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be reproduced at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "the door is open") of the notification sound such as ping-pong ping-pong.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 157 (b)) When the third message sound (here “the frame is open”) and the third warning sound (here “ping-pong ping-pong”) have finished playing, the fourth message sound ( Here, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open"). As a result, "the frame is open and the door is open" and "the door is open and the door is open" may be connected in a strange place, and it may not be possible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation Generation | occurrence | production can be suppressed suitably.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at a halfway point, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 157 (c) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (c), at the timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is in spite of being in a non-time-saving state within the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate part 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center character 2500 in the area 5a (detection of right hit in non-shorting state), the main In the control MPU 1310a, information indicating that a right-handed detection has been detected in a non-time-short state is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the short time state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It will be. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, When the right-handed detection information is detected, the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (not shown) for starting notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “return to left-handed”) and counting the notification time of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ( Set 20 seconds).

  In this embodiment, with regard to right-handed detection in the short time state, information to that effect is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command in this embodiment, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a plays the gate portion 2003 It is determined whether the detection by the gate sensor 4003 has been performed in a non-time-short state on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side so that only the information that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command. And the processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-short time state.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the short time state is copied to various control data copies of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to right-handed detection in the non-time-short state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511 cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes a notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up), which is a release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). Will continue to run. In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group having a low possibility of fraud, importance is placed on avoiding the progress of the production, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set. It will not be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. Display in the area (for example, "Please return to the left") will be performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (c), step S110 or step S110 is performed at timing tγ2 at which 20 seconds have not elapsed from timing tγ1 and a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is in loop playback. It is assumed that the full-bottom detection sensor 279 detects that the lower pan is full in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). At this point, the main control MPU 1310a sets information to the effect that lower-side full-tank detection has been made as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of timing tγ1 at which rightward detection in the short time state is detected. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (lower counter full detection) is supplied to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information about the detection of the full-bottom pan is included, the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is transmitted to the channel in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full tank at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20 For the second), and when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is finished, the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out and the lower tray is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X only for the remaining time, and set the notification mode (here, "Please remove the lower plate ball. The notification sound reproduction is executed in the “loop”.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the bottom fullness detection at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), it is for screen generation according to the bottom fullness detection. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c so that the above-mentioned liquid crystal internal display is executed. Yes.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After that, at timing tγ3 at which 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is generated based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having timed up. The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball out guidance) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the bottom full detection. , And by allocating notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds) to the notification mode (here, Then, the notification sound reproduction in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" will be executed.

  In other words, at timing tγ2, while setting the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tray is not set, but is set when timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound “please remove the ball in the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head and the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , So that the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing of the notification sound such as “Please remove the ball from the lower plate” (for example, “Please remove the ball from the lower plate”) and will not be played back. It will be possible to prompt.

  According to such a configuration, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 157 (c), the second message sound ("Please return to the left" here) has finished playing, the third message sound ("Please pull the ball of the lower plate" here) Smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced can be realized. As a result, "Please return to the left" and "Please pull the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange places, and the occurrence of situations where the notification content can not be recognized can be suitably suppressed. Will be able to

  Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, silent data of 5 seconds is interposed. Because the message sound of another notification sound comes to be played back, the occurrence of a situation where two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound, and the notification content can not be recognized. It will be possible to avoid.

  FIG. 158 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, With respect to processing according to magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), processing similar to that described with reference to FIG. 157 (a) is performed. Accordingly, at timing t-1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is started, and the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times, and it is cut off. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), a timing t-2 in which a notification sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" is in the loop playback state has not elapsed since the timing t-1 for 60 seconds. In FIG. 9, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door open detection (see FIG. 155). ), Even if door opening detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continued.

  Normally, with regard to the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) to (c) is overlapped, Processing is performed to set only the timer and not to set the sound generation schedule data itself.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud has occurred. It can be said that it is hard to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group with a medium possibility of fraud”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), at timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. Only set the flag according to the detection of door opening. Then, at timing t-3, based on the flag being set, a notification sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection and a sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are respectively obtained. As well as setting, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X, and notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . Note that the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting in response to the detection of the door opening are started from the timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, "booboo magnetism is detected even though there is door open detection by the door frame opening switch 618 in a state where an alarm sound such as" booboo magnetism has been detected "is being played back in a loop. "From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound ends, the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection is played back for 30 seconds," the door is open ping pong ping pong " The loop processing is ended at a good timing of cutting when the alarm sound such as has been reproduced three times. In this way, notification sound 4 (door opening) according to door opening detection is reproduced in a more detailed notification mode different from processing based on normal priority, and notification belonging to the second notification group Although it is the content (here, the "door is open" loop of ping-pong ping-pong), it will be expected to promote the recognition that it is in a situation where the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound that “booboo magnetism has been detected”, the notification content is started from the message sound (the door is open), so the first notification group in the most tense situation is It is possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs is ended. On the other hand, the alarm sound of “ping pong ping pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it can be easily recognized that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 158 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (b), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process of repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of alarm sound 4 (door open) is up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), at the timing tδ2 where 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tδ1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback. It is assumed that the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003 is detected in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left hitting guidance) according to the right hitting detection in the non-short time state For this reason (see FIG. 155), even when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state occurs, the process of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, with regard to the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as when the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) to (c) is overlapped. The process is performed to set only the timer and not to set the sound generation schedule data itself.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), while the timer (20 seconds) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set at timing tδ2, the sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the short time state Schedule data is not set. At time tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the “return to left-handed” loop).

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "Please open to the left" has not been included at the good timing of the cut. Since it can be reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has become low while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, even with such silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound of the type which has been reproduced up to that point has ended and the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It will be.

  FIG. 158 (c) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (c), it is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tε1 at which no alarm sound is output. With regard to the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tε3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tε1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S112 It is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed in the process of (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 155), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in either sound or lamp lighting. The output contents are not reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, with regard to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound and lamp lighting, it has been set up at that time at timing tε2. The sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection may be processed to be canceled from the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection at the timing tε2. Are kept in a set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that has a higher priority than the respective data are respectively set. Put in a state. Then, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) corresponding to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output for any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed on the process on the side with low priority in the execution state (the process at the time of door opening). The notification content can be changed based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at timing tδ2, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is started, and a timer for alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "Booboo Magnetic Detection Detected" has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is immediately performed in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic detection having a high possibility of the fraudulent activity being performed. Also, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the alarm sound such as "booboo" is first reproduced as the alarm sound, the alarm belonging to the first alarm group is performed, and it is promptly transmitted to the hall side that it has switched to a tense situation It comes to be expected.

  FIG. 158 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ1 at which no notification sound is output, right-handed detection in a non-short-time state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed within the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If there is, the processing corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. 157 (c). Therefore, at timing tζ1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is started, and timing tζ3 at which the timer (20 seconds) of alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is continued.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), step S110 or step S110 at timing tζ2 when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is in progress during loop playback since 20 seconds have not elapsed from timing tζ1. It is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right hitting detection in the non-short time state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection Therefore (refer to FIG. 155), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left turn guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator in the process of the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance), right-turn detection in the non-time-short state which has been set up at time tζ2. A process may be performed to cancel the sound generation schedule data according to the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the right hitting detection in the non short time state but also the sound generation schedule data according to the right hitting detection in the non short time state at timing tζ2. The schedule data for sound generation according to the door open detection as well as the schedule data for the sound generation according to the door open detection whose priority is higher than this are kept as they are set in the set state, and the light emission mode The generation schedule data is set to each set. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Thus, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is made so that the output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing tζ 2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed without performing any operation. It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-handed guide process, door open process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing tζ2, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and in the alarm sound 4 (door open). As the timer (30 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously performed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as the detection of door opening that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the notification sound is first played from the message sound (the door is open), the person who is playing the appropriate game will not feel disgust, Notifications belonging to the second notification group are made by the alarm sound of “Ping-Pong”, and it is expected to promptly notify the hall side that it has been switched to a situation where there is a possibility of fraud. .

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the luminance setting value even in a situation where such anomaly notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is preferable that the changed brightness is reflected by some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 155 are to be output, various processes described above are performed according to the priority order. Even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for notification sound, abnormal contents and game guidance can be appropriately notified (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group which has a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of a fraud may be higher than a medium condition depending on other detection conditions. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority order.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection that is highly likely to have been tampered with, but also when there is an abnormality detection that is less likely to be fraudulently performed. is there. In other words, if there is a high probability of an anomaly being detected, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues, but with an anomaly detection that is less likely to be conducted. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as recovery from various errors), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily performed. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing depending on the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIG. 159 to FIG. 164, in addition to the control based on the above-described priority order, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further improve the state of the gaming machine. Notification in a manner that enables appropriate expression is realized. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 159 to 164.

  In the example shown in FIG. 159, door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also included. Set state. At this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played over a second.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door opening detection is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 is reached.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 159, at timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection is finished and the channel X is in the idle state, the magnetic detection whose priority order regarding notification is relatively high Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door started from timing tα11, although the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, regarding allocation to various lamp operations. At timing tα13, the lamp emission mode is switched according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection They are put in the set state. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, and for the notification sound according to the magnetic detection, 60 seconds until the timing tα 14 arrives. Will be played over.

  On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 159, when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection is ended and the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. Such a situation means that a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening to end. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the magnet is instantaneously in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious Since it is an act, it is feared that it is not enough as a countermeasure only to perform alarm sound processing according to magnetism detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, even if any countermeasure is taken, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at timing tα14 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the fact that the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing is used, Based on this, the “sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening” in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. It is decided to carry out special processing to reassign to. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the end state is played back in a form connected to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, so that there is a great discomfort in the hall. It will be expected to attract everyone's attention. In addition, as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that “when the magnetic alarm is over, all of the alarm sound playback has been completed, and it is finally possible to make it inconspicuous that fraudulent acts have been performed.” Because the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that should have ended is played, an unexpected notification situation will occur, so it is expected to recognize that further fraudulent activities are too risky It becomes like this.

  Although described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is performed and in the period during the notification process belonging to the second notification group, other channels are used. A process (a process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed to suppress the volume of the effect sound during pattern fluctuation and the gaming sound other than that being assigned. The specific value may be volume 0. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound that is assigned to other channels and the other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, in a period during which the notification process is being performed (a period in which the volume is to be suppressed), whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality It is a period during which the condition of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 159, the symbol variation is based on the fact that the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed in the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16. A process (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the effect sound and the game sound other than that is performed, and the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed in the period of timing tα13 to tα14. Based on the fact that the process is being performed, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the game sound other than that (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period when only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period, the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the volume of the other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of reducing the value to a value lower than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states only by confirming the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be further accelerated.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, at the timing tα 16 at which the door open detection is ended, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during symbol fluctuation and the game sound other than that is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the end state is reproduced in a form that leads to "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", there is a possibility that extremely malicious action has been performed In view of the above, even when the timing tα 16 at which the door open detection is ended is reached, the volume of the effect sound in the symbol change or the game sound other than that may be suppressed without being suppressed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, as apparent from the processing according to the door open detection, the period during which the notification sound according to the door open detection is reproduced, the in-liquid crystal display according to the door open detection The period to be performed and the period to light the lamps in the manner according to the door open detection are made to have the same start time but different end times. As described above, by operating the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission to have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. However, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormal content, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 160, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door open detection ends, right-turning detection in a non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at timing tα23. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike in the example shown in FIG. 159, since the possibility that a very malicious action is performed is low, the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right hitting detection in the non-time-short state is ended. At timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during symbol fluctuation and the other game sound is not changed. By the way, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of door opening has ended, it is extremely malicious even if frame detection is detected rather than right-handed detection in a non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003. Since there is a low possibility that a false action is being performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection which is already in the end state is not reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is ended.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 161, magnetic detection by magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is ended at timing tα 34 in the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. Yes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 161, at timing tα 35 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is “report sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. There is nothing to be reproduced in a connected form. That is, also in the example shown in FIG. 161, as in the case shown in FIG. 159, after a person who intends to do some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and makes it open, Wait for the notification sound reproduction according to the end, and when it is attempted to secretly arrange an illegal target magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the temperature is cold, the magnet is instantaneously in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 It is assumed that there is a situation in which However, after timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is in a non-illegal state where the door frame 3 is closed and no magnetic detection occurs, the magnetic detection is performed in spite of being in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound is played sufficiently until the timing tα35 arrives, and it is considered that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is freed when the further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 161, even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, abnormal contents and game guidance can be appropriately notified.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 162, FIG. 159 shows that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the detection of door opening is completed. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 162, after the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, an attempt is made to secretly arrange an illegal purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the temperature is cold. Even when the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced according to this, the situation is within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 without such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is being placed again, and there is a possibility that a more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, the notification sound 1 A process for resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic anomaly) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed until 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection is performed. Can be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. Finally, the loop processing is not finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism is detected" ends, for example, the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing such as "Booboo magnet detection". As a result, it will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing great discomfort in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was made, the notification sound reproduction has already been reported for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection is set again, and special processing for reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the closed state is reproduced in a manner linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, and the midway such as “detecting the boo-boo magnetism”. It is played back in a form linked to “notification sound playback according to magnetism detection” in which the loop processing is terminated at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is increased, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall. It will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 163, magnetic detection by magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 163, it is assumed that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at timing tα 54 in a period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 163, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, an attempt is made to secretly place an improper magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. Even though the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the magnetic anomaly notification sound is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is greatly shaken without suffering from such a situation. It is assumed that there may be more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been in the finished state is reproduced in a manner further linked to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  Moreover, at the timing tα 54 at which the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is generated, a timer (60 for not counting the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and counting the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Second), and at a timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as “Boo-boost vibration has been detected” is not terminated at a good timing, for example, the loop processing is not completed at a halfway timing such as “Boo-boost vibration is detected”. Since the process will be terminated, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted with a great sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to the door open detection” A special process is performed in which “schedule data” is set again and the notification sound is reassigned to channel X. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is further connected to "the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection" connected to "the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection". As well as being played back at the beginning of the loop, the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing such as “booboo vibration detection”, and it is reproduced in a form linked to “the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state becomes high, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall It will be expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 164, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) according to the frame open detection ends instead of door open detection It is assumed.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 164, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame open detection is in a state in which there is a high possibility that some fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraud, the door frame 3 should be opened. Even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnets. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected when the magnet is used for the ball side to eliminate the clogging of the ball in the ball tank or the payout passage.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 164 as well, at the timing tα 64 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection which has already been in the end state By reproducing in a form linked to “reproduction” (timing t α 64 to t α 65), a great sense of discomfort is generated in the hole, and it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also according to the magnetic detection A special process is also performed to end each notification process (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp).

  According to such a configuration, the notification processing corresponding to the frame open detection and the magnetic detection can be performed only by closing the main body frame 4 when the false detection on the hole side is performed while suitably performing the function against the fraud As it becomes possible to end all notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), it is expected that the response on the hole side to the false detection can be speeded up and the atmosphere in the hole suitably maintained. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 164, even when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is not performed. Not only for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to detection of opening of the frame, but also for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetism detection It is also possible to perform a special process to end the process.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 128), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the player's setting value (player's setting value) is reduced with respect to the speaker volume, it is determined by the player with regard to the speaker volume when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated. A process is performed to increase the value (player set value). In addition, when the player set value is lowered and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is output at the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. The volume adjustment is completed, and it is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output in the case of decreasing the volume value and in the case of increasing the volume value. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, “20” which is the same as the button press sound) referred to when there is no empty channel, and the output volume of the production sound ( The change in the volume of the audible sound can be transmitted more reliably.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period before the game is started (the demo display etc. Not only during the period that can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination is executed, the player is allowed to accept, and more important effects appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value at any time, etc., it is intended to maintain the amusement of the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation in which channel assignments of various effect sounds are made according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic anomaly or door opening, a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. At this time, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, and the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound is assigned to a channel among a plurality of types of notification sounds, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. From the above, it is possible to enjoy the effect again by appropriately restoring the output sound volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display, as long as the channel assignment of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is ended.

  However, in the above-mentioned effect development lower notification processing, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of display effects is not to be canceled, the specific notification sound is allocated to the channel at a normal time More channels are used than in the non-informing state, and there are no free channels to which no sound data is assigned before the end of channel assignment (notifying state) of a specific notification sound. Risk tends to be high. If there is no free channel to which no sound data is assigned before the end of the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, any of the sound data at that time is lost. Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (informing status) of a specific notification sound is ended thereafter, the sound data that can not be assigned to a channel can be reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Concerning the concerns about the vacant channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production, so as to the notification process under the progress of production even if any channel method is adopted It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to ensure cost reduction and improvement in reliability required for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the operation is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("Pip!" Or "Pipi!") Even if the player has performed an operation while the effect progressing lower notification processing is being executed. It is hoped that this will give more room to the channel and help reduce the risk of losing free channels.

  However, while the pachinko machine 1 is capable of changing the volume value flexibly when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the notification process under the progress of the performance is being executed. If the change cannot be made, when the notification process under the effect progress caused by the error detection or the notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) is executed, the sound volume is appropriately set according to the content of the effect progress. It is inevitable that the game's interest will decline due to the fact that it can not be changed. In addition, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the process of notification of the progress of the presentation, as a result of the occurrence of a large deviation between the sound volume appropriate value and the actual setting value according to the content of the presentation, After the setting change of the sound volume of the listening sound becomes acceptable, it is necessary to receive multiple operations to change the sound volume to the proper value, but in this case the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned sound of volume adjustment completion. Thus, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that the effect sound cannot be output properly because there are not enough empty channels even though the notification process under the effect progress is finally finished.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. While the output sound volume of the effect sound being played (sound volume of the audible sound) is not made variable but is maintained, the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the sound volume is allowed to be accepted by itself. When the effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is finished, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is collectively changed.

  According to such a configuration, a new operation can be performed if the change acceptance of the set value (player's set value) by the player is received in accordance with the progress of presentation while the process of notification of progress of production is being executed. Even when the notification process under the effect progress is finished, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point can be changed at once. As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production ends, and a situation occurs in which the empty channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also suitably avoided.

  In addition, according to the said structure, when performing the batch change of the output volume to a player setting value, when the notification progress under effect progress is complete | finished, the game in the period when the notification processing under effect progress was performed. Although the volume adjustment completion sound is reproduced only once at the volume after the batch change, regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, this volume adjustment completion sound is normally It may be made to output with the sound (for example, "bee!") Of a special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more preferably resolve the shortage of empty channels when the notification progress under the effect progress is completed, the number of changes in the player setting value during the period during which the notification progress under the effect progress is being executed, or by the player Regardless of the number of operations or the like, it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) at once as the notification process under the progress of production is finished. . According to such a configuration, in particular, although the notification process under the progress of the effect due to the error detection or the notification due to the convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate effect due to the lack of empty channels It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  In the above explanation example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is ended while maintaining the door open state, when the magnetic abnormality occurs and the notification sound corresponding to this is ended, the door opening detection is performed. Notification sound was output again (see FIG. 159). However, if a magnetic anomaly occurs when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is in the output state and the notification sound corresponding to this is terminated, the door opening detection is performed even if the door opening state is maintained. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the remaining time as the output time of the interrupted “notification sound according to door opening detection”).

  When the door is opened, lamp emission is performed according to the detection of door opening. This lamp emission continues even when the notification sound according to detection of door opening ends and when the door is open. It is desirable to make it. Furthermore, it is desirable to continue for a predetermined time after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is ended.

  Even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and when the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while maintaining the door open state, the specific error It is desirable that the alarm sound according to the door open detection be output again based on the occurrence of the. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening.

  Alternatively, there is a specific error that does not output an alarm sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the error occurs according to the door open detection while the door open state is maintained, when the specific error occurs, The notification sound according to the door open detection may not be output again based on the occurrence of the specific error, and the state where the re-notification can be performed may be maintained.

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the luminance setting value even in a situation where such anomaly notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is preferable that the changed brightness is reflected by some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  Hereinafter, an example will be described for the processing from the execution of such notification processing under effect development to the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) being collectively changed.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram for describing the contents of the in-progress development informing process separately for the informing state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to describing the processing from the execution of the notification of progress of production to the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) being collectively changed, the contents of the notification of processing of progress of progress will be described with reference to FIG. A brief explanation will be given. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 155 are shown, and description of other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in this example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume suppression mode of the production sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) for the volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. Among the possible effects, the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a greater degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode, and in this particular example, the process according to the output itself is performed without the effect sound being performed. It is illustrated as what makes it.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any is performed, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode which is the side of high suppression degree. Moreover, even when abnormality detection is turned off, when notification processing regarding any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode on the higher suppression level until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected. ) Is not terminated and this is continued.

  In this example, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the production sound (audible sound) The period of time during which the process of suppressing the volume of sound is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) according to abnormality detection is played to when it is terminated It is set to.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group with medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode on the lower side. However, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, when the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is terminated in the first volume suppression mode that is the low suppression level.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance and ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed. The process of suppressing the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is not executed at all.

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. The output volume of the production sound in one suppression mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed are not necessarily different. You may make it perform the process which suppresses (volume of an audible sound). However, with regard to the termination condition of the process to be suppressed, it is different if the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make it.

  FIG. 166 shows the contents of the processing related to volume adjustment when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while no abnormality detection has occurred and the process related to the notification sound is not executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player setting value is varied by “1” within a range of “1” to “5” by an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller as the value is smaller. In addition, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the player setting in the state where the above-mentioned suppression mode (the first sound volume suppression mode and the second sound volume suppression mode) is not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this example, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the player setting value is “3” out of “1” to “5” with respect to the volume of the production sound, and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to “60” that is 20 times that. Further, if the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination has not been made and the player is waiting for a start winning prize, the player selects the effect selection left button 331 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a in which the effect selection right button 332 is tapped are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH to the effect that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. Ru. The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect that is a reach effect that is executed with the background image changed. When the operation is performed by the player, at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may be displayed when the player performs an operation. Further, both the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 166 (A), when the operation by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20” at the same time. In addition, whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the current set values is “1” to “5” that is the range of the player set values is indicated by a gauge display. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 166 (C)) is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume (audible sound volume) is reduced. The person setting value is kept at “1” (the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is kept at “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if assigned to the channel, the volume is set to “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to “0”. The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is "5".

  On the other hand, when the starting winning combination occurs and the big hit determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the decorative symbol SZ changes in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of change pattern. Is displayed. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this regard, in the volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 166 (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed), but also the variation of symbols corresponding to the jackpot determination after the game is started. Even during the period of execution, the player is allowed to accept. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, it is configured to enable setting change.

  In other words, FIG. 166 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 166 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is “60”, which is 20 times the volume. While the setting has been changed to “80”, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at “80”, which is the volume after the change, and in the second operation, The value has been changed from “4” to “5”, and the output volume of the production sound (audible sound volume) has been changed from “80” to “100”, which is 20 times that, Volume adjustment completed at “100”, the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, among the “1” to “5” which is the range of the player set value. Thus, the second volume value display OH2 indicating the current set value by gauge display is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This is to clarify the current set value for the player set value range of “1” to “5”, and even under a tense situation where a more important performance appears. The purpose is to prevent operation mistakes such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, numerical value ranges of “1” to “5” are displayed steadily in blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to the change in the player set value. Is displayed to show the current player setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (D), the second volume value display OH2 is displayed when there is an operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 166 (C). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the screen is hidden, and thereafter, the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in such a manner that the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331 is selected. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”). When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output every time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Accordingly, it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as an operation to be repeatedly performed on the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is “5” which is the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 167 shows that door open detection is generated during the symbol variation execution period and processing regarding the notification sound corresponding to this is executed, the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment accompanying a thing.

  The situation shown in FIG. 167 (A) is the situation before symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (A). In such a situation, when the starting winning combination occurs and a big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), the result or variation of the big hit determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), the door open detection belonging to the second notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing regarding the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to this is executed More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ “When the door is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding thereto is executed, the first sound volume suppression mode is used. Informing processing under notification progressing processing is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), although the player set value is maintained as “3” as in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (A), the effect is produced The output volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to a first predetermined specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original value (20 times the player set value), The contents of the presentation are developed under the volume value.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first specification is performed when an operation is performed on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while such effect development lower notification processing is performed. The output volume of the production sound that is lowered to the value (here, “10”) (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the volume Accept the change acceptance of itself, when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is finished, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations so far are reflected It is as mentioned above that it is made to make a batch change.

  That is, FIG. 167 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice with the reach effect being performed in the state shown in FIG. 167 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the first specified. Since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state in which the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the effect progress notification processing (output volume to a specific value) 167 (D), as shown in FIG. 167 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) in which all the operations up to that time are reflected in response to the completion of the process is completed. Make a batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation, and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect development lower notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”), and the second operation. However, the first specific value (here, “10”) should be changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such an event is also suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a lump (“10” → “100”) in accordance with the completion of the notification process under the effect progress, the output volume changes. Regardless, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, although the notification process under the progress of the effect due to the error detection or the notification due to the convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate effect due to the lack of empty channels It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic abnormality and the door opening are exemplified as the specific state, but the process of notification of the progress of the development progress and the door opening occur in the state where the magnetic abnormality occurs. Regarding the notification process under the effect progress in the performed state, the end conditions may be different.

  For example, first, with respect to the presentation progress notification process in a state where the door has been opened, when the door is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was opened (the door has been opened) ). However, in any case, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed all at once (for example, “10” → “100”), the channel of the volume adjustment completion sound is generated regardless of the change in the output volume. It is desirable not to make the assignment itself.

  On the other hand, the notification process under the progress of the presentation in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred is not terminated only when the state of the magnetic abnormality is terminated, but is continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (audible sound volume) is collectively changed (for example, “10” → “100”) when the RAM is cleared or the power is turned off. Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable not to perform the channel assignment of the volume adjustment complete sound itself.

  In addition, in the progress notification process in the state where the door has been opened, a display indicating that is made when the player setting value is changed, whereas in the progress process in the notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred, When the player setting value is changed, the display indicating that may be omitted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the end conditions are different between the effect progress notification process when the door is opened and the effect progress notification process when the magnetic abnormality occurs. become.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob is mainly performed by the hole side, it is impossible to output the volume adjustment completion sound (channel assignment) triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob. It is more desirable to make room for an empty channel.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, in addition to the buttons for volume adjustment (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332), various effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 Lamps (for example, lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and are used for production, and game lamps such as special-purpose LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting targets. Of the brightness adjustment buttons (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the player determines the brightness applied to the various effect lamps. A process for changing the set value (player set value) can be executed. In addition, when the player setting value related to brightness is lowered or raised, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value according to the setting value applied to the volume at that time. I have to. In addition, the brightness of such an effect lamp can be set and changed by a player's operation in both a state where the symbol is not changing and a state where the symbol is changing.

  In addition, it is desirable to assign a channel on the same conditions as the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound for the brightness adjustment completion sound, and in this case, even if the setting value for the luminance is changed, the brightness adjustment confirmation There will be a situation where the channel assignment of sound itself is not performed, and a situation where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and outputted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (for example, whether or not the above-described performance progress notification process is being executed) when the setting value related to the brightness, not the volume, is changed. Will be made possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a sound different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

  The player setting value related to the volume is set to a specific value (for example, “3”) without any operation by the player when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time elapses after being controlled by the demo screen) is satisfied. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, “3”) without any operation by the player, a display indicating the current setting value (the first volume value display OH1 or the second volume) It is to the third party that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where neither the value display OH2) nor the output (channel assignment) applied to the volume adjustment completion sound is performed. It is more desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

  Also, when a new volume adjustment is performed when the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment is in the output state, the volume adjustment sound that is in the output state is output even if there is an empty channel. Assigning a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel and outputting it (overwriting output) in the form of quitting is more effective in making room for the number of empty channels. desirable.

  Further, when the player is further operated to increase the sound volume even if the player setting value is at the maximum value, or to the sound volume decreasing side even if the player setting value is at the minimum value. When the operation of is performed further, even if there is a vacant channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not allocated to the channel and this is not output, so that the number of vacant channels has a margin. More desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but a display (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH2) indicating which of the current set values is displayed is displayed. Also good.

  Volume adjustment by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is allowed, but it may be possible to generate a period during which the volume adjustment performed by the player's operation is not allowed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 168 shows the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection when the state detection generated in FIG. 167 is not a door opening but a magnetic abnormality, and the process related to the notification sound is being executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

  The situation shown in FIG. 168 (A) is the situation before the start of symbol variation, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (A). In such a situation, when the starting winning combination occurs and a big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), the result or variation of the big hit determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), the magnetic detection that belongs to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed accordingly. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  Also, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation period and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in accordance with this, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. Informing processing under production progress is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 168 (A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The production contents are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, “0”). ") The output volume of the production sound that has been reduced to (the volume of the audible sound (mute) in this case) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value for the volume (player setting value) itself The change acceptance of is permitted, and when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is ended, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations so far are reflected As described above, the batch change is performed.

  That is, FIG. 168 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 168 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that a predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) that is lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is generated until the above-mentioned effect progressing notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended. Is not changed, and the content of the performance is advanced with the volume of the second specific value being maintained.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the second specified. Since the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output since the value (here, “0”) is maintained, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this illustrative example, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The notification process under the effect progress that suppresses this is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection is performed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is being executed again, and the process for notifying the progress of presentation progress (specify the output volume When the process of reducing the value to the end is completed, as shown in FIG. 168 (D), in response to the end of the process, the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected. Make a batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), and the second operation. However, the second specific value (here “0”) is changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  Note that when the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. Display in the display area 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. There is. That is, in the notification processing according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is ended, the effect sound deviates from the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, according to the player setting value. However, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, the production sound remains to be suppressed while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued in the notification process according to the door opening. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player set value) by the player is permitted even during the period in which the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game until the informing processing lower notification processing ends. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such an event is also suitably avoided.

  In addition, in this example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed in a lump (“0” → “100”) when the notification process under the effect progress due to the magnetic abnormality is terminated. In spite of the change in the volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which it is not possible to enjoy an appropriate effect due to a lack of empty channels, even though the notification process under the effect progress due to notification due to erroneous detection has finally ended. The occurrence of this can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in Fig. 155, for the notification sound in response to the door opening, such as "door is open ping-pong ping-pong", and the notification sound in response to magnetic abnormality such as "Boo-boo magnet was detected" Since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification process under the effect progress is not executed. Therefore, during the notification, the player setting is performed. Both the value and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, as shown in FIG. 155, since “1” (0x1FF) is set to the third byte of the volume initial value for these notification sounds 6 and 7 as well, regardless of the player setting value, It always plays back at the volume set with the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set in the third byte of the volume initial value. You may make it include in the object of the volume adjustment by a player.

  In addition, for each process described in FIG. 167 and FIG. 168, not only during the period of symbol variation execution, but also the state before the symbol variation starts, and the state detection in the form of the start and end timing of symbol variation. Even when the notification process according to is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  In each process described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Moreover, although the process demonstrated in FIG. 167 and the process demonstrated in FIG. 168 differed in the production | presentation sound suppression aspect during the period when the production progress under notification process is performed, about this suppression aspect, it does not necessarily exist. The output sound volume (audible sound) of the production sound is suppressed in one mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the sound volume may be performed.

  In addition, in the notification process under the progress of production, the output volume of various game sounds (the volume of audible sounds) is suppressed. Among these game sounds, a game ball is placed at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds such as a sound reproduced in response to winning (prize sound) may be reproduced with the volume set as the initial value without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, a part of the sound such as a sound (winning sound) to be reproduced in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 when the effect progressing lower notification processing is being executed. It is desirable to play the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the notification process under the effect progress is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 155 to 168, there is no channel space by adopting a channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (The situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to apply a technical device in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation in which there is no vacancy in the channel to which the production effect sound (production sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the channel assignment of the production sound, various technical matters are performed at a stage before the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to give some ingenuity. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In addition, when adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1 concerned, it is not necessarily adopted about the control structure of the above-mentioned channel saving type which enables an alarm content etc. to be appropriately notified only by a single channel regarding various alarm sounds. You do not have to. In each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel method is employed, the above-described control based on the priority order may not necessarily be employed, and a process for discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. Moreover, each example demonstrated below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Channel reservation process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as “an act of praying with the hand holding the pachinko machine 1” or “button operation” has been performed. It can be detected by detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined value that does not indicate any expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel over a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is performed in this way, even if special performance conditions such as a jackpot finalizing effect and a pre-reading effect are established as a result of the game ball being received at the specific winning opening, At this time, the special sound corresponding to the effect is not assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to end, an effect of assigning a special sound to the channel and reproducing it can be executed (post notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned to the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to a specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where a special sound cannot be output due to a shortage of channels even though a special result is obtained in the determination according to winning.

  As for special sounds, for example, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound that is executed only when winning a jackpot in the jackpot determination according to the winning, a highly anticipated effect mode (for example, in the effect determination based on the jackpot determination according to the winning (for example, , A high expectation notification sound to be executed when a high expectation notification effect to be performed during reach effect execution, etc. is selected, or when a predetermined determination result is obtained by a predetermination determination according to a winning combination It is possible to exemplify a pre-read notification sound or the like that is executed as an effect, but in essence, it is assigned to a channel and output when a special determination result is obtained by determination by a predetermined determination means according to winning What is necessary is

  FIG. 169 shows that when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, a special sound (for example, a quine) according to a so-called pre-reading effect is output as a “special sound”. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state where the special sound has not been output (more precisely, a determination that a special sound is to be output (a determination that a pre-reading effect will be performed) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation processing secured beforehand from time to time.

First, prior to describing an example of the channel reservation process, first, general pre-reading effects which are known techniques will be briefly described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a winning is made to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. The first / second start opening winning process (steps S 5231 to S 5234) shown in FIG. 104 is performed. In the first / second start opening winning process (FIG. 104: Steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a start opening (first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the first and second start opening winning processes (FIG. 104: Steps S5231 to S5234), the prefetching process for executing the pre-reading effect on the winning start opening side is also executed (FIG. 105: Step S5245, FIG. 106: Step S5255).

  Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. is there. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed and the contents of the effecting on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information relating to the winning for prefetching determination, symbol type for prefetching judgment) Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol as described above. It is an effect that In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence / absence of prefetching and the contents of the presentation on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the determination process as to whether or not the big hit is won and the symbol variation is not digested, and information obtained from the prefetch command when they are put on hold ( Expectations on whether the jackpot determination that is put on hold will obtain a special result based on information related to the pre-reading effect on the first special figure side and information related to the pre-reading effect on the second special figure side) It is possible to perform a pre-reading effect that suggests the degree in advance.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the special symbol processing flag based on the grasped game situation, the above-described variation start processing, variation pattern setting processing, variation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment shown in FIG. 167 Perform one of the processing. Among them, in the control relating to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning combination in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a relatively low expectation blue and a relatively high expectation red) Whether to perform a specific pre-reading effect that suggests the prefetching expectation level depending on whether it is displayed, and a mode (for example, blue, red, or when it is determined not to perform the pre-reading effect) according to the result of the determination In the normal display mode of (1), the process of performing the suspension display is performed. As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the pending display is digested, a pre-reading effect in which the jackpot expectation is previously suggested by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such pre-reading effect, when making a pending display (including a big hit confirmation pending display) appear in a mode with a high degree of expectation, an output of a special sound (for example, quein) may be performed according to the pre-reading execution. There are many. However, since such special sound (prefetch effect) is reproduced at the winning timing of the gaming ball which occurs irregularly, winning of the gaming ball occurs at timing when there is no space in the channel, and it is determined in the prefetching determination. If there is a win, the player can recognize that the special indication is not reproduced even though the pre-reading judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode (blue or red) with high expectation. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 169, as described above, prior to making the game ball win a prize in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and outputting a special sound (pre-reading effect), the special sound is Channels that can be assigned in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more precisely, the determination that the special sound is output (the determination that the pre-reading effect is performed) has not yet been made). It is possible to execute the channel reservation process secured in the.

  For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 169, the number of jackpot determinations that are currently on hold (the number of holds) is 0, and a normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. If the player is in a situation where the change display of the decorative symbol is being performed under the game, the player usually wins the game ball in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. Play the game (handle operation) to be played. As a result, when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, up to four big hit determinations are put on hold in accordance with the winnings, and the big hit determination is made. Every time the game is put on hold, a process relating to a hold display or pre-reading effect according to the winning is performed.

  Here, as a pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first winning combination (first hold), the second winning combination (in the order of winning to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. Then, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning the pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the pre-reading determination is made by winning). A hold display with a mark will appear.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is also the first prize (first hold), the second prize (for example, in the winning order to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. However, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing of winning), but this is maintained in the execution waiting state After waiting for the channel targeted for the channel reservation process to become empty, the special sound (for example, quein) is output. The hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing of outputting the special sound (for example, quein), or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold made in the pre-reading determination occurs. Good. However, in the case where the hold display having a specific mode is made to appear at the timing when the hold that has won the pre-reading determination occurs, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being performed and the channel reservation process are not being performed. In any of the pre-reading effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can be made to appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held around the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) is not shown. However, this is detected as an object, and this is used as a trigger to start channel reservation processing.

  For example, at timing tY11 shown in FIG. 169, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display is performed in which "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and "countdown of A process of assigning and reproducing “sound” to a predetermined channel is performed. The voice of the countdown is, for example, started from "30" and is ended when it is counted down every second and becomes "0". Further, even during the period when the prayer mode background display is displayed in this manner, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

  However, the player holds his hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for “Shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and “voice of countdown” in a predetermined channel. It can be generated as a trigger (detection by a sensor) as a trigger only by itself, and it is not related to the contents of the rendering (representation that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the symbol variation under execution, It does not depend on the result of the big hit judgment at all. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be appropriately changed to other contents. However, by performing such processing, the display and sound are predetermined for a predetermined time (30 seconds). The channel can be maintained in a usage state (in this case, a “countdown voice” usage state that does not indicate any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends for a predetermined channel is assigned (channel reservation processing).

  Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed in this way, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 169, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occurred. Then, processing related to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the “countdown audio” is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the determination result (prefetching win) that the prefetching effect is performed as a result of the determination according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, the special sound (for example, quein) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and is stored as a waiting state. The special sound (for example, cuin) in the waiting state in this way is output as a post notification sound that is output after the winning time at timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated during the period (timing tY11 to tY12) from when the player holds his hand up and starts reproduction (channel reservation processing) of "countdown voice" by his / her intention and is ended. If there is no, or if a special prize has not been obtained but a special judgment result has not been obtained (if it was not won in the pre-reading effect), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" ends is reached Sound is not played.

  According to such a configuration, the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation process) from his own intention to the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (pre-fetching win) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, a special sound (cuein) is not output at that time, and the “countdown sound” It is ended and it will be executed as a notice effect after aiming at timing when a channel becomes vacant. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to the absence of an empty channel even though a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained. In addition, even if a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cue) corresponding to this is generated at a timing when at least one channel is vacant. Since reproduction is aimed at tY12, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not a special sound (cuein) is generated at timing tY12, and a special determination result (read-ahead) within a relatively long period of timing tY11 to tY12. It will be possible to easily recognize whether or not (winning) has been obtained.

  In addition, when outputting a special sound (cuein) as such a post notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are idle at timing tY12 for reproduction. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown voice” has been assigned, channel reservation processing and an announcement effect according to that are performed for only one channel. It can be said to be beneficial in that it can be realized and the range of effects can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

  Further, in this embodiment, for the prayer mode background display in which “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image, the timing tY12 at which the “countdown audio” playback ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) are performed. Even after the end timing arrives, it is continuously displayed. This is based on the fact that a person who requests execution of such a channel reservation process tends to hold his hand again to generate the channel reservation process every time the number of holds decreases. It is considered that there is a benefit when holding your hand over the display of “Shrine Torii” as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of the announcement will increase) Yes, the prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, release operation by a button). However, in actuality, even if “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image or “Shrine Torii” is not displayed as a background image, the player holds the hand When this is sometimes detected, only a process of maintaining a predetermined channel in an assigned state for a predetermined time is performed by a predetermined sound (countdown audio), and therefore the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of “countdown audio” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the notification sound is terminated.

  In addition, when the player holds his hand again and is detected during the period from timing tY11 to tY12, the "countdown voice" playback time from the second detection until the predetermined time (here 30 seconds) elapses. May be extended so that a special sound corresponding to the pre-reading winning is outputted when the timing comes.

  In addition, such prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol variation is in the changing state but also when the symbol variation is not in the changing state. You may make it do. The specific action may be an action to be detected by a contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to an action to be detected by a non-contact type sensor.

  However, when the special sound (cuine) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ((quened) as compared to the case where the special sound (cuing) is output at the time of winning. (2nd hold), 3rd win (3rd hold), 4th win (4th hold), it will be difficult to know which special decision result (prefetch win) was obtained, so prefetch win There is a concern about a decline in the entertainment interest of the game due to being suspended and not recognized. On the other hand, the content to be reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Quin”), but the first winning (first hold), the second winning (second holding), the third winning (second (3 hold), it is also possible to make it different depending on which hold of the fourth winning prize (fourth hold) wins. However, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the prefetched winning itself by changing the content from the sound (here, “Quin”) reproduced by the prefetching effect when the channel reservation process is not executed. There is concern that it will disappear.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a special determination result is given at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, and fourth hold). In accordance with whether (prefetch winning) is obtained, processing is performed to vary the reproduction time of the special sound (here, “cuein”) started from timing tY12.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 169, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, however, a special sound (herein “cuin”) is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 170, a case where a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) that is won at a relatively early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. Although assumed, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Quin" once is 3 seconds, and if the special sound (here, "Quin") is played for 6 seconds, "Quin" is played twice As a result, a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 171, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the third winning (third hold) winning at a relatively late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, when a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 9 seconds, “Cuin” is 3 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 172, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that is won at a very late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once, when playing a special sound (here, “Cuin”) for 12 seconds, “Cuin” is 4 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin / Cuin / Cuin / Cuin” is output.

  According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained between timings tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetched winning) is obtained by a winning that has occurred. In this example, the shorter the playback time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special determination result (prefetching win) was obtained with the winning that occurred at an earlier timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. The longer the playback time of the special sound from timing tY12 is, the longer the timing of tY11 to tY12 between timings tY11 to tY12 is indicated, the more special judgment result (prefetching winning) is obtained. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first winning is generated between the timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result can be obtained according to the winning, but also in this case, according to the timing at which the winning occurred. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, in view of the fact that the number of reservations is limited to four at the maximum, when a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "Quein" 1 regardless of the winning timing. Set the play time of the batch, if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the play time of "Quin" 2 times regardless of the prize timing, and the special judgment in the third prize If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Quin" regardless of the winning timing, and if the special judgment result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is regardless of the winning timing May be set to the playback time of "Quin" for 4 times.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading winning is obtained, “cuine” is reproduced as the special sound, but the first determination result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when winning. The reproduction content as the special sound may be changed according to which of the low read-ahead winning) and the second determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained. For example, when a first determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation is obtained) is obtained in a pre-read determination when winning a prize, “Quin” is reproduced as a special sound, but pre-read when a prize is won When the second determination result (predicted winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the determination, if "dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether or not the pre-reading prize is obtained by winning, the first judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively low degree of expectation) and the second judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively high degree of expectation) It will also be possible to make a prediction as to which was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173, the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is made by the look-ahead judgment in the first winning (the first hold) winning in the very early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. On the assumption that the second judgment result (predicted winning with a relatively high expectation) is obtained by the prefetching judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) winning at a very late timing. However, in this case, after the special sound is reproduced in the form of "cuin" for 3 seconds from timing tY12, the special sound is reproduced in the form of "docan" for further 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the first winning ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained by the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was confirmed that the prefetching was won in the prefetch determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was won at a very late timing. It is possible to grasp. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (prefetching win with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the prefetch determination in the first winning (first hold) that was won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cuein” played is finished, the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) is the second It is possible to predict that the determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

  Alternatively, when the first determination result (prediction winning on the first special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first start port 2002, "cuein" is reproduced as a special sound and If the second determination result (prediction winning on the second special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second start port 2004, "docan" may be reproduced as a special sound . In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second starting opening 2004 Depending on the situation, it is desirable to play "Quin" or "Docan" as a special sound.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 173 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the timing tY11 to tY12 The first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing is a win to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first determination result (the first special figure side of the first special figure side) in the pre-reading determination corresponding to this It becomes possible to predict that the pre-reading win) was obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the pre-reading win is also determined in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) which is won at a very late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (the pre-reading win on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played back in the form of "dokan" after one "cuin" played back has been played, the 4th prize (the 4th hold) is the second starting port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetch winning on the second special view side) has been obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning combination while the channel reservation process is being performed. In the pre-reading effect, it was decided to illustrate the case where the pre-reading winning is obtained. However, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173, the main point is in the gaming machine where the determination processing is performed when the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening, and the determination processing is special. Channel control (such as channel reservation processing) that can avoid that a channel shortage occurs and can not be output when a special sound is output when a determination result is obtained, which has technical features in itself Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the pre-reading win in the pre-reading effect.

[Channel usage restriction]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of vacant channels is monitored during the progress of the game, and when this number is less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds The rate of limiting the execution of processing related to output is made to be high (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, for at least part of the game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is limited from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of empty channels approaches 0. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it is possible to make the number of free channels hard to be zero.

  More specifically, in the periphery control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation according to the big hit determination in the hold state is digested (every time the starting condition is satisfied), the symbol variation to be digested is Determine the availability of the channel during the execution period. As a result, when there is a vacancy in the channel, the rate at which the channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is lowered until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the vacancy of the channel is reduced. When there is no margin in the situation, the rate at which channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is increased until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the channel limitation with such symbol variation as one unit is By performing this operation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and as the level values become higher, the rate of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of game sound becomes higher.

  FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for the processing relating to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

  Assume that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 within the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 174, as the processing in step S3101, the value of the previously set channel restriction level is reset. In addition, about this reset process (step S3101), you may make it carry out, when symbol fluctuation is complete | finished.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the classification of the first half of the variation pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of variation (for example, the period from the start of symbol variation to the start of reach effect, Specify "X" which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) with reference to the timing when the channel becomes most vacant in the period from when the fluctuation start to reach the symbol stop and so on) Do. In addition, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of the presentation pattern of the second half of the fluctuation corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel in the second half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of reach production to the symbol fluctuation stop) Specify "Y" which is the number of free channels (minimum free channel number) based on the timing when the free space is at its lowest.

  However, when an effect pattern that stops the symbol without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol variation is selected, the symbol variation corresponding to the “second half of the variation” is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process of step S3103 itself, or the maximum number that can be set as the number of empty channels “Y” in the process of step S3103 (a number that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

  Then, next, as the process of step S3104, "X" specified by the process of step S3102 is compared with "Y" specified by the process of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y" The channel restriction level is set based on the value of the side where the minimum number of vacant channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of vacant channels), at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended. Thus, between the start and the end of the symbol variation to be determined, the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. Therefore, it is expected that the number of vacant channels is hardly reduced to 0, and that it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to appearance of an unintended performance mode.

  In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum free channel number” used for the determination is specified separately for the first half (step S3102) and the second half (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This is because the production contents in the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of symbol change to the start of reach production) are shared by multiple production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). This is because it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary to specify the minimum number of free channels by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation. .

  However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel restriction level need not be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. With the pattern as a unit, the number of empty channels (the minimum number of empty channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel is most empty during the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

  In addition, the “minimum number of free channels” here is a sound that is automatically generated when the effect pattern (effect content) to be determined advances (a symbol stop related to BGM related or a big hit determination, a big hit determination It indicates how many channels are left as idle when they are assigned to each channel for the corresponding sound effects, etc.). Therefore, a button press sound (a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation, etc.), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (sound associated with winning at a general winning opening), a hold winning sound (first The effect pattern (representation content) to be judged is developed, such as the sound associated with the winning of the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), the common electric effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol) Various kinds of sounds that are not necessarily executed simply by being included are not included as judgment targets.

  FIG. 175 is a view showing values of channel restriction levels set separately for the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3104, and showing an example of restriction contents determined for the channel restriction levels separately. .

  As shown in FIG. 175, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a block winning sound (a winning for a general winning opening) among various types of game sounds is first made as a sound to be subjected to channel usage restriction. Sound accompanying a), hold winning sound (sound accompanying a prize to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), general power effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the period of symbol fluctuation when there is not enough room in the free channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds Channel usage restrictions may occur.

  More specifically, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "0". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation with an empty channel is performed, and the sound that is subject to channel use restriction (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) None of them are limited, and if there is a prize at the general prize opening during execution of the symbol variation, a block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and played, and the first start port 2002 or If there is a winning at the second starting port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when an effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, The electric sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel for playback, and when the volume is adjusted while the symbol variation is being executed, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is sent to the vacant channel. Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restriction is performed based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to "1". That is, in this case, there are four sounds (block winning sound, on-hold winning sound, general charge effect sound, volume adjustment completion, etc.) that are subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation with a slight margin in the vacant channel is executed. Sound)), a channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a winning on the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation, if this is detected, the winning balls are paid out by the number corresponding to the winning, but the block winning sound is It will process so that it does not allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to play the block winning sound itself without setting the sound generation schedule data according to the winning on the general winning opening.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "2". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which there is a relatively small pattern change in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are adjusted. The channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds of the block winning sound and the reserved winning sound among the completion sounds. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above, when there is a winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during execution of the symbol variation, the quantity corresponding to the winning is detected. Although the payout of the minute prize balls and the above-described first and second start opening winning prize processing are performed, the reserved winning sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the reserved winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Is set to “3”. That is, in this case, there are four sounds (block winning sound, on-hold winning sound, general charge effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation with no margin in the vacant channel is executed. The channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on block winning sound described above and the restriction on holding winning sound, even if the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, this is the case for the general effect sound Is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. In addition, when there is a volume adjustment operation by the player during the execution of the symbol variation, although the volume adjustment according to this is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be allocated to a predetermined vacant channel. It will be. At this time, also for the general effects sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to them, and do not perform the reproduction for the general effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of the empty channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, some game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Execution of related processing is restricted, and the percentage of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, so the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, the sound that is the target of channel usage restriction among various types of game sounds is not the most important "effect sound related to the big hit determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but the other "sounds associated with winnings". , “A performance sound related to normal determination”, and “a sound related to volume adjustment”. That is, even if a restriction on the use of the channel is generated during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect on whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation can be suitably executed without being limited. The decrease in the game entertainment when the channel use restriction is applied is suppressed.

  In the above configuration, among the various types of game sounds, a plurality of types of sounds that are considered to be candidates for channel usage restriction are prepared (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general effects sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level increases (as the minimum number of vacant channels decreases as the symbol changes), the number of types of sounds subject to channel usage restriction is increased. However, there is a method to limit the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0 and to increase the rate of execution limitation as the number of free channels decreases. For example, a method described below with reference to FIG. 176 may be adopted.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction content determined separately for the channel restriction level.

  As shown in FIG. 176, in this alternative example, the channel is used depending on the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. A limited lottery is held as to whether or not to apply a limit. However, here, a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared, and when a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) Etc.) is limited only to the channel use.

  For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is set to 0/100, A restriction process for channel use is not performed on a specific game sound to be restricted (for example, volume adjustment completion sound).

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that the judgment result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained is increased as the value becomes larger, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum vacant channel The probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 50/100 when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel restriction level is 50/100. The same probability in the case where is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0 and 1) is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, the restriction process concerning the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even in such a configuration, when the game is progressing and the symbol variation is executed in which the number of free channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number, the number of free channels is reduced. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the process related to the output of at least some of the game sounds is increased. In other words, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Since the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of available channels decreases, the occurrence of a situation where the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution of symbol variation is preferred. It will be expected to suppress.

  Further, according to the above configuration, by checking whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the symbol variation execution period, the minimum free channel during the symbol variation execution period is confirmed. It becomes possible to infer the possibility that the number will run out, and it becomes possible to promote game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) commensurate with the inference.

  In the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the determination processing for various advance effects is executed based on the effect pattern, the minimum number of available channels is specified from the occurrence status of those advance effects, and the specified minimum available space Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the maximum number of sounds that can be assigned to a channel at the same time during the symbol variation period can be estimated in advance for each effect pattern. Keep it. Then, when the production pattern is determined, the channel restriction ratio may be increased as the channel shortage in which the production pattern is classified in advance is more likely to occur. That is, in this case, when a special type of effect pattern that tends to use many channels simultaneously is executed, there is actually no button operation or various winnings are not generated, and many channels are not used and empty channels. Even if there is a surplus in the number of channels, there will be a situation in which the execution of processing related to game sound output may be restricted during the execution of the symbol variation. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid that the number of objects becomes 0, and even when such processing is performed, "the number of free channels in the pattern change is relatively When the number is low, the rate at which execution of processing related to game sound output is restricted increases, and when the number of free channels during symbol fluctuation is relatively large, it is related to game sound output. The rate at which the execution of processing is restricted is low ", and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained because it is a phenomenon that is not particularly uncomfortable from the player side. become. Also, in this case, by checking whether the sound is limited, it becomes possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to be short of channels.

  In addition, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and their alternative examples, channel restriction with symbol variation as one unit is executed, but the channel is performed with the contents of presentation being developed within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied, and the channel restriction corresponding to the channel restriction level may be executed each time. Alternatively, when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, a channel restriction level is made unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations when a predetermined limitation condition is satisfied, and the channel limitation level is set. Accordingly, channel restriction may be executed.

  By the way, in the configuration exemplified in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and their other examples, the sound which is the target of restriction of the channel use is not the most important "effect sound related to the big hit determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that. We decided to adopt only "sound associated with winning", "arrangement sound related to normal judgment" and "sound related to volume adjustment". However, since these sounds include those that occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize a restriction process that can secure an empty channel more effectively, It is desirable to adopt “effect sound” as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-described restriction processing is performed on the “effect sound related to the big hit determination”, there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, resulting in an effect lacking in excitement. In some cases, if the jackpot symbol is stopped, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced.

  In this regard, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, among the “effect sounds related to the jackpot determination”, only the “effect related to symbol fluctuations that are in a reserved state and will be digested in the future” If the channel usage of the sound is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 176 or another example thereof), the effect related to the result of the symbol variation being executed Therefore, it is possible to adopt an effect sound with a high frequency of occurrence as a target of restriction without any restriction.

  For example, when a winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 occurs during a period in which symbol variation is being executed and the corresponding big hit determination is put on hold, the hold is normally made A determination process is performed as to whether or not a pre-reading effect is to be performed with respect to the jackpot determination made into a state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) is suggested to suggest in advance the degree of anticipation as to whether the held jackpot determination is to be a big hit. Become.

  However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about vacancy (such as when the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1, symbol variation is being executed) In the case where “the effect sound corresponding to the effect relating to the symbol variation that will be digested in the future” is targeted, winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is suspended. Even if it is in the state, the determination process for the pre-reading effect itself is not executed with respect to the jackpot determination put on hold, and both the pre-reading effect and the effect sound corresponding to this are not performed. In this case, the pre-reading effect is not limited to the change on hold in the game board side effect display device 1600, but also in a different effect means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.) When it is executed to cause a change in effect (according to a change in hold, etc.), not only a change in hold in the game board side effect display device 1600 but also a different effect means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.) It is more desirable to restrict the predetermined effect change so as not to be performed in order to suppress a sense of incongruity (progressive deviation) when a specific effect sound is not assigned as a countermeasure for channel shortage.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety occurs in the vacancy, the channel portion to be used for rendition relating to the symbol variation in the future which is not the symbol variation in progress is being executed Because it becomes possible to supply to the production sound regarding the fluctuation of the character, the production sound with high frequency of occurrence can be restricted without any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation under execution You will be able to In addition, the effect to be restricted is only the "representation concerning the symbol change in the future in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is subjected to restriction, it will be restricted if it is reserve digested in the future Since the effect during symbol fluctuation not being turned on (content of the effect according to the effect pattern) is always executed, the decrease in the amusement of the game due to the restriction of the effect is suitably suppressed.

  Further, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 or another example thereof, a process of limiting a specific sound not to be output when “predetermined effect condition” causing concern in the number of empty channels is satisfied is performed. did. However, even if the “predetermined performance conditions” are not satisfied and there is no concern about the number of empty channels, processing for limiting the specific sound from being output under a predetermined condition May be performed. For example, when a specific condition different from the “predetermined effect condition” is satisfied, an effect state (effect period) in which a specific sound cannot be output over a plurality of symbol variations is generated. According to such a configuration, a special production state (production period) in which the number of vacant channels has a margin over a plurality of symbol variations appears, and in the special production state (production period), only that much. Other performances can be performed more actively.

  In addition, when "rendering sound related to the big hit judgment" is the target of restriction, if only the sound of the effect (display of the effect, sound of the effect) is the target of restriction (no sound output), it will fall into the effect lacking in excitement In the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxieties about the vacancy, the player wins and the jackpot determination is put on hold Judgment processing for pre-reading effect When this itself is not executed, it is made not to perform both the effect display and the effect sound regarding pre-reading effect, therefore special result (pre-reading winning) is not obtained in pre-reading judgment The situation is the same as when playing (pre-displayed when pre-read effects are not executed), and it is preferable to suitably avoid a decrease in game interest due to the execution of effects lacking in excitement It becomes possible way.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as a restriction target, when the winning combination and the jackpot determination is put on hold, the determination process for the prefetch effect itself is not executed, and the effect display and effect regarding the prefetch effect are performed. Although I did not do both with the sound, it is not limited to this. For example, when "play sound related to the big hit determination" is a target of restriction, the judgment process about the pre-read effect is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained until the specific timing in the symbol change comes Restricts both the effect display and the effect sound regarding the pre-read effect without executing them, and when the specific timing during symbol variation comes, only the restriction to the effect display among the effect display and the effect sound To do this. In other words, in this case, the effect display related to the pre-reading effect is performed in a special mode (timing) different from the case where the “effect sound related to the jackpot determination” is not the restriction target (normal time), and a special effect is displayed. Since the pre-reading effect will be executed after showing as if the result (pre-reading win) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is suppressed while suppressing the decline in the game entertainment effect by not outputting the production sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform suitably.

In addition, as processing concerning future rendering in the situation where channel use is restricted,
・ The pre-reading effect judgment process is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect are not executed until the specific timing during the symbol change arrives. These are limited, and when the specific timing during symbol change arrives, only the restriction on the effect display among the effect display and the effect sound is canceled and the processing is performed under the first limit processing. age,
When the second restricted process is used, the game is advanced when the determination processing for the prefetch effect itself is not executed when winning and the effect display and the effect sound regarding the prefetch effect are not performed. In particular, when symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels with no sound assigned is less than a predetermined number, compared to when symbol variation in which the number of empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is performed. The ratio of execution of either the first under-restricted process or the second under-restricted process is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first under-restricted process was performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is “A”, and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted process is performed is “B”. When it As the relationship is relation of "A <B", it is more desirable that the one of those first restriction under treatment and the second restriction under processing is executed. In other words, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the greater anxiety arises due to vacancy, it is not the first under-restricted process that restricts only the effect sound but restricts both the effect display and the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second under-restricted process increases, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more appropriately suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the sounds assigned to the limited channels are the first group sound in which the effect volume can be adjusted by the operation acceptance by the player, and the effect volume can not be adjusted by the operation acceptance by the player. It is possible to distinguish at least from the second group sound (such as an error sound). In this respect, when the "predetermined effect condition" causing concern in the number of empty channels is satisfied, it is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 that only the sound distinguished in the first group sound is limited. It is desirable to suitably execute the process when it occurs.

  Further, the limited channels are divided into a plurality of groups including at least a first channel group to which a presentation sound can be assigned and a second channel group to which a notification sound (error sound) different from the presentation sound can be assigned. If the number of vacant channels in the state where no sound is assigned in the first channel group is reduced to less than the predetermined number, the execution period of the symbol effect display is vacant in the first channel group. Compared with the execution period of the symbol effect display where the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio that the specific sound is not newly allocated to the channels of the first channel group is high Thus, when an error occurs, it is possible to execute the processing only for the first channel group. And performing the definitive processing more reliably desirable in terms of both possible to reduce the processing load.

  Further, as described above, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 or another example thereof, “the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of vacant channels in a state in which no sound is assigned is reduced to less than a predetermined number Compared with the execution period of the symbol effect display where the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio of the specific effect sound not being newly assigned to the channel to the effect state being high is " There is a feature. In this respect, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as “a effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel”, As soon as the execution period of the symbol effect display is ended, the "state of effect in which a specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel" can also be canceled (ended). On the other hand, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as “a state of effect that the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel”, Make sure that the rendering state (a rendering state in which a specific rendering sound is not newly assigned to a channel) is always continued over a plurality of symbol variations including the symbol rendering display even after the symbol rendering display is finished. It is desirable to make it. According to such a configuration, the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is treated as "effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel". Although the ratio is low, once this is processed, the effect state is not completed and is prolonged, and in the meantime, no specific effect sound can be output. That is, in this case, a special effect (when the symbol effect display indicates that the number of vacant channels is reduced to less than a predetermined number), when "a effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel" appears. It is possible to add a presentation performance about “whether or not it is to be performed”, and it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained.

  Further, in an effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel, a specific image that can be displayed only in the effect state may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the “specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel” by displaying the specific image.

  In addition, a specific image can appear at multiple timings in one symbol variation, and if it is displayed as an image with different contents (appearance, form, etc.) at each timing, one of the multiple timings Even if there is an image of contents (looks, forms, etc.) that the player does not grasp or there is an image that the player does not grasp (images, forms, etc.) As a result, it is possible to more reliably recognize that the “specification effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel”.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced. A process may be performed to end the assignment of the specific gaming sound to the channel in a state where the volume is reduced (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is finished, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound whose assignment to the channel is continued (channel special open process).

  According to such a configuration, the use state is aimed at timing at which it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the aspect of the channel allocation of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)). To reduce the number of channels (increasing the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, the number of channels in use is reduced even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is not output.

  FIG. 177 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 177, a predetermined effect pattern is being developed in the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing tk11 during a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “normal BGM reproduction” according to is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction) and according to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The “effect A playback” sound is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 for playback (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this respect, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction and effect A reproduction), the sound of “effect A reproduction” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect At timing tk13 (in the middle of the execution of symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are removed and the playback ends. As described above, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the stage of effecting, the effect content of the predetermined effect pattern is obtained by performing the process of terminating the assignment of the effect sound from the channel and changing it to an empty channel promptly. When progressing, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to allocate and reproduce new sounds due to insufficient channels.

  However, as described above, when there is a predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the stage of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) when the assignment of the effect sound is removed from the channel and this is changed to an empty channel The number of effect sounds in the reproduction state is reduced, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears in the corresponding effect pattern may be reduced by the decrease.

  Therefore, in this explanation example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), first, the sound of “reproduction A” is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and timing tk13 before the end of the reproduction comes. From “timing tk12” to “timing tk14” after timing tk13, the sound of “effect B reproduction” according to effect B displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 It is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 to be in a state of playback (here, stereo playback). Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), timing tk13 in which “reproduction of A effect” is ended during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “effect B reproduction” is put into the state of reproduction. In accordance with the arrival of the "effect B reproduction", a process of reducing the volume (volume reduction process) is performed while the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" are allocated to the channels.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” in this explanatory example is output as a rendition sound corresponding to a step effect that can be developed up to four times in the content of the effect. After the effect content has been developed over three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the effect as to whether the effect content is further developed according to step 4 is executed. In the state where a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B reproduction” corresponding to the step effect are allocated to the channel, processing (volume suppression processing) to decrease the volume is performed. In addition, when the high expectation performance aspect which develops further to the production contents according to Step 4 appears when this volume reduction processing is ended and returned to the normal volume (a performance with relatively high expectation), While the specific effect sound according to the effect content of the step 4 is outputted as the sound of “reproduction B reproduction”, it does not develop into the effect content according to the step 4 and the step concerned with the effect content according to the step 3 When the low expectation effect mode in which the effect is ended appears (effect with a relatively low degree of expectation), an effect sound different from the specific effect sound is output as the sound of “effect B reproduction”.

  According to such a configuration, the effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds. Since the sound of “play” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is ended, the number of channels in use is reduced (the sound of “play A” is not played back. It is possible to make it difficult to notice.

  Particularly, in the example shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (c), the content of the rendering with a relatively high degree of expectation (the content of the rendering developing to step 4) and the content of the rendering with a relatively low degree of expectation (step The above-mentioned period (period in which it is unclear whether development will be made or not) in which presentation contents (representation of whether or not development to step 4) appears that leads to any of the presentation contents that do not develop to 4) A volume suppression process is executed, and the “production A playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends. According to such a configuration, not only in the situation where the volume of the effect sound is reduced, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the effect B (sound of “reproduction B reproduction”). Then, since the effect A (sound of “reproduction A reproduction”) comes to an end, the volume of the effect sound that has been targeted for volume suppression including the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” is then returned. Sometimes, even if the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced, the effect content with a relatively high degree of expectation (the effect content developed to step 4) and the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation ( It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is no longer reproduced by drawing interest in which of the presentation contents not developed to step 4 appears.

  In addition, in the volume suppression processing according to this illustrative example, the volume is lowered while each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” is assigned to the channel. The volume is not reduced, and a specific effect sound (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) is continuously played at the normal volume. In other words, in this case, the volume of a plurality of effect sounds is reduced while the sound volume of some effect sounds (“normal BGM playback” sound) is being played normally without being suppressed, and thus the sound is discriminated. Since the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound comes to an end while the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is no longer reproduced, it can be made more difficult to notice. It will be.

  Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is not terminated immediately, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the volume suppression process is started. The reproduction of the sound of “production A reproduction” is terminated after waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, there is a possibility that the player will be interested in the production sounds A and B in which the change of “volume reduction” has occurred, but the volume decreases to a specific value. Therefore, when the state that does not change with the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest has already faded. Therefore, the sound of “production A reproduction” is aimed at such timing. By terminating the reproduction of the above, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced.

  In particular, in this example, the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process is gradually reduced in volume, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silenced). As a result, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice the fact that the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound of “effect B reproduction” is started to be reproduced while the sound of “effect A reproduction” is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced, the sound of "production A reproduction" is started to be reproduced, and the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced in the suppression state. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be ended.

  Further, the effects A and B are not necessarily the effects accompanied by the effect display in the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the effects A and B may be executed as sound effects only.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of “effect B reproduction” is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment. Not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the reproduction of “production B reproduction” is started, and the sound of “production A reproduction” is reproduced while the sound of “production B reproduction” is reproduced. May be terminated in the manner described above.

  Further, it is not always necessary to reduce the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process in a stepwise manner. Also, conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a level lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound has ended. Is possible.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, a specific effect sound according to the effect pattern (here, the sound of “normal BGM playback”) is excluded from the target of the volume suppression processing, and the volume at the normal time remains Although the reproduction is continued, the volume of all effect sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. Also, conversely, the sound of "effect A reproduction" may be maintained without reducing the volume when the volume reduction processing is performed, and even in such a case, the volume is reduced. In the situation where the player is interested in the sound of "reproduction B reproduction", the reproduction of the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is ended and then the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is also included. Content with a relatively high degree of expectation even if the sound of “play A” is not played back when the volume of a plurality of effect sounds that were targeted for volume suppression is returned (step 4 We are interested in which one of the rendering content (which develops into 2) and the rendering content with relatively low degree of expectation (the rendering content that does not develop to step 4) appears, and the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is reproduced Can be made harder to notice Uninaru.

  In addition, at least during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A playback” and “effect B playback” is performed (after the volume of “effect B playback” is reduced from the normal value). Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “production B reproduction” more appropriately, It is desirable not to reproduce the corresponding reserved winning sound. Further, even when a special result (prefetching win) is obtained in the prefetch determination when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs, the effect sound corresponding to the prefetch effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound reproduction of “effect A reproduction” is ended within a period in which the effect sound is reduced in volume, and allocated to the channel in the state of reduced volume until that period is over. In addition to this, the special effect sound that has not been assigned to the channel until the end of the period is added to the channel. You may make it newly allocate and reproduce | regenerate (reproduction | regeneration with the normal volume). According to such a configuration, an interest is gathered whether or not a special effect sound is reproduced when the sound volume is returned, and it is further noticed that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced. You will be able to make it harder. Moreover, if the number of channels being used after volume return is reduced compared to before the volume drop, there is a concern that it may seem as if the expectation for the big hit symbol to appear due to the symbol variation has decreased, but special effect sound Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (reproduced with the normal volume), so that it is the same as before volume reduction and after volume return, or more (two or more effect sounds for the channel (When newly allocated), it becomes possible to keep the channel in use, and it is also preferable that the player remembers the feeling as if the degree of expectation decreased. It will be avoided. In this case, when the volume is returned, the special effect sound may or may not be reproduced, and it is suggested that the expectation degree is relatively high when the special effect sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

  Note that when a special effect sound that was not assigned to a channel when the volume is restored is newly assigned to a channel for playback, the channel that has become empty due to the removal of the sound for “effect A playback” It is desirable to assign a special effect sound to. According to such a configuration, a wide range of effects can be realized with a small number of channel resources.

  Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is to be executed. For example, the restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176 As the effect of “effect A” is adopted, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of vacant channels due to symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where there is ample free channel number so as not to feel anxious feeling of lack of channels, it is possible to continuously output "production A" without ending on the way become.

  In the above explanation example, “volume suppression effect” that outputs at least a part of the game sound of the game sound in the suppression mode or silence is performed based on the result of the big hit determination and the effect pattern of the specific type is executed (selected And when the effect content is at a specific timing, it is executed over a partial period in the effect pattern. In this respect, the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “effect patterns of a specific type” that can generate such volume suppression effects are prepared as “other effect patterns” that do not generate volume suppression effects ( It is desirable to set so as to be smaller than the number of effect patterns stored) in order to improve the game interest when a volume suppression effect occurs.

  Further, when preparing a plurality of effect patterns as “effect patterns” that can generate a volume suppression effect, the effect patterns are longer than the effect pattern that causes the volume suppression effect to be executed over the first set time and the first set time. It is desirable to include effect patterns for executing the volume suppression effect over the second set time, and in these effect patterns, the expectation for the jackpot symbol to appear is different. According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game sound of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silent state, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested depending on how long the state is continued. Will be able to

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). Then, when the sound volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (such as a demo state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the sound volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed sound volume setting value. (Processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is being executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the "effect pattern capable of generating a volume suppression effect", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during pattern variation regardless of the effect pattern, the volume adjustment confirmation Since the player who sees the situation that the sound is not output comes to be aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being performed, it is expected to preferably maintain the game interest. In this case, although the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the effect display device 1600 does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound so as to display a message indicating that the volume setting value has been changed. It is desirable in order to make the person aware (be aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being performed). The phrase “does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but in addition to outputting this at the volume 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel .

  During the period in which "volume suppression effect" to make at least a part of game sound of the game sound be output in the suppression mode or silent state, the expectation (including 100%) that the jackpot symbol appears is suggested It is desirable to perform expected display (such as an expected effect that causes one of a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation to appear). According to such a configuration, since the player's interest is shifted to the expected display (expected effect), the sound of “effect A reproduction” is generated while the “volume suppression effect” is being executed. It is possible to make it even harder to notice termination.

  When the “volume suppression effect” is executed and at least a part of the game sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, the sound is returned to a state where the “effect B playback” sound is output in a non-inhibition mode. New effect sound data that is different from any of the effect sounds that are already in the output state (“normal BGM” or “effect A playback”) at a predetermined timing before the timing arrives is assigned to the channel, and the new effect sound A sound corresponding to the data may be output in a non-suppressing manner. That is, in this case, the sound corresponding to the new effect sound data is output in a non-suppressed manner while the “effect B playback” is output in a suppressed manner or silence. Since the sound of “Production B playback” is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode while being output in the non-suppressed mode, the sound of “Production A playback” has been terminated. Can be made more difficult to notice.

  In the period during which the “volume suppression effect” is executed, it is desirable that the display image on the effect display device 1600 is not displayed or is displayed in a suppression mode. However, in this case, it is desirable that display images displayed on the effect display device 1600 include those not targeted for the processing.

  The period during which the “volume suppression effect” is executed can appear a plurality of times within one effect pattern, and in those periods, “the time during which at least a part of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silence” is long. It is desirable to make the According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make a specific effect sound in a non-output state in a state that is difficult to be noticed by the player in any effect scene, and it is possible to improve the game interest. .

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the symbol variation is started until it is ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs processing for advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel to reproduce Do the process of Then, when the display effect in the game board side effect display device 1600 advances to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is allocated to the predetermined channel and the state is output in the suppression mode or silence ( The volume of "BGM playback" is reduced to a specific value and output. When an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as operation button 410) is detected in this state, the symbol fluctuation causes a big hit symbol A special effect sound that suggests an expectation that a special display mode appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressing mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, at the time of outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state of the thing. From this, it will be possible to provide an atmosphere that seems to be easy to use the channel. Therefore, providing an operation opportunity to cause the player to output the special effect sound in a state where the feeling of uneasiness such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" is removed. This makes it possible to curb the decline in game entertainment.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("BGM playback" sound) is assigned to a channel and is output in a suppressed manner or silence, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of a certain sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (the process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the effective period of effect reception will be generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is undefined (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so as to start the reproduction of the sound matched with this at an undefined timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "special BGM reproduction at the time of special effect sound reproduction" and is displayed. It is also conceivable to perform processing to reproduce. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the contents of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and the pattern is ended, the timing of the pattern stop, etc., it is within the effective period. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or it is determined to be indeterminate (up to the player), the sound of “BGM reproduction” is newly reproduced at the timing of the operation (effect reception). There is a concern that so-called sound shifts may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of symbol stop and the game interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as sounds of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of super reach production, the sound data at the second half of super reach production, etc.) are specified according to the time series defined by each sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. And among a plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, a specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation When a predetermined channel is assigned according to the time series being played, the predetermined channel is assigned and started from timing before the effective period of effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. It is made to be reproduced while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the

  In this regard, in a certain section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process related to sound output in silence compared to other sections When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special It is made to become a time-series relation in which the effective period of the effect receptionist occurs within the period). In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with the period after the (partial section) ends (other sections). It is made to reproduce | regenerate in the non-suppression mode in the channel different from the predetermined channel allocated.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data of the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in sequence according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In any case, it becomes possible to create a "suppression mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, it is specially performed in a non-suppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being output in suppression mode or silence (special period) regardless of the production reception” Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in such a way that the special effect sound is reproduced while being reproduced. Since the data contents of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly restore the sound of "BGM playback" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the player receives an operation in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence, the special performance sound is not suppressed by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that while making the reproduction start.

  FIG. 178 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 178, a specific example when executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (a), there is a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, and at timing ts11, the specific effect being developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the production pattern is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is already played back (in this case, stereo playback). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one of the sound data over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start of the symbol variation to the end when the specific effect pattern is determined to be executed. The sound material may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the different sound data prepared for each of the periods may be divided. May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In the example shown in FIG. 178, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to channels 02 and 03, and are in a state of reproduction.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b), one sound data ("BGM playback" sound) assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state is special. Silent data content is set at timing ts12 before the timing ts13 when the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception) for which an operation opportunity that causes the production of sound is given occurs. It is made to be in the reproduction state in a part section. As a result, even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed with respect to the sound of “BGM reproduction”, it is possible to output the sound in silence while assigning it to the predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of "BGM playback" is in a playback state in a partial section set as silent data content, and there is a possibility that there is a margin in the channel usage status While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output a special effect sound in a state where anxious feeling such as "there is no space in the channel and may not be able to output a special effect sound" is removed. Will be able to control the decline in game entertainment.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is ended even if the player does not perform the operation. At time ts15 before arriving, the period is ended so that the player's operation is not accepted for production. Therefore, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the operation effective period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state in the partial section set as the silent data content. A special performance sound corresponding to an operation by the player can be generated while an atmosphere is provided in which the use situation of the channel is likely to be sufficient. Note that the operation valid period is ended not only when the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when an effect by the player is accepted. When the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation is performed by the player at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound “BGM playback” is assigned based on the acceptance of the effect. , 03 is assigned to a special effect sound for reproduction on channels 08, 09 different from.

  In this regard, in this example, the maximum time from the start of the operation effective period to the end thereof (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period ends at this maximum time. When the time from the end of a section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” to the end (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is “BF” Even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the above, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time “SY + α (> BF)” and reproduced.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It is possible to output the “BGM playback” sound as a non-suppressed form in the form of being mixed with the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time from when the reproduction of the special effect sound is started according to the timing when the operation by the player is accepted until the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output as the non-suppression mode is variable. The buffer period for returning the output period of the special effect sound in the non-suppressing mode of the sound of "BGM playback" (The sound of "BGM playback" is restored in the non-suppressing mode by being mixed into the special effect sound By making it difficult for the player to notice that it is not possible to restore the sound of “BGM playback” as a mode of non-suppression when the operation by the player is accepted, and the sense of incongruity by returning after the predetermined time It becomes difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound “BGM playback” is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the production sound for BGM playback, the sound “BGM playback” is played back in the non-suppressed mode when the timing ts17 arrives. In the state, the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended.

  In the example described above, the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started” and the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended” are performed by the player as shown in FIG. 178 (b). Although it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrows according to the timing of acceptance, the timing ts16 arrives when the special performance sound is in the playback state, regardless of which timing it falls into. It is apparent that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the "BGM reproduction" sound is to be started.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the user feels more uncomfortable by “returning“ BGM playback ”sound as a non-suppressed sound when an operation by the player is accepted, but returning it after a predetermined time”. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section while paying attention to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, when an operation by the player is accepted, the special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of the big hit determination The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. In addition, even when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation effective period is generated at the timing ts14, and the effect is accepted when the effect by the player is accepted within the operation effective period. The predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced based on the information. And, even if it is operated at any timing within the operation effective period, the sound of BGM reproduction is densely reproduced to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (a failure effect The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending. According to such a configuration, a silent period (according to the operation timing) after a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) ends and the sound of BGM reproduction is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if it is set in such a silent period that a resurrection effect in which the expectation (or 100% may be high) can be generated, it will be expected to maintain the game interest.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in the lost mode without the BGM reproduction sound being restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. Also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the BGM playback sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM playback by performing a movable effect that operates a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect. It is desirable to make the sound of reproduction secretly transition to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound of “BGM playback” is silently output in a partial section, but the embodiment is not limited to this, and the aspect is suppressed more than the sound of “BGM playback” in other sections. As long as it is output at. Here, the mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered can be exemplified as a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is lowered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178, the “BGM playback” sound data assigned to a predetermined channel is set to a suppression mode or a time-sequential period of silence in the sound data itself. Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a state of being output in a suppressed manner or silence (special period) simply by playing it. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel. For example, at time ts12, the sound of “BGM playback” You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, a process of increasing the sound volume of the “BGM playback” from the specific value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) is triggered by the acceptance of the effect. Do not. If the specific performance condition is satisfied, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is increased from the specific value while the special performance sound is being played when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing to return to the volume initial value) will be performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is finished. (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 178, restriction processing is performed to make it more difficult for new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel, at least from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 comes to timing ts16. It is desirable to make it. Note that such a restriction process has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol variation being executed, such as a block winning tone, a pending winning tone, a general electric effect sound, an adjustment tone, etc. It is desirable that a specific game sound is a restriction target, and that the specific game sound that is the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel and is not reproduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. So that it is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a speech, etc.) and a timing ts12 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played, and BGM playback is performed. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppression mode or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is terminated before the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). Is desirable in order to alleviate the anxiety that the special directing sound is not output.

  Here, the specific effect sound played on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 does not necessarily start to be played at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and after the timing ts12. And may be started before timing ts13. Even in such a configuration, when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppression mode or a silence state, if a specific performance sound is output in a non-inhibition mode (normal mode), “ Since the sound of BGM playback that is set to “suppression mode or silent state” can appear to have been returned to the playback mode in the normal mode, the sound of BGM playback is suppressed or silent It is possible to make it hard to notice that

  Further, “for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is ended before timing ts14 (or before timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or predetermined effect sound) is output”. "The output of a specific effect sound is ended based on the fact that the player's operation is received within the operation effective period, or is automatically ended at a specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation effective period)." It means that. That is, the specific effect sound is automatically terminated unless the effect by the player is accepted until the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation effective period) arrives.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of BGM playback is output from timing ts14 at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM playback into these effect sounds, and the sound of BGM playback is usually changed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the aspect.

  Further, such an under-suppressed operation sound output process may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176 “BGM playback sound” is used as the restriction target, and the smaller the number of symbols, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels (when the minimum number of vacant channels due to symbol variation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number). You may make it make the ratio by which the said operation sound output process under suppression is performed high. According to such a configuration, the BGM playback sound is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a surplus in the number of empty channels so as not to feel uneasy that the special performance sound is not output due to a lack of channels. Will be able to

  For the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, an effect reception is always generated (automatic reception) within the effective period even if there is no operation, and a post-operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do so.

  Also, when the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178 occurs, the effect reception is permitted while the sound of “BGM playback” is output in the suppression mode or silence. It may be possible to output “acceptance acceptable sound” that suggests that (or that the reception of the effect is permitted) in an unsuppressed manner. The “acceptable sound” is configured as a partial section in the “specific sound data” for outputting the “specific effect sound”, and the “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel before the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific performance sound corresponding to the channel is output in a non-suppressing manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the “acceptable sound” is output as a sound corresponding to the “specific sound data” assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” is output from before the timing ts13 to after that so as to straddle the timing ts13. Note that the specific effect sound can be output, for example, as a precursor effect sound corresponding to a precursor effect (an effect suggesting that the effective period will occur soon) before the operation effective period occurs. In this case, “a reproduction section of a prelude effect sound” and “a reproduction section of an acceptable sound” are provided in one sound data allocated to a channel so as to straddle before and after the timing ts13. The “acceptable sound” may be a non-output state during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at timing ts15. Although it is good, when it is in the output state and the production is accepted, it is desirable to use this as a trigger for the non-output state.

  That is, “acceptable sound is output” means that “sound data including acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing ts13, and is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including the arrival of the “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data in accordance with the timing ts13. In addition to “removing the sound data including the acceptable sound”, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data is a concept that includes a transition to a period in which the sound (including silent data) is reproduced after the end.

  In addition, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, the time elapsed since the reception of the effect was made even if the effect was received at any timing within the effective period. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special effect sound is reproduced in a non-suppressing manner on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the sound “BGM reproduction” is assigned.

  In this respect, when the effect is received in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception is made to appear also as a display image on the effect display device 1600. However, for the special effect display according to the effect reception, “the execution state (viewable state) is continued until the elapsed time from when the effect reception is made reaches the above-mentioned predetermined time value” Instead, it is desirable that “even when the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period, it is made non-displayed when the predetermined timing within the effect pattern arrives”. As the “predetermined timing in the effect pattern”, for example, it is possible to adopt a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period that is after timing ts15 and before timing ts17. Although there is an operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), even if the effect is accepted immediately after the occurrence of the operation effective period, it is a timing that arrives before the timing when the output state of the special effect sound is ended. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, with regard to the processing concerning the special effect sound, the output state must be continued until the timing when the "BGM playback" sound comes back after the timing ts16 at which it is restored in the non-suppression mode. As for special effect display, it will be possible to finish before special effect sound, so that it is possible to progress the effects after performing operation after operation with good tempo become. In order to obtain such effects, the specific timing at which the special effect display is not displayed is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of “BGM playback” is restored or the timing that comes before the timing ts16. It is important to

  According to such a configuration, when the effect is accepted in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), “the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted is predetermined, based on the fact that the effect is accepted. A process of processing the special effect sound that continues the output state until the time value is reached and a process of processing the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives Will start each.

  For example, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing within the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “processing related to the special effect display” of the post-operation effects is executed over a relatively long period. Among the post-operation effects, the “process related to the special effect sound” ends at the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed since the reception of the effect. On the other hand, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing within the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “processing related to the special effect display” of the post-operation effects is executed only for a relatively short time. However, the “processing related to the special effect sound” among the effects after the operation is executed from the time when the effect is accepted until the timing at which a predetermined time value elapses.

  That is, in this case, with the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern becomes a specific timing When the effect is received within the special operation reception effect (effective period), the output state is set until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. A function of processing the special effect sound to be continued and a process of processing the special effect display in which the display is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives are respectively executed.

  According to such an operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), if an operation is performed immediately after the effective period is generated, the execution state of the “process related to special effect display” among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a price to be paid, the end timing of the “process for special effect sound” in the post-operation presentation comes relatively early. That said, if you do not operate for a while after the effective period occurs and operate at a later time, the end timing of “processing related to special effects sound” of the post-operation effects will be a relatively late stage. Although it can be made to come by, there is a demerit that it will not be possible to maintain long the execution state of the "process according to the special effect display" in the post-operation effect.

That is, in the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), there is no one that is the most desirable operation timing for enhancing the effect.
・ Why do you enjoy the process by extending the execution state of “Process for special effect display” in exchange for accelerating the timing of completion of “Process for special effect sound”? Or)
・ In addition to shortening the execution state of “Processing related to special effects display”, whether to enjoy this process by extending the time until “Processing related to special effects sound” ends (at a later stage within the effective period) Operation), or
・ Simultaneously sacrifice the time that “process related to special effect display” is maintained in the execution state and the time until “process related to special effect sound” is finished, so that the overall balance is achieved. (Do you operate at the early or late timing within the validity period)
It is possible to provide a strategic operation performance such as that for the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception performance that is difficult to get bored of, which allows the operation timing to be selected according to the player's mood. Will be able to.

  Here, in the above-described example, as the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process relating to the special effect sound” and the “process relating to the special effect display” are lines Although the described example has been described, "processing for operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be further executed, or "processing for operating the predetermined effect movable body" instead of "processing for special effect display" "" May be performed. However, as for the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body", as in the case of the "process for special effect display" described above, even when the effect is accepted at any timing within the effective period. It is desirable that the operation state be terminated when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Here, "to end the operation state" is an effect to operate the predetermined effect movable body to the specific position, the predetermined effect movable body in the operation state at the specific position to the original position It means to start processing to operate to return.

  In the example described above, when an effect is accepted during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , A process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) and a “process for a special effect sound” that is continued until an elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It was. However, even when the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined rendering condition is not satisfied (for example, when the big hit determination is missed or when the predetermined presentation determination is dropped) If, for example, the effect reception is made within the operation reception effect, the “process according to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body)” is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition As compared with the case where the above condition is satisfied (FIG. 178), the “processing applied to a special effect sound” in which the “predetermined time value” is set relatively short may be performed as a different effect sound More desirable.

  However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected well (detection error), and the production reception may not be performed. As a result, the production reception is not performed. When the period ends, there is a game entertainment effect of the player who saw that the “process for special effect display (or the process for operating a predetermined effect movable body)” was not performed even though it was operated. There is concern that it will decline. Therefore, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the rendering pattern arrives. (Or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and a" process for a special effect sound "that is continued until an elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value, respectively. It is desirable to be done. As a method for automatically generating an operation acceptance (automatic acceptance) or a rendering aspect associated therewith, it is possible to use any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300 or an appropriate combination.

  As described above, during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in an output state in a non-suppressed manner. Then, based on the effect reception, the effect after operation is executed, and the output state of the acceptance allowable sound is canceled at this point. In this regard, even when a normal effective period that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is not suppressed, the acceptable sound is output in an unsuppressed manner with the occurrence. However, with regard to the acceptance allowable sound, it is desirable that, even when the effect is accepted when being in the output state, the output state is continued without being canceled. Also, with regard to the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the effect sound may be continued for a longer time than the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the normal valid period occurs. It is desirable for maintaining the fun of the game suitably while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, as it is used as

  Also, in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, N acceptance acceptable sounds that indicate that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred) are accepted. There are types (aspects), and any one of the types is always output (output in a non-suppressed manner). On the other hand, it is suggested that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred) in the effective period that is generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner. There are only M types (modes) that are fewer than N as permissible acceptance sounds, and “output when any of those types (output in a non-suppressed mode)” and “output by any of those types” It is desirable that the sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound itself is not assigned a channel and generates a valid period. In addition, it is desirable that it is suggested that "the expectation degree which a big hit design appears differs" by the kind of acceptance acceptance sound.

  Alternatively, either the effective period generated when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state, or the effective period generated when the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppression mode. Also in the case of a plurality of types (aspects) are prepared as the acceptance acceptable sound, the ratio of occurrence of the acceptance acceptable sound with a high hit expectancy occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or silent state. It is desirable to make it relatively high in the effective period, and to be relatively low in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output normally in the non-suppression mode. . And also in this case, in the effective period which occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state, the acceptance permission sound which suggests that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred) is While the output is always output (output in the non-suppressed aspect), the effective period occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the normal output state in the non-suppressed aspect, the effective period occurs ( Or the acceptance permission sound indicating that the effective period has been output is "if the sound data including the acceptance permission sound itself is not allocated and not output" because it is output in the non-suppression mode " It is desirable to have it.

  According to these configurations, when the BGM playback sound is in a normal output state in the non-suppressed mode, the expectation level suggested by the acceptance sound is detailed (M types less than N types) May not be able to be recognized, or may not be expected (relatively low). However, in this case, since the sound of BGM playback is being output normally in an unsuppressed manner, there is a possibility that the acceptable sound will be missed by the sound of BGM playback. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the acceptable sound has not been output. On the other hand, when the sound of BGM playback is in a state of being output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, in a situation where it is possible to make the sound output in a non-suppression mode stand out, Since the output is always performed in a non-suppressed manner, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes are employed, the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the “effective period generated when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silent state” are generated. , At least one of the types of acceptable reception sounds that can be output upon occurrence of the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is normally output in a non-suppressed manner” (for example, Among them, the type with the lowest hit probability may be included. However, the acceptable sound that can be output when the “valid period generated when the BGM playback sound is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner” is included in the acceptable reception sound. Included are types that cannot be output as acceptable reception sounds that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the state is in the state” (for example, types with the highest jackpot expectation among acceptable reception sounds). Is desirable. Also, the number of types of effects that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner” is “BGM playback It is desirable that the number of effect types that can be generated as an effect after operation according to the effect reception is greater than the number of effect types that can be generated in the suppression period or the effective period generated when the sound is in the suppression mode or silence state. Among the types of effects that can appear as post-operation effects in response to an effect reception in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a state of being output normally in an unsuppressed manner”, “BGM playback sound is At least one of the effect types that can appear as effects after the operation according to the effect reception may be included in the “effective period that occurs when in the suppression mode or the silent state”.

  Also, in the normal gaming state where neither the time-shortening function nor the probability variation function operates, the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or the silence state, and the sound of BGM playback is in the non-inhibition mode When multiple types (modes) with different jackpot expectations are prepared as acceptable reception sounds in any of the effective periods that are generated when in a normal output state, output is possible in any of these effective periods Then, a special acceptance permissible sound that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol becomes 100%” may be output. In addition, a plurality of types (aspects) may be prepared as the special acceptance permission sound.

  That is, in this case, when the “specially acceptable acceptance sound is output (non-suppression mode) at the occurrence of“ the effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state ”, the effect is produced within the effective period. Even as a post-operation effect performed based on the reception being made, it will be executed in a special mode when it appears, "the proportion stopped at the jackpot symbol will be 100%". If the special reception acceptance sound is output, the output of the special reception acceptance sound is interrupted when the effect reception is made, and if it is output, "the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" special It is desirable to output a production sound.

  However, when the special reception allowable sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the “effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output normally in the non-suppressed mode” is generated, the effective period When it appears as a post-operation effect that is performed based on the reception of the effect in the case, it is executed in a special mode that “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100%”, and executed in the special mode It is desirable that there be cases where it is not possible. It should be noted that the special acceptance permission sound that is output when the “valid period generated when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppression mode or silence” is generated, and “the sound of BGM playback is output in a non-suppression mode as usual. The special acceptable sound that is output during the “valid period generated when the state is in the state” may be different types of acceptable sound. In addition, there are multiple types of special acceptance acceptable sound that are output when "the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is normally output in the non-suppression mode", and among these types, , The same as the type of the specially accepted sound that is output upon occurrence of “the effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state”, and the type may be different . When the effect is accepted in a state where the acceptance acceptable sound (including the special acceptance acceptable sound) is output, the output of the acceptance acceptable sound is interrupted, and the effect sound according to the effect after the operation (the effect after the operation is special When it is performed in a mode, it is desirable that, when being output, a special effect sound that "the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" is output.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppression mode or in a silent state (when it is difficult to make a mistake in hearing), if a special acceptance allowable sound is output, Also as a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect reception has been made, if it appears, it will be always executed in a manner that "the percentage stopped at the jackpot symbol is 100%". On the other hand, when the BGM playback sound is output as normal in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation in which a mistake is likely to occur due to a competition with the BGM playback sound), it is assumed that the special acceptance permission sound is output. However, as the post-operation effect performed based on the reception of the effect within the effective period, the effect is not necessarily performed in a manner that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100%” From this, it becomes possible to have doubts (suspiciousness of mishearing) as to whether the acceptance acceptable sound has been output as a "special acceptance acceptable sound", so that the sense of tension can be suitably sustained. Become. As a result, while the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-restraint mode, the emphasis is placed on "how to not miss the acceptance acceptable sound", and a sense of tension until the acceptance acceptable sound is output. This also can be suitably maintained. In order to enhance such a sense of tension, in the operation reception effect, the special reception permission sound is output and the operation is not performed in a mode that the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100% when appearing. Compared to the case of the operation reception effect “executed in a manner in which a special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation effect is“ performed to be 100% when it appears, the ratio is stopped by the big hit symbol ” It is desirable to execute a presentation (pre-permission operation related display or pre-permission operation related sound) in a relatively short time so that the effective period is suddenly generated.

  It should be noted that, in a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation where a listening error is likely to occur due to competition with the sound of BGM reproduction) Post-production is "does not be executed in a mode that the proportion stopped at the jackpot symbol is 100% when it appears" operation reception effect (valid period) and "special acceptance acceptable sound is output and post-operation effect is" When it appears, the percentage of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100%, and it is executed in the form of "operation reception effect (effective period)", the special acceptance sound is output as acceptance sound of different types Alternatively, it may be output as an acceptable sound of the same type. In addition, in a state where the sound of BGM playback is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation where the reception allowance sound is likely to cause an error due to the competition with the sound of BGM playback) The operation reception effect (effective period) performed after the operation and performed after the operation is performed in a manner such that "the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol will be 100% when it appears" may not necessarily occur. In addition, in the operation acceptance effect (effective period), acceptance acceptance is not performed in a mode in which the special acceptance acceptance sound is output and the effect after the operation is “the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100% when appearing”. Even if any type is output as a sound, the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode that "when it appears, the percentage stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%", this mode is originally prepared It may not be.

  In addition, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed or in the normal effective period, the image display over the operation means used as the operation target and the effective A gauge display indicating how much time remains is displayed respectively, and an operation promoting effect is performed to urge the player to perform an operation. In this regard, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs at least while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, when the production is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and “ A process related to a special effect display in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives (or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body), and an “elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted” It is desirable to start each of the processing for the special effect sound that is continued until the time value reaches a predetermined time value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period is the timing at which the production is accepted based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display after the production is accepted. Thus, it is possible to predict whether or not the process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body) will be finished immediately. In addition, as a method for starting the effect after operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. It is possible to use the content of the written description.

  In the example described above, for the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as a “specific type effect pattern” for outputting the sound of “BGM playback” in silence or silence, the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed Alternatively, setting the number to be less than the number of production patterns prepared (stored) as “other production patterns” that are not output without sound is desirable in order to improve the game entertainment when the production occurs. .

  In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as “effect patterns” for outputting the sound of “BGM playback” in silence or silence, the sounds of “BGM playback” are suppressed in the effect patterns over the first set time. Alternatively, an effect pattern to be output with silence and an effect pattern to output the sound of “BGM playback” over a second set time longer than the first set time are included in the suppression pattern or silence. It is desirable to have different expectations. According to such a configuration, when the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, it is possible to indicate the expected degree of jackpot depending on how long the state continues. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). Then, when the sound volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (such as a demo state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the sound volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed sound volume setting value. (Processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is being executed. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 that can select “an effect pattern that outputs the sound of BGM playback in a suppressed manner or silence”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during symbol variation regardless of the effect pattern. In such a case, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained since the player who sees the situation that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output will be aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being performed. become. In this case, although the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the effect display device 1600 does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound so as to display a message indicating that the volume setting value has been changed. It is desirable in order to make the person aware (be aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being performed). The phrase “does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but in addition to outputting this at the volume 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel .

  The special effect sound that is output based on the effect reception being made when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or silence state is that over a time twice or more of the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) It is desirable to be configured to maintain the output state. According to such a configuration, even if the effect is received immediately after the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 has elapsed is It becomes possible to make it longer than the output time (special effect sound) until timing ts15.

[Channel assignment cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which no sound data is assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. It is possible to execute (channel assignment cancellation operation). In other words, in this case, an empty channel will be created in response to the player's operation. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite performance sound and special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

  Note that the operation (channel assignment cancellation operation) in this example is not limited to “button operation”, and examples include an act of praying while holding the hand against the pachinko machine 1 with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. In short, it is based on a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect any state change that occurs when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) that is the detection target is performed. It is sufficient that the processing in which the sound in the state assigned to the channel is removed from the channel and the reproduction end is performed in response to the detection.

  FIG. 179 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when processing related to such channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 179, during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern whose effect has been developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “BGM1 playback” according to (for example, the presentation effect sound to be played during execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 and played (here, stereo playback) and The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the effect mode (for example, one music continuously played across a plurality of fluctuations in a short game state etc.) is assigned to the playback channel 02, 03 and played (here, stereo playback ) Is in the situation.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), among the sounds in the reproduction state (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction), the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). The channel assignment is forcibly terminated at the time when is detected, and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, when the timing tw12 is reached, an effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is received. An allowable reception period can be generated up to timing tw13. In the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action to be detected such as “Operate a button and secure a vacant channel” in the display area of gaming board side effect display device 1600 (channel allocation cancellation operation) An operation instruction image prompting to perform is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 179 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection by a predetermined detection means is not performed. Show.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (a), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed until the timing tw13 comes, the sound of “BGM 2 reproduction” is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. In addition, at timing tw13 when the reception period is ended, the operation instruction image (operate a button and secure a vacant channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, processing is performed to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproduce it. In this example, the vacant channel is previously secured in another channel (reproduction channel 10, 11) even if the reproduction channel 02, 03 is not changed to the vacant channel by the detection by the predetermined detection means. A predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) can be assigned to the channel and played back. However, when the vacancy is not secured in advance in another channel, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmed sound) can be assigned, and it becomes impossible to reproduce and output this. There will be concerns.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period of timing tw12 to tw13 and detection by a predetermined detection unit is performed. Show.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), when detection by a predetermined detection means is performed until the timing tw13 arrives, the playback channels 02 and 03 are detected at the timing tw12a at which the detection is made. "BGM2 playback" sound will be removed from. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure in advance a vacant channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) which can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) until timing tw 13 arrives. The concern that the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) cannot be reproduced and output is resolved. In addition, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly ended, and in this case, the music or the speech as the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is completed (or Because it will be considered that the reproduction ends at a halfway point without being reproduced, until a good point), the player remembers the feeling that the vacant channel was secured in advance by the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) As a result, it becomes possible to easily wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is reproduced.

  It should be noted that at the timing tw12a when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound “BGM2 reproduction” is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (Operate the button and secure an empty channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is ended.

  In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), at the timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as the empty channels, but other channels (reproduction channels 10, A predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) is assigned to 11) and reproduced. However, when there is no space in another channel at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit determined sound) is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

  Alternatively, when the specific sound (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on detection by a predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in another channel. Also, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) may be allocated to the specific channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, the effect sound (here, different from the predetermined effect sound) Even if BGM2) is allocated, the allocation state is canceled at that time triggered by a specific action detection (channel allocation cancellation operation) such as a button operation, and therefore one channel (specific channel) is assigned. It is possible to play “BGM2 playback” sound and a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) only by using them, and to effectively use a playback channel which is a limited resource. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but a timing later than the timing tw13. The predetermined effect sound (in this case, the jackpot determined sound) may be reproduced.

  Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the big hit finalized sound, a good effect sound indicating the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears, a good effect sound indicating that the big hit is missed, etc. may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds be selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears in the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that a big hit has been missed, even if the timing tw13 comes, no effect sound may be output, and the idle channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, as a sound whose channel assignment is terminated when a specific action (a channel assignment cancellation operation) is detected, it is not a sound output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is missed when the reproduction state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to easily predict the content and there is no hindrance. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), a reception period in which the reception of a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is generated when a predetermined timing within the symbol variation arrives. It is not limited to. For example, at least while the specific sound as a target to be removed from the channel assignment is in the reproduction state, the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is performed based on the acceptance. You may make it cancel. In this case, for example, a predetermined timing after the specific sound is put into a reproduction state, such as a predetermined timing after the predetermined time has passed, maintain the state of the vacant channel secured in advance for a predetermined time, and then another sound is transmitted to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be allocated and played back.

  In addition, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forced to be terminated, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. 0) may be used in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned empty channel at that time. It is also possible to cancel the channel assignment of a specific sound by allocating an extremely short assignment cancellation reception sound (such as 1 second) in the form of overwriting the same channel. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound earlier when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the forced termination is not performed.

  In addition, a new sound is generated at least in a period from the acceptance of the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) to the end of the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the effect reception. Specific game sound (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound, etc.) that is not related to the effect of whether a big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation so that the channel is not used uselessly. It is desirable not to output the pre-reading effect sound or the like.

  In addition, the specific sound to be forcibly terminated ("BGM2 playback" sound) is played as a non-loop effect sound such as music or speech that is played back only for a predetermined time without being looped. It is desirable to make it easier to remember that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. .

[Anomaly notification in the middle of the stage corresponding to the stage pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, the specific alarm sound according to this is not necessarily allocated to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that this occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not necessarily output, so that the channel has a margin and promotes reduction of the risk of empty channels disappearing. Is expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though it is at a timing at which the predetermined movable decoration body should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. When such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “a movable body abnormality has occurred”) and a game The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “abnormality occurred in the back movable effect unit 3200”) can be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the abnormal display in the display area is performed so that it is possible to specify which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies has an abnormality. It may be an aspect that identifies which abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to which of the groups. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100 and the like) , The back-side movable effect unit 3200, the back-left movable effect unit 3300, the back-right movable effect unit 3400, the back-upper movable effect unit 3500, the back-under-movable effect unit 3700, etc.) The display at the time of abnormality in the display area is performed in such a manner that it can be specified which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body has an abnormality. Note that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refers to movable decorative bodies that have different drive sources and are provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by the failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly probable that the player side is likely not to make any mistakes, but it should be dealt with when notified. Because there is no, during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit judgment are being executed and the notification process is sometimes executed and displayed, it is in the effect being executed However, it will have an adverse effect on the player, and it is an amusement for the player. In addition, the alarm sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not enough in the number of empty channels, so that the player may be anxious not to be able to output a new sound. There is concern about a decline in the entertainment interest.

  On the other hand, however, failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs frequently when the movable decorative body operates, and in some cases it is difficult to assume a situation where it suddenly fails when it is not operating at all. Then, when the movable decorative body is not operating at all, the case where the movable body abnormality occurs is that the movable decorative body is removed from the specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent act such as a dodging act or a wire entry. If there is a possibility of being in a detected situation, and it is possible not to output an alarm sound corresponding to a movable body abnormality even under such a situation, it may encourage cheating, From the point of view of players who are interested in the

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed and detected. Even in such a case, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound, display at abnormal time in display area of game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. However, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern (effect pattern)) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 When a movable body abnormality is detected while a movable decorative body is operated based on a performance pattern during a big hit game or the like, a notification process (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the abnormal time in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, and the like are not performed. Note that the external output of the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body (hall side notification) is not performed in an obvious manner and does not adversely affect the performance, and may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to cause a failure in the movable decorative body (due to the peripheral control board 1510 even within a period during which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed. Abnormality of moving object in process of moving movable ornament body by effect control (moving body driving process of moving movable ornament body based on variation pattern (effect pattern) or effect pattern during big hit game)) In the event that a failure occurs, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound can be performed, but at least in a situation where the failure of the movable decorative body is likely to occur (during the moving operation of the movable body) In the case of occurrence, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormal notification sound is not performed, so that the person who performs the illegal action is restrained from performing the illegal action. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, assignment control of effect sound to a channel, abnormality occurrence The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. It becomes to be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing to operate the corresponding movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated while the movable decorative body is not yet recovered from the abnormal state. The production is not performed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormality notification sound according to the movable body abnormality is to be performed or not Regardless, it is possible to execute restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to restore the corresponding movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, the specific movable effect is started even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state during the period of execution of the symbol variation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body is performed When the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state in the previous stage, it becomes possible to execute the specific movable effect to operate the specific movable decorative body.

  In addition, although the restoration process is performed to perform a predetermined restoration operation (operation to move to a specific position (origin position)) with respect to the corresponding movable decoration, the movable decoration is specified within a predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 180 shows the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in a process of operating a movable decorative body according to a variation pattern (effect pattern) according to jackpot determination during a period in which symbol variation is performed. And it is a time chart which shows those examples about the condition by the side of a movable ornament.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (a), the game board side effect display device 1600 uses the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific performance pattern in which the performance has been advanced is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over a period up to timing ti14. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period for receiving the effect), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 180, it is assumed that the effect by the player is accepted at timing ti13. Therefore, at timing ti13, based on the fact that the player's operation has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed to perform a movable effect that causes the specific movable decorative body to perform a performance operation (FIG. 180 (b)). Refer to FIG. 180 (a)), and effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the movable body drive processing is ended without performing any driving since the restoration processing has failed and no restoration can be expected. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, when the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a mode determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to a specific position (original position), and when driving for the specific movable decorative body is completed, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, The movable body driving process is terminated when it is determined based on the information that the state has been returned to the specific position (original position). However, when it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not at the specific position (original position) in the movable body drive processing, the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is performed. Then, the movable body driving process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration processing fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  With such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. In this example, the specific movable decorative body is applied to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period during which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs and this can not operate. In FIG. 180 (b), a dotted range indicates a period in which a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the driving for the specific movable decorative body (drive for the rendering operation) is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). In addition to the determination of abnormality, the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is the movable Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that it has occurred due to a failure of the decorative body, in this illustrative example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body where the abnormality has occurred, the movable body abnormality As it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the rendering in progress. That is, based on the fact that the movable body can not be returned to the normal state (moved to the original position) while the movable process is being performed based on the effect pattern during the symbol variation, the situation is displayed. The execution opportunity of “the restoration process for the movable body (the movable body not in the original position) during the rendering operation that is not normally restored” is established, but when the restoration process is performed (or When the restoration process fails to restore the movable body to a normal state, the alarm sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not assigned to the channel and reproduced.

  Note that at timing ti18, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation is ended, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), the memory of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it becomes possible to execute the usual movable effect. On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 180 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated) and the recovery fails. In this case, after that, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even within the same symbol variation, or within the symbol variation after the next time, even when the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable ornament based on the effect pattern has arrived, The effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the abnormally generated movable decorative body remain to emit light in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, when the movable decorative body itself is not operated, the actuator (lamp) mounted thereon is operated (lighted) in the operation mode, and the movable effect is not performed. It is expected to curb the entertainment interest.

  As described above, when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body By not allocating the abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) in the same fluctuation pattern (specific effect pattern) as the example shown in FIG. 180, this movable body abnormality is When it occurs at a timing different from when moving a specific movable decorative body by effect control (rendering pattern), an abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

  FIG. 181 shows that the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination in the period in which the pattern variation is performed, but in a process different from this. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation condition of each channel when detected, and the condition by the side of a movable decoration body.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern whose effect has been developed on the display device 1600 is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  Then, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) at which the operation opportunity is given to the player is maximum at the timing ti14. Can occur over time. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the specific movable decorative body is moved by some external force at a timing ti11a before the timing ti12 when such a specific movable decorative body can perform a rendering operation (operation based on the rendering pattern) Therefore, it is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 181 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, at the timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed.

  At timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history will be erased, and after that, it will be possible to execute a normal movable effect without performing any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period of the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state, and therefore the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is The display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played back, causing an abnormality. The various light emitting units including the lamps mounted on the movable decorative body only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within the period of the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is determined by the restoration process. If it is eliminated, the usual production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of the specific movable decorative body is executed. In this example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and a restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is being performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are in a state where restoration processing is being executed, even if an operation by the player is accepted within a period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, a specific operation is performed. Although the rendering operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

  However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 181, it is assumed that at the timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery has failed. doing. Therefore, after timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the predetermined recovery operation is not performed and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  In addition, as described above, a situation where an abnormality (a movable body abnormality) has occurred in a specific movable decorative body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected when a specific movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body has not been resolved by some external force even in the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

  Therefore, at the timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, various effect sounds according to a specific effect pattern are assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect contents, and the abnormality notification sound is reproduced over a predetermined time in the reproduction channels 00 and 01. Will be assigned to Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the display at the time of abnormality corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ "Abnormal occurrence in the movable effect unit 3200 in the back" and the like will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting units, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, a part of the light emitting units emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting units are in a normal mode in accordance with the progress of the production contents. It will be made to emit light.

  According to the example of FIGS. 180 and 181, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol variation, the period during which the control relating to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern is executed When the movable body abnormality occurs during the operation, it is unlikely that an illegal act has been performed, and there is a possibility of failure during the production operation. . On the other hand, when the abnormality of the movable body suddenly occurs when the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is not executed, it is highly likely that an illegal act is performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the production. This is a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output the notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at timing ti11b, and the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at timing ti13a after the restoration process is performed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. Decided to However, at timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected despite the fact that the specific movable decorative body can not operate based on the rendering pattern, and even if this is done alone, fraudulent acts such as dodging or entering a wire Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of being interrupted, the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality may be started at this timing ti11b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may be performed. In other words, even when the moving process based on the effect pattern during the symbol variation is not executed, if the movable body moves from its original position due to a sticking action or wire entry, the symbol variation starts or varies Do not wait for the restoration process timing at the end to arrive, and at that point (in the middle of the symbol fluctuation), the execution timing of “restoration process for movable bodies that have not returned to normal (movable bodies that are not in the original position)” However, when the restoration process is performed (or when it fails to restore the movable body to the normal state by the restoration process), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel and reproduced. To be done. Alternatively, when the movable body is moved from the original position by a drag action or a wire entry, a process (a movable process not based on the effect pattern) for moving the movable body by a driving force from a driving source (such as a motor) can be performed. It may be made to move to the original position within this process. In this case, if the movable body cannot be moved to the original position by such a movable process, even if the pattern is changing, the "movable body not in the original position is targeted" The execution timing of the “restoration process” is established. Then, when the restoration process is performed (or when the movable body fails to return to the normal position (return to the original position) in the restoration process), the alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel Will be played back.

  In short, regarding the notification process in response to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decoration body is in spite of the fact that the specific movable decoration body is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern. "A failure has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the performance pattern". It is important not to be executed as a sufficient condition, so that it is possible for a person who performs a fraudulent act to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed, while being executed for a legitimate player It is expected to avoid having an adverse effect on the production. The condition for performing the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body within the period in which the symbol variation is performed is as follows: “The specific movable decoration is not performed by the specific movable decoration body based on the production pattern. For example, “failure in restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality” or “occurring when the occurrence of an abnormality is in a specific situation” Etc. can be adopted as a further condition.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the specific movable decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when a specific movable decorative body is operated according to the production pattern, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality will not be performed as a trigger. In the process of operating the decorative body according to the rendering pattern, it may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at predetermined timings or at predetermined time intervals.

  Further, the method of detecting the movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected, and, for example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body Other methods such as performing detection may be employed. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 180, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti17, thereby detecting the abnormality of the movable body. In the example of FIG. 181, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti11b, thereby detecting a movable body abnormality.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the stage operation at the timing when the operation is performed by the player. May be operated.

  In addition, among the notifications according to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  In the case where the abnormality notification is not executed on the condition that "a specific movable decorative body is abnormal based on the effect pattern and the abnormality is generated in the specific movable decorative body", the condition is not determined. Also, it is desirable that abnormality notification is not performed as long as power supply is continued without clearing at least the RAM even if the abnormal state is not eliminated and is left. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the effect be developed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoring operation.

  After the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 for a predetermined time and reproduced by the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the reproduction channels 00 and 01 are vacant channels even if the movable body abnormality remains. When the game is started in this state, it is desirable that the production sound is output in a non-suppressed manner even if the movable body abnormality remains.

  In the example described above, even if the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed, the restoring operation is performed on the effect movable body in which the movement abnormality occurs when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this respect, even if the restoration operation is successful in the restoration operation, the movement processing is performed to test whether or not the production movable body different from the presentation movable body in which the movement abnormality occurs is also properly operable. Good. In other words, as a result of performing a restoration operation on a moving movable body in which a movement abnormality has occurred, if this fails, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that fraud is being performed. However, as a result of performing a restoration operation on a moving movable body where movement abnormality has occurred, if it succeeds, it will be difficult to understand whether or not there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts are being performed It will be. Therefore, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, a fraudulent act is performed through a movable process to test whether or not the production movable body different from the production movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred can be properly operated. It is desirable to continue to determine whether the possibility is high. Such movement processing may be further performed even when restoration fails in the restoration operation.

  Processing contents related to the restoration operation in the restoration operation performed in a situation where the movable effect based on the production pattern is not executed and the restoration operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the situation where the movable production based on the production pattern is executed It is desirable that (for example, the number of retries) be different from one another.

[Recovery processing of multiple movable decorations]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies with different drive sources and provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality (Sound data) is assigned to a channel and played back, so that the number of channels used is not increased unnecessarily even when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously for a plurality of movable decorative bodies. The In addition, the movable body abnormality means that the movable body is in a state where it cannot operate properly, and is the same as that exemplified in “abnormality notification while an effect according to an effect pattern is performed”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable ornaments mounted on gaming machines has increased, and the game can be obtained simply by associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable ornaments. It is becoming difficult to properly inform the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and abnormality notification sounds that differ depending on which of the groups the movable decorative bodies have an abnormality are made to channels. By assigning and reproducing, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

  In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-described example of “abnormality notification while an effect corresponding to the effect pattern is being performed” (see FIGS. 180 and 181). Is performed. Therefore, also in this example, even if it is generated during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) are being executed and this is detected, notification processing by pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, and the like are executable. Also, similarly, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being performed, processing (fluctuating pattern for operating the movable decorative body by effect control by at least the peripheral control board 1510 In the case where a movable body abnormality is detected while (movable effect drive processing for operating the movable decorative body) based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern in the big hit game, etc., notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 ( It is configured not to output an alarm sound, display an abnormal time in a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, turn on an abnormal time by various lamps, and the like.

  However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, the abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and made to be in the reproduction state is only one of the groups corresponding to the specific group. On the other hand, a process for performing a restoring operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is executed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that, even in the case where a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected that the channel has a margin and a reduction in the risk of empty channels disappearing. As well as being able to become a part, it becomes possible to make a rapid abnormal recovery for each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel usage time through the efficiency improvement of the processing when an abnormality occurs. . In addition, about the contents of restoration processing, and each processing at the time of success or failure, the example of the above-mentioned "abnormal notification in the stage according to the presentation pattern" is performed (see FIG. 180 and FIG. 181) It is the same as in the case of).

  Here, as an aspect which divides a some movable decoration body into two or more groups, it is calculated | required that it is an aspect suitable for alerting | reporting the state as the said pachinko machine 1, for example, it is provided in the door frame 3 side. A plurality of frame-side movable ornaments (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back Right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. Depending on the type of abnormality notification sound, it can be transmitted to the hall side whether or not an abnormality has occurred, or whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the panel side that is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. So is the ability. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decorative body, it can be said that there is a higher possibility that fraudulent acts are performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than when an abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by performing the notification sound output based on such grouping, the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body is not noticed by the player side depending on the type (unpleasant feeling). Without any change), the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation of high possibility of fraud can be secretly transmitted to the hall side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment as well, in the event that a movable body abnormality has occurred, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a game board side effect display As described above, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600 can be executed. In this regard, in this example, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the “notification by display” is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of abnormality than the case of the “notification by sound”, but is superior in the information transmission function for informing the details of the abnormality in more detail. Have the same properties. Therefore, in the “notification by display”, the grouping is performed in such a manner that the information transmission function is more effectively performed in a manner different from the case of performing the “notification by sound” using the difference in properties. In particular, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the groups thus uniquely divided belongs to the movable decorative body.

  That is, in this case, for example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into either group. Depending on whether there is an "Any movable body abnormality occurs, the notification sound displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same as the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 160, even though the abnormality notification sound is assumed to be the same. Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed ”,“ a second notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are the same even when any abnormality of the movable body occurs. ”And“ a third notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are different from each other even when any movable body abnormality occurs ”occur. It becomes this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 182 shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel and the situation on the movable ornament side when a movable object abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable ornaments at a specific timing in a period in which symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) provided to the player can occur at the maximum over the period up to the timing tj15. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (period of timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control is performed to operate a specific movable decorative body after timing tj15. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, originally, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, and the movable effect for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the demonstration operation is performed, and the channel An effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved by some external force at the timing tj11 (the operation is not based on the effect pattern), and the timing tj13 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation. It is assumed that the movable body abnormality is detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 182 (b) and FIG. 183 (b), which will be described later, a dotted range indicates a period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred is executed. In the relation to the restoration processing, even if the player's operation is accepted at time tj 14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 182, a board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, a board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and a board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. The movable body abnormality is detected with respect to the frame side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side. Each situation is assumed to occur.

  More specifically, in the restoration processing according to the example shown in FIG. 182, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side The processing modes are different between D, E and F. For example, with respect to the movable ornaments A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable ornaments are disposed in a relatively narrow space, and simultaneous operation may cause interference due to contact with each other. Thus, after the timing tj12, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other's operation, including the relationship with the above, restoration processing is simultaneously performed at timing tj12 so that rapid abnormal restoration of each movable decorative body is enabled.

  In such a configuration, restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed over a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, while the door frame 3 side is In the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided in the above, their restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from the timing tj12 to the timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation effective period (the effective period of effect reception) for giving the operation opportunity to the player is ended. It is assumed that neither restoration processing of A, B, C, nor restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side is ended. Therefore, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, it corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, and the above operation is effective Even when the effect is received at any timing within the period (the effective period of the effect reception), processing is performed so as not to perform the effect operation triggered by the effect when the effect is received.

  In other words, in this case, if there is a production reception within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being performed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body cannot be produced using this as a trigger. Even if a production reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is completed, it is possible to perform another operation with another board-side movable ornament that is still in the stage of executing the restoration process. There is a fear of interference. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any one of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any one within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if an operation by the player is accepted at the timing, the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, an effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. It will only be emitted in the light emission mode when being used. In short, when a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, after all the restoration processing has been completed (all restoration processing has been completed successfully), Only when the timing for performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body has arrived, the execution of the effect operation is allowed.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and Depending on at which timing within the operation effective period (effective period of effect acceptance) the effect is accepted, it is processed to change whether or not the effect operation triggered by the effect is performed when the effect is accepted. It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame side movable decorative body E, the timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the rendering operation after the restoration process is completed (the restoration process is successful). Inevitably arrives, and even if the other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F are in the process of restoration, there is no concern of interfering with them. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted in any of the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even in the case of being displayed, a rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, and a display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed for the channel. In the light emission mode when the various effects are performed, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which is reproduced by being assigned the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the is performed are performed and the abnormality is generated It will be emitted.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, an operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated to straddle the timing at which the restoration processing is ended. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period before the end of the restoration process within the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, and thus the specific movable decoration is The effect operation of the body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which has generated an abnormality will only be emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period after the end of the restoration process (success in the restoration process) of the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are subjected to the restoration process Because there is no concern that interferes with them even if it is under execution, the usual production control (moveable body, display production, performance sound, light emission) including the rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration processing is ended (success in the restoration processing). . Therefore, therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is received within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is selected, the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed on the channel. The effect sound of the time (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decoration which has generated an abnormality are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed Will stay.

  Here, the notification process according to the example shown in FIG. 182 will be described. In this example, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side in notification of the notification sound according to the movable body abnormality , C, and a plurality of frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side, and the abnormal movable decorative body belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there are any.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that movable body abnormalities simultaneously occur in the panel-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot normally occur as a proper game is progressing, and cannot occur as a result of fraud. There is a high probability that all movable decorations have been tampered with manually, and so on. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification processing itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is detected that movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively. At timing tj12, as described above, the restoration processing on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration processing on the frame side movable decoration side are started simultaneously with those restoration processing, while the notification sound output is the frame side movable Assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decoration D, E, F side to the channel, and assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the panel side corresponding to the panel side movable decorative A, B, C to the channel The output is stopped.

  That is, the time for which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as a time until time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, among the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, the “board-side movable decorative body A, By assigning only the panel side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the “board side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative body A, B, and C side” is generated. The restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F can be ended while the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are being reproduced. Since the output request of the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F” after the output of “sound” is ended, it is avoided. The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the panel-side movable decorative body A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorative body D, E, F are being restored. The “board side common decorative alarm sound corresponding to the board side movable decorative body A, B, C side” is assigned to the channel and reproduced over the period up to the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B, C are finished. Thus, the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F side” is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above-mentioned "information notification by sound" is performed utilizing the difference in property from the notification sound described above. In the aspect different from the above, the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exhibited, and different display is performed depending on which of the individually divided groups belongs to the movable decorative body. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, The “notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Further, similarly to this, for example, assuming that the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed. The “informing by display” is maintained as it is, and the “informing by display” is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is finished. Therefore, even if the restoration process of a specific movable decoration ends first, depending on the execution situation concerning the restoration process of the movable decoration that is grouped with the specific movable decoration, it may be more effective than the specific movable decoration. The “notification by display” corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed later may be terminated first.

  According to the example of FIG. 182, a plurality of alarm sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared as the alarm sounds corresponding to the movable body abnormality. When a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. Not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in, the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process for these movable decorative bodies is executed simultaneously. As a result, for a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the playback state, the total time required for the restoration process can be made shorter than that of the movable decoration body that corresponds to the notification sound in the playback state. While one specific notification sound of the notification sound is being reproduced, all the movable decorative bodies can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a panel-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is simultaneously performed. It is not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and (The frame side), the restoration process can be executed independently for each group, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies (DF) belonging to at least one of the groups (the frame side in the above example) Among them, if it is selected as a movable decorative body that can be operated without being affected by each other's operation status and all can be restored simultaneously, refer to FIGS. 182 and 183. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the functions and effects described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. Further, the method of detecting the movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected, and, for example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body Other methods such as performing detection may be employed.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the rendering operation at the timing when the player performs an operation, but the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation at the specific timing determined by the rendering pattern. It may be allowed.

  In addition, among the notifications according to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 182, movable body abnormalities occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. Although the situation has been described as being assumed, the symbol variation may not necessarily be performed. That is, during the execution of the big hit game or when the special symbol game is in a state of waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board side movable ornaments A, B, C and the frame side movable ornament D, Even when the movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, respectively, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on the predetermined order in which all of the board-side movable decorative objects A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side And However, in the case where a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even when operating simultaneously are included in the panel-side movable decorative body, the panel-side movable decorative body is based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed at the same time only for some movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the timing at which it is determined whether or not the movable body abnormality has occurred on the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and the movable body abnormality is present in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F Although it is assumed that the timing at which the determination as to occurrence has occurred is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 183, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F Even when the determination is made, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is ended at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B, C ends. As long as the relationship is satisfied, after the output of "the panel side common alarm sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative members A, B, C side" is finished, "frame side movable decorative members D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request for the corresponding frame side common alarm sound is required.

  Also, conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 182, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality occurs in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C You may make it be the processing structure determined to have carried out. However, in this case, when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality and a restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are performed. And wait until it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and then correspond to the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C side. While the notification process is performed, it is desirable to perform the restoration process for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. In addition, as a result of waiting for the determination process whether the movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. In this case, the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed.

  In the situation where a specific movable body among the panel-side movable bodies is being processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the panel-side movable body itself is normal but has entered an abnormal state. It becomes possible to include a movable body which is not subjected to the rendering operation in relation to the specific movable body. On the other hand, in the case of the frame side movable body, even if any of the panel side movable bodies is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the “specific movable body” that is in the abnormal state There is nothing that can no longer be used in the production operation, and if this is normal, all of them can be used in the production operation. In addition, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the other frame-side movable bodies are rendered as long as they are normal. It is intended to be served. Moreover, even if any of the movable bodies on the frame side is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, all of the movable bodies on the panel side are normal if this is normal. Are to be provided for the rendering operation. That is, as the pachinko machine 1 adopts a configuration in which a movable effect is realized in a wider space, the number of movable bodies used for the rendering operation can be increased regardless of the abnormal situation of other movable bodies. It is supposed to be.

  About each movable body illustrated in FIG. 182 and FIG. 183, when a movement abnormality occurs in the production operation according to the production request such as the production pattern or the big hit production, the restoration operation performed along with it failed. Even if this is the case, no abnormal alarm sound is output. However, even if the symbol is fluctuating, the recovery operation is performed on the movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred when a predetermined condition such as a detected fraud is satisfied, but the recovery operation is performed. It is desirable to output an abnormal alarm sound on the basis of the failure of the restoration even though the restoration operation has been performed.

[Automatic multi-operation function (automatic continuous hitting function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, an operation effect may be performed a plurality of times according to each operation by prompting a predetermined operation means a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly pressing the operation button 410). However, in recent years, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) is not operated a plurality of times in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of such multiple operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. Auto multiple operation function (automatic) that makes it possible to show the appearance when multiple operations are performed simply by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) that maintains the operation state for a relatively long time. It is becoming more and more equipped with a continuous hitting function.

  In such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function), a single operation (one operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time when an operation in a long mode such as so-called long press is performed. ) Is a player who is not good at operating multiple times (slow hitting speed). It can be said that it is important in suppressing the decline in the game interest of the player etc.) and promoting the use of the function by various players. However, when the player is in the operation state, if the effect change (for example, operation sound) when the effect is accepted every time a relatively short time elapses, it is the same for the player. Even if you intend to perform an operation with a single press, the short operation time (the time during which the operation state is slightly maintained with a single press) may become slightly longer or shorter, resulting in multiple receptions. Occurrence (multiple operation sounds are generated), production reception occurs only once (one operation sound is generated), and the number of production receptions for a single operation is stable There is a concern that the amusement interest will decrease due to the uncomfortable feeling caused by not doing it.

  In this respect, in the case of the conventional automatic continuous hitting function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case where an operation by a single press is performed, a change in presentation accompanying reception of an effect (for example, operation sound Etc.) only once. Then, after the first effect change (for example, operation sound etc.) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, the effect change (operation sound) is repeatedly generated when the effect reception is made each time a predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since a temporal margin can be provided between the generation of the first effect reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second effect reception (operation sound), single-shot Whether the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time only by performing the operation by a so-called long press while avoiding the occurrence of discomfort due to the number of effects being received being unstable when the operation by is performed. It is possible to produce a presentation that looks like this.

  However, from the player's side, this gives itself a time allowance between the time when the first effect is received (operation sound) and the time when the second effect is received (operation sound). It is useless in operation production, and the number of production receptions (operation sounds) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when performing operations by so-called long presses) There is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced due to the slow feeling.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in a single operation mode, the operation with respect to the operation means is long. As in the case of being performed in the mode of operation (long press etc.), it is possible to intermittently output the specific sound accompanying the operation to the operation means. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, a feeling as if a single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. The player can be made to remember (such as feeling as if fast hits are being made). In this way, all the operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the reactivity of the effect when the single-shot operation is performed (whether it is one effect change or multiple effect changes). Even if it exists, it becomes possible to maintain suitably the frequency | count of occurrence of the production change (for example, operation sound etc.) per unit time.

  FIG. 184 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). Here, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is adopted as the operation means. Also, in the other drawings including FIG. 184, the white specific sound output in the drawing indicates the specific sound generated based on the effect reception according to the operation on the button 410, The black specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated in the form following the white specific sound output in the figure when there is no production acceptance when the operation button 410 is not operated. It is. It is desirable that the volume and timbre of these specific sounds be different from each other and be the same.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), an aspect in which the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous hit etc.) is given (single operation) In this case, it is assumed that one operation is performed. Therefore, at timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 A process of starting output of a display accompanying the operation (display pattern during operation) is performed.

  And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, “Picon”) accompanying the operation to the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx 11, the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 Even if a situation where no operation is performed (period of timing tx12 to tx13 in the figure), in this situation, the specific sound (for example, "picone") accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is interrupted Can be output automatically.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if the operation by the player is not detected at all until the grace time TY1 elapses, every time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, “picone By outputting “), it is possible to intermittently output a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), five times (N times) from the start of the grace time TY1 to the lapse thereof. It is set to have a length of time that can output a specific sound (for example, "picone") for a minute. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, a specific sound (a sound corresponding to the production reception) accompanying the operation Is at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection and thereafter 4 times (N−) when the automation time TY2 elapses even without operation. 1) (total number of times with a specific sound).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace period TY1 ends during the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the grace period during the fifth specific sound output). A process (output interruption process, etc.) for turning off a specific sound being output (for example, "pico") at timing tx13 even when timing tx13) when time TY1 is ended comes And the specific sound that has been output so far (even in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the first to fourth specific sounds) after the timing tx13 arrives. The output (sound waveform) in the same manner appears. That is, when the specific sound accompanying the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes vague whether the operation has been accepted or not accepted several times, and eventually the operation feeling as if it were operated several times However, according to such a configuration, such a concern may be caused by the player becoming difficult to remember the game. It is expected to be solved appropriately.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the predetermined effective period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the elapse of the grace period, the situation where the new operation can not be accepted, Until the grace time TY1 is ended, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output each time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined effective period ends, it is avoided that the number of effect receptions is not stabilized when the operation by the single-shot push is performed. Besides, the player can be made to remember the feeling as if the operation was performed within the period beyond the predetermined effective period, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game. In this sense, a display (for example, display of the remaining time in which the valid period is continued) is made to allow the player to recognize whether the predetermined valid period is in the continued state or in the ended state. It is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (for 1 to 4 times) under the condition that it is possible to recognize that it is in the terminated state.

  As for “specific sound output accompanying operation” in the figure, rather than a signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, the volume waveform of the specific sound that is output each time the automation time TY 2 elapses (other sound output This is a conceptual illustration of the excluded waveform). As apparent from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the output of the specific sound of the previous output to end to the end, and the specific sound of the previous output is generated. On the other hand, the sound data of a new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and continuously, as if fast repeated operation is being performed It is expected that players will be able to remember the sensation.

  Incidentally, as a specific sound reproduction type, in addition to a mode in which 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY 2 elapses, It may be a loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that is repeatedly reproduced every time the automation time TY2 elapses. Moreover, the aspect which reproduce | regenerates the several specific sound output intermittently as one sound data may be sufficient. In the mode of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, all the specific sounds do not necessarily have to be output as the same single sound, but are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. There may be.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), after the display pattern at the time of operation with the operation button 410 is displayed at timing tx11 also with regard to the display output in the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 Even if the player's hand has left the player and no operation has been performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display content of the operation display pattern is advanced multiple times in that situation It is something that can be done.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). It is. In this respect, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order over a period from the timing tx11 until the set grace time TY1 is up. By executing this, the display content of the operation display pattern can be advanced.

  The contents of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, as an aspect shown in FIG. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 185, “display scene 1” is a video depicting the situation where the teammate character is holding the sword and is about to pull out the sword, and “display scene 2” is the ally This is a video depicting the situation from when a character is extracted until the character is cut off, and “Display Scene 3” is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the first mode. "Display scene 4" is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the second mode, and "Display scene 5" is a third scene in which the teammate character and the enemy character are in a third state. It is a moving picture depicting a situation in which a sword is used to meet each other.

  After displaying the operation display pattern according to the operation on the operation button 410 at timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is output intermittently, and the friend character is an enemy. It is possible to make the player remember the feeling as if the effect contents to fight the character are being advanced according to a plurality of operations. The display scenes 1 to 5 may not necessarily be moving images, and may be still images. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display pattern at the time of operation, various effect displays (hold display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of those effect displays, an image may be included that changes the effect (such as a color change) each time an effect reception is generated by an operation by the player, but it is recognized whether or not the effect reception is generated. In order to make it difficult to do so, it is important to be displayed as an image smaller than the operation display pattern.

  Here, in the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), it is between the time when the grace time TY1 is started and the time when this grace time elapses. It is set to have a time length that can sequentially display at least five (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents). As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given, at least 5 (M pieces of display content of the operation display pattern ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the operation detection timing, and thereafter four (M-1) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (progressed) even in the absence of operation. The display content will be developed over the total number of

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the timing tx13 at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). Unlike the case of the specific sound, the display pattern at the time of operation is terminated by interrupting the display scene 5 without displaying it until the end. That is, the operation display pattern having progressiveity in the presentation content is different from the case of the specific sound having no progressionality, and the display content is displayed if the operation is continued by interrupting halfway in the display scene. It is expected that the player will be given an impression that it may have been able to be further developed, thereby prompting further operation by the player. In this sense, with regard to the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed until the grace time TY1 is started and then ended. It is more desirable to set it to 促 す to encourage further operations by the player. In order to prompt a further operation by the player, only a part of the display scenes of all the display scenes 1 to 5 is displayed from the start of the grace period TY1 to the end thereof. Is more desirable.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined effective period ends and no new operation is accepted for production during the period from the start of the grace period TY1 until the lapse of the grace period TY1, the predetermined effective At the end of the period (a state in which the remaining time of the grace period TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and a display showing the result as the display pattern at the time of operation is performed. This will be described later.

  The display scenes 2 to 5 are displayed and progressed sequentially according to a predetermined schedule after the display scene 1 is displayed, regardless of the mode of operation. May be set in advance according to the time (automated time TY2) from when the specific sound is output until it is output again, or set regardless of the time (automated time TY2) It may be one. In this sense, display changes such as switching to another display or generation of a new display in the contents of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. There is a display change due to the moving picture depiction to the state where the sword is removed, and in the display scene 3 there is a display change due to “effect generation when the ally character fights against the enemy character”. More desirable. If a display scene having such a display change is used, it can be thought as if the display change in each display scene was caused by the effect reception, so the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if the Further, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be displayed repeatedly.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), the operation state of the operation button 410 is relatively long at the timing tx21 of the predetermined effective period in which the operation opportunity of the plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. It is assumed that the operation in the long mode to be maintained at is performed. Accordingly, at the timing tx21, as in the case of the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation is performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed based on the detection (determination). The process of starting the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display accompanying the same operation (display pattern during operation) will be performed.

  Also, in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, as in the case of the non-operation period (period from the timing tx12 to tx13) described above, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A sound (for example, “picone”) can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. The display content of the hour display pattern can be advanced in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 184 (a).

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the operation maintaining period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) or not It periodically determines (whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) is ended (for example, falling edge detection in the detection signal)). As long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and the periodical monitoring is performed, “every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A process of outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) and “a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order” are performed. In other words, in the operation maintenance period (period to timing tx21 to tx22), “it is determined whether or not the state of the operation detection is every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and it is determined that the state is the operation detection state. Processing such as outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”), or “determining whether or not the operation detection state is in effect each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and in the state of the operation detection state The processing such as advancing the display contents based on the determination is not performed, and "periodically monitor (determine) whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)" And “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order. Process "and that the next output is to be carried out respectively. The “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. It is what is done.

  Thereafter, as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When the timing tx22 at which it is determined that the (operation state) has been completed comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the determination result. Set the grace time TY1 you have. However, in this case, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are performed in accordance with a predetermined time and order. The “sequential output processing” is continuously executed over the period up to the timing tx23 until the grace time TY1 ends after the timing tx22 at which the operation state is ended. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22), the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) across the transition timing, the specific sound can be output intermittently in one processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the display pattern during operation can be continuously output in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  According to such a configuration, the output mode of the specific sound in the single-shot operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the specific sound in the long press operation shown in FIG. 184 (b) are respectively generated. The processing mode (program) related to the output of the specific sound can be made common among them. Also, similarly to this, the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of single-shot operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of long press operation shown in FIG. In creating them, the processing mode (program) for outputting the display pattern during operation can be made common among them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 184A, at timing tx12, as a result of “periodically monitoring (determining whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state))”. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has ended. In addition, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx 11 to x 12), the player's hand is removed from the operation button 410 and no action is performed (tx 12 to x 13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) across the timing, a specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is re-output every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and a plurality of display scenes The operation display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  As a result, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as when the operation button 410 is performed in a so-called long press mode. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently output. That is, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated, the single push (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single push, long press). This makes it possible for the player to remember a feeling as if it was being performed (such as a feeling as if fast hitting was being performed). In this way, while achieving stabilization of the responsiveness of the effect when the operation by the single-shot push is performed (whether it is one change in the production or the change in multiple effects), any operation mode (single-shot push, Even if long press) is employed, it is possible to favorably maintain the number of production changes (specific sounds) generated by the operation per unit time.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 184, when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode (FIG. 184 (a)) and in a so-called long press mode (FIG. 184). Although the same effect change occurs in (b)), actually, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), an effect for one time is accepted at timing tx11, and the white in the figure is specified accordingly. In the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), while the sound is output only once, the production is accepted four times every time the automation time TY2 elapses from the timing tx11, and the white in the figure corresponding to them. The specific sound output without a cut is made four times. Therefore, in order to cause a specific effect result to appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. In the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), when the type of production that causes the production result to appear, since only one production reception has occurred, a specific production result appears. I can't expect much. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the reception of the specific sound without the black in the figure is intentionally performed even when the reception of the production is not generated, so that the reception of the production actually occurs so much. Even if it is a situation that can not be expected very much that a specific production result will appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring Even if a player who is not good at (such as slow hitting speed) performs a single operation, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much production reception has occurred only by confirming one specific sound output at a time. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to give a star of how much production reception has occurred.

  In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and thereafter, the grace time TY1 is timed up, or By repeatedly displaying the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined effective period ends or the effect condition is satisfied and the specific effect results appear within the predetermined effective period, the ally character is an enemy character and a sword. It is made for the depiction to do the confrontation with the one by one alone appears. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific performance result is a depiction of how the teammate character wins the enemy character as a result of such a sword battle, and the specific performance result within a predetermined effective period. It is desirable to display the result of the failure at the end when the ally character is depicted as having been defeated by the enemy character as a result of such a sword battle.

  Thus, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode (FIG. 184 (a)) and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the long-press mode (FIG. In any of the cases with 184 (b), the specific sound accompanying the operation is output intermittently for a plurality of times, and the operation display pattern accompanying the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule to progress By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating a plurality of times is prompted to perform the operation with confidence. However, in practice, in many cases, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in a single-shot mode during the predetermined effective period, and when such continuous hitting operations are performed, 1 It is important to improve the interest of the game by making the player remember the operation feeling that the effect reception has been respectively generated by one operation. However, if the operation feeling for which the effect reception is generated is made to be completely reflected as the effect by one operation once, the player who is good at the multiple operations is more advantageous than the player who is not good at multiple operations. Since there will be a rendering effect as if it exists, it is required to achieve both of the rendering elements (operation feeling, rendering fairness) in such a trade-off relationship.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure the operational feeling that the reception of the production has occurred by one operation at a time, the operation is performed as an immediate operation with respect to the operation. Focus on the fact that “whether sound is generated (or changed) when operated” is a more important parameter than “whether display is generated (or changed)”. Every time the operation on 410 is performed in a single-shot mode, a specific sound corresponding to the effect reception is output according to the operation timing.

  For example, now, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple hitting operation in a single-pressing manner in the period of timing tx31 to tx32 in the predetermined effective period. Suppose. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, every time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the detection is used as a trigger to output a specific sound (specific sound in the output state) newly output to the previous output specific sound. A new specific sound is output in a form in which sound data is overwritten on a specific channel. As described above, even if the specific sound is intermittently output for a plurality of times even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode, such an output is performed. When an operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, the player is made to output a new specific sound in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is interrupted (stopped) halfway through the operation. It is possible to explicitly indicate that the specific sound has been newly output and the production has been accepted at the timing when the performance is performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode or when the operation is performed by a long press, the output of the specific sound of the previous output is completed to the end. The automatic time TY2 is digested before the time required for the time elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound of the previous output. That is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output at an accurate rhythm every fixed time (automated time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple hitting operation in a single-pressing manner. When the operation timing by an irregular player is reached, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output. It becomes possible for the player to preferably remember the operational feeling that the production reception is occurring.

  Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), in a predetermined effective period, each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, it is periodically determined whether the operation is being continued (operation state). Thus, a process of monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this respect, in the period from time tx 31 to time t 32 when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in the single-shot mode, the operation is continued each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. As a result of periodical monitoring as to whether or not it is in the (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has ended, and according to this, it has a predetermined time length. A grace period TY1 is set (not shown).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new operation is performed on the operation button 410 before the grace period TY1 ends (time up), the setting of the grace period TY1 is canceled. Then, it is configured to return to a state where processing for periodically monitoring whether the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, in the period from timing tx31 to tx32, whenever operation button 410 is in the operating state or in the non-operating state, processing is periodically performed to monitor whether the operating state is in the operating state or not. A state transition is rapidly performed between the state in which the grace period TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), after six consecutive hitting operations are performed between the timings tx31 and tx32, the user is tired of multiple consecutive hitting operations, and after that, it is possible to repeat operations. It is assumed that the time required has become significantly longer. If the player is not good at such multiple operations, the player will not be able to perform multiple consecutive strike operations from timing tx 32 onwards, so the number of times for effect reception is greater than for players who are good at multiple operations. There is a concern that the game interest will be reduced by being reduced. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 after the operation state is ended. As described above, the output process is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the delay time TY1 from the end of at least the previous operation state is obtained even when the time required for the repetition operation becomes significantly long after the timing tx32. As long as it is possible to repeat the operation within a shorter period of time, the player can be made to remember the feeling as if a rapid continuous hitting operation is being performed, enabling the specific sound accompanying the operation to be output intermittently and continuously. It will be.

  For example, when it is determined at the timing tx33 that the continuation of the operation state has ended as a result of periodic monitoring as to whether or not the operation state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination A grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. From then on, although the time required for repeated operations will be significantly increased, a specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where no operation is performed by the player. By performing the processing, the specific sound accompanying the operation is output continuously and intermittently. However, these specific sounds are output as specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) shown in black in the figure under the situation where the effect reception is not generated.

  In this respect, the specific sound with black outlines (7th to 9th specific sounds) can be generated only until the grace period TY1 from the end of the previous operation state has elapsed. However, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the grace period TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace period TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (does not time up) based on the operation. Along with that, at the timing tx34, a white specific sound (10th specific sound) is output in the figure accompanied by the generation reception being made in a form that breaks the specific sound that was in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to the state where processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

  However, such an operation state is also terminated when the timing tx 35 comes, and it is determined as a result of the monitoring as described above, and based on the determination, the grace period TY 1 having a predetermined time length is It will be set again. Then, when the automation time TY2 elapses while the operation by the player is not being performed, the specific sound in the drawing (the 11th to the 14th specific sounds) is again output each time the automation time TY2 elapses, When the player's operation is finally performed at timing tx36 before time TY1 is timed up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is broken (suspended) In the form, a white specific sound (15th specific sound) will be output.

  Thus, even after time tx32, even if the time required for the repeat operation is significantly increased, the repeat operation is performed within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 at least after the end of the previous operation state. As long as it can be performed, the specific sound shown in white in the figure at the timing when the operation is performed by the player and the specific sound shown in black regularly in the situation where the operation by the player is not performed Is output, so that the player can be made to remember the feeling as if a fast continuous hitting operation is being performed as the specific sound accompanying the operation can be outputted intermittently and continuously. Therefore, according to the aspect concerning the output of such a specific sound, it is possible to secure the operation feeling in which the effect reception is generated by one operation once and, of course, by the player who is not good at multiple operations. Even if there is a specific sound output with black in the figure in the non-operation state, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output intermittently and continuously, so there is a trade-off relationship between the presentation elements (operation And fairness in the presentation) is expected to be achieved.

  However, even in the case where the specific sound is output in such a mode, a plurality of times are displayed in the operation display pattern which plays the role of notifying the rendering result based on the operation within the predetermined effective period. If a player who is good at operation and a player who is not good at multiple times of operation make a difference in the aspect of the progress of display contents, eventually it will be more than the player who is not good at multiple times of operation. There may be a performance as if a player who is good at multiple operations is advantageous, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the display time pattern for the operation is not advanced step by step in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is up. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, display contents can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repetition operation is significantly long after the timing tx32 of the predetermined effective period. Although there is one, while the set grace time TY1 is up, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, and the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined effective period does not arrive.

  When the operation is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 186 (a), the display of the operation time display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. Thereafter, display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 185 as the operation-time display pattern are determined in advance regardless of the operation state even though the speed of the continuous hitting operation is greatly changed as described above. It is only displayed and progressed sequentially according to the scheduled schedule, and this makes it appear that the performance fairness is maintained between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations. Will be able to

  However, even if the display content as the display pattern at the time of operation is the same, the number of times that the presentation reception accompanying the operation is actually generated is the number of times that the player who is not good at the operation is operated multiple times. It is inevitable that they will differ from the players who are good at. Therefore, in order to cause a specific effect result to appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. If there is a type of production that makes the production result appear, the player who is good at multiple operations is more likely to make a specific production result appear. Meaning will be maintained. In other words, while maintaining the significance of such production, the fairness of production between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained in the production of sounds and displays. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest of a player who is not good in multiple operations by lowering the appearance of being played.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is accepted when performing the operation by the long press, the aspect depending on the progress of the operation display pattern is Since it is the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which button deterioration is accelerated by performing a quick hitting operation too quickly.

  Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 186 (b) assumes a case where the operation on the operation button 410 is not in time until the grace period TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, a timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends and ends is reached within a predetermined effective period, and from the timing tx31 at the timing tx37 (specific end timing) Dynamic display output (processing of sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that time.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends when in the output state is reached. Even if the specific sound in the output state is cut off at the timing tx37 (for example, “pico”), the process (such as the output interruption process or the process of interruption by overwriting with another sound) is performed. Even after the timing tx37 has arrived, the output (sound waveform) in the same manner as the specific sound that has been output so far appears as described above. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) when the grace period TY1 ends, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is If the operation of the operation button 410 is performed before the sound is muted, the player can feel the feeling that a fast repeated operation is being performed so that a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently. It is possible to make it happen.

  In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), the darkened specific sound (tenth specific sound) output across the timing tx 37 (specific end timing) is muted before it is silenced. After the white specific sound is generated twice in the figure in the form of interrupting the tenth specific sound output, the specific sound accompanying the black is intermittently output again in the figure, so that the specific sound associated with the operation is generated. It can be seen that the output is continuously and intermittently. In the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), the specific sound is output intermittently in this way. On the other hand, in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily stopped at timing tx37. . After that, it is clear that the progress of the display content is re-started from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx 38 at which the white specific sound in the drawing is output again.

  In FIG. 187, in the pachinko machine 1 on which the automatic multiple operation function (automatic double hit function) described in FIGS. 184 to 186 is installed, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (such as continuous hit) is given It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect which appears when operation is performed within the predetermined effective period (timing tx41-tx48), when a specific effect pattern which generates H is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 187, now, at timing tx41, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given occurs, and at timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period, the player Assuming that the operation is started, also in this example of presentation, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display (operation display pattern) accompanying the same operation It will do processing to make it start.

  However, in this effect example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output that is white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. Processing to be output can be executed.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound output of the black outline in the figure is generated even under the condition that the operation to the operation button 410 is not performed and the effect reception is not generated. In this embodiment, it is difficult to distinguish between the specific sound output in black in the figure and the specific sound output in white in the figure generated at the timing when the effect reception occurs (in this example, the same mode It is supposed to be output in). Further, as described above, the operation display pattern displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that the display contents are advanced according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation in a long press mode or a plurality of operations is performed within a predetermined effective period, it is recognized how much effect reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that it is in a difficult situation. Therefore, in this effect example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, the specific sound output of white in the figure is generated, and the special sound different from the specific sound has a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing processing of outputting at 50%, etc., it is possible to predict to some extent how much effect reception has occurred through the output situation of such special sounds.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 187, when it is in a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) after the predetermined effective period is started, two consecutive hit operations at timings tx42 and tx43, and from timing tx44, Each time a long press operation is performed, a total of nine presentations are received, and a specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated nine times (in the figure, the first to ninth) ), The number of receptions of productions per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started, it takes a long time that the operation in the single operation mode cannot be said to be repeated, and the timing tx46. , Tx47 is performed twice, so that the reception of the production for two times occurs, and the specific sound output in the figure corresponding to these is generated twice over time (in the figure, the tenth) , The eleventh specific sound), the number of occurrences of effect reception per unit time is relatively small.

  However, when the output condition of the specific sound and the output condition of the operation display pattern are checked, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period is started by performing the above-described specific sound output of the blackout. It is continuously output in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is compared after the predetermined effective period is started. Since the display scene is merely switched according to a predetermined schedule in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), these If you just check the output status, there will be a small number of production receptions per unit time. Whether there is in the stomach situation it can be seen that is hard to determine.

  In this regard, when the output state of a special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when a white specific sound output occurs in the figure, a relatively early period (timing) after the start of a predetermined effective period. In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started. It is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output status. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to a certain extent which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment of a player who is not good at multiple operations will be suitably maintained. In this sense, a special sound can be generated when a specific sound output is generated, but is output based on an output condition that is different from the generation of the specific sound output. Even if the specific sound output occurs, it is required to output the special sound in a manner that does not necessarily occur.

  Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when an effect is received may be changed according to the number of effects received within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated.

  Moreover, in view of the fact that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, it has a time from when the specific sound is output until the sound is muted, or a time value longer than the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as one. In this example, the time value is set to twice the “automation time TY2”. In addition, when a new special sound is output when the previous special sound is output, it is desirable that the previous special sound is cut off (interrupted) to output a new special sound.

  However, in such a pachinko machine 1, since the same effects as in the case where the operation is performed multiple times can be enjoyed only by performing the operation by the long press, the number of players who perform the operation multiple times decreases. There is a concern that the significance as an effect requiring multiple operations may be lost. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 187, the player's operation is long-pressed during the period after the player's operation is started at least at the timing tx42 in the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). Of the state that is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and the state that is performed as a single operation mode (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48), the state is performed as the single operation mode. Only when a specific display condition is satisfied, display of a specific image (specific display) is allowed.

  That is, in this case, in order to confirm a specific image, it is required to perform an operation as a mode of a single operation rather than an operation by pressing and holding at least. Performing a turning operation (such as repeated hits) can have a production meaning, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, in this presentation example, in order to confirm the specific image, it is not only the condition that the operation is performed as the one-shot operation mode, but the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself is increased, the operation (the continuous hitting etc.) is performed multiple times without using the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple operation) function whenever the predetermined effective period occurs. Even if you try to do), it will seem as if you are challenged to display a specific image with high difficulty of appearance, and you can operate multiple times without using automatic multiple strike (automatic multiple operation) function It will be expected to promote understanding of the surrounding people.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 187, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the time of the “automation time TY2”) elapses without generation of a new effect reception from the timing at which the previous effect reception occurred. The display of a specific image within a predetermined effective period as the above “specific display condition” that the effect hit is obtained in the predetermined effect drawing performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed (Specific indication) is supposed to appear. In this respect, in the predetermined effect lottery, when the jackpot has won the jackpot (or, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period can be a successful display can appear (high hit probability expected When it is in the production situation), the production hit is obtained with a probability of 70%, but when the big hit judgment is a big hit in the big hit (or the operation within a predetermined effective period No matter how much the game is performed, it is possible to obtain a production hit only with a probability of 30% in the case of a production situation where a success display can not be made to appear (a production situation where the big hit expectation is low). Therefore, when the display (specific display) of the specific image appears within the predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation for the jackpot symbol to appear is high, and the game interest can be suitably maintained. In addition, as said "specific display conditions", it is not restricted to this, The specific non-operation time (here, "automation time TY2", without generation | occurrence | production of a new production reception occurring from the timing which the previous production reception produced | generated) Only twice that of “a time that is twice as long as it has been reached” and “a performance hit has been obtained in a predetermined effect drawing” is adopted as the “specific display condition”, and when this is satisfied A display (specific display) of a specific image may appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

  In addition to the types described above, the aspect of the predetermined effect lottery is, for example, in an effect situation where the success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined effective period (the effect situation where the degree of expectation of jackpot is low). An effect situation where a success per chance is obtained with a probability of 0% (or the effect lottery itself is not performed), but a success display cannot appear no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined effective period. When it is in a production situation where the degree of big hit expectation is low, an aspect in which a production hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, since it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Can be recognized within a predetermined effective period. In this case, as the specific display, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined effective period ends without the success display.

  Further, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 187, when a new effect reception occurs while the display (specific display) of a specific image is being performed (timing tx 46), the specification is made at that time The display is made to be non-display, and the output is continued on condition that the state where the operation by the player is not performed (the state where a new effect reception is not generated) is maintained. Yes.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 187, in order to make a specific effect result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period (timing tx 41 to tx 48), it is at least found that the effect reception more than a specific number of times occurs. The display condition 3 is satisfied at timing tx 47 at which the 11th production reception (the 11th specific sound output) is generated, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off (( The process of causing the success display to appear as the operation display pattern in the form of interruption) is performed. As the contents of this success display, the content of the repetitive portion (display scenes 3 to 5) in the operation display pattern, such as destroying enemy characters that had been fighting with swords in display scenes 3 to 5 It is desirable to be related. Further, when a success display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is high in the big hit determination.

  In addition, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx 47 at which the 11th production reception (the 11th specific sound output in white) occurs, the predetermined effective period is ended at that time, and the new production reception is It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at timings later than timing tx 47, no white specific sound or special sound is generated newly in the drawing, or no specific display appears.

  FIG. 188 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 187, but what is repeated in the single shot operation mode by the player is shorter than the grace time TY1? It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when it takes a long time which can not be said and is repeated.

  As shown in FIG. 188, even if the operation in the single-shot operation mode by the player is repeated over a long time, as long as the operations are repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx 52 when the operation is started within a predetermined effective period (timing tx 51 to tx 56), the specific sound is output intermittently and continuously, and the operation display pattern is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such a presentation mode, even when the operation is performed only four times within the predetermined effective period, it is possible to create a presentation situation as if about 20 continuous hitting operations are being performed. become able to. However, from this point of view, there is a concern that the meaning of performing the continuous hitting operation can not be understood from the person performing the continuous hitting operation seriously, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is “Tx1”, the length of the grace period TY1 is “Tx2”, and a specific performance result (successful display) within the predetermined effective period. When “EU” is the minimum number of production receptions required to appear, these numerical values are set so that the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx2” <EU] is satisfied. According to such a configuration, even when the operation is repeatedly performed at the last minute when the grace period TY1 elapses and the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, The number of production receptions that occur is less than the minimum number of production receptions (EU) that is required to make a specific production result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it becomes possible to prevent a specific effect result (success indication) from appearing. It is expected that the entertainment interests of those who are present will be suitably maintained. In order to obtain such an effect more reliably, the number of times of production reception (EU) required at least for causing a specific production result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period, Strictly speaking, it is required to set the numerical value calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2” as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding up the numerical value.

  In this respect, in this effect example, “Tx1 / Tx2” is calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2”, which is the minimum number of effect acceptance (EU) required to cause a specific effect result (successful display) to appear within a predetermined effective period. Since “11 times” which is twice or more times the integer value when the numerical value is rounded to an integer is set, a failure display is displayed at timing tx 56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, a failure display appears due to an insufficient number of operations, so that it is an effect situation in which it is not possible to recognize whether the big hit expectation is low or high.

  Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment allows the display of a specific image only when it is in a state where it is performed as a single operation mode and a specific display condition is satisfied. It is. In this respect, in this production example, when the above-mentioned “specific non-operation time” required for displaying a specific image is “Tx3”, the relationship [“Tx1 / Tx3” <EU] is established. Each of these values is set to be In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause a specific display to appear every time an operation is performed within a predetermined effective period, the number of production receptions that occur within the predetermined effective period is within the predetermined effective period. The number of production receptions (EU) required at the minimum is required to make a specific production result (successful display) appear. In other words, in this case, a direct selection function for performing an attempt to make the specific display appear until the risk that the specific production result (success display) does not appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. Since it is not possible to easily and repeatedly try to make it appear, it will be possible to improve the performance of the game, as the performance of the attempt will be enhanced. It will be.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 188, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined effective period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of causing the failure display to appear as the operation display pattern is performed. As the contents of this failure display, the contents of the repetitive portion in the operation display pattern (display scenes 3 to 5), such as defeating the enemy character who had been in a battle with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5, and It is desirable to be related. Further, when a failure display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is low in the big hit determination.

  On the other hand, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined valid period is ended, regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. Although there is no possibility of being interrupted (interrupted), this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted while the success or failure display is being performed, and then the success or failure display will be displayed. The relationship is set so as to be hidden.

  In this embodiment, the suspension time TY1 is set after the player's operation state ends, and until the suspension time TY1 elapses, the specific sound output of the black outline in the non-operation state is displayed. Although the process is performed at least four times or more, the number of "specific sound output with blackout" generated in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set to be at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specific sound output of the black outline in the non-operation state is at least twice or more in the non-operation state. As it is generated, it is possible to have a feeling as if the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) is continued even in the non-operation state.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 and 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Thus, a depiction in which the ally character makes a fight with the enemy character with a sword appears. Therefore, a specific display may be performed in which at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2 indicates the jackpot expectation. According to such a configuration, if there is a case where a specific display is overlooked, the non-operation state cannot be reconfirmed unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace period TY1 elapses. However, it is possible to provide an effect of selecting between the disadvantage of being wasted in vain and the disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

  Also, in this embodiment, the continuous hitting operation is allowed in such a manner that the effect reception occurs at an interval shorter than the interval (the automation time TY2) at which the effect reception occurs when the operation by the long press is performed. Thus, it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom in operation by the player (see FIG. 186). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous hitting operation is performed, the progressing mode of the display scene in the operation display pattern is made to be the same as when the long pressing operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the attraction not much felt by performing the high speed continuous hitting operation, and it is expected that the excessive operation on the operation button 410 is suppressed and the risk of breakage etc. is reduced. Will be

  In addition, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, when performing effects of a type that requires at least an effect reception required more than a specific number of times, an operation by long press is performed only within the predetermined effective period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times occurs. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times is generated only when the operation by the long press is performed over a half of the predetermined effective period.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 188, the time (specific non-operation time) that is twice as large as the “automation time TY2” has elapsed since no new effect reception occurred from the timing when the previous effect reception occurred. In this case, the display of the specific image (specific display) is made to appear, but the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value within a range that is at least twice the “automated time TY2” and that has a grace time TY1 as an upper limit (below the grace time TY1) is used. In the non-operating state, in the state where the specific sound with blackening in the figure is output more than once (the state that the continuous hitting operation is performed in the non-operating state) It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) has appeared based on the fact that the number of pseudo operations in the non-operating state (the number of outputs of a specific sound without black in the figure) has reached a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
By the way, the description has been given of the gaming machine in which the plate unit 320 includes the effect operation unit 400 that can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. With reference to 189 to 240, a gaming machine which can further enhance the player's operation will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 189 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 190 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those described above, and the description will be appropriately omitted.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in a front view. The sword effect operation unit 5000 includes a sword 5010 having a blade 5011, a handle 5012, and a collar 5013 sandwiched between the blade 5011 and the handle 5012, and the blade 5011 of the sword 5010. A sword decorative body 5001 including a sheath portion 5020 is configured.

  The sword decorative body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath portion 5020 can be moved in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword direction and the sword insertion direction. The sword part 5010 is normally in a state where the sword part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020, and the sword part 5011 is in a sword state where the sword part 5011 can be visually recognized by the player in the sword production. Then, the sword unit 5010 in the scrapped state can function as an operation unit that receives the setting operation by the player and returns to the sword state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 191, the execution opportunity of the sword production effect accompanying the movement of the sword production operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword effect can be executed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword preparation transition effect according to the type of variation pattern. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of an extracted book effect.

  The production pattern described here includes a pattern in which the sword book production is performed after execution of the sword preparation transition production, a pattern in which the sword book production is performed without performing the sword preparation migration production in advance, and a sword preparation migration production in advance. There is a pattern in which no sword book production is performed, there is a pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, and there is no pattern in which the sword book production is performed. Two patterns, an aura-member-attached form and an aura-member-free form, are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (A), according to the type of fluctuation pattern determined in the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the presence or absence of execution of the scout preparation transition effect is lottery. Here, the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit at the time of big hit, a fluctuation pattern for small hit at the time of small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation at the time of outfall, which results in advantageous results for the player. The pattern is set so that the probability of executing the sword preparation transition effect is higher as the pattern is higher. Specifically, the scout preparation transition effect is performed with a probability of 50% in the case of the variation pattern for big hit variation, and is performed with a probability of 30% in the case of a variation pattern for small variation, and in the case of a variation pattern for outlying variation It is executed with a probability of 20%. Note that the out-of-out fluctuation time change pattern may change the probability according to the presence or absence of reach production so that the probability that scout preparation transition effect is performed is higher than when the reach production is not performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), according to the type of fluctuation pattern and the presence or absence of the scout preparation transition effect, the presence or absence of the scout main effect is drawn. If the scout preparation transition effect is executed even if the type of the variation pattern is the same, the probability that the scout main effect is performed is set higher than the case where the scout preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set such that the probability that the scribble main effect will be executed is higher as the variation pattern is an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the variation pattern has a low degree of preference, it is set that the probability that the scribble main effect will be executed is higher if the scout preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when scout preparation transition effect is executed with the out-of-variation fluctuation pattern, the probability of scribbling main effect being executed is higher than when scout preparation transition effect is not executed with the small hitting fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, the sweepout main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sweepout preparation transition effect.

  In addition, when the scout main effect is executed, the scout preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability that the scout main effect with the aura member is performed is higher as the fluctuation pattern is advantageous for the player. Is set to be Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the extracted sword effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member due to removal of the sword decoration body)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 192 to FIG. 195, the extraction operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the extraction effect (extraction preparation transition effect and extraction effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself that can accept a sword insertion operation by a player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 192). 193), and the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of the integrated decoration (FIGS. 194 and 195).

  FIG. 192 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011) itself, (A) state of sword insertion, (B) first. The state of removal of the sword, (C) shows the state of removal of the second blade. FIG. 193 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. 193 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

  The sword decorative body 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the blade part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 192 (B), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the scout operation in the scout preparation transition effect, only the portion of the Habaraki 5011a fitted to the hand of the sword portion 5011 is pulled out of the sheath 5020 and visible to the player It becomes the first best sword state to become. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the scout operation in the scout main effect is a second scout in which the sword portion 5011 is further pulled out of the sheath portion 5020 and most of the sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second extracted state can function as an operation means that can accept a sword insertion operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided in the blade 5011 is configured to be independently operable independently of the removal operation of the blade 5011. In the case where the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the sword portion 5011 changes from a knapsack state (FIG. 192A) to a first scout state (FIG. 192B). In the inside of the part 5020, the movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 193A) to the open state (FIG. 193B), and the blade 5011 is deformed. For this reason, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 also in the change process in which the blade 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state (FIG. 192C). Although described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided to be positioned below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011 even with the maximum operation, the player can not visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first extraction state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 are stopped at positions where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

  Further, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on the blade shaft 5011b is included below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to make the sword 5001 (the aura member 5030) emit light and decorate.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword part 5010) is changed from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state, the closed state is opened and the blade part 5011 is operated by the operation of the aura member 5030. In the above example, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first extraction state to the second extraction state, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The aura member 5030 may start its operation (deformation) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (including not only the mode of maximum operation but also the mode of stopping the operation on the way) It should just be.

  FIG. 194 is a state transition diagram for explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the case where the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020, (A) a cutting state, (B) a first extraction state, (C) The second sword state is shown. FIG. 195 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 195 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 193 and 194 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description will not be repeated.

  As shown in FIGS. 194 (A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for housing the sword 5010 (blade 5011) is the above-mentioned sword 5010 (blade 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the left-right direction, it moves in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the sword portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the knives state Operates according to the first sword state (second sword state). Thereby, the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) can be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) so as to be seen as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5035 is a hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so that the upper end thereof is below the hook 5011 a of the blade 5011 in the completely housed state, and surrounding the aura member 5036; Right and left racks 5036a and 5036b, and right and left pinions 5037a and 5037b meshing with the right and left racks 5036a and 5036b, respectively. The enclosure aura member 5036 is rotated by a driving means (not shown) such that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both the pinions are engaged. The rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b are converted into an upward linear motion, and as shown in FIG. 195 (B), the surrounding aura member 5036 unites with the blade 5011 and stops at a position where it forms a second extraction state. The aura member 5035 at this time is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the change in state of the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (set state-first cut state-second cut state). Although the example which unites with 5011 was shown, it does not restrict to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (union) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state. The final aspect based on the effect pattern set by the time the sword decoration body 5001 in the second scraped state is set to function as the operation means (not limited to the complete appearance state formed by the maximum operation, the intermediate appearance formed by stopping the operation on the way It should just be able to become an aura member attachment form of a state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the first sword insertion state from the sword insertion state.

(Example of scribbling effect using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 196 to FIG. 201, the scribbling effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. In the following, when the scout preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the scribble main effect is not executed and the effect patterns ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with respect to the effect pattern ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the extracted sword effect is executed. FIG. 196 to FIG. 200 are effect transition diagrams of extraction effects. FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation effective period according to the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. It starts forming a reach state (FIG. 196 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image that suggests execution of a scout effect (moving of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed. Specifically, after an image (Fig. 196 (X2)) where two samurai face each other and start living is displayed, an image (Fig. 196 (X3) is displayed. Here, the effect which suggests that the sword ornament 5001 moves is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this time, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword state (FIG. 192 (A)).

  Next, when the scout preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of fluctuation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIGS. 197 (X4) and (X5), the scout preparation transition effect is When it is started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face with the eyes of the warrior holding the sword closed with the above-mentioned image is displayed, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed over time. At this time, by changing the state of the sword decoration 5001 from the state of the sword to the state of the first sword, a preparation preparation transition effect is performed. In addition, if the scout preparation transition effect is performed, the scribbling main effect is easier to be executed thereafter than when it is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword preparation transition effect is an expectation effect that indicates the expectation that the sword main effect will be executed by the movement of the sword ornament 5001. In the sword preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decorative body 5001 in the first sword state up and down, the player may be expected to further change the sword decorative body 5001 to the second sword state. Good. Note that the vertical movement of the sword decorative body 5001 in the first extraction state is performed to such an extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player in the case of the aura member-attached configuration. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, the sword decorative body 5001 may be kept in the state of the sword, and the image shown in FIG. 196 (X3) may be continuously displayed.

  Here, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent sword production effect is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword preparation transition effect (FIG. 193 (A ) Is moved as much as possible from the movable range to the open state (FIG. 193 (B)), and the blade 5011 is deformed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5011 in the first scraped state can be viewed by the player from the hand of the blade 5011 to the portion of the Haberaki 5011a, but as described above, the aura member 5030 is a Haberaki 5011a of the blade 5011 Since it is provided below, there is no fear that the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even if the aura member 5030 operates maximum. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state functions as an operation means capable of accepting the player's operation of the sword, and at the same time, the expectation is increased by the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  After the sword preparation transition effect is completed, if the sword book effect is not executed by a lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 197 (X6)), and the central decorative symbol is displayed on the left decorative symbol in the center of the screen along with the image that the samurai gives up when the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped. And it is stopped and displayed in the stop mode different from the right side decorative design, that is, the release mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 197 (X7)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the first extraction state to the insertion state at the time of FIG. 197 (X6), and maintains the insertion state. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operation means.

  On the other hand, when the scout main effect is executed, after the scout preparation transition effect is finished, an image in which the Ii is cut is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is the second scout. It becomes a state. Here, the form with the aura member with which the aura member 5030 can be visually recognized in the form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 can not be visually recognized. There is provided an aura memberless form in which the blade part 5011 that is not deformed can be visually recognized.

  First, with reference to FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is an aura member-less form will be described. When the scout main effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the eye is displayed from the eye-magnified image of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 198 (A1)), an image is displayed in which the sword that was held is extracted and the opponent samurai is cut (FIG. 198 (A2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 198 (A1), and the sword portion 5011 becomes visible from the player.

  Next, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by a sword, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 from which the player jumps out of the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting an operation of pushing the blade portion 5011 downward so that the blade portion 5011 fits in the sheath portion 5020, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the scout operation of the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that urges an operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword in the same form as the second sword state of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!” (FIG. 198 ( A3). In addition, in order to indicate that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operation effective period, the LED of the internal LED substrate 5011 c is blinked and emitted. In addition, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of rai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in front of the image immediately before the rai cut scene image (FIG. 198 (A2)). (See FIG. 204 (G2) described later).

  Then, when the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation effective period and performs the katana operation to put the sword 5011 in the sheath 5020 and the sword decorative body 5001 is put in the state of the katana, An effect is performed after the operation according to the degree of expectation which results in an advantageous result, and the effect is ended together with a notice of a hit of the symbol type (FIG. 199). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, a cut effect image is displayed in a flashy manner in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 199 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. Stop the other warrior at the same timing and stop with the same stop mode as the left side decoration pattern and the right side decoration pattern at the center of the screen, that is, the big hit mode (here "7") Is displayed (FIG. 199 (C2)). On the other hand, in the case where the symbol type is disjoint, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 199 (D1)). A stop mode different from the left decoration pattern and the right decoration pattern in the center of the screen with an image that can not be settled on the other party's samurai at the stop display timing, and the stop mode, that is, the disappointing mode (here "6") Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 199 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is in a form with an aura member will be described. When the scout main effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the eye is displayed from the eye-magnified image of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 200 (B1)), an image of cutting the opponent's samurai by extracting the sword that was held is displayed (FIG. 200 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 200 (B1) and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Is visible to the player. Here, the blade 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time of the state change from the first state to the second state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, the aura member 5030 changes from the closed state to the open state after only the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player in the second scraping state so that the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It is sufficient that the sword decorative body 5001 be in a configuration with an aura member in the second extraction state before the operation effective period starts. However, since the sword decorative body 5001 is already in the second cutting state in which the player can operate the sword, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that an erroneous operation by the player is induced. Therefore, the player can recognize the aura member 5030 while the series of movements from the first extraction state to the second extraction state is performed as in the present example, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes the second extraction state. It is preferable that the operation effective period is started immediately.

  Further, the images in FIGS. 200B1 and 200B are the same as the images in FIGS. 198A1 and A2 described above, and the player can see that the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member only by viewing the image. It makes it impossible to judge whether it is not. By actually looking at the sword decoration 5001, the player can grasp whether it is the aura member-attached form or the aura member-free form. Thereby, the sword decorative body 5001 can be made to pay attention to the sword decorative body 5001 before it functions as the operation means, the player can easily recognize the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means, and enjoy the operation effect without confusion Can. Note that the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time do not have to be the same as described above, and may be images that are similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword ornament 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in samurai images (differences in eye colors and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation effective period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form with the aura member as the sword decorative body 5001. Is displayed (FIG. 200 (B3)). Since the subsequent effects are the same as those in FIG. 199 described above, description thereof will be omitted. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 199 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed flashy compared to the form without the aura member.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation effective period in the sword production effect in which the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 201, when the reach effect is started (time t0), an Ii effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and first, the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the first state from the sword state as a sword preparation transition effect. The state changes to the scraped state (time t1). At this time, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state when the effect pattern in the form with the aura member is set, but the aura member 5030 plays a game in the first extraction state even when the aura member 5030 is in the open state. It is provided so that it cannot be visually recognized by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first removal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is further changed to the second removal state, and in the case of changing it, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is a form with an aura member. I can not do it. However, when the scout preparation shift effect is executed, the scribble main effect is executed, and the possibility of becoming a form with an aura member is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced. Even if the sword book effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 196 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, a state change (movable) of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state can be captured.

  When the sword preparation transition effect is finished, the sword book effect is subsequently started, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2). Thereafter, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the operation effective period is started, and the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means (time t3). When the operation effective period comes, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of the presence effects is performed. Then, when the player's operation is detected during the operation effective period (time tx), an effect is performed after the operation. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 returns from the second state to the sword state by the player's operation of the sword. Then, when the operation valid period set in advance is ended and the reach state is ended (time t4), the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whereby a series of presence effects are ended ((4) Time t5). The operation valid period may end upon detection of an operation by the player, as indicated by a dashed dotted line in the drawing. If no operation is detected during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword state to the sword storage state as the operation effective period ends.

  Here, a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state until the operation effective period starts (time t3-t2) is a mode (aura member) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state. As a mode confirmation period in which it is possible to confirm whether or not it is an attached mode, a light emission mode, etc., a period longer than the operation effective period (time t4-t3) is secured. That is, even when the operation unit (sword unit 5010) that can be operated by the player is in the operation position (second sword state) that functions as the operation means, the operation reception is immediately started (the operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. Thereby, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, and inflates the expectation in the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with the aura member, the expectation increases), or the mental preparation As soon as the second sword state is reached, the operation validity period starts and the state of the operation means cannot be confirmed, and it is not possible to confirm the aspect of the operation means. It can be wiped out.

  In addition, the scribbling effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed in a series of presence effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the movable effect (time t0 to t3) as the movable body of the sword decorative body 5001. The effect associated with the operation effect (time t3 to t4) as the operation means is used. This makes it possible to impress the player with a variety of surprises and effects in switching the function of the sword decorative body 5001. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun caused by the uniform effect by the conventional operation means. Can.

  In addition, although the example of the above-mentioned effect demonstrated the case where the aura member 5030 was provided in the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself, and the blade part 5011 deform | transformed by the aura member 5030, the aura member 5035 is a sheath part of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided with a frame side member (aura member 5035) and becomes an integral decorative body.

  As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes operation means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the modes of the members (the sword portion 5010 and the aura member 5030) of the same kind as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. doing. And the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 (sword storage state, first sword state, second sword state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 191). Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display produces an advantageous result for the player by the change of the aspect of the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the operation means (the sword decorative body 5001). Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  Further, before the sword ornament 5001 enters the second sword state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation is suggested by changing the state of the sword ornament 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state. doing. Further, the expectation is suggested by causing the aura members 5030 and 5035 to appear in the state change from the first sword state to the second sword state. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the appearance of the first sword state or the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword state to the second sword state (operation position). The player has a strong interest in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, the expectation is high when the operation position is moved after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance. In this mode, there is a concern that an erroneous operation that the player may operate even though the operation means is not yet in an operable position when the player grasps it, but the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is operated. Since the state change to the position and the expectation suggestion proceed simultaneously, the above-described erroneous operation can be prevented.

  In the first sword state described above, only the blade 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the single-sword state. At this time, the amount of extraction in the first extraction state is set to be less than the maximum extraction amount in the second extraction state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in a fully appearing state when it enters the second extraction state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first removal state, the player can have a higher sense of expectation at the time of the first removal state. Increase interest in subsequent changes.

  In addition, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first scraping state, the configuration with the aura member at the stage of the scrapping preparation transition effect (high expectation) Since the player can grasp and expect great expectations, the disappointment when the sword book production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the scout preparation transition effect is performed, the emotion of the player is greatly shaken by the presence or absence of the scout main effect, and a highly entertaining effect can be provided.

(Variation 1-Extraction using a control button)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 202 to 205, scribbling effect is performed in reach production, and the sculpting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the scout effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. FIG. 202 to FIG. 204 are examples of transition diagrams of scribbling effect according to the first modification. FIG. 205 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 of Modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. In addition, the description similar to the above-mentioned blowout effect (FIG. 196-FIG. 201) is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  Here, the effect pattern (S1 (Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2)) in which the scribble preparation transition effect is not performed or the scribble main effect is not performed, and after the scout preparation transition effect is executed The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the effect patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4)) in which the main effects are performed. The transition and operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described.

  When reach effect is started, presence effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 202 (Y1)), and effect that suggests operation of the operation button 410 by display of the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 202 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, the image display of the operation button to be the operation target and the gauge display of the operation valid period are performed to perform the operation promotion effect for prompting the player to operate (FIG. At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily operate the operation button 410. It should be noted that the light emission of the operation button 410 is ended when the operation by the player is detected.

  In the case where the sword preparation transition effect and the sword main effect are not performed and the result is a losing result, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying the outlier result (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 203 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410 are not changed.

  In addition, when the sword main effect is performed after the sword preparation transition effect is executed, when the player presses the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the first sword state. A removal preparation preparation effect is performed (Fig. 203 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a white character of “Tengu” is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 203 (F1)), and an image is displayed in which an allied samurai is about to touch the sword. (FIG. 203 (F2)). Next, a sword book effect in which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) is started (FIG. 203 (F3), FIGS. 204 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) by the sword main effect, immediately before FIG. 203 (F2) and immediately after 204 (G1), the image of running lightning is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 203 (F3), and the form of the sword decorative body 5001 (whether it has an aura member or not) And the strength of the lightning show the degree of anticipation to win the battle.

  The subsequent effects are the same as those of FIG. 198 (A2), (A3) and FIG. 199 described above, and when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state and the predetermined period elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is In order to function as the operation means that can effectively receive the operation of (1), an operation effective period for effectively detecting the setting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is prompted to operate the sword in the operation effective period (FIG. 204 (G2)), and notification of the symbol type (hit or miss) is performed by the player's sword operation (FIG. 204 (G3) or G4).

  Subsequently, with reference to a timing chart shown in FIG. 205, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts a state change of the sword ornament 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is generated at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect is urged to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the operation valid period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 starts state change, and first, the state of the sword is changed to the first state of extraction. Here, in the first extraction state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first state to the second state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated to function as the operation means. An effective period occurs, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is performed (time t3), and the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 (time t3 to t4) ((t3) At time tx), the decorative pattern in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). Note that if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation effective period of the operation button 410 set in advance (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the final form (the first form) You may make it deform | transform and change a state at a stretch in the form with the aura member of a double sword state. In addition, the state change timing from the first sword state to the second sword state changes according to the operation of the player's operation button 410, that is, changes to the second sword state after the first sword state and a certain time has elapsed. You may When the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001 set in advance (time t3 to t4), the sword decorative body 5001 It is returned from the state of the sword to the state of the sword.

  In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. The extraction operation start timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the insertion operation start timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 (time tx). As described above, according to which operation means of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated, the movement of the sword decoration 5001 is reversed (the extraction operation and the insertion operation). The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation effective period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  Thus, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the form with the aura member with the sword decorative body 5001 deformed and changed in state) The second state of the sword can be shown. As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the player's desire to operate can be enhanced.

  Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, effect images corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 203 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. Since (G1) and (G2) are displayed, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modification 2-Stage aura extraction using operation buttons)
In the following, referring to FIGS. 206 to 210, based on the first modification, the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 in the aura member-attached form of the sword decorative body 5001, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade 5011 A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIG. 206 to FIG. 210 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the extraction effect of the second modification. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably about the same effect as the above-mentioned.

  There are 0 to 3 stages in the aura level provided here. The aura level 0 indicates the completely accommodated state (FIG. 195A) in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. The aura level 3 is a complete appearance in which the aura member 5035 is fully visible from the player by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 in the second extraction state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the insertion state (see FIG. 195 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by one third of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

  Here, there are no production patterns (Z1 to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which no sword preparation transition effect is performed or no sword book production is performed, and there is no sword preparation transition effect. Is a case where a sword book effect is performed, and an effect pattern (in the drawing) in which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes a final form (a form with an aura member in a complete appearance state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once. (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)), a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. For the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) to be performed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword ornament Explain the operation transition of 5001 That.

  In the above-described first modification, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by one operation of the operation button 410, but in the second modification, the operation button 410 is operated step by step by a plurality of operations. A step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 is performed.

  First, in the effect pattern in which the scout preparation transition effect is not performed or the scout main effect is not performed, that is, the sword decorative body 5001 does not change state even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. The same effect transition as in (Y1) to (Y3) to FIG. 203 (E1) (E2) is followed (FIG. 206 (Z1) to (Z3) to FIG. 207 (H1) and (H2)).

  In addition, although there is no sword preparation transition effect, the sword main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member by one operation of the operation button 410. ), The operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effects as in FIGS. 202 (Y1) to (Y3) of the first modification (FIG. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)). Then, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decorative body 5001 is united with the blade 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade 5011 in the inserted sword state, and completely appears when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 207 (I1)). Although the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001 of the first modified example is configured by the aura member 5030 and the modified example 2 is configured by the aura member 5035, other effects are the same as those of the first modified example. 203 (F1) (F2) → The same effect transition as in FIG. 204 is followed (FIGS. 207 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

  Further, there is no sword preparation transition effect, but the sword book effect is performed. In the effect pattern in which the operation button 410 is required to be operated a plurality of times and the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise, 1 Until the operation of the first operation button 410, the same effect transition as before is followed (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword ornament 5001 after the first operation is in the second sword state from the sword state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) that is not visually recognized by the player. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 207 (I1) described above (FIG. 208 (J1)).

  Next, an operation effect of the second operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 of the operation target is illuminated and decorated Is performed (FIG. 208 (J2)). Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the aura levels 0 to 3 set in advance.

  First, when the aura level to be set is “0” (ie, in the case of the aura member absent form), the aura member 5035 maintains the fully accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and it is informed that it will return to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state. An image (here, white letters “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 208 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. 204 of the first modification in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 0 in a form without an aura member. (FIG. 208 (J4) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the aura level to be set is any one of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is in the 1/31 state from the fully accommodated state. Become. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 208 (J5)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is decorated to emit green light indicating the aura level 1.

  Next, an operation effect of the third operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 209 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green indicating the aura level 1. Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the aura level set in advance.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 remains in the 1/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user that the operation returns to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, the message “Izai” on the blackout screen) (White character) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the state of 1/3 appearance, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 209 (K3) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from 1/3 appearance state to 2/3 appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K4)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in red indicating the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation presentation of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image indicating the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect decorated with light emission is performed (FIG. 209 (K5)). The luminescent color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red indicating the aura level 2. Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the aura level set in advance.

  When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (After this, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user of returning to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, “Izai” on the blackout screen) ) And an image indicating the aura level are displayed (FIG. 210 (M1)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the appearance of 2/3, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 203 (F2) of FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 210 (M1) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed.

  When the aura level is “3”, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 210 (L1)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is decorated to emit light in rainbow color indicating aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (after this, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and a stroke effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second stroke state. An image notifying that the user is returning (in this case, a white character of “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen, and an image indicating an aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 210 (L2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is similar to FIG. 203 (F 2) → FIG. 204 of the first modification in the presentation mode (color, sound, etc.) according to aura level 3. The effect transition is traced (FIG. 210 (L3) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 3 is always displayed.

  In the above description, the aura member's unit 5035 changes the uniting degree with the blade 5011 at each operation timing when the aura level is raised to widen the range viewed by the player (increases the appearance degree). Not limited to. Even if the aura level goes up, the aura is decided when the aura level is decided without raising the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 (specifically, when the white letter of "is" is displayed on the blackout screen) You may be made to perform the stock-type coalescence which unites the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 at a stretch so that it may become the appearance according to a level. Further, the object whose degree of appearance is increased in stages is not limited to the aura member 5035, but may be the sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011). For example, the state of the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) may be changed stepwise from the first sword state to the second sword state.

  As described above, in the second modification, since the player is required to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in a movable state, it is surprisingly novel. Operation effects can be provided, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the stage is developed step by step by giving multiple operational opportunities to the player, it is possible to impress the player with great involvement in the stage and prevent the interest in the stage from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is reported so as to be recognizable even in subsequent effects, the player can feel the afterglow of the operation effects.

(Other effect pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213. 211 to 213 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the inserted sword state functions as the operation means, and detects the extraction operation by the player. Second, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in a front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is a part of the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the front center.

  When the changing symbol forms the reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols changes to the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 211 (A1)), and the princess reach start image is displayed (FIG. 211 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decoration member SDY (a potter's wheel) which can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the bag is stationary in a state (initial state) visible from the player above the display area. There is. In addition, at this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of cutting.

  In the princess reach effect, an image directed to the princess is displayed behind the eyebrow (FIG. 211 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggested image suggesting the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 211 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is started and the operation effective period to receive the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to operate the sword decorative body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 212 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are made to move up and down little by little from the display of the operation effect suggestion image until the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period. It is also good. When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword extraction operation by the player refers to an operation in which the player grasps the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 in a sword storage state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward to extract the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020. When the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, a sword operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection and informing operation may be an operation such as movement or vibration as the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) moves up and down, or any other action that can be felt by the player via the handle 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even when the player removes his / her hand from the handle 5012. Therefore, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, unnecessary contact with the sword decorative body 5001 (gripping again for detection confirmation, etc.) is reduced, and the movable body is prevented from being broken or broken. Can.

  Here, the player does not appear the aura member 5030 (5035) in the removal operation by the player, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visible from the player when the player performs the removal operation according to the degree of expectation. You may do it.

  When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initially The state is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 212 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 212 (C2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the sword state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 212 (C2) is notified, but is not limited to this, and is returned to the sword state at the timing when the detection notification operation is finished. You may do so.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is centered on the front surface overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). The drop display is movable so that only the hold display area is visible (all fall state) (FIG. 212 (D1)) Next, a princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the second sword state (FIG. 212 (D2)) Note that at this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided. The shadow color, the size of the shadow, and the comments that are displayed afterwards may be used to suggest the expectation level of the lottery result by Hime Reach (such as the winning expectation and the game profit when winning)

  Then, after the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the second scraped state by the player's scraping operation, that is, when a predetermined period elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second scraped state is The sword decorative body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 212 (D 3)). Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decoration member SDY returns from the full fall state to the initial state, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility. An image of a princess who is surprised when the bag is removed is displayed (FIG. 213 (D4)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the position where the original sculpting operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the hit with the princess of the smile when the result of the current variable display is the hit. An image is displayed (Fig. 213 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying of the outing is displayed together with the princess who is sad in the case of becoming out (Fig. 213 (F1) (F2)).

  It should be noted that although the detection and notification operation is performed as described above when the player removes the sword operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the front horizontal direction When the player can not move due to the player holding the key, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is performed. Although the effect itself proceeds even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 performs an operation by the player at the movable effect timing (FIG. 212 (D3) in the left and right direction of the sword decorative body 5001). When held in the performed position, it causes a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether the left-right direction movable effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed or not, the effect to be performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the falling movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY Because the game is configured to play, there is no stagnation in game progress. The sword decorative body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform movable presentation in the left-right direction when holding of the sword decorative body 5001 is released by the player, or is configured not to perform movable presentation. It may be

  In this way, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that has suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decorative body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword decoration operation (vertical movement) of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is moved in the forward direction of the effect display device 1600 (in the operation position (at the operation position) the sword decorative body 5001 itself in which the operation is performed outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can move to the left). That is, it becomes possible to move the sword decorative body 5001 itself to an operation position different from the operation position at which the sword removal operation was performed based on the sword removal operation by the player, enhancing the player's operation value, and the player's operation motivation You can control the decline of In addition, since one operation means is configured to be able to operate in different modes (vertical direction at the time of operation, horizontal direction after operation) stepwise by the operation by the player, a presentation using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In addition, the movable display of the sword decorative body 5001 in the left and right direction is a display of effects for the purpose of performing an integrated rendering with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decoration member SDY Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword removal operation is performed with the sword decorative body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved and positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In the left-right direction (the left end of the frame), the movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed. In addition, since the operation by the player of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is an operation in the up and down direction (strap operation to pull the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword decorative body 5001 performed after the operation is performed based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 operates in a direction (left and right direction as in this example) different from the operation direction (in this case, the vertical direction) at the time of the player's operation.

  Also, when a player's sword operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player accurately determines the operation end timing. Can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm for a certain period of time, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent moving effect of the sword ornament 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, when the movable effect cannot be executed by contact with the sword decorative body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to release the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation effective period. Even after the operation means has been detected and notified, even contact is prohibited, so that the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another production pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216. FIGS. 214 to 216 are diagrams for explaining screen transition of the effect display device 1600 in reach effect including operation effects of the operation buttons 410 used in multiple planes, state transition of the operation buttons 410, and operation transition of the sword decorative member 5001. is there. Here, a pattern ((A), (B) → N) in which an expectation degree suggestion effect is performed that suggests an expectation that the variation being executed as the operation effect of the operation button 410 is a big hit (in the figure, the operation of the operation button 410 A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which an operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variation display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 214 (A)), first, an operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. An operation promotion effect is started to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 214B). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the state of the sword. Then, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the effect pattern set in advance.

  First, in the pattern in which the expectation degree suggestion effect is performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected. After that (FIG. 214 (N1)), an image indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed (FIG. 215 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, off) is notified (FIG. 215 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggestion effect for the variable display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation (FIG. 215 (N2)), the display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. You may make it appear the character which changes the pending | holding display currently carried out.

  Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the player presses the operation button 410, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Is an effect image indicating that an operation effect requiring an operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed is displayed (FIG. 214 (M1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, the message “Title chance to extract the sword” and the explanation of the operation “Take me a sword” message) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decorative body 5001 at this time has an aura member-attached configuration in which the blade 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 216 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time has passed after entering the second sword state and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promoting image for prompting the player to operate the sword with the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 216 (M3)). When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

  When the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (carriage object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state ( FIG. 216 (M4)). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 216 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the variation display this time is disapproval, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a prison object) is merely stopped by the small movement in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) notifying the dislocation is displayed (FIG. 216 (M6)).

  As described above, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation or expanding the operation effect of the other operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) become possible, and the player can operate the operation button 410. It is not possible to identify the subsequent deployment at the time of operating the. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and to suppress the decline in the operation desire and the decrease in the amusement of the game, which are concerned because the effect after the operation is monotonous.

  In addition, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (a pressing operation and a setting operation) at the first operation (a pressing operation of the operation button 410) and a second operation (a holding operation of the sword decorative body 5001) The player is requested based on the above operation (the pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest that is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not appear instead.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. The operation means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decorative body 5001 rather than targeting the operation button 410 whose expectation is relatively lower than that of the first sword decorative body 5001. Is desirable.

(Another pattern 3 using the sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 221. FIGS. 217 to 221 are diagrams for describing screen transition of the effect display device 1600 in reach effect, state transition of the operation button 410, and operation transition of the sword decorative body 5001. Here, a pattern (in the figure (A), (B1), (B2)-> O) which becomes a big hit when the specific decoration member SDY (簾) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 In the case where the specific decoration member SDY (簾 簾 物 物 ず ず 物 物 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い) is not moved based on the pressing operation of, re-variation is performed from the symbol display of the displacing mode. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → Q if there is a chance to operate the sword decoration 5001 and R if a chance to operate the operation button 410 is given) Will be explained.

  In the reach effect here, when the variation display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 217 (A)), first, the start image (in this case, the operation effect of the operation button 410). , The message “Move the movable body with a single button hit” is displayed (FIG. 217 (B)), then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 217 (C)). The display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the image of the operation means (the operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and the operation valid period, and the operation button 410 for the operation object is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the state of the sword. Then, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the effect pattern set in advance. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one stroke (one time) but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, in order to make it easy for the player to grasp the target (the movable body) to be moved by the operation, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is movably moved up and down in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410. You may do it. When the sword decorative body 5001 is to be operated later, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second state of the sword at this point.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) moves and is a big hit, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is in a fully dropped state from the initial state. Is moved so as to become (FIG. 218 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (a decorative symbol of the type) for reporting a big hit in the display area of the effect display device 1600 from which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (簾) has been cancelled. (Stop message “777”, “Superior” message) is displayed (FIG. 218 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not move, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only allowed to move by being stopped in small steps. I will not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol of the shifted aspect ("767") is displayed in a rocking manner at the center of the screen (FIG. 219 (P1). Thereafter, according to the effect pattern to be set The decorative design is developed into a pattern (FIG. 219 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in an off mode (“767”) or a revived pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a revival start image (says “Madaja”) indicating that the variation display has not yet ended from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the off-state of FIG. 219 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 219 (P3)), the decorative design is again reached and reduced in the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed at the center of the screen. An operation effective suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a friendly samurai) is displayed (FIG. 219 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed eyes of the samurai are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 219 (P5)). As a result, the player has an increased sense of anticipation that the effect using the specific decoration member SDY (a prisoner's berthing) is performed. At this time, the operation button 410 may be lighted and decorated in a high-speed flashing manner, or the sword decorative body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the state of the sword to the state of the first sword. Then, according to the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means, and a specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. (Samurai character) is performed. Note that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is an operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern for which the sword ornament 5001 is an operation target.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button finalized image) in which sweat blurs on the forehead of the warrior of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 220 (R1)). Then, while the small-sized movement of the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 中 継 続A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 220 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, if the operation button 410 is operated the required number of times, it is no longer decorated with light emission.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player presses the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 220 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed at the upper right of the screen of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible from the player. As in the case described above (FIG. 216 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol at this time. Next, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is restored from the all-dropped state to the initial state again and the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is displayed on the screen. An image notifying the big hit at the center (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "good") is displayed (FIG. 220 (R4)).

  On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is disengaging, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the incremental movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 In the display area, the decorative pattern of the shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen (FIG. 220 (R5)).

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens the eye light (the sword decorative body (Confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state with the aura member (FIG. 221 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be lighted and decorated. The player can grasp that the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 is effective by the image of the display area, but at this time, the form such as whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Next, while the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 可 動 小) is moved in small increments, when the second scraped state is reached and a predetermined period elapses, and the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 221 (Q2)).

  Then, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when a player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 220 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 221 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of order, when the player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 220 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 221 (Q5)).

  In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is not dropped based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is again given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. Be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest that is a concern due to a monotonous operation effect without being displayed instead.

  In addition, although the example of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 is given in the above-described FIGS. 211 to 221, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be provided to further enhance the fun of the game.

(Pseudo-continuous production using sword ornaments)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 222 to FIG. 236, pseudo-rendering effects using the sword decorative body 5001 in which the form is changed in stages according to the number of continuation of the pseudo-rike fluctuation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo rendition is a temporary reoccurring rendition that temporarily stops the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and is a bonus that is performed corresponding to the pseudo reciprocation together with the pseudo reciprocation in which the temporary stop and revariation are repeated one or more times Etc. Here, the above-described temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears as if it has stopped, but actually fluctuates slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, when a variation pattern for performing pseudo-series variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, the pseudo series of effect patterns that can be selected by lottery of the presentation content by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Explained.

(Form of sword decoration body)
First, with reference to FIG. 222, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example will be described. The above-mentioned form of the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with two types of the aura member attached form and the aura member without form, but here, the form in which the sword part 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle 5012 There are two types of

  FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword decorative body 5001 used for the pseudo-series effect. The sword decorative body 5001 here is provided in a two-stage form change by deformation of the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3. From the left and right side portions of the sheath portion 5020, the player And an aura member 5040 that appears visibly. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, and its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction as in the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 222A to 222D are diagrams showing types (step changes) of the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword storage state, and sequentially show the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. The sword decorative body 5001 is in any form of stage 0 form to stage 3 form according to the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the stage 0 configuration is a configuration in a normal state similar to the above-described FIGS. 192 (A) and 194 (A), and no operation is required for any of the constituent members. Indicates the form. As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the stage 1 form shows the form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 222 (C), in the stage 2 form, the pattern part 5012 is spread and moved from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from the inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 222 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. Indicates the form. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here can change the form without causing the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the second extracted state. Furthermore, the sword portion 5010 capable of receiving an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body, thereby providing a more powerful operation means. Can.

(Example of simulated rendition)
Next, with reference to FIG. 223 to FIG. 236, an example of the effect transition for the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 231A, the main control substrate 1310 causes the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and sword LV3 strong fluctuation. When one of the six variation patterns of the pattern is selected, the pseudo-series effect is performed. The effect patterns for performing the pseudo-continuous effect include basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 weakness) corresponding to each of six types of variation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), a sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is a sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern). ), The sword LV3 weak production pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, and the pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) Selected.

  In the effect pattern, the number of continuations (one to three times) of the pseudo continuous change (re-change), the presence or absence of the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 according to the number of continuations, and the operation opportunity are given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is set (see FIG. 231 (B)). The effect pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) 1 to 3 times. Also, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop position (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances). In addition, “pseudo-sword LV1” gives the selection operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 at the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) and continues the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) by selecting not to operate by the player. Indicates that the performance can be obtained. In addition, “pseudo revival sword LV1” follows the same rendering transition as the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern of the basic effect pattern that provides the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 at the first pseudo run variation (re-variation), It shows that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed again after the end of the falling effect of the special decorative member SDY (chairman) based on the first change operation opportunity. The details of the contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of continuations of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) increases, that is, as the shape change of the sword decorative body 5001 progresses, and the specific decorative member SDY The lower the drop position of the object, the higher the degree of expectation. However, when the drop position of the specified decorative member SDY (circumferential object) is half-drop, the number of continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 1 It is set so as to have the same degree of expectation in the case where the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) becomes full with the effect pattern which is less in number of times. Specifically, the expected number of continuations of pseudo run variation (re-change) 1 times and half-drop sword LV1 weak effect pattern is 29%, the number of continuations of pseudo run variation (re-change) 1 and a sword of full fall Expectation level of LV1 strong performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 times, expectation degree of semi-falling sword LV2 weak performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 The expectation level of the sword LV2 strong performance pattern for the first and last drop is 50%, the expectation level of the sword LV3 weak performance pattern for the half-fall sword LV3 is 3% The expectation degree of the continuation number of three times of fluctuation) and the sword LV3 strong rendering pattern of the full fall is set to be 65%. In addition, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation varies depending on the selected variation pattern even if it is the same effect pattern, and the degree of expectation is set higher as the variation pattern has a higher expectation level. The expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% respectively when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern. It becomes. Further, the expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 strong rendering pattern is 47% and 74% respectively for the case where the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and the case where the selected sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected. Further, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the expectation degree of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

  In the following, the pseudo-continuous effects of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 231 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 223 to 230 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition of pseudo continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIGS. 224 to 226 are diagrams showing transition examples of effects of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given while the pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) is being performed. FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of the post-operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character)) during the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) common to all the effect patterns. is there. FIGS. 228 and 229 are diagrams showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the false sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the false sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Further, FIGS. 232 to 236 are operation execution timing charts of the sword ornament 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIG. 232 is a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). Figure 233: Sword LV2 weak effect pattern (Sword LV2 strong effect pattern), Figure 234: Sword LV3 weak effect pattern (Sword LV3 strong effect pattern), Figure 235: pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (false sword LV1 strong effect pattern) 236 shows a simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Below, it demonstrates along the example of a production | presentation transition in case a pseudo | simulation continuous production is performed in the production | presentation before a fluctuation | variation display is started and it will be in a reach state.

(All production patterns common)
As shown in FIG. 223 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the heel is visible from the player above the display area (initial state) ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state where the sword is in the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 223 (B) and (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image showing the start of the pseudo continuous effect (effect content notification “100 chances if it can be destroyed” message, samurai Is displayed to indicate to the player that the pseudo-series effect is to be started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode, and the player performs the re-variation of the decorative symbols. Report that. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-run variation) by displaying the pseudo run-off symbol of the embodiment. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). The sword image which shows the form (stage 1 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in advance is displayed. Thus, since the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) are notified at the time of temporary stop display just before the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) starts, the player Can identify and see what stage of pseudo-stationary fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the time of FIG. 223 (D) described above. The pseudo linear figure pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. At this time, the form change of the sword decorative body 5001 is a timing at which the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decorative body 5001 from the effect display which is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 after the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). The shape change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). For example, it is performed together with the display of the pseudo continuous sword symbol at the time of FIG. The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state while being displayed in an enlarged manner. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is it possible to make the sword decorative body 5001 in the second state in which the player can operate the sword as the operation means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result of whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the player is displayed. Subsequent effects include a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is effective in operation (an effect pattern with “LV1” in the name) and a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is not effective in operation (name). Branch to a presentation pattern in which “LV2” or “LV3” is attached. Below, an example of effect transition is demonstrated in order about nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak effect pattern / sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 224 and FIG. 227, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set that enables the sword decorative body 5001 as an operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation). An example of effect transition in the case will be described. When the effect pattern is set and the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given by the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the above-mentioned FIG. 223 (G An operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of a warrior open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) (FIG. 224 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“a good chance!” Message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 224 (T2)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the second sword state (step 1 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message "set sword!" (FIG. 224 (T3)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, an expectation degree notification effect by the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, when the set production pattern is a “strong” production pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. ) Is movable from the initial state to the full fall state. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second extraction state to the insertion state and returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) by the player's operation of the insertion sword. After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (blanket) is returned from the all-drop state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 223 (B). An expected degree notification image (“100 body defeat!”) For notifying the expected degree of the variation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the total fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by a later-described half-fall state. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Here, the expectation degree notification image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  In addition, when the set production pattern is a “weak” production pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a semi-falling state. The semi-dropped state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-fall state, and overlaps with the upper half region of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. . Then, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second extraction state to the insertion state and returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) by the player's operation of the insertion sword. After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (blanket) is returned from the half-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 223 (B). An expectation degree notification image ("50 body destruction!") For notifying the expectation degree of the variation display result in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo sequential effect shown is displayed. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Similarly to the “strong” performance pattern, the expectation notification image at this time is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  In the case where the player's operation is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the "strong" effect pattern or the "weak" effect pattern. An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) has ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is finished, as shown in FIG. 227 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. Ru. As for the reach effect at this time, reach effects of the same effect contents are executed for the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. Thus, by operating when the sword decorative body 5001 is required to be delivered, the player can perform the reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object). I can meet you. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have a different expectation every time, so that the player's willingness to operate is suppressed, and further, the decline in the game interest for uniform production is suppressed can do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 232, operations of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV1 weak production pattern and the sword LV1 strong production pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the first stage is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the sword LV1 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls by the operation of the player. When there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 232, when the sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the thrill of the player and making the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2 ) And the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The point at which the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)) is different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak production pattern / Sword LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 224 and FIG. 225, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set which enables the sword decorative body 5001 as an operation means in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change). An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given at the first operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-variation). After following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) described above, no operation opportunity is given to the display region of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggested image shown in FIG. 223 (G) described above. The continuous image (image with samurai eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 in the second state is returned to the state with the form maintained in the stage 1 form (figure 224 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode, and the player is informed that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is to be performed (FIG. 224 (S2)) ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-run variation) by displaying the pseudo run-off symbol of the embodiment. Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second quasi-continuous change (revariation) is displayed on the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, at the temporary stop display just before the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation) starts, the form and effect level (number of quasi-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  Then, when the second simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo reconnaissance symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 224 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decorative body 5001 so as to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to a stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is split to the left and right so that the first decorative part 5012a can be visually recognized (FIG. 224 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state State change to (Fig. 224 (S4)). In addition, the form change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes at a stretch at the timing when the player's gaze is directed to the sword decorative body 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state (stage 2 form) in which the player can operate the sword can be made effective as operation means, ie, the game An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result as to whether or not to give the user an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 225 (V1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, since the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given by the second simulated continuous change (re-variation), In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of a warrior open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above is displayed FIG. 225 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image ("Appreciable!" Message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 225 (V3)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the second sword state (stage 2 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image showing an operation direction and an operation valid period is displayed together with a message of "Please put a sword!" (FIG. 225 (V4)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, the expectation degree notification effect by the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has ended. In addition, when the player's operation is not detected during the operation effective period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an escape image ("Enemy, escape!") Is displayed, which indicates that the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen). 229 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 233, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV2 weak production pattern and the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. During period T2 in which the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second stage is made effective as operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. And when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 233, when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) is generated without generating an operation valid period in which the player's operation is effectively received, although the feeling of pounding of the player is increased (see FIG. 223 (G)). Is returned to the state of sword (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, while maintaining the stage 1 form, the sword decorative body experiences a second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

  Then, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo continuous change (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 225 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 225 (V4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The point at which the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)) is different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak effect pattern / sword LV3 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 225 and FIG. 226, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operation means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition in the case where there is an event is described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body is provided at the operation opportunity giving timing of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIG. 223 (A) to (G) → FIG. 224 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1), In the display area, a continuous image (an image with the eyes of a warrior closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above is displayed, and the second sword state is The sword decoration 5001 is returned to the state of the sword while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 225 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 225 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-run variation) by displaying the pseudo run-off symbol of the embodiment. Then, on the pseudo linear sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the third pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed Be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001. Moreover, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. Thus, when the temporary stop display is displayed immediately before the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword decoration 5001 in the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and attend at what stage of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the third simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo rectilinear symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 225 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative part 5012 b protrudes above the first decorative part 5012 a so that both decorative parts can be viewed as an integrated decorative body ( Figure 225 (V7). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state The state changes to (Fig. 225 (V8)). It should be noted that the shape change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword ornament 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. In addition, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 may not be changed every time according to the number of pseudo-continuous changes, and may be changed in a plurality of stages collectively when the final stage is reached. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes at a stretch at the timing when the player's gaze is directed to the sword decorative body 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) that can be operated by the player as the operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the determination result of whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 226 (X1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, since the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation), In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of a warrior open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1) described above is displayed Figure 226 (X2). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“a good chance!” Message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 226 (X3)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second scout state (step 3 form) as that of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message "set sword!" (FIG. 226 (X4)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, the expectation degree notification effect by the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has ended. Further, when the player's operation is not detected during the operation effective period, the effect display device 1600 does not matter whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of, an escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Is displayed that indicates that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (the prison object) being performed ( See FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 234, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) is performed and the second pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) occur. In the period T2 in which the sword ornament 5001 is not given an opportunity to operate, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) is performed. Give them the opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the sword LV3 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls by the operation of the player. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 234, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) ( See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) is generated without generating an operation valid period in which the player's operation is effectively received, although the feeling of pounding of the player is increased (see FIG. 223 (G)). Is returned to the state of sword (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, while maintaining the stage 1 form, the sword decorative body experiences a second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

  Then, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo continuous change (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S3)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 224 (S4)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 The sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without increasing the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 225 (V1)) but without generating an operation effective period in which the player's operation is effectively received. Is returned to the state of the knife (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The point at which the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)) is different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern / simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229, although the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective as the operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the player does not operate the pseudo continuous change. An example of effect transition when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern capable of acquiring continuation (level up effect) of (re-variation) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given at the operation opportunity giving timing of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation). . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for requesting the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → 224 (T1) described above, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 224 (T1). An operation selection image (“Maybe an opportunity !?” message) is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z1) )). Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promoting effect for promoting selection of the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (step 1 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and indicates the operation direction and the operation effective period together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword or not". An image is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z2)).

  Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern). Subsequent transition of effects greatly differs depending on whether the effect pattern is set based on the pattern.

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period. When detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 227) as the basic effect pattern sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is followed.

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect a sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”) When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed ends, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the second sword state in the first stage to the initial sword state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the present selection operation opportunity. An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate (“Is it an opportunity?”) Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (glare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!” Indicating that the pseudo decoration variation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) being performed. Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) ends, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 229 (W3)).

  In the case of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the player performs the operation of the sword during the operation effective period. When detected, the operation is detected at the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, as in FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 227 (U1) → After tracing the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3) is displayed in a normal manner with a decorative pattern (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode at the same timing as the timing previously determined by the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 227 (U5) reference).

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect a sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”) When the operation effective period in which is performed is completed, the operation pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by obtaining the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-described FIG. 228 (Z2) to a continuation image (FIG. 224 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation. After that, similarly to the sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern) of the basic production pattern, FIG. 224 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1) → FIG. 225 (V5) to (V8) ) → FIG. 226 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 227 (U5).

  In this way, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is greatly different in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected on the main control board 1310. When the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when operating at the selection operation opportunity, the basic effect pattern and Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and reach the reach production. On the other hand, if it chooses not to operate it, it will not only be able to acquire the level-up effect described later, but will reach reach effect without being able to grasp the expected degree that could be known if the user was originally operating . Further, when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the operation is not performed at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect by continuing the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) as in the case of the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if an operation is performed, an effect (continuous change in the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 due to a level-up effect) caused by continuing pseudo-variation (re-variation) that can be obtained without the operation is missed and the form of the sword decorative body 5001 is initialized It will return to form. The operation at the selection operation opportunity is the operation effect obtained in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 that is not known to the player, and the operation during the operation effective period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. Provide a fresh rendition that brings the operation result to the disadvantaged person. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent development of the rendering than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in game entertainment that results from a uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) When the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the three stages are reduced from the stage 1 configuration to the stage 0 configuration (initial configuration) from the selection operation opportunity. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decorative body 5001, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, and the level is raised to the stage 3 form and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, the operation of the number of times set in advance in the effect pattern is required, but in this example, the operation opportunity of 2 times (LV1 and L3) can be provided in advance, but the player performs one operation by operating. The granting ends at the opportunity, and a novel effect that more reflects the player's intention can be provided. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate with respect to an operation effect that does not appear instead, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 can change from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, depending on the player's operation, the initial form to the stage 1 form It will reach reach production only to see the change up to. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected variation pattern (the set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of the operation and the decline of the game entertainment.

  Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY . If the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated, it ends without being able to grasp the expectation, and the form further changes in level (levels up), and it operates in the operation opportunity given after becoming the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be ascertained by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection without operation produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or higher than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 231 (A), the expectation level in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern, but this is not restrictive. For example, the expectation degree of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect that matches the player's own selection feeling, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the variation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 235, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in stage 1 form in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. As the operation means, and gives the player an operation opportunity. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by an operation of the player is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the variation pattern selected at this time is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern or a sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since three quasi-continuous variations (revariations) are inherently provided, a specific decoration is provided. After the fall effect of the member SDY, the normal pattern variation is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern. When the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo continuous variations (revariations) are continued, and the second pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the period T2 during which (revariation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 during which the third pseudo variation (revariation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And enable the player to have operational opportunities. And when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 235, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → FIG. 228). (Refer to Z1), an operation effective period for effectively receiving the operation of the player is started (refer to FIG. 228 (Z2)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the player does not perform the operation of the sword in the operation effective period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues (set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), The decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the insertion state with the end of the operation effective period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S1)).

  Then, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo continuous change (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S3)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 224 (S4)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 The sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without increasing the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 225 (V1)) but without generating an operation effective period in which the player's operation is effectively received. Is returned to the state of the knife (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, when the player does not perform a sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV1 strong variation pattern), The decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the insertion state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo Resurrection Sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 230, following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above and showing it as if to rush into reach effect as it is, the pseudo resurrection in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is recovered An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak change pattern or the sword LV3 strong change pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

  When the set effect pattern is the simulated resurrected sword LV1 effect pattern, as in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above, the above FIGS. 223 (A)-(G) → FIGS. 224 (T1)-(T3) Follow production transition. Then, when the operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, the same effect as FIG. 227 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above is obtained regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. After following the effect transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo continuous variation by the pseudo continuous sword design is resumed. If the operation by the player is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword as the operation effective period ends, as in the other effect patterns. In place of the above-mentioned FIG. 230 (UA1) → (UA2), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the fall rendition of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is not performed and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Indicating that it has been done is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)).

  The resumption and resumption of the pseudo-series variation (re-variation) is the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“777”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 230 (UA3) described above. A pseudo-rifled symbol which is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, a temporary stop symbol with a pseudo-rifle symbol in a form showing the form and effect level (number of times of pseudo reciprocation) of the sword decorative body 5001 As a result, the player is notified (FIG. 230 (UA4)). A sword image and effect level 3 of the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed on the pseudo rafter symbol at this time. At this time, there is no change in the sword decorative body 5001, and the initial form (sword storage state) is maintained. Thus, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of temporary stop display (FIG. 230 (UA4)) immediately before the start of the pseudo run change (re-run) in the stage 3 form, the form and effect level of the sword ornament 5001 in the pseudo run change (re-run) are notified Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword ornament is displayed so that the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 230 (UA4) is enlarged and the effect display is applied to the sword ornament 5001. It is displayed moving toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. The sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decorative part 5012a, and the second decorative part 5012b are operated so that both decorative parts can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body. (FIG. 230 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 230 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form at once, it can impress a powerful operation and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state (step 3 form) which enables the player to operate the sword is made effective as operation means, and the above-mentioned FIG. 226 (X1) to (X5) When the player's operation is detected after tracing the effect transition, the specific decoration member SDY (not shown) is detected according to the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. The type of the fall effect of the 簾 (character) is determined. When the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, since the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is once in a half drop state, the level is raised and the above-mentioned FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) An expectation degree notification effect is produced by the full fall effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (chairman) as in (U5), and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends. On the other hand, in the case where the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation by the half-drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (clad object) same as FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

  In the case where an operation by the player is not detected at an operation opportunity for enabling the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) as an operation means, the operation effective period ends as in the case of other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword insertion state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not perform the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character), and the pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)), and the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is terminated.

  In this way, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above is followed, and when the quasi-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored again, the level of the stage 2 form is jumped over and the stage 3 form The same level of performance as the third stage (the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) production in the basic production pattern) will be performed, so the player will be surprised and reach with greater expectations than the other production patterns. Can face. In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), or the subsequent fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) becomes a semi-fall, the player does not feel distracted. It is possible to enjoy the game in expectation of the resurgence of the pseudo random fluctuation (re-variation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 236, the operation execution timings of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operation means in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. Give players an opportunity to operate. At this time, regardless of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the drop effect (expectation notification) that the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) falls half by the player's operation Production). Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, after the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) ends, and once it returns to the variation display of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, a period during which the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) in other effect patterns is performed The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) is performed using the sword decorative body 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the form change to the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 in the third stage form is made effective as operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, when the falling effect of the specified decorative member SDY (circumstances) is performed in the period T1, the falling effect (expected degree notification) in which the specified decorative member SDY (circumstances) is completely dropped by the operation of the player Production). In addition, in the period T1, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is not performed in the period T1, the falling of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is partially dropped by the operation of the player. Production (expectation notification production) is performed. Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 236, when the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the thrill of the player and making the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2 ) And the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 230 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expectation level notification image of the expected level is displayed (see FIG. 230 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is temporarily formed by the decoration pattern of the normal mode (see FIG. 230 (UA3)), but the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) is restored (FIG. 230 (UA4) )reference).

  The sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form simultaneously with the resumption of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) (see FIG. 230 (UA5)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed into the second sword state (see FIG. 230 (UA6)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is changed from the initial state to the fully dropped state. A falling effect that changes is performed (see FIG. 227 (U1)). Then, at the end of the revival pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to the total fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. In addition, although not shown in the drawings, if the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is not dropped in the first pseudo continuous change (revariation), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is moved from the initial state. The point is changed to a semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)), and the expectation degree notification image corresponding to the semi-falling is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the revival pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 (W2 ), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous change frequency is 2 times and 3 times in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed a plurality of times, respectively. If it is less than that, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state every time the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is made, and the player can operate, but an operation effective period is provided. It is characterized by being returned to the state of the sword (without giving the player an operation opportunity). For this reason, since the player is expected to expect whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes operable, the player is interested in the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is characterized in that the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a beneficial effect for the player by the player's operation. Make the player's operation selection carefully. Therefore, interest can be given to the operation in the sword decorative body 5001, and a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the sword ornament 5001 can change in form step by step until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation valid period is generated), the player's expectation and interest are increased step by step. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. It should be noted that during the period from when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state and the second sword extraction state (operating position) to when the operation effective period is generated, the player operates the operating mode at the operating position (form, light emission, movable Etc.) is preferably provided for a period during which it can be sufficiently confirmed. Thereby, the player can check the operation mode before operating the sword ornament 5001, so that the operation effective period is generated as soon as the second sword state is entered, and the mode of the operation means cannot be checked. It is possible to wipe out the fear that the game interest will be reduced by shifting to the operation effect as it is.

  In addition, although the step change of the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 was shown by the form, it is not restricted to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emission mode or operation mode of the sword ornament 5001, may be changed in stages in correspondence with the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (re-change).

(Application to pre-reading production)
In addition, although the scribbling effect in the pseudo-series reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a pre-reading effect. The case where it applies to pre-reading effect is described below. In the following, an example will be described in which the third hold is the prefetch effect target and the katana LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetch effect pattern.

  When a hold to be prefetched is generated as the third hold 3, effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 223 (B) to (F) described above are performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. The sword decorative body 5001 is different from the second decorative state in that it is limited when an operation opportunity is given (an operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next change display (that is, the change display of hold 1 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as the above-described FIG. 223 (G) → FIGS. 224 (S1) to (S4) is performed. Further, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs), the same effects as in FIG. 225 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X3) are performed. Is called. As described above, the change of the sword decorative body 5001 from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword in the pre-reading effect is limited to the generation timing of the operation valid period. Here, the operation effective period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 that is the target of the pre-reading effect is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. To the second sword state). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the prefetching effect is ended.

  Although the state change from the state of the sword decoration of the sword decorative body 5001 to the state of the second scout is limited to the occurrence timing of the operation effective period, the next change display is made even if the stepwise form change is performed at the end of the change display. It may be performed at the start. In the pre-reading effect, the same effect as the pseudo-reach reach effect is achieved.

(Indication before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 240, a pre-operation suggestion effect performed before an operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective in reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is enabled or the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object). . Specifically, an operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (crimson) is positioned at the initial position as a suggested pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern for generating an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (injury object) is moved from the initial position to the indication position. The sword decoration 5001 (from the operation button 410 In the case where the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation indication effect of the first suggested pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) which generates the operation effective period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (chairman object) is positioned at the initial position also in the operation effective period. Is performed, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)) is generated in which the operation effective period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (common object) is moved to the indication position. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 70% (including a step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation | movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse) in the 1st suggestion pattern of a pre-operation suggestion effect and a 2nd suggestion pattern is demonstrated.

(First suggestion pattern)
FIGS. 237 and 238 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during reach effect by lottery with the peripheral control substrate 1510 based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control substrate 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach | attainment effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed when it determines that operation is effective. In this reach effect, when three decoration symbols reach the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 237 (A)), an operation button previously determined to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means of 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Displayed (FIG. 237 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) maintains the initial position. In addition, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crimson object) is maintained at the initial position, an operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) determined to be operation effective is generated. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is validated, the first suggested pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggested pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggested effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (簾 簾 簾 に に 初期 位置 初期 有効 初期 操作 有効 初期 初期 初期It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 is activated, as shown in FIG. 237 (C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated with the specific decoration member SDY (canned object) maintaining the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation effective period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated to emit light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. In addition, even when the sword decorative body 5001 is effective, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first indication pattern although the rate is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 237 (D), an operation effective period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword into the second sword state (form with the aura member), so that the player can perform the sword insertion operation.

  If an operation on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) effective in FIG. 237 (C) or (D) described above is detected, the result of the current variable display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variable display is a release, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) reports the release to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)).

(Second Suggested Pattern)
FIG. 239 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is valid during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production performed. Note that FIG. 240 shows that although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 is once activated and the sword ornament 5001 is not activated, and then the sword ornament is displayed. It is a figure shown about the operation pre-operation indication production of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes effective.

  As shown in FIG. 239 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. It is performed before the operation effective period with respect to the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is displayed together with the display of the operation effect suggestion image. It operates in a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword ornament.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (injury object) is moved to the suggested position, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) determined to be operation effective in advance is generate. In this example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective, the second suggested pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggested pattern as the pre-operation suggested effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissman) is in the suggested position, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is higher than the operation button 410 at a valid rate. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA3), the operation effective period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissman) is operating at the suggested position. Generate At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (the form with the aura), and the player can perform the operation of the sword. In addition, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, although at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA2), an operation effective period with respect to the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is operating at the suggestion position. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed. In the second suggested pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promoting effect, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is moved from the state of operating at the suggested position to the initial state. In addition, movement to the full fall state or the initial state of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) may be performed from the state of operating at the suggested position without being returned to the initial state.

  Then, when an operation to the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) effective in the above described FIG. 239 (AA2) or (AA3) is detected, the above described FIG. 237 (C) or (D) and Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (cirrus object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to a full drop state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variable display is a release, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) reports the release to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggested pattern.

  It should be noted that the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, in the case where a plurality of operation patterns are provided such that the rate at which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective is different, the player's interest in the operation can be enhanced, so the specific decorative member SDY It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively, In addition to the basic pattern following the effect transition of FIG. 239 (AA1) → (AA3) described above until the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective, the operation button 410 is temporarily activated, and then the sword decorative body 5001 A step-up pattern is provided that enables operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 240 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is performed, that is, before the operation promoting effect of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) described above is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the display of the operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to the above-described FIG. 239 (AA1) and the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (the glimpse) are performed (FIG. 240 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. (FIG. 240 (BB2)). Here, even if the player detects a pressing operation of the operation button 410 during the operation effective period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 238 described above is not performed, and the switching suggests switching of the operation means that is effective. The suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 240 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (aura-equipped form), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation means that is effective for operation is displayed from the operation button 410 to the sword ornament 5001. A switching notification image (message of “extraction chance” and “having a sword”) is displayed (FIG. 240 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (crimson object) is in the state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation promoting effect of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) described above is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 238) in the second suggested pattern described above.

  Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect) in the above-described FIG. 240 (BB2). It is only necessary that the sword ornament 5001 is operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is enabled. The position of) can be changed, suggesting operation means to be operated effective by the position. Specifically, in the first suggested pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) in which the operation valid period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) is at the initial position, the operation button 410 is effective. In the second suggested pattern (Fig. 239 (AA1)), the sword decorative body 5001 has a high degree of expectation and the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a common object) is located at the suggested position. There is a high degree of expectation that the operation is effective, and the player pays attention to the state of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) to grasp which operation means is effective. The interest of the production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, vertical small-step movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) is performed in the indication effect before operation. And since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decoration member SDY (jail object) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 238) after the operation of the operation means, a series of fall effects from the up and down movement of the suggestion effect before operation is made It is possible to show the stage effect and to suppress the decrease in the game interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body is effective, is not limited to this. It may be displayed to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, not only the lighting of the operation button 410 or the change of the sword decorative body 5001 to the second extraction state, but also the operation means to be effective in operation is moved by vibration or the like. You may

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is located at the suggestion position, after the operation button 410 is once activated (or after it is made appear that the operation is validated) D) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to have the expectation that the sword decorative body 5001 may become effective after that. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the indication effect before operation, the operation effect indication image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is effective is displayed. 237 (FIG. 237 (B)), as in the second suggested pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view from the initial position of the specific decorative member SDY It is also possible to operate in a small fall state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. In addition, when the operation effective period is generated thereafter, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is returned to the initial position (still). As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player provides an operation effect suggestion by the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it seem that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the sword decorative body 5001 is operated effectively. The player strongly desires that the operation valid period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is moved to the suggested position. I can improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the specific effect in the game board side effect display device 1600 Produce with a pattern. In an effect period in which a specific effect pattern is executed, it is possible to generate a specific effect reception period (effective period) for establishing a specific effect execution condition by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period. Based on the establishment of a specific performance execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation related to privilege provision). The degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant suggested as a result of the specific operation presentation may be 100% or 0%.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for providing a privilege when operated) In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) other than this. In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There are cases where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is satisfied when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001), the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation opportunity is not performed. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (givenness expectation degree) related to privilege grant is higher than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. 100% or 0% may be expected for providing the privilege suggested when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001).

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is performed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the stage is in a previous stage where the stage has not yet been performed and the operation is just being performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation related to the provision of a privilege is high) does not appear in the operation effect according to the operation on another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001). So that even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), the game entertainment can be improved through such operation-related productions. Become.

  And, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) having such a dramatic property. In the case of providing such an operation opportunity, it is possible to execute common operation-related effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (effect reception enabled).
The operation on the operation button 410 is activated after the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is activated (the effect can be accepted), and the operation for the operation button 410 is activated (effect can be accepted ) The first effect mode for generating the effective period (effect reception period) to be performed, and · The operation on the operation button 410 is activated (the effect reception is possible) without the “specific operation related effect” being started. A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating the effective period (effect reception period) to be played are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is activated by executing any of the effect modes. An effective period (production reception period) to be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, a period occurs in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) can be accepted. In any case where there is a period during which an effect accepting operation other than the particular operating means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) becomes available, it is common prior to the occurrence of those periods (specific Since it becomes possible to execute the operation-related effect of), it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the specific operation means and the other operation means is acceptable for effect, By performing the operation under the condition where the game is performed, the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Note that such a common (specific) operation-related effect corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect was started. An effect reception period will be generated. At least when the effect starts to be produced, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period. It is desirable to keep it secret. In addition, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) before the effect reception period occurs. (A display of the effect result display) may be performed, and a plurality of operations may be performed within the period after the effect reception period occurs, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs. A means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) may be indicated as to which the operation opportunity is given (display the effect result display), and the operation-related effects are executed until what timing. It can be changed as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, several effect modes that can be adopted when performing such common (specific) operation-related effects will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanation examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents when any production reception period occurs after execution of a common (specific) operation-related production. In the case where any effect reception period occurs without the operation related effect of) being executed, the effect contents may be omitted. However, as an effect content in the case where one of the effect reception periods occurs while the common (specific) operation-related effects are not executed, “an operation for the operation button 410 is performed while the specific operation-related effects are not performed. For example, a general effect such as an operation instruction image prompting the user or an operation instruction image prompting the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach production is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the game is executed, or common during the jackpot game execution period A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

  In addition, each effect described below can be executed in combination with each other, which will be described later, as appropriate, and can also be executed in appropriate combination with each effect described above. Is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each of the effects described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Thus, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is possible to perform effects of different examples described later. The same can be said between the productions of different examples described later.

[First presentation manner]
241 and 242 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can accept an effect during a period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the presentation example (1st presentation aspect) done.

  FIG. 241 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 241 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 241 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Display is made to move in the inside. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. You will be able to

  In FIG. 241 (c), the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b) is developed, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, character display such as “operate”) prompting operation of any one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) in a state of being stopped and displayed in the area, and reception of effects The production situation in which a bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period appears.

  According to such a production mode, although the operation can be received for at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001). It becomes impossible to determine which of the three is available for presentation. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 241 (c)) is the same in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means before the operation can be accepted for the operation of at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001). Common (specific) operation relations as shown in FIGS. 241 (b) and (c) over a period until an operation for at least one of the (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) can be accepted. The production is executed.

  Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the production content of the specific operation-related production is limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 241 (b) and (c). Absent. The point is that when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect Middle). With such a configuration, it is not clear which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive effects, and at least one of the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001) It is possible to suggest that an operation on one is acceptable for presentation. For example, the plurality of operation related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different kinds of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration A presentation image different from any one of the images SYG may be made to appear as a specific operation-related presentation, without appearing any of the images SYG.

  However, in order to more surely conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for the production, the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration 5001 It is more desirable that the time required from the execution of a specific operation-related effect (production start) to the generation of the effect reception period is set to be the same when the reception period occurs.

  In addition, as an operation instruction to be displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation on any of the operation means (“operate” Etc.), or always operating a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means regardless of how each of the operation means can receive a production. May be displayed to prompt the user. In short, even if an operation instruction is given, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can receive the production.

  Also, in the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 241 (c), it is concealed whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted. Even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for production, and also when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted for production (when in any of the first to third situations described later) However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 may be in a non-light-emitting state, or light emitting means may be provided on the sword decorative body 5001 side to provide a connection between the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

  Here, in this production example (first production mode), the production situation in which the image shown in FIG. Whether in the first situation in which the effect can be accepted, in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 Both are set to be in any one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When the second situation (a situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001) occurs among the plurality of situations, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001) in the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410) It is desirable to make it lower than the rate of occurrence of

  And in this example of presentation (the 1st presentation mode), when it is in the situation of either the 1st situation (operation button 410) and the 3rd situation (operation button 410, sword ornaments 5001), operation to operation button 410 Is performed (whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or the second situation (sword ornament 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 (when “GG” in the drawing is made progress), an effect is received and an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 242 (d) and 242 (f)). Is supposed to be done.

  In the effect at the time of operation, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area and a predetermined display effect is performed in the effect display device 1600. ("Chance!") Is executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front of the display area, and making any of these effect modes appear in response to the effect reception , You may make it indicate the degree of expectation concerning grant of benefits. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation-time effect according to this effect example (the first effect mode), in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and (f), the effect is accepted by the operation by the player. Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control for setting the operating means to the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (d), although the operation by the player is performed on the operation button 410, the operation is performed according to the effect reception. It is possible to execute control for reciprocating the sword decoration 5001 on the side not being performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect is received as a result of an operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and an operation effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the button 410 is not operated and the sword decorative body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated, the production reception is generated and the on-stage operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is executed. ”Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), as a result of the player performing the removal operation by the player on the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 is positioned at Instead of returning to the (sword state), it is possible to execute control to maintain the blade position (sword state). As a result, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword position (sword state) to the sword position (sword state) based on an operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword state. When the operation will be performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, the sword ornament at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to learn the actual feeling that the operation effect due to the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is being executed.

  Then, after the effect at the time of operation (FIGS. 242 (d), (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 242 (e), a reach state can be formed and reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side is selected. Even when it is executed, when the predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started), the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated (sword insertion position (sword insertion state)). Control to return to is performed. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side and returns to the initial position (non-driven position) for the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable for the operating state (reciprocation or maintenance in the cutting state) to be continued for a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 241 and 242 as described above, specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001). Common (specific) operation related rendering is started and the rendering started (common) (specification), regardless of whether the effect reception is enabled 5001) or the effect reception is not enabled While an operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 can be receivable at the same time, the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the other operation means (for example, the operation button 410) have effects respectively. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can accept an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is in effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 can be receivable without being accepted, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related rendition is being performed, the operation button 410 and Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decorative body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production, the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production. You will be able to be confused as if not. That is, in this case, it is possible to prompt operation to the operation button 410 on the low side, not the sword decorative body 5001 on the high side of the ratio at which the proportion with high expectation is relatively performed when the effect is received. It is expected to provide an interest as to which operation means should be operated when common (specific) operation-related effects are performed.

  In addition, when such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is consumed by the amount of such erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the production (the side where the production reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, Although the acceptance of the effect required for the execution of the effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection itself of the operation is performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. According to such a configuration, since there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost, it is urged to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

  Further, in the example of the effect (the first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side is Although it was made to be performed, you may make the effect content at the time of these operation mutually different. For example, in the effect at the time of operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed by the effect at the time of operation on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) If a unique effect sound is generated or the like) further appears, it is possible to more appropriately improve the fun of the game when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received for effect.

  Further, when preparing another production mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other production mode. When the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001). In either case, it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (c). That is, in this case, when there is an operation on the first operating means when the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is set while the common (specific) operation-related production is performed, When another production mode is executed as an operation-time production, while a common (specific) operation-related production is performed, the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set (No. When an operation for the first operation means is performed during the time period for receiving the effect for the second operation means), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation effect will be performed. In short, when an effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when making another production | generation aspect appear as an operation time production, in addition to the production aspect performed with the operation time production | generation on the 2nd operation means side, it does not make the said other production aspect appear, but 2nd operation The effect at the time of operation may be performed as effect contents different from the effect at the time of operation on the means side.

  In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is that the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 Are set to correspond to any of the third situations in which effects can be received. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is produced when the effect reception is made, whereas in the third situation, the operation is different from either the first condition or the second condition. It is desirable that a rendition or the other rendition mode described above (different from the first rendition and the second rendition at the time of operation) is displayed. However, in the above-mentioned effect example, the above-mentioned third situation may not be necessarily required.

  In addition, the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation unit to which driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, but the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit. Above, in the production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), the player does not perform an operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not it is. However, the control for operating the operation means on the side on which the player has not performed the operation is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to end the operation state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

  When the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying a driving force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operation means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decoration member SDY (crissman). Also, as the "operation" in the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source, an aspect such as "movement", "rotation", "rocking", "vibration" is exemplified. This is not limited to the production example, and the same applies to other production examples.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 243 to 246 are executed as effects indicating the progress of the effect until a specific operation-related effect appears in either the first effect result or the second effect result. When the first effect result appears as a result of the above, it is suggested that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of production (2nd production aspect) suggested that the production reception period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produces among these.

  FIG. 243 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination with the number of reservations being 0 The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 243 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect of the specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 243 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is simultaneously displayed in the inside, and it is depicted that the lightning image IZ is acting on those images BTG and SYG. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. You will be able to

  In FIG. 243 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b) progresses, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. In the display area of the device 1600, an effect of pushing the other party out of the display area is performed.

  That is, in the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (the second effect mode), "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG It is executed as an effect such as which one of BTG and SYG is left in the display area, and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is received When a period occurs and a rendering result (second rendering result) in which the sword decorative image SYG is left appears, a rendering reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (b) and (c) are “any of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001. This is equivalent to a “specific operation-related effect that can appear before the occurrence of these periods”.

  Note that the left diagram in FIG. 243 (c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right diagram displays the sword decoration image SYG. Describes the prevailing situation of remaining in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance situation changes with time.

  FIG. 244 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 243 (c), and the button image BTG is left in the display area. An effect depicting the above is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 244 (d)). By being executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted (the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays for prompting the operation (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is capable of accepting effects (being in the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, the operation to the operation button 410 is also prompted by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the light emitting state.

  Note that the effects shown in FIG. 244 (d) are not progressed through specific operation-related effects (such as FIG. 243 (b), (c)), or without passing through the specific operation-related effects. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 243 (a)). However, even when the same effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for giving a benefit be higher than that.

  Further, with regard to the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 244 (d)) is given in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 through a specific operation-related effect, a specific operation-related effect The rate at which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect that the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without performing the operation (FIG. 244 (d)) is performed. Should be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the dramatic delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

  In FIG. 244 (e), as a result of an operation performed on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. This is a depiction of the performance during operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e) is the same as FIG. 242 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed in the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, although the operation by the player is performed on the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second according to the reception of the effect. The same applies to the point that control to reciprocate between the positions and control (control to put in an operating state) is enabled. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and any of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Then, it may be made to suggest the degree of expectation concerning privilege grant. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 244 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 244 (f). However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed (the reach effect starts). Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the non-operation state (sword state)). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side and returns to the initial position (non-driven position) for the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable for the operating state (reciprocation or maintenance in the cutting state) to be continued for a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 245 (g), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decorative image SYG is in the display area. An effect depicting the remaining state is being performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

  In other words, a specific operation-related effect (Fig. 243 (b), (c)) is performed, which indicates that the operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is permitted to receive effects. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 245 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for production (the production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “Take out the sword” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state in which the effect can be received (that is during the effect receiving period for the sword decorative body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit including the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 including the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword decorative body 5001 itself may be turned on) is turned on. By doing so, an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is urged.

  In addition, the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is not progressed through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effect. In some cases, the presentation progress (for example, the presentation progress from the presentation state shown in FIG. 243 (a)) may be made. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is possible that the expectation degree concerning the privilege provision is made lower than the case where the expectation degree concerning the privilege provision is higher than the case and the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed after the specific operation related effect. desirable.

  In FIG. 245 (h), as a result of the operation performed on the sword decorative body 5001 among a plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed according to the operation This is a depiction of the performance during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 245 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. In 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, although it is made to display the production | presentation aspect such as "superheat !!" which is suggested that it is a relatively high expectation degree according to presentation reception, it is suggested that it is a relatively low expectation degree “Chance !!” may be displayed. Similarly to this, with regard to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode in which the operation for displacing the display area to the front side is not performed is provided, and any of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception In this case, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 245 (h), the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself is changed to any of the above-described plurality of modes based on the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 From stage 0 form shown in FIG. 222, it is possible to change from stage 1 form to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form), and depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation for awarding a bonus such as a big hit The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 245 (i), even when the operation effect (FIG. 245 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-drive position), The sword decorative body 5001 is not returned to the sword state, but is maintained in the sword state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the scrapped state, and thereafter (during the period when reach production is performed, etc.), the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the katto state. An operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and at that time, it is possible to further execute an operation effect according to the operation to the knife state.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) in two steps, and the first step operation (operation to the scraping state) and the second step operation Since the effect at the time of operation comes to be performed according to each operation (operation to the state of sword), not only when the operation to the operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) is performed, but also the first step In the non-operation period until the second-step operation (operation to the sword state) is performed after the operation (operation to the sword state) is performed, it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment for the operation Become so. Note that it is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation are operation modes different from each other (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). Moreover, it is desirable that the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the first step and the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the second step have different effect contents.

  Further, when the operation effect (FIG. 245 (h)) corresponding to the operation at the first stage is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extracted state, and is not maintained in the extracted state. In such a case, it is desirable not to give the second operation opportunity. In the operation effect according to the first step operation, is it possible to maintain the sword decorative body 5001 at a position (surgery state) where it is possible to give the second stage operation opportunity (operational opportunity from the sword state to the sword state)? It may be performed as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation of no. That is, when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the scraped state but is returned to the scout state, it is substantially impossible to provide the second stage operation opportunity (operational opportunity from the scout state to the scout state) It is clear that it will be said. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, as a result of performing the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the first step (FIG. 245 (h)), when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the scrapped state, when the predetermined time has passed (reach effect Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-driven state (sword storage state)) at a stage prior to the start of). In this case, however, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its operating state (reciprocating) over a period of at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side until it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to keep the operation or the maintenance in the cutting state). In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 246 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 244 (d). Thus, an effect is depicted in which the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time has passed since the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) or FIG. 245 (g) Either the rendition shown in or the rendition shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears. Note that which content of the effect appears is determined in advance in the determination process of the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) (Here, the lightning image IZ) is continued, and it is made to indicate that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), the instruction display for prompting the operation (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed either, as shown in FIG. This is different from the case of the production shown in FIG. Thereby, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize something.

  246 (k) shows that the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG so that the button image BTG is encased in 靄 MY as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) being developed, and even the outline drawing thereof is lost There is a production that will be broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), all of the effect elements (button image BTG) that suggested that the operation with respect to the operation button 410 can be effect accepted are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) that the operation to the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in such FIG. 246 (k) appears This makes it possible to question whether the effect reception period for the operation button 410 will occur and occur.

  Also in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (is about to disappear), and the remaining time until it is clearly indicated to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  In FIG. 246 (i), as a result of the development shown in FIG. 246 (k), the outline of the bag MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A presentation depicting the situation has been made.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed yet, it may be suggested that the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 may occur instead of the operation button 410 due to the outer shape of the eyelid MY. You will be able to

  Also in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately disappearing) than in FIG. 246 (k), and it is clearly determined to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs. This suggests that the remaining time is less.

  Then, in the example of the effect (the second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i) is further developed and the eyelid MY is not displayed, the sword decorative image SYG is displayed, and the image of FIG. 245 is displayed. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) being performed, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even in the case (FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 246 (j)), since the possibility of receiving the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 will be left, it is intended to maintain the game interest. Will be able to

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIGS. 244 (d) and 246 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword ornament 5001 It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by 靄 MY (FIG. 246 (k)), and further When the effect is developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the effect suggests that the effect reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) progresses, the outline of the eyelid MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) The effect pattern approaching the outer shape of) may be set to appear, and when the effect pattern appears, then the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 246 (j) and (k) conceals which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. It will be performed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, after providing the operation button 410 as the operable operation means, also in the effect situation shown in FIG. 245 (h) among the effect examples (second effect aspect), FIG. Similar to the effect situation shown in, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side on which the player has not performed the operation may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not it is.

  When the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying a driving force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operation means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decoration member SDY (crissman). Also, as the "operation" in the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source, an aspect such as "movement", "rotation", "rocking", "vibration" is exemplified. This is not limited to the production example, and the same applies to other production examples.

[Third production mode]
247 to 250 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but show another example of the effect (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  In FIG. 247 (a), in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 247 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect has been started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 247 (a) is being performed. However, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), in the specific operation related rendering according to this rendering example (third rendering mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the rendering display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that either of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 be made available for presentation soon.

  In particular, in this presentation example (third presentation mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated respectively. Thus, it is easy for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 to be ready to receive an effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is made to be recognizable. In this case, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 from the initial position to the operation position, but in comparison with the operation position to be operated when giving the operation opportunity Each one at a slower speed.

  According to such a configuration, it is an operating means that still has time left until the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) will each operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time until the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur until the symbol change ends, It can be suitably maintained.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is generated not by the effect display on the effect display device 1600 but by each operation by the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 (FIG. 247 (b)). After the start, basically, the same rendering progress as the second rendering mode is performed.

  For example, first, of the effects shown in FIG. 247 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The production contents are as described with reference to FIG. 243 (b).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the state where the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated from the initial position (position when not driving) It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is suggested that any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for effects even by such a movable effect.

  Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), for the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, after the specific operation related effect is started, the position different from the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) respectively And it is made to position as an operation state (state to which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is extended as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and an operation opportunity is immediately given, When the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally ended, it is necessary to operate the operation unit on the side where the effect can be accepted at least to the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effects are further extended for the time required for such operations, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced by such an extension.

  Therefore, in this presentation example (third presentation mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are both in the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation related presentation is performed. It is made to position as an operation state (state which applied driving force) in a different position (for example, intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is ended and the effect receiving period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect receiving period has occurred is operated to the operation position only in a shorter time, or the effect receiving period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operation means on the other side to the initial position only in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the extension during the operation related effects. In addition, until the effect reception period occurs, the operation accepting side of the operation target is positioned as the operating state at a position different from the operating position, so that the effect receiving period of the operating state is It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “movable operation button. Except for the display corresponding to "410", the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 243 (c). However, even in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively in the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position It is made to position as an operation state (state to which driving force was given) at a position different from any of the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 247 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the state when they are at the initial position (non-driven position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are placed in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). As described above, by intentionally changing the modes of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the modes of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, their alignment can be achieved in the near future. It can be suggested that the effect to be made (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 operate) is generated.

  Further, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “at the operation position”. Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 "at one time, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 244 (d).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), extension during the operation related effects is suitably suppressed. Become so.

  In addition, as an effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode moved to the operation position) and the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed” is firstly After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display for generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 and prompting the operation (character display such as “press”, effect You may make it display the bar display which shows the remaining time of a reception period. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed as "a mode moved to the operation position", but the operation button at the time of the display 410 is a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, so that the deviation of these modes is soon filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 244 (e). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). In addition, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 248 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 248 (g), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is also as described with reference to FIG. 244 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 operates the sword decorative body 5001. Is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 245 (g), except that the instruction content regarding is "pushed in" and that the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode moved to the operation position". It is the contents.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position at the time of non-drive) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword decorative body 5001 is moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), extension during the operation related effects is suitably suppressed Will be

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position)”. After performing the display effect, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display for prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (characters such as “push”) Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, while the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is in a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It will be possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be buried (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), when the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 245 (h). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial position (non-driven position) from the operation position.

  After such an operation-time effect (FIG. 249 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 249 (j), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 246 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) or the effect shown in FIG. It is in the state operated at a position different from the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that there is still no possibility that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred, or that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will still occur. Will be able to

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) comes to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (k). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively at the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. Both are operating at different positions.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (l). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively at the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. Both are operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the heel MY is closer to the sword ornament 5001 at the operation position than the sword ornament 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is further developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) is not to display the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and to display the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) progresses, the outline of the eyelid MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) ) So that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) may be performed. When such a production pattern can be performed, the production shown in FIGS. 250 (k) and (l) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can accept the production. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated to receive an effect during an effective period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect is accepted. Accordingly, the sword decorative body 5001 on which the operation is not performed is reciprocated between the first position and the second position (Fig. 242 (d), Fig. 244 (e), etc.). However, what is necessary is just to make the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed into an operation state. It is possible to adopt. In addition, even when the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the effective period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the effect reception is performed according to the effect reception It is desirable to set the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not performed to an operation state (vibration or the like).

  Moreover, about the production which makes such "the operation part by which the operation is not performed" the operation state, the production after the operation according to the operation is "expected degree (the ratio that the big hit symbol appears," 0 ", Appears when executed in the high aspect of "100"), and the effect after operation according to the operation is "expected degree (the ratio of big hit symbol appearing, including" 0 "and" 100 ") It may not appear when executed in the "lower mode".

  In addition, among the two operation units (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001), when an effect is performed after an operation by one of the operation, "the operation unit on the other side where the operation is not performed" is also activated. When the post-operation effect is performed by the operation on the other side, the “one-side operation unit on which no operation is performed” may not be set in the operating state.

  In this rendering example (third rendering mode), the driving source for applying the driving force to the operation button 410 is different from the driving source for applying the driving force to the sword decorative body 5001. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

  In each of the above-described presentation modes and their other examples, the basic operation is performed when “a button image BTG (first display mode) with the operation button 410 turned over” appears as a presentation result in which a specific operation-related presentation is performed. The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, the effect at the time of operation on the button side is performed. Become. In addition, basically, when the “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) in which the sword decoration 5001 is turned over” appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration Of the body 5001, an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decorative body 5001, and when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted for rendering, an effect at the time of operation on the sword character side is performed. In this regard, in the operation at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the effect at the time of failure (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination While either one of them is made to appear, even when the sword-playing side operation is performed, based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination, the production at the time of success (specific decoration member SDY is operated) and the production at the time of failure It is supposed that either (with the specific decoration member SDY not operated) is made to appear, and the contents of those effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001.

  In addition to effect on whether or not the specific decoration member SDY operates, operation effect on the button side and effect on the sword character side are the same as each other for the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600. You may make it be contents.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples related to a specific operation-related production, the production operation is given to which of the plurality of operation means is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is given. An operation opportunity was given to the system. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of the operation that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means, regardless of which effect results appear, such as pushing between the specific operation means. There may be.

  For example, any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state, or a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state with respect to one operation means. The operation may be given to the operating means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword state and the extracted state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any manner in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decorative body 5001 be operated in the sword insertion state or the sword extraction state when an effect result indicating whether or not to perform the operation is shown.

  Also, when the symbol variation in the holding state is digested, it is determined that a specific operation related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation when the symbol change is in the holding state (digested before this) You may make it perform the effect suggested from the execution period of a symbol fluctuation. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given only to any of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when the design variation in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in the hold state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to operate each of a plurality of operating means provided.

  In the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images (button images BTG, etc.) corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) Although the sword decorative image SYG is displayed, these images may not necessarily be displayed. The point is that when a specific operation-related effect is executed, one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the effect reception period occurs for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, those operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to conceal with respect to which of the means the presentation acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is not necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different kinds of operation means, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration A presentation image different from any one of the images SYG may be made to appear as a specific operation-related presentation, without appearing any of the images SYG.

  However, even when adopting the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while the specific operation related effect is being performed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation related effect is ended. One of BTG (image corresponding to operation button 410) and sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate to which of these operation means the effect reception period occurs. It will be. Then, in this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation related effect. When the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ) that has been executed is executed as the content of the effect, the specific operation-related effect is determined for which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestion. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning on one of two rocks. When lightning falls on one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other When lightning falls on the rock on the side, the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock, so that the effect can be advanced to the effects shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 245 (g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping the lightning toward one rock, and when the lightning falls on the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. It is also possible to cause the effect to progress to the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) or FIG. 245 (g). In short, it is desirable to make the effect progress as effect content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, a specific case is available in the case where the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and in the case where the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (execution of effects) to the occurrence of those effect reception periods to be the same. In addition, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs only for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation effect) can be generated according to which of the effect modes is performed. You may make it the ratio set with respect to the specific operation means among several operation means differ. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and their other examples, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect When operating the operation means on the side (such as FIG. 244 (e)), control is performed to return the operation means on the side not operated to the initial position after the elapse of a predetermined time based on the time of the operation. It may be. However, from when the operation means is not used as a reference, depending on at which timing of the effect reception period the user operates the operation means on the side not operated, until the operation is ended. It is desirable to make the time lengths of

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the time remaining in the effect reception period is short, and the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has struggled by operating the operating means on the side that is not shown in the specific operation-related effects. Therefore, depending on at which timing in the production reception period it is operated (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time until (“even if the operation means on the side indicated by a specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was received and the effect during the operation was executed” If the time length for appealing the player to the player is made different, the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, when none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. All may be operated.

  Also, during the period from when the specific operation-related effect is started to when the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect It is also possible to perform a predetermined effect that suggests the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body that operates based on an effect reception within an effect reception period after a specific operation-related effect is performed (here, It is possible to operate the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) more reliably based on the stage reception within the stage reception period after the specific operation-related stage is performed. It is desirable to make it possible.

  In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the rendering result (the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, etc.) after the specific operation related rendering is started until the rendering result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is used to generate the effect reception period regarding the specific effect (effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY) While related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. This makes it possible to create a special effect aspect as if the effect is shown and the effect is ended despite the fact that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect is performed. It is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment while playing a game. In addition, when the operation with respect to one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means is received while the specific operation related rendition is being performed, a predetermined effect is to be performed based on the effect reception. Then, it is desirable to indicate a rate at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the high expectation side is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game entertainment when the player knows that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In addition, in the middle of a stage where the specific operation-related effects related to a plurality of operation means are being performed, when the effect reception period is generated only for the operation buttons 410 of those operation means, within the effect reception period When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in step S, a special operation effect is performed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is performed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Even when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) appears as a production result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the effect as the specific operation-related effect during the time from when the specific operation-related effect is started until the effect result is indicated, As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and it is possible to grant the privilege more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  Further, in each of the above-described production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, an production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation was performed before is performed. According to such an automatic button effect state, an effect at the time of operation is generated without operation every time an effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. When the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even in such a case, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

  However, even when the automatic button effect state described later is set, only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 of the operation means is in the middle stage where the specific operation related effect is being performed. When the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period, it is desirable that the special operation production is not executed (automatic button function does not function). After this, even if the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related effects being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. Even if it is not, it is desirable that the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated (automatic button function to function) is executed. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the specific operation related rendition is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function works, and it becomes possible to enjoy the game entertainment It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above.

  In addition, regarding the setting change related to on / off of the automatic button effect state, for example, it is possible not only during the period when the symbol variation is not performed by the operation of the operation button 410 but also during the period when the symbol variation is being performed. It is desirable that For example, when the automatic button effect state is off and the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated, if the operation button 410 is operated, the automatic button effect state can be set and changed from the off state to the on state. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs while the effect state is on, and the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is performed in addition to the operation effect according to the operation being performed. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be cases where it is desirable to generate an effect at the time of operation by the player while maintaining the on state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on Within the effect reception period for the time operation button 410, when the operation for the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled as well as the operation button 410 and the operation for the other operation means is performed, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to cause a change in the effect being executed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect state is switched from the off state to the on state and when it is switched from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, the button image BTG with the operation button 410 over or the sword decorative body 5001 as the effect result of performing the specific operation-related effect In the state in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to them is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (effect reception for operation button 410 is received If the operation opportunity (rendering acceptance period) is given to the sword decorative body 5001 when the second display mode is given and the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, the effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. 251 (a) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 248 (e). Display mode) and display the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 245 (g) and 249 (h). Also good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both are suddenly switched to the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is 244 (d), 245 (g), 248 (e), and 249 (h), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the provision of the operation opportunity is made using substantially the entire display area (until other effect images such as a background portion where the degree of expectation is suggested) is displayed. To be done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In addition, in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (a), the first image possessing the shield (the button image BTG with the operation button 410 defaced) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design. The character is to be displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b), the sword (the sword decoration image SYG) which holds the sword decoration 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it implicitly suggests which operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as an effect image in which the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 itself is deceived. It is desirable that the operation means be displayed as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape or a part of the design.

  Further, with regard to the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this manner, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG Depending on which of the (second display mode) is displayed, it may be performed with an effect that suggests different degrees of expectation. For example, when the effect image TG (the second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for giving the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (the first display mode) appears. In addition, a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared as effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG (second display mode), and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. It may also indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, the expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears when displayed in a specific display mode. You may

  In addition, with regard to the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (it is desirable that the effect status is relatively high), There is a case where it is desirable that the operation-related effect is not executed (for example, after a prophecy effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed) (it is preferable that the effect has a relatively low expectation) There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being performed (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect being performed). When displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, the effect reception period also for another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001 etc.) not corresponding to the button image BTG May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is performed. It becomes possible to impart an interest different from that of the case where the button image BTG appears with respect to the operation while the effects are relatively high in expectation, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Another operation means may be an operation means different from that of the sword decoration 5001.

  In addition, when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, an operation on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG in the effect reception period is performed. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, “a specific operation-related effect is executed and the relative It is desirable that it is suggested that the presentation status has a higher expectation than in the production status in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production status with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the button image BTG appears in the effect status with a relatively low degree of expectation, the operation means (operation button corresponding to the button image BTG in the effect reception period) When 410) is operated, the special effect presentation period is not executed by ending the effect reception period for another operation means occurring at the same time, and according to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410) It is desirable that the effect during the operation is executed.

  On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended, and the special operation effect is to be executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not performed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated, and the operation is not performed. Although the operation means different from the means is operated, the operation effect when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect being performed Even when an effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period is executed. It is desirable to make the automatic button function work. However, when the button image BTG appears without a specific operation-related effect being executed when the above-described automatic button effect state is set, operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG The operation means corresponding to the button image BTG can be obtained even if no operation is performed even when the production reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means. It is desirable that only the same effect at the time of operation as that at the time of operation is performed, and the special operation effect that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated is not performed.

  However, within the effect reception period, another operation is performed prior to the specific timing at which the effect at the time of operation (the effect when the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-mentioned automatic button function. In the case where the operation is performed on the operation means and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and the specific timing has arrived. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect when the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, although the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function in the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is continued in the on state even after the effect reception period ends. Is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and each of the effects described above (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). If a sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect acceptance period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It becomes.

  Further, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes described above and other examples thereof, “a button image BTG (first display mode) in which the operation button 410 is overlooked”, or an effect result of performing a specific operation-related effect, or In the case where any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) looking over the sword decoration 5001" is displayed and the effect is accepted by the displayed operation means, relative The first operation effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggested to have a relatively low degree of expectation. It is possible to cause any of the second operation effects (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) to be made to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation time effect, which is the effect content that suggests the, is to be executed. However, when the first operation effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the first operation effect is the button image BTG (first When the display mode is displayed is executed based on the effect reception on the operation button 410 and when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the effect reception on the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, an effect image (a sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high expectation as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is caused in the production result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the above-described timer effect (FIG. 118), it is possible to set “providing an operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes to be the timer object). That is, in the timer effect directed to "providing an operation opportunity to the operation means", when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), an operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means This makes it possible to enjoy the effects at the time of operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect target of the timer effect, when the operation with respect to the operation means is performed, the effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery One of the disadvantageous production results can appear. However, when the “operation opportunity to the operation means” is given as the target of the timer effect, the proportion of the effect result that is advantageous for the player is high, as compared with the case where the timer effect is not the target. It is more desirable to The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect with the effect of “granting an operation opportunity for the operating means (for example, the sword ornament 5001)” appears, the “target operation opportunity for the operation means” is selected. A specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, respectively, so that an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment at the time.

  However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed until just before the one effect target (the operation of the sword decoration 5001). There is a concern that it is not possible to understand which of the effects should be closely watched, the attention is distracted, and the entertainment interest drops in reverse.

  Therefore, in the case where a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001), as will be described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value becomes a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), "specific operation related effect" is not executed and the count value It is desirable that the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced after it becomes a predetermined value (here, the count “0”).

  FIG. 252 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively performed on one effect target (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001). Note that the following timer effect corresponds to the above-described notice-side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processing according to the timer effect.

  252 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination with the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  252 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 252 (a), the timer effect is the effect start (here, the countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here "3") Indicates the situation. In addition, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 252 (b), "specific operation related rendering" is not yet executed, and it is unclear whether the timer rendering is intended for any of the renderings. Yes.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (unknown state) in which it is unknown which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count "0" is reached and this is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” as the count value is displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced. In addition, when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not "0", and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) A specific operation-related effect on which one of the two is displayed is performed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (the assignment of the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001), those effects are still Since overlapping in sequence is avoided, it is possible to enjoy each of the different effects.

  However, if the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is in an unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it may not be possible to recognize whether it was done as a game, and the entertainment interest of the game will decline. Therefore, in this rendering example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), between the count display reaching a predetermined value (here, the count "0") and the start of a specific operation-related rendering, An effect is suggested that indicates the type of effect (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001) that the timer effect is directed to.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect is “the provision of an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 (operation opportunity by“ sword ”)”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), a rendering image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed ("Katou" Because "specific operation related effects" are started to be produced while the player side recognizes that the operation opportunity is given by "", it is possible to improve the game interest. become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the display “1” is performed on the effect display device 1600. Also, it may be displayed continuously.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the sword decorative body 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, Reciprocating motion in the up and down direction) is performed, and this also indicates that "the opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 (operational opportunity by I try to suggest it.

  Note that the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is “granting an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001”, but also when another effect is the effect object. It may be performed when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect of, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the production to be produced is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is made to be executed at the same time or earlier than the timing at which the production suggesting the production type is started, and the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to do so.

FIG. 252 (d) shows an effect situation where the effect of “specific operation-related effect” has started.
In this effect situation, as described above, in addition to the fact that the count value has already been hidden, the effect that suggests the type of effect for which the timer effect is the effect is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is also completed. However, with regard to effects that indicate the type of effect that the timer effect is targeted for, or a predetermined action by the sword decorative body 5001, it is important to execute before a specific operation-related effect is started, so The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

  Then, after the “specific operation-related effect” is started in this way, the effects will be developed in the order of FIG. 252 (e) to (h), but FIG. 243 (c Because the contents are substantially the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 245 (g) to (i) or FIGS. 247 (d) and 249 (h) to (j), the details will be omitted.

  In addition, as a timer effect performed in connection with a specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 252 and another timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect drawing. It may be made executable. That is, another timer effect is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 252 in that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, but the specific operation-related effect is an effect. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) according to the timing to be started (strictly, slightly before this), and continues even after the specific operation-related effects are started It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, a privilege is granted ( Expectations for the jackpot) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect will be simultaneously developed, but at the same time when the effect situation where the effect is simultaneously developed appears, the specific operation-related effect is Regardless of which of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are shown as the rendering result, their rendering value is the same as the expectation for the same bonus award (big hit) The same). That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to substantially lose the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, any of the effects It is possible to avoid the situation where it is difficult to understand what should be watched, and distracting attention. However, in order to improve the game entertainment, when an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are simultaneously developed appears, the bonus is given more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252 appears. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), first, a display that suggests the type of the effect target in the effect display device 1600 ( Although "Kado" is performed, the display indicating such an object of effect may be performed also when another effect mode is selected as the effect of timer effect. However, when a specific effect is selected as a timer object among a plurality of effects that can be a timer object, a display that suggests which effect is a timer effect may not be performed.

  In addition, in each of the effect modes described above and their other examples, prior to giving an operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, the operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. We decided to perform a specific operation-related presentation about whether it will be granted. However, prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the generation of the effect reception period), the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 It does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 (prior to the generation of the effect reception period). An effect pattern for performing a second precursor effect may appear. In the case of performing these omen effects (first omen effect, second omen effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for awarding benefits when a rendition appears, in order to enhance the fun of the game when a specific operation-related rendition is performed.

  Here, as an indication effect, for example, fog appears before an effect image (for example, the button image BTG) deceiving an operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which an operation opportunity is given appears. Display a specific image, such as expressing the appearance of entering. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image) that is difficult to view by overlapping the specific image. Then, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). It is possible to execute as an effect that makes it appear to be exposed. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursor effect will be described later.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) having different degrees of expectation for awarding a bonus (big hit), It is possible to have an interest as to which display mode the button image BTG appears in while the precursor image gradually developing the button image BTG is developed.

  It should be noted that a first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 It is important that each is executed as different production contents. In addition to the contents of the effects, it is desirable that the time required for the effects is different.

  Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the provision of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that it is a high-level concept that includes. As for the indication effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, as described below with reference to FIG. 253, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the sign effect is performed in any of these effect modes. Depending on whether or not the indication reception period that occurs in response to the indication effect has a length, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the indication effect is performed. It is more desirable to make it.

  FIG. 253 is a time chart for explaining an example of the contents of each effect for the effects when a plurality of types (the effect effects A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as the effect effects.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (predictive effect A), the predecessor effect A is started when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the precursor effect When A is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (precursor effect A), when precursor effect A is performed, the same time length is given regardless of which operation means is to be provided with the operation opportunity. The effect reception period (effective period) T1 that is held will occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign effect A (a character display such as “press”) or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effect (for example, FIG. 242 (d), (f) or 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. 249 (i), etc. are executed, and at the same time, the processing for ending the period T1 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (b) (precursor effect B1), when the second predetermined time has elapsed, not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The sign effect B1 is started. This precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation) When an operation opportunity is given to the means, it is not executed), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Is supposed to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as “Press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B1. Be done. Then, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, based on the effect reception, a predetermined operation effect different from the operation effect described above is executed At the same time, processing for ending the period T2 is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the sign effect B1 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (b). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). Thereby, it is suggested how long the production reception period generated corresponding to the precursor effect has a length depending on which mode (the precursor effect A and the precursor effect B1) was performed. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the precursor effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example (prediction effect B2) shown in FIG. 253 (c), the sign effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. Like the omen effect B1, this omen effect B2 is also executed prior to the operation when given an operation opportunity to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), not the “specific operation related effect”. (Which is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the omen effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from that of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the omen effect B1. Production reception period) T3 is generated.

  It should be noted that in this effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B2 (character display such as “press”) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period Is displayed. In addition, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an operation time effect different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect, the effect reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the accompaniment effect B2 is an effect reception period corresponding to the accompaniment effect A, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (c). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation related presentation with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed although the precursor effect B2 having a relatively low degree of expectation for awarding a bonus (big hit) is performed. Since it is suggested that the effect reception period (effective period) T3 with a length will be generated, the effect situation as if a specific operation related effect was performed will be produced, and the prognostic effect B2 is It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation regarding awarding of benefits differs between when the effect reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, for the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect mode appears until the intermediate timing after the start of the effect, and different effect modes appear after the timing elapses. For the operation means of the above, it may be possible to have an effect on which of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 and the effect reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such performance, and the timing of starting the presentation effects B1 and B2 is also started when a different time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The precursor effects B1 and B2 may have mutually different time lengths.

  On the other hand, in the example (predictive effect C) shown in FIG. 253 (d), the prelude effect C is started when the third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the precursor effect C When C is executed, an effect reception period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (precursor effect C), when the predictor effect C is performed, even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the same time length is obtained. The held production reception period (valid period) T4 occurs.

  Even during the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign production C (character display such as “press”) and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIGS. 242 (d), (f), 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. 249 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the sign effect C is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the “specific operation-related effect described above” Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T4 having the same length of time as in the case of the accompaniment effect A occurs, the game entertaining when the admonition effect C is performed is suitably maintained You will be able to

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 253, the effect reception period is associated with the types of precursor effects A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship with the length of the effect reception period (effective period). Indicated the length of (effective period). However, the effect reception period (the effective period (the effective period) can be set by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period (for example, effect reception period T2 or the like) having a predetermined length to be different for each type of precursor effect ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related production is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) that tricks the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imply the same state as that at the time of the specific operation means. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state of operating at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as a state of operating in the operation position in accordance with this, FIG. In the example shown in (h), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state at the operating position (strap state), but the sword decorative image SYG is also displayed as the state (strap state) operating at the operating position. It is done.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) which looks over as it is If a certain operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed, the width as the effect will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the effect, and the game interest will be lowered. I am concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) over the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) as described below with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255. With regard to BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram showing an example of effect of the content of the effect when the accompaniment effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect content of when the accompaniment effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 254 (a) to 254 (c) show the contents of an effect when a omen effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose that you are in a situation. Then, in the rendering situation, as shown in FIG. 254 (a), it does not correspond to the “specific operation related rendering” but corresponds to only the sword decorative body 5001 side among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Assuming that the admonition effect is performed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decorative body 5001 soon. In addition, in the omen effect (as in the omen effect in the other example as well), if the predetermined display corresponding to the operation means of the side to which the operation opportunity will be given soon will be made, the effect image over the operation means Does not have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decorative body 5001 since the sword decorative image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

  In the aura of effect shown in FIG. 254 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa covering a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and a sword decoration image SYGb covering a red ala with a relatively high degree of expectation Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect contents about which one of them is finally left in the display area appear. Therefore, in this rendering situation, although it can be recognized that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decorative body 5001 soon, the sword decorative image SYGa having a low degree of expectation as the sword decorative image SYG or an expectation of Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 254 (b) shows an effect result in which a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left. As a result, the sword decoration object 5001 is in an effect state with a relatively high expectation. It will be suggested that the production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as a sword decoration image SYGa). .

  FIG. 254 (c) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword ornament 5001 to operate (“push in” The character display such as "" and the bar display which shows the remaining time of an effect reception period are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the sword, but the sword decorative image SYGb is also extracted from the state of the sword according to this. The state is changed to the state. In addition, when the effect reception is made within the effect reception period, a predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of the sword Maintained. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) dressed as a sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracted state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) deceiving an operation means on the operation object side, and an operation means on the operation object side (here, a sword decoration body 5001), Are stopped at a predetermined position.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 254 (d) to (g) show the contents of effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose that you are in a situation. Then, in the rendering situation, as shown in FIG. 254 (d), assuming that the prognostic effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started, either of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to these.

  FIG. 254 (e) shows a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition as the "specific operation related rendition" has progressed and the rendition result has appeared. In this effect situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 as the effect result of the “specific operation-related effect”. It is done. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (e), a final effect indicating that the sword decorative image SYG is not changed to another effect image (such as a button image BTG) is displayed.

  FIG. 254 (f) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative object 5001 to be operated (“push in” "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state, and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the extracted state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the extracted state during the effect reception period (sword decoration image SYG). In contrast, the sword decorative body 5001 is configured to continuously perform the upward displacement slowly over the period until the presentation reception period ends, and is different from each other. I try to do it.

  In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decorative body 5001, the production reception is performed when an operation to the sword state is performed on the operation subject accessory 141. While a predetermined operation effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the state of the sword. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is provided for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 254 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is kept in the stop state during the effect reception period, and the sword decoration 5001 is operated continuously, but the invention is not limited thereto. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated so that the sword decorative body 5001 is stopped.

  As described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 254, in the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (c)) that occurs without passing through a specific operation-related effect, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG are While in the stopped state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (f)) generated after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is put in the stopped state. The other side is continued in a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation reception period for the operation button 410 is generated after a specific operation-related effect. While the button 410 itself is put into a stopped state, if the button image BTG with the operation button 410 turned over is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction thereof is continued, a specific operation-related presentation is performed. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs is greatly improved.

  Note that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red ala with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a prognostic effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a prediction effect is performed. That is, in this case, in a specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect of which one of the button image BTG with the operation button 410 turned up and the sword decoration image SYG with the sword decoration 5001 turned up appears When the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (the button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation Can be provided further. About this method, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also in each presentation aspect mentioned above other than the production example of FIG. 254, and those other examples.

  And when giving such two performances with respect to a specific operation-related effect, first, as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used. Whether it appears or is recognizable, and it is unknown whether or not the appearance of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image deceiving the operating means is outlined and only the outline is drawn. Make a recognizable display state etc.) appear by presentation progress. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is a high expectation (for example, the outline of the effect image over the operation means It is desirable that the state is released and the color can be confirmed, for example, to appear in sequence as the production progresses further. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after such effect development, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is a high expectation (for example, the operation means After canceling the outline state of the overturned effect image etc.), the button image BTG is further hidden and it is possible to recognize that the sword decorative image SYG appears as an effect result of the specific operation related effect To an unknown state (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined and only the outline can be recognized) whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is high. In addition, an effect pattern may be generated to cause the effect to further advance. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG) To make it possible to confirm the color. In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), the display mode on the side where the expectation is low (for example, blue) is more However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

  FIGS. 255 (a) to 255 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 254 (d) to 254 (g) as effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a prognostic effect. That is, in FIG. 255 (a), a pro-end effect as “specific operation-related effect” is started, but the pro-end effect holds a shield (button image BTG) in which the operation button 410 is turned over. The second character (the effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) that holds the first character (the effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and the sword (the sword decoration image SYG) that looks over the sword decoration 5001 Of the character is displayed, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am doing so.

  FIG. 255 (b) is in a rendering situation in which the rendering result of the prognostic rendering as “specific operation related rendering” is appearing. In this production situation, the first character (production image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and the second character (sword decoration) is displayed. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 255 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 251 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is in a non-display state). While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (a confrontation between the characters) and the other background image (the portion that has been displayed before the start of the specific operation-related effect) The effect image (display image shown in FIG. 255 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  255 (c) to (e) show examples of effects when an effect reception period occurs for the sword ornament 5001, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 255 (c). In addition, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative body 5001 to be operated (a character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 255 (c), when the production reception period occurs, the sword ornament 5001 starts to move from the sword state to the sword state, As shown in FIG. 255 (d), the sword ornament 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword state to the sword state only after a relatively short period of time has elapsed since the start of the production reception period. It is supposed to be. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 255 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the sword state until at least the presentation reception period ends, and the player It will wait for the operation (operation from the cutting state to the cutting state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 255 (c) to (e), the movement of the sword decorative body 5001 (movement in the linear direction) is completely different from the movement (rotation in the rotation direction). In the draw-down operation, the second character swings down on the sword decoration image SYG, and the sword decoration image SYG continues continuously even after the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the sword cutting state. It is supposed to work. The sword decoration image SYG according to this production example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) within the production reception period. It is designed to be repeated by the process.

  However, even if this loop process is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by this, and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the passage of time. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 also enters the sword state while a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) is performed. However, even if loop processing is performed, it will be maintained as it is without being affected. In addition, when the operation to the operation subject character 141 is performed to the operation object role 141 within the effect reception period, the effect is received, and a predetermined operation time effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the above The loop processing is ended, the sword decorative image SYG is hidden, and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the state of the sword. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the aura effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG operate within the effect reception period, but The operation modes (operations for accurately transmitting the current situation (operations for moving to the operating position) and loop operations provided for rendering) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is ended. Even after that, the sword decorative image SYG is allowed to continue without ending its operation. Thereby, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) occurring after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect continues until after the effect reception period occurs ((255)) It is possible to expand the range of the effects such as making the background continuous and possible to execute, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255, the contents of the effect (display where the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 255 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is performed. The effects (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the background image and the background image are executed. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the special image (full moon) is displayed, and the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) are different. Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), it is possible to improve the performance during the presentation reception period. In this sense, also in the sign effect, it is possible to perform the effect using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) that tricks the operating means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to further improve the performance by providing a direct connection between them. The dedicated background (full moon) may have a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for awarding a benefit, and may be displayed by any of these display modes.

  In the aura of production as a specific operation-related production, and in the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as the production, and depending on which one of the production modes appears, the production reception You may be made to suggest whether a mode with a high expectation appears as an operation time production when a production reception is made in a period. You may make it suggest the expectation degree concerning privilege provision using the background image which appears when a precursor effect is performed.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255, when a pro-end effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect is received in a form that changes both the contents of the effect and the background image that were appearing in the pre-effect effect. Although it was decided to execute an effect within the period, the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect (with respect to a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means (or in a specific operation form among a plurality of operation forms) ) When a dedicated antecedent effect when an operation opportunity is given) is being performed, when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the adjective effect An effect may be executed. The point is that "an operation-related effect (precursor effect) can be generated for the operation with respect to the operation means, and as the operation-related effect (precursor effect), an operation for the first effect is accepted by the player's operation. At least generation of an operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect on a second effect different from the first effect is accepted by an operation by a player can be generated, and displayed in the first operation-related effect The first operation promotion image is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation promotion image has not been displayed yet is displayed. The second operation promotion image displayed in the effect is displayed in accordance with changing the background image when the second operation promotion image is not yet displayed to another background image. " As long as it was Tsu. Here, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image may not be the same image. For example, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, the gauge display, or “press!” Or “put the sword! It is possible to appropriately adopt a comment display such as “”. The “first effect” and the “second effect” may also be different post-operation effects. For example, the “first operation-related effect for which an effect regarding the first effect is received” It is possible to illustrate as an effect about which mode appears as a speech advance notice when the game is played, and as the "second operation related effect for which the effect for the second effect is received", the effect is received. It can be illustrated as an effect as to whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates at the same time. Under the present circumstances, even if it is a case when any mode appears as a conversation notice, the effect design is designed such that the ratio (including 100%) in which the big hit symbol appears is higher when the specific decoration member SDY is operated. It is desirable to do. In addition, with regard to “the second operation related effect in which the effect reception for the second effect is received”, refer to FIG. 178, FIG. 390 to FIG. 393, FIG. 395 to FIG. 398, FIG. It may be executed as any of operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression) described later. On the other hand, the “first operation-related effect in which the effect regarding the first effect is received” is an operation reception effect (BGM non-suppressed) described later with reference to FIG. 394, FIG. 400, FIG. 402, FIG. May be executed as one of the operation reception effects). In addition, each of the other examples of the operation reception effects described later may be appropriately adopted. In addition, the background image does not necessarily have to be a still image, and may be displayed as a moving image showing how a river flows or characters are fighting each other. Such display of a still image or a range in which a moving image is projected is displayed in a sliding manner (displayed in a manner in which coordinates move) is also included. That is, it can be said that the background image is "continuously displayed" if it is displayed in chronological order or in a coordinate connection with the depiction content being projected. On the other hand, “changing the background image to another background image” does not necessarily have to be displayed by another image data or another layer. For example, the background image itself is a time series or coordinates. There are also images that are suddenly changed or replaced (switched) to "an image having a different form (dedicated background image corresponding to the effect reception period)" that is not connected in a practical manner. In addition, it includes those which are changed to "black image" and those which are replaced (switched). That is, if there is no connection in terms of depiction contents before and after time change and also in time coordinate, it can be said that "the background image is changed to another background image". In order to make it easier to recognize that a change has occurred in the background image in this manner, an effect image (blackout, whiteout, etc.) for hiding the background image that has been displayed up to that point is displayed on the effect display device 1600. More preferably, the display area is displayed over an area (more preferably, substantially the entire area) at least half the area of the display area so that the second operation promotion image is displayed together with the new background image after the display. The first operation related effect and the second operation related effect may be sequentially displayed in one variation pattern. As described above, the timing for changing the background image to another background image may be before the production reception period occurs, or the generation of the production reception period including the timing at which the production reception period occurs. The timing may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 255 (b) may be omitted, and effects may be advanced from FIG. 255 (a) to FIG. 255 (c)).

  In the production example shown in FIG. 255, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 that was started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation). The operation carried out may be completed before the effect reception period occurs), and thereafter the stopped state may be maintained.

  Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001), a display for changing the background image when the effect reception period occurs, and a change of the background image In some cases, there may be a case in which no display is made. Then, in this case, if display is performed to change the background image when the effect reception period occurs, the degree of expectation regarding benefit provision is higher than when display is not performed to change the background image when the effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to make it.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When the effect reception is made, the specific decoration member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an effect at the time of operation based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 242 (d), FIG. 244 (e), and FIG. 245 (h), the sword decorative body 5001 (or the operation button as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side) By also operating 410), it is intended to improve the effect of the operation-related effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed depends on the result of the effect. As a result, a state of success when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While the production situation at the time of failure where both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the production-time production (for example, a specific production-related production) In the operation effect after the sign effect that is not the operation related effect), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side according to the result of the effect If there is a successful production situation that only works, game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described each production mode and specific operation-related productions according to other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the production, the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the production. As a result, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher. In this respect, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the button in the mode (specific effect mode) to which the princess character is added. The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for giving a privilege than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related effect If it is made high, it will become possible to maintain suitably the game entertainment at the time of the button image BTG being displayed as an effect result of a specific operation related effect.

  In addition, the mode (specific rendering mode) in which the princess character is displayed may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG, as shown in FIG. 256 (b). In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the expectation for awarding a privilege is higher than when it is displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 256 (a) and a second effect pattern (FIG. 256 (b) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of the specific operation related effect being performed. )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, when the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect, the expectation level related to the privilege grant is set to be the same when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG and the sword can be provided, as well as providing an interest as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect. Regardless of which one of the decorative images SYG appears, it is possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific production mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 256 (c), when the effect result of a specific operation-related effect (which one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared in the specific effect mode This may be displayed in advance (for example, during the production of a specific operation-related effect). According to such a configuration, the specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed even though the specific operation related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed. ) Appears, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same expectation). That is, in this case, since the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it may be said that "precursor effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide an effect with a completely different meaning.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and the other examples of the sword decorative body 5001 is such that the sword part (the pattern part 5012 and the blade part 5011) can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 212, the second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decorative body 5001 is operable in the lateral direction. It is provided to have an aspect (second operation aspect) as well. Therefore, in each of the above-described production modes, and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. The above-mentioned specific operation related presentation may be performed as a presentation about. The sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are both supported by a single body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be operable (operable), and Even if one side of the sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). It is formed.

  However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a manner, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears. Since there is no change, there is a concern that an operation error is likely to occur on the player side. In particular, even in the case of giving an operation opportunity to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, a rendering image (and its In the case where the instruction display for prompting the operation is displayed, there is a further concern that the player side may cause an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. That is, in this case, while the remaining time of the effect reception period gradually decreases, let the player first perform the operation of correcting the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. If the production reception period ends before the production is accepted even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  Further, in the sword decorative body 5001, there are an aspect such as “movement in the vertical direction” by the sword part and an aspect such as “movement in the lateral direction” by the sheath part. In the operation unit capable of providing an aspect, if an operation on the wrong side is performed when an operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform an operation on the appropriate side, and the effect reception period ends. Risk of loss of operation opportunities.

  Therefore, when the specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect on whether an operation opportunity according to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the production reception is performed properly and the production during operation corresponding to the production reception is executed.

  FIGS. 257 and 258 show an example of effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  In FIG. 257 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of the number of reservations being 0 The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 257 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect has been started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 257 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b), a first effect that surpasses the first operation mode for operating the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 from the scout state to the scout state An image OX and a second effect image TX in which the second operation mode for operating to move the sheath portion of the sword decorative body 5001 in the lateral direction is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time, and it is suggested that an operation opportunity according to any of these operation modes will soon be accepted. In this respect, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion of the sword decoration 5001 that looks over the sword region is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX In both effect images TX, the sword site is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 257 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b) progresses, and the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and the second corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect is made to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect reception period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect reception period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 257 (c), when the first effect image OX is left to be dominant, a display such as "press-in" is visible. Thus, the display such as “slide” is made visible when the situation becomes dominant while the second effect image TX is left. The details of the operation content can be easily recognized in accordance with the state of the effect. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that they may be mistakenly recognized as prompting the operation at the timing at which the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 257 (d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 257 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. A presentation depicting the situation left behind is being performed (the first presentation result). When progressing to this effect content, even when the operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY) does not occur, and in the first operation mode When the operation is performed, the effect reception is made, and a specific operation effect (a movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY, etc.) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

  In other words, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 257 (d), an effect reception period related to a specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as “push”) and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display will be displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword state to the sword state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 258 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (incorrect operation) by the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. The production situation when performed by the player is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, even in the case where the effect reception period regarding the specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side among the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of operation mode 2 itself is made effective. When the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player. (Here, “You can leave it as is”).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 258 (f), the content of such specific notification is changed over time so that the player can regain calmness (here, “settled and pushed in”). It is supposed to be. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, since it becomes possible to sequentially notify in short words, it is preferable even if the player side is in a panic state. It will be expected to suppress. As a result, even if an operation by the first operation mode is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player can appropriately receive the effect. You will be able to make them aware.

  In FIG. 258 (g), the operation on the appropriate side (first operation mode) is performed while the rendering status in FIG. 258 (e) or FIG. 258 (f) (rendering acceptance period in erroneous operation state) As a result, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect according to the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decorative body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operating state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is not corrected and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even when the game is performed from the state (the operation error state), the effect reception is properly made, so that the decrease in the game entertainment when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, notification is made that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to perform detailed notification for the purpose of (should). In other words, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player is in a panic, so it may be counterproductive to report complex contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received is not a message display but an effect or sound only notification. It is desirable to perform simple notifications such as. In this case, although there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that an operation error has been made, a special situation is confirmed that a specific notification is performed and no effect at the time of operation is performed based on the operation being performed. It can be said that it is possible to expect to switch the operation to the appropriate operation.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (in particular, an elderly player or the like), it may be assumed that a situation may occur in which an operation is mistakenly performed before the generation reception period of the specific operation related effects occurs. For example, when an operation (for example, lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed on the second operation portion although the operation instruction for the second operation portion (for example, the sheath portion) is not made. It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which an effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the side of the operation unit (for example, sword part) of the case, and also in this case, There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize what is good.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation part (sword part) or the second operation part (sheath part) is performed, Although the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the operation unit side 2 (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit Even when an operation on is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is accepted. This specific notification may be “message display indicating that it is only necessary to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state”. Alternatively, simple notification such as an effect or notification only by sound may be used. In any case, by checking a special situation in which a specific notification is given based on the operation and no effect during the operation is performed, the operation is performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect to get a chance to go.

  In this case, for example, while the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being performed (the sword decorative body 5001 is moved in the left direction), for example, the first operation unit (for example, A state (sword decoration body) in which an operation on a second operation unit (for example, a sheath portion) is performed even when the effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the side of the sword portion) When the first operation unit (for example, sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state where 5001 has moved leftward, the effect reception is made and the above-mentioned operation effect according to the operation is performed It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the production reception period occurs, and the production reception is generated while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period, even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, the stage reception will be made properly, so the operation error will occur before the stage reception period occurs. Even when a game occurs, the decline in gaming interest is suppressed.

  However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding whether the operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of information, information will be mixed with the information (indication indication, etc.) notified within the production reception period, and the player will be more confused There is a concern Therefore, in the period until the production result is displayed when the production result that suggests that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is the final production-related production that is displayed. The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is not displayed. Even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, there is a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed, and the first period and the second period are sequentially followed by the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described effect example, when performing the specific notification, the degree of expectation for giving the benefit may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself is changed to any of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. 222) The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 1 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. In this respect, after the specific operation related rendition is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed to any of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it make it. Alternatively, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), or a sword decoration 5001 The sword decoration image SYG is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001 (step 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 222). It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to have any interest in checking the sword decoration image SYG. In addition, the rendering performance when in the rendering reception period becomes poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a mode different from that of the sword decoration 5001 at that time. It is desirable to secure the stage effect when it is in the stage for accepting stage effects.

  At this time, the aspect expressed by the sword decoration image SYG has a higher expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the stage performance during the stage reception period can be improved. It is desirable for ensuring it suitably. For example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Display it. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it can be understood that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decorative image SYG. As a result, the amusement of the game when being in the effect reception period is suitably maintained.

  In order to obtain such effects, the number of effect modes on the sword decoration image SYG side may be larger than the number of effect modes on the sword decoration 5001 side. The number of performance modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side may be one. Further, when preparing a plurality of effect modes as the sword decorative body 5001, the form may not necessarily be changed as the effect modes.

  However, if the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG are simply made to differ in this manner, some players may have an unpleasant feeling that false display is made. There is concern that this may reduce the interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, as a mode of sword decoration image SYG, a special mode different from any of the modes prepared as a mode of sword decoration 5001 (here, stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 222). Are prepared, and when the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword are displayed by displaying the sword decorative image SYG in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the external appearance is changed by further deforming and uniting the sword decorative image SYG, or the sword decorative body 5001 operates in a mode not appearing or the sword decorative body 5001 It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, since it is in the form of realizing a stylistic expression that is difficult on the structure of the sword decorative body 5001 by the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to suppress anxiety that the display is false. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by providing performance beyond the imagination of the player when viewing the structure of the sword ornament 5001.

  Even when the sword decorative image SYG is given a special mode in this way, the sword decorative image SYG is provided for each mode (here, shown in FIG. 222) prepared as the mode of the sword decorative body 5001. It is desirable to be able to perform display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. That is, in this case, basically, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration image SYG is only displayed when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. In addition, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable that it is suggested that the degree of expectation for giving a privilege is higher than that when displayed in another mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Further, as to the method of enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. You may make it apply.

  For example, if it is now in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 226 (X1), as the next rendering progress destination, in addition to the rendering situation shown in FIG. 226 (X2), to the rendering situation shown in FIG. A production pattern for production development is prepared. Then, when the effect is advanced to the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1) described above. A continuous image (image with samurai's eyes closed) showing that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second state of extraction is in the state of insertion while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 259 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-run variation) by displaying the pseudo run-off symbol of the embodiment.

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the fourth pseudo run variation (re-variation) in the pseudo run figure displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although a sword image showing (special mode) is displayed, this special mode is such that it can appear only in a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) in which a sword decoration 5001 has been crawled in the display area. The body 5001 itself cannot change. The special mode according to this production example is a mode in which the sheath part is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) obtained by looking over the sword decoration 5001 in the display area is changed to the special mode, the sword decoration 5001 is in the stage 3 form. The state is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword.

  After that, an operation effective period for generating the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and at the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second state in which the sword is in the second state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decorative image SYG) in which the sword decorative body 5001 in a special mode is crawled is displayed. An image (displayed with a bar) indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with a message of "Please put a sword!" (FIG. 259 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 259 (e), when the player's operation is detected in the operation effective period, the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is made according to the set effect pattern. While the expectation degree notification effect is performed, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is operated within the symbol variation. The first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation decoration is not given to the sword decorative body 5001 can be performed. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third sign that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Production (specific operation-related production) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as different contents of the effects, but as the contents of the effects, for example,
-Before the effect image deceiving the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, a specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion where the effect image appears,
Thereafter, an effect image is displayed in which the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is overlooked, at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize the specific image.
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first sign effect, a display effect by “cloud effect” is performed as the specific image (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image that tricks the operation means). Display effect by "effect" (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image that tricks the operation means, and in the third sign effect, the display effect by the "water effect" as the specific image (the effect image that tricks the operation means) It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by changing the type of the specific image, such as performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize. When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the first precursor effect is being performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decorative body 5001, and the “water effect” When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third warning effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed. Will be

  Then, when performing omen effects (at least one of the first omen effects, the second omen effects, and the third omen effects) with such effects, the effect image which surpasses the operation means by the specific image is It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to view. When such a configuration is applied to any of the first antecedent effect and the second antecedent effect, the effect image over the operation means has a low expectation and a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) An operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the display mode (for example, blue) is not certain, so that the effect during the effect reception period is given. It will be possible to improve the In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where it can not be held, it is possible to improve the rendering when it is in the effect reception period.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the first antecedent effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 261 shows an example of an effect when the first anticipation effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 260 and FIG. 261, an example of effect when the first anticipation effect is performed will be described, but for this effect example, not the first anticipation effect but a second anticipation effect or a third It is also possible to apply to omen effects.

  In FIG. 260 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of holding number 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 260 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first precursor effect has been produced during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 260 (a).

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260B, the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such “cloud effect” is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display after the start of the effect at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 261 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased). Or to reduce the area in which a specific image is displayed.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 261, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set at the timing t <b> 2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display. A button image BTG in which the operation button 410 is turned off and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed as they occur. FIG. 260 (c)).

  In this presentation example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, the second display mode) , And blue), the ratio at which the effect at the time of operation is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the effect state shown in FIG. 260 (c), the “cloud effect” cannot be confident that the button image BTG is displayed in either the first display mode or the second display mode. Even though the operation button 410 is operated, the effect is accepted when the operation is performed on the operation button 410, and the effect at the time of operation according to the effect acceptance is performed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, since the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the effect content is switched from such a omen effect, the button image BTG has a first display mode and It becomes possible to advance the rendition without being sure of which of the two display modes.

  Further, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), it is not possible to be sure that the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to indicate that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. 260 (c) has occurred, the “cloud effect” is performed while the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 260 (d)). In such a situation, the operation of the operation button 410 can be performed while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. In other words, in this case, the operation time effect is executed in the form in which the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (d).

  According to such a configuration, during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), a period until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden from being displayed (timing t2 to t3) after the button image BTG is displayed. ), It is possible to provide performance by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that, in order to enhance the stage performance during the stage reception period (timing t2 to t4) throughout the period, the period during which the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform effect display that is not performed during the period from the timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as “press” is displayed, but for example, at a timing t2 to t3. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period in the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) is more preferably improved. Will be able to

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260, the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 and the button image BTG with the operation button 410 turned over are simultaneously displayed (when the effect reception period occurs), The button image BTG with the operation button 410 turned off may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize appears first, and after the predetermined time, the effect situation is difficult to visually recognize. Until the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in a rendering situation where the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize before the rendering reception period occurs, a rendering pattern in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor In the case of the effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG may be made to appear. According to such a configuration, as the button image BTG is in a production situation that is difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to provide fun that makes the value of gazing at the button image BTG higher. It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 is affected by the “cloud effect”. We decided to display it so that its visibility would be maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 may also be made difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 under the influence of the "cloud effect". That is, in this case, it is possible for the player to have a conflict as to whether or not the operation button 410 should be operated without certainty of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect reception period can not be grasped well. It will be able to provide unprecedented new stage effects.

  Also, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 260, the “acceptance sound” described above or described later may be output. In this case, the “acceptable sound” is output from the time when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the “cloud effect”.

  In addition, in the case of outputting such “acceptable sound” in any of a plurality of modes different from the expectation (the ratio that the big hit symbol appears and includes “0” and “100”), the button image BTG It becomes possible to properly recognize the degree of expectation before the whole appears, and it is expected to improve the game interest.

  When the effect acceptance (operation) is performed in the state where the "acceptable sound" is output, it is desirable to not output the "acceptable sound" in the output state at that time. In addition, as for the "acceptable sound", each configuration described above or described later may be adopted appropriately.

  The "cloud effect" may be transparent, in which case the button image will be faintly visible behind it, but even with this configuration the visibility remains .

  The “cloud effect” itself may be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (the ratio at which a jackpot symbol appears, including “0” and “100”). In this case, although it functions to make it difficult to visually recognize the operation button 410, when the high expectation level is suggested, the game entertainment is improved.

  Before the "cloud effect" is displayed and completely hidden, the following rendering method to make a specific effect sound (BGM) be in the output state in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state is It may be adopted. The specific effect sound (BGM) that has been put into the output mode in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state in this way is also triggered by the output by the player in the non-inhibited state even when it is operated. It will not be returned.

  In addition, in the case of applying such an effect to any of the first antecedent effect, the second antecedent effect, and the third antecedent effect, the effect image that surpasses the operation means after the antecedent effect is started is clear Even if the length of time until the visual recognition is made visible (time until the specific image is made non-displayed) is different from each other, the effect image becomes clear after the effect image is displayed over the operation means It is desirable to set the time until it is made visible to the time (time until the specific image is made non-display) to be the same time as each other. In addition, when applying such an effect to any one of the first omen effects, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, such an effect that surpasses the operation means after the antecedent effect is started. With regard to the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is not displayed), a plurality of these are prepared to give a plurality of renditions with different degrees of expectation However, the time from the display of the effect image over the operation means to the clear display of the effect image (the time until the specific image is not displayed) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

  Moreover, it is not necessary to necessarily use another image (specific image) as a method of making it hard to visually recognize the effect image over the operation means. For example, an effect image that looks like an operating device is caused to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to visually recognize due to a change in the transmittance of the effect image itself. May be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image over the operation means appears in the display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be timing before the timing t2, and in this case, appearing in such a display mode is itself May be performed as a prelude effect, or a display image that deceives the operating means is displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize while performing a different display as the predecessor effect. Also good.

  Moreover, when the specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment is being executed, the specific operation state effect described later with reference to FIGS. May be executed only when the occurrence of. That is, at the time when the production of the specific operation-related effect is started, it is concealed which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. Since an effect reception period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, if there is a case in which it is delayed to determine which of the plurality of operation means should be operated, rather than being operated by the player It may be possible that the presentation reception period will end before all the remaining time is consumed. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is occurring, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, the player's operation on the operation means on the operation target side and the automatic effect function Since the production is accepted by any of the above and the post-operation production is always executed, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related production is performed.

[Automatic button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the automatic button effect state is controlled. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, Even if the player's operation is not accepted for the production, the processing (automatic production function) that causes the same change to the production as when the player's operation is accepted within the production acceptance period can be executed. Yes. According to such an automatic button effect state, a post-operation effect is generated when an operation is performed, without being operated every time an effect acceptance period occurs, thereby suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate it. Will be able to. As for the automatic production function, when this function is activated, the same production reception is performed as when the operation was actually performed, so that processing corresponding to the production reception may be performed, or the production reception is generated. The same processing as when there was an acceptance of production may be performed.

  In the embodiment relating to the “automatic effect function” described below, each technique, effect, setting, and the like of the operation relationship described above may be appropriately combined and used, or may be used in place of being replaced.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during a period in which the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. It is made to be able to set to the production state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is selected and the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When “automatic button effect state setting” is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or may be operated a plurality of times in combination with an operation with respect to the operation button 410 and an operation with a different operation means.

  On the other hand, while the symbol variation is in the execution state, setting to the automatic button effect state can be made by only one operation of the operation button 410, and such operation is simplified. It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the effect progress during the pattern change. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred, and if such a person does, the operation button 410 If there is a case where the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game entertainment may be lowered. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation state of the operation button 410 is set to a predetermined time (in order to set the automatic button effect state while the symbol variation is in the execution state). In this case, it is required to be operated once in a mode (so-called “long press mode”) maintained for 2 seconds. As a result, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is positively performed regardless of whether or not the effective period has occurred, the automatic button effect state is entered. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a mistaken setting. It should be noted that it is desirable not to be set to the automatic button effect state even if the operation is performed in the long press mode when at least the effect reception period has occurred during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is also used as a method for canceling the setting in the state where the automatic button effect state is set. Different operation modes are required between the displayed period and the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  That is, while the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not yet executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation unit different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation unit different from the operation button 410). When "cancel button status of automatic button effect" displayed in the inside is selected, setting of the button status effect of automatic button is canceled.

  On the other hand, while the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. By such operation simplification, It is made possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state while maintaining the gaze on the effect development during the symbol change. However, unlike when setting to the automatic button effect state, even if the operation state with respect to the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long press), the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state. The automatic button effect state is set to be released only by detecting the event (only when operated in a single operation mode). That is, if any operation is performed on the operation button 410, it can be said that the desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears. By releasing the setting and quickly returning to the normal rendering state, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001 or the like) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 or the like is set) Even if an operation by the player (operation on the sword ornament 5001) is not accepted within the production reception period, an operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received during the production reception period. It is possible to execute processing (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the presentation is received. According to such a configuration, a period in which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs, or another operation means (for example, When the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) regarding whether a period during which an operation on the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted is generated, the effect result Even if any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate, so that such a specific operation-related effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When no operation on the first operation means is performed within the first side effect reception period, an automatic process can be performed which causes the same change as that when the operation on the first operation means is performed. Yes (first automatic presentation means),
-The second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) of the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target when being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When it occurs, when an operation on the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process is performed that causes the same change as that when the operation on the second operation means is performed. Possible (second automatic presentation means)
Even if any of the first-side effect reception period and the second-side effect reception period occurs, the first specific effect reception period and the second side effect reception period occur, and the same specific time elapses after the period occurs. Automatic processing by one automatic presentation means or automatic processing by a second automatic presentation means is made executable.

  According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), the first side production reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is the operation target. The automatic production function can function when the same specific time has passed since the occurrence of any of the second side production acceptance periods set as Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

  However, when the first side production reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred. When the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed and when the time different from the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect receiving period has occurred, the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed. As is the case, the effect may be developed within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, when it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side rendering acceptance period, a timing different from this is assumed. Since the effect is accepted and the effect is automatically generated after the operation, it can be functioned as a surprise effect.

  In addition, when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol fluctuation period than when it is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) The ratio at which the effect reception period is generated may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period is increased, so that the frequency of forgetting operation within the production reception period is also increased. Since the post-operation production is executed by the function functioning, the production reception period can be generated at a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment due to frequent forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the generation ratio of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the generation ratio is different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production acceptance conditions are satisfied within the production acceptance period, the post-operation production can be executed (post-operation production execution means),
A process for establishing the condition for receiving the presentation based on the operation performed by the player within the period for receiving the presentation is executable (player operation receiving means),
When the player does not perform an operation within the production reception period, a process for establishing the production reception condition can be executed without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means )
However, the specific timing within the production reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period elapses after the production reception period starts. To do. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player himself to operate until the automatic performance function is functioned, and the option for causing the reception of the performance by the operation of the player is left. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In this case, when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period, an automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed, and a specific time after the first-side effect reception period occurs. When the progress of the presentation within the symbol variation is performed such that the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means may be executed when a time different from the above has elapsed, the “specific time” or the “specific time” Any time different from the above may be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side effect reception period.

  Here, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, and the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period, A process of generating an effect after the operation according to the effect reception is to be executed. However, in this case, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

  Also, similarly, during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period for the operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect acceptance Even when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted within the period, a process of generating an effect after the operation according to the effect reception and a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are respectively executed. Is desirable. Also in this case, as for “post production after operation according to production reception”, a production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs during a period when the automatic button production state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the production reception period. This is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when an operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire (specific effect) to be returned to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation. A desire to end the situation). Such aspiration often occurs when an effect reception period for giving an operation opportunity to the player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the period It is difficult to perform both an operation for terminating a specific rendering state and an operation for accepting an operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease. In this respect, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period regarding the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button to which the operation opportunity is given within the effect reception period A process that can cause a change in processing for terminating the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) and rendering only by performing the operation on the 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 only once (operating only in a single operation mode) Since (the processing to execute the effect after operation) is performed respectively, the desire to make the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) end and progress the effect depending on the player's own operation is accepted Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the production state.

  However, regarding the setting change (setting change to the automatic button effect state or cancellation of the automatic button effect state setting) for the automatic button effect state during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed (the state where the symbol variation is not executed) The setting can be changed without the need to operate the sword decoration 5001. That is, the sword decorative body 5001 has a frequency of giving the operation opportunity lower than that of the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that much, the big hit is expected than the operation button 410 The degree will be increased. Therefore, the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted for the purpose of only setting change in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), whereby an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to enhance the sense of premium at the time of play and maintain the game interest. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means (operation buttons other than the sword decorative body 5001) among the plurality of operation means is displayed while the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. Setting or canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state can be performed by operating the operation unit 410 or the like or another operation means different from this a plurality of times.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is not necessary, and the automatic button effect state is obtained. The setting can be changed. That is, as described above, when the operation button 410 is operated once in the “long press mode”, the automatic button effect state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. For the purpose, the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting relating to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 refers to the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. It is limited to the case where an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding thereto appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword ornament 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. It becomes like this.

  The plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes “automatic operation that generates an operation-time effect without operation within the effect reception period” when in an automatic button effect state. In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be the target of the “production function”, the special operation means that are not the target of the “automatic production function that generates the production effect during operation without operation within the production reception period” May be further included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and if an operation for the special operation means is received within the effect reception period, After the operation according to the effect receptionist, the expectation for the big hit will be suggested by the effect. However, even if there is a situation in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted will appear if the operation for the special operation means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but if it is an effect different from that when the effect is received, it may be made to appear.

  Moreover, about the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long press), the effect reception period with respect to the operation button 410 has occurred in the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state Not only when, but the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 (when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, the effect reception period during which the expectation degree is suggested, or when the special operation means is operated, the expectation degree is suggested It is desirable not to allow this even when there is an effect reception period, etc.). That is, when the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode) when within the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 In the middle stage of the effect reception period, "the automatic effect function to generate the effect at the time of operation even without operation in the effect reception period" is activated by activating the original effect reception (operating the operation means different from the operation button 410 If the player who is not familiar with such an automatic button effect state occurs, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 may have occurred, or the operation button 410 may have occurred. It may be confusing that there has been an effect reception period for the operation means different from the one described above, and this may reduce the game interest This is because that is just in case.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the warning effect prior to the generation of the effect reception period, but control is performed in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when not being performed, and a sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) May be implemented as a different display mode. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize in advance whether the automatic rendering function is in a rendering state in which the automatic rendering function can function within the specific rendering reception period, and it is possible to enjoy the rendering with confidence.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed in the effect receiving period. However, when the production reception period occurs, at least the specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed so that the specific image is directed toward the specific area where the specific image is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image where lightning falls toward the specific region) may be displayed (a sign effect) outside the region. In other words, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, the movement of the production image different from the specific image is confirmed, and the “specific image suggesting the remaining time” in a non-display state will be watched. , It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific presentation acceptance period ends without the player's operation in time, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player, but the results of the jackpot determination including the following explanation examples are included. Based on the progress of the game or the effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which state setting and setting cancellation may be performed in accordance with the progress of the game or production, for example, “While being controlled in the normal gaming state, it is controlled as an automatic button presentation state, but the big hit gaming state Control mode such as “Auto button effect state is canceled when transitioned to high probability short-time state” or “Auto button effect state is generated within the symbol variation execution period, and symbol variation in the execution state is completed Control mode such as “Generate an effect pattern to be released when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence” or “Generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol variations are performed” It is possible to adopt a mode such as a control mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 that is always controlled to the automatic button effect state may be used. In this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled and the automatic button effect state is not set. Such a process itself is eliminated.

  Further, as the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions, the remaining time of the rendering reception period may be digested, or a predetermined timing after that may be taken, or the remaining time of the rendering reception period is left It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the predetermined timing after the remaining time of the effect reception period is digested, or after that, the post-operation effect is as if the effect reception was made after the effect reception period is over. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the effect reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions similarly to the case where the operation is actually performed. At the time (specific timing), the effect reception period is ended, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation production will occur even if no operation is performed when the automatic button production state is controlled, the period until the production reception period ends (production reception It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic rendering function function at a specific timing in a period) and to start the post-operation rendering according to this. In other words, in this case, when the above-described automatic performance function does not function despite the arrival of a specific timing within the performance reception period, a post-operation effect is generated by the player operating after the specific timing has arrived. Anxiety when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, “If the automatic button effect state is not controlled, it is erroneously controlled. It may be difficult to confirm the presentation after the operation ”or“ The automatic presentation function may not work due to some trouble and the presentation may not be confirmed after the operation ”). You will be able to

  And in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, it has a characteristic technique relevant to such an automatic button production state. In the following, characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-described effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. You may make it use combining suitably.

  In the following description of each characteristic technique, it is assumed that, in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not usually controlled. Even when an effect reception period that can occur also occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that can be performed only when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, If a specific effective period related to this occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. You may According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) (i.e., to improve the effect by permitting the generation of a specific display effect). From the beginning, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, there may be cases where the automatic effect function can not function in another effect reception period set when a specific display effect is not being performed. However, in the specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, it becomes possible to taste the VIP feeling by the fact that the time and effort to operate can be saved by the automatic effect function functioning. Therefore, it is expected to suitably enhance the game interest. In addition, it is not necessary that the automatic rendering function can not always function in all of the other rendering reception periods set when the specific display rendering is not performed, and the automatic rendering is performed in at least some of the rendering reception periods. If the function can not function, the above-mentioned operation and effect when the specific effective period occurs while the specific display effect is being performed (when the effect acceptance period where the automatic effect function always functions) occur It is possible to expect. Also, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if the player does not perform an operation before the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is made to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start rendering after operation according to this.

In addition, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the big hit determination,
-If the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect will occur at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the first specific effective period has occurred. While the function is activated to end the first specific effective period and generate a post-operation effect according to this,
If a second specific effective period occurs when the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific effective period occurs The above-described automatic performance function functions at the timing when elapses to end the second specific effective period and generate a post-operation performance in accordance with this,
When the third specific effective period occurs when the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is controlled despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the operation is finished, each processing such as preventing the same post-operation effect from appearing when the operation is performed may be performed in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even when the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs while being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is generated from the time when the effect reception period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions when the predetermined time has passed, or the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function unless the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time Even if the production reception period ends, the automatic production function described above cannot be performed in the first place. Therefore, even when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs. When the above-described automatic rendering function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, for example, when the second predetermined time has elapsed It is possible to make the presentation progress with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic presentation function is functioning or whether the above-described automatic presentation function does not function in the first place. The first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operation state (so-called The effect is accepted after the single-shot operation is performed and the effect is generated after the operation.

  In addition, about the 1st specific display production, the 2nd specific display production, and the 3rd specific display production, when it is controlled to the specific production state (automatic button production state) with being something which can be done There may be. Thus, when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that can not appear when not being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) may be displayed. In such a case, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). In addition, the first specific display effect (the first specific effective period) and the second specific display effect (the second specific effective period) are prepared, and the third specific display effect (the third specific effective period) Does not necessarily have to be prepared. In addition, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may be different from each other.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, at which timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function worked (when the effect is accepted, as the effect acceptance period The automatic presentation function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (the area changes in this case) over time) that shows the remaining time of the production reception available period so that it can be recognized. You may make it generate | occur | produce the post-operation production in the state which displayed this instead of making it non-display. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the “bar display” that is continuously displayed when the automatic performance function functions, the production reception period is set to the first specific effective period ( The period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period has occurred, and the second specific effective period (relative to the generation of the production reception period). It becomes possible to recognize whether the automatic production function is functioning when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed.

  In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the generation acceptance period occurs) and the second specific effective period ( The degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on the occurrence of the automatic production function when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the production reception period has occurred (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous) It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be performed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It will function as different degrees (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the “bar display” may be hidden in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic effect function As in the case of functioning, the “bar display” may not be hidden, and the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where it is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600. For example, it is executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. It is also good.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, the player is not involved with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is impossible for the player side to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated post-operation effect. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is made to function and generation after the operation is generated, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, the operation to be the operation target) suggesting the operation means to be the operation target within the effect reception period. While displaying the image display etc. insulting means, even if the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions, the post-operation rendering is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being displayed. It is desirable to make it. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the generation of the post-operation effect. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic As in the case where the effect function is activated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. When the above-described automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described first specific effective period, or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described second specific effective period, The post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed.

  Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different big hit expectation degrees, both the operation target suggestion image mode and the post-operation effect mode Can be confirmed at the same time, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, the post-operation effect need not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is executed, for example, as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. It may be.

  Also, when an effect for generating an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is referred to as "operation-based effect", the operation-system effect is related to this. In some cases, it may be performed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, movable object effect, count effect, etc.). However, in this case, when “Operation system effect” is executed but “Other specific effect unrelated to this” is not executed, “Operation system effect” and “ It is desirable that the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions is higher than when the specific rendering of “is in parallel to the rendering situation. In other words, when there is an effect situation in which “operation system effect” and “another specific effect unrelated to this” are in parallel, the “operation system effect” is not accepted and the post-operation effect is not executed. In addition, since “another specific effect unrelated to this” is in the execution state, the decline in the entertainment interest of the game can be suppressed, whereas the “operation system effect” is executed, but “another effect not related to this” When there is a production situation where the "specific production" is not being executed, if there is a case where the production reception is not made in the "operation system production" and the production after the operation is not performed, it will be in a situation where no production is performed. Therefore, a decline in the entertainment interest is inevitable. Therefore, when there is a performance situation in which “operation-related effects” are executed but “other specific effects not related to this” are not executed, “operation-related effects” and “other specific effects not related to this” are specified. By setting the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions to be higher than when the rendering is in parallel, it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the operation-based rendering occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, the warning effect that is performed before the production reception period occurs, the production that the operation means to be operated is operated, etc. are executed as “operation system production” or production related thereto. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the adversary effect) as “another specific effect”, it is suggested in advance that the above-mentioned automatic effect function is likely to be operated at a high rate. Will be able to. In this case, it is desirable to be executed as the effect to be ended after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the effect after operation). On the other hand, if it is assumed that it is performed as "another specific effect", for example, generated after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the admiral effect) and ended before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function is high, and it is possible to provide the performance in a sense of tension. In this regard, if the “other specific effect” is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably the predicate effect), the “other specific effect” may be repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when “another specific production” is executed is high At this point, it is possible to have a tense feeling as to whether the effect reception period occurs.

  In addition, when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the lost fluctuation according to the result of the big hit judgment is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is executed a specific value (for example, 999 times continuous lost fluctuation, Until the 1000th loss fluctuation) is reached, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) may be generated with a predetermined probability based on the result of the big hit determination In addition to the above, when the player does not perform an operation even when the effect reception period occurs, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is not made to function. On the other hand, when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the lost fluctuation according to the result of the big hit judgment is successively digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, the lost fluctuation is executed continuously 999 times) And when it reaches the 1000th lost fluctuation), the symbol fluctuation (rendering pattern) that reaches the specified value is an operation opportunity for the operating means (any of the plurality of operating means) regardless of the result of the big hit judgment There is always an operation by the player during the effect reception period by causing the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period while the effect reception period in which the is given is always generated A process may be executed to always generate the same post-operation effect as at the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the lost fluctuation reaches a specific value, “the player should be operated every time the effect reception period occurs while the lost fluctuation is continuously executed. Even if they have not been given any results despite the fact that they have been urged to do so, the pachinko machine 1 itself must have an automatic rendering function even if it has not been operated by the player, as if it had felt its responsibilities so far Since it is realized as an effect to be made to play, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest. In this case, during the effect reception period that occurs when the lost fluctuation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th lost fluctuation), the lost fluctuation is sequentially digested and the execution is performed A special display image (for example, different from the display image (for example, “Operation”, etc.) that appeared during the effect reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, change of up to 999 times) It would be desirable to make it appear, such as “If I am troublesome, I will act for you”. In addition, even after symbol fluctuation (rendering pattern) reaching a specific value is digested, the symbol fluctuation may be changed each time it is digested until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit gaming state) is satisfied. In the (render pattern), regardless of the result of the big hit judgment, the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plural operation means) is always generated and a special display image (for example, “ If it is bothersome, I will act on behalf of the user, etc.)), and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioned to respond to the effect reception It is desirable to execute a process that always generates an effect after an operation.

  It should be noted that the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is digested sequentially when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss change is executed continuously, It is also possible to display the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the 1000th loss fluctuation).

  In addition, when the lost change according to the result of the big hit judgment is sequentially digested when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and until the number of times of execution reaches a specific value, during the symbol change, the first operation Although both the effect reception period for the means and the effect reception period for the second operation means can be generated, in the case of the symbol change when the lost change is sequentially digested and the number of times of execution reaches a specific value Alternatively, only one of the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means may be generated at all times, and the other side may not be generated. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is suitably suppressed that the occurrence of the effect reception period has an expectation for itself. It will be possible. However, in this example of the effect, "Even though the player has been urged to operate the game every time the effect reception period occurs while the lost change is being executed continuously, there are no results. "If there was no operation by the player as if I felt the responsibility in the past, the pachinko machine 1 itself would be realized as an effect that always causes the automatic effect function to function. The second operation means (e.g., the second operation means) is generated by generating an effect reception period for the first operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) having a relatively low degree of expectation at the time of occurrence. It is desirable not to generate an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001).

  Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) It can occur both when it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means. The second effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the user cannot occur when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible to generate when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), and when in the specific performance state (automatic button performance state) It becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interests of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the production reception period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
・ Displays a cocoon image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) as an operation means (摸 image display means)
-After the production reception period has occurred, if an operation by the player is performed while the spear image is displayed, a post-operation production can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
-After the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, if a specific timing arrives without the player's operation being performed while the bird's-eye image is being displayed, the effect can be executed after the operation without receiving the operation from the player ( Automatic production acceptance means)
However, the 摸 image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different ratios (expectations) in which the post-operation effect is executed in the “mode advantageous to the player” when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the expectation can be recognized whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. It is possible to generate an effect after the operation while being considered.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, the player is not involved with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is impossible for the player side to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated post-operation effect. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by causing the above-described automatic effect function to function, first, a spear image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the above-described automatic rendering function is functional, it is desirable to generate a post-operation rendering in a state in which the overhead image is not displayed but is displayed. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the generation of the post-operation effect. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic As in the case where the effect function is activated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. The effect after operation may be performed using an area different from at least the area where the overhead image is displayed in the effect display device 1600, or the light emitted by the lamp provided in the game board 5 or the movable decorative body It may be executed as an operation according to.

  In this case, when the overhead view image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, the degree of expectation suggested within the performance reception period (overview image even in the state where the effect is generated after operation) Display mode) can be confirmed.

  The overhead view image thus continued to be displayed is not displayed after the effect is generated after the operation. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when different times have elapsed, the times from when the rendering after operation is performed until the overhead image is hidden may be different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic process when the specific time has elapsed or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic process when the time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if there is not, it is possible to recognize at which time the post-operation effect has occurred by checking the time from the execution of the post-operation effect until the haze image is hidden. .

  In addition, when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, and when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, The degree of expectation that is obtained may be different.

  In addition, when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player is generated while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. A high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) such that any one of modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with relatively low big hit expectation, a high expectation display mode with relatively high big hit expectation) can appear ) Appears, even if no operation is performed within the period for receiving the production, the production is always accepted (the automatic production function is always functioning), and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when an operation is not performed within the effect reception period, an effect is received (the automatic effect function is functioned), and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. When and where Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. That is, if forgetting to operate when a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, even if the user forgets to operate it, it is assumed that the game entertainment will not decrease so much, so a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. If forgetting to operate sometimes occurs, by making sure that the automatic production function is functioned within the production reception period, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate, but a low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation) If you forgot the operation when the image appeared, play the game so that you do not cause the operation by making the automatic rendering function not always function within the effect reception period. And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. In addition, when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) You may make it not appear. In addition, any of three or more display modes may appear during the effect reception period.

  And in each characteristic technique explained below, it may be made to apply suitably also about the example concerning these automatic button rendition states, and to carry out.

[Suggested degree of expectation by automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied), It is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the performance as when the operation was performed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when an operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted An effect pattern in which a process (automatic effect function) for generating an effect is not executed can also be generated. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the automatic effect function does not function when the operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the symbol variation is larger than when the automatic effect function functions. , The process of producing the effect within the symbol variation can be executed so that the expectation (ratio) at which the big hit symbol appears is low. At this time, the expectation degree (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation on the operation button 410 is not intentionally performed within the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it works, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that could cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an effect on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.). The above-described effects (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 241 to 261) regarding whether a period occurs or whether a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted) occurs. ))). In this regard, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect, these effects are compared to the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period. At this time, the ratio at which the automatic rendering function functions may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs is also a function that indicates that the above-mentioned automatic effect function is likely to function at a high rate. As a result, it is possible to more suitably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, the operation opportunity is provided to the sword decorative body 5001 in the specific operation related effect rather than the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 as the result of the effect. In the case where it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation in the execution state is higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, when there is no operation (effect acceptance) within the effect acceptance period that occurs in response to a specific operation-related effect, for the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, It is more desirable to set the ratio to be the same in the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given with respect to the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001.

  According to such a configuration, a presentation situation with a relatively low degree of expectation (which implies that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as a presentation result of a specific operation-related presentation. Also, since the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions is not changed by this (the rendering result of the specific operation related rendering), the expectation for the above-mentioned automatic rendering function to function is this It becomes possible to maintain suitably. As described above, it becomes possible to enhance the game interest by paralleling two different effects (specific operation related effects, expected degree indication by the automatic effect function) which are not influenced by the other effect results.

  Hereinafter, specific examples of effects in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 262 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the performance status being performed. As shown in the figure, a display showing that the automatic button effect state is being controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, the “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  FIG. 262B shows an effect situation in which a specific effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 262A is being executed. As shown in the figure, in the specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, “press The character display such as “” and the bar display showing the remaining time of the specific effect reception period appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, if an operation for the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), a specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed as an effect after the operation according to the effect reception. Etc.) and a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation and “hot heat!” With a relatively high expectation). Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect is received without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the specific rendering acceptance period (when the rendering acceptance has not occurred), the ratio of 60% The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted within the specific production reception period. As, as long as the effect reception has been performed, the effect will not be performed after the operation that should have occurred. Then, after this, a specific state of acceptance of the effect is generated, and the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), the operation button 410 is not operated within a specific effect acceptance period. After the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period, the effect after operation having the same content as when the effect is received is performed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is effect operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area Although one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Or “excessive heat!”, Etc.) is displayed, post-operation rendering occurs in response to being operated within a specific rendering reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (e), after the specific effect reception period occurs, the effect is developed in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the specific production reception period is generated as the “production reception period in which the above-described automatic production function functions” or “the above-described automatic production function”. Is determined (selected) based on the result of jackpot determination when executing the symbol variation, and as a result, 60% in the specific effect reception period. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at the ratio of, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the ratio of 40%. For example, when the jackpot is elected as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding election, Period "or" production reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when a big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "a production reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or "a performance reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" are generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 60% in the specific effect reception period, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 40%.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the specific effect reception period is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", the above Which of these periods should be generated so that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears will be higher when the symbol variation is stopped than when it is generated as a “demonstration reception period when the automatic rendering function of the function does not function”? Are determined (selected) based on the result of the above-mentioned big hit judgment.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received, when an effect reception period in which it is determined that a high-expected aspect (such as “Intense heat!”) Appears as a post-operation effect, the automatic effect function functions. When the production reception period occurs, it is determined that a mode of low expectation (such as “chance!”) Will appear as a post-operation production. The rate at which functions function will be relatively low. Therefore, when the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button production state, whether or not the automatic production function functions when the operation button 410 is not intentionally operated within the production reception period. By confirming, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that could cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), even if the automatic rendering function functions when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed intentionally within the effect receiving period, it is expected as a post-operation effect. Low-level aspects (such as “chance!”) Can also appear, so even if the automatic production function is functioning, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. With such an indication of continuous expectations (improvement due to the function of the automatic rendering function, suggestion according to the mode of the rendering after operation), it will be possible to achieve a dignified rendition, and maintain the game interest favorably. It will be expected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), even if the automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated during the production reception period, the production reception is still accepted. In this case, there is a possibility that an aspect with high expectation appears in the post-operation effect that should have appeared, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (c) (the situation where the automatic production function does not function and the production after the operation does not appear) appears, the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (d) (the automatic production function). Is desirable, but it is desirable to make the expectation lower than when a situation where a low expectation appears as an effect after the operation).

  FIG. 263 and FIG. 264 show effects that the degree of expectation is suggested by the automatic effect function when an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) occurs in the automatic button effect state. A specific example is shown.

  FIG. 263 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 3, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the performance status being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, a display indicating that control is performed in the automatic button effect state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled (here , “Auto button is being set”) appears continuously.

  FIG. 263 (b) shows the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246 (specific operation-related examples illustrated separately from this) while the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. (Which may be a production) shows the production situation where production has started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. And the common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, it is concealed to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given . However, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific operation-related effect, whether an effect status indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation, The appearance status indicating that the sword decorative body 5001 should be operated appears as the second rendering result with a relatively high degree of expectation, whereby the operation button 410 with a relatively low degree of expectation and the degree of expectation relatively It becomes to be shown which of the tall sword ornaments 5001 the operation opportunity is given to.

  FIG. 263 (c) indicates that, as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b) being performed, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation. An effect state indicating that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred is shown. In the effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, “press” A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, if an operation on the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c), a specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. Any one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Having a relatively low expectation degree or “hot heat!” Having a relatively high expectation degree) having a different expectation degree in the display area while performing a production operation. It will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect is received without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect receiving period (when the effect receiving is not generated), the above-mentioned is described at a ratio of 20%. The automatic rendering function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is designed to function at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side becomes confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate effect is received within the effect reception period. There may be a situation where the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 263 (c)), an effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. The effects within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period compared to the reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)). It is possible to execute a process that is advanced. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as “an appropriate operation cannot be performed within the effect reception period and an effect corresponding to the operation may not appear”. It becomes possible to provide an interest as to which of the body 5001 is activated through the specific operation related rendition. In order to obtain such effects, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that indicates the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic rendering function has functioned.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until it is finished, as shown in the figure, the display (in this case, “Auto button high accuracy”) indicating that the ratio of functioning of the automatic performance function is high continues. To appear.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 263 (d), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 was not received in the production reception period. As long as the production reception is performed, the post-operation production that should have occurred is not executed. Then, after this, a specific state of acceptance of the effect is generated, and the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), the above-described automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when production reception does not occur). In the case of the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. It is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher than the case where it is not.

  Further, when the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 263 (e), the operation is not performed on the operation button 410 within the production reception period. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed during the reception period and the effect was received is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is effect operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area Although one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Or “excessive heat!”, Etc.) is displayed, post-operation rendering occurs in response to being operated within a specific rendering reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 263 (f), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, FIG. 264 (g) shows a state in which the sword ornament 5001 should be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b). The effect situation which shows that there is appears, and a mode that the effect reception period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produced is shown. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, “ The words "Please put the sword" and the bar that shows the remaining time of the specific effect reception period will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in an operation state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410 and moves the sword ornament 5001 from the operation state to the original position. Operation is allowed.

  Here, if an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 264 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 receives the effect reception within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). The same post-operation effect as when being played is performed. However, when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). Among the multiple modes with different expectations compared to the time (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low level of expectation or “hot heat!” With a relatively high level of expectations) The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is also consumed the remaining time. It is the same as the case of the production reception period shown in FIG.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period in the effect state shown in FIG. 264 (g) (the effect reception did not occur). In the case), although the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c) occurs, the reception of the production is generated in the production situation shown in FIG. As in the case of not doing so, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20%, and the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 80%.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation related rendition being performed, a rendition situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first rendition result having a relatively low degree of expectation (FIG. 263). Even when (c) appears, the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions is not changed by this (the rendering result of the specific operation related rendering), so the above-mentioned automatic rendering The expectation that the function will function can be suitably maintained. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and anticipation with the automatic effect function) that are not influenced by each other's effect results in parallel, and an adverse effect result appears in the effect on one side It will be possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment at the time. However, in this case, when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed in the effect reception period in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263 (c) (when the effect reception is not generated), the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functional In the case of the effect shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period (when the effect reception is not generated), the above-mentioned automatic effect function is Expectation will be lower than when it works.

  When the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 264 (h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not accepted within the rendering acceptance period. The effect is not performed after the operation that should have occurred as long as the effect reception has been performed. Then, after this, a specific state of acceptance of the effect is generated, and the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time. However, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the rendering reception period (when the rendering reception does not occur). Even when there is no such situation, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed when the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect reception period (when the effect reception is not generated) in the effect situation shown in FIG. 262 (b). It is desirable that expectations be higher than if they did not function.

  Also, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 264 (i), although the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the rendering reception period, An effect is performed after the operation having the same content as when the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception is made. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is effect operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area When one of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" Or "Intense heat!", Etc.) is displayed, but post-operation rendering occurs in response to being operated within the rendering reception period The mode displayed in the display area is the same as each other in any case where the effect after the operation is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 264 (j), after the presentation reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related presentation occurs, the presentation progress is made in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time.

  It should be noted that an effect reception period (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “ As in the case of an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without the execution of a specific operation-related effect, it is also generated as “the effect reception period during which the automatic effect function is not functioning”. At the time of execution, the decision is made (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination, and as a result, the above-described automatic performance function is allowed to function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function is designed to function at a rate of 80%. For example, when the jackpot is elected as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding election, Period "or" production reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when a big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "a production reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or "a performance reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" are generated. As a result, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)), and 80% The automatic production function described above functions at the rate of.

  Similarly, an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) is also generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions”. In such a case, the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than the case where it is generated as “the stage for accepting the stage where the above-mentioned automatic stage function does not function”. Which of these periods is to be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  The post-operation effect occurs in the case of the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) and the specific operation-related effect is not performed. The effect may be different as in the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)). However, even if it is executed as a different effect, it is desirable that any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  The sword decorative body 5001 used in the effect example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be a sword decorative body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 263 and 264, an example in which “the effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 243 to 246 is described. The “effect using the function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effects in FIGS. 241 to 261.

  Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 263 and 264, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect In the state where the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted, the “setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted” state before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable that it be generated at least when it is in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (b) (the production situation in which a specific operation-related production is started), and this is continued until the production reception period. According to such a configuration, since it will not be accepted even if the setting operation to the automatic button rendering state is performed after confirming that the specific operation related rendering has been started, the automatic button rendering state It is possible to provide "effects using the automatic effect function" targeting only those who are continuously playing the game while maintaining the game, and the game is continuously performed while maintaining the automatic button effect state It will be able to provide dramatic value for doing.

  In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an effect reception period (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. 264 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. )) In the first display mode (for example, the blue button image BTG or the blue sword decoration image SYG) or the second display mode (for example, the green button image BTG or the green sword decoration). The image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, the “production reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function functions” is generated compared to when the first display mode appears It is desirable that the percentage of

  In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect being executed, or an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 263 (c), 264 (g) ), The third display mode (for example, the red button image BTG or the red sword decoration image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the third display mode appears, You may make it be in the state where the production | presentation reception period when a function functions is generating.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, "if the effect reception (operation to the operation button 410) is performed within the effect reception period, the effect after the operation which should have been confirmed can not be confirmed either. To provide a source of judgment as to whether or not to use a dramatic selection such as “does not intentionally operate the operation button 410 within the effect reception period” while there is a risk that a dramatic demerit such as may occur. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not “effects using the automatic effect function” are applied, an effect reception period corresponding to each “specific operation-related effect” illustrated in FIGS. 241 to 261 and FIGS. 263 and 264 It is desirable that the time period of time t2 is generated as a period having a longer time than the effect reception period (such as FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect being performed. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is puzzled as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect reception period. A situation may occur where it becomes impossible to perform the operation, but by giving a long time to the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation related rendering”, it is possible to suppress such a situation from occurring. Will be expected.

  In particular, in the example of FIGS. 263 and 264, it is set in consideration of the fact that the ratio at which the automatic rendering function functions is relatively high in the effect reception period corresponding to “specific operation related effect”. For example, whether the automatic rendering function functions by setting the rendering reception period to have a time longer than the rendering reception period that occurs without the “specific operation related rendering” being performed It can be said that this is desirable in order to maintain the playability of the game longer for the purpose of improving the amusement of the game. In this case, with regard to the timing at which the automatic rendering function functions, in the effect reception period which occurs without the “specific operation related rendering” being performed, the timing arrives when the first time has elapsed after the period occurs. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, the automatic effect function is to be reached when the second time longer than the first time has passed since the period has occurred. It is important to last longer for the expressiveness of whether or not it works.

  In addition, the period from the start to the end of the period for the stage reception period that occurs without the execution of the "specific operation-related stage" and the stage for reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related stage" Even if it is made to differ, about the bar display which shows the remaining time of a production reception period, this is displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is decreased. It is desirable to only make the speeds different. That is, in this case, even when the effect reception period corresponding to "specific operation related effect" occurs, the period is continued for the same time as the effect reception period which occurs without "specific operation related effect" being performed. To be able to make it appear that it is possible to maintain the stage effect on whether or not the auto-representation function works, in combination with the “frustration” by being continued for a longer period of time than expected. To be able to.

  According to the example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264, the first effect reception period (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the process by the first automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it is not necessarily executed, in the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect is generated without being executed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first production reception period than the one production reception period (production reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this respect, as such an automatic button effect state, the ratio ("60%-40%", "20%-80%") at which the automatic effect function functions depends on the type of the effect reception period as described above When the automatic button effect state to be set is set as the “first automatic button effect state”, the proportion at which the automatic effect function functions is different according to the type of the effect reception period (“50% −50%”, “10 "%-90%") is set to be different regardless of the "second automatic button effect state", and when the effect reception period occurs, regardless of the type as that period to set the automatic effect function to always function The third automatic button effect state to be played may be further prepared, and it may be possible to set any of the effect states including the normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. Moreover, the normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function is not prepared, but always played in the automatic button effect state (the first automatic button effect state, the second automatic button effect state, the third automatic button effect state) Or production may be executed.

  In addition, the effects shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be modified as follows. That is, when the automatic rendering function functions in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the generation of the first effect reception period (first The above-described automatic performance function functions at the timing within the production reception period) to end the first production reception period and generate a post-operation production corresponding thereto. However, if the automatic production function does not function within the first production reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first production reception period occurred (the first production time) The above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at the timing of the first production reception period), and thereafter the first production reception period is terminated without performing the post-operation production (after that, the post-operation production is not executed). ). On the other hand, when the automatic rendering function functions in the second effect receiving period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect receiving period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect receiving period or The above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third effect reception period, and the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period. At the same time as the effect reception period is ended, the effect after operation is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-described automatic performance function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third performance reception period, and then the second performance reception period or the third time without performing the post-operation performance. The effect reception period of is ended (even after that, the effect is not executed after the operation).

  According to such a configuration, the automatic production function can function at a relatively early stage in the first production reception period where the ratio of the automatic production function to function is low. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time to allow the player to receive the production by his own operation until the end of the first production reception period. You can play games with heart. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period on the higher side where the automatic production function functions, the automatic production function can function only at a relatively late stage. Providing a game with a sense of tension even though the proportion of the automatic production function is high, because there will be little time left for the player to operate when it does not function Will be able to.

  In addition, about the said modification, in the 1st production reception period, when the above-mentioned automatic production | generation function functions at the timing (timing in the 1st production reception period) when 1st predetermined time passed, and when it does not function However, in the second presentation reception period and the third presentation reception period, the automatic presentation function described above always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second presentation reception period). You may do so. Even in such a configuration, if the automatic production function can only function at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function does not function by any chance (for some trouble), the time for the player to operate it Since it is considered that the player has a delusion that there is not much room left, a similar effect can be expected.

  In addition to the example of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, in other example of effects, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be always controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the setting to the automatic button effect state itself may not be performed, and the automatic effect function may be always provided as a gaming machine that can function at a predetermined ratio.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (The automatic button effect state is to be terminated Desire) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect reception After an operation corresponding to the process of finishing the automatic button effect state and receiving the effect, the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to be given the operation opportunity within the period only needs to be operated once. Production (processing that can cause a change in production) is performed (operation unification control in the automatic button production state). As a result, even if a desire to end the automatic button production state and advance the production depending on the player's own operation occurs within the production acceptance period, the loss of operation opportunity is avoided and the production mode is switched. Can be performed smoothly.

  As described above, when setting to the automatic button effect state when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is permitted only for the operation button 410 among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. .

  On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated in the state where the effect reception period has not occurred. An operation for canceling the setting is permitted only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state in which the production reception period is occurring, when an operation is performed on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) to which an operation opportunity is given during the production reception period. Then, a process for ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (a process that can cause a change in the effect) in accordance with the effect acceptance are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in a state where an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation is not received, and the process for terminating the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, among the players, we play a game by our unique gaming method, such as "advance operation is performed only when it is desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without generating the switching of the effect mode)". It can be envisaged that some people wish to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 (or the sword decorative body 5001) within the effect reception period regarding the specific effect when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect Although processing for ending the state (specific rendering state) and processing for causing a change in the rendering are performed respectively (operation unification control in the automatic button rendering state), control to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) is performed When the operation for the special operation means is performed within the period for accepting the performance related to the specific performance, Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is ended and an operation game is to be actively performed thereafter, the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated during the effect reception period. If you want to perform rare operations while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), the special operation means should be operated during the effect acceptance period. Thus, it is possible to realize a game desired by the player simply by properly using the operation means.

  Hereinafter, the operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 267.

  FIG. 265 (a) shows that the number of reservations is 1 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination on the effect display device 1600 In the effect situation being performed, it is shown that the effect reception period for receiving the pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred while the reach state is being formed. As shown in the figure, a display showing that the automatic button effect state is being controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, the “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  Also, as shown in the figure, during this presentation reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (here, the lower display) Arrow display in the direction and a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410. However, in actuality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also a special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 in which no change occurs is allowed to be operated.

  265 (b) to (d) show that the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), but the above-described automatic effect function functions, and the effect reception period. It shows a state in which the post-operation effect is performed which has the same content as when the operation is performed and the effect reception is performed. When the above-described automatic performance function is activated, the production reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is terminated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure are described). Any operation opportunity for the button 1410) is lost.

  That is, in the post-operation presentation according to this presentation example, progressive presentation development appears, and any presentation result of a plurality of modes (FIG. 265 (c), FIG. 265 (d)) having different degrees of expectation Even if final appearance is decided at the start of symbol variation (decided based on the result of the big hit judgment), first, a specific effect image (here, an explosion as shown in FIG. 265 (b) To display the smoke image. After that, when the rendering is progressed to a rendering result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 265 (c), the specific rendering image shown in FIG. 265 (b) (here, the explosion While the smoke image by) gradually disappears, it will be displayed an effect image (here, a fortune of "Yoshi") that suggests that the effect is a result with a relatively low degree of expectation. When the stage is advanced to a high stage result, as shown in FIG. 265 (d), the specific stage image (here, the smoke image by the explosion) shown in FIG. 265 (b) gradually disappears In the course of the game, an effect image (here, a fortune of "Nakakichi") is suggested to indicate that the effect is a result with a relatively high degree of expectation.

  Then, the flow of the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (a) to (d) appears as a basic effect progress when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-described automatic effect function Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 265 (b) to 265 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs an operation. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (automatic button effect state There may be a desire to end it. Such aspiration often occurs when an effect reception period for giving an operation opportunity to the player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the period It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the game interest may decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that the operation button 410 is positioned at the operation position, a process for terminating the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unification control in the button production state). It should be noted that at the time when the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the production acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is ended, the above-described automatic production function cannot be performed, and the special operation means ( The operation opportunity for the button 1410 described as "PUSH" in the drawing is also lost.

  Even when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the production reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), as shown in FIG. 266 (e), the operation is performed within the production reception period and the production reception is performed. First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact. After that, when the production progresses to the production result having a relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 266 (f), the specific production image (here, the explosion) shown in FIG. 266 (e). As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Okichi” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result will be displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 266 (g), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 266 (e) gradually disappears. In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed.

  However, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), a process for ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 266 (e) to 266 (g), after the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The indication (here, “Auto button setting in progress”) is to be hidden. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggested indication (here, “auto button release”) is made to appear (see FIG. 266 (e)).

  Further, as described above, in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), special operation means (in the drawing, “PUSH” is described) in which no change occurs as well as the operation button 410 in the light emission state. The operation on the button 1410 is also allowed. And this special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 “operates itself only when desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode to be switched). It is mentioned above that it is prepared in order to make possible our own game technique such as “progress the production”.

  Therefore, even when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect receiving period generated in FIG. 265 (a), as shown in FIG. 267 (h). In addition, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is first displayed as a post-operation effect in response to the operation being performed during the effect reception period. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), the specific production image shown in FIG. 267 (h) (here, explosion) While the smoke image by) gradually disappears, it will be displayed an effect image (here, a fortune of "Yoshi") that suggests that the effect is a result with a relatively low degree of expectation. When the production progresses to a higher production result, as shown in FIG. 267 (j), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 267 (h) gradually disappears. In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed. When the operation for the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is accepted for the effect, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is ended, and the above-mentioned automatic effect The function cannot be performed, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is lost.

  However, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the automatic button effect state based on the operation There is no process to end the process at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 267 (h) to 267 (j), even after the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for rendering, it is indicated that the automatic button rendering state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (in this case, “auto button is being set”) is continuously displayed.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a). A special case that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-described automatic performance function functions (FIG. 265 (b)), or when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 (FIG. 266 (e)). I have made it possible for the rendition to appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 267 (j), the above-described automatic effect function functions in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (effect after operation) appearing in the case (FIG. 265 (b)) or when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 266 (e)), the glitter and sparkling effect display is additionally displayed I am trying to Instead of the glitter and sparkling effect display, effects using a movable body or a lamp may be additionally implemented.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period regarding the fortune effect when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the change contents of the effect to be generated When an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, an operation is performed on special operation means (button labeled “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 during the effect reception period related to the fortune effect. It will be made to differ mutually from the change content of the rendition to be produced in case. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, a sparkling effect display) appears, “the operation for the operation means is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is It can be recognized while enjoying the post-operation effect that “the setting is not canceled and this is continued”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), even when an effect image (here, “Yoshi” fortune) is displayed that suggests an effect result with relatively low expectation, A rendition (here, a glittering effect display) can be made to appear.

  In addition, such special effects (here, glittering effect display) are made to appear additionally to the above-described post-operation effects at a predetermined rate based on the result of the big hit judgment, and the special When a rendition is additionally appeared, it is desirable that the proportion of the jackpot symbol appearing in the symbol fluctuation is higher than when the special rendition does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to operate not the operation button 410 but the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. There is a concern that the operation against Therefore, a special effect (here, glittering) shines when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a). If the effect display does not appear, any effect result appears by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) or by the function of the automatic effect function described above. It is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than in the case of the above.

  According to such a configuration, “the operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (button indicated as“ PUSH ”in the drawing)” 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and this is continued ”, there is a dramatic demerit such as“ it may be suggested that the rate of jackpot symbols appearing significantly due to symbol variation ” Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained by causing the player to exercise such a stunning selection.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), even though the same presentation mode as the example shown in FIG. The situation where it is possible to recognize that the ratio in which the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than the example shown in FIG. 265 (c) or 266 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), although it is made possible to recognize that the situation has a low degree of expectation, the presentation mode is shown in FIG. 265 (c) or 266 (f). By having the same as the case, the third party who is not operating the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is in a rendering situation that fails to make a dramatic selection Is difficult to grasp, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline of the game entertainment.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when any effect selection is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), FIG. 265 (b) or FIG. e) As shown in FIG. 267 (h), etc., a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed, but the specific effect image is relatively displayed as an effect after operation It may be made to be displayed in either of two or more modes from which the rate in which the appearance mode (here, the fortune of “Nakakichi”) appears with a high degree of expectation, or the rate in which the special effect appears is different.

  In addition, even if any effect selection is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), this effect is omitted without displaying a specific effect image, and an effect mode having a different degree of expectation (Here, “Kiyoshi” or “Nakakichi” fortune) may appear directly as post-operation effects. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to comprehend that a rendering situation (FIG. 267 (i)) that has failed in rendering selection appears to be difficult to recognize, a rendering mode with a different degree of expectation ( Here, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) when making "Okuji" or "Nakakichi" (Omokuji) appear as effects after operation.

  In addition, it is made possible that the effect that the expectation degree is suggested can be performed even during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), so that the above described judgment as to whether or not to take the risk is taken. May be.

  In addition, the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the state when in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, other operating means already prepared may be used.

  In addition, in the production reception period that occurs in FIG. 265 (a), whether a period during which the operation on the operation button 410 can be production reception among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) occurs. Or, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) regarding whether or not there is a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted is performed. It may also occur as a result.

  In addition, during the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to operation button 410, a first effect in which an operation opportunity for special operation means (a button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is also given. Even if a reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) and a second effect reception period in which no operation opportunity for the special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is given are included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effects described above (FIGS. 241 to 261) are performed as compared to when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable that the rate at which symbol variation appears before it stops is high. According to such a configuration, the ratio at which the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appears appears depending on which of the first effect receiving period and the second effect receiving period is occurring. It will function as a suggested performance.

[Stable side automatic rendering process]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as “a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated”. It is possible to generate an effect reception period of. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, and any operation means is operated within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, for which of the plurality of operation means the automatic rendering function is to be activated (which of the plurality of operation means causes the same change as when the rendering was accepted) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as “a plurality of operation means can be accepted and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated”. If there is a production reception period of, “whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher expectation will appear” or “whether a production result with a lower expectation may appear” Based on the above, the process of enabling the automatic performance function for the operation means different from "the operation means on the side that can produce the production with the possibility that the production result with lower expectation may appear" (stable side automatic production Process).

  According to such a configuration, the production mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is made for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period, Since it will not appear when the automatic production function is activated, the occurrence of a situation such as “the production mode with the lowest expectation appears by the automatic production function when you forget to operate” It can be preferably avoided.

  Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect process in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270.

  First, an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs while the automatic button effect state is not controlled but in the normal effect state will be described. In FIG. 268 (a), in the normal effect state, the number of holds is 3 and the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. The player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 under the reach state being formed. An effect state in which an effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period starts is shown. In this production situation, although both the production reception for the operation button 410 and the production reception for the sword decorative body 5001 are not yet effective, the operation button 410 and the sword have been used since that situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the extracted position in order to prompt the user to determine which of the decorative body 5001 should be operated. Further, in the effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are displayed.

  FIG. 268 (b) shows the special effect reception period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 268 (a) (the player may press either the operation of the operation button 410 or the operation of the sword decoration of the sword decoration 5001. The production situation in which the production reception period (which can be selected by the user) has occurred is shown. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display on the effect display device 1600 (here, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG) which has appeared since the effect situation shown in FIG. 268 (a), the operation button In a state in which the state of the 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is kept as it is, an instruction display prompting an operation to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 (here, to the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG Corresponding downward arrows, which are displayed respectively, and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special effect reception period, etc., appear.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 268 (b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “disturbance” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It is done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operation means can receive effects.

  That is, in this effect example, when an effect is received for the operation button 410 within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b), the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed as an effect after the button operation. After it is displayed that it has been done (FIG. 268 (c)), as the production result suggesting that the smaller the number of defeated, the lower the degree of expectation and the higher the number of defeated, the higher the degree of expectation is. And an effect (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e)) for causing either “100 body defeat” to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-button operation effect when winning a big hit, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a rate of “40%”, and in FIG. 268 (e) at a rate of “60%”. As shown in FIG. 268 (d), the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at the rate of “60%” and the rate of “40%”. It is possible to make the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) appear.

  On the other hand, when the effect for the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the special effect reception period, it is first displayed that the effect for the sword decorative body 5001 has been received as the effect after the operation on the sword side ( Figure 269 (f)) As the staging results suggest that the lesser the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number of defeats, the higher the degree of expectation, “S Destroy 1 body”, “100 bodies” An effect (FIG. 269 (g) to FIG. 269 (i)) is made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination of any of 777 body destruction. For example, in the effect after the sword side operation when winning a big hit, the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and in FIG. 269 (h) at a rate of “50%”. The effect mode shown appears so that the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (i) appears at a rate of “40%”, and the effect after “sword operation at the time of losing the jackpot” is a rate of “40%” The effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) appears at the rate of “50%”, and the effect shown in FIG. 269 (i) at the rate of “0%” It is possible for an aspect to appear.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the effect mode having a small number of defeats regardless of which of the effect after button-side operation and the effect after sword-side operation appears as a result The degree of expectation is lower than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. Also, in the case of the same effect mode (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h), the effect mode shown in FIG. 270 (e) described later) Although the degree of expectation may be different, it is desirable to make it the same.

  In such a configuration, a special production reception period allowing the production reception is generated for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means), and the special production reception period is generated. Because it is possible to generate different operation effects (effects after button side operation, effects after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means on the side operated within the production reception period of As a result, the monotonous performance can be improved, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In particular, the same degree of expectation is not shown by operating any of the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means), but the sword decoration 5001 (first Only when the second operation means) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 269 (g)) that suggests that it is difficult for the jackpot symbol to appear due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state). I want to see the effect (post-sword operation effect) on the side of the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) until I bear such a risk, since it is possible that the 1 It will be expected to maintain the game interest by giving conflict and stimulation about the game.

  In this case, the button-side post-operation effect is “a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation” among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. In this case, it is functioning as a relatively stable post-operation effect in the sense that the appearance risk of “the effect mode of“ 1 body defeat ”shown in FIG. 269 (g)” is excluded. In addition, the post-sword-side operation effect is “a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here) among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within a special effect reception period. Then, in the sense that it has an appearance risk of “the rendering mode of“ 1 body defeat ”)” shown in FIG. 269 (g), it functions as a post-operation presentation relatively including a disturbance.

  Furthermore, in this example of presentation, from the appearance of the appearance shown in FIG. 268 (a) to the appearance of the appearance shown in FIG. 268 (b) (here, within the special presentation acceptance period), The production mode shown in FIG. 268 (a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination. When the production mode appears, the production mode does not appear. When the operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001, the appearance ratio of the “specific presentation mode with the lowest expectation (here, the presentation mode of“ one-body destruction ”shown in FIG. 269 (g)”) is low. The production progress can be executed in this way. This percentage may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, up to the risk that the “specific presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the presentation mode of“ one-body destruction ”shown in FIG. 269 (g)”) may occur, As a judgment material as to whether or not to operate the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it is possible to use the rendering result as to whether or not the rendering mode shown in FIG. 268 (a-b) has appeared. It is expected to suitably improve the game entertainment when the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs.

  In the normal performance state, when the special performance reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs but no special performance reception is made within the special production reception period, the automatic production described above is performed. The function does not function, and the effect is advanced without any of the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation being performed.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 270 (a) to 270 (e) show examples of effects when such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), FIG. 270 (a-b), and FIG. 270 (b), even if it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. An effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started appears, except that a display indicating this (in this case, “auto button is being set”) appears continuously in the effect display device 1600. Until the end of the special performance reception period until the end of the special performance reception period (FIGS. 268 (a), 268 (ab), and 268 (b)). Progressed.

  However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. Enable the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410, which is different from the sword decoration 5001 on the side that can generate the rendering with the possibility of the "one-body destruction rendering effect" shown in 269 (g) The process to be performed (stable side automatic production process) can be executed.

  That is, in this case, although neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. As a result, the same change as that in the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the special effect acceptance period is caused to the effect. Therefore, after displaying that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been made as effect after button-side operation (FIG. 270 (c)), the less the number defeated, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number of defeated The effect that "50 body destruction" or "100 body destruction" is made to appear based on the result of the big hit judgment as the effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher (Fig. 270 (d), Fig. 270 (e) ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among a plurality of effects that can occur when an effect is received for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 within a special effect reception period. The production mode (in this case, the production mode of “one body defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic production function is functioned. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as that the presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation appears by the automatic presentation function.

  Here, due to the convenience of the automatic rendering function, there is a concern that the player will not operate any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button rendering state. However, as described above, in the special effect reception period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 270 (ab) can appear based on the result of the big hit determination, and when the effect mode appears , The presentation after the sword side operation in the proportion of the appearance of the "specific performance mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here the performance mode of" 1 body destruction shown in Figure 269 (g) ") is low Since an opportunity to enjoy the game is given, it is expected that the sword decorative body 5001 is preferably urged to be operated.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, a special period in which an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for production and a period for which the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is produced is simultaneously generated and ended simultaneously. Although control is performed as the effect reception period, those periods may not necessarily be generated simultaneously. For example, if the period during which the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for production and the period during which the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted for production are overlapped in some of those periods, the periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

  Further, when a specific effect pattern is selected from the plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the big hit determination, “a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and different effects depend on which operation means is operated. The above special presentation acceptance period may be generated without fail. In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when the symbol variation is started with a specific effect pattern, “Which of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and also a special effect reception period occurs. You should be able to come up with a stunning strategy that presupposes that a special production reception period will occur, such as `` Do you need to set the automatic button production state before you do? '' . For example, it will be possible to confirm "how much notice effect was performed in what kind of effect (expected degree)" before the special effect acceptance period occurs. The result can be used as a judgment material for “which of a plurality of operation means should be operated within the special production reception period”, and the game until the special production reception period occurs This also makes it possible to maintain this favorably.

  However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410 within the special effect reception period, or when there is an operation on the sword decorative body 5001, furthermore, an automatic effect function As to which presentation mode is to appear when the character functions, it is determined by drawing (judgment) based on the result of the big hit judgment at the start of the symbol variation or the occurrence of the presentation reception (or the function of the automatic presentation function). It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, even if there is a production situation in which a special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001. When there is an effect state in which an effect display (FIG. 268 (a), FIG. 270 (a)) suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started, setting to the automatic button effect state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to occur. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that “a special production reception period in which the player side can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started. Even if you try to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that the `` effect display '' has started, it will not be accepted, so you will continue to play games while maintaining the automatic button effect state It is now possible to provide “stable automatic production processing when in the automatic button production state” only for those who are in the state, and the production for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button production state To provide valuable value.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, “the specific effect aspect having the lowest degree of expectation (FIG. 269 (g)) that can appear when the effect is performed after the sword side operation is Although it was decided to carry out as a unique effect mode that is different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the post effect is performed, for the “specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation”, the effect after the button side operation is It may be executed as the same aspect as the presentation aspect that can appear when it is performed (for example, (“50 body destruction shown in FIG. 268 (d)”). Even if "the specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" appears as a result of being performed, it looks like the same effect mode as the effect mode that can appear when the effect is performed after the button side operation appears Operation buttons It becomes difficult for a third party who does not know which of 410 and sword decorative body 5001 has been operated to recognize that there is a remarkably low performance situation. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect state such as “a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception” appears. Nevertheless, the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state depends on whether the effect situation is generated by the operation on the operation button 410 or by the operation on the sword decoration 5001. Because the degree of expectation that the big hit design appears in) becomes different, it has more interesting as a rendition using multiple operation means It becomes possible to.

  However, this is the case where the “specific effect mode having the lowest expectation” in the post-sword operation effect is executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear even when the post-button operation effect is performed. However, with regard to the “highest expectation special effect mode” in the post-sword operation, a unique effect mode (for example, different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the post-button operation is performed) (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (i)) It is desirable to execute this as such. Appears, it is difficult to recognize that the third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 has been operated is in a production situation in which the degree of expectation is extremely low. And, when the "most special presentation mode with the highest degree of expectation" appears in the post-sword operation, even if it is a third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that there is a production situation where the degree of expectation is extremely high, so the player can take the above risks without worrying about the eyes of a third party. It is possible to enjoy the effect on the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) side (the effect after the sword side operation). It may be any as long as it can be recognized, and for example, uniqueness between other presentation modes may be ensured by executing movable body operation and lamp light emission.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” as a result of performing effects after the sword side operation (FIG. 269 (f) to FIG. 269 (i)) (FIG. i) has become possible, and any of the other presentation modes (FIG. 268 (d), 268 (e)) when the presentation mode (FIG. 269 (i)) of the "777 body destruction" appears. 269 (g) and 269 (h)), the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) is higher than that when the symbol 269 (g) and FIG. 269 (h) appear. This percentage may be 100%. However, the effect mode (FIG. 269 (i)) of the "777 body destruction" may not necessarily be made to appear. In this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) is not shown. The appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) by the amount of lowering the expectation of the effect mode shown in (g) It becomes.

  In addition, in the effects shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, effects after the button side operation (FIGS. 268 (c) to 268 (e)) and effects after the sword side operation (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)). ), A common performance mode (here, a “100 body defeat” performance mode) can appear, but a common performance mode should not appear. Also good. In addition, only the display change appears in the post-button-side operation, whereas in the post-sword-side operation, in addition to the display change, a movable body operation, lamp light emission, and the like may be executed. Further, the post-button-side operation and the sword-side post-operation may not be common as the content of the effect regarding the number of defeats, and the content itself may be executed as different effects.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, first, for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 when the production is accepted, including when the production is accepted by the function of the automatic production function. Although the display (FIG. 268 (c), FIG. 269 (f), FIG. 270 (c)) that suggests whether or not the production has been accepted appears here, the expectation is suggested without causing the display to appear. An effect that causes an effect result to appear may be executed.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” as a result of performing effects after the sword side operation (FIG. 269 (f) to FIG. 269 (i)) (FIG. When i) appears, the above-mentioned specific operation relation is more than when any other presentation mode (FIGS. 268 (d), 268 (e), 269 (g), 269 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appears before the symbol variation is stopped, and the operation means with the higher degree of expectation when the specific operation-related effect appears (sword decoration body It is desirable to increase the rate at which the operation opportunity is given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, it is possible to suitably promote performing the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the effect risk is high.

[Production reception process according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period that permits the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is displayed. And a process of generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) based on the reception of the effect by the operation, and an effect reception that permits the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the second display effect is displayed, the second display effect is displayed based on the fact that the operation is accepted by the operation. It is possible to execute processing for a plurality of different operation effects such as processing for generating a second expected effect (effect after operation indicating an expected degree) different from the expected effect of 1 That.

  In such a configuration, the type of effect as an expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation differs according to the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed within the effect reception period. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the game entertainment at the time of operation, but also to increase the game entertainment from the generation reception period to the operation.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the effect reception period that permits the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When an effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed, or an effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed within an effect acceptance period in which an effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed, the effect acceptance is performed. Processing for generating the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation button 410 is operated even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period Is made executable.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect state in which the first display effect is displayed within the effect acceptance period appears. The first display effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is operated when an effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed appears in the effect reception period. Regardless, the second display effect is executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect receiving period, the user is worried about forgetting to operate. You will be able to enjoy the production without any problems.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the first display effect can not be displayed only when an effect reception period for generating an effect after operation occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect does not occur. And
· A production situation in which a production reception period that is controlled to an automatic button production state (a specific production state) and allows production reception (operation) to the operation button 410 has occurred and the first display production is displayed When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in, processing for generating the first expected effect (effect after operation) and processing for ending the automatic button effect state are respectively performed (effect shown in FIG. 271 described later See progress),
· A production situation in which a production reception period that is controlled to an automatic button production state (a specific production state) and allows production reception (operation) to the operation button 410 is occurring and the second display production is displayed If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in, the process of generating the second expected effect (effect after operation) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 272 described later) See Production Progress),
· An effect that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and does not generate an effect reception period allowing effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 and that a second display effect is displayed When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the situation, neither the process for generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process for generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button is performed. Also, processing to end the rendering state is not performed (see the rendering progress shown in FIG. 273 described later),
・ No effect reception period which is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and allows effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the first display effect and the second display effect Processing for generating a first expected rendering (post-operation rendering) and processing for generating a second expected rendering (post-operation rendering) when an operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a rendering situation in which none of them is displayed Each of the processes is performed such that the process of terminating the automatic button presentation state may be performed according to the presentation situation (the presentation reception process according to the display type).

  According to such a configuration, the first display effect appears when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear. In the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed when the second display effect is not present and the second display effect appears, the type (the first after the operation effect) according to the operation (the effect reception) The expectation presentation (the second expected presentation) is different from the first, and the expected presentation (post-operation presentation) itself does not appear even if the second display effect appears and it operates only There is a possibility that the process for terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed. Accordingly, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  Hereinafter, the effect reception process according to the display type when in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 275.

  FIG. 271 shows that the period of timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 271 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is controlled as “automatic button effect state”. The example of an effect when the 1st effect pattern which can be set as "the effect reception period which accepts" is performed is shown.

  In this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” is reached, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), in the effect display device 1600 A button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting an operation to the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) appears. (First display effect).

  Then, if an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted at timing tb12 prior to the above timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), the symbol fluctuation (in the execution state) is performed based on the effect acceptance The effect after the first operation (in the drawing, the fortune of "Nakakichi" in the figure) is executed (the first expected effect) indicating the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect reception and returned to the normal effect state, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 also has the effect reception without digesting the remaining time. It will end at the time. Therefore, at timing tb12 at which the effect was received, a display showing that "the automatic button effect state is being controlled" (here, "the automatic button is being set") appearing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 so far ) "Is also hidden.

  However, in this case, regardless of the period of timing tb11 to tb13, at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the first after-operation effect generated by the effect reception ((d) In order for the first expectation effect) to not be ended yet and to be in the middle of execution, the game interest is suitably maintained over the period of the timing tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the effect acceptance is received. It is desirable to do.

  FIG. 272 shows that the period for timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 272 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is displayed, while the automatic button effect state is being controlled. The example of a presentation when the 2nd presentation pattern which can be set up as a presentation acceptance period which permits is shown is shown.

  In this second effect pattern, when the timing tb 21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410” is reached, as shown in FIG. 272 (b), in the effect display device 1600 , "Ghost OBK with a present box" to appear (second display effect).

  Here, when “Haunted OBK with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, when the operation button 410 is operated, an effect whose expectation degree is suggested is necessarily generated. Since there is no limitation to this, there is no indication of an instruction prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (arrow display in the downward direction or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period).

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 272, it is possible to display the ghost OBK having the present box within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, and the period before the ghost tb23 is displayed in the period in which the ghost OBK is displayed. When the operation to the operation button 410 is performed at the timing tb22, the effect is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 272 (c), the big hit symbol is the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the effect acceptance. The second post-operation effect (in the drawing, the letter display of “superheat”) indicating the expected degree of appearance is performed (second expected effect).

  However, at this time, the effect reception period occurring from the timing tb21 is ended at the time when the effect reception is received without the remaining time being consumed, but the automatic button effect state is not set without being canceled. This is to be maintained. Therefore, at timing tb22, the "display showing that the automatic button effect state is controlled (in this case," auto button setting in progress ") appearing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 also continues its display. It will be done.

  In addition, regardless of the period of timing tb21 to tb23, at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 272 (d), the second after-operation effect generated by the effect reception (second In order to maintain the game entertaining condition suitably over the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, it is possible that the expectation effect of the game is not finished yet and is in the process of execution, regardless of the timing of reception of the effect. Desirable.

  FIG. 273 shows that the second post-operation effect is generated in the period of timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 273 (a)) in the symbol variation execution period while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. The example of a production | presentation when the 3rd production | presentation pattern which displays "haunted OBK with a present box" is performed is shown, although the production reception acceptance period of has not generate | occur | produced.

  In this third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), the effect display device 1600 causes a ghost OBK with a present box to appear (second display effect).

  However, as described above, in the effect situation where the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the effect after operation is suggested that the degree of expectation is suggested even if the operation button 410 is operated. Since generation is not necessarily limited, an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (arrow display in the downward direction or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 273, a ghost OBK with a present box can be displayed within the period of timing tb31 to tb33, but the ghost OBK is displayed as shown in FIG. 273 (a). In the relevant period, the "effect reception period for accepting the effect reception (operation) on the operation button 410" is not generated. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 272 (a) and 272 (c), even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed, the operation after the operation corresponding to the operation is performed. The effects (first post-operation effect and second post-operation effect) do not appear, and the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed over the period of timing tb31 to tb33.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred. In this case, basically, the process for terminating (releasing the setting) the automatic button effect state is performed, but even if the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, the process is shown in FIG. When the operation button 410 is operated in such a production situation (the production situation where the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed), the process of generating the post-operation production and the automatic button production state It is assumed that the production is advanced so that none of the processing to be terminated is performed.

Therefore, when the mode shown in FIG. 273 (b) (the ghost OBK with a present box) which is the same mode as FIG. 272 (b) is displayed, the second operation shown in FIG. 272 (c) Even if the operation button 410 is operated in anticipation of the occurrence of the post-production (second expected production), the production does not change, but the automatic button production state is not canceled. This can be continued. In this case, as a method not to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state,
-Even in the state where the effect reception period for the post-operation effect has not occurred, only detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is enabled, and this is not performed when the effect reception period for the post-operation effect has not occurred If there is a detection, it is judged whether or not the timing at which the detection has been made is "within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33 at which the ghost OBK holding the present box is displayed", and "the present box is held When it is within the period of time tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK is displayed, the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the timing when the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed is displayed. If it is not within the period of tb21 to tb23, a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is performed. Approach to (the method to set the period of timing tb31~tb33, as the prohibition period in accordance with the setting release of the automatic button directing state)
・ In the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, a method of detecting whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated or not is adopted. It is possible, and any implementation method may be used.

  FIG. 274 shows that the period for timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 274 (a)) of the symbol variation execution period is “controlled for effect (operation) for the operation button 410 while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. Although the above-mentioned first effect pattern that can be set as “allowed effect receiving period” is executed, an example of effect is shown when the operation button 410 is not performed within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13.

  As described above, in this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception acceptance period for permitting the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410” is generated, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), the effect display In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) Display) appears (first display effect).

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 274, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb11 to tb13, but the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is performed when the timing tb12 'before the timing tb13 comes. Is made to function so that the same change as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274 (c), at timing tb12 ', the expectation for the jackpot symbol to appear in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the above-mentioned automatic rendering function A first post-operation effect ("Okyoshi" fortune in the drawing) to be suggested is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the production reception period that has occurred from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic production function functions without using up the remaining time, but the automatic button production state continues without being canceled. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12 ′, the “display indicating that the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here,“ auto button is being set ”), which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, continues. It will be displayed.

  Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing tb12 ′, the first after-operation rendering (the first operation generated by the above-described automatic rendering function) is performed at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 274 (d). It is desirable that the expectation effect (a) is not finished yet, and is in the process of execution, in order to preferably maintain the game entertainment over the period of the timings tb11 to tb13.

  FIG. 275 shows that the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 275 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is controlled by “automatic button effect state”. Although the above-described second effect pattern that can be set as “allowable effect reception period” is executed, an example of effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23 is shown.

  As described above, in this second effect pattern, when the timing tb 21 for generating the “effect reception acceptance period for permitting the effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” is reached, as shown in FIG. 275 (b), the effect display In the device 1600, “Haunted OBK with a present box” is made to appear (second display effect).

  Here, as described above, when the “ghost box with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display (an arrow display in the downward direction or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) appears. There is no.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 275, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22 ′ before the timing tb23 arrives, the automatic effect function described above Thus, the same change as that when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 275 (c), at the timing tb22 ′, the expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the automatic performance described above. The second post-operation effect (in the figure, the letter display of "superheat") is executed (the second expected effect). However, in this case as well, the production reception period that has occurred from the timing tb21 ends when the automatic production function functions without using up the remaining time, but the automatic button production state continues without being canceled. It becomes. Therefore, at the timing tb22 ′, the “display indicating that the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here,“ auto button is being set ”), which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is continued. Will be displayed.

  In addition, even when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing tb22 ', the second after-operation rendering generated by the above-described automatic rendering function (the second (at the second timing) is performed at the timing tb23 as shown in FIG. It is desirable that the expectation effect (a) is not finished yet, and is in the process of execution, in order to suitably maintain the game entertainment over the period of the timing tb21 to tb23.

  Incidentally, although illustration is omitted, although the above-described third effect pattern (see FIG. 273) is executed while being controlled in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is not affected within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, since the production reception period for generating the second post-operation production does not occur in the first place, the automatic production function described above cannot function, and the automatic button production state is also canceled. Needless to say, it will continue (that is, no change will occur).

  In the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the effects that are developed with different contents are executed between the first display effect shown in FIG. 271 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 272 and 273. Type as a post-operation effect when the operation is performed according to which of the first display effect and the second display effect is displayed according to whether the operation button 410 is performed (first In addition to being expected to be different from the second expected presentation), the expected presentation (post-operation presentation) itself may not appear even if the second display effect is being operated There is a risk that the process of terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed. Accordingly, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  In addition, about a 1st display effect, there exists a some effect aspect from which a degree of expectation differs, and it may be made to be able to be performed by either of these effect aspects. In addition, the second display effect also has a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect be executed as display contents having contents having nothing to do with each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, in the first display effect, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the button image BTG or the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, a button is displayed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is being performed is displayed. It has become.

  In addition, as the first expected effect, there are a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be performed in any of these effect modes. In addition, there are also a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation for the second expected effect, and it may be possible to be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected presentation and the second expected presentation are executed as presentation contents having contents unrelated to each other. In the example of effects shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the fortune image is displayed in the first expected effect, but the fortune image is not displayed in the second expected effect, and the degree of expectation by the character display Suggestions are to be made. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as an effect by a movable effect or a lamp display, the contents may not be related to each other.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the second display effect appears as the effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the symbol variation execution period, the “effect for the operation button 410” is displayed. The second display pattern and the second display pattern that are preliminarily determined (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of symbol variation) that the “acceptance period for allowing reception (operation)” to occur occur. A third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, in a determination process that is performed at the start of symbol variation) that “the effect reception period that allows the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” does not occur. It was decided to prepare. However, after preparing the second effect pattern in which it is determined in advance that the “effect reception period allowing the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” when the second display effect appears, A determination (lottery) is performed as to whether or not the second expected effect is generated based on the fact that the effect is received within the “effect reception period allowing the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410”, By causing the second expected effect to be generated when the specific result is obtained in the determination, and not generating the second expected effect when the specific result is not obtained in the determination, as shown in FIG. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 275 may be realized. In addition to the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect appears, "the effect reception period for accepting the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. The above-described third performance pattern may be further prepared in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of symbol variation).

  When the second expectation effect is generated as a result of the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 being performed while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. The ratio that the jackpot symbol appears may be higher in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) than when the first expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 being made. desirable.

  Further, when the second display effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) described above is stopped until the symbol variation is stopped as compared with the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to make the ratio of appearing during the period higher. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation is performed. It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) will be performed, and it is possible to suitably suppress the game entertainment.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed, the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b), FIG. 273) The above-mentioned automatic rendering function is made to function at any time when (b) is displayed. However, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is not necessarily displayed, even if the operation is performed, the second expected effect does not necessarily occur. When the rendering function is made to function, when the second display effect (see FIG. 272 (b) and FIG. 273 (b)) is displayed, the operation is performed leaving it to the above-mentioned automatic rendering function. There is concern that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b), FIG. 273 (b) When the second display effect is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function when the reference is displayed, and even if the second display effect is displayed, it is not understood that the second expected effect will occur, but at least the operation has to be performed. For example, the second expected effect may not occur.

  Further, in the example of the effects shown in FIG. 271 to FIG. 275, when displaying the ghosted OBK, "the effect accepting period for accepting the effect accepting (operation) for the operation means" is generated while the ghosted OBK is displayed. You may do it. Further, in the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the ghost OBK is displayed, the automatic effect function functions within the "effect receiving period for accepting the effect receiving (operation) to the operation means" or the player Even when the operation is performed, the ghosted OBK may not be displayed, and the effect that the ghosted OBK is displayed may be continued also at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33.

[Auto-strike function in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the user is requested to perform a plurality of operations (such as pressing the operation button 410 continuously) to a predetermined operation means, and the effect reception is generated each time there is an operation. There is something I can do. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes a problem how to make the above-described automatic effect function function when a specific effect acceptance period in which such an operation effect is performed a plurality of times occurs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. Even if the predetermined operation means is maintained in the operation state for a relatively long time without performing the operation multiple times, an effect when the operation is performed a plurality of times only by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) It is equipped with an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) that makes the mode appear, and the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) is performed by performing an operation on a predetermined operation means in a long operation mode. When the operation state is maintained, a presentation is accepted every time a predetermined time elapses, and a post-operation presentation corresponding to these is generated multiple times. It is set to be executed.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated during the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically operated in the long operation mode within the specific effect reception period. As in the case where the multi-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) is activated, a process for generating an effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

  According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has an automatic continuous hitting function activated when an operation by so-called long press is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. When the automatic button effect state is controlled at least, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous hitting function is activated appears even if the operation by the long press is not performed within the specific effect reception period. Therefore, even when the automatic effect function is functioned when the specific effect reception period requiring multiple operation reception occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period The player is not dissatisfied with the frequency of occurrence of the character and can enjoy the effects.

  FIG. 276 (a) is an operation opportunity of “a plurality of times (such as a continuous hit etc.) operation to the operation button 410 in the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a specific effect reception period to which “is applied” is executed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed multiple times in a single-shot operation mode in which the operation state is maintained only for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. The example of the production when performed over is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (a), in this effect example, every time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the single operation mode within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) When it is detected that the position is changed from the position to the operation state (here, it is detected to stand up), the effect reception according to the operation is made, and the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception is performed . Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  Here, although omitted in the figure, in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), the specific time from the start of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception to the end thereof. There may be a new production reception (operation detection). In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the process of being executed when the effect is received is interrupted, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is newly generated. Thus, it is desirable to suitably maintain the operational feeling (effect responsiveness) when operated by the player. Note that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is terminated when a specific time has elapsed since it was started unless a new effect is received again during execution of the specific effect. Become.

  In FIG. 276 (b), when not being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation opportunity of the operation “a plurality of times (such as a continuous hit or the like) of the period from timing tc11 to tc13 of the execution period of symbol variation A specific effect pattern that can be set as a “specific effect reception period to which“ is applied ”is executed, and an operation in a long mode operation (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific effect reception period The example of the effect when operation with respect to the button 410 is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (b), in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), the operation button 410 is in the operation state while the operation state with respect to the operation button 410 is maintained in a long press manner. The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on the operation detection (effect reception) when Auto-strike function) is executed. As this process (automatic consecutive hit function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed under the condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t 1 elapses, and those operation detection (effect It is possible to execute the process as “a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on reception” ”. Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 277 (a) is an operation opportunity of “a plurality of times of operation (such as continuous hitting) of the operation button 410 for the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a specific effect reception period to which “is applied” is executed, and an example of effect when no operation is performed in the specific effect reception period is shown.

  First, when no operation is performed in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed once and at time tc13. When it reaches, the specific effect reception period will be ended.

  On the other hand, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, as shown in FIG. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at timing tc12 at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the generation reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function generates a new specific effect (e.g., every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described auto-strike function functions. Processing to generate post-operation effects) is executed.

  In addition, as this process (automatic effect function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t 1 passes, and a new specific effect (effect reception) is performed based on the operation detection (effect reception). It is possible to execute as processing such as "to generate an effect after operation". In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is functioned at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous hitting function is functioned to use it to “detect operation every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and to detect those operations A process may be performed to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on (effect reception). Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 277 (b) shows that the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation is “operation opportunity of multiple operations (such as continuous hitting) on the operation button 410 when the automatic button effect state is controlled. The specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect receiving period” is executed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is long pressed in the state where the above-described automatic effect function is functioning during the specific effect receiving period. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), as in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a), the automatic effect function described above functions at the timing tc12, and thereby the first specific effect at the timing tc12. After the occurrence of, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated each time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described automatic continuous hitting function functions (or by causing the automatic continuous hitting function to function). The process to be executed is executed.

  However, in this rendering example, it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a long press mode at timing tc 12 a when the processing by the automatic rendering function is being executed. Therefore, at the timing tc12a, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected when the automatic button effect state is set, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). However, in this effect example, the reception of the effect is not made even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a. Then, after the specific effect (effect after operation) according to the effect reception is not generated at the timing tc 12 a in this way, a process (predetermined time t 1) which has been executed before the automatic button effect state is released. This process is continued without ending a new specific effect (process to generate an effect after operation) each time e.

  According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the operation by the long press at any timing in the state. Even if is started, there will be no change in the rhythm or tempo for the occurrence of a specific effect (effect after operation) triggered by the operation and no delay in the progress of the effect, and it was already in the running state The process (process for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a form that is taken over after the operation mode by the long press is started. Therefore, even in the automatic button effect state, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period, the player can operate without worrying about the adverse effect on the effect in the execution state. It will be possible to do so, which will preferably prompt the player to operate. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), although the player is in the effect status different from the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at timing tc 12a. The same aspect will appear as the aspect of the specific effect appearing within the specific effect reception period.

  In this case, the process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) which has been in the execution state is taken over after the operation mode by the long press is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an automatic double-stroke function that functions when a long press operation is performed within the specific effect reception period, and a function when not operating within the specific effect reception period The same process (a process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed regardless of which of the automatic effect functions to be performed functions. It is none other than.

  However, after the start of the long press operation by the player at timing tc12a, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the operating state every time the predetermined time t1 is digested, and the operating state is in the operating state On the condition that the determination is made, the processing being executed from the time of being in the automatic button effect state (processing to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operating state at the time when the predetermined time t1 based on the specific effect performed last time is digested, a new specific effect (action after operation) is generated at that time Instead, the process being executed since the automatic button effect state (process for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is ended.

  In addition, in the production example using the automatic repetitive function shown in FIG. 276 (b) or the automatic production function shown in FIGS. 277 (a) and (b), the predetermined time t1 is set with reference to the timing when the specific production ends. The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the elapse of time (the first mode as the automatic continuous hitting function and the automatic effect function) is executed, but instead, the timing at which the specific effect starts is used as a reference As described above, a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the elapse of the predetermined time t2 (second mode as an automatic repetitive function and an automatic effect function) may be executed. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start of the specific effect to the end, but preferably, from the start of the specific effect to the end. Is set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed in a manner that is interrupted. Even though no operation is performed, it is possible to feel the sense that a single operation is repeatedly performed at high speed, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing tc12 when the automatic effect function functions (within the period of timing tc11 to tc12), at that time. The automatic button effect state is canceled (ended). At this time, the first specific effect is generated according to the operation on the operation button 410, and thereafter, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses if the operation is a long press mode. A process (automatic continuous hitting function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single-shot mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state Each time a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, when the effect reception is made when the specific effect is in the process of execution, the specific effect in the process of being executed is interrupted according to the effect reception Although it has been decided to generate a new specific effect, it may be possible to generate a new specific effect according to the effect reception in parallel with this without ending the specific effect in the middle of execution.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, when the previous specific effect generated by the one-shot operation is in the process of being executed and the new one-shot operation is performed and the effect is accepted, When a new specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is generated, while the previous specific effect generated by the automatic effect function (or the automatic double-stroke function) functioning is in the process of being executed Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has been operated from the original position by a single-shot operation or a long press operation, even when it is detected, a new specific effect (effect after operation) is not generated. The process (the process of generating a specific effect every time a predetermined time elapses) is continued. After this, if the operation state is maintained when a predetermined time has elapsed with reference to the previous specific effect (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is changed to the predetermined time). Since the processing to be generated each time it has been continued is continued, it is possible for the player to end the automatic button effect state while suitably continuing the operation system effect being in the execution state from the automatic button effect state. It becomes possible to shift to a state in which an operation system effect is performed by the operation of, and it is expected that the player participation consciousness will be raised.

[Setting process related to automatic button effect state according to effect pattern type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) Settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and by simplifying such operations, settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state can be maintained while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during symbol variation. I am trying to do it.

  However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the execution period of the symbol variation, the processing load increases due to the setting change not assumed at the start of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is started at the start It is feared that it will adversely affect the determined progress of presentation. In this respect, as the type of “effect pattern to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination”, at least “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set”; Since the second effect pattern "that can not set the specific effect reception period where the prompting instruction display appears can not be set" is set, depending on the type of effect pattern, the setting or cancellation concerning the automatic button effect state is not necessarily executed promptly There may be cases where no problem arises. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, it is in the execution period of the symbol variation. By making the processing mode according to the setting or releasing according to the automatic button effect state different, the increase of the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation is suppressed.

  FIG. 278 shows a “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three. It is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation (cancellation operation) for canceling an automatic button effect state or an operation (setting operation) for setting is performed within an execution period of the symbol variation. . Note that the first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a lost variation.

  As shown in FIG. 278, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of reservations is in three effect states, “a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display for prompting operation appears may be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started in the effect pattern. Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the progress of the effect as the first effect pattern is made while the automatic button effect state is in a state where the automatic button effect state can be released (a state in which the release operation is allowed). .

  Then, in this example of effect, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting release of the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Be done.

  Further, in this production example, after the setting of the automatic button production state is canceled in this way, the operation on the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state at timing td12 in the specific production reception period shown in the drawing. ) Is detected. When the operation for the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, and after the operation according to the effect reception is performed, the effect is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without digesting the remaining time Will be. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, the effect reception is performed when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, It can not be accepted as the setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the effect reception is performed and the post operation operation is executed, and the automatic button effect state is canceled. The operation as an operation is also accepted, and the automatic button effect state is canceled (ended).

  Furthermore, in this effect example, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific effect acceptance period ends in this way, although the symbols are changing. The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. Note that, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting of the automatic button effect state during the symbol variation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) when the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It is supposed to be executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol variation may also be performed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state.

  And in this production example, when the symbol variation is stopped after the setting to the automatic button presentation state is made, there is a pending state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol variation is stopped. The next pattern variation is to be digested (variation start). Then, in the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, the rendering progress is made with the state being set in the automatic button rendering state unless the release operation by the player is performed.

  As described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 278, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is being executed, the specific effect within the period in which the first effect pattern is executed When the operation button 410 is operated when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be performed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that symbol variation has been started in the “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” in a state where the automatic button effect state is controlled. In addition, by performing the release operation before the specific production reception period occurs, it is possible to cause the specific production reception period to be generated in a state where the automatic button production state is released, and the player himself operates It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when a desired desire arises. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the release operation is received before the specific effect reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific effect reception period is ended. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

  Further, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect receiving period in which the instruction prompting operation is displayed” can be set, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state Is also allowed. Although the effect example shown in FIG. 278 assumes that the setting operation is received after the specific effect reception period ends, the setting operation by the player within a period before the specific effect reception period is started. The setting operation can be accepted even if the operation is performed. Therefore, when the symbol variation is started in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs. By performing an operation on the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in a period before, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. This is also possible, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when it is desired to enjoy the rendering after the operation by the automatic rendering function.

  In addition, in order to obtain such effects, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) according to the effect contents in the first effect pattern Even if it is obtained, it is desirable to always generate this during the specific performance reception period. In addition, the specific effect display can be made to appear in the period of symbol variation, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect reception period always occurs before the symbol variation in the execution state is ended. It is desirable to make the production progress. According to these configurations, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs by confirming the content of the effect appearing within the execution period of the symbol variation, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. It is possible to select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  At this time, as for the specific effect display, it is possible to give an indication as to whether or not the post-operation effect is likely to be performed in a highly expected manner when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. If it is performed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that the determination is made for selection regarding whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  Furthermore, for the specific effect display, there is at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears It may be permitted to set (or release) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player during the period from when the specific effect reception period occurs to when the second specific effect display appears. If it is not permitted to set (or release) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player during the period from the appearance of the second specific effect display to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the specific effect will not occur. It is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment from when the display appears until the specific production reception period occurs.

  In FIG. 279, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of reservations is in the three effect states, “the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears can not be set ") Starts the symbol variation, and the processing example when the operation (cancellation operation) or the setting operation (setting operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation It is a time chart which shows.

  As shown in FIG. 279, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, “the specified effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started in 2 effect patterns. Then, in this effect example as well as in the case shown in FIG. 278, the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed), although the symbol variation is being executed. Progress of presentation as the second presentation pattern will be made.

  In this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting release of the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Be done.

  That is, it seems that there is little merit to end the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, normally, when the symbol variation in the hold state is digested, there is a high possibility that the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set” appears. At this time, there may be a desire to return to a normal performance mode (a desire to end a specific performance state) in which the performance can be developed depending on the player's own operation.

  In this respect, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set is being executed, and in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is also being performed Also, the automatic button effect state can be ended by the operation of the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to end the automatic button effect state in advance when the “first effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is set” is still on hold. It can be avoided that the automatic button effect state is ended immediately before the specific effect reception period of is set, etc., and the situation that “the operation means (operation button 410) must be performed without passing” occurs.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is performed at the timing td23 shown in the figure after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern is not being controlled to the automatic button effect state and the specific effect acceptance period is not set, it is within a period being executed. At least the second effect pattern, even if the player has performed an operation (even if the operation button 410 has been operated from the original position and the operation state has been maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)). The setting operation by the player is not accepted (the setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed) during the period during which is executed. Note that, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol fluctuation is performed even when it is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state Within the period when the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted.

  In other words, even if “setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state” is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation within the specific effect reception period. Or, even if the operation is performed, the effect is accepted and the effect after the operation is executed. In view of such a fact, it is necessary to quickly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed during the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed. However, it is considered that there is no problem if the automatic button effect state is set before the specific effect acceptance period that can occur after the next symbol variation is digested.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed, the setting operation by the player was performed within the period. However, until the end of the period (while the symbol variation is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol variation corresponding to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol stop (losing) When in the symbol stop state (in the figure, at timing td24), the automatic button effect state is set based on the setting operation. In this way, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is being executed, even if an operation by the player is performed, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not permitted, and the set timing is Since it was carried over after being stopped, the processing load increases due to a setting change related to the production state that was not determined at the start of symbol variation occurring during the symbol variation execution (by an operation by the player) Such can be suitably suppressed.

  And, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation is stopped, the automatic button effect state is set, and in the hold state The next symbol variation that was present is digested (variation start). Then, in the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, the rendering progress is made with the state being set in the automatic button rendering state unless the release operation by the player is performed.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, in a state where the second effect pattern is in the execution state in a state where the second effect pattern is being executed without being controlled to the automatic button effect state. Even if the operation button 410 is operated at any timing, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, control to the automatic button rendition state can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in processing load due to a setting change relating to the effect state that was not determined at the start of symbol variation occurring during the symbol variation execution (by an operation by the player). It will be.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that after the symbol variation of the second effect pattern for which the specific effect reception period is not set is stopped, the next symbol variation in the holding state is started However, when the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is stopped (the missing symbol is stopped), the automatic button is performed when the symbol is stopped (the missing symbol is stopped) even if the next symbol variation is not on hold. The setting to the presentation state will be made.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when the setting operation by the player is performed within a period in which the second effect pattern (loss fluctuation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern The setting to the automatic button effect state is performed when the symbol variation is stopped, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, the point is that the automatic button within the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed Any setting may be used as long as the setting timing is not allowed and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stopped) or within the period during which the next symbol variation is being executed. In other words, when the next symbol variation is started, if there is a production situation such as “It is decided to change the setting related to the production state within the symbol variation”, the production is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it only needs to be advanced, an increase in processing load due to an unintended state change during the execution of symbol variation is preferably avoided.

  In this case, even when the next symbol variation is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), when it is in the state of symbol stop (lost symbol stop) or the next symbol variation is executed It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set within the set period. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined which effect pattern the next symbol variation is executed in. It is possible to carry over the timing at which the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed after the symbol is stopped without performing the.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is in the operation state within the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect pattern was ended. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be made only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is ended while the next symbol variation is in the hold state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol variation. If the second effect pattern is terminated while the button is not in the on-hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stop).

  Further, apart from “the second effect pattern in which the instruction display prompting the operation to appear cannot be set” (second fluctuation pattern), “the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display to prompt the operation appears cannot be set. "3 effect pattern (winning variation)" is further prepared, and when the player performs a setting operation within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol stop state or the jackpot game execution period The setting to the automatic button effect state may be performed inside.

[Prohibited period for setting automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The settings related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation makes it possible to perform the setting related to the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during the design variation. ing.

  However, if specific processing related to effects such as effect setting is permitted by the operation of the player during the execution period of the symbol variation including the setting process to such an automatic button effect state, tension is There is a possibility that the entertainment interest may decline due to the lack of stage. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at least when a specific effect reception period has not occurred, the specific process related to effects such as effect setting is performed by the operation by the player. In an acceptable gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibited period in which the specific process relating to the above-mentioned effect is not permitted be started between the start of symbol variation and the occurrence of a specific effect reception period. That is, in this case, there is a concern that the prohibition period will occur, and the operation means (the operation button 410, etc., etc. may not occur while the prohibition period does not occur even in the state where the specific effect reception period does not occur. It becomes necessary to carry out the operation for), and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the player participation in the game and the effect.

  Hereinafter, although an example of a presentation adopting “setting processing to an automatic button production state” as “specific processing related to presentation” will be described in detail, “specific processing related to presentation” is not limited thereto. The process may be applied as another process, such as a process of changing the effect mode in which the first character is the leading role to another effect mode (effect mode in which the second character is the main field).

  In FIG. 280, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period (specific effective period) in which the instruction prompting the operation appears can be set” ”. FIG. 281 is a time chart showing an example of processing when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of fluctuation, and FIG. 281 is an effect example when the effect is advanced with the third effect pattern. FIG. The third effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation, and may be the same as the first effect pattern described above.

  As shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (a), when it is in a rendering situation that is not controlled to the automatic button rendering state, "a specific rendering acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears may be set now. It is assumed that symbol variation is started at “Pattern”. Then, although it is in the execution period of the symbol variation, in the state where the automatic button effect state can be set (the setting operation is allowed), the effect development as the third effect pattern is made .

  However, in this production example, when symbol variation is performed in “the third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears appears can be set”, timing te11 before the specific effect reception period occurs In FIG. 280), operation acceptance for setting to the automatic button effect state itself or generation of a prohibited period in which setting processing to the automatic button effect state is not permitted is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (b), in this prohibited period, a specific effect (in-prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed. In addition, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 281 (b) (an image during prohibition), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is displayed, and a character such as “Auto setting invalid” is displayed as a button lock effect. It is done.

  The prohibition period thus generated is terminated when a timing te12 at which a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 has arrived. However, no matter how much operation (operation with respect to the operation button 410) is performed until the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. ) Is made not to cause any change.

  When the prohibition period ends at timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not displayed, and the setting process for the automatic button effect state is permitted. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned “prediction effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 281 (e)), a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears at timing te13. (Refer to FIG. 281 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 281 (f), the stage is set as the stage for accepting an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001, but the stage for receiving an operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is accepted. It may be set as a period.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (f), the specific effect reception period is generated in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set, so The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a specific timing. However, even when the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” is executed in the effect state shown in FIG. 280, before the prohibition period starts. If the automatic button effect state is set to the automatic button effect state, it is possible to generate the specific effect acceptance period in the state set to the automatic button effect state. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function can be functioned at a specific timing within the reception period.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is not the timing when the operation button 410 enters the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). However, in this case, when the operation button 410 is set in the operation state and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the arrival of the timing te11 shown in FIG. 280, the timing te11 occurs. The setting to the automatic button rendering state can be permitted. Therefore, the specific effect (in-prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 at which the prohibited period is started as in the example shown in FIG. 280, but is generated delayed at the timing te11. Is desirable.

  FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 are diagrams showing a modification of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period related to setting of the automatic button effect state) related to “specific processing related to effects such as effect setting”.

  That is, as described above, in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281, if a prohibition period occurs at timing te <b> 11 (see FIG. 280), the first specific time (e.g. 25 No matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed after the second (second) elapses, the setting operation is not accepted and the specific effect (prohibited image) is displayed. Is designed to prevent any changes.

  However, in the following modification example described in detail with reference to FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, the prohibition period is “one requiring a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) from the occurrence to the end”. Are the same, but when a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibition period occurs, an operation (operation button) by the player to end the prohibition period early This is different from the above-described effect example described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 and FIG.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (a), when there is an effect state that is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, a “specific effect reception period during which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started with “3 effect patterns”. Then, in this modification as well, during the symbol variation execution period, the progress of the presentation as the third presentation pattern is in a state where the automatic button presentation state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). Will be done.

  In addition, at timing te11 (see FIG. 282) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception for setting to the automatic button effect state itself or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is permitted. In addition to starting the generation of a prohibited period that is not performed, a specific effect (in-prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is also displayed in this prohibited period, as in FIGS. This is the same as the effect example described above with reference to 281.

  However, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 282, a period until a timing te11a, which is a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11, in the prohibition period (a period during which the cancellation is not possible). Then, even if the operation (the operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period, no change occurs in the specific effect (the prohibited image) (see FIG. 283 (c)). Refer to the operation from the timing te11a to the timing te12 (the timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of the prohibition period) (period in which the cancellation is permitted), the operation by the player When (operation with respect to the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute processing that can end the prohibition period early.

  More specifically, when the timing te11a comes and the prohibition period can be ended early by the player's operation (operation on the operation button 410), the timing te11a comes first in the effect display device 1600. The special image which has not appeared is displayed in the period up to (period in which it is determined that the cancellation is not possible). In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (d), an image NJG indicating the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

  That is, in the prohibition period according to this modification, such an image NJG appears when the timing te11a comes (see FIG. 283 (d)), a period during which the prohibition period can not be canceled (the period (see FIG. 283 (d)). From timings te11 to te11a), it can be suggested that transition to a period in which the cancellation of the prohibition period is permitted (timings te11a to te12) is allowed, and this indicates the prohibition period in the remaining time is indicated. Can be functioned as an effect on whether to end early.

  Then, when the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed in a period (timing te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the prohibition period is permitted among the prohibition periods, the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Based on this, a process for ending the prohibition period early is executed. As a result, after the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not arrived yet.

  Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period ends early due to the first operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. Processing can be performed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (e), the image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is destroyed, and a character such as "cancellation success" is displayed to cause the effect change. As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

  Then, in the state where the prohibition period is ended early, when the second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. When the second operation is performed (here, the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting processing to the automatic button presentation state can be performed. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (in this case, "automatic button setting in progress") appears in accordance with the effect setting being made.

  After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 283 (f)), at timing te13, a specific effect reception period appears in which an instruction to prompt an operation appears (See FIG. 283 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 283 (g), although it is set as the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001, the effect reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 It may be set as a period.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (g), the specific effect reception period is generated while the automatic button effect state is set, so the specific effect reception period is generated. If the player does not perform an operation until the specific timing arrives, the above-described automatic performance function will function. However, even in the effect example shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (g), the first operation is performed within the period (the timings te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the ineffective period is permitted, and the ineffective period is first performed. In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (f), if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not performed by performing the second operation in the early ended state and performing the second operation in the early ended state. Needless to say, the same production situation will appear.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, the specific production reception period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted” is ended. A specific effect reception period may be generated immediately after the “prohibition period during which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not permitted” is ended (in a manner linked to the prohibition period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs while the opportunity to set the automatic button effect state remains disabled. It is possible to increase the player participation awareness when the effect reception period is not occurring.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, in the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted”, the effect is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period occurring thereafter. It is also possible to cause one of a plurality of effect modes that differ in the appearance ratio of a relatively high expectation degree as the effect after operation, or the appearance ratio of the big hit symbol due to symbol variation in the execution state.

Also, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, based on the result of the big hit determination,
-When in the third state in which the effect image of FIG. 283 (e) appears, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, "padlock") in which the proportion (expected degree) in which the big hit symbol appears in the symbol change in the execution state is different Appear in any of a number of different presentation modes, etc.) where the destruction of the image in which the chain is attached is different.
-When in the second state in which the effect image of FIG. 283 (d) appears, when the third state is reached, the "specific third effect aspect (a plurality of third Among the modes, a plurality of second effect modes (for example, “a plurality of effect modes having different colors of the image NJG”, etc.) in which the proportion (expected degree) in which the third effect mode most advantageous to the player appears is different Make one appear,
-When in the first state in which the effect images of FIGS. 283 (b) and (c) appear, when the above-mentioned second state is reached, the "specific second effect mode (plurality among the plurality of second effect modes A plurality of first effect modes (for example, “a plurality of effect modes having different colors of the background image”) in which the ratio (expected degree) in which the second effect mode most advantageous to the player appears among the second effect modes of It is desirable to execute processing such as “appear” or the like. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be suggested in stages by the effects related to each other while the effects are advanced within the prohibition period or the process for early termination of the prohibition period is executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaming interests during the prohibition period can be suitably maintained, and that the player's participation consciousness is increased by promptly ending the prohibition period. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as an effect that the movable decorative body cannot operate, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibition period is movable. It is desirable to be able to be implemented as an effect aspect which operates a decoration. A predetermined movable decoration body is operated when a specific third performance aspect among a plurality of third performance aspects appears, and a predetermined movable decoration is displayed when a third performance aspect different from the specific third performance aspect appears. You may not move the body.

  In addition, for the effects illustrated in FIGS. 281 (e) and (f) and FIGS. 283 (f) and (g), the operation button 410 is selected from among a plurality of operation means (such as the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). The above-described effect (specific operation) regarding whether a period in which an operation can be accepted occurs or whether a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted occurs. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261).

  Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, it has been described that the specific production reception period is necessarily generated after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted” is generated. However, it does not necessarily need to occur for the specific effect reception period, and after generating the "prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted", the symbol variation stops without the generation of the specific effect reception period. You may make it prepare the presentation pattern which can be done.

  Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, for the “prohibited period during which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted”, the production pattern (for example, the super reach state) with a relatively low expectation degree of jackpot It is desirable that an effect pattern having a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot (for example, an effect pattern in which a super reach state occurs) has a higher appearance ratio than an effect pattern in which no occurrence occurs. That is, in this case, although the effect pattern having a relatively high hit probability appears, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state is forcibly lost for a predetermined period. It becomes possible to encourage the player to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's participation consciousness for winning the big hit will be increased.

  However, if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, the decrease in interest of the player desiring the occurrence of the automatic button effect state can not be avoided, as shown in FIGS. As shown, when there has been a certain amount of time, it is possible for the player to enable the early release of the prohibition period, and when it is released, the setting operation by the player to the automatic button presentation state is returned again to the permitted state. It is desirable to make it.

  Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target to be set by the operation by the player may be other operation means such as a touch panel, a sword decorative body 5001, a cross key, etc. besides the operation button 410. In addition, the prohibited period may be ended early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used for setting to the automatic button rendering state, and the setting to the automatic button rendering state may be performed. The prohibited period may be ended early by operating the operation target to be used. However, when the prohibition period is ended early by operating the operation target used in setting to the automatic button effect state, the modes (single press, long press, etc.) at the time of operation should be made different from each other. Is desirable.

  As described above, in FIGS. 280 to 283, an example of the effect in which “automatic button effect state setting process” is adopted as the “specific process related to the effect” is shown. Not limited to. However, with regard to the “specific processing related to the effect”, regardless of the type of symbol variation performed as the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means may be operated within the symbol variation execution period. It is desirable that it can be executed by operation.

[Automatic rendering function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The settings related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation makes it possible to perform the setting related to the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during the design variation. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the operation means, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation provided between the original position and the operation position so as to be operable by a predetermined driving force. In the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player (in this case, the sword decoration body 5001) is provided by the player within the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed to the rendering can be executed.

  By the way, when generating the effect reception period for such a movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), as shown in FIG. 204 (G2), for example, the movable operation means is at the original position by a predetermined driving force. There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to the player so as to move from the first to the operation position and operate the movable operation means in the moved state. In this operation opportunity, the production reception may be performed by an operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position instead of an operation of returning from the operation position to the original position.

  However, when such a production reception period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), and thereby the movable operation means (here, If there is a case where the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. There is a concern that it will not be possible to produce an effect after the corresponding operation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). Even if the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position and an effect reception period as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) occurs, the automatic button effect state is controlled. If a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected within the production reception period, a process (automatic production function) that causes the production to produce the same change can be executed. .

  According to such a configuration, even if some abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) and it becomes inoperable, the movable directing function can be used by using the automatic effect function. A post-operation effect using the operation means can be appropriately made to appear.

  However, when some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) and it cannot operate, the operation itself on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) Since it is in a difficult situation, if an operation to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is required to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button The setting to the effect state (specific effect state) cannot be performed, and eventually the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) No matter which production reception period occurs, the same production change is caused as when the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 here) on which the operation opportunity is given is operated. Processing can be executed (automatic rendering function). On this basis, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be set only by operating the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). It is supposed to be.

  That is, in this case, the operation is not performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) which may not be able to operate when an abnormality or failure occurs, but only on the general push-type operation button 410. An automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) can be generated. Therefore, even if abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) during the execution period of the symbol variation, setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by the operation on the operation button 410 By performing the above, it becomes possible to appropriately generate the post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001).

  In order to suitably ensure the operability at the time of such an abnormality / failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) used for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) It is important that it is provided as an operating means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it is not subject to the restoration process described above in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say that.

  However, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) has an abnormality or failure, as long as the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality or failure Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that they are in the state, it can not be expected that the setting to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) will be performed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) has an abnormality or a failure at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The restoration processing for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to the normal (original position) is performed. The restoration process can be executed as the above-described processing content. For example, a restoration operation (an operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) to the original position is performed. The process is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until it properly returns to the original position.

  According to such a configuration, the movable operation is confirmed by confirming that the restoration process is started with respect to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is in an abnormal state or failure. Furthermore, as a result of the restoration process being performed, it is confirmed whether or not the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position, so that the movable operation means (here, the sword is displayed). The player side determines whether the state in which an abnormality / failure has occurred due to the successful restoration process for the decorative body 5001) has been resolved, or whether the state in which an abnormality / failure has occurred due to the failure of the restoration process is continued. It will be possible to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the state in which the restoration process has failed and the abnormality / failure has continued continues, the operation on the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Thus, even if there is an abnormality / failure in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is not affected. It is possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception.

  However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) in a state where an abnormality / failure has occurred, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if it is performed, an effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) occurs before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that the post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) cannot be properly generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special performance reception periods can be generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). No matter which production pattern is selected and executed based on the result of the big hit determination, the maximum time required for the restoration processing for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) (restoration operation (5 Addition time between the time when the operation in seconds is repeated up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times) and the time required for setting operation to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) (2 seconds in this case) It is possible to execute processing to make the presentation progress so that the special presentation acceptance period is not generated only after the lapse.

  According to such a configuration, when symbol variation is started with a rendering pattern that can generate a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operation Even if the means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality or failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality or failure is occurring before the special effect reception period occurs. Since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be performed, the effect after operation according to the operation acceptance to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is appropriate Can be generated. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect reception period occurs in a state in which an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (the sword decorative body 5001 here), the special effect In the reception period, the same effect as when the operation on the movable operation means is performed is caused to the effect.

  FIG. 284 is a time chart showing an example of such effect processing.

  As shown in FIG. 284, in this example of the effect process, when an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the movable operation means (here) Then, the restoration process for returning the sword ornament 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. The setting operation for the automatic button effect state requires 2 seconds. In addition, the special effect reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is included. It is supposed to take 10 seconds.

  In view of such time setting values, first, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate a special effect acceptance period, 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect acceptance) Period) and 10 seconds (post-operation effect) are allotted a time longer than “30 seconds”, and 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) are added to “17”. Unless the effect is advanced so that the special effect acceptance period is generated at a timing later than “second”, the pattern variation ( It is not possible to ensure the above-mentioned effect when the effect pattern that can cause the special effect reception period is started.

  Therefore, in the figure, as the plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (design variation times of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are assigned are illustrated. However, in the effect patterns A to C to which only a time shorter than the above-described addition time “30 seconds” is allocated, only the effect progress in which the special effect acceptance period cannot occur is executed. . On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than "30 seconds", which is the above-mentioned addition time, is allocated, the special effect reception period can be generated, but symbol variation is started. By making it that only special effects development period that can not occur special production acceptance period is executed at a timing before “17 seconds (15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) addition time))” To ensure the above-mentioned effect when symbol variation (effect pattern that can generate special effect reception period) is started in the state that abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, sword decoration 5001) I have to.

  In the example related to the effect process, the special effect acceptance period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which the time longer than the above-described addition time “30 seconds” is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than “30 seconds” is assigned.

  However, in reality, if the special production acceptance period may occur immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the restoration process will fail. If the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed immediately after recognizing the fact, the special effect acceptance period is generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can not be realistic. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually requires time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If the above time setting values are not designed in consideration of such time values, it can be said that there is no effectiveness with respect to the above-described effects.

  In this respect, the design including such a time value is that a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 Seconds), or a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds) in which an effect is received when an operation means to which an operation opportunity is given is maintained in an operation state for a predetermined time or more and a post-operation effect is generated. In the effective period (production reception period), even if the operation is started after the effective period is started, the operation and the long press are repeated a plurality of times / appropriate times until the effective period ends. Can be done over.

  In view of such facts, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation) among the above-mentioned time settings, a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) may be used It is desirable to That is, in this case, “15 seconds (restoration process)”, “8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)”, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds" obtained by adding "3 seconds (special effect reception period)" and "10 seconds (action after operation)" is allocated, and "15 seconds Generate special presentation reception period at a timing later than "23 seconds" or "25 seconds" added with (restoration process) and "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)" As described above, the effect is to be developed, and among the effect patterns A to E, only the effect pattern E can be implemented as an effect pattern that satisfies the condition.

  In addition, for multiple operation effective period (for example, 8 seconds) and long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds), it does not necessarily occur among the effect patterns (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period. It may be generated by another effect pattern. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds). Will set the length of the valid period on the generating side in place of 2 seconds (setting operation). In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) can generate both a valid operation period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds), these effective periods It is desirable to set the long side of in place of 2 seconds (setting operation).

  Further, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, it is required to absorb the symbol variation one after another in a shorter time, so in the gaming state in which the time shortening function is effective, each time setting described above It is not always necessary to design such a system. However, in this case, there is a concern that the special effect reception period may occur while the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). Therefore, even during the period when the restoration processing is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player. It is desirable to be able to obtain. According to such a configuration, although the restoration processing is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the post-operation effect as the effect using the movable operation means Can be implemented, and efficient processing can be realized in which both restoration processing and post-operation presentation for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) are performed in parallel. Note that this process is not limited to the gaming state in which the time saving function is enabled, but may be applied to a gaming state in which the time saving function is not enabled. In this case, the design according to each time setting described above Will not be performed.

  Further, in the example according to the rendering process described with reference to FIG. 284, the rendering using the movable operation means may be executed as any of the renderings shown in FIGS. 190 to 261. . When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the “effect using the movable operation means” shown in the figure is realized as an effect that sequentially performs the specific operation-related effect, the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect. The Rukoto.

  Further, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is generated only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if no operation is performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means is always performed within the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect may appear. When the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not controlled, there is an opportunity to operate the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at least during the symbol variation in the normal game state. The special reception period that is given does not occur, but the production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-described restoration processing in the case of abnormality or failure is generated. Is possible. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-described restoration process in the case of abnormality / failure is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can also occur when. When such a configuration is adopted, the design for each time setting described above may be performed, but the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) may be provided without performing the design for each time setting described above. It is possible to ensure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can generate a special performance reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred.

  Moreover, in the example according to the effect processing, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by setting operation by the player, but control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) The game does not necessarily have to be made by the player's operation. For example, it is controlled based on the result of the big hit judgment, or the setting to the automatic button rendering state itself is not performed, and the automatic rendering function always functions It may be provided as a possible game machine.

[Post-operation presentation that suggests the automatically accepted operation target]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the first reception effect (the effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) according to the establishment of a predetermined effect condition is executed. Even if no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the period, when a predetermined timing arrives within the period during which the first reception effect is executed, the effect reception is automatically generated and the operation button 410 is operated. The same post-operation effects are executed. In addition, an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is performed within a period in which a second reception effect (an effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) according to establishment of an effect condition different from the predetermined effect condition is executed. Similarly, when the second reception effect is executed, when the predetermined timing arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the sword ornament 5001 is operated is performed. It is supposed to be executed. Accordingly, even if the operation means on the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to which the operation opportunity is not given is erroneously operated when the reception effect occurs, the operation opportunity is lost during the operation. It is suppressed that the situation where it becomes impossible to confirm a post production will occur. The “predetermined production condition” and the “production condition different from the predetermined production condition” can be established separately as a result of the production determination based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, if there is a case where the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know due to “look away” and the effect is executed after the operation according to the effect reception, the effect after the operation becomes the operation target The player is generated without any involvement with the operating means (for example, the operation button 410). That is, in this case, the player can not recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is the post-operation effect generated due to the operation, and thus the first reception effect and the second reception effect If the degree of expectation is different, it may be impossible to recognize it, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned different rendering condition is the ratio at which the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied (the ratio at which the first reception rendering is performed) Judgment concerning various effects (representation judgment based on the result of the big hit judgment) is performed so as to be higher than the ratio satisfied (the ratio that the second reception effect is executed), and within the symbol variation based on the result of the judgment Control related to production is performed. As a result, even when the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it is possible to predict that the possibility that the first reception effect has been executed is relatively high. Become.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the effect reception is automatically generated, an image ("No. If it is the reception effect of 1, it corresponds to the button image BTG, and if it is the second reception effect, it corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG), and the above-mentioned automatically generated effect is maintained as it is in the display state. After the operation based on the reception, the effect is started. According to such a configuration, even when the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, the effect after operation is executed while the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably suppress not being able to recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is the post-operation effect generated due to the operation.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color and transmittance) and the display position of the “image suggesting the type of operation target” may be the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated. However, what is important is that the type of the operation means that is the operation target is expressed as a display on the effect display device 1600 when the effect after the operation is started. That's fine. Further, when the post-operation effect is generated based on the reception of the effect generated by the operation by the player, the “image suggesting the type of operation target” may be hidden when the post-operation effect is generated. As in the case where the above-described production reception is automatically generated, the post-operation production based on the operation by the player is started while the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and is maintained in the display state. You may do it. However, in view of simplification of design and processing load, regardless of whether or not the production reception is automatically generated, the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and is maintained in the display state. Then, it is desirable to start the effect after the operation based on the operation by the player.

  FIG. 285 shows an example of the progress of the production when the post-operation production is started while the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and maintained in the display state when the production reception is automatically generated. It is a time chart which shows. FIGS. 286 and 287 are diagrams showing an example of an effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern to be developed in the effect shown in FIG. 285 is executed. In this production example, description will be made on the assumption that production reception can be automatically generated.

  That is, the specific effect pattern that can be set as the “effect reception period allowing the reception (operation)” of the timing tf1 to tf3 in the symbol change execution period while being controlled in the automatic button effect state. Is started based on the result of the big hit determination, as shown in FIG. 286 (a), in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is first displayed in a variable manner.

  In this specific effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), it is expected that the effect reception (operation) will be permitted soon before the arrival of the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) in the execution period of the symbol variation. As the suggested precursory effects, the specific operation related effects (which may be the specific operation related effects illustrated separately from this) illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246 and the like are performed. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. And the common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, it is concealed to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given . However, when timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) comes after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation. It is expected that the rendering situation indicating that it is in the state appears, or that the rendering situation indicating that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state appears as the second rendering result having a relatively high degree of expectation. Which of the operation button 410 with a low degree and the sword ornament 5001 with a relatively high expectation is given an operation opportunity is shown.

  FIG. 286 (c) shows the result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b), and as a result, the operation as the first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation at timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) A presentation situation indicating that the button 410 should be operated appears, and a first reception presentation where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started (on the basis of the result of the jackpot determination) The first rendering condition (rendering pattern in which the rendering result shown in FIG. 286 (d) appears later) or the second rendering condition (rendering result shown in FIG. 286 (e) (displayed later) The production situation) when the pattern) is satisfied.

  In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (an image with the operation button 410 taken over) is displayed in the display area, and an operation on the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set to allow acceptance of effects, and a predetermined timing within the effective period (here In the above, it is assumed that the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated at timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

  That is, in this case, the same change as that in the case where the presentation is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the period (FIG. 285: timing tf1 to tf3) set so that the acceptance of the presentation is allowed is generated. It becomes. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect (the figure is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the chance!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600). 286 (d)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates, and a high-expected aspect effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 286 (e)). ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  However, even if the effect after operation is executed in any of the modes, the overhead image (button image BTG) with the operation button 410 turned on is not hidden and is maintained, and the effect after operation is started. Even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, the effect after the operation is performed according to the “effect reception for the operation button 410” (relatively high expectation Can be recognized as a post-operation effect on the lower side.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 285, the period during which the effect reception is allowed is terminated early at timing tf2 when the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and the effect reception is automatically generated. It will be. After that, while the acceptance of the effect is not permitted, the effect after the operation is started while the image (button image BTG) with the operation button 410 turned on is displayed, but the operation button 410 is turned on. The bird's-eye view image (button image BTG) is not displayed before timing tf5 at which the effect after the operation is ended comes.

  According to such a configuration, a bird's-eye view image is displayed over the operation means (here, the operation button 410) which has been set as the operation target within the period from the start of the effect after operation to the end thereof. A period (timing tf2 to tf4) and a period (timing tf4 to tf5) in which the same image is not displayed appear. Therefore, the overhead image is not displayed even when the effect after operation is started with the overhead image displayed over the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that has been the operation target kept in the display state. It will be expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension due to having to confirm the post-operation presentation before being done.

  In this effect example, the period from timing tf2 to tf3 and the period from timing tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length. According to such a configuration, when the time obtained by doubling the “remaining time indicated by the bar display” has passed when the effect reception is automatically generated, the operation unit (in this case, the operation button) As it becomes possible to recognize that the bird's-eye view image that is turned over 410) is hidden, it is suppressed that the bird's-eye view image is overlooked (the bird's-eye view image is not displayed during execution of the effect after operation) It will be expected to reduce the decline in the game entertainment when played. In this case, the bar display may be continued without being hidden when the production reception is automatically generated.

  On the other hand, in this presentation example, in the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related presentation shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed, it is not the presentation situation shown in FIG. The rendering status shown in 287 (f) (third rendering condition (a rendering pattern in which the rendering result shown in FIG. 287 (g) described later appears in the rendering determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination), or the fourth There are cases where the rendering condition (a rendering situation in the case where a rendering pattern in which a rendering result shown in FIG. 287 (h) described later appears) is satisfied is displayed.

  Also in this effect situation (FIG. 287 (f)), as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (an overhead image looking over the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, An instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, character display such as “press”, arrow display downward, and bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. Under the present circumstances, the point that the operation button 410 made into the provision object of the operation opportunity is in the light emission state is also the same as that of the presentation condition shown to FIG. 286 (c).

  However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), the button image BTG (the overhead image with the operation button 410 being turned over) is displayed in a specific mode (here, a mode in which a flame is worn). The rate at which the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation (relative to the expectation as the effect after the operation) than in the case of the normal mode (here, the mode in which the flame is not shown) that appeared in the rendering situation shown in 286 (c) It has been suggested that the situation where high rendering results (here, the rate at which “super heat !!” appears) is high.

  Also in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period (FIG. 285: timing tf1 to tf3) set so that the reception of the effect is permitted, and a predetermined timing (here) In the above, it is assumed that the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated at timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

  In this regard, even when the effect reception is automatically generated when the button image BTG is in the effect state displayed in the specific mode, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and (h), the button image BTG is in the normal mode. As in the above-described case (FIGS. 286 (d) and (e)) where the production reception is automatically generated when the production status is displayed, the “specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) does not operate and the production display device. In 1600, a chance to display a low expectation mode (see FIG. 287 (g)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates, and a stunning heat! The displayed high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 287 (h)) is executed as an effect (the same change as when effect is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410) after the operation.

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and (h), even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner, the heel image with the operation button 410 turned off is not hidden, The post-operation effect is started in a state where this is displayed in a specific mode (here, a mode of wearing a flame). As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated at a place that the player does not know, the post-operation production is performed in response to the “production reception for the operation button 410”, and a highly expected specific aspect It is possible to recognize that the button image BTG has been displayed in (here, a mode in which a flame burns).

  That is, in this effect example, even when the same effect mode (for example, chance!) Appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the 態 様 image with the operation button 410 displayed is displayed in a specific mode. When the post-production is started (see, for example, FIG. 287 (g)), when the post-production production is started while the heel image with the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode (for example, (See FIG. 286 (d)), the ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols is higher than that, so that it is possible to recognize such a difference in performance even after the start of the post-operation effect. It will be expected to be maintained.

  In this production example as well, the timing when the period during which the production acceptance is permitted ends, the timing at which the habit image (specific mode) with the operation button 410 hidden is hidden, and the period from timing tf2 to tf3. The point where the period of timing tf3 to tf4 is set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 285, which is the same as the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to (e). is there.

  On the other hand, in this rendering example, the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation related rendering shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed is shown in FIG. 286 (c) or 287 (f). In any of the rendering situations shown in FIG. 287 (i), the fifth rendering condition (the rendering result shown in FIG. 287 (j) described later appears in the rendering determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination) There may be a case where the effect pattern when the effect pattern) or the sixth effect condition (effect pattern showing the effect shown in FIG. 287 (k) described later) is satisfied.

  In this effect situation (FIG. 287 (i)), as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG (a cocoon image in which the sword decoration body 5001 is worn) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area. In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (here, a character display such as “Put the sword”, an arrow display in the lower right direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the performance reception is allowed) Is supposed to appear. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 to be given an operation opportunity is moved to the operation position, thereby allowing the player to operate the original position.

  And also in this example of production, the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) operated as an operation target within a period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so as to allow the reception of effects is operated. It is assumed that the automatic rendering function for the sword decorative body 5001 is activated at a predetermined timing (here, timing tf2 (see FIG. 285)) within the effective period.

  In this regard, even when the production reception is automatically generated when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the production status in which the button image BTG is displayed as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and (k). As in the above-described case (FIG. 286 (d), (e) or FIG. 287 (g), (h)) in which the production reception is automatically generated when First, the low expectation mode effect (see FIG. 287 (j)) in which the chance !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or “the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)” operates, and the effect display device 1600 “Highly expected aspect effect (see FIG. 287 (k))” is displayed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when the effect was accepted by an operation on the sword ornament 5001). It has become.

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and (k), the sword decoration image SYG in which the sword decoration body 5001 is dressed is not displayed even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner. The post-operation effect is started in the displayed state. Thereby, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it can be recognized that the effect after the operation is performed according to the “effect reception for the sword decorative body 5001”. Become.

  That is, in this example, even if the same effect mode (for example, chance !!) appears as the effect after the operation, the operation is performed while the sword decoration image SYG in which the sword decoration 5001 is turned is displayed. When the after effect is started (see, for example, FIG. 287 (j)), when the after operation is started while the overhead image with the operation button 410 being displayed is displayed in the normal mode or the specific mode As the percentage of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than that of (see, for example, FIG. 286 (d) or 287 (g)), it is expected to maintain game interest favorably. .

  In this production example as well, the timing when the period during which the production acceptance is permitted ends, the timing at which the spear image (sword decoration image SYG) on the sword decoration 5001 is hidden, and the timing tf2 to tf3. The period and the period from timing tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length as shown in FIG. 285. In the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to (e) It is the same.

  According to the production examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, since the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, the operation target suggestion is performed. Both the image mode and the post-operation effect mode can be confirmed at the same time, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when the production situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) appears, when the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) appears, FIG. 287 (i) When the production situation shown in the above appears, the same production content appears as the post-operation production. However, instead of this, the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) and the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) (in the situation where the reception effect is generated where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) In the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (i), the same post-operation production is generated but the reception production in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 is produced. A post effect (for example, a post-operation effect shown in FIG. 269) may be generated. In addition, a different post-operation effect is produced for each effect situation in the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), and the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i). You may make it appear. In addition, when these other examples are adopted, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) may not necessarily be performed.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, after performing the “prediction effect shown in FIG. “Reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (production situation shown in FIGS. 286 (c) and 287 (f))” and “Operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. "Reception effect (the effect status shown in FIG. 287 (i))" is generated, but "Reception effect (to FIG. 287 (i) where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001" is given. It is not always necessary to generate the “presentation status shown)”. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 286 (c), a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 at the timing tf1 after the sign effect that suggests that the reception effect will be generated soon is executed. One of the effect status and the effect status shown in FIG. 287 (f) is displayed. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect after the operation is started. The degree of expectation for the post-operation effect is different depending on whether the habit image is displayed in the normal mode or whether it is displayed in a specific mode with a high degree of expectation (in this case, a mode of wearing a flame) Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In this case, it is desirable that the content of the sign effect is executed as a sign that cannot appear in the sign effect when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. In addition, a common omen is displayed when the cocoon image with the operation button 410 displayed is displayed in a normal mode and when the cocoon image is displayed in a specific mode with high expectation (here, a mode of wearing a flame). It is desirable that the effect is executed and the effect is developed so that a habit image with the operation button 410 appearing as a result appears in a normal mode or a specific mode.

  Moreover, about the bird's-eye view image which looked up the operation button 410, it shall be displayed in either of three or more modes including a normal mode and a specific mode, and an expectation differs depending on which of those modes is displayed. You may do it. However, in the above presentation example, even if a bird's-eye view image with the operation button 410 turned over is displayed in any of these modes at timing tf1, post-operation presentation is started while the mode of the bird's-eye view image is displayed. It will be.

  In addition, after a specific sign effect appears, “the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c)”, “the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f)”, and “the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c)”. Similarly to the above, in the effect display device 1600, a bird's-eye view image in which the operation button 410 is turned over is displayed in a normal mode, but when there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not activated. One of the effect situations (not shown) may not appear. That is, in this case, when a reception effect is generated in which a bird's-eye view image in which the operation button 410 is turned over is displayed in a normal mode, it is grasped whether the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated when there is no operation by the player. Since it can be made difficult, it is expected that the sense of tension when the reception effect is generated (tension about whether the player should operate it and start the effect after the operation) should be suitably maintained. Become so. On the other hand, when the bird's-eye view image in which the operation button 410 is swung is displayed in a specific mode, even if the player does not perform the operation, the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated and the post-operation rendering always occurs Therefore, coupled with suggesting that the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to suitably improve the gaming interest.

  It should be noted that, based on the result of the big hit determination, instead of “the production situation shown in FIG. 286 (c)”, like the production situation shown in FIG.摸 When an image is displayed in a normal manner, but when there is no operation by the player, an automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not activated and an effect state (not shown) in which an effect after operation is not executed is generated If the operation button 410 is not operated before the production reception period ends, the post-operation production is not executed. However, in this case as well, when the production acceptance period ends and the production situation is not permitted, production of the operation button 410 is not hidden and the image is kept displayed in the normal mode. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, in a production situation in which a post-operation effect is not executed without an operation by the player even though a reception effect in which a spear image with the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal manner has occurred. When the habit image with the operation button 410 being defeated is displayed in the normal mode in the next reception effect, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. In particular, it is expected to prompt the player to operate without excessive expectation.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 to FIG. 287, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, the display mode of the bird's eye image with the operation button 410 turned over or the eyebrow image with the sword decoration 5001 turned is changed. Although it was made to start production after operation in the state where these overhead view images were displayed by the display mode changed, the display mode and display position in the effect reception period are the same as the operation position of the operation button 410 The effect may be started after the operation in a state where an image or a bird's-eye view image looking over the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed.

  The after-operation effect started with the bird's-eye view of the operation button 410 and the bird's-eye view of the sword decorative body 5001 displayed is light emission by the display effect on the effect display device 1600 and the lamp provided on the game board 5 It may be any one of an effect, an effect by sound, and a movable effect by a decorative combination, or may be an appropriate combination of these effects. In addition, although it will be described later, a first after-operation effect that starts with a bird's-eye view of the operation button 410 or a sword image of the sword decoration 5001 displayed, a bird's-eye view of the operation button 410, sword decoration A second post-operation effect starting after timing tf4 at which the bird's-eye view image looking over the body 5001 is not displayed may be respectively executed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 to FIG. 287, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, the operation is performed while the bird's-eye image with the operation button 410 turned over or the eyelid image with the sword decoration 5001 turned over The post-production was started. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started while the spear image with the operation button 410 or the spear image with the sword ornament 5001 displayed. It is desirable to make the post-operation effect be performed in the same process as in the above case.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287 as well, in the case of the effect example described later, a spear image in which the operation button 410 is touched or a spear image in which the sword decorative body 5001 is touched is dynamically displayed. The post-operation effect may be started in a state where the dynamic display is maintained.

  The operation button 410 is also displayed when the warning effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is generated soon and the warning effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is executed. The post-operation effect may be started while the hazy haze image is displayed.

[Post-operation effects that make it difficult to recognize the timing of automatic reception]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, if it is desired that the player perform an operation after the operation by the player's own operation while such an "automatic effect function" can be activated, a predetermined period of time during which the reception effect is performed will be made. It is necessary to operate before the received timing (the timing at which the automatic rendering function is activated) comes, and if the player is trying to operate it, the effective period as the reception rendering is that much It will be substantially shortened. Therefore, in such a situation where the reception effect is being executed, it is not possible to recognize what operation should be performed, or an image suggesting the elapsed time (remaining time) after the effective period has occurred If there is something to be confirmed one by one, when the player himself tries to operate, the effect reception may be automatically generated, and there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be lowered.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a spear image obtained by tricking a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is an object of receiving an effect is displayed as a plurality of spear images (for example, the operation buttons 410). "How to move a specific operation means" by displaying it as a moving image by sequentially displaying a plurality of spider images drawn in different operating states (operation states) as The method of operation is to be suggested. In addition, when displaying a bird's-eye view image as a moving image in this manner, a predetermined bird's-eye view image determined in advance among a plurality of bird's-eye view images is displayed as an image to be displayed first. By sequentially displaying the bird's-eye view images, it is only necessary to see how much the display as the moving image has progressed, and an elapsed time since the specific reception effect (effective period) occurs It is also possible to recognize.

  That is, in this case, just by looking at a habit image deceiving the specific operation means that is the subject of the effect reception, the operation method for “how to move the specific operation means” and the specific reception effect are executed. It becomes possible to simultaneously recognize the elapsed time since the period (the effective period) has occurred. As a result, it becomes possible to shorten the time required to grasp the operation method and the remaining time after the player thinks that he or she wants to operate, and as a result, it can be operated before automatic reception of the effect reception occurs. It is expected to be encouraged.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of automatically generating the effect reception at a timing after half of the period during which the specific reception effect is executed. Also by this, it is made to urge to be able to operate before the production reception is automatically generated.

  However, even if these processes are performed, it is not possible to completely avoid a situation in which the production reception is automatically generated before the player himself operates. Therefore, it can be said that it is more important to take measures to make it difficult for the game entertainment interest to be lowered even if the situation occurs. Note that, when the countermeasure is taken, the above-described process of “prompt to be able to operate before the production reception is automatically generated” may not be necessarily performed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, even if the effect reception is automatically generated, the process of displaying the overhead view image as a moving image is continued without stopping. That is, by continuously displaying the overhead image as the moving image continuously after the effect reception is automatically generated and the effect is started after the operation, a predetermined time after the generation of the effect reception is automatically generated (moving image It is difficult to recognize that the effects are started after the operation while the image is continued), and the player performs the operation while the overhead image as the moving image is continuously displayed. For example, it is possible to give an impression that the post-operation effect has been started by the operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the player is performed after the “automatic generation of the effect reception”, it seems as if the effect change has occurred due to the operation. In order to give a good impression, the post-operation effects are executed as stepwise effects. This makes it possible to give the impression that the stage change after the second stage is caused by the player's operation, and the player's operation opportunity is deprived by the “automatic reception of the stage reception”. It is expected to make it difficult to have a strong impression.

  FIG. 288 shows a samurai image (sword decoration image SYG) in which a specific operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) that is the target of the effect reception when a specific reception effect occurs, FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example when images are displayed as moving images by sequentially displaying images (here, a plurality of cocoon images depicted so that the operation states (operation states) as the sword ornament 5001 are different). is there.

  Now, assuming that a period during which a specific reception effect is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the effect reception is allowed has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a uses specific operation means (here, First, a sword decoration image SYGa (predetermined sword image) shown in FIG. 288 (a) is displayed as a “first displayed image” as a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) with a sword decoration body 5001). At this time, a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the production reception is allowed is also displayed in a state where the gauge is full.

  Here, the sword decoration image SYGa shown in FIG. 288 (a) is a moving image of “a bird's-eye view image looking over the sword decoration 5001” when a reception effect is given to the sword decoration 5001 when an operation opportunity is given. When displaying as an image, it is always selected as the "image to be displayed first." That is, the state in which the bar display of "gauge full" is displayed within the period in which the effect reception is permitted may be regarded as the state in which the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed, and these images correspond to each other. It can be said that it is a thing.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 288 (b) to 288 (f), the bar display indicating the remaining time is depicted as a moving image whose gauge amount is decreased with the passage of time (a plurality of gauge A plurality of bird's-eye view images (in the figure, the sword decoration is displayed so that the motion amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG is represented as a moving image that increases with time). The images SYGb to SYGf) are displayed in a predetermined order.

  According to such a configuration, just by looking at the movement of the sword decoration image SYG that appears when a specific reception effect occurs, an operation method for “how to operate the sword decoration body 5001”, It is possible to recognize both the elapsed time since the period during which the performance acceptance is allowed (which can be grasped by the operation amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). It will be. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to generate a timing at which the production reception automatically occurs before the player performs an operation, even though the player himself has attempted to operate it. become.

  Here, in the specific reception effect, the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) of the period during which the effect reception is permitted (the timing after half of the period during which the specific reception effect is executed has elapsed) The production receptionist is automatically generated at. Therefore, when the player tries to operate it, it is required to operate the sword decorative body 5001 until the moving image as the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and developed in the "sword decoration image SYGd". It becomes.

  By the way, even if there is no operation by the player, if the specific reception effect is executed so that the reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d), the “sword decoration image SYGe” and The “sword decoration image SYGf” can be said to be an image that cannot be originally displayed regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the production reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d), the “sword decoration image SYGe” and “sword decoration image SYGf” are used. Is intentionally displayed, which will be described later.

  In FIG. 289 to FIG. 291, although a specific reception effect is generated in which a bird's-eye view image looking over the sword decorative body 5001 is dynamically displayed, the operation by the player is performed until the timing of automatically generating the effect reception comes. It is a figure which shows the example about the effect which appears when it is not in time. In this production example, description will be made on the assumption that production reception can be automatically generated.

  In FIG. 289 (a), the number of reservations is 2 and the effect display device 1600 performs the change display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. Indicates the situation.

  FIG. 289 (b) shows that the specific moving image TDG is based on the fact that a predetermined rendering condition (first rendering condition) is satisfied during execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 289 (a). It shows the presentation status of the display started. The “predetermined production condition” includes, for example, accumulating a certain value of scores accumulated in the production.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect mode that causes the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity is set as the execution waiting state (up to three times ) It is possible to execute a process to make it wait. In this respect, in FIG. 289 (b), in the effect display device 1600, the display of “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is started within a frame obtained by shaping the first coin and “sword stock”. By performing a display to change the count value from “0” to “1”, “the effect mode that causes the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity” is in the effect state that is newly put into the execution standby state Has come to be suggested.

  Here, with regard to the specific moving image TDG according to this production example, each image shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to (e) is displayed as a moving image by being sequentially displayed within a frame shaped with coins. It has become. Then, after the “image shown in FIG. 255 (b)” is displayed and the images shown in “FIG. 255 (e)” are sequentially displayed, a series of these displays (FIG. 255 (b) to ( e) is repeated by loop processing.

  In FIG. 289 (c), after the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” shown in FIG. 289 (b) is started to be displayed, the predetermined rendering condition (first rendering condition) is satisfied again Based on the fact that a new "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)", which is different from the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" which has already been started to be displayed, has been started to be displayed Is shown.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, “effect mode for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity” is set as the execution waiting state (maximum It is possible to execute a waiting process (up to three times). In this respect, in FIG. 289 (c), the second coin in the effect display device 1600 in which “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is displayed within the frame where the first coin is formed. Even within the frame shaped, the “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” is newly displayed and the count value of “sword stock” is changed from “1” to “2”. It is suggested that the “mode of producing an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” for two times is in a production state in which the execution is awaited.

  Here, in this production example, when the display of “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” is newly started in the frame formed of the second coin, the frame formed of the first coin. In this case, a process of displaying in synchronization with the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” that is already being displayed is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment performs processing for updating the timer value of the predetermined timer for the specific moving image TDG every predetermined time. The image corresponding to the timer value (any one of the images shown in FIGS. 255B to 255E) is selectively displayed as the “first displayed image”.

  For example, if the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated every predetermined time within the range of “1” to “4”, when the above-referenced timer value is “1”, FIG. ) Is selectively displayed as “first displayed image”, and when the above-referenced timer value is “2”, the image illustrated in FIG. 255C is displayed as “first displayed image”. When the timer value referred to above is “3”, the image shown in FIG. 255 (d) is selectively displayed as “first displayed image”. When the referenced timer value is “4”, the image shown in FIG. 255 (e) is selectively displayed as “first displayed image”. Then, after the new display of the specific moving image TDG is started in this way, whenever the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated, an image corresponding to the updated timer value is newly set as the “specific moving image TDG”. Display the image so that the previously displayed image is hidden. By performing such processing for the specific moving image TDGa in the first coin and the specific moving image TDGb in the second coin, respectively, the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image are processed. TDGb is displayed as a moving image synchronized with each other regardless of the display start timing (in FIG. 289 (c), both the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are shown in FIG. 255 (d). Displayed as an image shown). The method for synchronously displaying the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDLb is not limited to this, and other methods may be adopted.

  However, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not display any specific moving image TDG for the update process for each predetermined time with respect to the predetermined timer (for example, the situation shown in FIG. 289 (a)). In addition to the above, it is also executed in the case where the symbol variation is not performed, etc.), and within the frame formed by the first coin, the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG) ”Is started indefinitely so that which of the images shown in FIGS. 255B to 255E is selected as the“ first displayed image ”is different each time. According to the timing at which the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, “the image to be displayed first” changes. That is, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a “moving image as a sword decoration image SYG” in which a “first image to be displayed” is predetermined within a period during which a specific reception effect is performed. (FIG. 288 (a) to (f)) ”and“ moving image as specific moving image TDG (FIG. 255 (b) to (e)) ”in which“ first displayed image ”is indefinite. Is displayed.

  After the specific moving image TDGb is newly displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are each displayed as a moving image display synchronized with each other. .

  Then, while the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are displayed as a moving image display synchronized with each other in this way, the effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 that is in the above-described waiting state is displayed. When the condition (second rendering condition) for executing “2” is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is displayed in the first coin as shown in FIG. 289 (e). It is suggested that the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” is started by performing a display in which a production operation (predetermined movement) like a coin toss appears in the “specific moving image TDGa”. Like to do. At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs processing to change the "sword stock 2" displayed until that time to "during stock release", and a cointoss to "specific moving image TDGa" for the background image. It is made to produce the presentation change (effect) accompanying the appearance operation (predetermined movement) appearing.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a rendering operation (predetermined movement) such as coin toss appears in the “specific moving image TDGa”, as shown in FIG. 289 (f), the “specific moving image TDGa” is displayed. Is performed without moving it back to its original position, and the “mode of producing an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” is executed, whereby the player to the specific moving image TDGa The gaze by is encouraged. Here, as the effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001, first, displays such as "Sweeping chance" and "I want to wear a sword" are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, a process of moving the sword ornament 5001 to the operation position is performed.

  From this point onward, the specified moving image TDGa that has performed a predetermined movement continues to progress in display from before moving in the moved state. Therefore, the specific moving image TDGa is displayed and advanced as a moving image display synchronized with the specific moving image TDGb displayed in the second coin even in the moved state. In the moved state, the specific moving image TDGa according to this embodiment is displayed in a mode different from that before moving (here, in a state of being slightly rotated sideways). It is suggested that the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity” is in a started state.

  Then, in this way, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the "effect mode for generating the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001" is started, as shown in FIG. 290 (g), the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 The specific receptionist presentation to which is given is started. In a specific reception effect, a bird's-eye view image looking over the sword decorative body 5001 is dynamically displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 288, whereby a sword decoration image that appears when a specific reception effect is generated. Just look at the movement of SYG, how to operate "How to operate the sword decoration 5001" and the elapsed time from the time when the acceptance of the presentation acceptance is allowed (the sword decoration image SYGa As described above, it is possible to recognize both the starting point and the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG.

  Therefore, also in this effect example, assuming that an effective period corresponding to a specific reception effect occurs at the timing shown in FIG. 290 (h), (i) (corresponding to FIGS. 288 (b), (c)) after “bar display indicating the remaining time is displayed” in the manner shown in FIG. 288 (a). The display progresses in each mode.

  However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the player does not perform the operation within the effective period corresponding to the specific reception effect, and is shown in FIG. 290 (j) (corresponding to FIG. 288 (d)). When the timing arrives, an effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is started.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, the spear image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as a moving image even when the effect reception is automatically generated within the specific reception effect. It is supposed to continue without interrupting the processing. In other words, as shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l), a spear image (sword decoration image) as a moving image even after the effect reception is automatically generated and the post-operation effect is started. SYG) is continuously displayed as it is, so that it is recognized that the post-operation effect is in a predetermined period after the effect is automatically generated (while the moving image is continued). If the player performs an operation while the sword decoration image SYG is continuously displayed (within the period shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l)). By this operation, it is possible to give an impression as if the post-operation effect has been started.

  Further, in this rendering example, after the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is at least continued (within the periods shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l)), after the operation The same (common) effect mode (expected degree is the same even in the case of causing any of the first effect result (FIG. 290 (m)) and the second effect result (FIG. 290 (n)) having different degrees of expectation to appear as effects (A mode that is not suggested) appears (first stage change in production). Here, as shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l), the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the “mode in which the aura member 5040 appears” as the “same effect mode” and An effect equivalent to the aura member is also displayed on the sword decoration image SYG displayed on the display device 1600.

  Then, after the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol variation, “the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) operates and the effect Low expected mode effect display (see FIG. 291 (m)) displayed on display device 1600 ”or“ specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates, and the display device 1600 generates intense heat! The “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 291 (n))” in which “!” Is displayed is further executed as an operation effect (a second-stage effect change) after the operation. Further, while the degree of expectation is suggested by the post-operation effect, drive control is performed to return the sword ornament 5001 and the aura member 5040 to their original positions.

  As described above, according to the configuration in which the post-operation effect is executed as a stepwise effect, the operation by the player is “automatic generation of effect reception (timing shown in FIG. 290 (j) (FIG. 288 (d)))”. In the case where the dynamic display as the sword decorative image SYG is continued even if it is not in time (in the time shown in FIG. 290 (l) (FIG. 288 (f))) If so, the post-operation effect (the second-stage effect change) is performed in a manner in which the degree of expectation is suggested. It is expected that "automatic generation of effect reception" will make it difficult to give the impression of the player being deprived of the operation opportunity.

  In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, the effective period corresponding to the reception effect in the particular reception effect (FIGS. 290 (g) to (j) and 291 (k) and (l)). The image to be displayed at the time of starting (the image to be displayed first) is a predetermined "moving image as sword decoration image SYG (Fig. 288 (a) to (f))" and the image is undefined Each time, a “moving image as a specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))” is displayed. That is, the progress situation in the "moving image as the specific moving image TDG (Fig. 255 (b) to (e))", not the "moving image as the sword decoration image SYG (Fig. 288 (a) to (f))". There is a possibility that the player side may recognize the elapsed time from the start of the specific reception effect when the player side confirms it, but according to the above configuration, the specific reception effect is generated. As a result of erroneous recognition of the elapsed time since the start of the game, a situation occurs in which the operation by the player is not in time for "automatic generation of effect reception (FIG. 290 (j) (timing shown in FIG. 288 (d))". Even in this case, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Incidentally, the specific reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291 is also basically developed in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 290 (g) appears, and at timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 290 (j) appears. It has become. However, at timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, only post-operation effect not indicating the expectation is executed, and at timing tf4 shown in FIG. 285, the moving image continued as the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed. It can be said that this is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 in that the effect after operation indicating the degree of expectation is newly started after the arrival of. In addition, in the example of this effect, the above-described other example regarding FIG. 285 may be applied.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from when the effect reception is automatically generated until the period initially set as the effect reception period ends (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time (timing tf3 to tf4) from the timing when the period initially set as the production reception period ends to the time when the moving image is not displayed is set as the same length of time. desirable.

  It should be noted that a plurality of modes are prepared as the specific moving image TDG, and a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation are prepared as a spear image (here, the sword decoration image SYG) that tricks the operation means to be operated. In addition, when the predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied, it is determined which of the plurality of aspects is displayed as the specific moving image TDG, and the specific moving image TDG is displayed in any of these aspects. Depending on whether it is done or not, an aspect with a high degree of expectation may easily appear as the overhead image (here, the sword decoration image SYG).

  In the above presentation example, the second presentation condition is satisfied after two specific moving image TDGs are displayed, and "the presentation mode for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity" is exemplified. However, the second effect condition may be satisfied in a state where only one specific moving image TDG is displayed. In addition, even when the second rendering condition is satisfied (when a predetermined motion appears in the specific moving image TDG), “a rendering mode for causing an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001” is not necessarily required. For example, one of a plurality of effect modes including “effect mode for generating an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001” may be selectively performed. Also, in the above-mentioned effect example, such a specific moving image TDG may not necessarily be displayed, and a specific reception effect is started when a predetermined timing arrives while symbol effect is being performed. It may be

  Despite the fact that “same spear image (here, sword decoration image SYG)” and “bar display with the same length” are displayed within the effective period during which the reception of the production is permitted, the acceptance of the production is permitted. The first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in the length of the effective period may be performed. In other words, in this case, regarding the “bar display”, the rate at which the gauge amount decreases in accordance with the length of the effective period is changed. However, for the “摸 image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” Regardless of which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, an operation method for “how to operate the operation target (here, the sword ornament 5001)”; Recognizing both the elapsed time since the period during which the production acceptance is permitted (which can be grasped by the operation amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). As it is possible, it is desirable to make the display progress as a moving picture in the same manner. According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being performed. As long as the image SYG) is confirmed, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time from the acceptance of the effect reception. Then, based on the elapsed time grasped in this way, whether the first reception effect or the second reception effect is being executed by checking whether the remaining gauge amount on the bar display is large or small. Can be recognized. That is, normally, the first reception effect and the second reception effect are often different in the expectation of the effect. Therefore, the post-operation effect is started by recognizing the type of the reception effect. , It will be expected to maintain the game interest favorably.

  When the first reception effect and the second reception effect described above are prepared, it is desirable that the time from when the valid period occurs until the effect reception is automatically generated is set as a different time. When the time is set differently in this way, the time until the stage reception is automatically generated is mistaken, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the operation is not in time even though the player himself has tried to operate. However, according to the production example in which the dynamic display by the “sword image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” is continued or the post-operation production is executed step by step, such a situation has occurred. However, the decline in the game entertainment will be suitably suppressed.

  In the above-described effect example, when a spear image (here, the sword decoration image SYG) that tricks the operation means to be operated in a specific reception effect is displayed as a moving image, as shown in FIG. The operation from “position to be operated (see FIG. 288 (a))” to “position where operation has been completed (see FIG. 288 (f))” is matched with the length of the effective period as the specific reception effect. We decided to make the display progress. However, one operation from “the position where the operation is started (see FIG. 288 (a))” to “the position where the operation is completed (see FIG. 288 (f))” is not necessarily matched with the length of the effective period. For example, the “operation start position (see FIG. 288 (a))” and the “operation end position (FIG. 288) are required over the time until the effective period ends. (Refer to (f)) ”. The point is that the image to be displayed at the start of the effective period corresponding to the reception effect (the image to be displayed first) is predetermined, and the moving image is in a predetermined order and progress rate thereafter as well. If progress (sequential display by a plurality of images) is allowed, an operation method for “how to operate the operation target (here, the sword decorative body 5001)” and an effect reception are permitted. Both the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period (which can be grasped by the movement amount of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa (here, movement amount including the number of times of reciprocation)) are respectively It is possible to recognize.

  In the above-described production example, the “post-operation production executed stepwise” performed based on the production reception may be another mode. For example, in a state in which a moving image as a spear image in which an operation means to be operated (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is worn is continued, the “light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5” is 1 Start as an effect after the operation of the stage. Then, after the moving image as a spear image in which the operation means to be operated (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is turned off is not displayed, and “light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5” "Is being executed as a first stage post-operation effect," display effect on the effect display device 1600 "or" movable effect by a decorative accessory "(or at least one of them) is in two steps. The effect is started after the operation of the eye (in the effect after the second-step operation, an effect target different from the effect target used in the effect after the first-step operation is used). According to such a configuration, "a light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5" means "a display effect on the effect display device 1600" or "a movable effect by a decoration role" (or at least one of them). It is expected that it will function as a prelude effect of the stage effect, so even if it is recognized that this is the effect after the first stage operation, the sense of incongruity (the effect is accepted and the predetermined time has passed Until then, it is possible to provide the post-operation presentation without the post-operation presentation using the presentation display device 1600 and the uncomfortable feeling that the presentation is not performed after the operation using the decorative combination.

  In addition, the same effect target (for example, light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5) is used in the effect after the first stage operation and the effect after the second stage operation, and then the operation object is selected. In a state where a moving image as a bird's-eye view image looking over the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is continued, post-operation rendering (light emission rendering by a lamp) is performed in a form that does not indicate an expectation In this way, after the moving image as the haze image is hidden, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) may be developed as an aspect in which the degree of expectation is suggested.

  A plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as modes of a moving image as a bird's-eye view looking at the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated, and the moving image is displayed in any of these modes Even in this case, the moving image may be continuously displayed even after the effect reception has occurred in any of the modes.

  Even if the bird's-eye view of the operating means (in this case, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is displayed as a moving image, if the operation for the operating means is not performed within the effective period, effects You may make it produce the special reception effect which does not generate | occur | produce by establishment of production conditions different from the production conditions which generate | occur | produce the said specific reception effect. That is, in this case, the effect reception is automatically generated by displaying “a moving image by the same bird's-eye view image (here, sword decoration image SYG)” and “a bar display with the same length”. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which “specific reception effect” or “special reception effect” in which the effect reception does not occur automatically, and provides a reception effect with a sense of tension. Will be able to However, in the case of a “specific reception effect” in which an effect reception is automatically generated and a “special reception effect” in which an effect reception is not automatically generated, it is possible for the effect reception to occur so that different effects appear as post-operation effects. This is desirable for recognizing which reception effect it was. In addition, the production pattern that allows only one of the “specific reception production” where the production reception is automatically generated and the “special reception production” where the production reception does not automatically occur, or both of them occur at different timings. By preparing a possible effect pattern and performing any one of a plurality of effect patterns including the effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination at the time of pattern change, at a predetermined timing within the pattern change “ A “specific reception effect” or a “special reception effect” may appear.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, a moving image as a spear image in which the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) that is the operation target is deceived. While continuing the progress concerning the dynamic display, the post-operation presentation is started, and the post-operation presentation is performed stepwise. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by a player, a moving image as a spear image that tricks the operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) as an operation target is displayed as a moving image. It is desirable to start the post-operation effect while continuing the progress of the target display and to execute the post-operation effect in a stepwise manner so that the post-operation effect is executed in the same process.

[Post-operation effect that suggests the type of the automatically accepted reception effect effect]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 having such an "automatic effect function", since the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player has forgotten to operate it, the player has an operation opportunity. It is feared that it will be reduced to a mere display effect where only a predetermined moving image flows, as well as the sense of tension at the time of being given disappears.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate the first reception effect and the second reception effect that have different times from when the period during which the reception of the production is allowed to occur until the reception of the production automatically occurs. Above, regarding the remaining time image (for example, bar display) and the bird's-eye image (for example, button image BTG) displayed in the effect reception, respectively, the same image is used. In other words, in this case, it is urged to be misrecognized that the second reception effect has occurred despite the fact that the first reception effect has occurred. , “Due to the time when the stage reception is allowed, the stage reception should not automatically occur even though the stage where the stage reception should automatically occur has arrived (or the stage where the stage reception should automatically occur has not yet arrived. It is possible to maintain the tension until the reception of the production automatically occurs. It will be expected.

  However, even if the first reception effect is generated, what kind of effect will be generated if it is misrecognized that the time until the effect reception is automatically generated is different from the second reception effect being generated. It is not possible to understand whether progress has been made, and it is feared that the game entertainment will decline in the opposite direction. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the bar display indicating the remaining time as the effective period is continuously displayed even after the effect reception is automatically generated. That is, in this case, at the occurrence of an effective period in which the production reception is allowed, even if the first reception production or the second reception production is not recognized, the production reception is automatically generated (post-operation production starts. ) By making it possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect was being executed by confirming how much gauge remaining is left as a bar display when performing After the operation, the production can be started.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the same effect is produced and the same overhead image and the same bar display are displayed even when the effective period occurs, the same. It is possible to execute the progress of the effect which has the case where the effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period and the case where the effect reception is not automatically generated. In such a configuration, even if a omen effect or a reception effect is generated, it becomes impossible to distinguish whether or not the automatic reception is received within the effective period, so that the reception effect can be performed with a sense of tension. become able to.

  FIG. 292 and FIG. 293 are diagrams illustrating examples of the first reception effect and the second reception effect that have different times from when the period during which the effect reception is allowed (effective period) to when the effect reception is automatically generated. is there. In this production example, description will be made on the assumption that production reception can be automatically generated.

  292A is in the state where the number of reservations is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, and the reach state Shows the production situation that formed the.

  FIG. 292 (b) shows a presentation reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 292 (a) (here, the reach state may be a non-reach state). This shows a production situation in which a precursor production suggesting that is soon to be permitted.

  292 (c) shows the situation in which the first reception effect where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) is performed (the result of the jackpot determination In the effect determination performed on the basis of the first effect condition (effect pattern shown in FIG. 292 (e) described later effect pattern), or the second effect condition (FIG. 292 (f) described effect result The production situation) when the production pattern (which appears) is satisfied is shown.

  In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (an image with the operation button 410 taken over) is displayed in the display area, and an operation on the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the reception of the effect, and the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period. The case is assumed. FIG. 292 (d) depicts a portion where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated during the execution period (effective period) of the first reception effect, and the automatic rendering function is activated. Then, the same change as that in the case where the presentation is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set so that the acceptance of the presentation is allowed is caused. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 292 (e)) or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 292 (f)) in which the intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) operates. ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this effect example, even if the effect after operation is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 292 (e) and (f)), “the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is permitted is indicated. The bar display is made to start the post-operation effect in a state where it is not hidden and maintained. Thus, by confirming how much the remaining amount of the gauge remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the effect can be received after the period for which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in time until the automatic generation occurs. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, in this production example, after the presentation situation shown in FIG. 292 (a) appears, the presentation situation in which the prophecy effect shown in FIG. 293 (g) appears instead of the prophecy effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) (The third rendering condition (rendering pattern showing the rendering result shown in FIG. 293 (j) described later) or the fourth rendering condition (FIG. 293 (k) described in the rendering determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination) When the effect pattern in which the indicated effect result appears or the fifth effect condition (the effect pattern in the case where the effect condition shown in FIGS. 293 (l) and (m) described later is satisfied) appears There is.

  Then, after the precursor effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (g), the second reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started as shown in FIG. 293 (h). Will be.

  However, in this second reception effect, although the time from the occurrence of a period during which effect reception is permitted to the activation of the automatic effect function is shorter than the first reception effect, As shown in combination with 293 (c) and FIG. 293 (h), the button image BTG (the bird's-eye view image with the operation button 410) and the bar display (the gauge length is the same) suggesting the remaining time of the effective period And the same image as in the case of the first reception effect described above.

  That is, in this case, in either of the effect situations when the effect situation shown in FIG. 293 (c) is generated and when the effect situation shown in FIG. 293 (h) is generated, the first receptionist It becomes difficult to recognize which of the effect and the second reception effect is occurring, and it becomes possible to give a tense feeling as to when the effect reception occurs.

  And in this example of production, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that acceptance of the effect is permitted, and the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period. The case is assumed. FIG. 293 (i) depicts a state where the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated in the execution period (effective period) of the second reception effect. When the automatic rendering function is activated at a timing earlier than the second reception effect, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation on the operation button 410 is produced on the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure See “293 (j)” or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 293 (k) in which intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (crimson object) operates) ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this effect example, even if the effect after operation is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 293 (j) and (k)), “the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is permitted is indicated. The “bar display” is not hidden, but the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. Thus, by confirming how much the remaining amount of the gauge remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the effect can be received after the period for which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in time until the automatic generation occurs. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, in this effect example, even if the precursor effect in the form shown in FIG. 293 (g) and the reception effect in the form shown in FIG. 293 (h) are sequentially displayed, FIG. As shown in l), it is possible that the effect situation (fifth effect condition) in which the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated if the operation by the player is not performed. ing.

  That is, in this case, a precursor effect (see FIG. 293 (g)) of the same content occurs, and the same bar display (including gauge length, gauge reduction, etc.) also occurs when the effective period occurs. And (D) are respectively displayed, but the effect reception is executed as a second reception effect which is automatically generated within the effective period (see FIGS. 293 (i) to (k)), There is a case where there is a case in which there is a case where the event is executed as a third reception effect that does not occur automatically (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)). In such a configuration, even if a warning effect in which a specific aspect appears or a reception effect in which a specific aspect appears is displayed, it is impossible to distinguish whether or not the automatic reception is made within the valid period. The reception effect can be performed with the.

  Moreover, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 293 (m), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated, the effective period is ended and the effect reception is received. Is not permitted, the “bar display indicating the remaining time as a period during which the production reception is permitted” is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not activated by confirming that the effect situation that the effect after the operation did not occur even though the gauge remaining amount was “0” occurred. Can be recognized, and it is expected to suppress the decline in the game entertainment. In the drawing shown in FIG. 293 (m), “?” Is made to appear, but no effect change may be caused.

  Also, in this example of the effect, although the type of precursor effect (see FIGS. 292 (b) and 293 (m)) is different, the same overhead image and the same bar display are displayed respectively when the effect reception is generated. Because the time until the automatic rendering function is activated is different though it is different (see Figure 292 (c) and Figure 293 (h)), when you miss the admonition, it is relatively To be able to provide the effect of whether the automatic rendering function is activated at an early timing, whether the automatic rendering function is activated at a relatively late stage, or the automatic rendering function is not activated at all It becomes possible to have a sense of tension and perform receptionist production. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the prognostic effect has been performed in the mode shown in FIG. 292 (b), it can be recognized in advance that a reception effect is generated in which the automatic rendering function is always enabled. As a result, it will be expected to maintain the gaming interest favorably.

  In this example of presentation, the display mode is made different between the pro-end effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) and the pro-end effect shown in FIG. 293 (g), but these are performed in the same display mode It may be. In other words, in this case, even if both the warning effect and the reception effect are confirmed, an operation opportunity is kept in a state in which it is concealed at which timing the automatic performance function is activated, and further, whether the automatic performance function is originally activated. It becomes possible to grant.

  Incidentally, each reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293 is also basically developed in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 292 (c) or FIG. 293 (h) appears, and at timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, FIGS. ) Or the production situation shown in FIGS. 293 (j) and (k). However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, there are cases where the automatic rendering function can not be activated, and the timing tf2 at which the automatic rendering function is activated is delayed according to the established rendering condition (rendering pattern) or It can be said that this is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 in that the effect may be delayed or the effect will be started after the operation while the bar display remains. In addition, in the example of this effect, the above-described other example regarding FIG. 285 may be applied. Also in this effect example, after the operation, the effect may be started while leaving the bird's eye view of the operation means in addition to the bar display. Further, in the case where the effect is started after the operation while leaving the bird's-eye view image looking over the operation means, the bird's-eye view image may be continued as a moving image as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289.

  Also in this example of production, as in the case of the example of production shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period ) And the time from the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period to the time the bar display is not displayed (timing tf3 to tf4) may be set as the same length of time desirable.

  Also in this effect example, when starting the post-operation effect while leaving the bar display, the stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

  Also, the time from when the second reception effect occurs until the reception is automatically generated and the bar display is hidden is from the time from when the first reception effect occurs until the reception automatically occurs. It is desirable to set as a short time. According to such a configuration, when the bar display is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 292 (d), it is clear that the reception is not the second reception effect that is automatically generated at a relatively early timing. (If it is the second reception effect, it should already be hidden), so that the remaining effective period can be enjoyed with the possibility of being the first reception effect.

  In this production example, when the reception effect for which the automatic performance function is not activated is regarded as the third reception effect, the effect patterns (FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) for generating the third reception effect are not necessarily prepared. May be.

  The first reception effect and the second reception effect may be sequentially generated within one symbol variation. However, when the above-mentioned second reception effect is executed, which has a relatively short time until the automatic performance function is activated, the first reception effect may occur thereafter until the symbol is stopped, When the above-mentioned first reception effect is executed which has a relatively long time until the automatic effect function is activated, thereafter, the second reception effect can not occur until the symbol is stopped. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who recognizes that the time until the effect is accepted by the execution of the first acceptance effect is relatively long is at a relatively early timing when the second acceptance effect occurs. It is expected that the situation where the operation opportunity is lost due to the automatic generation of the effect receptionist of will be suitably suppressed.

  Also in the above-described effect example, the cocoon image with the operating means displayed may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) with different expectations. When the first mode with a low degree of expectation appears, the automatic performance function is not necessarily activated (third reception effect). When the second mode with a high degree of expectation appears, the automatic performance function is necessarily activated. (First reception effect or second reception effect).

  In the production example, when the first reception production (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs and when the second reception production (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs. When the third reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) is generated and when the effect is received, the same post-operation effects (such as the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)) Is supposed to be done. However, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs, when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs, Different post-operation effects may be performed when the reception is performed when the reception is performed (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)).

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, after an operation is performed with the bar display remaining when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being enabled. The effect was made to appear or the effect was not started after the operation was started. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by a player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. It is desirable.

[Precursor effects that also function as effects to indicate whether they are automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with such an "automatic effect means", since the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player has forgotten to operate it, an operation opportunity is given to the player There is a concern that the feeling of tension at the time of disappearing may be lost, and that it may become a mere display effect that only a predetermined moving image flows.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, non-automatic reception effects not targeted for the “automatic effect function” and automatic reception effects targeted for the “automatic effect function” can be respectively generated. That is, in this case, since the effect reception does not necessarily occur automatically, it is expected that the sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

  However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic performance function” has occurred, there may be cases where it is not operated as a result of misrecognizing that an effect reception occurs without an operation by the player, There will be a loss of opportunity to receive the production, and there is a concern about the decline in the entertainment interest. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a special manner, an automatic reception function is always generated as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. It is made possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game due to the loss of the opportunity to receive the production reception without understanding whether the game is activated.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which the prognostic effect is executed in the special mode, an automatic reception effect in which the receptional effect corresponding to the prognostic effect is an object of the “automatic effect function”. Even if it is possible to recognize that it will be executed, the indication effect is ended, and when the reception effect (automatic reception effect) is actually generated (effective period), the reception effect is “automatic effect It is made difficult to recognize which of the automatic reception effect directed to the function and the non-automatic reception effect not directed to the "automatic effect function". For example, in both the non-automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect, the same operation means can be operated as an obscuration image of the operation means, or a bar display having the same length of gauge. It will be difficult to recognize which reception effect is occurring.

  According to such a configuration, if it is overlooked in which aspect the precursor effect is being executed, whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated after the reception effect is once started. It is difficult to recognize. Accordingly, it is expected that the tension until the reception of the effect is automatically generated is suitably maintained while the effect indicating whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated is executed. .

  FIGS. 294 to 296 are diagrams showing an example of an effect that suggests whether or not a reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated is generated depending on the mode of the sign effect. Here also, although an example of rendering when the automatic rendering function can be activated (automatic rendering mode or a gaming machine in a state in which automatic rendering can always be performed, etc.) will be described, in this rendering example Since the reception effect that is not considered to be activated can also be generated, the display such as "during setting of the auto button" is not performed.

  In FIG. 294 (a), the number of holds is 3 and the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. Shows the production situation that formed the.

  Figure 294 (b), during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in Figure 294 (a is here reach state, but may be non-reach state) reception of effects (operation) Indicates a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition is being suggested, suggesting that it will soon be permitted.

  Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) is generated when the timing tg1 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives, and the overhead image over the operation button 410 to be operated is It is displayed as an effect image (special aspect) that moves so as to make a vortex toward a place that appears later. Then, when the warning effect is executed in such a special mode, the automatic reception effect that is the target of the “automatic effect function” is always generated as the reception effect corresponding to the warning effect. Thus, it is possible to grasp in advance that the “automatic effect function” is activated in the reception effect after this while the precursor effect is performed. In addition, although a display such as "auto button!" Is also displayed in the prelude effect according to this effect example, this may not necessarily be displayed.

  FIG. 294 (c) shows the effect situation (the effect performed based on the result of the big hit determination) when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) is performed and the timing tg2 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives. The determination shows the first determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294 (e) described later appears) or the second determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294 (f) described later appears). In the drawing, a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 has just started.

  In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (an image with the operation button 410 taken over) is displayed in the display area, and an operation on the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Then, as described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 294 (c), the effect reception is automatically generated (the “automatic effect function” is activated) when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player, The same post-operation effect as when the player performs an operation appears. However, as will be described later, in the production situation shown in FIG. 294 (c), is an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic production function” is activated or non-automatic in which the “automatic production function” is not activated? It is difficult to recognize whether reception effects are occurring. That is, in this case, if it is overlooked in which aspect the precursor effect is being executed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated after the reception effect is once started. Have difficulty. Therefore, while maintaining an effect (a sign effect of a special aspect) suggesting whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated, it is preferable to maintain the tension until the effect reception is automatically generated. Is expected.

  And in this example of production, operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that acceptance of production is permitted, and operation button 410 is performed at a predetermined timing tg3 (refer to FIG. 296) within the effective period. It is assumed that the automatic rendering function for is activated. FIG. 294 (d) depicts a situation where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at timing tg3. Thus, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set as described above is caused to the production. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 294 (e)) or “High expectation mode effect (see FIG. 294 (f)) in which the intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (簾) is operated. ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this effect example (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 295), even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner (FIGS. 294 (e) and (f)). “The bar display indicating the remaining time as a period during which the reception of the effect is permitted” is not hidden and the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. That is, although detailed description is omitted, in this example of production (including the production part described later with reference to FIG. 295), the production reception is automatically performed after the period during which the production reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. The first reception effect and the second reception effect with different time until occurrence are prepared, and by checking how much gauge remaining is left at the time when the post-operation effect is started, It is possible to recognize whether the reception effect is “the first reception effect and the second reception effect whose time from when the period during which the effect reception is allowed (effective period) occurs until when the effect reception is automatically generated” It is supposed to be. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. Also in this production example, the above configuration ("bar display" is not hidden but is maintained in a state of being displayed without being displayed in the item of "post-operation presentation in which the type of the accepted reception presentation is suggested" is suggested. You may make it employ | adopt suitably also about each structure other than making an effect | play after operation).

  Also, in this effect example (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 295), the bag image display described in the item “post-operation effect that suggests an automatically accepted operation target” was left. You may make it employ | adopt the structure of starting presentation after operation as it is. Further, in this case, each configuration other than the above configuration described in the same item (in which the effect is started after the operation with the overhead image display left) may be adopted as appropriate. Further, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect is generated after the operation without leaving the bar display as it is not necessarily employed, and this may be omitted.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, FIG. 294 (b) is shown during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294 (a) (here, the reach state may be a non-reach state). 295 (g) is not the sign effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) in the effect situation (the third determination condition (described later) in the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination 295 (j) where the effect result appears), or the fourth determination condition (the effect pattern where the effect result shown in FIG. 295 (k) described later), or the fifth determination condition (described later FIG. 295 ( l) A presentation situation in the case where the presentation pattern shown in the presentation situation shown in (m) is satisfied may appear.

  Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) occurs when the timing tg1 (see FIGS. 296 (a) and (b)) arrives, and the operation button 410 that is the operation target is displayed. Although the two heel images are displayed as an effect (specific mode) until they approach each other and overlap, the heel image in which the operation button 410 that is the operation target is displayed is not necessarily used in the precursor effect. Also good. Then, when the accompaniment effect is executed in such a specific mode, an automatic reception effect targeted for the “automatic effect function” is generated as a reception effect corresponding to the abbrd effect, and in the “automatic effect function”. There is a case where a non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted is generated as a reception effect corresponding to the accompaniment effect, so that during the accompaniment effect operation is performed during this accompaniment effect, the "automatic performance function" ”Cannot be known in advance. In addition, although a display such as “auto button?” Is also displayed in the prelude effect according to this effect example, this may not necessarily be displayed.

  FIG. 295 (h) shows a rendering situation when the prognostic effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) is performed and the timing tg2 shown in FIG. 296 (a) comes. It is depicted that the receptionist presentation with the opportunity has just started.

  In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (an image with the operation button 410 taken over) is displayed in the display area, and an operation on the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  And as described above, in the case of the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h), the case where the effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period (the “automatic effect function” is activated) even if there is no operation by the player If there is no operation by the player, there is a case where the production reception is not generated within the valid period (the “automatic production function” is not activated). And although this was also mentioned above, in the production situation shown in FIG. 295 (h), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (the bird's-eye image looking over the operation button 410) and the remaining time for which reception of the presentation is permitted The bar display showing each is only displayed, and it is difficult to distinguish the effect situation shown in FIG. 294 (c). This makes it possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension until the reception of presentation is automatically generated while performing the presentation (prediction presentation of the special aspect) that suggests that the "automatic presentation function" is activated. Expected.

  In this respect, when there is an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated, if timing tg3 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives without the player's operation being performed, the diagram is displayed. As shown in 295 (i), an effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated now appears. After that, when the automatic production function is activated, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set so that the production acceptance is permitted is caused to the production. It will Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 295 (j)) or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 295 (k) where intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (crimson object) operates) ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, even in this example of the effect, even if the effect is performed after operation in any of the modes (FIGS. 295 (j) and (k)), “the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is permitted is permitted. The “bar display showing” is not hidden, but the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. Thus, by confirming how much the remaining amount of the gauge remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the effect can be received after the period for which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in time until the automatic generation occurs. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, although this was also mentioned above, in this example of presentation, in the case where the prognostic effect in the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 295 (h) are sequentially displayed Even if there is an operation by the player, the effect reception may not be generated within the effective period (the "automatic effect function" is not activated). In this case, when timing tg4 arrives without the player's operation being performed, as shown in FIG. 295 (l) and FIG. 296 (b), the automatic rendering function is not activated and the reception is performed. An effect situation (at the time of selection of an effect pattern according to the establishment of the fifth determination condition) in which the effective period as the effect ends is to appear.

  In other words, in this case, when a precursor effect of a specific mode (see FIG. 295 (g)) is performed, the same saddle image and the same bar display are respectively displayed in the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. In other words, there are cases where the production reception is automatically generated within the effective period (see FIGS. 295 (i) to (k)) and when the production is not automatically generated (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)). Therefore, it is possible to perform the reception effect with a sense of tension.

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 295 (m), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is ended and the effect is accepted. While this is not permitted, "bar display showing the remaining time as a period for which the effect reception is permitted" is maintained without being hidden. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not activated by confirming that the effect situation that the effect after the operation did not occur even though the gauge remaining amount was “0” occurred. Can be recognized, and it is expected to suppress the decline in the game entertainment. In the drawing shown in FIG. 295 (m), “?” Appears, but it is also possible not to cause any effect change.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (FIG. 296 (a) The indicated timings tg3 to tg4) and the time until the bar display is not displayed from the timing when the period originally set as the effect reception period is ended (timing tg4 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)) It is desirable to set as time of the same length.

  Also in this effect example, when starting the post-operation effect while leaving the bar display, the stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

  Also, the time when the bar display is left when the automatic rendering function is activated (timing tg3 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)) and the time when the bar display is left when the automatic rendering function is not activated ( It is desirable that the timings tg4 to tg5a) shown in FIG.

  The non-automatic reception effects (FIGS. 295 (g), (h), (l), (m)) and the automatic reception effects (FIGS. 294 (b) to (f)) are sequentially within one symbol variation. May occur in the However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect can subsequently occur. However, when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by the execution of the automatic reception effect may lose the opportunity for the generation of the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that it will be possible to suitably suppress such problems.

  Also in the above-described effect example, the cocoon image with the operating means displayed may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) with different expectations. And about the 1st mode with low degree of expectation, although it can be displayed in both the reception stage where the automatic production function is activated and the reception production where the automatic production function is not activated, about the second mode with high degree of expectation May be allowed to appear only when a reception effect for which the automatic rendering function is activated is occurring.

  In the above-described example of production, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) that occurs through a precursor effect of a special mode and an automatic reception effect (FIG. 295 (i)) that occurs through a precursor effect of a specific mode. (See (k)) and non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) that occurs after a prelude effect of a specific mode, the same post-operation effect ( For example, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (strap) is performed. However, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated through a prelude effect in a special mode and an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (i) through (k) through a predecessor effect in a specific mode. )) And a non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) that occurs after a predecessor effect of a specific mode, so that different post-operation effects are performed when the effect is accepted. It may be.

  In the above-described example of production, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) that occurs through a precursor effect of a special mode and an automatic reception effect (FIG. 295 (i)) that occurs through a precursor effect of a specific mode. ~ (K)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated through the sign effect of the specific mode, the sign at the same timing tg1 after the start of symbol variation Although the effect is started and the reception effect is started at the same timing tg2, the respective start timings may not necessarily be the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed with different effect patterns.

  The effect time may be different between the warning effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 294 (b) and the warning effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g). For example, it is set as a relatively long production time so that it is difficult to overlook the sign effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 294 (b), and this is overlooked for the sign effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (c). If it is made relatively short production time so that it becomes easy, it will be easy to miss if a bad admonition production for the player appears, and it will be easy to occur, and it will be fun before the reception production starts. Can be suppressed.

  Although the above-described effect example has been described as the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) which occurs after the admonition effect of the special mode (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) In FIG. 295 (i) to (k)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated through the prognostic effect of the specific mode, the operation button 410 is an operation target You may do so. Furthermore, in the case of an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) which occurs after the admonition effect of the special aspect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)), the reception effect with the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation target is generated. There may be cases where there is a reception effect with an operation target. Needless to say, in the case of generating a reception effect for operating the sword decorative body 5001, the overhead image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

  In the above-described effect example, a part of the period in which the sign effect (special aspect, specific aspect) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, if at least a part (for example, a part of a spiral effect) of the precursor effect is left only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started, and it gradually disappears, Even after the effective period is started, it is possible to grasp that the automatic performance function is activated in the early stage. Note that among the prognostic effects of the special aspect and the prognostic effects of the specific aspect, only the prognostic effects of the special aspect may be left after the reception effect is started.

  In this effect example, when a precursor effect (FIG. 295 (g)) in a specific mode appears, a non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the “automatic effect function” is necessarily generated as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. Thus, during the period in which the sign production is performed, it may be possible to grasp in advance that the “automatic production function” is not activated in the subsequent reception production. That is, in this case, after the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h) occurs, if no operation is performed by the player, FIGS. 295 (l) and (m) appear in sequence, and FIG. 295 (i) ~ (K) will be omitted.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 294 to 296, after the operation with the bar display remaining, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being enabled. The production situation that the production is started and the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by a player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. It is desirable.

[Registration effect that also functions as a production that suggests whether it will be accepted automatically]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with such an "automatic effect means", since the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player has forgotten to operate it, an operation opportunity is given to the player There is a concern that the feeling of tension at the time of disappearing may be lost, and that it may become a mere display effect that only a predetermined moving image flows.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the prognostic effect is executed in a specific mode, a non-automatic acceptance effect not subject to the "automatic effect function" is generated as the acceptance effect corresponding to the accompaniment effect. There are cases where there is a case where an automatic reception effect to be made an object of the "automatic effect function" occurs. That is, in this case, since the effect reception does not necessarily occur automatically, it is expected that the sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

  However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic performance function” has occurred, there may be cases where it is not operated as a result of misrecognizing that an effect reception occurs without an operation by the player, There will be a loss of opportunity to receive the production, and there is a concern about the decline in the entertainment interest. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the prognostic effect is executed in the specific mode, the reception effect corresponding to the probation effect occurs in either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect. Although it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is difficult to recognize, within the effective period after the reception effect is started, it is possible to make it possible to display a display that makes it possible to recognize that the reception effect is generated by the automatic reception effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to receive the production reception without understanding whether the automatic production function is activated.

  FIGS. 297 to 299 are diagrams showing an example of an effect that makes it possible to recognize that the “automatic effect function” is activated only in the reception effect among the pro-event effect and the reception effect. Here also, although an example of rendering when the automatic rendering function can be activated (automatic rendering mode or a gaming machine in a state in which automatic rendering can always be performed, etc.) will be described, in this rendering example Since the reception effect that is not considered to be activated can also be generated, the display such as "during setting of the auto button" is not performed.

  FIG. 297 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and the reach state is reached. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 297 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 297 (a) (here, it may be in the reach state but may be in the non-reach state). Indicates a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition is being suggested, suggesting that it will soon be permitted.

  Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) occurs when the timing th1 (see FIG. 299 (a)) has arrived, and two traps that are the target of the operation button 410 being operated. The images are displayed as effects (a specific mode) until the images approach and overlap each other. In particular, in this presentation example, the first 摸 image that displays “reliable” suggesting that the “automatic presentation function” is activated, and the “automatic presentation function” is activated or concealed. The second bird's-eye-view image on which the display such as "dodokidoki" is made is displayed as an effect (a specific aspect) until the second bird's eye image approaches and overlaps each other. When the warning effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) appears, as the reception effect corresponding to the warning effect, an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated occurs, and the “automatic effect function” is Since there is a case where a non-automatic reception effect that is not activated occurs, either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect is performed after the precursor effect is performed while the precursor effect is performed. It is difficult to recognize what happens. In this precursor effect, it is not necessary to necessarily display the bird's-eye view of the operation button 410 which is the operation target, and after the precursor effect is performed, which of automatic reception effect and non-automatic reception effect occurs? As long as it is difficult to recognize the

  FIG. 297 (c) shows a first heel image that is displayed as “safe” indicating that the “automatic effect function” is activated as a result of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b). , The first 摸 image that is displayed as ‘safe’ is left out of the second 摸 image that is displayed as ‘Dokidoki’ that is activated or concealed, Production situation in which the second heel image displayed as “Dokidoki” is not displayed (the first determination result (the production result shown in FIG. 297 (e) described later is an effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination) The production pattern that appears) or the second determination result (the production pattern in which the production result shown in FIG. 297 (f) described later appears) is shown. Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a)) comes, and at the timing th2, the acceptance effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started Will be.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, a first bird's-eye view image displayed as “reliable” as a button image BTG (a bird's-eye view image obtained by looking at operation button 410) corresponding to operation button 410 is within the display area. And an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appear. It is supposed to be. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  In this respect, when the first bird's-eye view image (reliable) is displayed in the reception effect, “The effect reception is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the effective period comes even without the operation by the player (“ automatic effect function ” It is limited to a situation where "automatic reception effect" in which the same effect appears after the operation as "when the operation is performed" is performed. Therefore, by confirming that the first eyelid image (reliable) is displayed when the reception effect is generated, it is determined that the "automatic effect function" is being executed as an automatic reception effect to be activated. It will be possible to recognize.

  According to such a configuration, while the accompaniment effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, "the automatic reception effect whose automatic effect function is activated" is the reception effect corresponding to the abbrd effect It is made possible to grasp that the “automatic reception effect for which the automatic rendering function is activated” is being executed when the reception effect is started while concealing what will occur after this. Become so. In other words, in this case, until the reception effect is started, the “automatic effect function” is kept secret until the reception effect starts. By making it possible to grasp this, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity for the production reception without understanding whether the “automatic production function” is enabled.

  And in this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the reception of the rendering, and the predetermined timing th3 (see FIG. 299 (a)) within the effective period. It is assumed that the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated. FIG. 297 (d) depicts a situation where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at timing th3, and the presentation acceptance is permitted when the automatic rendering function is activated. The effect is the same as in the case where the effect is accepted by the operation of the operation button 410 within the effective period set to Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 297 (e)) or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 297 (f)) where intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) operates. ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this regard, in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 298), even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner (FIGS. 297 (e) and (f)). The bird's-eye view image (button image BTG) with the operation button 410 hidden is not hidden and is maintained, and after-operation effects are started. Thereby, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the effect after the operation is performed in response to the “effect reception for the operation button 410”. In addition, since there is a description such as “reliable”, it is possible to recognize that the “post-operation effect is automatically generated by the automatic effect function being activated”.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), the period during which the effect reception is permitted is early at timing th3 when the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and the effect reception is automatically generated. It will be finished. Then, after the acceptance of the effect is not permitted, the effect is started after the operation with the overhead image (button image BTG) in which the operation button 410 is turned over being displayed, but the operation button 410 is turned over. The haze image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing th6 when the post-operation effect ends.

  According to such a configuration, in the period from the start of the post-operation effect to the end of the operation, the heel image showing the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed. Period (timing th3 to th5) and a period (timing th5 to th6) in which the same image is not displayed appear. Therefore, the overhead image is not displayed even when the effect after operation is started with the overhead image displayed over the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that has been the operation target kept in the display state. It will be expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension due to having to confirm the post-operation presentation before being done.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) is performed, the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) is generated instead of the reception effect shown in FIG. 297 (c). There are also cases where it is possible.

  That is, FIG. 298 (g) shows a first display showing "relief" indicating that the "automatic rendering function" is enabled as a result of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) being performed. Among the images and the second on-the-fly image on which the "automatic rendering function" is activated or concealed, the second on-the-fly image on which the "on-the-fly" display is made is left. , The first 摸 image on which a display such as "reliable" is made is not displayed (the third judgment result (the effect shown in FIG. 298 (i) described later in the effect judgment performed based on the result of the big hit judgment) A presentation pattern in which the result appears, or a fourth judgment result (a presentation pattern in which the presentation result shown in FIG. 298 (j described later) appears, or a fifth judgment result (shown in FIG. 298 (k), (l) described later) Production patterns appearing It shows the case) the emission) is obtained. Such an effect situation appears when timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a) or (b)) comes, and at this timing th2, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The reception effect will be started.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the second haze image displayed as “dokidoki” as a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a haze image with the operation button 410 hovered) is displayed in the display area. In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating a remaining time during which an effect reception is allowed) appears. It is supposed to be. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  In this respect, when the second bird's-eye view image is displayed within the reception effect, “The effect reception is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the effective period comes even without the operation by the player (“ automatic effect function ” When the player is in a situation where the same effect as the operation performed by the player is performed and the automatic reception effect that the same effect appears after the operation is being performed, the effect reception does not occur without the operation by the player. In addition, there is both a situation where a “non-automatic reception effect where no post-operation effect is executed” is being executed. Therefore, when the reception effect is generated, it is impossible to recognize whether the "automatic effect function" is activated or not by confirming that the second bird's-eye view image (throbbing) is displayed. It becomes understandable, and this makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

  According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, and the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect (see FIG. 298 (g)) is being performed. In both cases, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the “automatic rendering function” is activated, and this makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

  When the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as “automatic reception effect in which the automatic performance function is activated”, the operation by the player is not performed and the timing th3 (FIG. 299 ( When (see a)) arrives, as shown in FIG. 298 (h), an effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated now appears. After that, when the automatic production function is activated, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set so that the production acceptance is permitted is caused to the production. It will Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 298 (i)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) operates, and a highly anticipated effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 298 (j)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, even in this embodiment, even if the effect is performed after the operation in any of the modes (FIGS. 298 (i) and (j)), the overhead image (button image BTG) obtained by turning over the operation button 410 ) Is not hidden and the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it can be recognized that the post-operation production is performed in response to the “production reception for the operation button 410”. , "Dokidoki" and the post-operation effect as a result of the automatic production reception while it was kept secret that it was in the state of "automatic reception production is activated to enable the automatic production function" Will be able to recognize that they are in a situation where

  On the other hand, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as “non-automatic reception effect not activated automatic presentation function”, timing th4 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299)). When b) is received, as shown in FIG. 298 (k) and FIG. 299 (b), the presentation situation in which the effective period as the reception presentation is ended without the automatic presentation function being activated. (When the effect pattern corresponding to the fifth determination result being obtained) appears.

  And in this production example, as shown in FIG. 298 (l), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated, the effective period is ended and the effect reception is received. While this is not permitted, this is maintained without hiding “the bird's-eye view of the operation button 410 (button image BTG)”. Therefore, the post-operation effect is not performed as a result of the fact that the effect reception was not automatically generated while it was kept secret that "the automatic reception effect where the automatic effect function is activated" has occurred. You will be able to recognize the situation. In the drawing shown in FIG. 298 (l), "?" Is made to appear, but it is also possible not to make any effect change.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (FIG. 299 (a) The indicated timing th3 to th4) and the time from the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period to the non-display of the overhead image (timing th4 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)) It is desirable to set as the same length of time.

  In addition, the time when the habit image is left when the automatic effect function is activated (timing th3 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)) and the time when the habit image is left when the automatic effect function is not activated ( It is desirable that the same time as timing th4 to th5a) shown in FIG. 299 (b).

  The above-mentioned non-automatic reception effects (Fig. 298 (g), (k), (l)) and the above-mentioned automatic reception effects (Fig. 297 (b) to (f)) may occur sequentially within one symbol variation. You may do so. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect can subsequently occur. However, when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by the execution of the automatic reception effect may lose the opportunity for the generation of the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that it will be possible to suitably suppress such problems.

  Also in the above-described effect example, the cocoon image with the operating means displayed may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) with different expectations. And about the 1st mode with low degree of expectation, although it can be displayed in both the reception stage where the automatic production function is activated and the reception production where the automatic production function is not activated, about the second mode with high degree of expectation May be allowed to appear only when a reception effect for which the automatic rendering function is activated is occurring.

  In the above-described effect example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first bag image displayed as “reliable” is displayed, and a second bag image in which “dokidoki” is displayed are displayed. The automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the second habit image that displays “dokidoki” is displayed. When done, the same post-operation effects (such as the operation of a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)) are performed. However, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first bag image displayed as “reliable” is displayed and an automatic reception in which the second bag image displayed as “dokidoki” is displayed. When an effect is received by the effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the second heel image that displays “dokidoki” is displayed. Different post-operation effects may be performed.

  In the above-described effect example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first bag image displayed as “reliable” is displayed, and a second bag image in which “dokidoki” is displayed are displayed. There is a variation in the symbol for the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the second habit image that displays “dokidoki” is displayed. Although the precursor effect is started at the same timing th1 after the start and the reception effect is started at the same timing th2, the start timings are not necessarily the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed with different effect patterns.

  A reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first bag image displayed as “reliable” is displayed and a reception effect (see FIG. 298) in which the second bag image displayed as “dokidoki” is displayed. Between (h) and (k)), the length of the effective period in the reception effect may be made different. In particular, in the reception effect (see FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)) in which the second hakama image displayed as “dokidoki” is displayed, the first hakama image displayed as “safe” is displayed. By setting the effective time shorter than the reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)), it is possible to more suitably maintain a sense of tension during the effective period.

  In addition, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which a second habit image displayed as “dokidoki” is displayed and a non-automatic display in which a second habit image displayed as “dokidoki” is displayed. The length of the effective period in the reception effect may be different from that of the reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)). In particular, in the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the “automatic effect function” is not activated, the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which the “automatic effect function” is activated. By setting a short effective time, tension in the effective period can be more suitably maintained.

  Although the above-described effect example has been described as the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the automatic reception effect (refer to FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first spear image displayed as “reliable” is displayed, the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target, and the second “display” is displayed. An automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which a cocoon image is displayed, and a non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which a second heel image with a display such as “Dokidoki” is displayed. In this case, the operation button 410 may be an operation target. Needless to say, in the case of generating a reception effect for operating the sword decorative body 5001, the overhead image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

  In the above-described effect example, a part of the period in which the sign effect (special aspect, specific aspect) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, only for a predetermined time after the start of the reception effect, at least a part of the sign effect (for example, a predetermined effect, etc.) is left in the form of being entirely or partially overlapped with the bag image, and this is gradually If it disappears, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp that the automatic rendering function is activated in the early stage, even after the effective period of the reception effect is started. It should be noted that a reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first eyelid image displaying “safety” is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)) and a reception effect in which the second eyelid image displaying “flickering” is displayed ( Only in one of the reception effects as shown in FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)), at least a part of the sign effect (for example, a predetermined effect, etc.) overlaps entirely or partly with the obscene image. It may be left in the form.

  In this effect example, the reception effect in which the second bird's-eye view image on which the display such as "Sudden" is displayed is displayed may be generated only as a non-automatic reception effect not subject to the "automatic effect function". That is, in this case, after the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) is generated, if the operation by the player is not performed, FIGS. 298 (k) and (l) will sequentially appear, and FIG. 298 (h) ~ (J) will be omitted.

  In the above-described production examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, after the operation is performed with the haze image remaining when the production reception is generated by the automatic production function or when the effective period ends without the automatic production function being activated. The production situation that the production is started and the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even when the effect reception is generated by the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the overhead image remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. Is desirable.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, the sign effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first habit image displayed as “safe” is displayed and the second habit image displayed as “dokidoki”. Are the same as the prognostic effects corresponding to the reception effects that are displayed. However, as a precursor effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first basket image displayed as “safe” is displayed on condition that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, normal time (FIG. 297 (b)) is used. You may make the effect | action content different from (refer reference) appear. For example, if a flame effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is high is added to the accompaniment effect, "the degree of expectation is high" and "the automatic rendering function is enabled" are predetermined. Since it is suggested in advance only when the rendering conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the fun of the game while maintaining tension when the effective period occurs.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when an effect is received, or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being activated, the operation means to be operated is hesitant. The display mode of the image is changed, and the effect is started after the operation (or the effect is not started after the operation) in the state where the overhead image is displayed in the changed display mode. After the operation, the effect may be started (or the effect may not be started after the operation) in the state where the overhead view image is displayed with the display mode and the display position in the period).

  A post-operation effect that is started while displaying an image indicating the operation means to be operated is a display effect in the effect display device 1600, a light effect by a lamp provided in the game board 5, an effect by sound, and Any one of the movable effects by the decorative accessory may be used, or an appropriate combination of these effects may be used. In addition, the first post-operation effect that starts while displaying the heel image showing the operation means to be operated, and the timing th5 when the heel image showing the operation means to be operated is hidden A second post-operation effect to be started thereafter may be respectively executed.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299 as well, in the same way as in the case of the production examples described above, a habit image that looks like the operation means to be operated is dynamically displayed and the dynamic display is maintained. You may make it start the post-operation production in the state performed.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when a reception effect is performed by adding a notation such as “relief” or “dokidoki” to the samurai image and changing the mode as the samurai image. We decided to suggest whether the “automatic rendering function” would be effective. However, a special image that is displayed only when the “automatic rendering function” is activated may be displayed within a period during which the reception rendering is performed (valid period). You do not have to. In this case, it is desirable not to hide the special image that is displayed separately from the haze image, but to start the post-operation effect while leaving it untouched. Similarly to this, the notation “dokidoki” may be displayed separately from the cocoon image, and the post-operation effect may be started with the image remaining (or the post-operation effect is not started).

  In the above example, the display of “Reliable” and “Dokidoki” is changed during the period when the reception effect is performed. I decided to do it. However, instead of this, by changing the mode (light emission mode, operation state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.) of the operation means to be operated, an automatic reception effect is generated in which the “automatic effect function” is activated. You may be made to suggest whether you are doing. Alternatively, during the period when the reception effect is performed, both the display of "relief", "surrounding" and the mode of the operation means to be operated (such as the light emission mode and the operation state (presence or absence of vibration)) are differentiated. In this case, one of the display such as "reliable" or "deep" or the mode of the operation means to be operated (such as the light emission mode or the operating state (presence or absence of vibration)) It is desirable that only the state be continued and the other end the state and the post-operation effect be started in order to shift the gaze to the newly generated post-operation effect.

  In the above example, when an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is activated occurs, a display such as "relief" is made in a period before the occurrence of the predictive effect in the automatic reception effect. A specific display mode may appear to suggest that a reception effect is produced in which the first overhead image is displayed. In this case, it is desirable that the specific display mode be hidden at least before the reception effect is started, such as within a period from when the precursor effect is started to when it is ended.

  In the above presentation example, after a specific image (drowsy) is temporarily displayed which suggests that the “automatic effect function” may not be activated within a period in which the adjective effect is being performed, the specified image (deep throat) is The reception effect may be started in the form of changing to a special image (reliable) which has been hidden until the start. Even with such a configuration, it is not possible to recognize that the "automatic presentation function" is enabled within the period in which the admonition effect is being performed, and the tension when the active period occurs is suitably maintained. Will be able to

[Improve performance using the automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post-production. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a device for enhancing the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be provided by creating such novel rendering using the “automatic presentation function”. I have to.

  FIG. 300 is a diagram for explaining novel rendering using the automatic rendering function. More specifically, the reception effect is generated based on the number of suspensions (0 to 3) for maintaining the unexecuted state when the symbol variation is newly digested, or further, the automatic effect function is enabled. It is a distribution table of random numbers to be provided for the effect determination of the object. The total number of random numbers is “100”, and any one of these random numbers is acquired, and a reception effect is generated by referring to which of the distribution tables the acquired random numbers are distributed. An effect determination as to whether the automatic effect function is to be activated is performed. Note that here as well, an explanation will be given as an example of an effect when the automatic effect function is enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine that is always in an automatic effect state).

  As shown in FIG. 300, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the number of holdings (the game has just started) is still small (for example, specific The ratio that this is a “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” when the reception effect occurs within the symbol variation (direction pattern) digested when the number is less than “2” However, the reception effect is within the symbol variation (effect pattern) digested when the second effect situation (for example, more than the specific number “2”) is high (the game is continued to some extent). The control according to the effect is performed so that the rate is higher than the ratio of "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function" when the event occurs.

  In addition, here, in symbol fluctuation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is still small, to relatively increase the ratio of generating “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function” On the other hand, in the symbol variation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the ratio for generating the “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function” is relatively lowered. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic reception effect targeted for the “automatic effect function” is also the symbol variation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is small. The occurrence rate is made relatively high, and the occurrence rate is made relatively low in the symbol variation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is large. However, the degree of change in the occurrence rate is considered to be milder (mild) than in the case of non-automatic reception effects that are not targeted by the “automatic effect function”, and this causes the “automatic operation function” to occur when reception effects occur. The ratio of “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the effect function” is made lower as the number of holds increases.

  According to such a configuration, when the reception effect is generated, the ratio of the non-automatic reception effect to the non-automatic reception effect is higher when the reception number is generated than when the number of holdings is small. Therefore, when the game has just been started and the number of reservations is small, it is possible to increase the player's participation in the game and to encourage the enthusiasm. Also, if the game is continued to some extent and the number of pending is high, the proportion of non-automatic reception effects will be low, so another stage of performance ( It will be possible to provide a calm stage effect). Thus, by changing the stage performance related to the operation while the game is continued, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained without being bored.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when the player is bored in the above-mentioned other stage performance (the stage performance with calmness) and quits the game, the stage number is reduced, so that the stage for the participation in the game is enhanced. Since it comes to reappear, it is expected that such a change in stage effects will discourage game interruption.

  An important point as an invention relating to this production example is to change the rate at which the “automatic production function” is activated by increasing or decreasing the number of holds, thereby changing the production performance of the “automatic production function”. It is to produce. Therefore, the generation ratio of the reception effect may or may not be different between the symbol variation digested when the number of reservations is small and the symbol variation digested when the number of reservations is large. It can be said that there is a technical feature in how the rate at which the “automatic effect function” is activated for the reception effect changes when the reception effect occurs within the symbol variation.

  For example, only "Non-automatic reception effect not targeted for automatic performance function" among "Non-automatic reception performance not targeted for automatic performance function" and "Automatic reception performance targeted for automatic performance function" The occurrence ratio differs between when the number of reservations is small and when the number of reservations is large, and for "automatic reception effects targeted for the automatic performance function", the number of reservations is small The occurrence rate may be the same between a certain time and when the number of reservations is large. That is, in this case, for "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function", for example, the random number distribution as shown in FIG. In the pattern), the occurrence rate is relatively high, and the occurrence rate is relatively lowered in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large. However, for the automatic reception effect that is the target of the “automatic effect function”, the same occurrence rate (for example, the value of “automatic reception function” shown in FIG. Regardless of the number, all are set to “20”.

  According to such a configuration, it is ensured that the same post-operation effect as when there is an operation is performed even without the operation by the player (proportion of occurrence of "automatic reception effect subject to automatic effect function") As for this, it will be made uniform regardless of the number of holds. Therefore, even if the generation ratio of "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function" is changed according to the number of suspension, the player does not depend on the situation of the game for the operation forgotten Security can be provided, and a sense of security is created.

  In addition, for “non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the automatic performance function”, there are a plurality of performance modes (such as different display contents during reception effect generation, different post-operation effects, different operation targets, etc.) In addition to the case where a non-automatic reception effect is generated only in any one of the production modes based on the result of the production determination at the time of symbol variation, the non-automatic reception production is sequentially performed multiple times in two or more production modes. It may be generated. In other words, in this case, the occurrence rate of “non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic effect function” means the rate at which at least one of these effect modes occurs within the symbol variation execution period.

  In addition, for "automatic reception effects targeted for the automatic performance function", a plurality of performance modes (such as different display contents during reception effect generation, different post-operation effects, different operation targets, etc.) Are prepared, and the automatic reception effect is generated sequentially in two or more effect modes in addition to the case where the automatic reception effect is generated only in any one of the effect modes based on the result of the effect determination at the time of symbol variation. There may be cases. In other words, in this case, the occurrence ratio of “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic effect function” means a ratio in which at least one of the effect modes is generated within the symbol variation execution period.

  However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect can subsequently occur. However, when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by the execution of the automatic reception effect may lose the opportunity for the generation of the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that it will be possible to suitably suppress such problems.

  Further, in the above example of rendering, only one of “non-automatic acceptance rendering not targeted for the automatic rendering function” and “automatic acceptance rendering targeted for the automatic rendering function” is performed within a period in which symbol variation is performed. Although described as an example of occurrence, “a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” and “automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic performance function” may be sequentially generated. In this case, in the table shown in FIG. 300, the total number of random numbers obtained by adding the distribution value “without reception effect” and the distribution value “with reception effect” exceeds “100”.

  Further, in the above example of production, the operation means to be operated is at least one of “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic performance function” and “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic performance function”. There may be more than one. For example, when an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means and a random number value of "20" assigned to "automatically receive function" when the number of reservations is "0", the second operation means On the other hand, it may be further distributed according to the case where an operation opportunity is given.

  It should be noted that the determination of whether or not to generate a “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” and the determination of whether or not to generate the “automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic performance function” are performed when the pattern changes It is desirable to be executed as one of the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination.

  As described above, in the above-described example of rendering, when there is a large number of reservations, "non-automatic reception rendering not targeted for the automatic rendering function" is difficult to occur. In this regard, when the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs in spite of such a large number of holds, the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs when the hold number is low, If the rate at which the "automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic performance function" is further generated is high within the one symbol variation in which the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, only when the number of reservations is large, The “non-automatic reception effect” can be made to function as an effect that suggests the occurrence of the “automatic reception effect” (an effect that suggests before the sign effect for the automatic reception effect). Depending on the situation, it is possible to vary the performance of the automatic performance function. In addition, as a method of increasing the rate at which “automatic reception effect” is generated within the symbol variation in which “non-automatic reception effect” is generated, “automatic reception effect” itself is not raised but the generation ratio of itself is increased. It is desirable that the rendering condition for generating the "automatic reception effect" be easily established in response to the production condition for the "non-automatic reception effect" being satisfied.

  In addition, when there is a situation where the number of reservations is the largest (a situation where "non-automatic reception effect production" is the least likely to occur), if "non-automatic reception effect production" occurs, one of the symbol variations in which "non-automatic reception effect production" occurs The “automatic reception effect” may also be generated within. According to such a configuration, "non-automatic reception effect production" can be made to function as a prognostic effect for "automatic reception effect production", and also by this, it is possible to make the effect related to the automatic performance function different. become.

  A bird's-eye view image or a background image that looks over the operation means depending on whether the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs (the effective period) or the automatic reception effect occurs (the effective period) It is desirable to make the display contents different. In this case, of the display images displayed when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs (the effective period) and when the "automatic reception effect" occurs (the effective period). It is desirable to generate an effect reception and leave an effect reception after operation while leaving this as non-display for at least a different part, and for this, “an operation whose operation object is suggested to be received automatically is indicated This is as described in the example of the “post-production”. If you want to create an effect reception and make an effect appear after an operation while leaving a different part (such as a bird's-eye view of the operation means) hidden and not displaying it, select “Automatically accepted operation object The configuration, another example, and the like described in the “post-operation effect that is suggested” may be adopted as appropriate.

  About each structure mentioned above concerning the said production example (production improvement using an automatic production function) and its modification, the non-automatic reception production which is not made into the object of an automatic production function, and the automatic reception made into the object of an automatic production function You may make it apply with respect to each production example mentioned above which can produce each.

[Useless use of channels by automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited (for example, 32 channels), even if a special result is obtained in the jackpot determination according to the winning, the channel to which sound data is to be assigned. In a situation where there is no space (a situation where the number of empty channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the fact that a special result is obtained, and this can not be output (or sounds already in playback state) There is a concern that the game's interest in entertainment may be reduced by

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the symbol variation is started until it is ended. During the period, the process of causing the display effect to progress according to the specific effect pattern in the effect display device 1600 is performed, and the process of assigning and reproducing the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel is performed. Do. Then, when the display effect in the effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is allocated to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state, this state The reception effect for the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) is generated. As a result, when the effect reception is generated, the sound of "BGM reproduction" maintains the state of being output in the suppression mode or silence, while the big hit symbol (special display mode in the effect pattern) A special performance sound that suggests an expected degree of appearance is output in a non-suppressed manner (suppressed operation sound output processing). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, at the time of outputting the special effect sound according to the effect reception, the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state of the thing. In this way, it is possible to provide an atmosphere that seems to be easy to use in the channel. Therefore, providing an operation opportunity to cause the player to output the special effect sound in a state where the feeling of uneasiness such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" is removed. This makes it possible to curb the decline in game entertainment.

  Note that data related to various effect sounds such as a plurality of BGM data is stored in predetermined storage means, and various effect sounds are reproduced by being read from the storage means and assigned to channels. Become.

  By the way, when specific BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") according to a specific effect pattern is allocated to a channel and this is to be output in a suppression mode or silent, it is generally allocated to a channel It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound being played (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (the process of changing the volume initial value defined in the sound data to reduce the same) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the effective period of effect reception will be generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is undefined (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of “BGM playback” in advance so that the specific music is cued at an indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "special BGM reproduction at the time of special effect sound reproduction" and is displayed. It is also conceivable to perform processing to reproduce. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the contents of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and the pattern is ended, the timing of the pattern stop, etc., it is within the effective period. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or it is determined to be indeterminate (up to the player), the sound of “BGM reproduction” is newly reproduced at the timing of the operation (effect reception). There is a concern that so-called sound shifts may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of symbol stop and the game interest may be reduced. In short, considering that "the remaining time from the occurrence of the effect reception to the end of the symbol variation is also undefined", the length corresponding to the remaining time determined to be indeterminate at the timing when the effect reception occurs. It can be said that it is also difficult to newly assign BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") to a channel.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as sounds of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of super reach production, the sound data at the second half of super reach production, etc.) are specified according to the time series defined by each sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. And among a plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, a specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation When a predetermined channel is assigned according to the time series being played, the predetermined channel is assigned and started from timing before the effective period of effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. It is made to be reproduced while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the

  In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, processing concerning the sound output with a suppression mode or silence as compared to the other sections If the data content that defines that is to be performed is preset (stored as silent data) and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, It is made to become the time-series relation in which the effective period of production reception occurs in the partial section (special period). In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with the period after the (partial section) ends (other sections). It is made to reproduce | regenerate in the non-suppression mode in the channel different from the predetermined channel allocated.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data of the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in sequence according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In any case, it becomes possible to create a "suppression mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, it is specially performed in a non-suppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being output in suppression mode or silence (special period) regardless of the production reception” Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in such a way that the special effect sound is reproduced while being reproduced. Since the data contents of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly restore the sound of "BGM playback" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the player receives an operation in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence, the special performance sound is not suppressed by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that while making the reproduction start.

  As described above, “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern is a partial section (special period) when viewed in time series, and is output in a suppressed manner or silently compared to other sections. The data content (silence data etc.) that prescribes that such processing is to be performed will be set in advance, but the volume from the initial value is set in the "suppression mode or the state of silence output (special period)". The volume may also be reduced by adjustment. According to such a configuration, an adverse effect due to noise or the like from the channel to which BGM data is allocated can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern is being reproduced, in the section (normal section) different from the above-mentioned special section Also, the reception effect for the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) is generated.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, the reception effect occurs in a situation where there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be assigned (a situation where the number of empty channels is 0). If there is a possibility that the player's operation is accepted for the effect, the effect sound corresponding to the effect reception is output by stopping the output of any effect sound in the reproduction state, or according to the effect reception It is necessary to stop the output of the produced sound itself. And, in this case, there is a lack of excitement such as when a big hit is judged, such as “The production sound is forcibly terminated midway, no production sound is reproduced even though the production has been accepted” As a result, even on the player side, a sense of not wanting to generate such a negative accompaniment situation (a sense that it should not be generated by the operation) will work.

  Then, although the reception effect is generated, the operation by the player is not easily performed, and there is a concern that the improvement of the game entertainment can not be performed well. If you try to simply apply the above-mentioned "technique for automatically generating reception effects" against the player's intention of "does not want to generate effect reception", the game interest will be reduced conversely. It can also be a problem.

  On the other hand, on the side of the developer who is confident or fond of the reception, no matter what the channel usage status is, “the player will be able to generate the reception by the active operation, It may be assumed that there is a desire to have fun.

  Therefore, as described above, in the above configuration, the special BGM effect sound can be output in a suppression mode or silent mode in a section from the specific BGM data allocation to the channel until the allocation end. There is a normal section different from the special section. Then, in the normal section, "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic performance function" can be generated as the reception effect, and in the special section, the "automatic reception effect for the automatic performance function" is received. It can be generated as an effect.

  That is, in this case, in “a normal section in which a specific BGM effect sound can be output in a normal mode without being suppressed or silenced”, whether or not to generate an effect (predicting channel availability) Since the selection right is entrusted only to the player, the reception effect is automatically generated against the player's intention, such as “There may be no free channel, so do not generate the reception” Will be suitably avoided (preventing use of the channel by the automatic rendering function).

  On the other hand, in the “special section in which the specific BGM effect sound can be output in a suppressed manner or silence”, the impression that the specific BGM effect sound is out of the channel assignment and an empty channel is created (as viewed from the player side). Even if you feel like there is a vacancy in the channel, you will be able to have it. Therefore, it is possible to actively encourage the player's operation in a state where the anxiety such as “Maybe there is no vacant channel and may not be able to output special performance sound” is removed. Of course, even if no operation is performed by the player, by automatically generating the reception effect, "If the effect reception occurs anyway, next time, let's generate the effect reception by the player's own operation" Can be encouraged to

  FIG. 301 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such processing is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when such processing is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, the special section is described as a silence section in which silence data is set, but may be a suppression section in which data in a suppression mode is set.

  As shown in FIG. 301 (a), during a period in which a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the effect determination is being executed, the timing tm11 corresponds to the specific effect pattern being advanced. The sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is in a situation where it is already played (here, stereo playback). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one of the sound data over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start of the symbol variation to the end when the specific effect pattern is determined to be executed. The sound material may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the different sound data prepared for each of the periods may be divided. May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In any case, in the example shown in FIG. 301, one sound data (one sound) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the whole period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the drawing including the timing tm11. Material) is assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and is in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), one piece of sound data (sound of “BGM playback”) assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state is the timing. When tm14 is reached, the playback state is set in a silent section in which silent data content (silent data) is set. As a result, even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed for the sound of "BGM playback" corresponding to the specific effect pattern, it is possible to output it silently while assigning it to the predetermined channel. .

  According to such a configuration, in the silent period after the timing tm14 occurs, an atmosphere is provided in which the channel usage state seems to have a margin as much as the sound of “BGM playback” seems to be removed from the channel. On the other hand, in the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, an atmosphere in which there is no room in the channel usage status is provided as much as the “BGM playback” sound occupies the channel. Will be

  That is, although illustration is omitted, timing tm 14 is generated for various sounds different from the sound of “BGM playback” (for example, a notice effect sound, an effect sound accompanying the occurrence of a valid period, a winning sound, etc.) In any of the subsequent silent sections and the normal section before the timing tm 14 occurs, they are respectively assigned to appropriate channels to be brought into a reproduction state. In particular, in a normal section, a plurality of sounds are often output at the same time in order to stimulate the effects or to suggest that the gaming situation such as winning or paying out has occurred, so how many channels are required It is difficult to know if it is in use (whether there is a spare channel or not), and combined with the fact that the sound of "BGM playback" is always in playback state, it seems that there is no spare channel usage status. A new atmosphere will be provided. Also, the reproduction channels "00" and "01" are dedicated channels for assigning the various error sounds described above, and the number of channels that can be used as effect sound is also reduced by this.

  Then, in this example, when the timing tm12 arrives in a normal section where the channel use status seems to be insufficient, the normal operation of giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) A reception effect is generated. When an effect is received by an operation by a player within the operation valid period A (timing tm12 to tm13) for the normal reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and (b), As one of the post-operation effects in response to the effect reception, “special effect sound A” is assigned to an empty channel (channels “08” and “09” in the figure) and reproduced. On the other hand, when all the channels to which “special effect sound A” can be assigned are in use at the time when the effect is accepted within the operation effective period A, any of the sounds in the reproduction state is forced along the way In this way, "special effect sound A" is assigned to the channel in the form of ending, or processing is not performed without assigning "special effect sound A" to the channel.

  However, as described above, in a normal section where there is no room for channel usage, some players may be aware that it should not generate an effect. Therefore, in this production example, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) that occurs in the normal section where there is no room in the channel usage status is referred to as “non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the automatic performance function”. Is supposed to generate. As a result, since the right to select whether or not to produce an effect within the operation valid period A is left to the player only, “there is no room for a free channel, so no effect is accepted. It is preferable to avoid automatically generating a reception effect against the player's intention such as “Let ’s do it” (preventing channel wastage using the automatic effect function).

  In other words, if the player does not perform an operation on the operation means to be operated in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A), the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) remains without generating an effect. Will be ended, and after the operation including the “special effect sound A”, any effect will not be executed, and the effect will be developed thereafter.

  On the other hand, in this rendering example, as described above, when the timing tm 14 comes, a silent section appears to be felt that there is room in the channel usage status. Then, when the timing tm 15 arrives in such a silent section, the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) for giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 etc.) is generated. The player is positively urged to be accepted by the operation by the player with anxious feeling such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output a special effect sound". That is also as described above. If an effect is received within the operation effective period B (timing tm15 to tm16) for the silent reception effect, as shown in FIGS. For example, the “special effect sound B” is assigned to an empty channel (channels “10” and “11” in the figure) and reproduced.

  In this respect, with regard to the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example, the anxiety such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" has been removed In view of being in a state, this is to be generated as “automatic reception effect subject to automatic performance function”. That is, in this case, there is no intention that the player "does not generate an effect reception because there may not be enough free channels", so reception effect is automatically generated against the player's intention. Thus, the post-operation effect according to the effect reception within the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) can be surely executed while avoiding the occurrence of the sound appropriately.

  In addition, in the silent reception reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example, until a predetermined timing tm15a in the operation effective period B arrives (operation When the timing tm 15a arrives at the latest (when the automatic rendering function is activated), the effect acceptance always occurs. Then, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), while the “special effect sound B” is in the playback state as one of the post-operation effects in response to such an effect reception, the “BGM playback” is performed. The timing tm17 at which the sound "" changes from the silent section to the normal section arrives.

  According to such a configuration, the silence interval of the specific sound data (sound of "BGM playback") is ended and others are added in the form of being incorporated into the "special effect sound B" being played back. Since the data content of the section (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, it becomes possible to secretly restore the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in the non-suppressed mode, It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is generated in a state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output as silent data, reproduction of "special effect sound B" is started in the non-suppressed mode by high immediacy processing triggered by this. While causing the sound to be generated, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift in the BGM between the various effects and the timing of stopping the design after that. Thus, also in order to secretly return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in the non-suppressed mode, the above-mentioned in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is set as the target of the “automatic effect function. It can be said that it is important to generate it as “automatic reception effects”.

  In addition, within the operation effective period B (timing tm15 to tm16) according to this production example, the symbol to which “special effect sound B” can be assigned is not in use state, so that the symbol is being changed. Execution periods such as various advance notice effects are set respectively.

  FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) will be described in more detail.

  As described above, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example is normally within a period during which specific sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm12 in the section, it is generated as "non-automatic reception effect not subject to automatic effect function". Although illustration is omitted, a prophetic effect (for example, FIG. 293 (g)) is suggested to indicate that the player is given an operation opportunity when the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) occurs. It is desirable that the precursor effect is executed as display content different from the precursor effect performed upon occurrence of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B).

  When the operation valid period A corresponding to the normal reception effect occurs, the operation valid period A is terminated by the production reception accompanying the operation within the operation valid period A, or within the operation valid period A Until the operation valid period A ends without the operation being performed and the reception of the production not occurring, for example, the aspect described with reference to FIGS. 293 (h) and (l) (or another example thereof) For example, an image prompting an operation or an image indicating the remaining time is displayed. When an operation is performed within the operation effective period A and an effect is received, “special effect sound A” is output as one of the post-operation effects, in addition to FIGS. 293 (j) and (k) Another post-operation rendering is further performed in the aspect (or another example) described with reference to FIG. In addition, when performing effects after operation in stages, it is desirable to first output "special effect sound A" first. On the other hand, when the operation is not performed within the operation effective period A and the operation effective period A is terminated without receiving the production reception, for example, the aspect described with reference to FIG. In other cases, etc., the rendering situation after the operation effective period A is ended will appear.

  Here, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example is set as a period from the timing tm12 to the timing tm13 when “time Ta” has elapsed, and the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period When an effect is received within A), the “special effect sound A” is output over a “time Tc” longer than the “time Ta”.

  That is, in this case, even when the player performs an operation immediately after the internal reception effect (operation effective period A) occurs at timing tm12 and the effect reception occurs, the “special effect sound A” is As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the output is assigned to the channel until the timing tm13a after the timing tm13. On the other hand, when the player performs an operation immediately before timing tm13 when the internal reception effect (operation effective period A) is ended and the effect reception occurs, “special effect sound A” is shown in FIG. 302 (b As shown in (), the channel is assigned to the output until the delayed timing tm13b.

  According to such a configuration, the “special effect sound A” corresponding to the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) is distributed over a range that is at least twice as wide as the operation effective period A, such as timing tm12 to tm13b. It can be understood that it can be used. This means that at timing tm12 to tm13b, at least four channels (stereo BGM, stereo special effect sound A) can be used, and there is no more room in the vacant channels.

  In this respect, as shown in FIG. 302 and FIG. 303 together, in the case of the internal reception effect according to this effect example, “time Ta” as the operation effective period A ) Is set to a time shorter than "time Tb". This makes it possible to relatively shorten the time (timing tm12 to tm13b) until the output of "special effect sound A" is ended, and by the generation of the effect sound accompanying the normal reception effect. The occurrence of a situation where the number of channels becomes insufficient can be suitably suppressed. Also, by making the time as the operation effective period A relatively short in this way, it appears that there is not enough room in the free channel, and it is possible for the player to be in a period when the automatic rendering function can not be activated. It also makes it possible to create a stage effect that makes it possible to choose whether to operate or not.

  In this example, the output of "special effect sound A" is terminated before the timing tm14 at which the transition to the silent section occurs at the latest (Figs. 302 (a), ( see b)). In this respect, according to the above-described configuration in which the timings tm12 to tm13b are relatively shortened, silence is generated relatively early after normal reception reception effects are generated while maintaining the relationship between the timings tm13b and tm14. It will also be possible for a section to appear, and a dramatic interval may also be suitably eliminated.

  FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the silent reception reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the silent reception reception effect (operation valid period B) will be described in further detail.

  As described above, the normal reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example is silent within the period in which specific sound data (sound “BGM playback”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm15 in the section, it is generated as "automatic reception effect directed to the automatic performance function".

  As described above, although illustration is omitted, a prophetic effect which suggests that an operation opportunity is given to the player when the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is generated (for example, FIG. b)).

  In this respect, although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, even when symbol variation is performed with a predetermined effect pattern different from the specific effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination, the predetermined timing When B. comes, BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern can be output in a suppression mode or silence. However, when a “period of output in a suppression mode or silence” is generated in a predetermined effect pattern, no reception effect is generated when a predetermined time (a fixed period) elapses from the generation of the period. Then, it is arranged that the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is progressed to be returned to the effect state output in the non-suppressed mode.

  In view of the pachinko machine 1 in which such an effect progress (predetermined effect pattern) can appear, the above-mentioned sign effect (for example, the figure) performed when the in-silence reception effect (operation valid period B) in the specific effect pattern occurs. As for 292 (b)), it is difficult to recognize whether or not the reception effect is generated when the silent section appears by making it start after the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears comes in and it becomes tense It is desirable to maintain the feeling. At this time, it is desirable that the expectation progress is higher in the effect of the reception effect in the silent section than in the effect of the effect of the reception effect in the silent period.

  By the way, as a method of outputting BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") in the suppression mode or silent in the above predetermined effect pattern, it is limited to the method of setting the data contents (volume initial value) itself as the suppression mode or silent Instead, this may be realized by adjusting the volume from the initial value. That is, in the predetermined effect pattern, the reception effect can not be generated while the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is output in the suppression mode or silent, and the BGM data (of "BGM reproduction" Since the timing at which the sound should be returned in the non-suppressed mode is also not fixed and is predetermined, even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is performed, such as the above-mentioned sound shift etc. There is no inconvenience.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 303 (a), if an operation effective period B corresponding to the silent reception reception effect occurs, the effect reception accompanying the operation within the operation effective period B occurs. For example, FIG. 292 (c) shows that the operation effective period B ends or the operation effective period B ends due to the fact that no operation is performed within the operation effective period B and the production reception is automatically generated. In the mode (or another example) described with reference to (d) and the like, an image for prompting an operation, an image showing a remaining time, and the like are displayed.

  Here, the reception effect within silence (operation effective period B) according to this effect example is set as a period from timing tm15 to timing tm16 when "time Tb" has passed, and the silent reception reception effect (operation effective period). B) When the effect reception has been generated within the B), the "special effect sound B" is output over the "time Td" longer than the "time Tb".

  That is, in this case, even if the player performs an operation immediately after the silent reception reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs at timing tm15, the “special effect sound B” is generated. As shown in FIG. 303 (a), the output is assigned to the channel until the timing tm17a after the timing tm17 returned to the normal section. On the other hand, at the timing tm15a (the timing when the specific time (<time Tb) has elapsed since the operation effective period B occurred) within the silent reception effect (operation effective period B), the automatic effect function is enabled. When the effect reception is automatically generated, the “special effect sound B” is assigned to the channel and output until the delayed timing tm17b as shown in FIG. 303 (b).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the setting process by the player in the “automatic production mode” is not installed, and the operation by the player when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs. If there is not, at timing tm 15a, the "automatic rendering function" is always activated to automatically generate a rendering acceptance. Accordingly, the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) itself occurs as a period that can be continued from the timing tm15 to the timing tm16, but is substantially continued only from the timing tm15 to the timing tm15a. It can be said that it is a period that cannot be obtained. In other words, in this case, it is impossible for an effect to be received within the period from the timing tm15a to the timing tm16. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, such a disguise period (timing tm15a to tm16). And the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is intentionally generated as a longer period (timing tm15 to tm16).

  According to such a configuration, unlike the case of the above-described normal reception effect (operation valid period A), both the number of empty channels and the remaining time as the operation valid time B have a margin. In the atmosphere with a sense of security that looks like this, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity to the player, thereby improving the game entertainment.

  In order to make the remaining time as the operation effective time B have a margin, the gauge amount applied to the bar display indicating the remaining time of the internal reception effect (operation effective period A) is filled at timing tm15. It is desirable that after displaying as a tongue state, it is displayed so as to decrease in such a manner (speed) that this becomes 0 as timing tm 16 comes. Also, in this case, since the timing tm15a arrives with the gauge amount for the bar display remaining, and the production reception is automatically generated, the mode shown in FIGS. 292 (e) and (f) (or As shown in the other example), the bar display is not hidden, and the "special effect sound B" is started to be output while continuing to be displayed, whereby the normal internal reception effect (operation valid period A) is made. It is desirable to be able to recognize that the “automatic rendering function” has been activated. The bar display left in this way will be hidden when "special effect sound B" is in the output state.

  Further, according to such a configuration, the operation effective time B can be substantially shortened than the time recognized by the player (the remaining time indicated by the bar display). For example, if it is assumed that an operation by the player may be performed immediately before the timing tm 16 at which the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is ended, the effect reception may occur. As shown in FIG. 303 (c), "" is assigned to a channel and output until a delayed timing tm17c. Then, the “special effect sound B” corresponding to the reception effect within silence (operation valid period B) has a possibility that the channel can be used over a very wide range of timings tm15 to tm17c. It can be understood that the margin of the empty channel is lost.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, as described above, the operation effective time B is substantially shortened with respect to the time recognized by the player (timing tm15 to tm16) (timing tm15 to tm15a) The period during which the “special effect sound B” corresponding to the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) can use the channel is shown from the range (timing tm 15 to tm 17 c) shown in FIG. 303 (c). The range can be narrowed to the range shown in 303 (b) (timing tm15 to tm17b), and an empty channel can be given a margin accordingly.

  However, in the above-described effect example, even if the reception effect within silence (operation valid period B) is viewed as a substantially shortened period (specific time from timing tm15 to timing tm15a), This is set as a time longer than the time Ta set as the internal reception effect (operation valid period A). It is important to adopt such a configuration to create a safe atmosphere that seems to have room for both the number of empty channels and the remaining operation time B. You can say that.

  In addition, in the production example related to the silent section, “a sense of incongruity caused by returning the sound of“ BGM playback ”as a non-suppressed state when an operation by the player is accepted without returning the sound after a predetermined time” is further enhanced. In order to make it difficult to remember, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound B to be larger than the initial value of BGM playback in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section while attention is focused on the special effect sound B having a large volume initial value.

  Moreover, in the production example related to the silent section, the special production sound B is generated based on the production reception. However, only when specific production conditions according to the variation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination are satisfied. The special effect sound B may be generated based on the reception of the effect. Even when a specific performance condition is not satisfied, an operation effective period is generated at timing tm15, and when an effect is received within the operation effective period, a predetermined operation is performed based on the reception of the effect. Play the production sound of (eg failure production sound). Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the BGM playback sound is secretly set to the playback state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is in the playback state. It is desirable to make it the same as in the case of the above-mentioned example of the point to which it is made to shift to.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (a failure effect The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in the lost mode without the BGM reproduction sound being restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. Also good. In this case, at timing tm14, the assignment of the sound for BGM reproduction to the channels 02 and 03 may be ended, and this may be made an empty channel.

  Further, when the special effect sound B is generated, the display change and the movable effect for operating the predetermined movable body are performed together based on the acceptance of the effect so as to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of the BGM reproduction. It is desirable to do so in order to make the sound of BGM reproduction secretly shift to the reproduction state in the normal section. In this case, when the special effect sound A is generated, it is desirable that only the display change is generated based on the reception of the effect, and the movable effect that operates the predetermined movable body is not executed.

  Further, in the above production example, the sound of “BGM playback” is output silently in some sections, but the sound is not limited to this and is output in a mode that is suppressed more than the sound of “BGM playback” in other sections. Anything is acceptable. Here, the mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered can be exemplified as a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is lowered.

  Also, in the above production example, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is set by setting a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the “BGM playback” sound data itself assigned to the predetermined channel. It is possible to create a suppression mode or a state (a special period) in which sound is output without any adjustment just by playing it. However, it is not always necessary to set the suppression mode or the time-series period in which the sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel is set to silence, for example, the sound of “BGM playback” at timing tm14. You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). That is, in this case, even if the effect reception is generated at timing tm 15a, the process of raising the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” from the specific value (processing to return to the initial value of volume) is not performed. . When the specific performance condition is satisfied, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is increased from the specific value while the special performance sound is being played when the predetermined timing tm17 arrives. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is finished. (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  Further, in the above presentation example, a restriction process is performed to make it more difficult to generate a new sound for an empty channel, at least from a predetermined timing before timing tm14 comes to timing tm17. Is desirable. In addition, as such a restriction process, for example, a specific game having nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol variation being executed, such as a hold winning sound, a general sound effect sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc. It is desirable that the sound be a target of restriction, and that the specific gaming sound that is the target of restriction not be reproduced without being newly assigned to the channel.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing tm14 arrives. So that it is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a speech), and the timing tm14 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played, and BGM playback is performed. It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is terminated before timing tm15 at which the special effect sound B (or predetermined effect sound) can be output (timing tm15 or before timing tm15). This is desirable in order to relieve anxiety that the special effect sound B is not output.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM playback is generated from the timing at which the special effect sound B (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output through a plurality of channels until the timing tm17 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound B are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM playback into these effect sounds, and the sound of BGM playback It becomes possible to secretly shift to the playback state in the normal mode.

  Also in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, a setting process by the player according to the “automatic effect mode” may be installed. That is, in this case, when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated and the effect reception occurs when the predetermined timing arrives even in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A). . On the other hand, when the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) occurs when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated when the predetermined timing before the timing tm 15a comes. It is desirable that the production acceptance is made valid.

  In the above-described effect example, the execution periods of various notice effects during the symbol change are set so that the number of empty channels does not become zero even during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). You may make it do. The point is that the sound of “BGM playback” is continuously output in a non-suppressing manner, so long as it provides an atmosphere in which there is no room in the free channel. Also, conversely, the number of free channels may be 0 during the execution period of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B). The point is that the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a mode of suppression or silent, as long as it provides an atmosphere in which a vacant channel can be felt by that amount.

  In the above example, “special effect sound A” is assigned to channels “08” and “09”, while “special effect sound B” is assigned to channels “10” and “11”. The “special effect sound A” and the “special effect sound B” may be assigned to the same channel.

  In the above-mentioned example of presentation, it is decided to start the prognostic effect with respect to the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) after the arrival of the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears. However, the precursor effect may be started before timing tm14 at which the silent section appears, and timing tm14 at which the silent section appears may occur while the precursor effect is being performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect such as whether or not a silent section appears while the precursor effect is being performed.

  In the production example, the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the silent reception effect (operation effective period B). In the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the operation is performed as a reception effect with the operation button 410 as an operation target, whereas in the silent reception effect (operation valid period B), the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target. It may be executed as a reception effect. In this case, different bird's-eye view images (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) are different between the execution period of the reception effect in the normal reception (operation effective period A) and the execution period of the reception effect in the silence (operation effective period B). As it will be displayed, when the effect after operation is started by the reception effect of those, the overhead view image is not displayed as in the mode (or another example) described with reference to FIGS. Instead, the post-operation effect may be started while the display is continuously displayed.

  In the above-mentioned effect example, in the specific effect pattern, the internal reception effect (operation valid period A) is generated only once when in the normal section, but when it is in the normal section, the non-automatic reception is performed. The normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) as the effect may be generated a plurality of times. However, it is desirable to perform different post-operation effects in the normal internal reception effects. On the other hand, in a silent section in a specific performance pattern, the “BGM playback sound” is secretly output in a non-suppressed manner while the “special performance sound B” is being played back. It is desirable that the effect (operation effective period B) be generated only once. Then, it is desirable that the after-operation effect by the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the after-operation effect by the silent internal reception effect (operation effective period B) have different effect contents.

[Moveable performance triggered by the establishment of conditions different from the conditions for design games]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when a game ball is received at the start port (first start port 2002, second start port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when the big hit is won, the big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be obtained after executing the symbol change in which the big hit symbol is displayed is executed, and after the big hit game, the player is advantageous. It is possible to control the game state (short time state, probability change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides effects according to the result of the determination related to winning (for example, various other notice effects such as timer effects, operation effects, pre-read effects, in addition to effect patterns) As described above, the game entertainment is maintained until the big hit game is performed.

  However, only by performing effects according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back decoration unit 3100, the back movable display unit 3200, specific There is a concern that it may be difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate over a long period of time.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the display contents and the movable content in the effect display device 1600 are also obtained even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is satisfied. It is possible to execute a process that is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the decoration. That is, in this case, a display change and a movable body operation appear in a mode exceeding the category of symbol games, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period. Can be expected.

Here, it changes to the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition not related to the judgment processing concerning the progress of the game and the symbol variation (symbol game start condition) according to it is satisfied. As a method of causing, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. It should be noted that any of the following methods can be used to cause changes in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition not related to the symbol game start condition is satisfied. It is also possible to adopt a method different from any of the methods listed below, but a situation where symbol variation is not temporarily executed (the processing flag shown in FIG. 167 is “0”, and the number of reservations) Even if the condition is “0”, the above-mentioned other condition must be satisfied, and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, the display content on the effect display device 1600 or It should be possible to make changes in the behavior of the movable decoration.
・ A technique to regularly execute an effect lottery not related to symbol variation, and to obtain that a specific result is obtained in this effect lottery as the above “satisfaction of another condition” • The number of times of cumulative operations for a specific operation means The above-mentioned method of making it reach the predetermined number as “the establishment of another condition” The time is measured (for example, the power is turned on) by the RTC (real time clock) function or the arithmetic processing in peripheral control MPU 1511a (or main control MPU 1310a) Method of measuring the time from the end of

  In general, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured by using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is determined that another condition is satisfied, and the display contents in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, when a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition not related to the symbol game start condition is satisfied, the change timing is reached. In general, it takes a relatively long time (eg, at least several hours) to cause changes in the behavior of the display content or the movable decoration even though such a long time is required. It is feared that the entertainment interest may be reduced if a situation that can not be made occurs.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which a movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is preset is a symbol game start condition. Can be generated based on the establishment of another specific condition (for example, that the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). In a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position even though it should be in the original position), and the specific state has not occurred, the design fluctuates. When the corresponding restoration operation time has arrived, the movable decoration body can be started to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even if a predetermined restoration operation time arrives, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time within a specific state can be started without starting a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation. .

  That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the fact that a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game is established, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is prohibited. Since a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state can be started, the movable body abnormality is detected in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. It is expected that the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably executed by being restored.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 304, an example of processing contents when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 304, for convenience of explanation, “when the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time using the RTC function, an RTC state in which different display content appears ( The specific state) is generated and the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state) is described. As described above, the method for causing a change in the display content and the behavior of the movable decorative body in the effect display device 1600 when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. Even when other methods are adopted, it is possible to appropriately employ each technique described below.

  Assuming that there is a state prior to the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the remaining time (until the RTC state occurs) until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time. The remaining time of) will be updated regularly. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at time Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) occurs. Based on the above, it is possible to execute processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C. In this way, the flow of the game so far is achieved by sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the basis of the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) that has nothing to do with the situation of the symbol variation. You can have a sense of expectation that will change. At this time, the display content on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more appropriately increase the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes). If a big hit is won between the occurrence of the period (RTC state) and the end of the period, the progress of the production by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) has not occurred (normal state) ( It is more desirable to provide presentation benefits such as enabling special presentation mode).

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, a condition unrelated to the state of symbol variation is established even at timing Rt1 slightly before (for example, 5 seconds before) such timing Rt2. Based on the satisfaction of the condition (the satisfaction of the first condition), it is possible to execute the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is met). That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example, whether the timing Rt1 has arrived or not in addition to the timing Rt2 is determined by periodically checking the lapse of time since the power is turned on, and the timing Rt1 is determined. When it is determined that the has arrived, the previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing (behavior of the movable decoration) corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed . The “previous display” can be executed as, for example, a display such as “immediately RTC status” or a countdown display toward timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body motions are the result of the big hit determination Because it is suggested in advance to the player that they are not based on (no big hit expectation), it is suitably avoided that the game's interest is reduced due to a recognition error by the player Will be able to.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 304, only a display (a display not conforming to the symbol variation) appears without any expectation as a display content in the effect display device 1600 at least in a period of timing Rt1 to Rt2. The decorative pattern (rendering pattern) is not displayed so as not to be displayed. That is, in this case, three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) appears as the display content in the effect display device 1600 without any expectation. Since the processing to be started is started, it is expected to more suitably avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to a recognition error by the player.

  Here, “pre-display that appears at timing Rt1” and “movable body operation that appears at timing Rt2” respectively correspond to “display that does not conform to symbol variation” and correspond to “behavior of a movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. It is Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body are generated regardless of the execution state of the symbol variation at those timings (including the execution / non-execution). However, depending on the execution situation of the symbol variation, the situation in which the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are not ready to operate (the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are in the original position despite the timing Rt2 has arrived). It is feared that the process of sequentially operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be performed even when the timing Rt2 finally arrives.

  For example, when any of several variation patterns is selected as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the movable ornament A, the movable ornament B, Although a movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, the movable body operation time (in this case, when the RTC state occurs) in the RTC state described above is reached during the execution of such a movable effect. In some cases, at least the movable decorative body among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C which is in the process of execution can not be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to design variation" Can be assumed.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes, the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as well as various movable modes provided in the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to execute a movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, if it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state (abnormal determination) in this movable abnormality determination, the movable decorative body to be determined is determined in a predetermined manner following the processing of the abnormal determination. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (such as an operation of moving to the original position), it is possible to recover the movable decorative body in an abnormal state at an early stage. Therefore, the movable body operation timing in the above-mentioned RTC state comes in the middle of executing the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation (the movement to move to the original position, etc.) to the movable decoration. If there is at least one of the movable ornaments A, B, and C at least in the middle of the restoration operation, it can not be used as the above-mentioned “behavior of the movable ornament not conforming to the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  In addition, as "restoration operation time corresponding to design change", for example, start time of design change (time to acquire the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when design change is started), and design change It can be executed (execution of restoration processing based on acquisition of a command) at least one of the stop timing (timing to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when symbol variation is stopped) It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 304, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after at least the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs When it is in the period until the movement in the mode (in this case, the sequential movement by the three movable decorations A, B and C), the movable decoration used in the period (movable decoration A, movable decoration B) By prohibiting the movable decorative body C) from being used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable ornament not conforming to the symbol variation) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the behavior of the body can not be performed by the movable effect on the symbol variation side.

  However, at this time, there is a concern that the game entertainment may be lowered if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed. In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at timing Rt1, only a display (a display not conforming to symbol variation) is displayed, which does not show any degree of expectation as the display content in the effect display device 1600. As mentioned above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when there is a symbol variation (in the diagram, B variation (losing) in the middle of execution) when the timing Rt2 has arrived, The display that is not shown again (display from the timing Rt1) is not hidden at this time, and this is changed over the period until the timing Rt2a at which the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt <b> 2 to Rt <b> 2 a, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol variation is actually performed, the effect display device 1600 has a decoration. Only the display in which the design pattern is not displayed and no expectation is shown. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable ornament according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C) is advanced. It can be expected that the lowering of the game entertainment due to the fact that the movable effect corresponding to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is suitably suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, when the symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss) in the figure) is ended (stopped) when timing Rt2 arrives (when timing Rt2a comes) Even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display without any expectation (display from timing Rt1)” that has been displayed so far is not displayed at this time. Thus, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made to appear. Then, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started after that, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation The display showing the expected degree of the production pattern and the notice production is started as usual.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started in this way and the effect pattern is displayed, the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes After that, as long as the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode (here, sequentially operated by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the movable body movement time in the RTC state, It goes without saying that the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, although the movable effect on the symbol variation side is strictly prohibited, since the movable body operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol variation side The decline in interest will be suppressed.

  As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether the situation should be prohibited at the start of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), and if it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (figure Among them, the C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibition target of a movable effect (a movable effect using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, the moving decorative body is moved according to the movable body operation time in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs in the middle of the corresponding symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure). Even if the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in a specific manner is completed, the movable effect ( At least the movable decoration A, the movable decoration B, and the movable decoration C) can not be performed.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the timing of causing a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state to appear is a timing Rt2a that is later than the original timing Rt2. There is a concern that the However, although the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, the production privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (if the big win is won between the occurrence of the RTC state and the end, the special production mode is controlled. Etc.) is not generated at the timing Rt2, and only the symbol variation (C, D variation in the diagram) after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state is targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, during the period until the timing Rt2a comes (during the timing Rt2 comes) the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) which was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 comes is finished (stopped) ), “The movable decorative body operates in a specific mode according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state since the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can also be assumed that "the period until the end of the sequential operation by C" ends. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display showing no expectation degree (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. This is the example shown in FIG. 304, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after timing Rt2) is the target of the RTC effect privilege. Not because

  Furthermore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 304, at least “after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state. In this case, the restoration process is triggered even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived (the period until the completion of the sequential movement by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). By prohibiting this so as not to be performed (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state), the movable body operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (not conforming to symbol variation) It is possible to suppress that the behavior of the movable decoration can not be performed by the restoration process on the design fluctuation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation corresponding to the symbol variation side is performed. The processing to be performed is prohibited, and the processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the abnormal operation of the movable body is restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without being received, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body is more reliably executed. .

  In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the game state is controlled in the normal game state and the symbol variation (A variation (losing) in the figure) is being performed according to the big hit determination, It is assumed that the timing Rt1 arrives. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, a display such as “immediately RTC status” appears on the background display on the effect display device 1600 as a display not conforming to the symbol variation, for example. Then, the symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (losing)) is ended and a new symbol is displayed from the time when the display such as "immediately RTC status" is performed until the timing Rt2 at which the RTC status occurs comes. Variation (variation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 comes when the symbol variation is being performed, and at the timing Rt2, as the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation, three movable A process of operating the decorative bodies A, B and C sequentially is performed. Note that “display not conforming to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued for a period until a new symbol variation (in the drawing, variation B (loss)) is stopped.

  Further, although this is also described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “the three movable decorative objects A according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes In the period until the sequential operations by B and C are completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5 ') ", at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, It is decided to prohibit this so that the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C and the restoration process on the symbol variation side are not performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, in the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a, although the symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss) is being executed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( It is controlled as a period in which none of the display showing the expectation degree, the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side (the movable body motion indicating the expectation degree), and the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is executed (No. One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 304, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expectation is expected) It is controlled as a period during which neither the movable body operation in which the degree is shown nor the symbol fluctuation side restoration processing is performed (the second limitation).

  It should be noted that the control at such timings Rt2 to Rt2a (no effect display on symbol variation side (display showing expectation) and movable effect (movable body operation showing expectation) is not performed) Even if the symbol variation in the period is not a loss variation, but is performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit variation), it is executed. That is, in this case, no expectation effect is executed, and when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is at the stage of execution, the jackpot symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, the player who was expecting to be in the RTC state can enjoy the fun as a surprised performance exceeding the expectation. In addition, after the jackpot symbol appears in this way, a jackpot gaming state will occur while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C are sequentially operated.

  Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, with respect to the display from timing Rt1 (only the display in which no change in the decorative symbol is performed and any expectation is not shown), the symbol fluctuation in the process of being executed when the timing Rt2 arrives The display is not displayed at the timing Rt2a to be stopped, and instead, a specific background (such as “RTC state”) after the occurrence of the RTC state is displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (in the diagram, variation pattern C) is newly started in a state in which a specific background (such as “RTC state”) is displayed, an effect display (expectation level indicates the variation pattern) is started. Display will be executed as usual. However, after the timing Rt2a has arrived for the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable ornaments A, B, and C, unless the process of operating the three movable ornaments A, B, and C sequentially is completed. Will also be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, even if an effect pattern in which a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the big hit determination, The in-liquid-crystal display, sound, lamp lighting, etc. are normally performed, but the corresponding movable decorative body is not operated.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the three movable decorative bodies A and B are moved depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs. , C until the completion of the sequential operation (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′) ”, the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation (here, the symbol variation start) Even if the time and stop time come, this is prohibited so that the restoration process (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state) is not performed. . Accordingly, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (lost) in the figure) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (lost) in the figure). )) Start time (restoration operation time) comes, but at these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body is restored. Processing is never executed.

  However, in the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt5 (timing Rt2 to Rt5 ′ at the time of abnormality), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. It is determined whether or not. In the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined presentation position (first position) and then at the predetermined presentation position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends, it is determined whether the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body B is operated in the normal operation mode. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then at the predetermined effect position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

  Next, at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in the abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in the normal operation mode. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then at the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304 (e), when the timing Rt5 comes after the operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. “The behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state Can be executed. However, while a series of movable body operations (in this case, sequential operations by the three movable ornament bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence of the RTC state are being executed, a predetermined value is applied to the movable ornament body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that he or she is performing the restoration operation of the game, it may be a surprise, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movable bodies) when the RTC state occurs. The operation is not performed independently as an operation different from the sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C, but is performed as an operation in a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. . That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state itself can appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state. Thus, it is possible to favorably avoid a decrease in gaming interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, on the basis of the result of the abnormality determination, not the process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but an abnormality including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B It is possible to execute a process of operating in the operation mode (special operation). Thereafter, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not operated again in the normal operation mode (normal operation), and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Similarly to the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body C A process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is performed. The time required for the normal operation of the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation of the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration B after the occurrence of the RTC state (for example, during the operation of the movable decoration A, etc.), the movable decoration B causing the abnormality While the timing to operate should be reached, regardless of the situation on the symbol variation side, it will be left in an abnormal state and left. Then, when the timing at which the movable decorative body B should be operated comes, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the operation mode at the time of normal operation. It is possible to restore the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred while suitably maintaining the rendering mode at the time of occurrence of the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, C”. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as an operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state is executed, so that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state A drop in gaming interest when doing a game is preferably avoided.

  In addition, the symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially executed by the three movable ornaments A, B and C according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It is started when it is in the middle stage and is continued until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C is completed. Therefore, the stop timing (restoration operation timing) of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the drawing) and the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the drawing) come. When you do, because the prohibition state for restoration processing on the symbol fluctuation side has already been released, when there is a movable decoration that is in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration processing is executed for the movable decoration The Rukoto.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoring operation”, the “special mode including the restoring operation” is “the normal operation”. The movable decorative body B may be restored (original position return) according to an operation mode different from the “mode”, and may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at timing Rt1, only a display (for example, “soon, RTC status” or the like) in which no degree of expectation is shown as the display content in the effect display device 1600 appears. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display content is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC preparation state”, etc.) You may make it switch to. However, even if the display content is switched at timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, a display (symbol variation) in which no degree of expectation is shown as the display content in the effect display device 1600 in the period of timing Rt2 to Rt2a It is important to make it appear that it does not conform to

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, the case where an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B has been described. Alternatively, it may be desirable to operate each in a special manner, including a restore operation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in the specific mode is set as the generation time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “not conforming to symbol variation based on arrival of timings Rt1 and Rt2 satisfied based on the function (RTC function) not conforming to symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side “Display” and “Behavior of movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation” were started. However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function not conforming to the symbol variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, "a display not conforming to a symbol variation" or "behavior of a movable decorative object not conforming to a symbol variation" May be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “the movable decorative body operates in the specific mode according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives (here, 3 It is something which prohibits this so that the restoration processing on the design fluctuation side is not performed when it is "the period until the end of the sequential operation by two movable ornaments A, B and C)", thereby the RTC state It is made difficult to cause a situation where the movable body operation (behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in (specific state) can not be performed due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is in the execution state. In particular, the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and as a result, the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state) may arrive. That is, in this case, the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). There is concern that it will not be earned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even during the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, restoration processing for at least three movable decorative objects A, B, and C among various movable decorative objects provided in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is desirable to prohibit this so that it is not executed.

  FIG. 305 shows a modification to the example shown in FIG. 304. “In the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, at least three of the movable decorative bodies A, B and C among various movable decorative bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 are shown. This is different from the example shown in FIG. 304 in that the restoration process is not executed.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 305, in the period (timing Rt1 to Rt2) from the arrival of timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C (or , Restore process) not to execute itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state in a display (such as "soon, RTC state") not based on the symbol variation is restored. It will never be left in an abnormal state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 305, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs is reached, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state. It is determined that an abnormality determination (a first abnormality determination) is performed as to whether or not any one of them is in an abnormal state.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has come; As described above, the process (the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state) is performed. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not the movable decorative body to be operated has an abnormality is separately executed again, and there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 304 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 304 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is performed before the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started. The second abnormality determination will be executed prior to operating the movable decorative body B even after the second decoration.

  On the other hand, as a result of the above-described abnormality determination prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. In such a case, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a manner that delays the arrival of the movable body operating time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is “a situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”. By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the above “special mode”. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 305 (f), at timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body is It is assumed that it is determined that one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality as a result of the abnormality determination when "a situation where is not yet started" is performed. Then, while maintaining the “situation in which the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is maintained. Will perform the restoration process for

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 305 (e) and (f), compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are abnormal, they are within the RTC state. The mobile operation timing is delayed (in the figure, from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b), but using the period (timing Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) generated by such a delay Then, after the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is restored, the movable body operation time in the RTC state can be made to come. After that, when the movable body operation time in the RTC state comes, the processing as described above with reference to FIG. 304 is performed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (e). When the timing Rt5b comes after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the normal state, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the “movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. The behavior of “1” is ended, and the prohibition state (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (g), when operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially, it is determined that the movable decorative body B is abnormal (timing (timing) After abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), it is assumed that an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (f). After the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in a mode according to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are normal modes and the movable decorative body B is a special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” at the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b) ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, if an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination The operations in the special mode are respectively executed.

  According to such a configuration, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, three It becomes possible to appropriately execute (sequential operation by the movable ornaments A, B, C), and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the RTC state can be suitably maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 305, when there are abnormalities in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, restoration processing for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is set. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence (sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C here). In this case, a series of movable body movements at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are performed as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored) increase. Although the timing at which the) is started is delayed for a longer time, it becomes possible to execute the series of movable body operations at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state in the normal mode. The restoring operation for a plurality of movable ornaments may be performed in parallel, and in this case, it is possible to suppress a delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 305, if the player may feel that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state, it will be an amusement. There is concern about the decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and (g), when the “restoration operation” is completed, “sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is executed (sequential execution). ) So that a series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as “a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state”. It is difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the case of the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormal occurrence situations, a display (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body can be displayed. In the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and 305 (g) as well as in the example shown in 304 (f), the restoration operation (restoration process) is performed on the movable decoration in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body (during recovery operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during a period in which the movable decorative body B is operated in the special mode (during operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality determination) The display (error code, etc.) indicating that it is in progress will not appear. In addition, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode ends, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode starts after the operation in the special mode ends, and FIG. f) The display contents in the effect display device 1600 triggered by the occurrence of these timings at the timing when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C start the sequential operation after the restoration operation shown in f), (g) is over There is no such thing as causing any change. Also in these cases, it is assumed that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state so that only "a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state" is performed. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

  In FIG. 304 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 305 and another example, three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are sequentially operated as movable body operations based on the occurrence of the RTC state. The movable decorative body (one, two, three or more, etc.) which is not limited to the above but is also used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side, based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the game start condition (starting condition) What is necessary is just to operate | move by a specific aspect in the movable body operation | movement time within the specific state to generate | occur | produce.

  In addition, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation time in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operably provided body). Operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, and the like, and board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decoration member SDY (a spear accessory) ) Etc.) may be used respectively.

  However, for example, in FIG. 304 and other examples thereof, or in FIG. 305 and other examples thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state), When a frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as such an operation means after the timing Rt2a arrives. A situation may occur where "operation not conforming to symbol variation" is taking place.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display which has been displayed up to that time "Display" is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made to appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, It was also mentioned above that the display in which the expected degree such as the presentation pattern or the notice presentation is indicated is started as usual. Therefore, the frame side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operating means is used within a period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed. In spite of being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame side movable decorative body that is also used as an operation means depending on the production pattern, Confusion may occur in the stage. In addition, in the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (and further, the period of the timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), a display not conforming to symbol variation (a display not showing any degree of expectation) appears. Even if symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed, an operation opportunity is not given within the period.

  Therefore, although the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in the state of being provided for the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, according to the result of the big hit determination for the specific operating means When the effect time for providing the operation opportunity has arrived, the effect display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) prompting the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means, It is desirable not to accept the effect even if the specific operation means in the state of performing the specific operation is operated. According to such a configuration, when the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being executed, it is possible to play the game that the operation operation was originally provided to the specific operation means. It is possible to suggest to the In addition, by not accepting an operation for a specific operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or an abnormality due to the operation being performed for the specific operation means in the operating state. It will be expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display for prompting the operation to the specific operation means is performed. If such things happen frequently, the entertainment interest may decline due to the fact that the presentation is not developed. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably, the sword decorative member 5001, etc.), the operation effect within the symbol variation according to the big hit judgment The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high operation effect generation rate within the symbol variation within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. When it is applied, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the reception of the effect when it is operated (the predetermined effect according to the reception of the effect) be performed as usual.

  That is, of the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably (for example, vibration or the like), the sword decorative member 5001, and the like) The movable decorative body in which the specific operation means (for example, sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low generation ratio of the operation effect in the inside is operable at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) By using it as one, the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state. For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the presentation time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the big hit determination to the sword decorative body 5001) will occur.

  In addition, a frame-side movable decorative member provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably, a specific operating means having a relatively low generation ratio of operation effects in the symbol variation) is movable in the RTC state (specific state) When it is used as one of the movable ornaments that can be operated at the operation time, an operation independent of the sequential movement by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is performed when the RTC state occurs. It is desirable that the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 304) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 305) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In addition, it is possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being influenced by the operation (delay or the like). In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C be used as a board-side movable decorative body. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the movable decorative body is provided on the door frame 3 side. The operation by the frame side movable decorative body can be executed in parallel.

  Then, after the RTC state (specific state) is generated, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body with a relatively low generation ratio of the operational effect within the symbol variation). 5001)) When the time required to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) is “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot determination is executed. Even if, at least the “specific time” has not elapsed since the start of the pattern variation (the start of the production pattern), a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing (here, the frame side movable decoration) in the production pattern It is desirable to make settings related to each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, in FIG. 304 and another example thereof, or in FIG. 305 and another example thereof, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, When the operation opportunity is given to the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame side movable decorative body in response to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state) Since the operation) has already been completed and the production can be accepted, the production at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be improved without sacrificing the production on the symbol variation side.

  Further, as described above, in view of the fact that normal effect control is allowed only by the symbol variation after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, As for the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol variation by the sword ornament 5001), the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation to be digested first after that is inevitably started, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is equivalent to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ), It is possible to provide a margin for completing operations that do not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

  Further, when the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, When performing the determination, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is used instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation in the normal state in the form of performing the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the above-mentioned operation, or performing the restoration operation and subsequent to this. In this case, the “special mode including the restoration operation” also restores (returns to the original position) the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) by an operation mode different from the “normal operation mode”. For example, a minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) may be used.

  Then, the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is “normal mode”, “special mode including the recovery operation”, and “restoration operation”. As long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is used as long as the operation is not completed. It is more desirable that the setting according to each effect pattern be performed so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated when the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is generated. Regardless of whether the operation is executed in a normal mode or an abnormal determination mode, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is applied only after the operation is completed. On the other hand, an operation opportunity can be given.

  When an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the presentation reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation (RTC) by the frame-side movable decorative body is given. Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It becomes impossible to receive the production, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, when the time from the above-mentioned timing Rt2 required to complete the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C in the normal mode is “special time”, the big hit determination As long as neither of the “specific time” and the “special time” have elapsed since the symbol variation started (the effect pattern started) Each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the production pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable ornament (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive). It is desirable to make settings for

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, restoration processing for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) It is desirable that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

  On the other hand, among the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is the case with respect to a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A having a fast operation order or a movable decorative body having a long time required for the restoration operation). When it is in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament is prohibited, but a movable ornament different from the specific movable ornament (for example, the operation order is slow) When the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) or a movable decorative body having a short restoration time is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. Processing (restoration operation) may be performed without prohibition. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A moves when the RTC occurs. It is because it is possible to execute the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in the normal mode if it can be completed during this period.

  Also, the timing at which a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the RTC state occurs, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is started. It may be different from the timing.

[Recovery processing for movable abnormality with less influence on movable presentation]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, a state where the specific state has not occurred) When the restoration operation time to be performed (for example, the start time or the stop time of symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the state of production, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "pattern change start time" is set as "the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change". And now, as shown in FIG. 306, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes Will be executed.
-Based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a is acquired when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern according to the symbol variation is set, and the symbol variation is performed on the set effect pattern Processing to make the effect progress in the inside ・ Identify based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side is acquired when the symbol variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) Of performing predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament of

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, it is assumed that “a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 comes, progress of rendering according to “a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” and a predetermined restoring operation for the specific movable decorative body A situation in which the processing to be performed is performed in parallel will appear.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific performance pattern can be executed, the performance pattern (relatively expected) that is pairwise with the specific performance pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. And in the production pattern which is a pair relationship (production pattern with relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of “a specific effect pattern (a relatively high expectation effect pattern) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a design variation” is performed. The In this way, by providing two effect patterns (effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are paired in terms of performance, a specific timing tm2 is provided. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display about whether to operate) or not. Is made feasible, and such entertainingness is suitably maintained by such an expressiveness.

  However, if there is still a situation where processing for causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation even at the time when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the start of the symbol variation, the specific timing It becomes apparent that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it is not possible to perform a staging operation despite the arrival of tm2. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect with the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the progress of the production relating to the “specific production pattern that can operate the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2” among the production patterns, and the predetermined movable decoration body. When a situation in which a process for performing a restoration operation (a restoration process based on a restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) occurs in parallel with each other, a specific time tm2 until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. The “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body” is ended. In addition, although it is possible to employ | adopt various methods as "the process which performs a predetermined | prescribed decompression | restoration operation | movement with respect to a specific movable decoration body", in the following description, "an abnormal state is eliminated, or A description will be given on the assumption that “a process in which a restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is repeatedly performed until a predetermined upper limit number is reached” is executed.

  More specifically, with regard to “the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation”, the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decorative body is abnormal. The time required to be different will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is eliminated and the original position is restored by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, “a predetermined restoration for the specific movable decorative body is performed. The timing tx at which the processing to perform the operation is completed will also arrive relatively early, but the number of times this is repeated before the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration fails and is restored (restoration) The more the timing tx at which the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is completed, is advanced in a delayed manner to a later time. And at the latest, if the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and it is not yet restored (restoring) but another restoration operation is executed, the timing tx will be exceeded. By ending the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation while the body is in the abnormal state, the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation during the specific timing tm comes to an end regardless of the state of the restoration. It becomes like this.

  In addition, if it takes x hours to perform one restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, one pattern is performed so that the relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoring operation within the fluctuation is set, and the processing for causing the predetermined restoring operation to end even if not restored (restoring) when the upper limit number n is reached is ended. By doing so, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be terminated before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation.

  According to such a configuration, the development of the specific effect pattern that can operate the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation and the predetermined restoring operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. If a situation occurs, the process for performing a predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, the specific movable decorative body is not restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in the stop state, it can be suitably maintained as to the effect on whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 comes. become. For example, even if a specific movable decorative body is stopped at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 comes, it may cause some behavior or the movable decorative body does not operate. Also, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (when the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the rendering operation by the movable decoration is performed), etc. .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is in a restoring operation while the predetermined effect is being performed, it has an effect as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which “the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed is ended before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It is more desirable to maintain the game interest.

  In addition, as a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative object operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as `` nothing '', it is possible to exemplify a `` display effect that appears in advance in a manner that inquires whether or not a specific display result appears ''. When it is provided as “acting based on the reception of an effect by an operation by the player (or receiving an effect but not operating)”, “the effect of causing a specific display to prompt an operation by the player” Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the specific movable decorative body recovers from the abnormal state (restoration) at the timing tx when the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed. It is assumed that the normal state has been achieved. In this way, even when there is an abnormal state at the start of fluctuation (or the “restoration operation time” such as when the previous symbol is stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation has arrived after restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is completed, the specific movable decoration can not be restored (restored) from the abnormal state, and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) until the symbol variation is ended and the next restoration operation timing comes. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to cause the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the rendering performance as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thus providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines are becoming equipped with movable ornaments that perform multi-step movement with more complicated structures, and such movable ornaments have a longer process until their completion as their restoration processing. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation or a effect pattern that is paired with this, etc., when those effect patterns are started Within a time shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive (more preferably, the time for the predetermined effect to be performed) even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, it is only possible to restore the specific movable decorative body in an emergency and simple manner every time it becomes abnormal, and this accelerates the deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It may also be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is started. When the special production pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, while the special production pattern is produced, while the special production pattern is developed (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special production pattern is performed) Control is performed so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) and (d), as a result of the arrival of timing tm11 at which the symbol variation starts in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the progress of the rendering related to the special rendering pattern And when a situation in which a predetermined restoring operation is performed on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least during a special performance pattern (period until the symbol is stopped) Will allow this to continue without terminating the restore process.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body. Even if this is the case, the restoration process is not completed at least while the special rendering pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is performed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, restoration processing in a more serious manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state Since it becomes possible to perform additional implementation, etc., this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration and diagnosis, and the player will be carefully restored in this way as well. You will be able to watch the situation and enjoy the subsequent production with confidence. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the winning combination is lost. In addition, it is desirable that the display contents on the effect display device 1600 appear a unique display mode such as “This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) and (d), the timing tm11 arrives when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is continued without ending it even after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the restriction that "the recovery processing is forced to be performed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed although the abnormality occurs in the specific movable decorative body" is eliminated. For this reason, it is possible to perform restoration processing in a more serious manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, if there is a case that the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol variation is performed without interruption of the reserve process, the next restoration operation time (here, next time The symbol change start time) will arrive. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continued, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not in the original position). It will be done. If a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within a time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and failure to adequately handle abnormalities may also accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307A (b) and (d), it is in a situation of executing restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body When the next restoration operation time (here, next symbol fluctuation start time) comes, it is made to continue this in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time without ending the restoration processing in the execution state . According to such a configuration, "despite the occurrence of an abnormality in the specific movable decorative body, regardless of the status under which the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is being performed is under any circumstances. Since the restriction of “the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed” is eliminated, the restoration process in a more serious manner can be performed.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 307A (c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol variation being started when the restoration process for a specific movable decorative object is being performed, the new symbol variation As, "a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) to (c), it is started from timing tm 11 regardless of the state of the game or the effect after the special effect pattern is finished (further, the state of restoration, etc.). For the timing tx at which the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is completed, the time required for the next specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation to arrive (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even in such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digestion of the special performance pattern), the specific movable over a relatively long time until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the decoration.

  In addition, after a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is finished, a situation in which a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is continuously executed appears. Do not end the restoration process in a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and straddle three or more symbol variations (production patterns) (after one restoration process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in a form in which the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307A, at a timing tx when “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament” is completed, the specific movable ornament is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that it will be in the state. As described above, by continuing the one restoration process in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored conventionally. However, this can be made returnable, and a specific movable decorative body can be made to produce an effect at a specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, in spite of the fact that one restoration process is continued in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), at the time tx, the specific movable decorative body is abnormal When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained from the timing tx until the next fluctuation operation is finished and the next restoration operation timing comes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to cause the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the rendering performance as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thus providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  It should be noted that in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific operation is performed each time the restoration operation time (here, symbol fluctuation start time) arrives. If the restoration process for a movable ornament of a certain number of times is started several times, if the specific movable ornament has a failure that cannot be restored, the specific movable ornament cannot be restored. There is a concern that the fun of the game may be reduced by repeating the recovery process for the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is put in an abnormal state, the number of execution times of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number although the restoration operation timing has arrived for the predetermined upper limit number Although it is not restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes after that.

  However, on the other hand, only after a specific effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decorative body is put in an abnormal state. If there is a situation where an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and its condition One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is put in the abnormal state, although the restoration operation timing has arrived by the predetermined upper limit number, it is not restored from the abnormal state. Even when the “1” th restoration operation time has come, this will be continued without ending the restoration process for the specific movable decoration. In this manner, with regard to the aspect in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set even if the number of times the restoration operation time arrives while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable to treat as one count of recovery processing so that it is not terminated so as not to prevent the recovery processing in a more serious manner from being prevented.

  By the way, with respect to such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 or the backside decoration unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 side) In addition to the middle movable effect unit 3200 and the specific decorative member SDY (eg, a decorative object), the frame side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner as described above. Ru. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation buttons 410 that are operably provided, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) In some cases, restoration (restoring) may be performed in a manner different from that in the case of the specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which symbol variation is performed, movable operation in which the operation opportunity imparting effect of giving the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “a process of moving the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 252 (f))”; "Process of generating effect reception period for sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))", further "display prompting operation (character display such as" press down ", bar display showing remaining time of effect reception period ”(See FIG. 252 (f))”. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, an operation to push in) and an effect is received, the “specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) ) And the like (see FIG. 252 (g)) and “Process for causing change in display contents (see FIG. 252 (g))”. Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorative body that is rendered in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307A.

  However, “operation for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” in such an operation opportunity giving effect is not executed when the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normal. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state with respect to the “processing to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001” and “the processing to display prompting for operation”. It can be executed at any time and when it is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player views the “display for prompting operation” and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated and received an effect, A process of performing a rendering operation of a panel-side movable decorative body such as a specific decoration member SDY (a jumbo object) and a process of causing a change in display content in the effect display device 1600 are respectively performed. In addition, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decorative body 5001 receives an external force due to an operation by such a player, and the operation part moves, so that the abnormal state It may occur when the problem is resolved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 etc. provided movably provided) which is also used as operation means In an abnormal state, a return process (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307A) for applying a driving force for returning the frame side movable decorative body (operation means) to the original position. Restoration processing) is performed at each timing of “the above restoration operation time (here, the start time of symbol variation)” and “after an effect is received by an operation by the player within the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. It is made feasible.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body is aimed at the timing at the start or stop of the symbol variation (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing of the start and stop of the symbol variation, but also a different original timing (during the variation period) Among them, aiming at the frame side movable decorative body (operation), the external force (operation by the player) is applied and the abnormal state may be resolved) Since the process of restoring (returning) means) is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. .

  FIG. 308 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the original position when the sword decorative body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decorative body (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 308, an effect pattern of the movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity imparting effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 while the symbol variation is performed) is executed now. At timing tm21, it is assumed that “a process for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed. When the sword ornament 5001 is located at the operation position, “characteristic display such as“ processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 ””, “display for prompting operation (“ push ””), and an effect reception period If the player has operated the sword ornament 5001 and received a production (timing tm22) while the display of the remaining time is being executed), the “special decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) etc. “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body” and “processing for causing a change in display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In the example shown in FIG. 308, based on the fact that the effect has been accepted, the specific movable decorative body described in FIG. 306 and FIG. 307A is operated as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality occurs in the sword decorative body 5001 at the timing tm22 when the effect is received in this way and this is not returned to the original position, and the specific movable decoration that performed the effect based on the effect It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (the movable decoration on the panel side) and the abnormality is not returned to the original position. At this time, a determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body are made. However, an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. Regarding the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated therewith is executed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 is accompanied by a specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notification be performed. This is because the sword decorative body 5001 is “placed by the player's hand (the door frame 3)”, and if the sword decorative body 5001 is informed of the abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state is performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is “placed out of the reach of the player (game board 5)”, and this has become an abnormal state This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped as a player, and simply highlighting the fact that the movable performance is not executed may promote a decrease in the gaming interest. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while performing the “process for performing the specific movable decorative body” based on the reception of the presentation at timing tm22. However, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by performing this process as usual with respect to the “process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600”. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, with the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body both kept in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, when the timing tm23 is reached, the already-pending symbol variation is immediately digested (started) after 0.6 seconds, for example. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 306 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. That is, in a specific effect pattern, a specific movable decorative body is rendered at a timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, at the time of symbol variation start) The timing tx at which “the process of causing the specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is started is started within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the state of restoration). It is as mentioned above that it is made to be finished by the time it is until a predetermined production is started.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, “specific movable decoration is made based on arrival of the restoration operation time (here, at the time of symbol variation start) also for the sword decorative body 5001. It is possible to execute a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the body and an operation (applying a driving force) so that at least a part of the operation is returned to the original position in parallel. In addition, the timing at which the “process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it is started)).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated, and the moving effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a rise when the restoring operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is started / finished is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is started / terminated. However, only one of the timings may be the same, or any of the timings may be different.

  As for “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, as described with reference to FIG. 307A, when a special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. It is possible to continue even after the special effect pattern is over, and of course, the symbol variation that is on hold after the special effect pattern is over is immediately digested (started after 0.6 seconds, for example) In the situation where it is possible to carry out by continuing this process (one restoration process) without ending it when straddling the next restoration operation time (here, next symbol variation start time), It is desirable that “the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 307A). That is, in this case, the “processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” also strides the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) when a special effect pattern appears. It will be executed in the form, but it will be ended regardless of the restoration situation between the time when the next symbol variation is started and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives. Become.

  Also, after the sword decorative body 5001 is made abnormal, only a special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then a special effect pattern ( When a situation in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis appears is executed, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. It is also possible to continue one restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 in question.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that at timing tx, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration processing for the sword decorative body 5001 are ended, but both restoration fails. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the moving effect by the specific movable ornament is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed with the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament remaining in an abnormal state. Thus, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force is applied to a specific movable decorative body (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even when returning to the original position (in a normal state) due to, the rendering operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at timing tm2. That is, it can be said that the application of an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2 is itself an abnormal situation. In such a low-reliability situation, it is highly possible that it will not fail even if the rendering operation is performed by a specific movable decorative body, so that not doing this suppresses the decline of the game entertaining It is desirable to do it.

  Moreover, when the restoration process with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification associated with this be performed. That is, if there is a case where the recovery process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and notification is made every time the abnormal state occurs again, a misunderstanding is given as if it is the player's responsibility that the abnormal state is not eliminated. Therefore, the above-described notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality that has changed from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are restored by the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, symbol variation start time) arriving after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state. Then, now, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again while only the sword decorative body 5001 is in the abnormal state, and as shown in FIG. 308, the sword decorative body 5001 which is in the abnormal state at timing tm 25 is If an effect is received by an operation by the player, it is possible to expect a possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state at timing tm 25 is accepted for presentation by the operation of the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is It is possible to apply a driving force so as to return to the position (retain in the original position). In this case, in view of the fact that the movable decorative effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed based on the effect reception, the period during which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed (once The period when it succeeds in the return operation) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended (the specific movable decorative body is returned to the original position) It is desirable that the process be terminated before the process is returned) in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the fact that there are few chances for recovery of the sword decorative body 5001 that has been unable to return so far due to such external force (operation by the player), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to its original state (return operation to the sword decorative body 5001) fails, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended. By continuing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (execution of the return operation to the sword decorative body 5001 again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation, thereby the player It is desirable to prompt for help. However, even if this return processing fails, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification accompanying this be performed.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decorative body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful, and thereafter, While the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are kept in the normal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

  Thus, according to the example shown in FIG. 308, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) which is also used as the operation means is set for the panel-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) In addition to the restored operation timing (when symbol variation starts), the restoration operation timing (timing after the effect is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as an operating means is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by a player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since there are many opportunities for position return and various modes (modes that return only by applying driving force, modes that return using at least external force) are used, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility of game play is also high, and the decline in

  Regarding the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is accepted by the player's operation, the symbol variation start is started. A driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with different contents (different operation modes) from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the process is to restore the sword decorative body 5001 using external force (operation by the player), it is possible to perform the process with a different content from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the process is executed in a simple manner such that the return process is terminated within the symbol variation regardless of the return status, and when the return fails, it is more serious at the next restoration operation timing. It is desirable that a proper recovery process be performed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the restoration operation timing (here, symbol variation start timing) has arrived by a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing on the sword decorative body 5001 has been executed the number of times. Even if the situation is not restored from the abnormal state, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) comes. Even when the effect-related effect pattern of the operation system is started and effects are accepted by the player's operation on the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state at timing tm 25, after the effect is received, the sword decorative body 5001 is It is desirable to perform processing for applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (retain in the original position). That is, as described above, the return processing after the effect is accepted is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decorative body 5001 which has not been able to return so far due to an external force (operation by the player) is increased. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up. Therefore, “process to generate effect reception period for sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))” and “display for prompting operation (“ press down ”character display or bar indicating remaining time of effect reception period It is important that the process of performing the display) (see FIG. 252 (f)) is performed as usual even in the above-mentioned situation where the return without external force is collected.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 is pushed in a state of being located at the operation position (when moving to a specific detection position) when a first operation opportunity is given and when it is in an original position (pushing to a specific detection position When the operation means is provided such that there is a case where the second operation opportunity is given so as to operate), even if the effect reception has occurred in the second operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, but the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the effect reception is generated at the first operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the second operation opportunity is given, even if the effect is accepted, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, and the possibility that the abnormal state is eliminated is also expected to be naturally low.

  In addition, regarding the process of applying a driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is received by the player's operation, the effect is not necessarily received. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been done. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 304 to 308, the symbol variation start timing (and the timing after receiving the effect) is illustrated as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. However, regarding the restoration operation timing, The predetermined timing may be determined on the condition that symbol fluctuation is executed at least, and may be used as at least one of symbol fluctuation start timing and symbol fluctuation stop timing, for example. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration processing is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start Allowing the restored processing to end until the timing tm 2 in the specific effect pattern that has been reserved is reached, or to execute it so as to extend over after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved The above-described respective processes are performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may vary depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special production state, the normal production state It is desirable to make the game possible so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 etc.) used as an operation means or a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the above special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 307A, the abnormal state is over the period after the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol variation is started. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body in the above. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, symbol variation start time) arrives while one restoration process is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed again. Because it does not start it, and it will continue this without ending one restoration process that is already in the running state, it can be moved separately from the movable ornament that is the target of the restoration process. There is a problem at which timing when the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307A, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative object started at timing tm11 is a new restoration operation time (next time after time tm12 when the special rendering pattern ends) This is continuously executed without ending even when straddling the symbol variation start time). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body after the timing tm11 elapses and before the new restoration operation timing (the next symbol variation start timing) arrives. In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both method 1 and method 2”, or “both method 1 and method 3” is employed to restore the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to perform.

  Method 1: If at least “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body” When a new restoration operation time (the next design change start time) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (the next design change start time) ) Is newly started, restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state, It will be treated as effective for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) for which restoration processing is not yet executed, and the other movable decorative body will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation timing) It is possible to newly start the restoration process on the body (frame-side movable decoration). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) and restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously performed, There is no concern that interference may occur between these movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are both provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) arrives during execution, at that time, the specific movable process (the movable decoration on the panel side) is not started, and a specific process is started. After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decorative body to be completed, another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative element) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation). Body) is newly started.

  According to the method 2, although the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state, Another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as effective. In this respect, when starting the restoration process for another movable decoration (the board-side movable decoration), the process waits for completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decoration. There is no concern that interference may occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 3: When at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body continues Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) comes in execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). Is not executed, and waits for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body, and then takes another movable decorative body (the movable side of the board (in the movable side of the board) The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is the same as the restoration process for the specific movable ornament already in the execution state and another movable ornament that is not yet in the execution state. As long as one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is not completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, it will be treated as invalid. No processing for an abnormal state is performed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body becomes abnormal when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, so that it is expected to suppress the rate of progress of deterioration as these movable decorative bodies.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 307B and FIG. 307C, regarding modes (the above-described methods 1 to 3 and the like) when a new restoration operation timing (such as start timing and end timing of symbol variation) arrives during execution of the restoration operation. The details will be described.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for convenience of explanation, as a movable decorative body capable of performing an effect, a first movable decorative body (the above-mentioned “specific movable decorative body”), a second movable decorative body, At least the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body are provided. When only one of the movable decorative bodies is not in the normal state, the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state are “first movable decorative body”, “second movable decorative body”, “third In any of the “movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “fifth movable decorative body”, the movable decorative body that is not in the normal state has a restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation (the symbol The restoration operation (restoration processing) is started when the start timing and the end timing of the fluctuation have come.

  However, if there are multiple movable ornaments that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the design fluctuation arrives, all of the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state are restored at the same time triggered by the restoration operation time. If (restoration processing) is started, there is a concern that it will not be possible to concentrate on the production according to the symbol variation, and it will be awakening.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this illustrative example, when there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived, some of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state Only when the restoration operation time has arrived, the restoration operation can be started, thereby avoiding that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in a normal state start the restoration operation all at once. The restoration operation is realized in a mode according to the situation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 307B, the timing tm32 when the symbol variation (first time) ends (losing stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts (restoration corresponding to symbol variation) has arrived. When the operation time has come), an abnormality occurs in all of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body. Suppose that The “abnormality” here means that the “abnormality” is detected by the detecting means, but the “abnormality” is not necessarily detected. It may simply mean that “abnormality” has occurred (undetected state).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanation example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm 32), the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed. However, here, with respect to the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, and the fourth movable decorative body, the respective restoring operations are started in parallel, but the third movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body For the movable decorative body of the above, the recovery operation is not started and the process remains on standby in an abnormal state. As a result, it is avoided that all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once, and the restoration operation according to the situation is realized.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the third movable decorative body which is kept in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32, it waits for the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) to arrive. First, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. As a result, it is possible to return all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state in a comparatively early stage, while avoiding that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once. become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the restoration operation is not started at the timing tm32, and the fifth movable decorative body which is kept in the abnormal state is when the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) arrives. However, the restoration operation is not started, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm36 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is finished. Thereby, it is preferably avoided that the plurality of movable decorative bodies perform the restoring operation in parallel in a combination that inhibits concentration on the performance.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the second movable decoration is ended before timing tm 34 when the restoration process for the first movable decoration is ended, but the second movement When the restoration process for the decoration is completed, the "third movable decoration" or the "fifth movable decoration" does not start the restoration operation. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the fourth movable decoration is ended after timing tm 34 when the restoration process for the first movable decoration is ended, but the fourth movable decoration The third movable decorative body does not start the restoration operation and does not maintain the standby state until the restoration process for the body is completed. When the restoration process for the fourth movable decoration is completed, Movable ornament of "does not start restoration operation.

  That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the restoration process (restoration operation) of (1 movable decorative body) is completed.

  In addition, the fifth movable decorative body starts restoration processing (restoration operation) when timing tm 32 arrives if the first movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state, but the first movable decorative body If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm 32 comes, and the respective restoration processing of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the completion of (restoration operation).

  Thus, according to the pattern variation, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorative body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) among the plurality of movable decorative bodies. Restoration processing can be performed while suitably maintaining an environment in which the user can concentrate on the performance.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, although the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state earlier than the “third movable decorative body”, the “first movable decorative body” is When the restoration process for “3” is completed, first, the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is started first. As described above, by not performing restoration processing in the abnormal state order, it becomes possible to preferentially restore normality from the movable decorative body with high stage importance, and it is preferable to make the game fun. It will be expected to be maintained.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) ends (loses stop) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the timing tm 35 (restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) at which the variation (third time) starts is reached. Such restoration operation timing functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body which has not been restored to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation timing (timing tm 35) without using such a function as the restoration operation timing. ing. As a result, based on the arrival of the timing tm 35, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is repeated. For example, in the case where the symbol variation (third time) executes the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body in the symbol variation (third time) There is a high probability that “the third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state” before the timing at which the “3” is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in the abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body may be restored to the normal state when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. If it does, it will be made possible to perform the rendering operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, the third movable decorative body is at timing tm 32 (the second pattern change is started) when the second pattern change (the second pattern change) is ended (the first pattern change is terminated). It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at timing tm31 before the restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation) arrives. Then, as a result that timing tm32 (restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation) has arrived in the abnormal state, restoration processing (restoration operation) is started with a delay (timing tm34) to the timing tm32.

  However, for the third movable decorative body, it is later than timing tm 32 (restoration operation timing corresponding to pattern variation), and within a period in which the first movable decorative body is executing restoration processing (restoration operation) Even if a normal state is maintained until the “timing tm33” which is the timing of, and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm33, the restoration processing (restoration operation of the first movable decorative body) as in the example shown in It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm34 when the) is ended. That is, in this case, although the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at timing tm 33 and is in a situation where the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived, another movable decorative body Restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started using restoration operation timing (timing tm 32 which comes before timing tm 33) which is a trigger of restoration processing (restoration operation) for 1 movable decorative body) It will be possible to return to the normal state early. Details of the “restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm 32” will be described later.

  At this time, when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable to continuously execute the restoration process so as to cross the timing tm35. Further, at timing tm35, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not started, but at the timing at which the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body performed so as to straddle timing tm35 is completed, It is desirable to start restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body.

  In this case, the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrives, but enters an abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decorative body" which has not been done can be started earlier than the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decoration with high stage importance is important. It will be possible to restore normality preferentially from the body. The “fifth movable ornament” is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable ornament” that was in a normal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) has arrived. Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 is started. “Restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at timing tm32” is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body in a program executed based on the arrival of timing tm32. And a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration, and an aspect in which each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, and it is determined that the abnormal state is in effect. The restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is in the "third. Start the restoration process for "5 movable ornaments". If the "third movable decorative body" is not in the abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, the restoration process is not performed on the "third movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body" It is determined whether the movable decorative body of "is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decorative body" is in the normal state at the timing tm34, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, the “restoration process for the first movable decorative body” started with the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) is “design variation (1 Is not completed yet and is still in progress. And when the timing tm42 arrives, “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body” However, it is assumed that all cases are in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is not re-started from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm 42, and the timing tm 42 (the timing The execution is continued so as to straddle the restoration operation timing). As a result, based on the arrival of the timing tm 42, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration processing (restoration operation) is repeated. For example, in the case where the symbol variation (the second time) is to perform the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the first movable decorative body within the symbol variation (the second time) There is a high probability that “the first movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state” before the timing at which the “1” is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in the abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body may be restored to the normal state when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. If it does, it will be made possible to perform the rendering operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42), the restoration processing for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed. However, here, with regard to the fourth movable decorative body, although the first movable decorative body in the process of execution and the respective restoring operations are started in parallel, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body For the movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body, the restoration operation is not started, and the mobile phone stands by in an abnormal state. As a result, it is avoided that all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once, and the restoration operation according to the situation is realized.

  In particular, for the second movable decorative body, as shown in FIG. 307B, when the first movable decorative body is in a state such as “not in the normal state and not performing restoration processing (restoration operation)”, Based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm32), restoration processing (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) when the first movable decorative body is in a state such as “not in a normal state and executing restoration processing (restoration operation)”. When the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started.

  That is, in the situation where the first movable decorative body executes the restoration process (restoration operation) across the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42), the first movable decorative body returns to normal (return to the original position) Therefore, it can be said that the player side is in the state of being focused on the “first movable decorative body” in such a state. And, in such a situation, if many movable decorative objects cause the restoration process (restoration operation) to be newly started, the player can not concentrate on the effect according to the symbol variation, resulting in a new appearance. There is concern.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fourth movable decorative body of the movable decorative bodies (see FIG. 307B) capable of executing the restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel with the first movable decorative body In the situation shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration process is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the middle of execution. On the other hand, with regard to the second movable decorative body, in the situation shown in FIG. 307C, the first movable movable body is not started in parallel with the first movable decorative body which is in the process of execution. The standby state is maintained until the restoration process for the decorative body is completed. Then, in a state in which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is finished, the time for the restoration operation time (timing tm 45 in FIG. 307C) newly awaits, and the timing tm 45 comes based on the arrival of the The restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started. As a result, when the first movable decorative body takes time to return to normal, it is suppressed that many movable decorative bodies newly start restoration processing (restoration operation), and the above-mentioned concern Will be resolved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the third movable decorative body that is left in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, the next restoration operation timing is the same as the example shown in FIG. 307B. Without waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. As a result, it is possible to return all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state in a comparatively early stage, while avoiding that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once. become.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the fifth movable decorative body that is left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, the next restoration operation timing is the same as the example shown in FIG. 307B. The restoration operation is not started even when (timing tm45) has arrived, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm46 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends. It is like that. Thereby, it is suitably avoided that a plurality of movable ornaments parallel the restoration operation in such a manner as to inhibit concentration on presentation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative body is finished before the timing tm44 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is finished. When the restoration process for the decorative body is completed, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, and the “fifth movable decorative body” do not start the restoration operation.

  That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 comes unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives. After completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body 1), the restoration processing (restoration operation) is started.

  In addition, the fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 comes unless the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and each restoration process of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the completion of (restoration operation).

  Thus, according to the pattern variation, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorative body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) among the plurality of movable decorative bodies. Restoration processing can be performed while suitably maintaining an environment in which the user can concentrate on the performance.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) ends (loses stop) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that timing tm45 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) at which the variation (third time) starts is reached. Such restoration operation timing functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body which has not been restored to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation timing is not used, and the restoration processing (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation timing (timing tm45). ing. Accordingly, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than the case where the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed again based on the arrival of the timing tm45. For example, in the case where the symbol variation (third time) executes the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body in the symbol variation (third time) There is a high probability that “the third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state” before the timing at which the “3” is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in the abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body may be restored to the normal state when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. If it does, it will be made possible to perform the rendering operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, the third movable decorative body has a timing tm42 (when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loses stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at a timing tm 41 prior to the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. Then, as a result of the arrival of timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is started with a delay (timing tm44) from the timing tm42.

  However, for the third movable decorative body, it is after the timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) and within the period during which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation). Even if a normal state is maintained until the “timing tm 43” which is the timing of, and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm 43, the restoration processing of the first movable decorative body (restoration operation as in the example shown in FIG. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm 44 when the) is ended. That is, in this case, although the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at timing tm 43 and the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived, another movable decorative body Restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started using restoration operation timing (timing tm 42 which comes before timing tm 43) triggered by restoration processing (restoration operation) for 1 movable decorative body) It will be possible to return to the normal state early. The details of the “restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42” are as described in the “restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32”.

  In this case, the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoring operation time) arrives, but becomes abnormal when the timing tm42 (restoring operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decorative body" that has not been made can be started before the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decoration with high production importance is provided. It will be possible to restore normality preferentially from the body. The “fifth movable ornament” is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable ornament” that was in a normal state at the time when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) has arrived. Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 is started. “Restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at timing tm42” is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body in a program executed based on the arrival of timing tm42. And a restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body and a restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body, and a mode in which each of these restoring processes is executed sequentially. It means that For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, and it is determined that the abnormal state is in effect. The restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is in the "third. Start the restoration process for "5 movable ornaments". If the "third movable decorative body" is not in the abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, the restoration process is not performed on the "third movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body" It is determined whether the movable decorative body of "is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the “third movable decorative body” is in a normal state at the timing tm44, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. It becomes.

  According to such an example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives, the movable decorative body (first state) that is not in a normal state (not in a movable state but not in its original position). Among the movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body), the restoration operation time (design fluctuation ( For the movable decorative body (first movable decorative body) that is executing the restoration operation at the start timing of the first time), the restoration operation time is ignored and the execution is continued without re-executing the restoration operation. However, for the movable decorative body (fourth movable decorative body) that has not been restored, the restoring operation (timing tm42) is not ignored, and the restoring operation can be started as a trigger. In other words, in this case, the plurality of movable decorative bodies in an abnormal state may be ignored or not ignored as a function of restoration operation depending on the situation where each is placed. In the midst of being carried out, restoration processing suitable for the situation will be realized.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 307C, the “first movable decorative body” performs the restoration operation when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation (start timing of the symbol fluctuation (first time)) has arrived. When the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation (start timing of the symbol variation (second time)) arrives again during execution, the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration operation arrives again. At the timing of the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol variation (the second time)), the restoration operation can be continuously executed without being retried. That is, in this case, it takes time to return to normal, and as a result, even if the restoration operation time comes again while performing restoration operation, it will be ignored, so it is in the middle of execution The restoration operation can be continued without interruption, thereby prompting the early return of the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is executed over a plurality of variations, another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) is used. When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decorative body does not start the return operation at the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm 42) corresponding to the symbol variation, and the first movable decorative body in the process of execution is started. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the end of the restoration processing (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is not performed again when the restoration operation time has arrived (timing tm42), and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body is restored. It is not started at the arrival of the timing (timing tm 42), and the restoration process for the third movable decoration (immediately after the completion of the “restoring process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)” is continued. Since the restoration operation is to be started, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decoration of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the presentation) of the plurality of movable decorations. However, the plurality of movable decorative bodies can be returned to normal relatively early.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the third movable decorative body becomes abnormal at timing tm 43, the third movable decorative body has not come to the recovery operation time after becoming abnormal. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of timing tm 44 (the end timing of the “restoration process for the first movable decorative object (restoration operation) performed to straddle the restoration operation time)”. ing. That is, in this case, although the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at timing tm 43 and the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived, another movable decorative body Restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started using restoration operation timing (timing tm 42 which comes before timing tm 43) triggered by restoration processing (restoration operation) for 1 movable decorative body) It will be possible to return to the normal state early.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuing the restoration process (restoration operation) so as to straddle the restoration operation time, the movable ornament body can be moved within the symbol variation in which the movable ornament body has returned to normal. When the performance execution timing arrives, the movable effect can be executed using the movable decorative body that has just returned to normal. In such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state at an early stage by the timing when the movable effect is started.

  In addition, even if the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation arrives multiple times during the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration, all of them are ignored, and the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to continue.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are in a relation of paralleling the restoration processing (restoration operation) as shown in FIG. 307B. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 307C, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) comes while only the first movable decorative member is executing the restoration operation, the second movable at timing tm 42. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the decorative object was not started, and the restoration operations were not performed in parallel. As a result, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to normal, it is possible to prevent many movable decorative bodies from newly starting the restoration process (restoration operation).

  Then, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decorative body ends and returns to normal, a restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration body is performed at the timing tm45. It is made to start. According to such a configuration, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started immediately after the situation where the first movable decorative body is troublesome to return to normal is resolved. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started after waiting for the new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) to arrive, it is possible to concentrate on the production. It becomes possible to adjust the environment appropriately.

  At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is terminated due to a failure, a new restoration operation time ( When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. That is, in this case, since it is impossible to provide a movable effect using the first movable decorative body, only the second movable decorative body can be returned to normal and a movable effect using the second movable decorative body can be provided. It is desirable to make it feasible.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307 (C), after restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed and returned to normal, a period until a new restoration operation timing (timing tm 45) arrives When the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body restore their respective ones when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm 45) comes. It is desirable to start the processing (restoration operation) in parallel.

  In the above-described example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is ended due to failure (not returning to the original position), the first movable decorative body is not processed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). Further, even when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is terminated due to a failure (not returning to the original position), the restoration process (restoration) for the third movable decorative body is performed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the operation.

  In the above-described example, when the third movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state at the time when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is finished (timing tm 34, tm 44), the first movable decorative body It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the end of the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the body. In addition, when the third movable decorative body is newly brought into an abnormal state within the execution period of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” started in this way, the fifth movable decorative body When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not performed based on the end of the restoration processing (restoration operation), when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives In addition, it is desirable to perform a restoration process (restoration operation) on the third movable decorative body. However, when the new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, the restoration operation time comes when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body is not finished yet and is in the execution state. When "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" is not started, and restoration operation time after "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the fifth It is desirable to start “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body”.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) corresponding to the symbol variation (the second time) comes, the symbol variation (1 With regard to the first movable decorative object that is performing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm 42) without resuming the restoration process (restoration operation) For the fourth movable decorative body that does not execute the restoration process (restoration operation) but ignores it, the restoration operation is triggered not by disregarding the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42). I'm trying to get started. In this respect, even the fourth movable decorative body that starts the restoration process (restoration operation) without neglecting the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) is new while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed. When the restoration operation time (timing tm43) comes, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation time (timing tm43) and to continuously execute the restoration operation so as to extend over the restoration operation time.

  When there is a movable decorative object that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoring operation) and a movable decorative object that is in the waiting state for the restoration process (restoring operation), an effect display related to the symbol variation is displayed. Even if a specific abnormal state that cannot be visually recognized (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormality due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs, while the above-described notification according to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state is being executed, The restoration process (restoration operation) that is already in the execution state is also continued without being canceled, and the restoration process is also performed when the restoration operation time has arrived for the movable decorative object that is waiting for the restoration process (restoration operation). It is desirable to start the (restoration operation) anew.

  When there are movable ornaments that are in the state of executing restoration processing (restoration operation) or movable ornaments that are in the waiting state for restoration processing (restoration operation), those movable ornaments are used within the pattern variation. When the execution timing of the moving effect that has been received has arrived, the driving force for performing the effect is given to the movable decorative body, even though the driving force for the restoring process (restoring operation) may be applied. In order to realize early return to the normal state, it is desirable that there is no display (no production operation). However, although the driving force for performing the effect is not given to those movable decorative bodies, the light emission provided in each movable decorative body so that the light emission mode corresponding to the movable effects appears. It is desirable to make the part emit light as usual. In other words, in this case, the movable effect itself is not executed, but a part of the effect (light emission effect) constituting the movable effect is appropriately executed. , Including “0” and “100”), a different light emission mode also appears in the “movable decorative body that is not in a normal state”, so that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, for a movable decorative body that has been restored due to a failure in the restoration process (restoration operation), the restoration process (restoration operation) will not be performed even if the restoration operation time comes again, so at least power-on is continued. As long as it is, it can be said that the movable decorative body is not operated in a movable effect. However, even in the case of a movable decorative body in such a state, when the timing for executing a movable effect using the movable decorative body has arrived, the movable effect itself is not executed, and the movable effect is configured. It is desirable that a part of the effect to be performed (light emission effect) is appropriately executed. In other words, in this case, the light emitting mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, including “0” and “100”) is “the movable decorative body in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) has ended due to failure. ”And the game entertainment interest can be suitably maintained.

  Note that the movable decorative body in the state of executing restoration processing (restoration operation), the movable decorative body in the waiting state for execution of restoration processing (restoration operation), and the state in which restoration processing (restoration operation) ended in failure. With regard to the movable decorative body in the above, the light emitting portion may be allowed to emit light as usual even when other effects are performed.

  The restoration operation time may include not only the arrival time corresponding to the symbol variation but also the arrival time due to a different condition. Then, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is started at a specific time that arrives on a condition different from the symbol variation, while performing a specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration processing (restoration operation), When performing the restoration operation at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration process (restoration operation) should be started (executed) in the non-informing state without performing the specific notification (the movable body abnormality notification). Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) corresponding to the symbol variation (the second time) comes, the symbol variation (1 With regard to the first movable decorative object that is performing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm 42) without resuming the restoration process (restoration operation) For the fourth movable decorative body that does not execute the restoration process (restoration operation) but ignores it, the restoration operation is triggered not by disregarding the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42). I'm trying to get started. As described above, even when the first movable decorative body takes time and effort to return to the normal state, the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) corresponding to the symbol variation arrives and the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not ignored. About "the 4th movable decoration that will start", it is used for important effects such as operating when the hit result is derived by the symbol change, or during the start or execution of the big hit game It is desirable to be.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, for the third movable decorative body, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” successfully returns to normal (reference position detection) and fails (reference position). The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body”, regardless of whether it is completed (completed) or not. It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, based on the fact that "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" ends in failure to return to normal, and that "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" ends. In the case where the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” performed is completed with normal return successfully, the third movable decorative body is abnormal again within the symbol variation that has succeeded in the normal return. When it comes to the state, "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" is not performed when restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation comes, "restoration processing for the third movable decorative body ( It is desirable to perform “restoration operation”.

  However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation arrives, the “fifth movable unit started based on the end of the“ restoration process (restoring operation) for the third movable decoration ”. When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the decoration is in an execution state, the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" and the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" "Restore processing for the first movable ornament" triggered by "restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation" that comes after the "restoration processing for the fifth movable ornament (restoration operation)" is finished. It is preferable that the “restoration operation (restoration operation)” be performed on the third movable decorative body without performing the “restoration operation”.

  It should be noted that after the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” has been successfully completed to the normal state, the “restoration process (restoration operation for the third movable ornament body)” is being executed. Even when an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decorative body, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” is executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable not to start the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” at the restoration operation timing. That is, in this case, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” is performed at the restoration operation time that comes after the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament body” is completed with normal success or failure. "Will be started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) has arrived, among the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation before this (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) in response to the restoration operation time corresponding to the first time, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without performing the restoration process (restoration operation) again. Ignore this and let it continue. For the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is ignored, and the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" is completed. Based on this, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started. In this regard, when the first movable decorative body is in an abnormal state again while the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body” thus started is being executed, When the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the body" is completed, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" is not started based on the completion, but the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation is It is desirable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" based on the new arrival.

  However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation newly arrives, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration” is not completed and the situation in progress (the restoration operation time is crossed) It is desirable to ignore the restoration operation timing and to wait for the completion of “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” when it is in the situation where Then, the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament” is started at the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation that comes after the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament” is finished. It is desirable to make it.

  That is, in this case, the “first movable decorative body” and the “third movable decorative body” are both restored so that the “first movable decorative body” is returned to the normal state in advance when both are in an abnormal state. If the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes when the third movable decorative body is not in a normal state, the first movable decorative body has the relationship to be processed, and the first movable decorative body When the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the time (when the third movable decorative body is in a state where the restoration process is not performed) and when the restoration operation is not started (when the third movable decorative body is If there is a situation where the restoration process is being executed, the restoration process according to the situation can be realized.

  The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with setting change means capable of changing the selection probability of the winning probability or the effect pattern according to the hit determination. However, it is desirable to use the restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation as the same timing (for example, at the start of symbol variation), regardless of the setting of these probabilities.

  A movable decoration provided at a position where the player can contact the first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration. The body may be included. In this case, the movable decoration provided at the position where the player can contact is considered to be most likely to be in an abnormal state, so the restoration operation time comes regardless of the situation of the other movable decoration. Then, it is desirable to be provided as a "fourth movable decorative body" which starts restoration processing (restoration operation).

  After providing the light guide plate in which the light guiding pattern is exposed in front of the movable decorative body, without restricting the effect of exposing the light guiding pattern during the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body Making it executable is desirable in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body.

  The “first movable decorative body” and the “second movable decorative body” shown in FIGS. 307B and 307C should be prepared as having a production relationship in which both are in an operating state with a specific movable production. It is desirable to do. For example, the “first movable decorative body” and the “second movable decorative body” may be provided with decorations that are related to each other, or may be operated at the same time as a movable effect based on a design variation (effect pattern). The decorations (such as completion of characters and character strings) are prepared as shapes. The third movable decorative body is prepared not to be used when a specific movable effect or one decoration is formed. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is avoided that one decoration is formed in the same manner (operation in the same period) as the movable effect based on the symbol variation (effect pattern). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment.

  For the “first movable decorative body”, “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body”, the game board It may be divided into what is provided on the 5 side and what is provided on the door frame 3 side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the “first movable decorative body”, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “first movable decorative body” Although it was decided to include five movable decorative bodies, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body However, it is not necessary to provide all of the movable decorative bodies, and one of the movable decorative bodies may be provided and appropriate two or three. Even with such a configuration, having the technical features described in reference to FIG. 307B and FIG. 307C (in what manner the restoration process is performed in relation to the “first movable decorative body”) It becomes.

[A penalty when operating the operation unit that can emit light]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player changes the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the number of operation units to be operated by a player tends to increase, but these operation units may be treated in a miscellaneous manner. As a result, one of the operation units At the same time, if it breaks down, operability and rendition will drop significantly, so it will be inevitable to reduce the fun of playing games.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation button 410,
A sword decorative body provided so that the sword part 5010 (the sword part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the heel part 5013) can be moved (variably) by a predetermined operation (striking operation and sword operation) between the sword position and the sword position 5001 (see Figure 192, Figure 222, etc.)
Although the operation opportunity is not given, the “operation to extract the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011, handle portion 5012, heel portion 5013) from the sheath portion 5020 (extraction operation)” or “sword Repeated operation may cause a failure.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a rendering light emitting unit (not shown) is disposed to each of the blade 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013, and the sword 5010 (blade) A special detection unit (not shown) capable of detecting whether or not the reference numeral 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013) is at a specific position (original position) in which the sheath 5020 is in the storage state. And, at least during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed (non-playing state with no game effects or symbol variations according to the big hit determination), the sword portion 5010 is identified as a result of detection by the special detection unit. If it is determined that it is not at the position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an effect restriction period as a penalty.

  According to such a configuration, at least in a non-game state in which no symbol variation is performed, the sword portion 5010 is used together with the effect light emitting portions (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the heel portion 5013) by a predetermined operation. As a result of being displaced, it becomes possible for the effect restriction period to occur when it is detected that the operating portion is not located at the specific position, so that it is possible to suitably suppress the handling of the operation unit.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the above-described “change in the set value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound” and the “set value (luminance set value) related to the light emission luminance” described above. The above-described effect restriction period is generated while all of the above “changes” are accepted by the operation of the player. However, although this will be described later, in this production restriction period,
・ Regarding the production sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume is changed, the production sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume is adjusted. While the confirmation sound is not output,
-With regard to the effect lamp, when the set value (brightness set value) relating to the light emission brightness is changed, the effect light emitting portion provided in the sword unit 5010 to be detected among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1 (The blade 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013) are not emitted at a brightness according to the brightness setting value, but are provided at a site different from the sword 5010 to be detected. With regard to the effect lamp (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decoration board of the game board 5 and the like), processing such as effect light emission with luminance according to the set value is made executable, etc. It can be done.

  According to such a configuration, when the production restriction period occurs, the setting value change related to the sound volume and the setting value change related to the luminance can both be accepted, but the sound volume setting is related. The degree of restriction is different between the process and the process related to the luminance setting.

  That is, with regard to the effect sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the effect sound is not output in a form in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is Is also output so that the player is given a sense of tension (maybe they have done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, with regard to the luminance, even if the luminance setting value is changed for the effect light emitting part (the sword part 5011, the handle part 5012 and the collar part 5013) included in the "sword part 5010" operated by the player. Although the effect light emission is not performed in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected, the effect lamp provided at a site different from the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player is changed By making it possible to perform effect light emission (for example, light emission according to the timing when a specific advance notice effect is performed) in a form in which the brightness setting value is reflected, the rough handling of the "sword portion 5010" is the cause. While making it possible to recognize that a production restriction is imposed and warning it, it is preferable to appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole is intended to continue playing a game or a presentation It made. In this sense, as for the effect lamps on the game board 5 where the game balls run down or win, as is normal, the effect light emission is executed in a form in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected. Is desirable. In this way, it is possible to give a warning for handling the operating unit in a complicated manner, while suitably avoiding "the player's willingness to start playing the game or prompting the end of the game". become.

  Moreover, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release condition for each restriction is made different depending on the restriction on the process related to the volume setting and the restriction on the process related to the luminance setting. . In particular, with regard to “processing related to volume setting” on the side that has imposed relatively strict restrictions at the beginning, it is strongly urged to continue the game by making it be improved to the normal state relatively early. On the other hand, the "processing related to the brightness setting", which had initially imposed a relatively sweet limit, showed a tendency to improve, while slowing the overall improvement speed or The restriction is left as it is, which makes it possible to maintain tension properly over a long period of time and to prevent rough handling again.

  FIG. 309 is a time chart illustrating an example of restrictions on volume setting and luminance setting when a penalty is generated for an operation on the sword unit 5010.

  Assuming now that the game is in a non-playing state in which a game is not being executed, such as in a demonstration screen, and in a normal state in which no error state or penalty has occurred, in this state, as shown in FIG. The execution of the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is permitted. When the volume setting value is changed, a process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) is executed, and the adjusted volume The volume adjustment confirmation sound will be output.

  Further, in the same state, execution of processing for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player regarding the luminance is also permitted. When the brightness setting value is changed, a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount) is executed, and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. It will be.

  In the same state, the pattern LED (the effect light emitting part in the handle part 5012), the heel LED (the effect light emitting part in the heel part 5013), the blade LED (the effect light emitting part in the blade part 5011), and the LED outside the operation part (game) All of the effect lamps on the board 5 are in the state of “normal light emission”. Note that the state of “normal light emission” corresponds to “a state in which light emission is maintained” as long as it is provided as an effect lamp that always keeps light emission regardless of the state of effect. However, if the lamp is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition, the light emission waiting state in which the light emission state is permitted when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied It is a concept including “the light off state” and may not necessarily be in the light emitting state. In addition, it is desirable that the sheath portion 5020 be provided in a light transmitting manner so that the light emission mode of the blade LED can be confirmed even in the knato state.

  However, as shown in FIG. 309, as a result of performing the predetermined operation at timing to1 despite being in the non-playing state where the operation effect can not occur, as a result of the sword 5010 (the blade 5011, the handle Assuming that it is detected that 5012, buttocks portion 5013) is not in the state of a sword with respect to sheath portion 5020 (detection that it is not in the specific position (original position)), pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment. Then, first, the first effect suppression state is to be generated.

  In the first effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, execution of processing for changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player with respect to the volume is permitted. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the process for adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (the process for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is not executed, and the volume adjustment is performed. No confirmation sound is output.

  Further, in the same state, execution of processing for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player regarding the luminance is also permitted. In this regard, when the brightness setting value is changed, among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1, the pattern LED (effect light emitting unit in the pattern unit 5012) in the sword unit 5010 moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation. , For the heel LED (the effect light emitting portion in the heel portion 5013) and the blade LED (the effect light emitting portion in the blade portion 5011), a process for adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (the luminance setting value is a light quantity) For the outside operation unit LED (the effect lamp in the game board 5) that is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, based on the changed brightness setting value. Processing for adjusting the light emission luminance (processing for reflecting the luminance setting value as the amount of light) is executed. In the same state, the emission brightness of some of the plurality of effect lamps (the LED outside the operation unit) can be adjusted, but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the adjustment is performed. It is like that.

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect suppression state, although both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the luminance can be accepted, the volume setting is related. The degree of restriction differs between the process and the process related to the brightness setting.

  That is, with regard to the effect sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the effect sound is not output in a form in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is Is also output so that the player is given a sense of tension (maybe they have done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, regarding the luminance, even if the luminance setting value is changed for the effect light emitting unit (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the heel portion 5013) provided in the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player. The effect light is not emitted in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected, but the effect lamp (the operation lamp provided on the game board 5 on which the game is played is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation) The outside LED) produces an effect light emission in the form in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected (for example, if a game is started in this state and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a specific notice effect is performed. Light emission in accordance with the timing). Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production while warning about miscellaneous handling of the “sword part 5010”.

  More specifically, in the first effect suppression state, the handle LED (effect light emitting portion in the handle portion 5012) continues the light emission state (light emission for penalty) in a predetermined light emission luminance and light emission mode. For example, even if the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed luminance setting value is not reflected, and depending on the result of the jackpot determination when the symbol variation is started Even if a light emission request is generated, a light emission mode corresponding to the light emission request does not appear.

  In addition, the 鍔 LED (the effect light emitting unit in the heel portion 5013) can emit light as normal even in the first effect suppression state, and the effect lamp that always maintains the light emission regardless of the effect status. If it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, it is set as “predetermined effect”. A light emission waiting state in which a light emission state is permitted when the condition is satisfied is set. However, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the 鍔 LED does not emit the effect light in a manner that the changed brightness setting value is reflected. Also in the unit 5010, while permitting the light emission effect to promote the continuation of the game, it is possible to warn the rough handling of the "sword portion 5010".

  Further, the blade LED (the effect light emitting unit in the blade part 5011) is controlled so as to continue the light-off state in the first effect suppression state. Even if it occurs, it does not respond to this. Therefore, in the blade LED, even if the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, it is impossible to effect the effect light emission in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected.

  On the other hand, no limitation is imposed on the outside-operation-unit LED provided outside the sword unit 5010 that is moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, and the above-described “normal light emission” state is continued. It will be. Therefore, when the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed luminance setting value can be reflected (if it is in the light emission state), and the light emission corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is started when the symbol variation is started. When a demand arises, the light emission aspect according to this will appear.

  In such a configuration, since the restriction is imposed only on the effect lamp provided in the “sword part 5010” that is moved by a predetermined operation, the game board 5 on which the game is performed is applied. If there is a case where only the gaze is gathered, it seems that the light emission luminance can be adjusted as usual when the luminance setting value is changed, so that the first effect suppression state is occurring. There is a concern that this will not be recognized. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the luminance setting value is changed by the operation by the player in the first effect suppression state, and the light emission luminance of some of the effect lamps (outside the operation unit LED) Even if the adjustment is performed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Thereby, even when “sword part 5010” is not visually recognized, the player can be made aware that the performance is in a restricted state, and “sword part 5010” is returned to the original position. Can be encouraged to.

  Then, after the occurrence of such a first effect suppression state, at timing to 2, an operation to position the sword portion 5010 to the sword state is performed, and it is detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the knife state (specific If it is detected that the user is in the position (original position), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs processing to shift from the first effect suppression state to the second effect suppression state.

  In the second effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, regarding the sound volume, all the restriction contents in the first effect suppression state are canceled and processed as normal. Not only the execution of the process of changing the volume setting value is allowed, but also the execution of the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume and the execution of the process of outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound are permitted. It has become.

  On the other hand, with regard to luminance, although the "restriction to the luminance adjustment confirmation sound" is released among the restriction contents in the first effect suppressed state, the "partial restriction to the luminance adjustment" is continued without being cancelled. It has come to be. Therefore, in the second effect suppression state, the execution of the process of changing the brightness setting value, the execution of the process of adjusting the emission brightness of the LED outside the operation unit among the plurality of effect lamps, and the output of the brightness adjustment confirmation sound Although the execution of the process is permitted, the process of adjusting the light emission luminance of the effect lamp included in the sword unit 5010 among the plurality of effect lamps is not permitted to be performed (restricted state). It will be maintained as it is.

  That is, the second effect suppression state is a state that is generated based on "the fact that the sword 5010 is in the state of being inserted" is detected in the first effect suppression state, and the sword 5010 is already at the specific position (original Position), and it can be said that the rough handling has been eliminated. In response to this, with regard to "processing related to volume setting" that had imposed relatively strict restrictions at the beginning, it is strongly urged to continue the game by making it quickly and greatly improved to the normal state. Is the main purpose.

  However, if all restrictions are immediately released by simply returning the sword 5010 to a specific position (original position) after the first effect suppression state has occurred, the function as a penalty is insufficient. Yes, miscellaneous handling of “Sword 5010” may recur. In this respect, according to the above-described configuration, in the first effect suppression state, when it is detected that the sword unit 5010 is in the sword state, transition to the second effect suppression state is made. Then, regarding the luminance, although the "restriction to the luminance adjustment confirmation sound" is released among the restriction contents in the first effect suppressed state, the "partial restriction to the luminance adjustment" is continued without being canceled. It is like that.

  In other words, in this case, the “sword part 5010”, which is the target of miscellaneous handling, is left with a production restriction, and therefore the atmosphere (“ It will be possible to provide a “breakage”, etc., and as a result, prevention of recurrence can be expected.

  On the other hand, in the second effect suppression state, since the rough handling of "sword part 5010" has already been eliminated, the situation where the player is gazing at the game board 5 where the game is played It can be said that the situation where concentration on games is in a desirable situation. In this point, in the second effect suppression state, the luminance setting value is changed when the player is watching the game board 5 on which the game is performed (the situation where the sword portion 5010 is not visually recognized). The brightness setting value is changed by the operation of the player to make it appear that the light emission brightness can be adjusted as usual (it seems to be in the normal state), and a part of the plurality of effect lamps (operation When the emission luminance of the extra LED is adjusted, a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output. As a result, the player is concentrated on the game, and the mishandling of the sword portion 5010 is prevented from recurring.

  According to such a second effect suppression state, the “processing related to the brightness setting” on the side that originally imposed a relatively sweet restriction, although showing an improvement trend, is subject to rough handling. As long as the “sword part 5010” becomes limited, the player can play the game while keeping the tension moderately over a long period of time and preventing the mishandling from happening again. It will be expected to concentrate on

  Moreover, in the second effect suppression state, some of the effect lamps (pattern LED, amber LED, blade LED) among the plurality of effect lamps are excluded from the adjustment targets of the light emission luminance, but other than that When the light emission luminance of the effect lamp (LED outside the operation unit) is adjusted, a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output as in the case where the light emission luminance is adjusted in the normal state. That is, in this case, even if the second effect suppression state occurs, it is not a situation where the operation by the player can not be accepted, but it is possible to react by the operation by the player as in the normal state. It becomes possible to appeal, and it is possible to suitably promote the continuation of the game by the player.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the light emission luminance is adjusted only for a part of the effect lamps (LEDs outside the operation unit) in the second effect suppression state, the normal state is maintained. The same brightness adjustment confirmation sound as that at a given time is assigned to a channel and output. As a result, even in a situation where only partial adjustment is possible, it is expected to give a sense of security as if the player has already returned to the normal state and to encourage motivation to continue the game. However, when the second effect suppression state is ended and it shifts to the normal state, the brightness in the pattern LED is adjusted in such a way that the brightness setting value at that time is collectively reflected, but in this case the brightness It is important not to output the adjustment confirmation sound in order to make it appear as if it had already returned to normal.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of the second effect suppression state has occurred. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (timing to3), it is possible to execute processing for terminating the second effect suppression state and shifting to the normal state.

  In other words, regarding the transition condition from “the first effect suppression state with a relatively severe effect restriction degree” to “the second effect suppression state with a relatively restrictive effect restriction degree”, “the operation by the player is an opportunity”. This makes it possible to establish this early, so that the willingness to continue the game is not lost. However, regarding the transition condition from “second effect suppression state with relatively limited effect restriction” to “normal state”, “a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect suppression state occurred”. It is not permitted to establish this early. By adopting these transition conditions, it will be possible to effectively warn about miscellaneous handling while appropriately maintaining the willingness to continue the game, and as a result, prevention of recurrence can be expected. It becomes like this.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, a plurality of effect lamps provided in the “sword portion 5010” that is a target of rough handling. Regarding some of the effect lamps (here, the LED, the blade LED, and the blade LED), the second effect suppression state is terminated and returned to the normal state. In addition, only light emission with “restricted” is allowed.

  More specifically, although it is possible to perform light emission as normal with regard to the amber LED and the sword LED, even if the luminance setting value is changed, the changed luminance setting value is reflected. However, the effect light emission can be performed only at a predetermined luminance setting value. That is, in this case, in particular, only the effect light emission under the same restriction is continuously performed after the occurrence of the first effect suppression state for the indigo LED, which may cause a failure in part. It will be expected that it will be made to be conscious and it will be suppressed that the rough handling with respect to "Sword part 5010" is relapsed. Alternatively, even after the effect suppression state ends and becomes the normal state, it can be made to function as a history in which the effect suppression state has occurred before that, and stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 is expected. Will be able to In addition, about the said production | presentation restriction | limiting left with respect to a coffin LED and a blade LED, you may make it maintain impossible with cancellation, for example, conditions different from before, such as RAM clear and power-off etc. It is desirable to be made releasable.

  According to such a configuration, even after the first effect suppression state ends and the process related to the volume adjustment returns to normal, the process related to the brightness adjustment needs to be further improved in stages. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension over a longer period of time while maintaining the willingness to play.

  As for the first effect suppression state (further, the second effect suppression state), in addition to the non-game state (such as in the demo screen), the game execution state in which the game is being executed (the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit determination) It can be generated based on the fact that the sword portion 5010 is not in the sword state (detected that the sword portion 5010 is not in the specific position (original position)) even when it is changing or in a big hit game state. It is desirable to do. In other words, the sword portion 5010 should not be dealt with in a game state (such as when the symbol changes according to the result of the jackpot determination), in which the operation opportunity is not given. It is because it is desirable to be treated properly.

  However, even if the situation is controlled to the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 309, when the game is in the game execution state (the symbol variation is in the execution state), the change in the luminance setting value is accepted. Therefore, it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound when the brightness adjustment corresponding to this is performed. That is, when the “first effect suppression state” is shifted to the “second effect suppression state”, at least the processing side related to the volume adjustment is released from all restrictions, so the sense of tension is well maintained. There is a concern that you will not be able to Anyway, in order to strongly encourage game continuation, it is important to greatly improve the restriction on the "processing related to volume adjustment" which has been so strict.

  In this regard, “when the tension cannot be maintained well” means that the situation where the second performance suppression state has occurred (the situation where the first performance suppression state with strict performance restrictions has ended) is disregarded and the game is resumed. It is also assumed that the situation is such that the tension is well maintained in a situation where the game is not resumed. Therefore, even in the second effect suppression state, when in the symbol variation execution state (game resumption) where it is assumed that tension cannot be maintained well, do not output the brightness adjustment confirmation, By looking only at “processing related to adjustment”, it can be expected that moderate tension will be imparted by making it appear that the first effect suppression state has not been improved.

  In this sense, in the situation where it is controlled in the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 309, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the reception regarding the change of the volume setting value is made, and the volume adjustment according to this Even when the operation is performed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound may not be output. In addition, for such special processing (processing that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound and processing that does not output the luminance adjustment confirmation sound) when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the second effect suppression state ends and the restriction is limited. You may make it apply also when it is in the condition returned to the normal state in the form which is left behind. That is, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output while the game execution state is in progress, or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the meaning can not be understood and the game is performed. It is because there is a possibility that it can not be concentrated.

  In the above explanation example, the handle LED, the heel LED, and the blade LED are provided. However, the sword portion 5010 may be provided with at least the handle LED as an effect lamp. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain game motivation by showing step-by-step improvements while warning the rough handling of the “sword part 5010” in the first effect suppression state and the second effect suppression state. It is possible.

  Further, in the above explanation example, as soon as “detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword state” is detected in the first effect suppression state, the state is shifted from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”. For example, based on the fact that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the “detection that the sword unit 5010 is in the sword state” in the first effect suppression state. A process may be performed to shift from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”. According to such a configuration, while allowing relatively early transition from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”, at least a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is a effect restriction It can be maintained in the strict first effect suppression state. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set as a time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) required from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end thereof. Although desirable, it is not necessarily limited to this.

  In the example described above, the cause of the production restriction is the predetermined operation for the operation means (sword unit 5010), but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, even if it is a specific object that is not an operation target by the player (for example, an object that can move between the first state and the second state, such as a decorative movable body and the door frame 3), this is subject to rough handling. If it is forced to be displaced, it may cause a failure. Therefore, based on the fact that at least a “lamp that is subject to effect restrictions such as the above-described pattern LED” is provided at least as an effect lamp for the specified object, and it is detected that the specified object is not in the original position. It is desirable to generate the effect suppression state as described above. That is, in this case, regardless of whether the game is in the non-game state or the game state, the first effect suppression state as described above is set based on the detection that the specific object is not in the first state (original position). After that, the second effect suppression state as described above is generated based on the detection that the specific object has been returned to the first state (original position), and a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence. It will be returned to the normal state (or the restricted normal state) based on that.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Further, in the above example, after the change to the sound volume setting value is received for a plurality of times in the “first effect suppression state”, the “second effect suppression” is performed when transitioning to the “second effect suppression state” At the time of shifting to the “state”, the volume is adjusted in such a manner that the contents of the plurality of changes to the volume setting value so far are reflected at once. In addition, if the change to the luminance setting value is received multiple times in the “first effect suppression state” or the “second effect suppression state”, when the state is returned to the normal state at timing to3, the “normal state” is performed. When the transition is made, the brightness of the pattern LED is adjusted in such a way that the contents of the plurality of changes to the brightness setting value so far are reflected in a lump. The method (including the output presence or absence of the adjustment confirmation sound at that time) of the method in which such multiple setting value changes are collectively adjusted at “a timing” is the contents described with reference to FIGS. Can be realized by appropriately adopting. Also, in this case, since the timing to2 when the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing to3 when the brightness setting value can be collectively reflected are different, it is possible to gradually show the way to return to the normal state. As a result, the player can be motivated to continue the game by making it look as if it had already returned to normal time or making it appear to be recovering. Further, the predetermined time from when the second effect suppression state is generated to when it is ended may be about 10 seconds.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

[Brightness adjustment at notification of abnormality]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, illustration is omitted, but various types of pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button for an effect lamp (lamp that is subject to effect control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) is provided, and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, a game relating to the brightness applied to various effect lamps It is possible to execute a process of changing the setting value (brightness setting value) by the user (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Usually, if there is an effect lamp that is in a light emitting state when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, a process of adjusting the light emission brightness in the effect lamp based on the changed brightness setting value ( A process of reflecting the luminance setting value as the light quantity is performed. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  In addition, with regard to the effect lamp that is not in the light emission state when the brightness setting value is changed, when the light emission request based on the result of the big hit judgment is made thereafter, the brightness according to the changed brightness setting value The light emission state is set. More specifically, if it is provided as an effect lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the state of effect, light emission according to the changed brightness setting value as soon as the change of the brightness setting value is accepted If it is to be changed to a light emission mode with luminance, but is provided as a rendering lamp that emits light based on that a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied (representation request according to a big hit determination), the predetermined The effect light emission is performed as the light emission luminance corresponding to the changed luminance setting value at the timing when the effect condition is satisfied. That is, until the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect light emission with the light emission luminance according to the changed luminance setting value is maintained in the state (light emission waiting state) that is enabled.

  In addition, with regard to the change acceptance according to the luminance setting value and the adjustment processing according to the changed luminance setting value, the player does not change the symbol, and the player changes the symbol. Each can be executed by the operation of.

  By the way, as described above, when the specific abnormality detection illustrated in FIG. 156 occurs in the pachinko machine 1, an abnormality notification according to the abnormality type is performed. If there is a type of abnormality detection that is unlikely to occur, there is a possibility that the player may want to continue the game as it is. That is, even if the minor abnormality is not serious, as a result of giving an abnormality notification as a result of giving an abnormality notification and the player may end the game, the operation rate as the pachinko machine 1 is increased. There may be disadvantages due to the decline.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is in a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-short state) Among the plurality of effect lamps, a part of the effect lamps (for example, the effect lamps provided on the game board 5) can emit light by the effect (during the effect light emission or the condition light emission conditions are satisfied) It is possible to execute abnormal notification light emission using at least the special effect lamp (for example, the effect lamp provided on the door frame 3) included in the other effect lamps while keeping the waiting state (off state) up to And

  And even during the execution period of such anomaly notification light emission, every time a player accepts an operation, the change of the brightness setting value can be accepted, and the state in which the light emission by the production is possible is left. In the some effect lamps, the emission luminance can be adjusted based on the changed luminance setting value, whereas in the specific effect lamp, the changed luminance is obtained. The abnormality notification light emission is executed only at a predetermined luminance setting value regardless of the setting value.

  According to such a configuration, even when the abnormal notification light emission is being performed, the luminance setting value is changed each time the player receives an operation that is partially among the plurality of effect lamps. Is reflected, and effect light emission with the reflected luminance setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably promote the continuation of the game by the player while notifying the hole side of the abnormality.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the abnormal notification light emission is performed during the period in which the target of the brightness adjustment is partially limited as described above, the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. Even if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily output, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again when the remaining time until the period for which the brightness adjustment target is limited is completed is short So that it is possible to suggest to the player that the abnormal notification light emission has been completed and that the normal light emission will be allowed soon. I have to.

  FIG. 310 is a time chart showing an example of the light emission mode of the effect lamp in the abnormal notification period according to the specific abnormality detection.

  As shown in FIG. 310, at a timing tp1 when a game is not being executed, such as during a demo screen, a specific state (for example, passing through the right gate in an untimed state (abnormal game)). Is detected), the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the detection.

  In this lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the effect light emission is performed for some effect lamps (corresponding to “LED-A group” in the drawing) among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1. As it is possible, the abnormal notification light emission is performed using the other effect lamps (corresponding to the “LED-B group” in the drawing). Note that the abnormality notification light emission does not necessarily have to be performed using all of the other effect lamps, and a part of the other effect lamps (for example, a specific effect lamp provided on the door frame 3). You may make it perform using only.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific state (for example, a state in which right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time-short state) occurs, a part for effect With regard to the lamp (corresponding to the “LED-A group” in the figure), the light-emitting effect is performed in the same manner as when the specific state is not occurring, and this makes the hole side abnormal. While notifying, the player is preferably encouraged to continue the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is occurring, change acceptance relating to the luminance setting value is allowed. Then, in some production lamps (which correspond to “LED-A group” in the figure) that are set to “not perform abnormality notification light emission”, the light emission luminance is the same as when the lamp warning period is not in effect. , And can be adjusted based on the changed luminance setting value (changes immediately if light is always emitted, light emission waiting state with changed luminance setting value if light is emitted in response to a production request) Has been adjusted (can be adjusted).

  On the other hand, for the other effect lamps (corresponding to "LED-B group" in the figure), even if the luminance setting value is changed during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the lamp is changed. The luminance setting value is not reflected, and the anomaly notification light emission is performed only at the predetermined luminance setting value (adjustment reflection impossible). That is, in this case, light emission can be performed at the same time in which different luminance setting values are reflected between some of the effect lamps and the other effect lamps, which makes it possible to perform effects separately from the effect light emission. It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the abnormal notification light emission, which is not related to the above, is being performed. In this sense, for effect light emission, it is desirable that the luminance set value can be changed only in the range equal to or less than the luminance set value adopted by the abnormal notification light emission.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the abnormality notification light emission is being executed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily generated even when the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. I do not output. That is, until a timing tp2 has arrived (timing tp1 to tp2) that the remaining time until the period in which the brightness adjustment target is limited is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) comes. Even if the luminance setting value is changed and the light emission luminance of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted, control is performed so as not to output the luminance adjustment confirmation sound. Then, based on the arrival of the timing tp2, when the change of the brightness setting value is accepted (when the light emission brightness of some effect lamps is actually adjusted), the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again. To create a situation that

  According to such a configuration, if the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output despite the change of the luminance setting value during the execution period of the abnormal notification light, the remaining time until the period is ended is While it can be recognized that the situation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output when the brightness setting value is changed, the period is ended. It becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Therefore, even if the abnormal notification light emission itself has no change and continues in this state, it is suggested to the player internally that it is in a state of proceeding to a normal state (improvement) As a result, even when abnormal notification light emission is performed for a relatively long time, it is expected that a desire to continue the game is preferably promoted.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, all the effects are produced even during the execution period (timing tp2 to tp3) of the abnormal notification light emission in which the luminance setting value is only partially reflected (the LED-A group). The same sound as in the normal state where the lamp is able to reflect the luminance setting value is output as the above-mentioned luminance adjustment confirmation sound, thereby giving a sense of security as if it has already returned to the normal state, It is intended to suppress a decrease in game entertainment during the period in which the abnormal notification light emission is performed. However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310, at the timing tp3 when the abnormality notification light emission execution period ends, even if the luminance setting value has been changed a plurality of times, the luminance setting value at that time is changed. Effect lighting is performed in a manner that is reflected in a batch on other lamps for production ("LED-B group" which has been performing abnormal alarm light emission until then). It is important to make it not output as if it had already returned to the normal state.

  In the above example, when in a non-gaming state where a game is not being executed, such as in a demonstration screen, in a specific state (for example, a state where right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time-shortened state) The lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated as an example based on the fact that it has been detected. However, it is detected that a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state) is detected when in the gaming state (such as symbol fluctuation state) in which the game is being executed In this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated based on the detection.

  Also in the case of generating a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) when in a game execution state in which a game is being executed (such as a symbol variation state or a big hit gaming state), basically the same as in the above example. It is. However, in this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to timing tp1 to timing tp2 to timing tp2 regardless of whether the remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has arrived. It is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound at tp3). That is, since the case of being in the game execution state means that the game is just being continued by the player, it is assumed that the possibility that the game will be ended is extremely small. Therefore, even if a situation (timing tp2 to tp3) that can be returned to the normal state soon comes, by maintaining the control that the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output, it is still in the execution period of abnormal alarm light. It is more desirable to make it possible for a player to recognize accurate information such as Further, in this case, even after the execution period of abnormal notification light emission (timing tp1 to tp3) is ended and the normal state is established, the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained while the game execution state is continued. You may do so. If the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the game execution state, the meaning may not be understood and the game may not be concentrated.

  In the above example, when it is in the game execution state from the non-playing state (due to the start of the symbol variation), during the period from tp2 to tp3 in which the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output. In the case where the game is performed, etc.), "control for not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (inaudible control at timings tp1 to tp2)" is re-executed based on the game execution state. Then, "control for not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" is maintained until the timing tp3 arrives, or until the game execution state is ended.

  Further, in the example described above, for example, even when the time after the timing tp2 when the remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has come (timing tp2 to tp3), If it is rediscovered that it is in a specific state (for example, a state where a right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state) when it is within the period, it It is desirable that the process (process after the timing tp1) concerning the abnormal notice light emission be performed again. That is, in this case, even if the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output, the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is returned to the non-output state.

  In the example described above, when the timing tp3 arrives, the transition to a normal state in which all effect lamps can be adjusted based on the brightness setting value is performed. However, in the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), a plurality of effect lamps are prepared as effect lamps which can not be adjusted based on the brightness setting value, and when the timing tp3 comes, Only a part can be adjusted based on the luminance setting value, but at least a specific effect lamp cannot be adjusted based on the luminance setting value even in a normal state after the timing tp3 arrives. You may do so. According to such a configuration, since a restriction on brightness adjustment is left for a specific effect lamp, even after the lamp warning period ends and becomes normal, a lamp warning is issued before that. It becomes possible to function as a history of occurrence of a period, and it becomes possible to expect stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 concerned. Note that the restriction remaining for a specific effect lamp may be maintained in an unreleasable state. However, for example, it may be made releasable by clearing the RAM or shutting off the power. Is desirable.

  The brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output as the same sound as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and although it can not be confirmed which “confirmation sound” has been output, some “confirmation sound” is output. It is desirable to make something recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

  In addition, it is desirable that, during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission according to the above-described example, acceptance of a change of the setting value for the volume of the effect sound is also permitted based on the operation acceptance by the player. Then, in this case, the “processing regarding notification sound and volume adjustment” during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission can be realized by appropriately adopting the contents described with reference to FIGS. In this case, the “processing related to notification sound and volume adjustment” described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168 may be ended (collective reflection of the volume) when the timing tp 3 comes, When tp2 arrives, it may be terminated (collection of sound volume). In such a configuration, the timing tp2 at which the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing tp3 at which the luminance setting value can be collectively reflected are different from each other. The player can be motivated to continue the game by making it appear as if it had already returned to its normal state or making it appear to be recovering.

  Further, in the above explanation example, the specific state is exemplified as “a state in which a right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and refer to FIGS. 166 to 168. It may be the same as the case of the example described above (such as a door opening abnormality or a state in which a magnetic detection abnormality has occurred).

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

[14. Production control by scheduler]
In the game machine, various effects are performed during the game by voice output, lamp lighting / blinking, image display, etc., and various effects are attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control substrate 1510 which is an effect control device based on the command output from the main control substrate 1310 and executes effects according to the gaming state of the game To do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in a single direction.

  In order to cooperatively execute a plurality of types of effects, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technology for realizing various effect displays using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially defined in time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with the scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect display can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. The scenario data may include BGM designation. In this case, by outputting the BGM designated by the sound source IC, it becomes possible to output the sound corresponding to the display screen.

  However, game machines are demanding more elaborate effects. In the above-described conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as sound output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, BGM could not be changed while executing image display according to scenario data. Further, when outputting a sound effect in response to a user operation during image display, the image display and BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effects is finished, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM has been played, and it is an effect that gives a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamp are controlled by an individual program regardless of the content of the image display according to the game state, and it is difficult to realize various lighting and blinking in conjunction with the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes a game effect. In the present embodiment, each configuration for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after describing the configuration and outline of functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment, details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and Outline of Each Function]
FIG. 311 is a functional block diagram for explaining the configuration and outline of functions for executing effect control in this embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080 is provided.

  The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. Based on the analysis result of the main command, the effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030, and determines block control information (effect block number). The layer will be described. In this embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as the background and the character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. Is output. Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (motion) of the character is the same, it is possible to share the layer for displaying the character. Thereby, the capacity of the effect data (scheduler data) can be reduced, and the development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying an effect for each layer.

  The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing effects. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes required in accordance with the rendering device in order to be performed in order to control the rendering in each rendering device. It is data. The effect block data includes “liquid crystal effect block data” for executing effects to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, “liquid crystal symbol block data” for fluctuating display of identification symbols on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of “sub-effect block data” for controlling lamps, accessories and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each rendering device is called, and the rendering device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

  The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the production control unit 5020 is configured in software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the production control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by. Note that the effect control unit 5020 may be configured as a separate arithmetic circuit and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, the details of the configuration of the module or the like that realizes each function described above will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a module and the like in the periphery control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all of the configuration may be configured as hardware.

  In the present embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each rendering device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules regarding effects. Further, a presentation control unit 5020 is included to create presentation device control information for driving each presentation device based on the main command.

  The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one set information, and the command status value, the command mode value, and the check status value of the command status and the mode value are sequentially arranged from the first byte, and divided into 3 times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer 5110, which is output in response, receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command, If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

  The main command includes information representing the contents related to the effect among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, presence / absence of a game ball at the start winning opening, the result of special drawing lottery, a special symbol variation pattern (variation time), and the like can be included in the main command. In addition, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, door opening and other sensor outputs, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of a reel, success or failure of a stop, and the like can be mentioned. In addition, the command mentioned here is an illustration and can contain various commands according to the model of a game machine, and the contents of an effect.

  The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the content of the main command, and determines whether the command is related to the effect. When it is determined that the command is related to the effect, the command is transferred to the effect control unit 5020.

  Based on the analysis result of the main command, the effect control unit 5020 identifies a layer to be subjected to effect control from the layer data table. And a block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

  The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing an effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lamp lighting / flashing, action of an accessory, and the like.

  When the effect block number is determined, liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal rendering block data is block data for performing liquid crystal display rendering, and includes one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) object, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as backgrounds and characters, and a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification symbols. included.

  The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame period (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update period. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is delivered to the effect display devices (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540 a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated by, for example, a method in which character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command is developed on a frame buffer at a specified position.

  When the production block number is determined, sub production block control unit 5320 executes sub production block data corresponding to the production block number. The sub effect block data is block data for performing effects of a lamp, a sound, and a motor, and includes one or more sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub rendering scheduler data, each rendering device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs an operation defined in advance in the sub rendering scheduler data.

  The sub effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 corresponding to the execution cycle of the various effect devices, and executes the sub effect scheduler data included in the sub effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various production devices includes a sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the production device at intervals of one frame and a sub production 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the production devices at intervals of 1 millisecond. included. As described above, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the rendering according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specification of the rendering device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it becomes possible to synchronize sound output and the action of a character with the liquid crystal display. In addition, if the detection interval of the sensor is 1 ms unit, it is possible to promptly cope with a problem in the operation of the accessory.

  The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In this embodiment, for example, three types of effect control of sound (sound) output, lamp lighting / flashing, and action of an accessory are performed. explain. Note that the rendering control by the sub rendering 1 f scheduler executing unit 5333 and the sub rendering 1 ms scheduler executing unit 5334 will be described without particular distinction as being the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of rendering device will be described.

  First, the case of executing effects by sound output will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. When a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameter. In addition, it is possible to start a plurality of schedulers. For example, by controlling output of BGM and effect sound effects with different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel and sound can be output simultaneously. . The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

  Next, the case of performing effects by the lamp will be described. If the sub effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. When a lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameter. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

  The lamp module 5600 creates lamp driving data for each cycle (one frame or one millisecond) and outputs the data to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600 and outputs the data to the serial control IC 5150. By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output ramp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the lamp data output will be the next operation of the lamp data creation to increase the lamp control processing time by increasing the lamp system or overlapping the lamp layers. With the cycle, the process relating to the creation of lamp data may be completed within the processing cycle.

  Specifically, when the ramp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously generated ramp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to output the previously generated lamp drive data, and the respective lamps are lit and blinked. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling lighting / flashing of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

  Finally, the case of controlling a drive device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating the accessory will be described. If scheduler data for driving device control is included in the sub effect block data, the scheduler execution unit activates the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a drive control function (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

  The driver module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In the present embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the timing output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output at the next cycle of all motor data transmission. Output. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after completion of serial transmission of all motor data, so as the serial transmission time of motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until completion of serial transmission becomes overhead, and the overall processing time for each frame period It is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, by shifting the timing of latch signal output corresponding to motor data serial transmission, it is realized that the waiting time until completion of serial transmission is set to 0, but a plurality of DMAs can be used by the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and a latch signal is output by a DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until completion of serial transmission can be reduced to zero. At the same time as the output of the motor drive data, effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect drive photo information is received by serial communication via the parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data configuration]
In the present embodiment, scheduler data can have various structures. For example, you may provide the call function for taking in other scheduler data as a part of scheduler data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the process specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, once the other scheduler data specified by the call function is executed, the process of the original scheduler data is continued. Will run. By doing so, it is possible to utilize general-purpose production contents in various scenes in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

  This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect specific to the gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Among players, there are those who can find subtle differences in the contents of the effect during the lottery and infer the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the general-purpose effect contents can be utilized in various scenes by the call function, such subtle differences can be eliminated, and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired.

  The scheduler data may include, as another configuration, a conditional branch function that switches the effect contents according to the gaming state. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes defined by the scheduler data, and at the time of execution of the conditional branch function, determines the gaming state based on the main command, and executes the contents of effects according to the gaming state . By doing this, it is possible to cope with variously diverging gaming states with one scheduler data. Examples of the game state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery performed during a game and the presence or absence of an operation of a button or the like by a player. In the case of the roll-to-roll type gaming machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state to the start winning opening may be used. Further, conditional branching may be performed depending on whether or not an error has occurred during the game.

  The contents of the effect after conditional branching can be variously configured. For example, after the conditional branching, it may be configured to be completely separated into two or more processes. Moreover, after performing a predetermined process by a conditional branch, you may comprise so that it may return to the process before a branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after a process of outputting a sound effect temporarily when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without any sense of incongruity.

  As described above, the game machine can include various effect devices, and as an example, a display device for displaying an image can also be included. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, a plasma display, and the like can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing apparatus is an apparatus that develops an image into a bit map in accordance with a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like prepared on a screen by a bit map can be used.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 313 is an explanatory view showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, a case where the main effect control is a sub effect executed by executing scheduler data including a function will be described, and in particular, a sound (sound) output will be described as an example.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device at the time of effect execution. Scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data specified in the sub effect block data from scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of scheduler data will be described later.

  Sound functions executed at the time of sound output include “SPLAY” for reproducing a phrase, “STOP_PH” for stopping a phrase being reproduced, “VOL_PH” for setting a volume level during phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and control specified by parameters and the like is executed. Upon receiving the execution of the function for sound, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data, and outputs the sound source drive data to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source.

  The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but in order to facilitate understanding, the number of channels will be described as four. The sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. Does not mean that

  The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by channel management work 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated at the lower right of the figure. In the work 5507, a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute are stored. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not stereo output is to be performed. The output volume is a volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a specification of whether or not to repeat playback. These pieces of information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

  As described above, in FIG. 313, the basic concept of effect control in the present embodiment is shown by taking sound output control as an example. The sub rendering scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub rendering block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each effect device is called and processed by modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device.

[18-4. Flow of data in presentation control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the effect control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from when the main command is received until the scheduler data is acquired will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for presentation control]
FIG. 314A is a diagram illustrating a configuration until data necessary for presentation control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. As described in FIG. 312, when the effect control unit 5020 receives a main command from the main control board 1310, the effect analysis unit 5020 analyzes the command by the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

  The effect control unit 5020 is based on the layer data table, each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to a variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to a hold effect), and a game instruction layer (game instructions). Based on the analysis result of the command analysis module 5200 for each of the communication layer, the communication error layer (the layer that performs communication error notification), the notification layer (the layer that performs various notifications), and the abnormality notification layer (the layer that performs abnormality notification). And performs acquisition and update management of effect block data numbers corresponding to each layer. Further, the obtained effect block data number is delivered to the effect block control unit 5040. If the effect block number is, for example, a change pattern layer, the change pattern by liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by change pattern, the change pattern by liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table, the change pattern by sub effect block data Determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the effect block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) which are common effects in a series of effects (for example, effects executed from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop). In addition, block data including control information such as presentation contents for each presentation apparatus and presentation time is defined for each block. By controlling the effects in units of effect blocks based on the effect block numbers, effects by the respective effect devices can be synchronized. Further, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layer on the liquid crystal display, and in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern layer is the rearmost, the anomaly notification layer is the frontmost, and this is displayed on the front as important information It is a configuration for

  When the effect block control unit 5040 receives a block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, a scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub effect block corresponding to each layer) The corresponding block data (liquid crystal rendering block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub rendering block data 5053) are acquired by the control unit 5320). Each block data contains, as described above, scheduler data for executing effects.

  For example, when the main command is a start winning command, the holding layer is specified, and liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for displaying a hold on the liquid crystal display screen or sub effect block data for outputting sound effects at the time of starting winning. 5053 is obtained. In addition, at the start of change of the special symbol, a change start command or the like is transmitted to specify a change pattern layer. Furthermore, when reporting the occurrence of an error or a warning, a command is transmitted to specify an abnormality detection layer. Moreover, a plurality of effects can be performed simultaneously by performing effects for each layer.

  The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal rendering block data 5051 from the liquid crystal rendering block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal rendering block data number, and then the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 performs the liquid crystal. The effect 1f scheduler is activated. The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071. Then, the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071 is executed on the liquid crystal rendering 1 f scheduler to instruct the liquid crystal module 5400 to process the function defined in the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and plays the game board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal rendering 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  When liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 is acquired from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, liquid crystal symbol block controller 5311 executes liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution portion 5332. The liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated by The liquid crystal symbol 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 is executed on the liquid crystal symbol if scheduler to instruct the liquid crystal module 5400 to perform the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and plays the game board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  After obtaining the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies an execution cycle (one frame or one millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub effect block data 5053 or the like. When the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 starts the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 causes the sub-effect 1 ms. Start the scheduler.

  Furthermore, the sub rendering 1 f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub rendering 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub rendering schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub presentation schedule data 5073 has no difference depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the schedulers of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data to be commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, thereby reducing the data volume. In addition, it is possible to promptly cope with the change of the execution cycle of the rendering device. In addition, the same schedule data can be simultaneously executed by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share scheduler data, prevent the occurrence of the same kind of problem at a plurality of places, and realize the reduction of data capacity. it can.

  Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 314B is a diagram for explaining the liquid crystal rendering effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. There are four types of step-up notices, step-up notices 1 to 4, which can be executed. By executing an effect that has been developed in stages, the player is expected to see the result of the variable display of symbols. Suggest a degree.

  In step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect ends. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and after the step-up 2 effect ends, the notice effect ends. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the end of the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect, the advance effect is finished.

  In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the sound production, different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up production, and therefore, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progressing state (stage) of the production. On the other hand, in the lamp presentation, in order to display the same lamp pattern at each stage of the step-up presentation, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

  In addition, since the next step-up notice is started immediately before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage when the liquid-crystal effect of the step-up notice progresses to the next stage, a plurality of step-up effects are performed simultaneously at the same time. There is a period. As described above, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for subsequent step-up effects in the lamp effect, but in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the same scheduler data can be simultaneously executed by a plurality of schedulers It has become. Therefore, when performing the same effect at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effect overlap.

  Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 production, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 production that starts just before the end of the step-up 1 production occurs. The advance ramp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH 02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously (overlapping) without defining the same scheduler data redundantly, thereby producing the same pattern effects in parallel in a series of effects. It is realized to carry out.

  The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the control target effect device, and is defined in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. Instructs processing of the specified function. Each module processes a function whose execution is instructed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the driving data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of scheduler data execution]
FIG. 315 is a diagram for explaining the flow of execution of scheduler data according to the present embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and various effect devices are provided by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 315 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referred to for setting this command.

  In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each production number designated from the production block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect numbers is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table is provided with an effect management pointer that indicates the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the effect management pointer is prepared for the number corresponding to the effect number, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the production management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

  In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 315, production numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent storage addresses of production management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured to associate the effect number with the effect management pointer, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then stores the scheduler data. What is necessary is just to make it process. If the address value of the production management pointer is used as the production number, the data amount of the production management table can be reduced, and the above-described search is not required, so the load required for the scheduler data processing can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 315, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of functions and parameters. As described above, the function is a command for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the effect device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. In addition, you may provide the function which does not need to specify a parameter.

  The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (drives) and users. The sequence control is a basic function for performing production control, and the lamp, sound, and motor are functions for controlling each production device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. A specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the example shown in FIG. 315, the “call” function is designated at the address A2. The "call" function belongs to the group of sequence control, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer. The scheduler executor 5060 can temporarily return to the address specified by the parameter and process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-described saved pointer value.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the “call” function after the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, an audio operation number is set at A32, and a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3 n. When the rendering command ends these processes, it returns to the address A2 where the "call" is specified, and shifts to processing of the next address A3.

  Thus, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to capture the contents of the series of blocks BL3 designated by the addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the capacity of scheduler data and to reduce its creation load. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Among players, there are those who can find subtle differences in the contents of the effect during the lottery and infer the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various scenes by calling, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and the lottery result or the like can be difficult to predict. It is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired.

  Thus, although it is possible to use the "call" function, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the program of the interpreter. As described above, the main function used in scheduler data 5401 is to set the contents of instructions to other schedulers, such as "character item operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "lamp operation number set". This is because it merely indicates the very limited functions that the scheduler execution unit 5060 can realize.

  In the example shown in FIG. 315, NOP (wait) is executed next at address A3. The "NOP" function waits for the designated number of frames and continues processing of scheduler data. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is awaited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] has elapsed. As described later, in the present embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily terminates the processing of scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing if the value of parameter Prm [031] is not 0, and if this value is 0. Perform processing to shift to the next address function.

  In the present embodiment, a work of the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 314A is used to specify a voice operation number or the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores voice operation numbers and the like in the work according to the specification of scheduler data. Further, a layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 314A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel among these layers.

  The scheduler data is similarly defined by the functions and parameters after the address A11 of the conditional branch. In the example shown in FIG. 315, the conditional branch is not provided from the conditional branch address A11 to the end of the production (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the above-mentioned block BL1, the bonus command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), etc. can be specified without considering the conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, the block BL3 or the like may be fetched by a “call” function.

  In scheduler data, a conditional branch and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number may be generated to switch the effect contents, and different addresses may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 315, if the condition “random number value ≦ Th1?” Is attached to the address A2, the effect of the addresses A31 to A3n is executed when this condition is satisfied. In addition, if the condition A1 (random number value ≦ Th2?) Is added after the address A2 (address A2 + 1) and the address A41 (not shown) is called, the address A31 and subsequent ones are added according to the value of the random number. Different effects are performed. In this way, if different addresses are called in a conditional branch according to a random number, the contents of the presentation can be switched randomly according to the random number, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching of the contents of the effect in this manner is referred to as “effect lottery” in the present specification.

  In the effect lottery, the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device may all be switched, or only a part may be switched. When switching all of them, all the contents of the display, sound, and lamp should be specified in the scheduler data called by the “call” function. When switching only a part, only the part to be switched is specified in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and the other parts are specified uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

  Further, in the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a “call” function may be used so as to call different scheduler data according to the random number for the effect lottery. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device performing the effect lottery independently, the effect mode realized by the combination becomes very colorful, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

  However, regardless of the result of the lottery of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device, it is preferable that these effects end at the same time in order to realize an effect without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be the selection target of the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends at the same time. In addition, it is not an essential requirement that the effects end in the same time, and the effects of these effects may not be the same.

  The effect lottery based on the scheduler data has a variety of effects, and has the advantage that the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device. For example, when the effect lottery is instructed, the drive device is executing the figure-like distribution operation of 8 and the other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery on the drive device. May be. Similarly, for the display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited according to the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. In addition, in the effect lottery prohibition, the effect lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting selection of a part of scheduler data.

  As described above, the effect lottery switches the contents of the effect by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510 to the last, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize more various effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Outline of sound (sound) output control]
Subsequently, the function of the sound module for controlling the output of sound will be described. FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram showing the function of the sound module 5500 of this embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process designated by a function included in scheduler data, and outputs a voice. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for speech. Further, in each scheduler 5502, work 5507 for operation management is prepared. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

  When the voice operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table to specify scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which the sound pointer and the sound layer are associated with the voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. As the voice operation number, any identification information can be used, but as in the case of the effect number described above, the capacity reduction of the voice operation number table and the processing load reduction at the time of referring to the table are more effective Has the advantage of making it possible.

  The sound pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

  Scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used by the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320.

  In the example shown in FIG. 316, a “call” function is defined at the address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

  In the address SA3, phrase reproduction is defined. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter, and reproduces it.

  An example of the structure of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. The phrase number is identification information attached to each piece of phrase data. Although any identification information can be used in this embodiment, the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as a phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

  The channel is an output channel designated at the time of phrase reproduction. The left and right panpots and the upper and lower panpots are the left / right / upper / lower output balances of the speakers provided in the gaming machine. Volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be reproduced. When the music number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads sound source data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b and reproduces the sound. A loop is a designation as to whether or not to repeatedly reproduce sound. Stereo is specification of whether or not to output stereo.

  A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operating state indicates whether each layer is operating or not. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In the present embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is an address of scheduler data 5505 executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 316, as the process proceeds, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data 5505 and is sequentially subtracted as time passes. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes zero.

  The number of call nestings and the number of loop nestings represents the number of nestings of calls and loops that are specified in a multiple manner by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, when scheduler data 5505 of another address is called by the “call” function (second call) in the processing after address SA31 called by the “call” function (first call) of address SA2, call nesting is performed. The number is 2. After completing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same applies to the loop. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the number of loop iterations. The loop top address or the like is provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Then, the function of the lamp module which controls the output of a lamp is demonstrated. FIG. 317 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lighting / blinking control of the lamp. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with the lamp layer for the lamp. Each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

  When the lamp operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table to specify scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which the lamp pointer and the lamp layer are associated with the lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used as the lamp operation number, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referencing the table, as in the case of the effect number described above. It has the advantage of making it possible.

  The ramp pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505, like the effect data (FIG. 315), is composed of functions and parameters. A function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 317, a “call” function is defined at the address LA2. After executing a series of blocks subsequent to address LA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address LA3 next to address LA2.

  The gradation pattern setting is defined at the address LA3. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. Each of the lamp schedulers 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 associated with it. The lamps are turned on with the designated gradation data 1 and when the time designated by the timer value has elapsed, the gradation data 2 is used. Lights up. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are designated is shown, but even when three or more gradation data are designated, the lamp is lit while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after the address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes at the addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lighting of the lamp is terminated. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601 and executes the processing of the next address until it reaches the stop (address LAn).

  Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the drawing. The scheduler status indicates whether or not the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the head address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents a waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The ramp performs the next function when this value becomes zero. The gradation data timer represents a waiting time until execution of the next gradation data when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 317, when the gradation data specified by the address LA11 is executed, the gradation data timer shifts from the gradation data 1 to the gradation data 2 when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0. When the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing at the address LA11 is terminated and the processing proceeds to the processing at the address LA12.

  The ramp pointer is an address of scheduler data 5601 which the scheduler 5602 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 317, as the processing proceeds, the values of the ramp pointers sequentially transition to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is an address of the gradation pattern data 5606 which the gradation scheduler 5604 is executing. In the example in the figure, as the processing proceeds, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The loop count is the loop repeat count, and the loop head address is the head address of the loop range. As in the case of sounds, loops may be nested.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Subsequently, the function of the drive module 5700 for controlling the operation of the drive will be described. The driving device is, for example, a stepping motor. The control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600 and is not shown. The driving device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the driving device. The driver module 5700 can also receive requests from multiple schedulers to perform processing.

  The control items of the drive device include, for example, movement amount (stepping motor rotation step angle), movement time, movement speed (motor rotation speed), excitation method, trapezoidal drive, rotation direction, and the like. In addition, an instruction to perform a return operation to return to the origin position or an instruction to stop the mechanical end (stop in a state where the drive device is energized to a limit position of the movable range when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited). included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function when starting and stopping the rotation.

  Scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data for controlling the driving device will be described later with reference to FIG.

[18-5. function]
In the above, the example which uses a function in the module used for presentation control was demonstrated. Here, other functions will be described. 318 to 320 are diagrams showing examples of functions in the effect control of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are classified into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor and user groups. Hereinafter, functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of presentation. FIG. 318 shows an example of a sequence control function. The outline of each function will be described below.

  "STOP" is a function that represents the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a function for waiting which waits for a time according to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time according to the number of times of execution differs depending on the processing cycle for executing the "NOP" function, and in the case of execution in a frame cycle, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed in 1 ms cycle, it will also wait for about 30 ms if the execution number is specified as 30. "NOP_F_VALUE" takes the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value as parameters, and terminates the "NOP_F_VALUE" function when the conditions based on scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value are satisfied, If not satisfied, it is a conditional weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

  “MEMW” is a function that uses the target scheduler work number and value as parameters, and writes the specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area. “LOOPST” is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), designates the loop top, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. In addition, when "0" is set to the number of loops, it becomes an infinite loop. “LOOP” is a function for specifying the end of repetitive processing (loop).

  “RET” is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the “call” function is set in the effect management table. “CALL” is the above-described “call” function, which executes processing from a specified address (block), and sets information for specifying a call destination such as an address value or a label as a parameter. In “CALL”, the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after the process of the call destination is executed, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

  “SUBC” selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the branch table, and executes the selected process. That is, the "call" function is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. When the callee process is completed by the “SUBC” function, the process returns to the caller process (the process next to the “SUBC” function).

  "SUBJ" selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the table, and executes the selected process. That is, the “JUMP” function described later is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBJ” will be described later with reference to FIG. It does not return to the process of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function, but continues the process of the callee as it is. “JUMP” sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

  "REQ" is a function for activating another scheduler designated by the parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. “REQF”, like “REQ”, is a function for starting another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. Prohibit launching. In “REQ”, control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" can be made to be independently executed during a designated scheduler data process, for example, other scheduler data to operate the bonus in the case of bonus initialization is executed and controlled. It can prevent becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The functions belonging to the lamp group are functions for controlling the flow of the lamp effect. FIG. 319 gives an example of functions relating to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “HPLAY” is a function for executing lamp tone data reproduction processing to light the lamp based on the tone data specified by the parameter. In “HPLAY”, the lamp is reset even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is designated by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the gradation data timer in the work 5603 is cleared to instruct execution of the gradation data.

  “KPLAY” is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting the lamp based on the gradation data specified by the parameter, similarly to “HPLAY”. In "KPLAY", when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the lamp in progress is continued without being reset.

  “HPLAY2” is a function that executes a lamp tone data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to the tone data using parameters. The processing is the same as “HPLAY”. “KPLAY2” is a function for executing a ramp gradation data reproduction process by designating a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter, similarly to “HPLAY2”. The processing is the same as “KPLAY”.

  “HPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute a specified lamp gradation data reproduction process for reproducing the lamp gradation data designated by the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted at the time of reproduction by "HPLAY", and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning, and the lamp gradation data is reproduced at the time of reproduction by "KPLAY" Continue playing without interruption. That is, while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using "KPLAY", no particular processing is performed.

  “HPLAY2” is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer to reproduce the lamp gradation data is designated by the parameter in addition to the function of “HPLAY” described above, and the process is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer is designated by the parameter.

  In addition to the function of “KPLAY” described above, “KPLAY2” is the same as “KPLAY” except that a layer for reproducing ramp gradation data is specified by a parameter and a layer is specified by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (Sound)
The functions belonging to the group of sounds are functions for controlling the sound output. FIGS. 319 and 320 show examples of functions relating to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “SPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, it is reset, and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. Similar to “SPLAY”, “SXPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is reproduced, the sound continues to be reproduced without being reset. “STOP_PH” is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping sound reproduction based on a phrase number specified by a parameter.

  “PAN_PH” uses the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of the “PAN_PH” function execution for the phrase being played specified by the parameter, and the panpot end It is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the transition time designated to the coordinate position. “PAN_PH2” can specify the pan-pot start coordinate position with a parameter in addition to the function of the “PAN_PH” function. Similar to the “PAN_PH” function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the transition time specified from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position.

  "VOL_FADE_PH" is specified from the volume value at the start of "VOL_FADE_PH" function execution to the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter up to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameters. It is a function to increase or decrease the volume value at the transition time. "VOL_FADE_PH2" allows you to specify the fade start volume value with the parameter in addition to the function of "VOL_FADE_PH" function, and like the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is a parameter at the start of function execution It is a function to increase / decrease the volume value at the transition time designated from the fade start volume value designated by to the fade end volume value.

  “VOL_PH” is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value of the phrase being reproduced designated by the parameter using the volume value designated by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function to mute the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function that cancels muting of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

  “SCPLAY” and “SXCPLAY” execute specified channel music reproduction processing for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and reproduced from the beginning when reproducing by “SCPLAY”, and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption when reproducing by “SXCPLAY”. That is, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being played back, no particular processing is executed.

  “PAN_CH” performs a panpot for the phrase (ch), whereas “PAN_PH” performs the panpot for the phrase. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than "PAN_PH", processing is not changed. With regard to “PAN_CH2”, “PAN_PH2” described above performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas panning for a ch is performed, except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to “PAN_PH2”. The process does not change.

  "VOL_FADE_CH" fades to a phrase while "VOL_FADE_PH" fades to a phrase, while "ch" is faded to a channel, ch is "VOL_FADE_PH" except that the phrase is changed to a channel and designated by a parameter. Processing does not change. "VOL_FADE_CH2" also fades to a phrase, while "VOL_FADE_CH2" fades to a phrase, while "ch" is faded to a channel, with "VOL_FADE_PH2" except that the phrase specified in the parameter changes to ch. Processing does not change.

  “VOL_CH” increases or decreases the volume value for the phrase, whereas “VOL_PH” increases or decreases the volume value for the ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. The process is the same as "VOL_PH" except for the above. As for "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", while "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mentioned above performs mute (mute) targeting a phrase, mute (mute) targets ch, ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" except for the above. As for "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", while "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" mentioned above performs cancellation of mute (mute) targeting a phrase, cancellation of mute (mute) targeting ch is performed, ch is a phrase specified by a parameter The process is the same as “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
The function belonging to the motor group is a function for controlling the output of the motor or solenoid. FIG. 320 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. “MMPLAY” executes motor regeneration processing for causing the motor designated by the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process for causing the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function Details (User)]
The functions belonging to the group of users are functions for executing control which does not belong to the group described above. FIG. 320 shows an example of these functions, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MBUF_SET” executes motor output buffer scheduler work value set processing for setting the scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND 0" are processes for issuing a command from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a or the like. For example, a command for starting drawing on the liquid crystal display device is issued. On the other hand, the command issued by “COMMAND 0” is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. “MEMC” executes a scheduler memory copy process of copying the contents of the scheduler work area being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which functions necessary to execute a series of processes are defined in order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each management purpose, but all schedulers can execute all functions, schedulers for sound can execute functions related to lamps, and schedulers for features There is no difference between the processing cycles (frame or 1 ms) other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) which can execute the function for sound and a plurality of schedulers provided for each application, and it is also possible to mix and execute all functions. Further, the number of executions of the schedulers is not limited, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be simultaneously executed.

  FIG. 321 is a diagram illustrating an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. The scheduler can be classified for convenience according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. The following outlines typical types of schedulers.

  First, to explain an example of a scheduler related to state transition, there is a special view state scheduler (special view state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling transition of the gaming state of the entire game. In effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, transition of the gaming state is controlled based on a command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special view state scheduler is 1 f (frame).

  Also, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state changes when a predetermined condition is established, for example, when the player operates an effect button, wins an effect execution lottery, or changes to another state when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation. To do. The processing cycle of the sub state scheduler is 1 f (frame).

  In the scheduler for sounds, the background for controlling the output of sound output in accordance with the background display and the display of changes in the design, the scheduler for executing the design sound scheduler data (SND_SCH01), and output when the notice effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) for controlling the output of sound and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) for controlling the output of sound at the time of advance notice execution by an accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

  Similarly to the sound-related scheduler, the related scheduler for the lamp includes a background (LMP_SCH01) for executing the background and design lamp scheduler data for controlling the lighting and blinking of the lamp in accordance with the background display and the change display of the design. ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp when the notice is executed by an accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the ramp is 1 f (frame).

  Also, a scheduler that controls sound and lamps in conjunction with each other is defined. A sound / lamp notification layer that executes sound output and lamp lighting / blinking to notify such a scheduler as a notification such as ball breakage or ball clogging or alarm detection due to abnormality detection by a magnetic sensor etc. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that is used for general purposes in order to execute an effect in which sound output and lamp lighting / flashing are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

  The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSSYS_SCH) for executing the motor system scheduler data for executing the system operation, and a scheduler for executing the motor ram clear scheduler data for setting the RAM clear ( MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing the motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of the accessory, and the motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of the accessory Scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH), and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing an action of an accessory by presentation etc.

  The scheduler for executing the action of the accessory by the production etc. is a general-purpose that is used without depending on the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of the specific accessory or the kind of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

  The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for the management of the game state and the sound and the ramp (this embodiment 1f = about 33.334 ms). It has become.

  Note that the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, but the number of schedulers may be controlled so as to dynamically increase or decrease in accordance with the gaming state or notice. As a result, each scheduler can be started independently of the number of effects provided to the gaming machine or the number of effects, and the restriction for executing effects can be reduced.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (Production 1)]
In the above, we have explained the outline of the types and functions of schedulers that perform a series of controls by combining functions used in production control, and below, specific examples of application of scheduler data and functions with reference to the drawings explain.

[18-7-1. Summary of production]
FIG. 322A is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322A, the game board 5 according to the present embodiment includes a logo character 5001, a star character 5002 (left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, right star character 5002c), and spear character 5003. Is placed.

  A logo title 5001 is disposed at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it drops (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the presentation is finished. Furthermore, in addition to the movement in the vertical direction, it is also possible for the logo combination 5001 to perform an effect of vibrating in the vertical and horizontal directions before and after the movement.

  The star combination 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star combination 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star combination 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star combination 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star character 5002 is operable independently of one another, and one or more star characters 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the contents of the effect.

  The left star character 5002a moves downward to the left and is movable to a position slightly lower than the center of the game area. In addition, the middle star character 5002b moves downward and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star character 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to the center of the game area slightly lower right. Each star character 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or may return to the middle position and stop after reaching the final arrival position.

  The prison cast 5003 is disposed at the upper center of the game area. The prison object 5003 can be dropped (moved) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position and the lower position. Depending on the player's operation of the production button or the lottery result of the bonus announcement notice production, it moves from the initial position to the middle position, stops temporarily, and then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. An operation mode is set. As in the case of the logo character 5001, it is possible to perform the effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after movement of the prison character 5003.

  Next, a description will be given of the flow of a notice effect that is executed with one symbol variation. First, with reference to FIG. 322B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star object notice, and a button (BTN) logo object fall notice will be described. Note that the flow of the notice effect including the 演出 notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 322B shows an example of execution timing of advance notice effect executed in a series of fluctuation display from the start of fluctuation of special symbol to the stop in this embodiment, and a diagram for explaining scheduler and scheduler data used at this time is there. In the series of variable display shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice and the button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the change. Then, reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, group notice, star character notice, and button (BTN) logo character fall notice are executed. For each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, action of an accessory, etc. is executed.

  Hereinafter, a part of scheduler data for executing each preliminary announcement effect will be extracted, and the control by the scheduler data and the function configured will be described. Specifically, scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" for controlling the lamp in step-up notice (Fig. 323), scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" for controlling the lamp in button cut-in notice (Fig. 324) Motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 325 to 327) for controlling the operation of 5002 and motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 328) for controlling the operation of the logo symbol 5001 in the button logo feature falling notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting state of a predetermined lamp changes stepwise according to the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH02”.

  FIG. 323 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” for performing the lighting / flashing control of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is started, first, a function “SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, and is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_STP” and the step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”, and identifies the address of the scheduler data that is the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up advance work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

  The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the preliminary announcement is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

  In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice whose step-up number is 4 and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” designates gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and waits for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH01”.

  Thereafter, the function “RET” is executed in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, thereby returning to the processing of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice whose step-up number is 4 and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” designates ramp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. The wait process is executed. Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked for 3 seconds in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 01 ramp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

  Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the process next to the caller (the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

  The step-up notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” will be described. First, it is possible to call the scheduler data for the lottery result in one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result value). is there. Depending on the content of the advance notice, there are cases where the range of the lottery result value is several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as an IF sentence, the number of scheduler data for judgment becomes too complex and management of correction and the like becomes difficult. On the other hand, "SUBC" solves the above problems easily by using the work memory contents as an index. In this embodiment, the number of work memory and the number of call address tables for branching is one. However, a complicated conditional branch may be processed with one action by using a plurality of both. The second one takes the form of "CALL", so it is possible to execute common scheduler data after the "SUBC" function is executed, and there is no need to list the number of scheduler data after branching, By describing one scheduler data, it is possible to execute the same process after every branch. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the “SUBC” function may be terminated without performing branch processing.

  That is, the function “SUBC” can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in a table format, and can call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data of branch destinations, but with function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. This makes it easy to handle additions and changes to the contents of presentation, and can improve development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control at button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of this embodiment is started in the first half of the change, and the notice is executed until the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled in accordance with the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

  The button cut-in notice belongs to notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 322B. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, the notice can be executed in parallel.

  FIG. 324 is a view for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notification according to this embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, first, the function "KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA" is executed, and then the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the designated lamp is lit (flickers) for one second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, a ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. In order to correspond to one frame per loop, 90 cycles correspond to 3 seconds. In loop processing, functions from “LOOPST” indicating the start of the loop to a function “LOOP” indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

  To describe the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and identifies the start address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button. When the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF” is displayed. When the effect button is operated, “1: button ON” is displayed. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is rewritten with a program for button processing other than the scheduler data.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the button cut-in advance notice button OFF lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” The The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" of the caller. Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited and the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” when the button cut-in advance notice button is ON in the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. Is selected. The content of scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" Is executed as a parameter.

  An address of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data is stored in the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT". Specifically, SUBJ_NON indicating the address of the scheduler data, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are stored. Note that SUBJ_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the preliminary announcement is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the lighting pattern (color, lighting time) of the lamp corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

  In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT” stores a lottery result value indicating a button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4 and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is lit in red (gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and wait processing of 150 frames is performed for 5 seconds. Let At this time, ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used to drive scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the notice group 02 ramp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

  Note that the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is not called CALL but is called JUMP, so execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function “STOP” and returns to the caller scheduler “SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT” do not do. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed and when the "STOP" function included in schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. There is.

  The button cut-in advance notice has been described above. Here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. The first is that it is possible to call scheduler data for the lottery result by one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result values) which are dynamically rewritten. Depending on the contents of the notice, there is also a thing that the range of lottery result value will be several hundreds, and in the bifurcation like IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage correction etc. . In “SUBJ”, the above problem is easily solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of work memory and the number of call address tables for branching is one. However, a complicated conditional branch may be processed with one action by using a plurality of both. Secondly, since the format is “JUMP”, all different processes can be executed depending on the branched scheduler data after the “SUBJ” function is executed. Also, as in the case of "SUBC", in order to cope with problems in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, branch processing is not performed and the "SUBC" function is ended. You may do it.

  That is, like the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" selects scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and the selected scheduler data It is possible to make the process transition to and obtain the same effect as the function "SUBC".

  In addition, unlike the function “SUBC”, the function “SUBJ” continuously executes the process of the schedule data of the call destination and does not return to the process of the call source, so it is suitable for executing the process alternatively. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress the effect from being executed redundantly by using the function “SUBJ”. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the process by the scheduler data of the calling source, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the calling destination process is executed, and the processing can be simplified.

  Therefore, by using the functions "SUBC" and "SUBJ", the structure of the scheduler data can be simplified and the structure can flexibly cope with the processing branch. Furthermore, since it is easy to cope with additions / changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, it is possible to improve development efficiency and to easily cope with specification changes of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control for star role notice]
Subsequently, control of the star character preview performed in the second half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. When reach occurs in the change display of the special symbol and shifts to the latter half of the change, a group notice is generated, and a star object notice is executed independently of the group notice. In the star role announcement, a plurality of types of star roles 5002 (in this embodiment, three types of left star role 5002a, middle star role 5002b, and right star role 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor) are provided. By operating, the expected degree of symbol variation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of appearances of the star character 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 322B, the star character preview of this embodiment is executed by driving the star role trailer motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (left star title scheduler data scheduler). Be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH 02 to 04) for operating the star character 5002 is provided in advance, but it is also possible to use a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH 05 to 09). .

  FIG. 325 to FIG. 327 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for performing motor control in the star symbol preview according to the present embodiment. FIG. 325 is the entire flow and scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” for controlling the left star role 5002a, FIG. 326 is scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” for controlling the right star role 5002c, and FIG. 327 is the scheduler for controlling the middle star role 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is started, first, a function “SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA” is executed. This function is the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star character trailer branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star work preview work area “YKK_HYA” with reference to the designated star work advance notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”. . The star role notice work area “YKK_HYA” stores the lottery result value of the star role notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star role notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”.

  The address of star character appearance scheduler data is stored in the star character trailer branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON indicating the address of scheduler data, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to make the accessory non-operating when the preliminary announcement is not won. Yes. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are scheduler data addresses for executing star feature announcements. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is only left star feature 5002a, SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is left star feature 5002a and right star feature 5002c SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star objects 5002.

  In this embodiment, a lottery result value indicating execution of a star character preview for causing the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c to appear in the star character work work area "YKK_HYA" "3" is stored, and scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. When only the left star role 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star role notice is “1”, and when the left star role 5002a and the right star role 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star role notice is selected. The result value is set to “2”.

  The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies a parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the pattern of the appearance operation of the left star character 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor reproduction process. At this time, the function “MPLAY” is executed by the motor scheduler “MOT_SHC02” in which the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is executed.

  Next, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” appearing as right star character 5002 c by function “REQ”. The function "REQ" is a function for executing scheduler data specified by a parameter by the scheduler specified by a parameter as well. Here, the right star character 5002 c appearing scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star character 5002 c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03”. Similarly, the mid-star character 5002 b appearing scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed by the function “REQ” using the mid-star character 5002 b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04”. In this embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star object 5002c and the middle star object 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star object 5002a. ing. As described above, the star data 5002 can be controlled in parallel by causing the schedulers to operate the respective star characters 5002 to be executed by different schedulers.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing “NOP: 300”. During this weight time, the left star character 5002a operates in a designated manner. After the wait process is completed, the function “RET” is executed to return to the caller star role notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1”, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is ended by the function “stop”.

  Next, control of the right star object 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. The right star character 5002c appearing scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the scheduler "MOT_SHC03" for the right star character 5002c scheduler data designated at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

  When scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, as shown in FIG. 326, a parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating an appearance operation mode (pattern) of right star character 5002 c is designated to execute motor reproduction processing “MPLAY”. . Subsequently, 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing "NOP: 300" are executed. This weight time is the operation time of the right star character 5002c. After the end of the wait processing, the processing is ended by the execution of the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

  Finally, with reference to FIG. 327, control of the central star object 5002b will be described. The mid-star character 5002 b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is executed using the mid-star character 5002 b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 327, a parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating an appearance operation mode (pattern) of middle star character 5002b is specified, and motor reproduction processing "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing "NOP: 300" are executed. This weight time is the operation time of the middle star character 5002b. After the end of the wait processing, the processing is ended by the execution of the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star character 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star character 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the mid-star character 5002b are function "REQ". It is possible to operate each accessory in parallel by executing using. That is, the operations of the respective prizes can be executed in parallel without special control by executing the individually defined scheduler data as necessary. The advantage of having scheduler data run in parallel is that, first, a single feature operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing a plurality of operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of prizes are operated in parallel has been described, but it is possible to execute more prizes in parallel as long as there is no problem in the operation of the prizes. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of prizes in parallel without the need for complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize an effect rich in variations.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the notice of drop of logo and features]
Subsequently, control of the logo combination falling notice performed in the second half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo feature drop notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star feature notice. The logo object fall notice is a notice effect in which the logo object 5001 with the logo of the gaming machine falls in the vertical direction in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a big hit than usual. Indicates that is high.

  As shown in FIG. 322B, the logo feature drop notice of this embodiment is performed by driving the logo feature drop notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo feature thing scheduler data scheduler). To be executed. It should be noted that a general purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09) can operate the logo accessory 5001.

  FIG. 328 is a view for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” for performing the motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, first, the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT" is executed, and thereafter, the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo feature 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

  Describing the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo feature drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. The

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo combination falling notice lottery result branching call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and based on the contents of button logo combination preview work area “YKK_LGO”, the leading address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination Identify. The button logo feature notice work area "YKK_LGO" stores the result of the button logo feature fall notice lottery, and when the button logo feature fall notice lottery is out, "0: not executed", the button When winning the lottery for the logo object fall notice, “1: Logo drop notice execution” is set. The result of execution of the button logo combination falling notice execution drawing corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo combination falling notice lottery result branching call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

  While "0: not executed" is set in the button logo combination preview work area "YKK_LGO", the logo combination drop notice is not executed in the button logo combination drop notice lottery result branching call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", and the motor scheduler is not executed. Data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" of the caller. Therefore, if the button logo combination falling off lottery is missed, loop processing is executed 90 times, and then the loop processing is exited, function "STOP" is executed, and scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. .

  On the other hand, when "1: logo drop notice execution" is set in button logo role notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when it is elected to run button logo role fall notice lottery, button logo feature fall In the notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” at the time of executing the logo object fall notice is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo feature drop notice button branch call address table It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo combination product drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, the effect button is operated. If it has been set, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo / feature drop advance notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" is set to "0: button OFF", the button logo notice of falling button button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", the logo notice of falling button OFF button motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" of the caller. This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Therefore, even when the button logo winning combination drop notice is won, if the production button input is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function “STOP” is exited from the loop processing. This is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends.

  On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor logo when the logo combination falling notice button is ON in the button logo combination falling notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" first execute the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON". The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the logo combination 5001 is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_LGO_ON”. The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Furthermore, the weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120". At this time, the logo character 5001 performs the dropping operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

  Furthermore, by executing the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI", the logo character 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 90", while the logo character 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the end of the weight processing, the execution of the logo character falling operation is ended, so the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed, and the button logo character preview lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed". Return to immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” (function “RET”) of the data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN”. This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" returns to function "LOOP" but the button logo feature preview lottery result is rewritten as "0: not executed", so the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" for dropping button logo features is executed The remaining loop count processing is performed, and execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is ended by the function "STOP".

  As described above, when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, by issuing a command internally, an effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to cooperate with a plurality of types of rendering devices and execute as needed at appropriate timing, and it is possible to perform a more entertaining rendering .

  In this embodiment, although the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal in the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source using the function "COMMAND", control is performed from the scheduler to the program by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side. By temporarily returning, performing complicated processing that can not be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result in the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, processing that can not be originally controlled by the function command can also be performed. Moreover, the merit of issuing a command in scheduler data is that time management and execution determination by a program are not necessary by setting the command issue timing as the processing timing as it is. Further, it is possible to interactively process an external input (button, jog dial, touch pad) by a user that is not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue a command using the function “COMMAND”, and perform processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is a function of transmitting a fixed value command, but the content of the work area is to be transmitted as a command by designating a work area instead of a fixed value. May be.

[18-8. Application example of scheduler data (at power on)]
Next, scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the gaming machine is powered on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variable display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 329 is a diagram for explaining scheduler data to be executed when the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is powered on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, the main control board 1310 outputs a power on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 drives scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" with the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH" when the power-on command is received.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub gaming state (sub internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” progresses, a screen corresponding to the sub internal state is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc., as shown in FIG. Be done. At this time, the main gaming state is in a standby state. When the standby state is ended, the game is started, and when the game ball is won in the start winning opening, the main gaming state and the sub internal state transition to the fluctuating state.

[18-8-2. Power on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 330 is a diagram for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of this embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

  As described above, when the game machine is powered on or when a predetermined event occurs in game control on the main control board 1310, a main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. The As described in FIG. 312, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, and is analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module specifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, etc., and activates the corresponding scheduler to execute scheduler data.

  Also, when the function "COMMAND 0" (FIG. 319) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 as in the main command and analyzed by the main command analysis process. Be done.

  When a main command or a command output by the function “COMMAND0” is received, a command for executing control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by main command analysis processing. The generated commands include a command for activating the scheduler and a command for controlling various rendering devices (sub internal output command).

  In the command for starting the scheduler, for example, the main control board such as scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 or the change in the sub internal state due to the progress of the control in the peripheral control board 1510, the start winning etc. Scheduler data for executing an effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In this embodiment, in addition to starting the scheduler directly from the command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function “REQ” included in the scheduler data.

  On the other hand, the command for controlling the rendering device (sub internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command or the like for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the rendering device is output by the function “COMMAND” included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where the command is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. Commands for controlling the rendering device are temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer, and are processed in order of storage from the top of the buffer.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by further activating another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to hierarchically combine and execute a plurality of schedulers by receiving one main command. As a result, various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts in units of scheduler data, and by combining the scheduler, various types of effects can be implemented in parallel, The development efficiency of gaming machines can be improved, such as making debugging work more efficient.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, command analysis processing can be shared by command output by the function “COMMAND0”. This makes it possible to share scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which causes a problem that a large number of scheduler data combinations must be managed in a table. This can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, activation of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data in the case of receiving a command at power-on from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 331 is a diagram for describing a process of executing scheduler data at the time of power on in the embodiment.

  As described in FIG. 330, when the game machine is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process, and the scheduler is executed. The sub-state scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, execute the function "COMMAND 0" and issue a command to create a sub internal state, and further output a lamp or sound corresponding to the sub internal state as necessary. .

  The scheduler to be executed will be specifically described. First, the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”. In the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, a command “COM_STS_TAIKI” that changes to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" to stop the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_MDEMO” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the maker demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 300", a standby state is established for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" to stop the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and state model demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" of the model demonstration state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the waiting state, the function "COMMANDOO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" for transitioning to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and state anti-goto scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state anti-goto scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. Furthermore, by executing the function “SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO”, the reproduction of sound is started based on the sound data “PTA_SND_GOTO” in the goto prevention state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 450", a standby state is made for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. At this stage, the gaming machine becomes ready to play, and the game is started, and this waiting state is looped until the gaming ball is won.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 can be set only by receiving the power on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND 0" can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 has issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting a command with the function "COMMAND 0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is effective especially when there is a restriction on the capacity of the game control program.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (production 2)]
Next, an example will be described in which a saddle object fall notice is executed instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo object fall notice. The fall notice of the samurai role is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control such as passing over the parameter used in the first half notice to the second half notice is performed.

[18-9-1. Summary of production]
FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of change display from start of change to stop of special symbol in this embodiment, wherein (A) is an effect to be executed from start of change to end thereof It is a figure which shows the scheduler data for performing presentation, and the scheduler performed, (B) is a figure explaining the position of the prison object 5003 in a prison object falling notice.

  In the series of change display shown in FIG. 332 (A), a step-up notice and a button (BTN) winch first half drop notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, the group trailer and the button half-fall first fall notice continued from the first half are followed by the second half fall notice. For each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, action of an accessory, etc. is executed. The contents of the step-up notice are as described above.

  Next, referring to FIG. 332 (B), the contents of the prison object dropping advance notice will be described. As described above, the winning combination fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) winning combination first half falling notice and a winning combination latter half falling notice.

  In the first half, the first half of the button, the first half falling notice of a drop of a prison object, by operating the effect button, advance notice proceeds. Therefore, even if the player has won the execution lottery for the first-half falling notice of the button holding character, the falling effect of the holding object 5003 is not executed unless the production button is operated. On the other hand, in the second half, the second half of the second half, the second half falling notice is performed based on the result of the execution lottery of the second half of the second half falling notice, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

  When the player has won the lottery for execution of the first half falling notice of the button prison object and operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the prison object 5003 falls to the middle position. Furthermore, if the winning combination for the second half drop notice of winning the winning combination is won while the winning combination 5003 has fallen to the middle position, the winning combination 5003 falls to the lower position. In other words, the winning combination 5003 falls from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the advance notice of the falling of the winning combination and falls to the lower part (lower position) in the second half. In addition, when it is elected to the execution lottery of the second half of the jail drop notice, it falls to the lower part regardless of the position of the jail article 5003. In addition, when the prison notice is dropped, the prison control 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 332 (B), the announcement of dropping of the prison object is executed in six types of patterns. More specifically, when the result of lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination is not won, since it does not depend on the operation of the production button, the second half fall notice is not won (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the button prisoner first half falling notice and the prison second half falling notice are not won, the prisoner 5003 is not dropped and kept from moving from the top. In the case of pattern 2, since the prison object 5003 does not fall but is located at the upper part without dropping in the case of the prison official falling notice, and since the winning lottery is won in the second half dropping notice of the prison object, the prison object 5003 goes from the top to the bottom It falls at a stretch.

  When the player has won the lottery for executing the first half falling notice of the button, the presentation mode of the first half falling notice of the button differs depending on whether or not the presentation button is operated. Therefore, the four types of presentation modes can be executed depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button and the result of the execution lottery for the second half falling of the prison object.

  If the player wins the first lottery drop lottery and does not operate the production button, and the result of the second half drop prior notice is not selected, the bonus player 5003 will not fall. (Pattern 3). When the button lottery first half drop notice execution lottery is won and the production button is operated, and the result of the second half fall notice of the second half fall notice is not won, the bonus item 5003 is displayed when the production button is operated. Drops from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the end of the prison drop notice (pattern 4).

  If you win the first lottery drop lottery and don't operate the production button, and if you win the second half fallout announcement lottery, you won't operate the production button. The prison object 5003 is positioned at the top without falling until the second half falling notice of the object is started, and falls from the top to the bottom in the second half dropping notice of the second jail thing (pattern 5). If you have won the lottery for the execution of the first half drop notice of the button prisoner, operated the effect button, and further won the run lottery for the second half fall notice of the prison object, the prison object 5003 from the top at the time of operation of the presentation button It falls to the middle, and further drops from the upper part to the lower part in the second half drop notice of the prison object (pattern 6).

  As described above, there are six patterns of appearances that can appear in the winning combination fall notice of the present embodiment, and scheduler data for controlling the operation of the winning combination 5003 in the winning combination fall notice will be described below. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 332 (A), the button 鉈 combination first half drop notification motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for controlling the operation of the combination item 5003 in the button 鉈 combination first half drop notification, Next, description will be made regarding the second half fall advance notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for controlling the action of the last prize 5003 in the fall notice.

[18-9-2. [Various controls in the fall notice of a role]
FIG. 333 is a view for explaining the contents of a button “first half falling advance notice scheduler data“ SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1 ”for performing motor control in the first half falling advance notice of the button first time drop according to the first half of the first half falling notice of this embodiment. . As described above, when the player wins the first half drop notice for the button bonus item, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function “LOOP”, and the effect object 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Execute the effect to make it. In the case where the execution lottery of the first half falling notice of the button is not won, if the effect button is not operated even if it is won, the operation is ended without operating the prison object 5003. A motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the buttoned prisoner first-half falling advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 rattles the winning combination 5003. Thereafter, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP: 30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT", the specified operation is performed for one second. Specifically, the prison object 5003 rattles.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

  Describing the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" takes as a parameter the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button interceptor first-half falling notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" Executed.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button first half falling notice randomization result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, and scheduler data to be a branch destination based on the contents of button first half falling notice work area “YKK_NTA1” Specify the start address of. The result of the execution lottery of button first half falling notice is stored in the button first half falling notice work area “YKK_NTA1”, and in the case of not winning the execution of the button first half falling notice of lottery, “0: “1” is selected for the first half fall notice of the winning combination when the “No win” button is selected. The result of the execution drawing of the button first half falling advance notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button first half falling advance notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”.

  When "0: not selected" is set in the button prisoner first-half falling notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the button prisoner first-half falling notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the button prisoner thing The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” at the time when the first half drop notification is not executed is selected. The content of scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button Combo 1st half falling notice lottery is "not won". The execution of is terminated.

  On the other hand, when "1: First half drop notice is executed" is set to the button first half drop notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button lottery for first half drop notice is won. In the first half falling advance notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” of the button prisoner product, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is selected at the time of the execution time of the falling prediction of the falling prison object. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button forged part first half notice button branch call address It is executed with the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button first-come-first-served fall advance notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo feature drop notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and “0: button OFF when the effect button is not operated. When the effect button is operated, “1: button ON” is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button combination first half falling advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the button first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the button first letter drop first notice button OFF motor scheduler The data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" of the caller (function "RET"). This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”. Therefore, even if the winning lottery for the first notice of the drop of the button winning combination is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function “STOP” is exited from the loop processing. Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

  On the other hand, when the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “1: button ON”, the button jackpot first-half falling notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the button first-half falling notice button ON When the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. First, the content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" executes the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" and issues a command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect at the time of dropping the prison object, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution section 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to an intermediate position. Furthermore, weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is performed by the function "NOP: 120", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

  Finally, by executing the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1”, “1” is written in the scheduler wedge position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” to record that the prison object 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. Thereafter, the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is terminated by the function “STOP”.

  When the button first half drop notice which is the first half of the jail drop notice is finished, the second half fall notice of the jail drop is started. FIG. 334 and FIG. 335 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the winning combination latter half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the latter half fall notice that is the latter half of the winning combination fall notice of the present embodiment. is there. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used for execution of the second half falling advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" of the prisoner as in the case of the button first half fall advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA” is executed, and drawing of an effect indicating whether or not the winning combination 5003 falls on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. . Thereafter, weight processing “NOP: 90” of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of the big hit becomes large when the prison object 5003 falls, the player's sense of expectation is enhanced by performing the effect drawing for 3 seconds.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the second half late notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters .

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the prisoner, and based on the contents of second half drop notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler data of the branch destination Specify the start address. The result of the execution lottery of the second half of the jail drop notice is stored in the second half of the second half notice of work of the second half of the work area "YKK_NTA2". When the winning a prize for the second half of the jail dropping notice is selected, “1: running of the second half of the jail dropping notice is executed” is set. The result of the execution lottery of the second half falling notice of the prisoner corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the second half falling notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the second half.

  If "0: not selected" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the second half drop notice of the prisoner, the second half fall of the second half drop notice lottery result for the second run at the second row will be the second half drop of the prison object in the call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2". The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” is selected when no advance notice is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" executes the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON", and the value of scheduler eyelid position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the result of the second half falling notice lottery result of the prisoner object branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" Branch based on.

  When “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the second half drop notification is not made in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" at execution is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored.

  When “0: initial position” is set, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected when the second half drop notification is not executed in the second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. Ru. In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored. After that, the value of scheduler work position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is overwritten on “0: initial position”, and scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is ended.

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the prison character objects fall in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. When no notice is given and no notice is given, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected.

  In the first half falling advance notice execution / second half fall advance notice non-winning condition of the prisoner, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” first executes weight processing “NOP: 120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds). In the weight processing executed here, as described later, when the prison object 5003 is at the lower position, it is a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the prison object 5003 is originally at the middle position, it waits for four seconds.

  After the end of the wait process, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP” is executed to return the saddle accessory 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Furthermore, in order to secure the operation time of the prison object 5003, the wait process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2."

  In addition, when “1: second half falling notice” is set in work area “YKK_NTA2” for second half late notice 2 of the prison character, the second half last notice lottery result of the second half of the jail item is branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN” is selected when the second half falling advance notice is won. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” is executed, and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the branch object fall notice 2 branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NT” are used. .

  When “0: initial position” is set in the heel position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the first half drop notification is not made in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN”. Motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of execution / second half falling notice.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 335), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END” is executed, and the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the prison object 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, weight processing of 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 240", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the winning combination 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the winning combination 5003 reaches the lower position. Furthermore, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the drawing of the effect is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Then, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter “PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the prison object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

  Subsequently, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the above-mentioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called to return the prison object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function “RET” returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the first half drop of the prison object in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2 DOWN” Motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” is selected at the time of execution of the advance notice / late fall notice.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 335), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed, and the command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the prison object 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the middle position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the winning combination 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the winning combination 5003 reaches the lower position. Furthermore, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the drawing of the effect is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Here, in order to match the timing of starting the operation of returning the winning combination 5003 from the initial position to the lower position with the timing of starting the operation of returning the winning combination 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (about (4 seconds) wait processing is executed. This time is the time until the prison object 5003 moves from the initial position to the middle position.

  After that, as in the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN", the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function “RET” returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  When the saddle object 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0” is executed and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is set to “0: initial position”. And update the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  In the winning combination fall notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the winning combination 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, the position of the prison object 5003 can be specified by writing the position of the prison object 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. . As a result, the movement amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the prison object 5003, and by calling each corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute the rendering according to the operation result of the rendering button.

  Further, also in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the prison object 5003, common scheduler data is called up by the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

  The function “MEMW” can write a fixed value to a predetermined area at the time of execution of scheduler data, and can refer to a common value by referring to the execution of other scheduler data. In this way, it is possible to specify, at the time of execution of each scheduler data, a value indicating a state or the like that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data. The process can be completed only by the definition of the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processes depending on the state, and it is possible to streamline the creation and debugging of scheduler data and to facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, the function is a function of writing a fixed value, but by designating a work name with a parameter of a function instead of the fixed value, data transfer from the program side or processing based on command information Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. A unique feature of the function “MEMW” is that information that is not determined at the start of execution of scheduler data including the function “MEMW” can be processed if the information is determined before the function “MEMW” is executed. This enables control of effective time and interactive control.

[18-10. Example of scheduler data configuration (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of notice effects has been described above. The contents of execution of such a series of notice effects are drawn based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each announcement production.

  Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, a procedure for controlling the execution of a series of preview effects, and a basic presentation related to the series of preview effects and variation patterns (regardless of lottery other than preview effects) The configuration of scheduler data for executing a background effect and an effect related to a symbol effect that is rendered and has a one-on-one variation pattern will be described.

  In this embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (rendering section) divided in predetermined configuration units. For example, until the reach occurs from the start of the symbol variation, or until the symbol stops when the reach does not occur (the first half variation), the block from the reach occurrence until the symbol stops (second variation) ), And the period from the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. Further, each block is assigned a time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and an execution timing and an execution time of the advance notice effect within the allocated time are defined. The data corresponding to the time corresponding to each block and the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

  The rule of block division is that when the basic effects related to variation are compared in multiple variation patterns, the same basic effect part is divided into common block data, and the part with the difference in the basic effect of liquid crystal display is divided into block data Do. Referring to FIG. 336A, in the variation pattern-based liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in this embodiment, the change pattern “10H01H” has a normal change of 6 seconds. It has become a loss, and normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then a pattern effect of loss is performed. Since the six-second effect of normal fluctuation and the loss-stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into liquid-crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) for six seconds of normal fluctuation and liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) of lost-stop.

  The fluctuation pattern “10H02H” is usually lost for 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the symbol effect of the loss is performed. Because the 12-second effect of normal fluctuation is also used in other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK) of normal fluctuation for 12 seconds, and the symbol effect of losing is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern "10H01H" The liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) for stopping the stop is commonly used as the liquid crystal effect block data for the stop of loss, which is divided into the liquid crystal display blocks by the variation pattern “10H01H”. Similarly, with respect to other variation patterns, portions that have already been converted into block data regarding the basic effects are used in common, and block portions that are different are newly converted into block data.

  As described above, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data by performing blocking, and all the variation patterns and the basic effects such as big hit other than the variation are achieved by combining the unique liquid crystal effect block data. It becomes possible to realize all the variation patterns and the basic effects such as the big hit other than the variation. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the biggest purpose of blocking is to create a liquid crystal production that includes a specific basic production when there is a change in a specific basic production. The change is to be reflected in all variation patterns using block data.

  With regard to the liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, the format and function are completely different from the sound, lamp, and scheduler data of the feature in the present embodiment in order to control the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. The configuration in which the rendering scheduler data for rendering and the rendering scheduler data for preliminary rendering are combined has the same configuration as the sub rendering block data for controlling sounds, lamps, and special effects. In addition, drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and moving picture material ID, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, color, pictures and movies displayed in the background, and effects related to designs. It consists of functions that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, such as information, alpha information, and the type and execution timing of the effect related to the notice effect that occurs in the block data. The information shown is embedded.

  Further, in this embodiment, block data for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as liquid crystal symbol block data separately from block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification symbol independent of the control of other liquid crystal effects, for example, even when displaying the variability by changing the shape of the identification symbol. It becomes possible to execute with a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal effects. In addition, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for preview effect related to the symbol are combined for each block data is the same as the sub effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the aspect of the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is embedded.

  FIG. 336A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 336B is a diagram for explaining liquid crystal symbol block data combination numbers (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by fluctuation pattern storing combinations of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 337 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of sub-effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in the present embodiment.

  The variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating combinations of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, unique numbers identifying liquid crystal rendering block data to be configured are held in chronological order with respect to variation pattern numbers. For example, when the variation pattern number is “10H03H”, it is configured by “LCD03_BLK” that indicates normal variation for 12 seconds in the first half variation, “LCD04_BLK” that indicates normal short reach in the second half variation, and “LCD02_BLK” that indicates the time of out of range stop. Is done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. Thus, the configuration of the basic effect and the advance effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 435, the same liquid crystal rendering block data is used in all of the same rendering sections. For example, when the first half fluctuation is usually 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the notice effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal rendering block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal rendering block data can be uniquely identified for each fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 336B, the variation pattern liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similar to the variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table. . Further, the sub rendering block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (same combination, same rendering time) corresponding to the liquid crystal rendering block data of the same variation pattern number in a one-on-one manner.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 337, the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is, like the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, information indicating combinations of block data for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

  Next, a procedure for executing a notice effect based on scheduler data corresponding to a variation pattern will be described. Here, an execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for executing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal symbol block data, and effect control based on sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 338 is a diagram for describing an overview of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

  When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number “10H03H” is identified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 receives the variation pattern number. Notice.

  As described with reference to FIG. 314A, the effect control unit 5020 determines a layer to be used, determines a block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. Corresponding block data numbers are obtained from the variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the change pattern liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), and the variation pattern sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO). Do. By setting all block data numbers corresponding to the respective rendering devices to the same number, it is possible to execute all the renderings of the respective rendering devices synchronously.

  Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for the number of all layers to the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 and the sub effect block control unit 5320.

  After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is a sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit By 5333 (5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is a normal fluctuation 12 seconds liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is a normal fluctuation 12 seconds liquid crystal graphic block data "ZUG03_BLK The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuation 12-second sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”.

  When the processing of the liquid crystal rendering block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal rendering 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal rendering block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the rendering content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, designates parameters according to the contents of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits the DISPLAY list to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, whereby drawing is performed on the liquid crystal display device.

  When processing liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated to execute drawing scheduler data according to the variation display mode of the identification symbol. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as in the case of processing the liquid crystal rendering block data.

  On the other hand, when the processing of the sub production block data is started, one or a plurality of sub production 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub production block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the production content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or the execution cycle may be set at startup as shared.

  As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data specification function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp ("KPLAY"), a speaker ("SPLAY"), and a character ("MPLAY"). The designated effect is configured to be executed by sequentially executing the effect data designation function in the defined order. The effect data specification function is transmitted to the modules (the lamp module 5600, the sound module 5500, the drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and effects are performed by the various effect devices by each module.

  It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REQ, REQF". By executing the effect data specification function in the scheduler data called at this time, it is possible to control various effect devices. Furthermore, control using a command instead of a function is possible by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND 0". For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data specification function for controlling the movement of the character, the movement and drawing of the character cooperate with each other as in the case of the prison object falling notice effect described above. Can be performed.

  Here, a procedure for executing effect control using sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 339 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the control pattern start process according to variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer of this embodiment.

  The effect block control unit 5040 selects the change pattern layer by the effect control unit 5020 based on the change pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the block data number for each change pattern corresponding to the change pattern. Control is started using the pattern-specific sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 337). The row position of the variation pattern-basis sub-effect block data combination number table (FIG. 337) is set in the variation pattern-basis sub-effect block data combination number table row index (step S7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 337, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set to the variation pattern-sub effect block data combination number table row index and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set to the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data combination number table row index.

  Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub rendering block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the variation effect-specific sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). Thus, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

  FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control activation process of this embodiment.

  First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub pattern block data number table for each variation pattern based on the row and column indexes from the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step S7012). As a result, the process is started from the top record of the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data number table specified from the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data combination number table.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 activates scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data by variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub effect block data number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 342 (B)). Specifically, based on the sub effect block data number table row index, sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to a notice) from the sub effect block data number table get. In the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice), one or a plurality of scheduler data is registered, and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or more scheduler data are made to correspond on the basis of the lottery result of the advance notice and the like.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub effect block data number table row index when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub effect block data is completed, and the sub effect block data number table row index changes to the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the different sub effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the variation effect-specific sub effect block data number table is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not exceed the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data number table row element number (result of step S 7014 is “NO”), the next sub rendering block data is processed.

  FIG. 341 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the sub-attribution block data control update process by variation pattern of this embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update processing for each variation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data and sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the variation effect sub-effect block data number table Is a process for executing the next variation pattern-based sub rendering block data when the execution of all the scheduler data in the above is completed. The variation pattern-based sub-effect block data control updating process is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data.

  First, scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data number table from the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table using the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table row and column index (Step S7021). Thereby, sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to advance notice) constituting the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data number table is specified and defined as sub-effect block data It is determined whether the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is under execution (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control updating process is ended.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all schedulers of sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data and sub-effect block data corresponding to a notice) defined by the sub-effect block data by variation pattern. If the process is completed (the result at step S7022 is "NO"), the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data combination number table column index is incremented, and whether the next column data is the end data ("DATA_END") or not Is determined (step S7023). If it is the end data (the result in step S7023 is "YES"), since the series of effects has been completed, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control updating process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (the result of step S7023 is “NO”), scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub-effect block data by variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. Then, the variation pattern-based sub effect data block control scheduler activation process is executed (step S7024).

  As described in FIG. 336A, FIG. 336B, and FIG. 337, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution times of the respective block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, if the same variation pattern is obtained by blocking, the number of times the scheduler is defined in the production block and the production block is always the same regardless of the combination of production and the appearance of the production. Complexity can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing effect control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub effect schedulers, it is possible to cooperate the operations of various effect devices, and perform various effects without discomfort can do. In addition, because scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be independently developed and checked for operation in rendering device units and block data units. Can improve the development efficiency.

  FIG. 342 is a view for explaining the procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance effect of the variable display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and (A) shows the timing for executing the basic effect and the advance effect and the related The execution time of the notice effect, (B) shows the configuration of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. The sub effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub effect block data and notice sub effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. In FIG. 342 (B), a combination of two types of sub-effect block data, background block data and notice block data, is used, but the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 342, the sub pattern block data classified by fluctuation pattern constituting fluctuation display of fluctuation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal fluctuation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” It is composed of a lost stop The variation pattern classified sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation to the stop of the left symbol and the right symbol. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol, and normal short reach is executed. The sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the variation display result is confirmed as lost, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 342 (A), the sub-effect block data related to the background and the sub-effect block data related to the background and the sub-effect block data related to the background stop notice are displayed in the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern. Block data is defined. Further, in the sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK”, sub rendering block data relating to cut-in notice and group preview and sub rendering block data relating to the background are defined. Further, in the sub effect block “SCH02_BLK”, the sub effect block data related to the background is defined without defining the notice effect sub effect block data. In the figure, the execution of the advance notice effect is not overlapped, but a plurality of advance notice block data may be defined and executed so as to overlap a plurality of advance notice effects. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 342 are as described above.

  Hereinafter, the effect control by each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 342 (B), two types of sub rendering block data in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" will be described.

  In the sub effect scheduler data related to the background, the normal variation 12-second background sub effect block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12 seconds background sub-effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12 seconds background are defined. Since the normal variation 12 seconds background sub-effect block data is scheduler data relating to the background, the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is obtained. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” ends.

  The function "NOP" and the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the BTN logo combination drop notice sub-effect block data, and the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the advance notice. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal rendering scheduler, and is defined to perform sub-rendering in accordance with the liquid crystal rendering. As step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. The BTN logo combination falling notice sub-representation block data defines a sub-representation scheduler number and sub-representation scheduler data related to the BTN logo combination falling notice. The BTN logo combination falling advance notice sub effect block data has the same presentation time as the BTN logo combination falling advance liquid crystal effect block data. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data defines a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice. The symbol stop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub effect block data.

  By executing the above sub rendering block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering block data, scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub rendering block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering It will be.

  At this time, from the start of fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal rendering block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal rendering block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal preview rendering from the end of the liquid crystal rendering block data corresponding to each liquid crystal preview rendering Function until the start of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal notice effect (design stop notice) until the execution of the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” by the variation pattern is finished. “NOP” is executed and waits for a specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub rendering scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal rendering block data in the variation pattern-based scheduler block by the function "NOP", the scheduler etc. is sequentially scheduled by the program etc. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effects of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. In addition, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data may be omitted.

  The execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect device such as the lamp, sound, and accessory is defined for each notice effect. Thereby, since the time from the start of the control based on the sub effect block data to the execution of each notice effect is uniquely determined, the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

  Further, the time information at the time of execution of the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is managed not by the start of variation but by a relative value from the start of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data execution. Thus, when the same variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data has a presentation start time from the start of the variation for each variation pattern. Although different from that, since the time value is relatively managed in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data, it can be processed without any problem. In the case of the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data, it is similarly managed by the relative value from the start of execution of the variation pattern classified liquid crystal attraction block data, and similarly in the case of variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data It is managed by a relative value from the start of data execution.

  Next, the variation pattern-basis sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" will be described. The variation pattern-based sub rendering block data "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub rendering block data are executed in parallel.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data related to the background, normal short reach background sub rendering block data is defined. In the normal short reach background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. The normal short reach background sub rendering block data is scheduler data relating to the background, so it has the same rendering time as the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is completed.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data related to the preview, a function "NOP", a cut-in preview sub rendering block data, and a group preview sub rendering block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute the sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. The cut-in advance notice sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in advance notice. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. As the group advance sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the group advance are defined. The group notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the group announcement liquid crystal effect block data. The sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

  By executing the above sub rendering block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering block data, scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub rendering block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering It will be.

  In addition, in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”, the same as the variation pattern classified sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”, but the number of the sub effect block data sequence is the same. no problem.

  Finally, in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK", since the effect related to the advance notice is not performed, only the lost stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the user stop background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the background of normal fluctuation 12 seconds are defined. Since the lost stop background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” is obtained. Therefore, the process is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” ends.

  FIG. 343 is a view for explaining the relationship between variation pattern-based liquid crystal effect block data and variation pattern-based liquid crystal symbol block data according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal rendering block data by variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data by variation pattern are different only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub rendering block data Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the sub effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described in FIG. 314B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 344 is a diagram showing an image in which a drawing data file is created in units of step-up effects (step-up 1 effect to 4 effects) using the video composition / motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. is there.

  The drawing data file is created in step-up effect units, and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 344, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in the present embodiment on a step-up rendering unit basis.

  The reason that the drawing data file is not created in a one-on-one relationship with the liquid crystal preview effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notice If it is feasible, it is necessary to change the drawing data file for 4 lines. Considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data file is created with a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to combine and realize the notice.

  FIG. 345 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, in the present embodiment, four types of step-up notices can be executed, but (A) and (B) show step-up notices 1 and 2. In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effects and step-up 4 effects are executed at a predetermined timing.

  The step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data will be described. First, it is determined which step-up notice of step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of fluctuation. The If the lottery result value of the step-up advance notice is not selected, the step-up advance notice is not executed since the step-up advance notice liquid crystal effect block data is not executed, so the step-up advance notice is not executed and the drawing on the liquid crystal display device is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-up notice 2 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

  In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, and thus the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is terminated.

  In addition, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02, and after waiting for the time designated by the parameter, step-up 2 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2: Since the data to be executed next is “DATA_END” after the completion of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data execution, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02 is ended.

  As described above, a plurality of variations of a single preview can be realized by combining the presentation scheduler data of the preview in the minimum configuration unit.

  Next, the step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 345 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured in a one-to-one correspondence with the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data and the block configuration and execution time. Thereby, it becomes possible to synchronize dynamically with all effect apparatuses also with respect to the combination of a fluctuation pattern and a lottery result of a notice, and an effect with a sense of unity can be realized.

  The step-up notice sub rendering block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the function executed by the sub rendering scheduler data. Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO". Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the basic effect and the notice effect defined at a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling the various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time. The effects can be synchronized. Furthermore, when execution of the scheduler data is started, thereafter, a predetermined operation is performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, simply by executing the corresponding block data based on the information specifying the effect content such as the variation pattern, the scheduler data defined hierarchically is automatically acquired, and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and the schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, thereby dramatically improving the development efficiency. Can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even when the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic device included in the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is updated), a common schedule can be obtained by installing the scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to use software assets related to the presentation control of the gaming machine for a long time.

  Note that the scheduler in the present embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler activated when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use, and the memory use area may be released. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be opened when a predetermined time has elapsed after execution of the schedule data is completed, or may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state.

[19. Production control by liquid crystal production scheduler data]
Next, details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is constituted by a combination of functions for controlling the effect object, similarly to the sub effect block data. In the sub effect block data, the output of sound, the lighting of the lamp, the operation of the drive device, and the like are controlled, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. Scheduler function for liquid crystal effects]
First, functions (scheduler functions for liquid crystal rendering) that constitute liquid crystal rendering scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler function is a command (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data that composes the liquid crystal rendering block data described above, and the command is embedded in the sound source built-in VDP 1540a by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function. Send and execute the effect. Further, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect, it is possible to change the attributes (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for liquid crystal effects]
FIG. 346 is a diagram illustrating an example of a liquid crystal rendering scheduler function of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, an outline of each liquid crystal rendering scheduler function will be described.

  Each liquid crystal rendering scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub scheduler setting.

  First, the functions belonging to the group of coordinate setting will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is, for example, for specifying the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and setting the liquid crystal display object. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” designate the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position to set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" designates the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" designates the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY” designates the X axis and Y axis coordinate positions, and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

  Next, a group to which a function for performing scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of a display area to be specified to perform enlargement or reduction when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on a CGROM, or converting a unit of coordinates. It is to By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values, and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” designates the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” specifies the Z-axis value to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" designates X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values, and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when rotating and displaying a liquid crystal display object will be described. It is not necessary to store a plurality of liquid crystal display objects after rotation by storing only the liquid crystal display object as a reference in the CGROM and designating an angle to display, thereby suppressing an increase in storage capacity. it can.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the group of rotation angle settings. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. In addition, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” rotates the liquid crystal display object by designating an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value.

  Subsequently, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is α setting processing, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not pass the background color at all.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME” is a frame setting process, and more specifically, sets a frame value which is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during the animation processing.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX” sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying a liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the front on the screen or moved to the back side. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so as to be drawn on the back surface.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group in order to set information on the effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described later in detail, is information incorporated in control information for performing drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch effect contents , To perform another rendition. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW” sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM or the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” sets frame rendering SW information to the entire liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” sets SW information defining special control information described later in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling a sub-scheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a sub-scheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, the processing can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD production]
Heretofore, an example of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Subsequently, parameters specified at the time of execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function will be described by way of an example. FIGS. 347 and 348 are diagrams showing examples of parameters for the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function in the present embodiment.

  The parameters of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function are managed for each group in the same manner as the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function. The group of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect and the group of parameters are different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub effect scheduler function, and the like.

  The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE_SIZE", "AAD_AD" "Etc. are included. Each parameter will be described below.

  “AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for designating a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for specifying an α value, which is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and is 8 bits in length. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter for specifying the number of frames to be skipped in liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SCALE” is a parameter for designating a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter for specifying the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter for specifying the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter for designating the size of the liquid crystal display object in XY 2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the production SW includes “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM”, and the like.

  “AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of registered effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter for designating the number of the presentation SW, and designates two 16-bit lengths. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registrations of kick effects SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numeric values. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registration of the frame effect SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing a frame rendering SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters of the footage setting includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT” and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter for specifying the index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of symbol replacement related parameters includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. “AAD_ZUGARA” is a parameter for designating a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter groups of the sub rendering scheduler function include “AAD_SUBENTRY”, “AAD_SUB”, and the like. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of sub-scheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter for designating a sub-scheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Conventionally, effect control in a game machine has been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various effect devices, a program for linking a plurality of effect devices, and the like. These programs are described by program code representing the operation contents and control procedure of the rendering device for each content of the notice in addition to the command related to the variation pattern, and are created by a highly skilled programmer. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data are called up in a frame where effects are executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, symbol, advance notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of gaming machines, it has been required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it has been necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, a high level of skill is required for each programmer and the development man-hours increase, making it difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of man-hours required for the test for the operation check and the quality improvement of the gaming machine also increases.

  Then, in order to solve the above-mentioned subject, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is possible to realize the effects to be executed in cooperation with liquid crystal drawing (image display) by program code. Instead, the program data for the gaming machine is output by a tool for creating a liquid crystal rendering effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby realizing a reduction in development period and an improvement in quality.

  Specifically, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal rendering effect is used by assigning images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in time series. In this tool, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and an effect common block is created by grouping effect blocks for each state such as a variation pattern or jackpot, By combining a plurality of effect common blocks, a series of effect drawing such as a variation pattern and a big hit is realized.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects relating to lottery, effect and symbol substitution, and interactive effects to external input by the player occur, so only simply execute the combined effect common block as it is Then, it is impossible to realize all the productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when creating the effect common block with the above-described tool, the effect switch (effect SW for calling a program for executing effects at a predetermined timing or executing predetermined control) ) Can be set (built in). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM, and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, callback always occurs regardless of “ON” and “OFF” of the effect SW. Further, when the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the predefined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The rendering SW is set to each of the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal rendering common block, the liquid crystal rendering block, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, each display target in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, a still image, and a moving image.

  When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing and detects the incorporated effect SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected effect SW (callback) To do). Based on the information processed by the program function that is called back, a display list command can be created, and effect display ON / OFF and effect replacement can be realized. In the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lamp lighting, action of an accessory, etc.). In addition, processing such as setting of information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting of a flag or updating of data of a predetermined area, is also possible. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, replacement of effects and symbols, and interactive effects for external input by the player. .

  The program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal effect called by callback and replacement of the effect is incorporated in advance in the peripheral control unit 1530 and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, by setting a presentation SW so that a designer or plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge sets a presentation element such as an image or a video at the time of presentation design, and calls a predefined program function, Complex rendering specifications can be realized. In addition, using the production creation tool, production blocks (liquid crystal production scheduler data) can be created in production units, and the development period can be greatly reduced. In addition, production contents can be created based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be greatly reduced.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Next, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect switch in the present embodiment. The presentation SW is uniquely identified by the presentation SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the presentation, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

  The effect SW group ID, the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW attribute, the effect SW start command address, the effect replacement information table address and the like are associated with the effect SW number.

  The effect SW group is a set of effects SW grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group, and defines which effect SW group belongs to. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group. By specifying the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF, and the effects belonging to the effect SW group are collectively displayed. It can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

  FIG. 350 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of this embodiment. Further, as described above, the effect SW includes active and passive, and the effect SW group is configured of one or more active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, it includes the leading group number of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group and the number of active effect SWs, and the number of the leading group number of the passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SW.

  The presentation SW attribute is information indicating an attribute of the presentation SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal presentation SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for specifying whether to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information for specifying whether or not to call a callback function for effect replacement at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. Special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function at the time of evaluation of the presentation SW. The passive / active information indicates a method of evaluating the effect SW. The effect SW is statically evaluated in the passive state, and the effect SW is dynamically evaluated in the active state.

  The effect SW start command address is an address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW activation command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW activation command table. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 351 exemplifies the presentation SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and the presentation SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of data for the number of commands and the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described using a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 352 is a diagram illustrating an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, where (A) shows a stage where a step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) shows a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 352A, the step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each step, the development effect to the next step is executed. . When the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed. When the step-up notice does not develop, the step-up notice ends.

  Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of step-up notice effect, an effect that the display screen is filled with black ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the black color and the fill pattern. For example, when the color of black is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow colors. In addition, as the pattern of filling, the degree of expectation is higher as the number of positions where filling starts is higher, and the degree of expectation may be changed at the position where filling starts. For example, when the filling is started from only one lower left, the expectation is low, and when the filling is started from two places, lower left and upper left, the filling is started from three places at lower left, upper left, and upper right The expectation is higher in order, and the expectation is highest when the filling is started from the four corners.

  Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each step, the development effect to the next step-up notice is executed. Regardless of whether or not the development effect is actually developed to the next stage, the effect is executed in a common manner until the middle in order to increase the player's expectation. In the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the screen is filled with a combination of the color of the ink and the filling pattern determined by lottery for the liquid crystal display screen. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (becomes thinner) and characters for displaying in step-up notice 2 appear. In the case of developing into the step-up notice 2, the ink is discharged as it is and the display of characters becomes dark, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the character display is not darkened and the ink is drawn and the character is not displayed.

  In step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to the degree of expectation are displayed. As for the character pattern, the degree of expectation increases in the order of “change”, “punishment”, “feeling”, “continuation”, and “one-shot killing”. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 2, first, with the characters displayed, the screen is filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the black color and the fill variation in the step-up notice 1. After that, when the screen is completely filled with ink, it shifts to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink gradually fades out before the screen is completely filled with the ink, and finally the ink completely slips off, and the displayed character disappears. It will end up.

  In step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black in step-up notice 2, and an effect that the ink is gradually removed from this state is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern of the ink expulsion. For example, when ink is applied only from the lower left, the expectation is low, and when ink is applied from the lower left and the upper left, the ink is applied from the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The degree of expectation increases in the order of going, and the degree of expectation becomes highest when ink is drawn from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of brushing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink is removed, the development effect is successful and the process proceeds to step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, the development effect has failed.

  The step-up notice 4 is the final step of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the contents (pattern) and color of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has high expectation in the order of "match", "good chance", "development", "heat fight", "extensive heat", "happiness". In addition, the color of letters is expected to be high in the order of black, white, red and rainbow. In the effect mode of step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

  Subsequently, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the effect SW will be described. FIGS. 353 to 355 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW according to this embodiment. FIG. 353 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the production contents and the production SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 354 (A) shows step-up notice 1 for executing step-up notice 1 of painting with black ink from four directions of the screen 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and drawing image, (B) shows red black from the upper right and lower left of the screen. The step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 to fill in are shown. FIG. 355 is a view showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

  FIG. 353 shows all the effects produced in step-up notice 1 and is divided into each drawing (black drawing lower left, black drawing upper left, black drawing lower right, black drawing upper right, character failure, character success), The names of the presentation SW and the contents of the presentation are described in correspondence with each division. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects with 4 effects each for the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and 10 effects with 5 effects each for the character failure and character success drawing categories, totaling 26 effects. It has become. In addition, the effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing segment is always one, and only one of the drawing segments “character failure” and “character success” is performed. Therefore, the maximum effects performed simultaneously in step-up notice 1 The number of renderings is 5 effects, including the drawing category “lower left”, the drawing category “upper left”, the drawing category “lower right”, the drawing category “upper right” and the drawing category “character failure” or the drawing category “character success”.

  Also, according to the notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1, the method of determining the effect of each drawing section will be specifically described. First, a lottery for step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the contents of effects relating to the drawing of ink. Specifically, the effect contents relating to the ink drawing include the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing section “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right”, and the color of the ink appearing from the appearance position of the selected ink. Become. In addition, it becomes either the drawing division "character failure" or the drawing division "character success" and the contents of the character displayed at this time.

  Next, step-up notice 1 configuration of liquid crystal effect scheduler data and step-up notice 1 liquid-crystal effect scheduler data are executed without any control and step-up notice 1 drawing image will be described using FIG. 354 (A). . As described above, the total number of effects of the step-up notice 1 is 26 effects in total, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes one for each drawing category of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only presentation data of is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed at the same time, as shown in the drawing of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. In addition, black ink spreads simultaneously from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen, and the characters “change” are displayed lightly in the drawing division “character failure” and the drawing division “character success”, and then the drawing division “character” In the case of failure, the character of "change" is erased, and at the same time, in the drawing division "character success", the character of "change" is clearly displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 354 (B), the drawing division “lower left” is “red”, the drawing division “upper left” is “none”, the drawing division “lower right” is “none”, and drawing is performed according to the lottery result of step-up notice 1. The command of division "upper right" is "red", drawing division "character failure" is "improvement", and drawing division "character success" is "none" is issued. As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left", and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and the character "Iki" is lightly displayed in the drawing section "character failure", and then , The character of "imitation" is deleted in the drawing division "character failure".

  At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the effect corresponding to the content of each issued lottery command is set to ON. Specifically, step up notice 1 drawing command drawing division “lower left” is set to “red” while “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, and step up notice 1 drawing command drawing division “upper right” is to “red” “LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED” is set to ON, and “LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA” is set to ON with respect to the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “letter failure is compelling”. On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower right” is “none”, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “character success” is “none”. Since the effect is not performed in the command of “,” neither effect SW is set to ON but is set to OFF.

  By the above, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left" out of all the effects of the step-up notice 1, and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and "improvement" in the drawing section "character failure" The effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON corresponding to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

  Then, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data of FIG. 354 (A) while referring to FIG. 355, for performing an effect according to the lottery result of step-up notice 1 of FIG. 355 (B) A mechanism for directing the production will be described.

  FIG. 355 is a diagram for explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing category in the present embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data replaced with the master data. More specifically, referring to the lower left ink effect replacement group in FIG. 355, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. And the corresponding effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”. On the other hand, the presentation SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the presentation SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the animation where white black spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the animation It becomes the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI” corresponding to the index SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the ink of the rainbow spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left black rendering replacement table. In addition, the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black black spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the lower left black rendering replacement table.

  The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command in order to draw effects, and is defined in step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data Triggered (detected) by the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”, a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

  In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left ink effect replacement table is referred to, all the effect SW registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. To do. In this embodiment, since the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section "lower left" is "red" and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, "from the lower left" corresponding to the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" The video number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

  The replacement program function called by the callback passes the specified moving image number on the red black CGROM from the lower left specified to the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 is a CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black black appears from the lower left defined in the step up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above movie number, the display list command is created using a movie number on the CGROM corresponding to a movie in which red black appears from the lower left handed from the replacement program function. create.

  The feature of replacement of effects by callback in the present embodiment is a low-level control structure (in the present embodiment, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, a data structure that is easy to change and is suitable for tooling) to a high-level control structure (this embodiment) By calling a program function for replacement, a program function that is unsuitable for modification but capable of executing complex processing), it is possible to separate the detection of replacement timing and replacement control by using a callback. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, which is a data structure, is used to realize complex processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for calling back (the on / off setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment), the processing is always executed by the callback. The same control as the effect control of the present embodiment is not executed by callback, but a structure for performing complex control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler is executed on the liquid crystal if drawing scheduler execution unit side. When production control is realized by analyzing and executing data, the complexity of the program code processed on the liquid crystal if drawing scheduler execution unit side is increased, and when new functions are added or functions are changed The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data needs to be changed. In this case, it is always necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the occurrence of a failure due to the change of control but also the function that operated normally before the change is affected and a new failure occurs. There is a risk of

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW), the callback is always executed by the callback, and a plurality of the callbacks executed by the callback are executed. Whether or not execution is possible and the processing contents are determined in the callback function. By creating a callback function that corresponds to a single function, even if a new function is added or a function is changed, there is no need to change the LCD effect scheduler data structure, and a call corresponding to a new function. It can be realized by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, the influence range due to the change or addition of the function remains in the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting the other callback functions and causing the failure is reduced. Also, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the LCD effect scheduler data is executed centrally with a single large program, the execution analysis is performed with a plurality of callback functions and the LCD effect scheduler data for realizing each function. However, the program structure and configuration can be further simplified.

  In the present embodiment, specialization has been made to replacement of effects, but the mechanism of control by callback in this embodiment is not only replacement of effects but also replacement of symbols, control of display or non-display of effects, and drawing target The present invention is also applicable to conversion of drawing data and execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices and conversion of scheduler data.

  Here, the purpose of defining the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black black spreads from the lower left of the master data in both step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the lower left rendering replacement table explain. If you do not define the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master's presentation SW in the presentation replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master presentation SW must be the liquid crystal presentation scheduler Only the data exists, and the effect SW for replacement corresponding to the master and the index number on the CGROM corresponding only exist in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, about several thousand of the effect replacement table and the effect SW are defined. In a situation where changes in gaming specifications and addition of gaming specifications occur frequently between planning and development of gaming machines and being put into the market, consistency between index numbers of moving images (images) on CGROM and presentation SW It is extremely difficult to maintain

  In the relation between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, an index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be incorrectly defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement. It may happen that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the number of data of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and replacement is performed with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. . Since the degree of expectation is set for each production, it is possible that an effect dedicated to big hits that does not appear due to fluctuations in outliers may appear, which is a fatal problem for a gaming machine. As in this embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW, the consistency check can be realized by comparing the total number of effects with the replacement table. Become. Further, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data operates without any problem even if any data in the replacement table is defined. In this embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the master's CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used, and it is always replaced Display list commands are created using the index numbers on the master's CGROM defined in the table, and effects are drawn.

  In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the ink is gradually erased from a part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters appear when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink is completely erased without displaying the characters, and the step-up notice ends. The effect of gradually removing black from the top of the display area is executed regardless of success or failure, so that 4 types of effect SW flags for 4 types of drawing patterns that gradually remove black per vertex (Layer) is defined. Also, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

  The upper left black replacement group other than the lower left black replacement group, the lower right black replacement group, the upper right black replacement group, the letter failure effect replacement group, the letter success effect replacement group are the same as the configuration and control method. It is.

  In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed, an effect SW flag (layer) corresponding to the mode may be defined for the animation of the displayed character, or one kind of effect SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the parameter animation type may be set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are created by individually defining the rendering effect pattern according to the appearance position of the black ink or the character content and setting the rendering SW flag corresponding to the rendering to be performed to ON. It is possible to execute or perform a combined effect. Since switching of effects and combinations are only switching the setting of the effect SW flag, it is possible to set parameters using tools, such as a planner who configures effects without requiring new techniques such as creating a program. Various variations of production can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize several tens of types of drawing patterns simply by combining four types of drawing patterns according to the appearance position of the black and two types of display patterns as a result of the development effect. This makes it possible to minimize the type of program to be developed, improve the development efficiency of the presentation control program of the gaming machine, and streamline the inspection of the developed presentation control program, thus improving the quality. Can do.

[20-3. Outline of control based on presentation switch]
Subsequently, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 356 is a diagram for explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and particularly shows the evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In this embodiment, first, upon receiving a main command (main control command) that triggers rendering start from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues an internal control to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issuance command is a command for executing a preliminary lottery or performing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

  The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data that matches the received command is registered in the command sequence of the effect SW determination data. If there is data that matches, the peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command sequence. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530 c is set to ON.

  The presentation SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is a presentation SW determination command sequence for turning on the presentation SW. The effect SW determination command sequence is not a fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, a main control command value and a sub internal command value, or combine peripheral control internal issue command values and peripheral control internal command values. . For example, the variation start designation command value and the probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background designation command of the peripheral control internally issued command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character preview are defined side by side. It has become possible.

  By defining a plurality of commands side by side, for example, when the mini characters displayed in different effects are different depending on the background even if they are the same mini character preview, the background command value is determined, and after the background is identified, the mini character command value is determined. Although it is possible to specify the effect of the mini character corresponding to the background for the first time, a plurality of determinations may be required for several minutes of the command. On the other hand, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice as in this embodiment, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. There is no need to make multiple determinations, and an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands can be specified in the same way as an effect defined by a single command. Further, since a plurality of effects SW can be defined for the same command value, a plurality of effects SW can be activated simultaneously with a single command value.

  The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number and the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs by a combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

  From the above, as shown in FIG. 356, when the command “0x103001” is received, “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” of the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data, so the effect SW flag stored in the RAM Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

  As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIG. 353 to FIG. 355, a predetermined process is called up at the time of execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding advance notice effect. It is.

  In the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. Hereinafter, an example of these functions will be described. FIG. 357 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function has an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

  The LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON, from the steady program or the called back program. The LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the presentation SW not from the presentation SW activation by a command but from a steady program or a called back program.

  LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the presentation SW from a steady program or a called back program. Further, when the “all reset” attribute is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW based on the “reset target effect SW group ID” of the “effect SW information table” corresponding to the effect SW number. Set all the presentation SWs belonging to the group to OFF.

  The LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of the target rendering SW from a steady program or a called back program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function for obtaining the frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from the steady program or the callback program.

[20-4. Example of production switch implementation]
Subsequently, an implementation example of control using a presentation switch will be described. FIG. 358 to FIG. 363 are diagrams showing a part of program code for executing control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each drawing is described in C language.

  As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In addition, since presentation SW is set to all the presentation blocks, the process based on presentation SW is always called back at the time of execution of a presentation block. The callback is executed even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, and it is determined in the callback function that the specific process is not performed, and the callback function is ended.

  FIG. 358 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code defining the effect SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of the effect SW control information (C) is a figure which shows an example of production SW group.

  The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A). The effect SW group ID, the reset target effect SW group ID, the effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), and the effect SW It includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

  The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped according to functions such as an effect SW for performing the same (same type) notice effect, an effect SW for holding display, or an effect SW for notification. ing. The effect SW group ID is expressed by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

  The reset effect SW group ID is identification information for designating an effect SW group in which the effect SW is set to OFF when “effect SW all reset” is designated in “attrib bit assignment” to be described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively designate effect SWs for which processing is to be canceled (reset) simultaneously at the time of switching of the effect SW or the like. Similar to the effect SW group ID, the effect SW group ID to be reset is expressed by bits, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

  The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive / active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 358 (B), and the contents will be described below.

  The passive (PASSIVE) active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the presentation SW, and becomes “PASSIVE” when the bit is “0” and “ACTIVE” when the bit is “1”. In passive, even when the command to activate the rendering SW is received multiple times during the period in which the rendering SW is defined, the rendering effect corresponding to the rendering SW is performed only once, and in the active, the rendering is performed in the period in which the rendering SW is defined When the command for activating the SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect is received. Active is used, for example, when displaying a rendering effect corresponding to button pressing when the button is pressed multiple times within the button valid period.

  Special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function at the time of evaluation of the presentation SW. When the bit is set to “1”, the user side callback function is called instead of the system side callback function.

  The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to “1”, a callback function for replacement defined in advance is called up at the time of evaluation SW evaluation defined for each display object, still image, and moving image in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Be

  The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for specifying whether to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to “1”, the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the “reset target effect SW group ID” is set to OFF during the effect SW evaluation.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 358 (A). As for the effect SW command information address, defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of effect SW evaluation. The command to be output is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and control and effect of a new effect SW are executed by the output command.

  The production SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when “1” is set in the replacement information bit of the presentation SW control information (when “replacement is specified” is specified) Is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of related effect SWs are set, they are managed as effect groups. The effect group includes the effect SW group ID, the active effect SW top ID, the number of active effect SW, the passive effect SW top ID, and the number of passive effect SW.

  The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the active effects SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effects SW is the number of active effects SW arranged from the effects SW corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW top ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the top of the passive effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the passive effect SW leading ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the reset target effect SW group ID, when “reproduction SW all reset” is designated by “attrib bit assignment”, the continuous belonging to the effect SW group ID. It becomes possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effect SWs and the plurality of continuous active effect SWs to OFF.

  FIG. 359 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an effect SW number corresponding to an effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 359, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to using the effect SW number as an index.

  By defining the presentation SW numbers in an enumerated manner as described above, when setting or referring to the presentation SW numbers in the program, it is not necessary to handle them directly as numerical values, and the readability of the program can be improved.

  Next, the presentation SW flag and presentation SW information table will be described. FIG. 360 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data defining the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table according to the present embodiment, where (A) shows the effect SW flag and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

  The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON / OFF) the process based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, “1” (ON) is set, and when not executed, “0” (OFF) is set.

  The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 358 (A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read when the program is executed and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. Further, the presentation SW information table is stored in an array having the presentation SW number as an index as in the presentation SW flag, and data corresponding to all the presentation SW is stored.

  Subsequently, a presentation SW replacement table information and a presentation SW replacement table for performing presentation replacement will be described. The presentation SW replacement table information is included in the presentation SW information table as shown in FIG. 358 (A). FIG. 361 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW replacement table information included in the effect SW information table of this embodiment and the program data defining the effect SW replacement table, where (A) is the effect SW replacement table information and (B ) Shows an effect SW replacement table.

  FIG. 361 (A) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table information, the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data are stored. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

  The presentation SW master data is presentation SW data defined in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, and corresponds to the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1” when the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data, and there is, for example, a case where the color of black is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) or the like, and the material information is replaced with corresponding replacement data by evaluating the presentation SW.

  FIG. 361 (B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of material numbers defined in the replacement table are defined. In this embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After the definition of the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

  As a specific replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated with reference to the effect SW replacement table information. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued by the result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same line of the effect SW replacement table is specified using the number of lines of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. In the effect replacement data, the material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponding to the line of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is a material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number for specifying a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and videos will be described. By dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of regions (layers, layers) and drawing the layer, it is possible to use the display result in a versatile manner. For example, by separating the background layer, even if the character to be displayed is changed, it can be drawn in a common manner.

  In this embodiment, a table (layer information table) for storing layer information is individually stored and managed, so that even if some layers are changed, other layers are not affected. Can.

  FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background). For). The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal layer table is executed based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. FIG. 363 is a diagram showing an example of the program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment. (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (first notice 1) and (B) shows the layer information table (notice). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables of the first half 1 and the second half 2 determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, as in the background layer information table.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 362 (A), layer information tables for background, symbol display, for the first half notice, for big hit effect, for accessory operation, for hold display, etc. are defined.

  FIG. 362 (B) shows a layer information table for background. In the effect in this embodiment, a sea background, a mountain background, and a river background are defined. Middle background, high background, middle background) are also defined. Furthermore, a variation such as changing a part of the background color can be added by the effect SW.

  FIG. 363 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which roulette notice, blackout notice, window notice are defined, and a notice clear command is also defined. FIG. 363 (B) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which step-up notice, button mini-character notice, and conversation notice are defined. As in the case of the first notice 1, the layer table for clearing the notice. Is also defined. The layer table for clearing notices is used to finish the drawing of notices executed in the layer table of each notice defined in the layer information table of each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and “effect SW all reset” is defined in “attrib bit assign”. Then, when the rendering SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, the rendering SW for all the notices belonging to the rendering SW group ID defined in the resetting target rendering SW group ID is set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the rendering SW Ends and disappears. It should be noted that the layer table for clearing the notice is empty data since no effect is performed.

  At the end of the list storing the layer table and the area allocated to the table storing the layer information, the termination determination record is stored, and when the termination determination record is detected, it is determined that the data reading is completed. It becomes possible to do. This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (the number of records) without setting the number of elements in advance for each list or table.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the notice effect by the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Effect Layer Table / Liquid Crystal Effect Block Data]
FIG. 364 is a view showing an example of the liquid crystal layer table and the program data defining the liquid crystal rendering common block in the present embodiment, (A) is a liquid crystal layer table of step-up notice effect, Shows the configuration of

  As shown in FIG. 364 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks corresponding to the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks are It is defined in combination with the total number of drawing frames and the rendering SW. In the present embodiment, a total drawing frame number (580), the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. A callback is executed based on the rendering SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and it is determined whether to execute the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” based on the information of the rendering SW “LCDSW_STEPUP” in the callback function.

  The liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined in the order of effect SW, total number of frames drawn, loop start frame position, playback time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 364 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal rendering blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. A terminal (terminal) is set after the step-up notice 4 and is configured to be able to cope with the increase / decrease of the number of steps by adding / removing the liquid crystal rendering block. For example, when the step-up notice 5 is added, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

  The effect SW controls whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal effect block can be executed based on the set value, similarly to the effect SW defined in the layer table. The total number of drawn frames defines the total number of effect frames of the liquid crystal effect block. Describing by using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the reproduction of the liquid-crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is performed by (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame is to be restored after the end of the reproduction of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the first row.

  The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total reproduction time, the loop start frame position and the reproduction time is that the reproduction time is the reproduction time of the liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". When loop playback is performed from the beginning or midway, the number of frames to be looped is added to the playback time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total playback time. Since the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” is (150) frames, the playback is performed in the total playback time if the latter 50 frames are looped twice after the completion of the playback of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” This can be realized by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50 × 2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. An effect of performing fluctuation fluctuation without determining a symbol during a pseudo-continuous production can be realized by using a loop playback function.

  Moreover, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of reproduction despite the total reproduction time and the reproduction time of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment being the same is that something is wrong The drawing is not updated when the next effect common block is not executed, and the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total reproduction time is exceeded in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping.

  The control by the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” in the case of executing effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 in this embodiment is performed by performing a lottery for notice related to effects in peripheral control board 1530 and then step up A peripheral control internal command, a step-up notice 1 command, a step-up notice 2 command and a step-up notice 3 command related to the notice effect are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

  After setting the effect SW, the callback is executed based on all the effect SWs defined in the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and the callback function is called. In the called back function, it is determined whether each effect SW is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD production common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON, so the LCD production blocks “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_STEPUP_SUPP” On the other hand, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” is set to OFF, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4” is not executed. As described above, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal rendering blocks in the liquid crystal rendering common block and control whether or not the liquid crystal rendering block is to be executed using the rendering SW. In addition, the display / non-display of each effect can be switched.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block at each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 365 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal effect blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

  As the contents of the liquid crystal rendering block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal rendering block is defined. The function used in the liquid crystal rendering block which is the number of execution frames, the function or the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is the two types of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. “LCD_NOP” is a function for weighting by the number of execution frames, and “LCD_NULL” is a function indicating the end of the liquid crystal rendering block.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal rendering block will be specifically described. To explain with reference to the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, the top (3) indicates that “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, since “LCD_NOP” in which the number of execution frames (120) is designated is given, the process waits for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal rendering block. (120) After waiting for the frame, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). Thereafter, “LCD_NULL” in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is ended.

  As described in FIG. 352, at the end of step-up notice at each step of step-up notice, realized by using the weight of “LCD_NOP” to realize the execution of the development effect to the next step-up notice. doing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” does not wait and starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1”. The liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the weight by "LCD_NOP", and after performing the weight for (120) frames, by starting the execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" is obtained. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts to execute when a frame has elapsed since the start of the execution (120). Thereby, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next step.

  In addition, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in chronological order in the liquid crystal rendering block, and when the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is defined continuously, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames To execute the liquid crystal effect scheduler data of the next line.

  In the effect scheduler data of step-up notice 2, after the total number of functions is defined, function NOP for waiting while executing step-up notice effect 1, function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU 2 for executing step-up notice effect 2, Finally, a function LCD_NULL indicating the end of scheduler data is defined. The same applies to step-up notice 3 and step-up notice 4.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
As mentioned above, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data of the step-up notice rendering has been described. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting an operation of the effect button during the change of the pattern and operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Aspect of button mini character production]
FIG. 366 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the button mini character effect according to the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is executed when an execution lottery is performed at the time of receiving a main command or at the start of variation, and winning. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated during the button operation input reception period, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the button operation input reception period, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

  To explain further, when the player has won an execution lottery of the button mini character effect and 90 frames (f) have elapsed from the start of the change, the button mini character first half period becomes effective. The button mini character first half valid period is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) for prompting the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the button mini character first half valid period. When the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character period, the mini character is displayed. Specifically, although it will be described later, when the button is operated during the button mini character first half period, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

  When the button is operated during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character is displayed as in the first half of the button mini character first half validity period. In FIG. 308, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character effective period, but may be displayed in the same mode or when the button is operated during the first half effective period of the button mini character. The character may be displayed in a different manner as far as possible.

  When the button is operated in the second half of the button mini character effective period, the mini character is displayed in the same manner as the button mini character first half effective period. In FIG. 366, the character is displayed in a mode different from that when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period, but may be displayed in the same manner, or when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period. The character may be displayed in a different manner as far as possible.

[23-2. LCD Production Common Block]
FIG. 367 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to button mini character effects in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 367, the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” corresponding to the button mini character effect is the total number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the total number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal effect table. It is defined in pairs with the number and the presentation SW. In the present embodiment, the total number of drawn frames (180), the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawn frames (150), the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002”, first, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” is executed for (180) frames. After that, during (150) frame, the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” is ended.

  Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks of button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” in FIG. 368 are the same as the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. The presentation SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call a callback function to determine whether to execute the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active renderings in which the active attribute is defined in the rendering SW control information. It becomes SW. Therefore, the rendering effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the button is operated.

[23-3. Liquid crystal rendering block data]
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal rendering block data for executing button mini character rendering according to the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 369 are the same as those of the liquid crystal effect block data described above. First, in the first half of the process, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is executed, and weight is applied for 90 frames from the start of the change. . Subsequently, (90) frames are executed for liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the button mini character first half period, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is ended. In addition, in the second half of the effect, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” corresponding to the button mini character second half effective period is executed, and weight is performed for 30 frames from the start of fluctuation. Thereafter, (120) frames are executed for liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini character second half effective period, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is ended.

  As described above, since the production SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are active production SW, the production SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” and “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” are executed. If the command to be issued is issued a plurality of times, the rendering effects corresponding to the effects SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are executed as many times as is issued. Also, a callback is always generated for each frame by the presentation SW, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame after the button pressing control is finished and until the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is finished. By creating liquid crystal effect scheduler data for effect rendering during the button effective period and controlling it with the active effect SW, a control is performed in which the callback period is executed without determining the button effective period separately. Is possible. For example, it is possible to count the number of times of continuous strikes by continuously hitting the button, and to perform effects according to the number of times. In addition, the lamp can be turned on in response to the button operation by calling up sub rendering scheduler data including a function for controlling the lamp in the callback function. Furthermore, it is possible to execute the scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the button operation effective period is ended by calling the sub effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the accessory and performing the operation according to the number of button operations. In the procedure of returning the bonus to the initial position, for example, the effect block including a function of causing the bonus to return to the initial position is executed by causing the "LCD_NOP" to wait until the button operation valid period ends.

[24. Liquid crystal production scheduler for design]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing contents in accordance with the game state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be notified. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variably display game when predetermined conditions such as a gaming state are satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the fluctuation display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol, and reels in which identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are allocated to each row. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a manner corresponding to the gaming state, and each reel is defined for each manner. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

  The display of the identification symbol is updated every frame as in the case of the notice effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the rendering SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image for displaying the identification symbol and the index number on the CGROM is defined as master data . A reel number is defined for the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each gaming state or performance. For example, if the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, river background and sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, the left symbol on the river background is R3, and the middle symbol. Is R4, right symbol is R5, left symbol of mountain background is R6, middle symbol is R7, right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it becomes possible to correspond individually to the gaming state and effects, and it becomes possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

  Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of the identification symbol. Identification pattern is displayed in order of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 with reel arrangement and next to 0 is the design and identification symbol of the identification symbol when it is displayed back to 1 A reel index is defined that defines the total number and the display order of identification symbols. A plurality of reel indexes can also be defined.

  The tables for replacing the identification symbols include a reel number and a reel index number corresponding to the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, index numbers on a CGROM of a still image or a moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement are defined for each reel index.

  The replacement of the identification symbol is performed using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the replacement symbol table of the identification symbol. In the reel index replacement work number table, work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index are defined. Reel replacement work is displayed when the identification symbol can be recognized as if it were stopped or stopped by the player, such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo continuous change or the confirmation symbol number value of the identification symbol The identification symbol number value is stored in advance at the start of fluctuation by the peripheral control program in accordance with the contents of the effect.

  The identification of data for replacing the identification symbol will be described. When a callback is executed based on the effect switch for identification symbol replacement, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is in the call back function for identification symbol replacement. Based on the reel index replacement work number table, the target reel index replacement work number is specified. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement workpiece is taken out, and the reel index replacement workpiece number is corrected based on the number of identification symbols displayed in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is identified in the identification symbol replacement table, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image in the identified table is corrected. Identify using index replacement work number.

  In addition, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as in the case of the effect replacement, the index number on the master's CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used for the replacement of the identification symbol. A display list command is always created using an index number on the master's CGROM defined in the replacement table, and rendering contents are drawn.

  Furthermore, by carrying out replacement of the identification symbol every frame, even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the occurrence of noise or the like, it is possible to immediately return to a normal display. In addition, by setting the reels according to the gaming state, it is possible for the player to grasp the gaming state regardless of the contents of the identification symbol even when a failure occurs in replacement of the identification symbol due to an error. The decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

[25. Callback timing]
Next, the occurrence timing of the callback when the effect SW is detected will be described. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing division by the parameter delivered to the function in the callback function to be called back.

  FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of drawing divisions that can be determined within the callback function at the time of callback execution by the effect SW of this embodiment.

  As for “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A”, a callback occurs after “Liquid crystal A drawing starts” before “Liquid crystal A drawing start” and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A” starts. In addition, “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B” generates a callback before liquid crystal B drawing start, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B” generates a callback after liquid crystal B drawing start. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B become different liquid crystals, and it is possible to determine the completion of drawing before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, thereby drawing on the liquid crystal B triggered by the drawing completion of the liquid crystal A or ending the drawing of the liquid crystal B It becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A at the same time.

  In "LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM", a callback occurs before all drawing is started, and for "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM", a callback occurs after all drawing is completed. It is possible to initialize the frame buffer with a necessary background color before drawing by performing determination before the start of drawing, or instruct other rendering devices to execute effects when drawing is completed by determining the end of drawing. It becomes possible.

  “LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM” generates a callback before drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM” generates a callback after drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be performed before or after the start of drawing of a specific layer. For example, by performing determination before the start of layer drawing, when a plurality of notifications are generated when drawing a layer of notification, it is possible to enlarge and draw a display of a notification with high priority. In addition, by performing the determination after the start of layer drawing, by drawing the effect around the symbol that was drawn at the timing when the symbol with high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, the symbol with high expectation The effect can be displayed around the symbol only when the symbol stops.

  As described above, it is possible to specify the drawing section and execute predetermined processing before or after the start of drawing or completion. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 370, “LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK” can generate a callback before the start of common block drawing, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK” can generate a callback after completion of common block drawing. The execution of a specific liquid crystal rendering block corresponding to a single rendering that constitutes a liquid crystal rendering common block is stopped by performing determination before the start of common block rendering, and rendering of rendering is not performed, or the liquid crystal rendering common block It is also possible to execute the liquid crystal rendering common block different from the liquid crystal rendering common block to be executed which has been determined in advance at the start of the fluctuation by performing the determination after the drawing end.

  Also, “LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR” generates a callback before the start of drawing of the liquid crystal effect block in the common block of liquid crystal effects, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR” generates a callback after drawing of the liquid crystal effect block. By performing the determination before the start of the liquid crystal rendering block drawing, it becomes possible to change the liquid crystal rendering block to be executed based on the result of the external input by the player. Further, by performing the determination after the start of the liquid crystal effect block drawing, it becomes possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal effect block for drawing a single effect. Furthermore, “LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST” can generate a callback after the completion of still image and moving image drawing, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST” can be generated before starting still image and moving image drawing in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Various effects can be replaced by making a determination before starting to draw a still image or a moving image. In addition, it is possible to add renderings of effects corresponding to replacement contents of various effects by performing determination after drawing completion of a still image or a moving image.

  As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to determine the drawing section in various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each liquid crystal effect block, and an image and a video are drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the effect category. Be done. Further, as described above, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer.

  When rendering is performed, an image or the like is rendered in parallel to the plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal rendering schedule data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Furthermore, the drawing by the step-up notice 1 is performed on the notice layer (preliminary_first half 1 layer). FIG. 371 is a view showing an example of a drawing result of an individual layer and a drawing result of all layers at the time of execution of advance notice rendering according to the present embodiment.

  At this time, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer, but if these effect SWs are to be managed individually, there is a possibility that the processing becomes complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SW is grouped and managed for each of the layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the division of the effect.

  For example, the presentation SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 371, the effect SW group background, the effect SW group symbol, and the effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These presentation SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the presentation SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and the category of the presentation.

  As described above, by grouping and managing the effect SWs, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, when the symbol display and the hold display in line with the currently displayed background is changed to another background when starting a new change, the background layer, the symbol layer, and the hold layer in the division according to the background The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to collectively hide the symbol display and the hold display matched to the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and the hold display matched to the new background in a plurality of layers. It is possible to switch the drawing for only the necessary effect display from among a plurality of effect displays superimposed and displayed in layers.

  In addition, in the effect that spans the game state, for example, in the jackpot effect from the start of the change to the end of the change, the symbol is hidden and the background is changed to the effect of the jackpot, but for the hold, the hold that was drawn during the change It is also possible to display continuously. Such control defines the effect group to be hidden as described above as the reset object effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which the effect SW all reset has been specified is a liquid crystal effect common block at the start of fluctuation or This can be realized by defining a common block for liquid crystal effects at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, all the effects are managed as a common block in blocks of a certain length for the purpose of improving the control of the complicated game effects. As a result, a production block is selected according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the notice lottery, and a series of productions such as symbol fluctuation display and jackpot is realized by drawing based on the selected production block, and complicated control is performed. Therefore, the control that synchronizes the drawing contents with the sub-effects such as an accessory, lamp, and sound output has been realized. In the common block, a period divided by a predetermined timing from the start of symbol variation to the symbol determination is set. These periods correspond to, for example, the first half variation and the second half variation, and are assigned to the variation pattern. It was set according to the variation time of the symbol.

  By configuring in this way, the common block can be used universally with a plurality of types of variation patterns. Further, by ensuring the independence of the notice effect executed in the first half of the change and the notice effect executed in the second half of the change, the degree of freedom of the combination of the common blocks can be increased.

  However, as described above, since the common block is divided by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize the effect that continues from the start of the change to the end of the change only by combining the effect blocks having a predetermined length. When performing rendering over such a plurality of periods, each common block is executed independently, in addition to the fact that the preceding common block and the subsequent common block are associated and the versatility is lowered. For this reason, the control may be complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the production. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to create and control program codes individually instead of setting program data.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, in this embodiment, not only the display of variable symbols and a series of effects of big hits are performed by combining effect blocks of a certain length for all effects, but the length of the effect blocks Is exceptionally not a fixed length, but is configured to allow the effect block length according to the effect period. Furthermore, rendering effects can be rendered by combining rendering blocks having different rendering times, and rendering blocks that straddle the combined rendering blocks can also be rendered simultaneously, thereby realizing rendering effects that continue from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation.

  As the effect across a plurality of periods, for example, there is a countdown effect in which a number is counted down and displayed with the start of fluctuation of the symbol, and the countdown display is continued across the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation. FIG. 372 is a diagram for explaining an example of a common block extending over a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment, in which (A) is a symbol display and execution timing of a notice effect; The structure of the liquid crystal advance presentation block by the common block which spans several periods is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372, the former half fluctuation is “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the latter half fluctuation is “normal short reach”, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H”. As shown in FIG. 372 (A), a step-up notice and a BTN logo character fall notice are executed in the first half fluctuation, and a cut-in notice and a group notice are executed in the second half fluctuation. The contents of each preliminary announcement effect are as described above. Further, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step up notice until the end of the group notice.

  In FIG. 372 (B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect (step-up notice, BTN logo object fall notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice are shown. It shows the configuration of the effect block of the countdown notice to be executed during the period until the end time. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

  The countdown notice effect block includes a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data is started, a liquid crystal effect notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the latter half of the fluctuation is finished after the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends. . The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts is a NOP that is executed before the start of the step-up notice, and the function NOP that waits until the latter half of the change is finished is a NOP that is executed after the end of the group notice. The same waiting time is set.

  As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the effect block, it becomes possible to more flexibly operate the common block. In addition, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence such as the execution timing of the other effect blocks being shifted due to the exceptional setting. Note that the exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW, similarly to the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
For the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing, drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is taken out from the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the capture storage area of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Then, processing such as image reuse, deformation, and additional drawing was performed. As described above, by temporarily storing drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various presentation expressions are efficiently realized.

  FIG. 373 is a view for explaining a conventional configuration for writing an image in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 373, conventionally, an image drawn in each layer is overwritten on a frame buffer and then output to a display device.

  Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer using a display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed on the notice layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Finally, the display buffer command is used to overwrite the moving image or still image related to the reserved layer on the frame buffer to create drawing data of one frame.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control board 1530 copies drawing data for one frame to be displayed, which is created in the frame buffer, to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. An effect is newly added around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the buffer for capture, and then written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

  In this way, drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by adding an effect to the drawing data that has already been created. However, in such conventional image conversion, only image conversion for drawing data for one frame can be realized, and in addition to addition of new drawing elements for a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame, It is limited to the enlargement and reduction of the whole liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on the drawing element drawn in each layer or each drawing element in the layer on the capture buffer.

  The reason why the image conversion can not be performed for each drawing element is that drawing elements in each effect, for example, background, design, advance notice, etc., are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order, so It is overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since the drawing element is a set of colored dots (points) when drawn on the frame buffer, it is possible to overwrite the drawing element with another drawing element even if it is attempted to extract the drawing element in a rectangle. This is because the data of the drawing element of the overwritten portion is lost.

  At present, the need to reuse image data for one drawn liquid crystal display has become scarce due to the improvement of VDP processing capability, but diversifying the expressions of presentation for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming In order to execute complicated drawing processing, an increase in load was expected.

  In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-described problems and perform more diverse effects, the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. When drawing image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display newly, instead of adding the image, each image display unit constituting the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is dynamically changed during drawing. Realize complex rendering by adding new drawing.

  Specifically, a single effect rendering data (notice, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is provided in units of effect blocks in liquid crystal effect scheduler data for performing display by the effect block. Incorporate Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  When changing the image, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the corresponding rendering block in the called program function are not drawn on the frame buffer, but allocated on the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on the off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image only for a specific notice, adding a new image, or replacing the effect only for the background, the image can be changed for an image in which a plurality of effects are superimposed, or a new image can be changed. Additions can be realized.

  Hereinafter, a configuration will be specifically described, in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the converted image is written in the frame buffer. FIG. 374 is a view for explaining the procedure for converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer and writing it in the frame buffer in this embodiment.

  As described above, one or more buffers for image conversion called an off-screen buffer different from the frame buffer are allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Then, image conversion is performed by the image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is enabled by combining the image converted on one or more off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

  Explaining further, the rendering SW is embedded in the liquid crystal rendering block data that configures each layer corresponding to the rendering and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data that configures the liquid crystal rendering block data, and is embedded when creating the display list command at the time of liquid crystal rendering The callback function is called by the callback based on the selected presentation SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

  In FIG. 374, first, before the drawing of the background layer is started, the drawing object is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the presentation SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each rendering element of the background layer, a display list command for enlargement of each rendering element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the rendering SW. In this way, the enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

  Subsequently, before starting drawing of the symbol layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, an effect is applied to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW at the drawing timing of each effect element in the symbol layer. Create display list command. By transmitting the display list command, an effect can be applied to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Subsequently, before drawing of the advance notice layer is started, the drawing object is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn within the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing at which the rendering of all the rendering elements related to the preview layer is finished, a display list command for rotating the preview rendering of each rendering element of the preview layer is performed within the function called back based on the rendering SW. create. By transmitting the display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Finally, all rendering elements of the holding layer are written to the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

  According to the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, not the image conversion for the entire screen, but the image conversion regardless of the drawing unit of each layer, the drawing element constituting the layer, and the drawing order in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that callback based on the same effect SW is performed multiple times at each drawing timing in a period from the start of drawing of a liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timing are as described above with reference to FIG.

  In addition, by performing image conversion by callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is an image conversion target. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of variation-related drawing, an image is generated based on the result of the lottery result value of the advance lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input at the time of creating the display list command for drawing the image conversion target image. It is possible to determine the method of conversion.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on animation data stored on the CGROM, and the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a processes the created display list command to perform drawing at the time of game effect execution. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in a buffer assigned to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command for one screen is created, the external request DMA (transfer means) The contents of the buffer were sent to VDP using.

  However, at present, the rendering specification becomes complicated, and the processing load increases, so that the processing time of the advance lottery process at the start of fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer synthesis processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems, motor system The processing time of the motor data creation process by the increase in the number is also increasing. Since the processing time of the peripheral control such as production is executed at a predetermined cycle, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle when the processing with high load as described above is executed repeatedly. .

  In exceptional cases where processing can not be completed within a cycle, processing can not be completed within a cycle on a regular basis, and game control by the main control device and effect control by the peripheral control device are synchronized based on the processing cycle. There is a risk that the progress of the game and the production of the game by each production device will deviate, and the interest of the game will be significantly reduced.

  Therefore, it has been necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by, for example, reducing the time required for processing with high load in peripheral control processing such as rendering. Therefore, in this embodiment, drawing processing with relatively high load in peripheral control processing, in particular, the above-mentioned processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating the native display list command that can be processed by the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source A means for reducing and shortening the processing time of the entire peripheral control process will be described.

  First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a will be described. FIG. 375 is a diagram for describing a procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c and transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 375, first, various liquid crystal effect scheduler data is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information on the display list command to be transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a (parameter value corresponding to the VDP register number and register number). Since it is not, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source can execute. The converted VDP native display list commands are temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. Further, when a callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  Then, in the process of processing the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs display list transfer setting to the external request DMA. Thus, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  When receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

  As described above, the display list command group of one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c, and the display list command group is output from the buffer to the VDP 1540 a using the external request DMA at the next processing cycle of creating the display list command group. It realizes drawing by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting the enormous liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into the VDP native display list command group is a heavy processing load. In the case where a plurality of VDPs of different makers are mounted on one game machine, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data which is an intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP for each maker. It becomes possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which a part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is applied. FIG. 376 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring the display list command group to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c according to the present embodiment.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 376, first, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list selection management module performs display list transfer setting for the external request DMA. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530 c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b.

  The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores liquid crystal effect scheduler data as in the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is converted into the converted VDP native display list command group. And an interrupt display list command.

  The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal rendering scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes the image in the frame buffer. Furthermore, analysis of the display list is interrupted at the timing of analyzing and executing the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group, and a transfer interruption request is generated to the external request DMA. Thereafter, an interrupt is generated to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the peripheral processing MPU 1511 determines that the interrupt cause is the interrupt by the interrupt display list command in the interrupt processing module, and executes the callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and replaces effects and symbols. The method of replacing the effect is the same as the description using FIG. 361 described above, and the method of replacing the symbol is also the same as the description using FIG. 361 described above. In the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding callback information table, the rendering SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is defined. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, and a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and is transmitted to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command of display list analysis resumption to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list command for resuming display list analysis, generates a transfer resume request for the external request DMA, and resumes analysis of the display list command.

  As described above, by processing only the replacement part of the rendering using the callback function, the peripheral control RAM 1530 c (temporary storage means) is used without any conversion of the VDP native display list involved in all the rendering other than the replacement. Instead, transfer can be performed from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b to the voice generator built-in VDP 1540 a using an external request DMA (transfer means).

  With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a that accompanies the image display, and the image processing can be speeded up. In addition, since the use area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

  In the peripheral control ROM 1530b, only the frequently used VDP native display list command group may be stored, and the less frequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed according to a conventional procedure. As a result, the processing speed of the display list command that is frequently used is shortened, so that the overall processing speed can be increased and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. Also, display list commands corresponding to highly versatile images (moving images) are stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and different image processing depending on the model and version is performed according to the conventional procedure, thereby improving development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
Processors (CPU, MPU) used for game control and peripheral control (production control) of gaming machines can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used by a 32-bit CPU are a char (character, character) type, an int (integer) type, and a long (long integer) type, each having a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. . The floating point type is a float (single precision) type or a double (double precision) type, and has a size of 4 bytes or 8 bytes, respectively.

  The processor used for the peripheral control of the gaming machine is a byte capable of reading and writing data stored in all addresses in units of 1 byte in the memory (ROM, RAM), regardless of whether the processor is a CISC processor or a RISC processor. It is a machine. Note that the address for reading and writing multi-byte data is not limited to this. When the processor reads data of a plurality of bytes, the data is always read from a byte boundary, and when accessed so as to cross the byte boundary, an alignment violation occurs. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor.For example, instead of being able to continue processing, program execution is delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. I'll be relaxed.

  However, in current game machine development, when a program for controlling a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur at the time of program execution, and the program execution speed may be reduced. In peripheral control of a gaming machine, since it was necessary to complete all processing within a predetermined processing cycle, a reduction in program execution speed may be a serious problem. In particular, since the effects of the gaming machine are configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and various information is stored in different types of data types. Data structures are adopted.

  In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure including a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored when data corresponding to the data structure is stored in the memory. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area for storing. As a result, the data access start position by the processor is adjusted, and the information is arranged so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, so that an alignment violation does not occur and a decrease in the program execution speed is prevented. Can do. Adjusting the alignment of the data structure on all ROMs and RAMs is an enormous amount of work. Therefore, the lottery process at the start of fluctuation that increases the load on the processor and increases the processing time. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and RAM related to the conversion process, the control process related to the liquid crystal drawing, the lamp control process, and the like. Moreover, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the above-mentioned process.

[Help image to promote understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such an effect pattern determination or a notice effect determination is performed, the effect display according to the determination result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, thereby changing the decoration pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. The rendering will be executed together with the expected rendering (noticing rendering) applied to the background depiction (background preview) and the movable body operation (feature rendering). As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  However, when such an expected effect is realized as background depiction (background advance notice), basically, it has an effect such as "how much should the ratio for causing an image with high expectation to appear to be set?" It is only done to Therefore, the fundamental problem such as “it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for a big hit unless an image with high expectation (expected production) appears” has not yet been solved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that a special effect is to be performed as a result of the notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background depiction It is possible to execute the process of displaying the background image used in the image in a special mode different from the original image data, and when displayed in the special mode, the expectation level is higher than when it is not displayed in the special mode It is suggested that it can be suggested that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing is high.

Here, as the “process to display in a special mode”, for example,
A process of displaying original image data as rotational processing data rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation around an x, y, or z axis (or an appropriate combination) in a display area, etc.),
It is possible to exemplify processing such as processing for displaying original image data as mosaic processing data with a predetermined degree of “blurring”.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the original image data is subjected to a slight processing (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.). It is decided to carry out a special effect to display this (displayed in a special mode). According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to positively detect and recognize the fact even if special effects are performed in which only slight processing is performed on the original image data. However, in exchange for this, even if the special performance is not performed, it seems to be able to remember the sensation and illusion that “there may be the special performance being executed” As a result, even if a state in which an image with a high degree of expectation (special effect) has not appeared continues, it is expected that the sense of expectation for the big hit is suitably maintained.

  However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status related to such “display in a special mode”, it becomes difficult to recognize even the possibility of being in a situation with high expectation. In the end, doing special effects can lose its own meaning.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment displays a help image as to whether "processing in a special mode" is being executed according to the operation by the player. Can be executed. According to such a configuration, the help image can be displayed in response to an operation by the player, so that it is not possible to recognize whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. It is expected that the reduction of the risk of the loss of

  However, the “help image” according to this explanation example does not clearly indicate whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed, but it includes the recognition difficulty. ing. It is hope that even if it does not appear to be in the state of being executed "processing to display in a special mode" just because it dares to have such recognition difficulty, it can not be convinced that it is in the state of being executed. Will be able to be left, and it will be possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

  FIG. 377 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when performing a state transition between a non-playing state (such as in a demonstration screen) in which a game is not executed and a game execution state in which a game is executed. .

  FIG. 377 (a) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the game is in a non-game state (such as in a demo screen). As shown in FIG. 377 (a), in the effect display device 1600 in the non-playing state, a character image PG (here, here to help determine whether the special effect is being executed). A guide image AG suggesting that a character dressed as a penguin can be made to appear by an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is displayed. In this example, an explanatory note and a character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG.

  When the start prize is generated and the game (changes in the special symbol according to the big hit determination) is started in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a), the effect display device 1600 first displays FIG. 377 (b). The guidance image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice), the movable body operation (feature effect) and the like. In this way, by causing the guide image AG to be automatically hidden when the game is started, while avoiding adverse effects on the stage performance when in the game execution state, The presence of the character image PG (here, the character dressed as a penguin) can be suitably appealed.

  FIG. 377 (c) shows a display example in the above-mentioned effect display device 1600 when the change effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is ended (stop display).

  When the hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the guide image AG is not displayed by starting the variation effect by the decorative design SZ by digesting the hold information. The rendering situation shown in FIG. 377 (b) will appear again with the state as it was. On the other hand, if no hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the state is again shifted to a non-game state (such as in the demo screen). In other words, in this case, the guide image AG is based on the fact that the state where the game is not newly started for a predetermined time has been continued after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The displayed condition (the condition shown in FIG. 377 (a)) will appear again. In the effect display device 1600 when the guidance image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

  The “processing to display in a special manner” according to this effect example is a state in which the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the “specific effect pattern” (when a predetermined determination result is obtained in the effect determination). In addition, it can be executed when it is within a period in which a specific effect image appears (a predetermined timing within a specific effect pattern).

  In FIG. 378, there is performed an expectation effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image in a state where the fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is being executed in the “specific effect pattern”. An example of display on the effect display device 1600 when in the off state is shown.

  That is, in this production example, when at least “expected production where a princess character (specific production image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed, on condition that a predetermined production condition is satisfied, A process of displaying only the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) after performing a slight rotation process (a process of displaying in a special manner) can be executed. Yes. When the princess character (specific effect image) on which the "processing to display in a special mode" is executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) on which the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed is The rate at which jackpot symbols appear is higher than when they are displayed.

  More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the "process to display in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (hime character) It is displayed as it is. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (b), the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) is rotated three times to the left and then displayed. In the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c), the process (the process of displaying in a special mode) is executed. In the situation shown in FIG. The processing to display these after the rotational processing of (processing to display in a special mode) is being performed.

  As is apparent from FIGS. 378 (a) to 378 (c), each original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) even when the “processing to display in a special mode” is performed. The machine is designed to be subjected to only a small amount of rotational processing. In particular, in FIG. 378 (a) to (c), it is possible to compare and see in FIG. 378, but in the actual stage, FIG. 378 (a) corresponding to the result of stage determination ) Only one of (c) is displayed and can not be compared among them. Therefore, even if FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that the state is displayed in the special mode, but the state is displayed in the special mode. The player is expected to be aware of a certain possibility (possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 378 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special manner. It is difficult to be convinced, and the degree of leaving hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as "may be in a state of being displayed in a special mode" will be expected.

  In addition, a process of displaying the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displaying them (a process of displaying them in a special manner) ) May be executed as a process in which each original image data is rotated and displayed separately, and each original image data is converted into one image after being converted into one image. It is possible to execute as processing for applying rotational processing to the image of and displaying it.

  In addition, for FIGS. 378 (b) and (c), when the image shown in FIG. 378 (c) is displayed, the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears than when the image shown in FIG. 378 (b) is displayed. You may make it have the relationship which becomes high. Alternatively, when “processing to display in a special mode” is executed, after displaying FIG. 378 (a) once, it is displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes in the order of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c). You may make it Alternatively, both of FIG. 378 (b) and (c) may not necessarily be prepared, and only one of FIG. 378 (b) and (c) may be displayed.

  However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to determine the implementation status related to such “processing to be displayed in a special manner”, the special meaning of performing such a special effect is lost. There is no doubt. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation button 410 is in a state in which at least "expected effect in which a princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image" is performed. And the like, it is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether the process of “displaying in a special mode” is being performed by an operation on a predetermined operation means such as.

  FIG. 379 shows that the help image is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted in the state where the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed. A display example on the effect display device 1600 of the time is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, at least in the state (see FIG. 378) where the “expected effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is performed (operation button) 410, etc.), a character image PG (here, a character dressed as a penguin) useful for examining “whether a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed” is used as a help image. It is supposed to be displayed.

  More specifically, when the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (a) appears, and FIG. When the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (b) will appear, and when the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c) When an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player is performed, the situation shown in FIG. 379 (c) will appear.

  However, as is apparent from FIGS. 379 (a) to 379 (c), when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be used to determine whether the “processing to display in a special mode” is performed. It is not explicitly stated whether or not the “process for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. Because it is intended to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems to be in the state where "processing to display in a special mode" is executed, it will become possible to be strongly aware of the possibility, Even if it appears that the process of displaying in a special mode is not being performed, it can not be convinced that hope for the feasibility of the process can be left, and the sense of expectation is maintained. It will be possible.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 379 (a) to (c), the character image PG (help image) according to this effect example is in a state in which “processing to display in a special manner” is being executed. Regardless of the mode of execution, display is possible only in one mode that is a predetermined position and has a ruler in the horizontal direction. In this way, by causing an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the “processing to display in a special mode” and that extends in the horizontal direction to appear by an operation by the player, the image is displayed. (Here, the ruler) can be functioned as a reference image (help image) indicating whether or not the “special effect (in this case, tilt effect) is being performed” state.

  In particular, in this production example, the horizontal direction is not affected by the “processing to display in a special mode” at a position overlapping with the image (princess character) that is the execution target of the “processing to display in a special mode”. A guide image (in this case, a ruler) displayed so as to extend is displayed. Therefore, by confirming the degree of overlap with the image (Hime character) to be subjected to the special processing, it can be further useful to determine whether the special processing is being performed. become.

  That is, in such an effect example, the special effect that has been “processed to display in a special manner” is an effect that is slightly tilted, and when the tilted effect is performed, the tilted effect is Expectation is higher than if not done. For this reason, the player operates predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) in order to determine whether or not the tilting effect is being performed. It is arranged to intentionally have difficulty in recognizing that the process of displaying in the special mode is not notified. As a result, the player is expected to be aware of the possibility of high expectation when it appears that a tilting performance is being executed, and even if it does not appear to be performing a tilting effect, It will be expected to leave hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as "it may be in a state in which a directing effect is being performed".

  Furthermore, a target image (here, a ruler) indicating whether or not the “special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed” is set as a target of “processing to display in a special manner”. The image (decorative symbol SZ, background image) is displayed in a way that at least part of it is displayed in a superimposed manner, and a standard image (here, a ruler) is a single effect (expectation) As a result, it is possible to provide an interesting feature such as exhibiting the function for the first time by comparing with an effect image (here, a princess character) which is not able to function as).

  In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to develop the presentation without displaying the reference image (here, the ruler) depending on the selection by the player (depending on the operation). When you are not quite confident that you are in a state where the direction (in this case, tilt direction is being performed), you can enjoy various ways of playing, such as not making the player perform the operation by dare Become.

  In the example of effect, the “process of displaying in a special mode” is performed as “the process of performing rotation processing on the original image data and then displaying”, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the processing may be performed as processing for performing rotation processing on image data created based on the original image data instead of the original image data and then displaying the image data. In addition, image data may not be subjected to rotational processing, but may be subjected to another processing or conversion. The point is that it is possible to execute a special process to convert and display an image having a mode different from the normal mode, and when the special process can be performed, the player performs an operation on the special process target by the operation of the player. If the reference image can be displayed, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects.

  By the way, in the above-described effect example, the “process to display in a special mode” can be executed when the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed. As described above, depending on the result of the production determination, the decoration symbol SZ may be executable a plurality of times within a period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. At this time, when the number of times that the “process to display in a special mode” is executed is large, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is higher than when the number of times is small.

  In addition, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is not only in a state where the “expected effect where a princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed, The display may be enabled by the player's operation over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, the decorative symbol SZ may be displayed by an operation by the player.

  That is, in this case, even if any background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) to appear is executed. It becomes. However, in view of the fact that the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is a “comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image”, the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image for each case. It is clear that it differs depending on the type of. However, if the display position or display form of the character image PG (especially the ruler here) is changed in accordance with the type of the background image in each case, the character image PG is compared with the comparison reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may deteriorate due to the suspicion of lack of reliability. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (the reference image) is required to be displayed as an invariant and absolute image regardless of the presentation situation.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG be changeable among a plurality of predetermined display positions in accordance with an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player. . However, regardless of which display position is displayed, it is important that the display form is the same.

  FIG. 380 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

  FIG. 380 (a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, when in this rendering situation, the player carries out an operation for displaying the comparison reference image (the reference image) with the suspicion that "the processing to be displayed in the special mode is not executed". Assuming that the character image PG is displayed as a comparison reference image (reference image) at any of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 380 (b) to (d)) determined in advance according to the operation mode. Processing is performed.

  For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed on the left side in the display area (FIG. 380 (b)). Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) at the center position (FIG. 380 (c)) in the display area When processing for displaying PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the right position (FIG. 380 (d)) in the display area. A process of displaying the character image PG as a) is performed.

  As is apparent from FIGS. 380 (b) to (d), the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) has the same form regardless of the display position. , Because the positional relationship between the background image (or the decorative pattern) that can be the target of the “process to be displayed in a special mode” and the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) is different, “display in a special mode The ease of determining whether the process of “performing processing” is being performed also naturally becomes different.

  For example, when the character image PG (especially, a ruler here) is displayed at the position (the center position in the display area) shown in FIG. 380 (c), the character image PG (especially, a ruler here) is a comparison target When the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 380 (d) (the right side position in the display area). The character image PG (especially the ruler here) is displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (signature) although it overlaps the background image to be compared. It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether the processing to be performed is being performed.

  According to such a configuration, the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is played at “a display position suitable for comparison” which differs depending on the type of background image in each case. Since the information can be displayed by the operation of the user, it is possible to suitably provide a judgment material as to whether or not the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is being performed.

  In this production example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (standard image) is made variable in accordance with the number of operations for the operation button 410 within a predetermined time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time on the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 are provided, and any one of the operation means is operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means in accordance with the subject. When the character image PG is displayed by an operation on an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (acceptance period). Will be possible.

  In addition, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (standard image) cannot function as an effect (expected degree) by itself, and is therefore required for comparison and determination with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the expected effect (background image) becomes an worthless image that only makes visual recognition difficult. Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the time displayed by the operation by the player, it is desirable to automatically hide the screen without requiring any operation.

  However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is displayed as the comparison reference image (specifically, the ruler here) and the type of the background image, the “processing in a special mode” is performed. In some cases, it may not be sufficient for the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to perform comparison and determination as to whether or not it is in Therefore, in the above presentation example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (standard image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to cause the character image PG to appear is reoperated. If it is, the time for which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, every time the predetermined operation means is re-operated, it is intermittently displayed until the player is convinced if the non-display is made after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the operation timing. By performing such operations, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, and comparison and judgment can be made thoroughly.

  However, if such an unlimited continuous display as the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may be very easy to determine whether the special processing is being executed. . That is, the player may always get a confident conclusion that "special processing is being performed" or "special processing is not being performed", so that "special mode" It does not specify whether or not the processing to be displayed is being executed, but the above-mentioned purported meaning of "imposing the difficulty of recognition" is overdrawn.

  Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is being displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced, such as by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler possessed by the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm). It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, every time a predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. The comparison reference image (character image PG) Since the display area as a whole becomes smaller gradually (here, the ruler becomes shorter gradually), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) It is possible to preferably maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether the process of displaying in a special mode is being performed while making it possible to extend.

  However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), this can not be used for comparison with the background image, resulting in a decrease in game interest. It may be connected. Accordingly, with respect to the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, a minimum size (here, the length of the ruler with the shortest limit) is set in advance, and the minimum level is set. When the size is reduced to the above, even if the predetermined operation means is operated again in this state, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed is not extended. It is desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

  In addition, it is desirable that the size (display area) of such a comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. . That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear (or to extend the display time), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed as a whole. Becomes smaller (in this case, the ruler becomes shorter gradually), and finally it will not appear, so when you really want to know if "processing in special mode" is being executed It becomes possible to prompt the user to operate only, and other than that, it is expected to concentrate on the original performance content.

  Note that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over after the variation effect is finished and the next variation effect is started. According to such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable presentation opportunity. Basically, only by looking at the background image and the decorative design SZ, the “special mode” It is possible to provide a performance (see FIG. 378) for predicting whether or not the “displaying process” is being executed.

  Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 379 and 380 is in a state when it is displayed for the first time by an operation on a predetermined operation means after power-on (or RAM clear). After that, every time the operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole becomes gradually smaller (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), and finally it will not even appear . However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is satisfied, the comparison reference image (when appearing at multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of those positions) A process may also be prepared in which the display area as a whole is increased (here, the ruler is elongated) and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by operating the predetermined operation means.

  In addition, as described above, when preparing a plurality of operation means set so that the display positions of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are different from each other, the operation is performed depending on which of these operation means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated means. In this case, for each operation means (display position), the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) is set, and the specific operation means is set. It is desirable that, when the operation is performed, only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

  For example, in the case of the production example described with reference to FIG. 380, when the first operating means is operated in the production situation shown in FIG. 380 (a), the production situation shown in FIG. 380 (b) appears. It becomes. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (b), when the first operation means is operated again, this is in exchange for the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state being extended. As described above, the display is small (the ruler is short). However, after this, even when the second operation means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (c) appears, and the comparison criteria associated with the first operation means being operated again. The reduced display as an image (character image PG) is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation on the second operation means. Similarly, when the third operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (d) appears, and a comparison reference image (character image PG) associated with the first operating means being operated again. The reduced display as is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right position by the operation on the third operation means.

  In this respect, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the central position shown in FIG. 380 (c)), it corresponds to the specific position (central position) while (within 3 seconds) When another operation means (for example, the first operation means) is not operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already in the display state at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the display state. It is desirable that the comparison reference image (character image PG) be newly displayed at another position (left position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

  That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position where comparison with the background image is difficult due to the operation to the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means By operating the operation means, it is possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another display position. In this way, it is possible to add an interest in searching for at which position the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the comparison.

  In addition, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed is triggered by this. There is no such thing as a display, and the display state is maintained. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, and the amount of comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are arranged) (In which the horizontal length becomes substantially longer), so it is possible to see a background image that is difficult to compare, but in a state where “processing to display in a special mode” is being performed. It is possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at the timing when it is absolutely necessary to know whether or not there is. However, this simultaneously consumes “the remaining number of times (comparison image (character image PG) can be made to appear) (the number of operations to reach the minimum unit)” set respectively for a plurality of operation means. Therefore, it can be said that there is a great price for greatly improving the ease of comparison.

  Further, as described above, since the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds after) when displayed by the operation by the player, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images In order to increase the time during which PG) is simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, it is determined whether or not the comparison reference image (character image PG) appearing by the operation with respect to the first operation means is in the “special processing is being executed” state, or the price is increased. In this case, a quick decision on whether or not to further improve the ease of comparison by further operating the second operation means will be required. Since it will be expanded, tension can be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, the timing at which the comparison reference images (character images PG) are not displayed may be different. The sizes (the lengths of the rulers) as the respective comparison reference images (character images PG) also differ according to the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) in each operation means, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even when the specific operation means is operated, but when another operation means is operated, the comparison reference image Since an effect situation such as “Character image PG is displayed” can also appear, which operation means should be operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear? Also in the determination, it is possible to provide more interesting by adding a determination factor other than the type of background image to be compared.

  As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the operation by the player, but the predetermined time passes It is desirable that the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is made to be non-displayed as a trigger when the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is stopped due to a lose before that. That is, as shown in FIG. 379 and FIG. 380, in the state where the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area, and by comparison with the background image or the like. It will be difficult to concentrate on the contents of the presentation. As a result, if the user does not notice that the vehicle has been stopped due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG to be used for the effect is torn down. When this happens, it is desirable to hide the character image PG as a trigger.

  However, the character image PG may not be undisplayed when it is stopped in the big hit, and may be continued in the display state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the game is stopped due to a big hit, the big hit game is started even if it is not noticed. Therefore, when the character image PG is not displayed after a predetermined time, it is a surprise. It will be expected to function as an effect.

  In addition, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that the specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. Even when the user is gazing, it can be easily recognized that the comparison reference image (character image PG) has been displayed. It is more desirable in order to maintain the game interest to adopt such a method.

  That is, the remaining number of times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set separately for each operation means (display position). If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, combined with the fact that the effect content in the display area is difficult to be recognized, the original effect is concentrated It will be difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, the scream of a penguin) can be output while the specific sound (for example, the squeal of a penguin) is “displayed in a special mode”. Makes its sound output acceptable only when it is not running. Thus, with regard to the execution of the “process to display in a special mode”, the specific sound (for example, penguin's cry) is not used as the positive indication on the positive side, but only the specific sound (for example, negative indication on the negative side) And penguins), a player who dislikes such a specific sound concentrates on the original presentation, and the possibility of "processing in a special mode" is likely to be high. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will be made to appear only at certain times.

  However, for the specific sound (for example, the sang of a penguin), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by the operation of the player when the “processing to display in a special mode” is not performed. It is desirable to make the sound output not necessarily acceptable even if That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image which has already been displayed is reduced (the length of the ruler is changed)) by the operation by the player. Sometimes when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is output, it is definitely recognized that the “processing to display in a special manner” is not executed, but the specific sound ( For example, when the sound of the penguin's cry is not output, there may be a state in which the “process to display in a special mode” is being performed or a state in which the “process to display in a special mode” is not performed. As it becomes louder, it becomes possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, the sang of a penguin) is not output.

  Note that a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) may be output under the above-described predetermined condition regardless of which of a plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, only when a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means is operated, if a specific sound can be output under the predetermined condition described above, a specific sound may be output. In the "special mode", there is no possibility that a comparison reference image (character image PG) useful for judging whether "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being performed or a specific sound may be output. It is possible to allow the player to select whether or not the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears to be useful for determining whether or not the processing of “display processing” is being performed.

  Further, in the above presentation example, the special reference mode is displayed by displaying the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state in a small size (shorter the ruler) in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG). The difficulty of recognizing whether the processing is being performed is suitably maintained. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is output when the comparative reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (when the comparative reference image (character image PG) is relatively large) For example, if the volume of the penguin's cry) is made smaller than when it is output, recognition difficulty when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended to some extent. It will be expected to be maintained.

  Further, the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position are arranged so that they do not overlap each other when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 380). It is desirable to set and. It becomes possible to increase the amount of comparison material with the background image by the amount that each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

  The comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as an image having transparency. According to such a configuration, even if a large part of the background image overlaps the comparison reference image (character image PG), the comparison is made with the background image that can be seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG). It becomes possible to carry out suitably.

  Further, in the above presentation example, whenever the predetermined operation means is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed small (shorter the ruler) and displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Any mode may be used as long as it is difficult to recognize whether the process of displaying the mode is being performed. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the comparative reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same in shape and size, but the portion where the transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. It may be. That is, in the case where the comparison reference image (character image PG) is "displayed at the specific transmission degree", the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the specific transmission degree is small (specific It is important to display the part displayed with transparency short), and the part which is not displayed with specific transmission may be made to hide, and it is possible to make the transmission higher than specific transmission. You may make it display and raise visibility difficulty.

  As described above, “processing for displaying in a special mode” is, for example, shown in FIG. 378 (c) from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a) through the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b). It may be a dynamic drawing process for changing the display state. When the “process to display in a special mode” is realized as such a dynamic drawing process, when the “process to display in a special mode” is terminated, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. After the display state shown in 378 (b), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a) is returned.

  In this respect, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) since it is displayed. It is desirable that the process of displaying in a special mode be performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, when the processing for displaying in a special mode as the dynamic depiction processing is being performed, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player. While the comparison reference image (character image PG) is in the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c) passes through the display state shown in FIG. Since the movement “returned to the display state shown in 378 (a)” always appears, it is possible to facilitate the comparison / determination as to whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. become able to.

  However, the “processing to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). In other words, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be caused to appear by an operation by the player when the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is in the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) is displayed from the display state shown in FIG. After that, the movement “returned to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a)” does not necessarily appear, so it is difficult to compare / determine whether or not the processing for displaying in a special mode is being executed. Will be able to In addition, a strategy is also added because the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended.

  In addition, the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) or from a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the production determination. May be performed in a long time. In addition, “a process of displaying in a special mode” as a dynamic depiction process which is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) within a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol SZ to the time of the fluctuation stop. “Processing for displaying in a special manner” as dynamic drawing processing performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at different predetermined timings.

  In addition, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For a specific sound that can be output (for example, a penguin's cry), the sound output is interrupted in a time (for example, 0.5 seconds which is less than a half time) much shorter than a predetermined time. Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the “processing to display in the special mode” is executed, the specific sound is not recorded until after the “processing to display in the special mode” is executed. Since the output of (for example, penguin squeak) is suppressed, the specific sound (for example, the process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed. Can make it difficult to generate a rendering situation as if it is denied by the penguin's cry.

  In this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) in the form of display that spans from before the processing for displaying in the special mode is performed until after it is performed. Become. Therefore, when the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is executed, for example, the display shown in FIG. 378 (a) is performed while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. From the state, the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) is changed to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c).

  Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of a character wrinkled with a penguin and a ruler, only the character wrinkled with a penguin and a ruler may be displayed. The point is that any comparison reference image (character image PG) not subject to the "process to be displayed in a special mode" can be made available by the operation of the player. However, if a standard image (ruler) in which a length unit in the horizontal direction is shown is displayed, it may be easy to determine whether “processing to display in a special mode” is performed. Is possible.

  The guide image AG in the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 377 may not necessarily be displayed.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

[Prevents mischief against multiple operating means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operation means (operation button 410, sword part 5010, effect selection left button 331) are operated as the operation object by the player. , An effect selection right button 332, and a brightness adjustment button (not shown). When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variation effect is performed by the decorative design. To maintain the

  However, when such a large number of operation means are provided, the existence of the operation means becomes prominent, and the player tends to become a target of mischief. Then, as a result of receiving the rough handling, if an abnormality or a failure occurs even in one of the operation means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly reduced, and a decrease in the game entertainment can not be avoided.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, although the gaming effect according to the big hit determination is not being executed, it is in the non-gaming state (state where the above-mentioned operation effect can not be generated). When there is a high possibility of being mischievous due to the occurrence of operation detection in multiple operation means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, thereby suppressing the handling of the operation means in a rough manner. I am trying to do it.

More specifically, in a state where a game is not started (non-playing state), among a plurality of operation means provided for the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of predetermined operation means which should not require an operation Here, when operations on the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) are respectively detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time,
In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that can not appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
・ Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, a change in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. A control is made to generate a period for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the operation related to the volume is permitted, and the volume is permitted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the normal operation as the non-play state is restored such that the operation acceptance regarding the luminance is accepted and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output.

  In the effect restriction period (function restriction period) according to the present embodiment, “even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output sound volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume The setting value is not displayed either, and "If the operation for the brightness adjustment button is performed, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed either" However, only one of the process related to volume adjustment and the process related to brightness adjustment may be limited.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that are triggered by such a production restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the condition of occurrence of the effect restriction period will be complicated to give a tense feeling such as "Isn't the prank being actually monitored by the hole side".

  FIG. 381 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when an effect restriction period is generated based on the fact that a predetermined effect restriction condition is satisfied in a non-game state (such as in a demo screen). is there.

  Now, the state where the game is not started (non-game state) is controlled and the standby display is performed on the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decorative symbols are displayed in the stopped state, the demonstration screen, etc. , Etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when a volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output during the operation. If it is in the state, processing for adjusting the volume (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if a predetermined effect lamp is in a light emitting state at the time of the operation, a process of adjusting the brightness (the brightness setting value is used as the light amount). Process to be reflected). At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

  As described above, in the non-game state, when the player starts the game, the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated so that the volume and the luminance can be set according to his / her preference. Reception is accepted. When the operation is accepted, the player is expected to prompt the player to start the game by changing the sound volume setting value or the luminance setting value according to the operation.

  However, as described above, in the non-playing state, there may be a case where a puzzling operation is performed on a plurality of operation means including such a volume adjustment button and a brightness adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or failure occurs even in one of the operation means, the operability and effectability will be significantly reduced, and a decrease in the game entertainment can not be avoided.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, several operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as mischievous detection are prepared. Based on the fact that it has been detected that there has been an operation, it is possible to execute a process of generating an effect restriction period (function restriction period) for which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment recognizes that the condition concerning the effect restriction is satisfied when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state. It is said.
a. The first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is clocked starting with the operation detection on the sword unit 5010, and the operation detection on the operation button 410 newly occurs until the first timer time is finished, The second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) starts counting in response to the operation detection for the newly generated operation button 410, and the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 starts while the second timer time is over. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set
b. The third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be clocked by the operation detection to the operation button 410, and the operation detection to the sword unit 5010 newly occurs while the third timer time is finished. The fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is timed to start timing detection of the newly generated sword portion 5010, and the operation detection to the operation button 410 is performed until the fourth timer time is finished. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set

  In addition, these operation patterns a and b are only examples, and when the detection condition concerning the operation pattern other than that is satisfied, it may be made to generate a production restriction period (function restriction period), or detection It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. Moreover, about 1st-4th timer time, all may be the same time and may be different time. Also, clocking may be performed using the same timer, or may be performed using different timers.

  Here, “long press with respect to the operation button 410”, “continuous hitting operation with respect to the operation button 410 (multiple operations)” and the like are also not obtained in a state where the game is not started (non-game state). It can be said. However, since these modes are modes that can be operated and instructed in the operation effect in the game execution state, the player has some purpose in starting the game even in the non-game state (e.g. It is assumed that these operations can be performed, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, “operation combinations for a plurality of operation means (for example, operations in the order of“ sword unit 5010 → operation button 410 → sword unit 5010 ”), which is a detection target for the purpose of mischief, is in the game execution state. It can be said that it is important in order to avoid false detection that it is set as what is not operated and instructed as an operation effect at a certain time. Thereby, it is avoided that the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operation rate as the pachinko machine 1 is greatly reduced.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, before and after the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), the operation for the other operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) is respectively performed. As a condition, the detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when the operation to a plurality of operation means is disturbed within a relatively short time. I have to. Therefore, players who have only touched once due to their uniqueness, not the intention of mischief, can be exempted from the penalty, and there is a relatively frequent occurrence of a production restriction period, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more preferably avoid a drastic drop in the operation rate as

  The stricter detection conditions in this way are to avoid the fact that the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is greatly reduced, and the mischief is confused by the mischief. Because it is assumed that the operation is performed in various combinations, even if the detection conditions are tightened, it is likely that the detection conditions will eventually be satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 381, first, at timing tq1 when in the non-gaming state, an operation on the sword 5010 is detected. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and whether or not the second-stage detection condition is satisfied until the first timer time is consumed. It will be in the state (1st step state) which judges.

  That is, as described above, in “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, three conditions (sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the production restriction period. Each time is satisfied one by one, the stairs for generating the effect restriction period will be taken one step up.

  At timing tq1, the first staircase among the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated is raised. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is finished, and the second stage detection condition (here, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has been consumed, the original state in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied (the state of the 0th stage after going down one step) is returned.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time has not been consumed (the state of the first stage), and the operation pattern (Detection Pattern) Of the three conditions included in a, the “second-step detection condition” is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and the third detection condition (here, last time) until the second timer time is consumed. It is in a state (second stage state) to determine whether or not the detection condition of (1) is satisfied.

  That is, at the timing tq2, the second stair among the three stairs before generating the effect restriction period is to go up. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is consumed, and the detection condition of the third stage (in this case, the operation on the sword portion 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time has been consumed, the state is returned to the original state in which none of the above three conditions are satisfied (the state of the 0th stage after going down two stairs).

  In the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again at timing tq3 when the second timer time has not been consumed (second stage state), and the operation pattern (detection) is detected. Among the three conditions included in the pattern a), the “third-step detection condition (last detection condition)” is satisfied. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the detection, in the effect display device 1600, display (reproduction) of a specific moving image (warning moving image) that can not appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed. Let it begin. Along with this, even if there is an operation to the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed either, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. Furthermore, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. , Produce production restrictions. Then, the effect restriction period (functional restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued from timing tq3 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

  According to such a configuration, since the effect restriction period occurs when the plurality of operations are operated in a jumbled manner, the operation by the mischief can be suppressed.

  Also, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (up the stairs), but when time runs out on the middle of the road, All state levels are canceled to return to the original state. Thereby, even when the game is ended in a state where the state level is raised, it is also preferable that the production restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game. Can be avoided.

  In the process of rising the state level (moving up the stairs) in this way, the "volume control button" or "brightness adjustment button" which is the operation object to be restricted when the effect restriction period occurs. It may be assumed that the “adjustment button” is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) can be operated so that the player can set the volume and brightness to suit his / her preference when starting the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, even if the operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated during the process of rising the state level (up the stairs), the state is triggered by this. It is desirable to prevent the level from changing or affecting the first timer time or the second timer time.

  That is, in this case, even if the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are targeted for the operation by the mischief, it is not possible to generate the effect restriction period triggered by this. However, at least the already raised state level will not decrease due to these operations, and once the production restriction period occurs, the production restriction targets are “volume adjustment button” and “brightness adjustment button”. This means that operations for these functions will be disabled at all, so it is also preferable to suppress mischief for “volume adjustment buttons” and “brightness adjustment buttons” that are not subject to detection of operations by mischief. Will be expected to do.

  Further, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used for detecting mischief, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is sandwiched between “two operations for another operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 381)”. The condition "operation on the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (timing tq2 in FIG. 381)" that is to be formed is conditioned to be operated a predetermined number of times instead of one time. It is more desirable to

  That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", the operation on the sword 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example 3 seconds) according to the detection. An operation on the button 410 is detected, and an operation on the operation button 410 is again detected within a sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) according to the detection, and a seventh timer time (for example 3 seconds) according to the detection When the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again inside, the detection condition concerning the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” is satisfied, and the effect restriction period is generated. Moreover, about 5th-7th timer time, all may be the same time and may be different time. Also, clocking may be performed using the same timer, or may be performed using different timers.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword unit 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. In addition, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), not the operation on the sword unit 5010 but the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again (the number of times specified here is greater than the number of times to be detected (here two times) In the third detection), the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset, and the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the production restriction period is not generated. It is more desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) at a timing while the sword 5010 is operated twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied. The detection condition is satisfied and the production restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or twice (> n times) during the second operation on the sword 5010, the effect restriction period is As it does not occur, it is expected that the condition of occurrence of the production restriction period will be complicated and that a tense feeling such as "Isn't the prank act actually being monitored by the hall side?" Become.

  In addition, in order to achieve such complication, the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation on the sword unit 5010 is performed again within the timer time, or the operation button 410 is l When operating within each timer time for the number of times (> n times), it is desirable to be controlled separately to the state different from the original state (may be different between m times and l times) . Therefore, even when the operation is performed according to the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" in the state controlled to these different states, the effect restriction period does not occur.

  Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) between the two operations on the sword 5010, the effect restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times) If the production restriction period can be generated (same as when operated n times), the production condition of the production restriction period is further complicated, and “the prank action is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that the sense of tension such as Also in this case, it is needless to say that every time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time occurs and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" which are triggers for generating the effect restriction period will be prepared.

  However, such mischievous acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto, and making too strict measures can lead to a disadvantage on the hall side. Therefore, for specific videos appearing in the production restriction period, rather than displaying strong warning content, the content should be of a level that explains the appropriate handling method for the game and production, etc. It is desirable.

  As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and “the operation acceptance for the volume is permitted. As a result, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation acceptance regarding the brightness is permitted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. Thus, the normal state as the non-play state is returned.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 382, the player starts playing a game at timing tq 4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs. It may be assumed that transition to the game execution state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is generated by generating the start winning. In such a case, the above-mentioned intended purpose of quitting the mischief act and starting the game has been achieved, so in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet elapsed. End the production restriction period (function restriction period) of a certain thing.

  However, if the game is started without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility that the reflection will be insufficient. Until the display is ended, each reception of the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment is permitted, but "even if the volume adjustment is performed, the current volume setting value is displayed but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, and the luminance is not Even if it is adjusted, it is desirable to control as a partially limited period, such as displaying the current brightness setting value but not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

  As shown in FIG. 382, when the game execution state is entered in this way, the detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated regardless of whether or not it is controlled during the partial restriction period. Become so. Therefore, even if the operation on the sword unit 5010 or the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the first timer time and the second timer time are not counted with these as a trigger, and the effect restriction period occurs. Absent.

  According to such a configuration, when a transition is made to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration time as the production restriction period, the game is left in the form of a part of the restriction contents when it is in the production restriction period. Since the transition to the execution state is made, it is possible to encourage reflection on prank acts without interrupting the progression of the game effect.

  In addition, about the partial restriction period, not only until the change display of the decorative symbol that triggered the end of the production restriction period is ended, but also the decorative symbol is put in a stopped state with the number of holdings being zero. It may be allowed to continue at least for a period of time until it is in the non-playing state.

  In addition, at a timing at which the game execution state ends and shifts to the non-gaming state (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 382), a predetermined safe time is set and the predetermined safe time elapses. It is desirable that the state in which the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated is continued despite the fact that the game is not in the gaming state. That is, it is assumed that the player's excitement does not cool down in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, and it is assumed that the operation on a plurality of operation means is performed excessively. If a penalty is imposed, it may lead to the immediate termination of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-game state.

  In addition, when a transition is made to a non-gaming state while being controlled as the partial restriction period described above, there is a possibility that reflection on the mischievous action may still be insufficient, so partial restriction until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, detection of the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is permitted again when the safe time has elapsed.

  In addition, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol variation time from the start of variation display of the decoration symbol to the stop thereof. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even if the variation display of the decorative symbol is immediately ended, detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is performed at least until the safe time is ended. It is possible to continue the invalidation state or to continue the partial restriction period.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol variation display is started in the form of the production limitation period (function limitation period), the symbol variation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. According to such a configuration, the above-described partially limited period can be continued for a relatively long time.

  In the example described above, even if the detection approaching the generation limit period is detected within the detection period for the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (the portion where fine dots are applied in FIG. 381). The behavior of is not to appear either. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs for generating a penalty are raised), thereby prompting the user to stop the operation due to mischief. You may do so. The specific sound may be output as a different sound according to the type of the operation means to be detected. Similarly to this, every time the timer time is set by the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time going up the stairs of the penalty occurrence), the display content in the effect display device 1600 changes. Also good.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

[Noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound when opening a store]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  By the way, since the hall is opened for a while and only new customers are about to start playing the game, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment can be frequently performed to start the game with the setting value according to one's preference. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output every time the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is performed, the adjustment confirmation sound will reverberate in the hall and the atmosphere will be spoiled. It's a rise.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to perform an operation for adjusting the volume or to accept an operation for adjusting the brightness between the time when the power is turned on and the predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state in which the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value can be accepted while the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is set to the “predetermined specific value”. It is supposed to be

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the setting value (volume setting value) and the luminance setting value relating to the output volume of the effect sound are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”. It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, by adopting the "specific value" which is automatically set as the setting value of the sound volume which many players tend to prefer, many games can be played in the time zone in which the hall has just been opened. It can be expected that it will be difficult for a person to adjust the volume setting value and the brightness setting value according to his / her preference. Note that the establishment of the predetermined condition may be that a certain time has elapsed since the power was turned on, receiving a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a, or in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The identification process may end.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value or the volume setting value is determined based on the establishment of the predetermined condition or based on the arrival of the predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is established. Acceptance of changes in brightness setting values is allowed, but a special period (opening-only period) during which a sound volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if such a change in the setting values is accepted over a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) First, generate it. And after such a special period (opening-only period) is over, if changes in those setting values are accepted, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. There is. As a result, for a while after opening the hall (until the time required for completing various adjustments by a new customer), various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output. Thus, it is possible to give an opportunity to perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment to start a game with a set value that suits one's preference.

  FIG. 383 is a time chart illustrating an example of the processing according to the special period (the period dedicated to opening a store).

  Now, as shown in FIG. 383, assuming that the power is turned on at timing tr0, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume by the player is satisfied until the predetermined condition is established. It is controlled as the state which does not permit the operation concerning adjustment and the operation reception concerning luminance adjustment. In such a situation, the detection (main control side) related to the game such as the start winning is not permitted, and the game can not be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power recovery appears or no display output is performed, and a standby screen (design stop display, demo screen, etc.) is still not available. Do not show.

  Thereafter, when a timing tr1 at which a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) is reached, detection related to a game such as a start winning is permitted, and a game start waiting state ( It is controlled as a state of waiting for a start prize. Also in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, so that it is possible to recognize that it is in the symbol variation waiting state.

  At this time, while the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”, “the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is permitted, but Even if the change of the setting value is accepted, a special period (opening period only period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such a period dedicated to opening a store can be continued until timing tr2 when a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the occurrence of the period, and when the period is ended at timing tr2, the volume is set. A period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted is generated. In the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (the state of waiting for the variation of the symbol) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and behind it. Various background images displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) (images with lower priority in the layer than the decorative pattern) are displayed when the period for opening the store is shifted to the normal business period There is nothing to change.

  According to such a configuration, even after the state where the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) appears and enters the game start waiting state, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the opening-only period ends) Since the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period (b), it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound reverberating immediately after opening the store. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 comes (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has passed), the automatic confirmation to an adjustment confirmation sound can be output, When various adjustments by new customers have settled down, finer adjustments can be permitted while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. In addition, while maintaining the state that the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen), the system automatically shifts to the normal business period during which the adjustment confirmation sound can be output. Until this time, the player can hardly notice that the control is performed during the opening-only period in which the adjustment sound is not output.

  After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game starts waiting state (after timing tr1), when the change of the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted, the setting according to the changed setting value in the effect display device 1600 is accepted. Parameter display (parameter display on the volume side, parameter display on the luminance side) is performed. Therefore, by confirming such parameter display, it is possible to adjust the setting value according to one's preference.

  However, even if the output of the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed in this way during the period immediately after the opening (the opening dedicated period), the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is reflected as the volume or light amount. After all, the atmosphere in the hall may lead to dyeing in a single color, and there is concern that the atmosphere will be ruined and brought up. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the volume setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 comes, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound It is desirable not to Similarly, with regard to the brightness, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the brightness setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 comes, the changed brightness setting value is used as the light amount. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, each player adjusts the setting value according to his / her preference while confirming the parameter display on the effect display device 1600 during the period immediately after the opening (the opening dedicated period). In other words, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust the set value according to his / her preference, there is no influence of sound or light around the pachinko machine 1, so the atmosphere in the hall is It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  It is to be noted that only the brightness among the volume and the brightness may be maintained in a state where the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the light amount even after the timing tr2 arrives. That is, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption increases due to the operation by the mischief while the game is not started, and the brightness with the higher power consumption compared to the volume is not changed while the game is not started. It is desirable to prevent adjustments from being reflected. Further, unlike the volume adjustment sound, the brightness adjustment sound may not necessarily be output because the adjustment degree can not be confirmed.

  However, even when the timing tr2 has not yet arrived (when the time for opening the store is not fully consumed), the symbol variation (decoration display with decorative symbols) starts based on the winning prize. After that, the player has completed the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment, and it is assumed that the adjustment frequency is greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is prematurely terminated based on the detection It is possible to execute processing to shift to the normal business period.

  However, during the fluctuating display period of the decorative symbol due to the start winning combination that ended the period exclusively for opening the store, the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, and the adjustment confirmation sound associated with the change is output If this happens, it is assumed that many players will perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment after the opening-only period ends early, which may result in a fall.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected before timing tr2 after timing tr1, the period dedicated to opening the store is ended early and the normal business period However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed at least until the variation state of the decorative symbol generated thereby is terminated (in-fluctuation suppression process).

  FIG. 384 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started when a period dedicated to opening a store (special period) is set.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 384, it is assumed that the start winning is detected at timing tr3 when the time as the special period has not been digested yet. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the processing related to the store opening dedicated period is terminated and shifted to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppressing process is started in the normal business period. In this fluctuation suppression processing, while the fluctuation display relating to the decorative symbol is being performed, "the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is permitted, and the change of these setting values is output state. Can be performed to reflect the volume of the lamp or the amount of light from the production lamp in the lighting state, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed. The difference from “processing for the opening-only period” is whether or not the decorative display is in a state where the variable display is being performed, and the change in the setting value is reflected as the volume and the amount of light. The content of suppression for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, such a fluctuation during suppression process is changed to the non-playing state (the number of held is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). And as long as it is not migrated, it keeps running.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol fluctuation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol fluctuation of the fluctuation time is executed only once), and the non-gaming state at timing tr4 When it is immediately returned to (the state in which the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed) (for example, 1 hour has not passed since the occurrence of the opening-only period ended early) Even in the state immediately after the opening of the store, the special period (period for exclusive use of the store) is not generated again.

  That is, in this case, in the non-playing state after timing tr4, when a change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output. Will be controlled. In the normal business period when suppression processing during fluctuation is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the light intensity of the effect lamp for which the changed brightness setting value is also in the light emission state It is supposed to be reflected as In addition, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (the screen at the time of standby) is displayed, and it can be recognized that the symbol is waiting for variation.

  A player who creates a situation such as "finish the game running state immediately after opening the store-dedicated period (special period) early" can not be convinced with the adjustment content made while the adjustment sound is not output, and it will be started once Because it is assumed that the person who has a desire to adjust more finely until the game is interrupted, a special period (open-only period) ) Is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

  In the above example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) for which the period for exclusive use for opening (special period) is continued may be a fixed time after the period for exclusive use for opening (special period) occurs. It may be the time until the specific process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is ended.

  Further, the timing at which the volume setting value and the luminance setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values” may be the timing tr1 or a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. .

  Further, in the above described example, there is a technical feature in the configuration related to the store-opening dedicated period (special period) that occurs after timing tr1, and the contents described above for the processing in the period before timing tr1. It may be realized as different processing.

  Further, in the above described example, at timing tr2, a change is not made to the decorative symbol or background image in the effect display device 1600, but a display change to the extent that an image different from the decorative symbol or background image is additionally displayed If it is, you may make it carry out.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

  Further, in the above-described example, only one of the setting value of the volume and the brightness may be changeable.

[Control to be applied to the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the presentation importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first hit determination is made according to the game ball being received in the first start port 2002, and in the second start port 2004. Regardless of whether or not the second hit determination is made according to the fact that the game ball has been accepted, the symbol variation (the first symbol variation, the second symbol variation) according to the hit determination is performed. After that, a benefit (big hit game) advantageous to the player can be provided. However, the expectation value for those benefits is set so that the second hit determination (the second symbol change) is higher than the first hit determination (the first symbol change).

  In the above-described example, a maximum of about 1 game ball is paid out by repeating the opening / closing pattern that opens the winning prize opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum for the big hit related to the first special symbol 8 times. On the other hand, in the big hits related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the open / close pattern that opens the winning prize opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) for a maximum of 16 times. ing.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the change of the sound volume setting value is “waiting for a game start state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed”, The first side execution state in which the first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed, and "the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is executed In any of the “second-side execution states”, the numerical value range in which the change of the sound volume setting value is allowed to be the same in any of these states.

  According to such a configuration, regardless of the state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state), the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain game interest through sound adjustment in accordance with each state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume of the effect sound is changed in the above-described “game start waiting state” and “first side execution state”. When this is done, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-mentioned "second side execution state", control is performed so as not to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed.

  That is, in the "game start waiting state", since the effect sound is not output because the game is not being executed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, the change is made. It is not possible to confirm the volume of the later volume as an audible sound. For this reason, when in the "game start waiting state", it is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) applied to the output volume of the effect sound is changed.

  In the “first side execution state”, although there is a situation in which a production sound according to the first hit determination is output, this situation is a low-probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low It is often controlled to the state (low probability non-short game state), and there is not much expectation for the effect. In recent years, when in such a low expectation game state, it has been confirmed that the player plays while watching a portable device such as a smartphone. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the “first side execution state”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is surely notified to the player about the change and the volume level after the change. It is desirable to output the

  On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", there is a situation where the effect sound according to the second hit determination is being output, and the probability of getting a big hit is relatively high, the high probability gaming state (high probability time short gaming state It is often controlled by In such a situation, since there is a high degree of expectation to the effect, there is a tendency for volume adjustment to enjoy the effect, so when the volume setting value is changed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output. The entertainingness of the game may be reduced by making it difficult for the effect sound and the BGM to be heard according to the second hit. Therefore, in the “second-side execution state”, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even when the volume setting value is changed, thereby clearing the production sound or BGM according to the second hit determination. It is desirable to preferably maintain the game entertainment by giving an opportunity to adjust the volume under an audible environment.

  However, in the “second-side running state”, the player is more likely to be changed to the big hit mode after the second symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode because the expectation for the effect is increasing. It can be said that securing time (aftertones) for making people aware of it is important for maintaining game interest. In this respect, if the normal processing when being in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after being shifted to the "game start waiting state", the processing according to the "second side execution state" is performed. The player side can easily detect that the game is ended in the lost mode and is in the state of being shifted to the “game start waiting state”, and there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, when the processing concerning the "second side execution state" is completed and it is shifted to the "game start wait state", a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the shift to the "game start wait state" Control is performed so that normal processing when in the “play start waiting state” (processing for allowing the change of the volume setting value and outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) is not performed It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state", "the change of the volume setting value is permitted, but the volume setting value is changed. It is desirable that the process of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the process of not allowing the change of the volume setting value itself or the like be performed. However, it is more likely that the “second side execution state” is still continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the “second side execution state” to the “game start waiting state”. As in the case of the “second side execution state”, “a process that does not output a volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed” is allowed. It is more desirable to do so.

  On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", the degree of expectation for the effect is not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode. Therefore, when the processing relating to the “first side execution state” is completed and the process shifts to the “game start waiting state”, the “first side execution state” is different from the case of the “second side execution state” described above. The above-mentioned normal processing (allowing the change of the sound volume setting value and processing to output the sound volume adjustment confirmation sound when the sound volume setting value is changed) which is also performed when being in the state is continued as it is It is desirable to make it.

  By the way, in the situation controlled to the “first side execution state”, a mischievous operation is performed in which operations on a plurality of operation means are disturbed and performed within a relatively short time due to stress that is not easily won by big hit. There is concern. That is, as a result of being subjected to rough handling, if an abnormality or failure occurs even in one of the operation means, operability and rendition will be significantly reduced, and a further reduction of the game entertainment can not be avoided.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that operation detection has occurred in a plurality of operation means and not only in the case of being controlled to the “first side execution state” but also when being controlled to the “game start waiting state” When the condition is high, the effect restriction period (functional restriction period) in the explanation example of “preventing mischief for plural operation means (see FIGS. 381 and 382)” may be generated.

That is, in this case, some operations predetermined among the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 in any of the "game start waiting state (non-playing state)" and the "first side execution state" When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword unit 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time,
In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that can not appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
・ Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Effective period during which a penalty is imposed, such as that even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change in the brightness setting value for the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed either Control is performed to generate a period of time for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image in the effect display device 1600 is displayed even if an image related to the “first side execution state” has appeared before that. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the operation related to the volume is permitted, and the volume is permitted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation acceptance regarding the luminance is permitted, and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output. The normal state as the “game start waiting state” or the “first side execution state” Will be returned to

  In addition, about the detailed content regarding this production restriction period (function restriction period), another example, etc., it is possible to employ | adopt suitably each content in the description example of "the mischief prevention with respect to several operation means." However, in this case, the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early even if the game start waiting state is shifted to the “first side execution state” when it is in the production restriction period (function restriction period). Under the same conditions as in the "game start wait state", various processes relating to the effect restriction period will be continued. As a result, it is expected to suppress the mischief operation when being controlled to the "first side execution state" with a low degree of expectation.

  On the other hand, when being transferred from the “game start waiting state” to the “second side execution state” when in the effect restriction period (functional restriction period), the “effect restriction period (described above with reference to FIG. 382) A process according to the early termination of the function restriction period) or a modification thereof is appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere at the time when the "second side execution state" having a high degree of expectation is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Because.

  Further, in the above-described example, only one of the setting value of the volume and the brightness may be changeable.

[Periodical period for which operation acceptance is permitted (effective period) its own performance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notification effects) prepared for the selected variation pattern type. And the like), it is possible to execute an effect determination (such as an advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (s) are to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern type may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. The variation effect by the corresponding decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, such as background depiction or movable body operation The expected effect is to be provided as a function having "a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) of the big hit being obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the first variation pattern is displayed regardless of the result of the notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (an “internal reception effect” described later) that is permitted to be received when the base symbol effect has progressed to a specific timing. Further, even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, when the special result is obtained in the notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern is selected. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“additional reception effect”, which will be described later) that is permitted to be received when the design effect based on the second variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the notice effect determination, an operation reception effect (effective) in which the effect reception is permitted even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing. Period) does not occur. A plurality of first fluctuation patterns that generate “internal reception effects” and second fluctuation patterns that can generate “additional reception effects” may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that an “internal reception effect” and an “additional reception effect” can be sequentially generated.

  However, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions etc. is a predetermined change for the effect member that is the object of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the effective period. Since the post-operation effect that generates a display change in the display device 1600, a change in the effect sound in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is only executed, the operation reception effect (effective) Period) It has become scarce in its own stage performance, and there is a concern about the decline in the amusement of the game until the stage after the operation is performed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
A first operation effect means capable of executing an effect after operation in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern comes when an operation by the player is detected;
A second operation effect means capable of executing a post-operation effect in such a manner that when an operation by the player is detected, an elapsed time from the detection timing is continued until a predetermined time value is reached; We are going to prepare.

  According to such a configuration, the operation reception effect (effective period) itself when the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is executed and when the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is executed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved until the post-operation effect is executed.

  That is, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the effect after operation is executed up to a predetermined timing regardless of which of the early period and the late period within the effective period is operated. Therefore, it can be said that performing the operation immediately after the effective period occurs is advantageous for enjoying the effect by maintaining the execution state as the effect after the operation for a long time.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, no matter which timing is operated within the effective period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value. Post-operation presentation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the overall performance time from the start of the effective period to the end of the post-operation effect by operating at a later time rather than operating for a while after the effective period occurs. It can be said that it is advantageous to enjoy the production.

  In this case, the effect generation conditions of the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. The operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the second variation pattern is selected and the notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. A special result is obtained, and it can be realized that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the second variation pattern is generated up to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing. In the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern is different from the specific timing. It may be realized as it occurs when the timing has progressed.

  FIG. 385 shows a first example in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that it continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the effective period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows the example about operation receptionist production.

  Now, assuming that the symbol rendering (rendering pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr1 while the first rendering condition required for the generation of the "first operation receiving rendering permitted to receive rendering receiving" is satisfied, A first operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (valid period) ends without performing the post-operation effect when a timing tr3 has arrived when a predetermined set time has elapsed without receiving the effect. During the execution period of the first operation reception effect for which the effect reception is permitted, the image display over the operation means to be operated and the gauge display of how long the effective time is left are performed to prompt the player to operate Operation promotion presentation is performed.

  When the first operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception permission sound indicating that the effect reception is permitted (or that the effect reception is permitted) is output. . However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptance allowable sound over the predetermined set time, and is in the middle stage where the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a certain timing tr2, it is put in a non-output state so as not to be audible.

  Here, "the acceptance acceptable sound is output" means that "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at timing tr1, and the channel is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept also including making "the reproduction | regeneration period of a reception allowance sound" in the sound data which has become according to timing tr1. Alternatively, the "acceptable tone" may be output before and after the timing tr1 so as to cross the timing tr1. In addition, “to make the non-output state” in this case cancels the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel, and the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. However, it is a concept including the transition to a period in which the “reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data is ended and the subsequent sounds (including silent data) are reproduced.

  And as described above, in such a first operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" as an effect after operation based on the detection of the operation by the player and the effect reception being made With regard to the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the first effect member) started in this way, although it is started, it is based on the fluctuation pattern even when the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period. When a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) arrives, the process is ended. In addition, as the "operation-induced process using the first effect member", for example, it is possible to execute as a process for effecting the first decorative movable body based on the fact that the effect reception has been performed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 385, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr1a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is: It is executed over a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 385, if an effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr2a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), an effect after operation (operation-caused process using the first effect member) Will be executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

  According to such a first operation reception effect, it is possible to operate immediately after the effective period occurs, as an execution state as an effect after operation (execution state of operation-based processing using the first effect member) Can be maintained for a long time, which is advantageous for enjoying the effects, etc.

  As will be described later, in the first operation acceptance effect, the effect is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-caused process using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect acceptance. Even in this case, the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

  FIG. 386 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation reception effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that the elapsed time from the detection timing reaches a predetermined time value.

  Now, assuming that the symbol rendering (rendering pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr11 while the second rendering condition required for the generation of the “second operation receiving rendering permitted to receive rendering receiving” is satisfied, A second operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. As in the case of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect (valid period) is also executed without performing the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 when a predetermined set time elapses without receiving the effect. It is supposed to end. A time value different from a predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and a predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Even during the execution period of the second operation reception effect where the effect reception is permitted, the image display over the operation means to be operated and the gauge display of how long the effective time is left are performed to urge the player to operate Operation promotion presentation is performed.

  Even when the second operation reception effect (valid period) is started, an acceptance allowable sound indicating that the effect reception is allowed (or that the effect reception is allowed) is output. The However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptable sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At timing tr12, which is a non-output state, it is made inaudible.

  In addition to the new assignment of “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel at timing tr11, “the acceptance acceptable sound is output here” has already been assigned to the channel. It is a concept that also includes “the reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data being sent in accordance with the timing tr11. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr11 to after that so as to straddle the timing tr11. In addition to canceling the assignment of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel in "no output" here, the assignment of the sound data to the channel is maintained. Also, the term "playback period of acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is a concept including ending to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played back.

  As described above, in such a second operation reception effect, the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” as the post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect is received. For the post-operation effect thus started (operation-caused processing using the second effect member), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the effective period, the effect acceptance is The elapsed time from when it was made is continued until a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the valid period) is reached. The “operation-causing process using the second effect member” can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the second decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that the effect is accepted at relatively early timing tr11a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), the effect after operation (operation-based process using the second effect member) is The process is executed from the timing tr11a to a timing tr14 at which a predetermined time value elapses. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that the effect is accepted at relatively late timing tr12a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), the effect after operation (operation-induced process using the second effect member) Is executed from the timing tr12a to a timing tr15 (a timing that comes after the timing tr14) when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period occurs until the post-operation effect ends after the effective period starts. Thus, it is possible to provide such an effect that it is advantageous for maintaining the presentation time as a whole for a long time and enjoying the presentation.

  As will be described later, also in the second operation acceptance effect, the effect is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-caused processing using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect acceptance. Even when it is executed, the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

  As described with reference to FIG. 385 and FIG. 386, the first and second operation reception effects (effective period) are provided with different renditions themselves, and the operation reception effects (effective period) are mutually different effects By generating the event based on the satisfaction of the condition, it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (effective period) to the post-operation effect.

  However, only by adopting the configuration according to the first and second operation reception effects (effective period), the following problems remain. That is, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is advantageous to enjoy the effect when operating early in the effective period, or it is advantageous to enjoy the effect when operating late in the effective period. Since a preferable operation timing for enjoying effects is determined, such as being present, there are still aspects in which the effect in the effective period is scarce, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, it is more preferable to execute the operation reception effect as the special operation reception effect having the aspect described below.

FIG. 387 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, assuming that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr21 while the special effect condition required for the generation of the special operation reception effect is satisfied, the special effect is based on the progress to the timing tr21. Generate an operation reception effect (effective period). Although this special operation reception effect (effective period) will be described later, different from the first and second operation reception effects, a predetermined set time has elapsed and timing tr23 comes with no effect reception being made. Even if there is no operation, the reception of the production always occurs within the effective period, and the post-operation production described later is executed. Although this will also be described later, as the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect, a time value longer than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect or the predetermined setting time in the second operation reception effect is set.

  In addition, when the special operation reception effect (valid period) is started, an acceptable reception sound indicating that the production reception is permitted (or that the production reception is permitted) is output. Be done. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment uses the permissible reception sound (FIG. 387) as the permissible reception sound (FIGS. 385 and 386) generated in response to the first and second operation reception effects. The output state is continued for a longer time. In this example, the acceptable sound shown in FIG. 387 is also made non-audible at timing tr22, which is the middle stage where the predetermined set time has not yet passed, so that it cannot be audible. However, the acceptable reception sound shown in FIG. 387 may be one in which the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 arrives.

  In addition to the new assignment of "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel at timing tr21, "the acceptance acceptable sound is output here" is already in the assigned state for the channel. It is a concept that also includes “the reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data being received in time with the timing tr21. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr21 to after that so as to straddle the timing tr21. In addition to canceling the assignment of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel in "no output" here, the assignment of the sound data to the channel is maintained. Also, the term "playback period of acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is a concept including ending to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played back.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, when an operation by the player is detected within the valid period and the effect is received, the “first movable” shown in FIG. The operation-induced process using the decorative body (first effect member) and the “operation-based process using the second movable decorative body (second effect member)” shown in FIG. 386 are started in parallel. It has become. Therefore, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is started, but the “operation-based process using the first effect member” thus started is at any timing within the effective period. Even when an effect is accepted, the event is terminated when a predetermined timing tr24 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern arrives, and “operation using the second effect member” The “cause process” is started. However, the “operation-caused process using the second effect member” started in this way can be accepted regardless of the timing of the effect received within the valid period. Continue until the elapsed time from the time when the event occurs is reached to a predetermined time value (for example, a setting time longer than the predetermined setting time as the valid period). To become.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 387, assuming that the effect is accepted at a relatively early timing tr21a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), “Operation due to operation using the first effect member” of the effects after operation among the effects after operation Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but in the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” in the post-operation presentation, the time value predetermined from the timing tr21a is It ends at the timing tr25 which has passed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 387, assuming that the effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr22a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), “after operation due to the operation using the first effect member” "Processing" is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in the post-operation presentation is predetermined from the timing tr22a It will be performed to the timing tr26 (the timing which comes after the timing tr25) which the time value passed.

  As described above, the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment is generated when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When the effect is received within the special operation reception effect (effective period), the first effect member continues the execution state until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. The operation-based process is performed, and the operation-based process using the second effect member is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value.

  According to such a special operation reception effect, if an operation is performed immediately after the effective period occurs, the execution state of the “operation-caused process using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a price to become, the end timing of the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” of the post-operation effects comes at a relatively early stage. Yes, if you operate at a late time without operating for a while after the effective period has occurred, the end timing of "operation-based processing using the second effect member" in the post-operation production is this Although it can be made to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a demerit that it will not be possible to maintain long the execution state of "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" in the post-operation effect.

In other words, in the special operation reception production, there is no operation timing that is most desirable for exciting production,
-In exchange for shortening the time until the operation-based processing using the second effect member is ended, the execution state of the "operation-based processing using the first effect member" is extended to enjoy this (Do you operate early in the validity period), or,
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of "operation-based processing using the first effect member", extend the time until the "operation-based processing using the second effect member" is ended and enjoy this (Do you operate late in the effective period?), Or
-The time for which the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is maintained as an execution state and the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is ended are sacrificed little by little, As a balance (operating at a timing that is not early or late within the validity period)
The special operation reception effect itself can be made to have a strategic operation effect such as this, thereby providing an operation reception effect that is hard to occur in which the operation timing can be selected according to the player's mood You will be able to

  As will be described later, in the special operation reception effect, when an effect is received when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the post-operation effect (the operation-induced process using the first effect member, While the operation origination process using a 2nd presentation member is performed, the output state of a acceptance | permission acceptance sound is cancelled | released at this time.

  Here, in the above-described example, when the effect is received within the special operation reception effect (FIG. 387), “the first effect member continues the execution state until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. It is decided to execute the operation-based process used and the operation-based process using the second effect member which continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value. . However, even when the special operation reception effect is generated, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, the case in which the big hit judgment has failed or the case in which the predetermined effect judgment has failed) Even if the effect is accepted within the special operation acceptance effect, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is not performed, and this is compared with the case where the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 387). It is more preferable that the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” in which the “predetermined time value” is set relatively short is performed in different effect modes.

  According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect is generated, “when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied,“ the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. “Operation-based processing using the first performance member” and “Operation-based processing using the second performance member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing of reception of the rendering reaches a predetermined time value” Since it falls into the same effect content as the operation reception effect (the first and second operation reception effect) which is executed only one of them, the tension when the special operation reception effect occurs by giving such an effect risk A feeling can be maintained suitably. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, "the operation-based process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "from the timing when the effect is received. The first operation reception effect or the second operation is performed when the post-operation effect is performed in parallel with the operation-based process using the second effect member continued until the elapsed time of the time reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable that the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing is higher than when the effect after operation appears in the reception effect.

  However, even though the special operation reception effect is performed, this may not be detected well (detection error) and the effect reception may not be performed, and as a result, the effective period ends without the effect reception being performed. If there is such a thing, the player who saw the situation that the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed even though the operation is performed is misidentified as having fallen to an operation reception effect in which only one operation is performed And there is concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, for the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the operation acceptance is automatically generated (automatically received) within the effective period, and “predetermined in the effect pattern” Operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the reached timing comes, and "the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches the predetermined time value." It is desirable that “operation-based processing using 2 rendering members” be performed respectively. The method for automatically generating the operation reception (automatic reception) and the effect mode related thereto may be any of the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300, or an appropriate combination, and the contents of the description It is possible to use

  In the above-described explanatory example, upon generation of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, the acceptance permission sound is output which suggests that the effect reception has been permitted. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 385 to FIG. 387, the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is an acceptance permission sound that is output when the special operation reception effect is generated. It is assumed that the reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptance acceptable sound output at the time of generation of the effect.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception becomes acceptable (when the image display over the operation means to be operated and the gauge display indicating how long the effective time remains) By confirming how long the permissible reception sound that is in the output state is continued, the operation reception effect is “the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. The operation causing process using the effect member and the operation causing process using the second effect member which continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value are executed. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the special operation reception effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time that can maintain the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect reception is made). Thus, when it is recognized whether or not the operation reception effect is "special operation reception effect", there is a disadvantage that the effective strategicity that can be selected by the player is narrowed.

  However, even when it is recognized whether or not the operation is a special operation reception effect, it is important that the staging strategy remains to some extent. Therefore, regarding the output time of the acceptable reception sound (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) that is output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated, the “predetermined special operation reception effect (valid period)” is set. It is desirable to carry out as what will be made into a non-output state when a specific time which is less than half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of "" has elapsed. According to such a configuration, when the specific time less than half of the “predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation reception effect (valid period)” has elapsed, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state. If the output state is maintained, it will be possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed, so that “a predetermined set time as a special operation reception effect (effective period) It is possible to provide dramatic strategicity in a state in which half or more of the timing tr21 to tr23) is left.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception acceptance sound that is output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated is accepted when in the output state. Even though the output state is maintained, the acceptance sound that is output when the special operation reception effect is generated is forcibly terminated when the effect is received in the output state. I have to. That is, in this case, when an effect is received in a situation in which it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation acceptance effect (a situation where the specific time has not elapsed since the reception allowable sound is output), the operation reception effect Is a “special operation reception effect” and whether a more highly anticipated aspect appears as a post-operation effect is an important concern, but one of them (the operation reception effect is “special operation reception effect” It can be easily recognized only by confirming whether or not the output state of the acceptance allowable sound is ended with the effect acceptance as the opportunity. For example, even if it is recognized that the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is not generated as a result of the output state of the acceptance permission sound being not ended, the feeling is switched to "more expect as the operation after operation It will be expected to concentrate on "whether the high aspect has appeared". In this case, “if the aspect with higher expectation appears as the effect after the operation, the effect is designed to have a relationship such that the rate at which the special operation reception effect newly occurs is high until the symbol is stopped. It is desirable.

  In addition, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, how much the effective time is displayed and the image display that tricks the operation means used as the operation target in each operation reception effect A gauge display indicating whether it remains or not is displayed, and an operation promoting effect for urging the player to perform an operation is performed. In this point, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is received, the gauge display is left (displayed), “The execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. “Operation-induced processing using a production member” and “operation-caused processing using a second production member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the production is received reaches a predetermined time value” are started. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period is the timing at which the production is accepted based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display after the production is accepted. This makes it possible to predict, for example, whether or not the execution state related to the operation-based process using the first effect member is immediately terminated. As a method of starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296 or an appropriate combination may be used. Is possible.

  In the special operation reception effect, if it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception effect occurs by executing the operation related display (precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence before the effect reception is permitted. It is desirable to do so. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player preferably enjoys strategic strategicity over the entire period within the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute the operation related display (prediction effect) that suggests the occurrence before the reception of the effect is permitted. The operation-related display may be executed as "a short-term precursory effect inferior to the timing indication function", as compared with the case where the special operation reception effect with a high degree of expectation occurs. It is desirable in order not to have it.

  Here, as the operation-related display (a short time indication effect lacking in the timing suggestion function) performed in the effect display device 1600 before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs, For example, it can be realized as an image displayed in a fade-in state (such as a white-out image) when “image display with an operating means tricky” appears in a fade-in manner.

  FIG. 388 is a time chart showing an example of processing related to operation-related display when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are performed, and processing related to channel assignment of sound data including allowable reception sound. is there.

  That is, from an ergonomic point of view, when the effective period is generated, the suggestion image (operation-related display) is displayed only for several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the effective period is generated. It is known that an operation can be performed so that an effect is received at an unexpected timing. However, even if it is for a few frames, if the "image display with the manipulation means deceived" is displayed in the normal mode even though the valid period has not occurred, the "operation means There is a possibility that a situation where the effect reception is not made even though the operation is performed in a state where the image display “foreseeing” is displayed, may cause a decrease in the game entertainment.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 388, the timing trA several frames before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. The operation related display is started based on the above, but in the situation where the effective period has not occurred, "image display over the operation means" is not displayed in the normal mode.

  More specifically, at the timing trA, the “allowable” that can be realized as a fade-in image in which the “image display with the manipulation means turned off” is displayed in a fade-in manner, a predetermined effect image, or the like. Start “pre-operation related display”. Then, when the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11) arrives in a state where the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed in this way, the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed and the “image showing the operation means” is displayed. It will be transferred to the state where "display" is displayed in the normal mode.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, an acceptable reception sound is output that suggests that the production reception is permitted when the effective period occurs. As shown in FIG. 388, the output of the acceptable reception sound is not started at the timing trA but is started at the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11).

  That is, in order to make it possible to operate so that the effect reception is made at the timing when the effective period has just occurred, the acceptance acceptable sound is also output from several frames before the effective period occurs. It seems that it is not desirable to make it However, if the acceptable reception sound is output several frames before the effective period occurs, the output timing will deviate from the appearance timing of “image display with manipulation means”. As a result, this may give a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. On the other hand, it is possible to output a pre-permissible operation related sound different from the permissible reception sound during the period from timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11). However, if the pre-permissible operation-related sound is output in such a short period, the pre-permissible operation-related sound may not be an independent production sound, but may be heard integrally with the reception allowable sound, Eventually, there is a concern that it may cause a sense of incongruity as if sound deviation has occurred.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, several frames of the operation related display (pre-permitted operation related display) are displayed prior to the occurrence of the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect. On the other hand, the operation related sound (pre-permission operation related sound) is not executed intentionally, and only the acceptance acceptable sound is output when the effective period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 388, based on the arrival of the timing tr1, the "acceptance sound is included in sound data" is assigned to the channel to output the acceptance sound.

  In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 comes, the assignment permission state of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” is ended, so that the acceptance acceptable sound is in the non-output state. There is. However, the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” itself may continue the assignment state to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is ended at timing tr2.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 388, when the effect reception is performed between the timing tr1 to tr2 (the timing tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect reception is permitted is ended and “image display over the operation means is performed. "Is hidden. On the other hand, as for "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound", the assignment state to the channel is maintained, and the acceptance acceptable sound is not forcibly terminated halfway as described above.

  FIG. 389 is a time chart showing an example of processing relating to operation related display when special operation reception effect is performed, and processing relating to channel assignment of sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound.

  As shown in FIG. 389, also in the special operation reception effect, the operation related display (pre-allowance related operation display) is performed when the timing trB before the timing tr21 at which the valid period occurs is reached. However, the “period of timing trB to tr21” has a length exceeding twice (more preferably 10 times) the “period of timing trA to tr1” shown in FIG. In the pre-permissible operation-related display displayed within, the “expectation degree regarding whether the post-operation presentation performed when the presentation is accepted is performed in a highly expected manner” or “expectation degree at which the jackpot symbol appears” As suggested, any of a plurality of presentation modes can be selectively made to appear. It should be noted that, in a situation where the valid period has not occurred, “image display with the manipulation means turned off” is not displayed in the normal mode, as in the example shown in FIG.

  For example, in the “pre-permission operation related display” started at timing trB, the content is different from the “pre-permission operation related display” shown in FIG. 388, and “image display over the operation means” is followed ( A plurality of effect images are repeatedly moved and displayed toward the portion displayed at the timing tr21), and the aura effect with storyliness is slightly described such as making it non-displayed at the portion (see FIGS. 241 to 259) Any aspect of “specific operation related rendering” may be applied). At this time, any of a plurality of modes can be displayed as an effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the modes is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 comes in the state where the "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed in this way, the "image display over the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode from the state where the "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed. It will move to the state displayed.

  In this respect, also in the special operation reception effect, as described above, when the effective period occurs, the reception permission sound is output to indicate that the effect reception has been permitted, but this reception permission is allowed. As shown in FIG. 389, the sound is output from the timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a partial section in the sound data assigned to the channel at the timing trB.

  That is, as described above, the special operation reception effects are significantly larger than the "minimum time required for ergonomically enabling operation immediately after the effective period occurs" before the effective period occurs. The “pre-acceptance operation display” with high performance is performed using a long time (timing trB to tr21). Therefore, in order to further improve the rendering in such a rendering period (timing trB to tr21), the rendering sound (pre-acceptance operation related sound) matching the "pre-permission operation related display" displayed in the same period is output It is desirable to make it In addition, since the rendering period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for rendering, even if the rendering sound (pre-permission operation related sound) is output within the period, acceptance acceptance is allowed There can be no inconvenience that the sound can be heard as an integrated sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the pre-permissible operation related display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the pre-permissible operation related sound is output, and these output states are set to the timing tr21. It is made to continue until Then, when the timing tr21 arrives, the "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed, and the "image display with the operating means turned over" is displayed in the normal mode, and the "pre-permission operation related" The state is shifted from the state where “sound” is output to the state where “acceptable sound” is output.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 389, one sound data including a reproduction section of “pre-permission operation-related sound” and a reproduction section of “acceptance acceptable sound” based on the arrival of timing trB is used as a channel. The above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized by allocating to the above.

  According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, with respect to the reception allowable sound that is output when the effective period is generated, a part of the sound data that is assigned to the channel in a form extending from the predation effect to the special operation reception effect. It will be output as a production sound played back during the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is allocated to the channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (such as when the anticipation effect occurs), and the first half is an effect according to the anticipation effect (pre-permission operation related display) The sound (pre-allowable operation-related sound) can flow to indicate when the special operation reception effect occurs, and after the effective period occurs, the channel assignment is based on the reception of the effect. Since the cancellation can be appropriately performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception is made. As an output method for “one sound data” including the playback section of “pre-allowance-related sound” and the playback section of “acceptable sound”, first, the expectation level (when symbol variation is stopped) After preparing multiple sound data with different ratios of jackpot symbols), any one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as the result of the jackpot determination (or performance determination (notice determination etc.)) It is desirable to realize the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively assigning to the channel based on the basis. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the playback section of “pre-allowable operation-related sound (prediction effect)”, but different in the playback section of “acceptable sound (operation reception effect)”. It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

  That is, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is made between the timing tr21 to tr22, the state in which the effect reception is permitted is ended and "image display over the operation means" is not displayed. In addition to this, the assignment state to the channel is ended also for "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound", and the output concerning the acceptance acceptable sound is forced to be terminated halfway through that. As described above. Therefore, the player can confirm that the special operation acceptance effect has been executed even after the effect is accepted by confirming whether the allowable sound is forcibly set to the non-output state when the effect is accepted. Will be able to make

  Even in the case of one piece of sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half part) of the effect sound (pre-allowance operation related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (pre-allowance operation related display) is in the playback state. In a certain situation (timing trB to tr21), even if an operation is performed by the player, this is not forcibly terminated. Only in the situation (timing tr21 to tr22) of the effect sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the valid period is the playback state (timing tr21 to tr22), the assignment state to the channel is released based on the operation by the player. It becomes.

  The one sound data (sound data including the operation-related sound before acceptance and the acceptance acceptable sound) is allocated prior to the timing trB, and has already been allocated at the timing trB. Also good. As described above, the assignment state to the channel may be continued after the timing tr22. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is ended at the timing tr22.

  In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 comes, the assignment permission state of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” is ended, so that the acceptance acceptable sound is in the non-output state. There is. However, the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” itself may continue the assignment state to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is ended at timing tr2.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 385 to FIG. 389, “a plurality of acceptance acceptable sounds having different lengths for maintaining the output state” is prepared as an acceptance acceptable sound accompanying the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect, and the effect acceptance is performed. A different acceptance allowable sound is generated between the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect) having different effects after the operation. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the allowable reception sound is continued, the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect) (or the first operation reception effect) are provided although there is a demerit that the above-described staging strategy is narrowed. 2 operation reception effect) can be recognized.

  In addition, the plurality of allowable reception sounds continue to be the first reception allowable sound (special operation reception effect) whose output state is terminated when an operation by the player is received, and the output state continues. And a second acceptable sound (first and second operation reception effects) to be included. Therefore, when an operation is performed so that a production reception is performed while the reception permission sound is in the output state, a special operation reception is performed by confirming whether the output state of the reception permission sound is terminated when the production reception is performed. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

  However, the acceptable reception sound is supposed to be in a non-output state when the effective period ends, and the output state is maintained when the post-operation effect is started. Doing so can interfere with the production. In this regard, in the above explanation example, the reception effect sound whose output state is ended when the effect reception is made is the first reception allowable sound on the side where the time set value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( Special operation reception effect).

  That is, in this case, when the effect is accepted in the output state of "the second acceptance acceptable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively shortened", the output state is maintained. However, since the time set value at which the output state is maintained is originally shortened, the second acceptable sound will soon become a non-output state, and it can be said that it is difficult to interfere with the production. On the other hand, when the effect is accepted in the output state of "the first acceptance acceptable sound on the side where the time setting value at which the output state is maintained is relatively long", the original time setting at which the output state is maintained Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so it does not interfere with the presentation.

  In addition, it is recognized which of the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is generated by confirming how long the output state of the reception permission sound is continued. Even if there is a player to be used, if the output state of the acceptable reception sound is maintained after the time set value for the second acceptable sound has passed, the first acceptable sound is not the second acceptable sound but the second acceptable sound. It is possible to predict that is in a situation where is output. In this point, even if it is confirmed that the output state of the first acceptance acceptable sound is not ended, by confirming that the first acceptance acceptable sound is in the non-output state when the effect acceptance is generated, It becomes possible to confirm early whether the prediction that special operation reception staging is occurring is correct.

  Further, in the configurations shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, when the effective period of the operation reception effect occurs, an unauthorized operation related display indicating that the effective period is about to occur soon will be displayed. The operation related display includes a first display of pre-permission operation related display (see FIG. 388) and a second display of non-permitted operation related display (see FIG. 389). In this regard, when the first pre-permissible operation-related display with a short display time is performed, the “sound data including the permissible reception sound” is unassigned to the channel, and is matched with the timing when the valid period occurs. By assigning the sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound to the channel, the acceptance acceptable sound is output. That is, in this case, the production sound corresponding to the first pre-permissible operation related display is not output, but the operation from the occurrence of the effective period is urged without causing a sense of incongruity as if a sound shift has occurred. become able to.

  On the other hand, when the second pre-acceptance operation related display having a long display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" is sent to the channel from when the second pre-permission operation related display is performed. In the state of assignment, the reproduction period of the acceptance sound comes in accordance with the timing at which the effective period occurs, so that the acceptance sound is output. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the occurrence of the special operation reception effect (eg, when the precursor effect is generated), and the first half is the precursor effect (display related to allowable pre-operation). In addition to being able to suggest the timing at which the special operation reception effect occurs due to the production sound (pre-allowable operation related sound) flowing according to the Since the channel assignment can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception is made.

  That is, in the pre-permissible operation related display shown in FIG. 389, the pre-permissible operation related sound corresponding to the pre-permissible operation related sound is output and the acceptance allowable sound is further output when the valid period occurs. In the display, the permissible pre-permission operation related sound is not output and the permissible reception sound is output when the valid period occurs.

  In the above-described explanation example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, as the “effect member”, an effect display device 1600, a speaker, an effect lamp, a movable decorative body, and the like can be used. In addition, as the “first effect member”, any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted. As the “second effect member”, Of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, any one different from the “first effect member” can be employed.

  Further, in the above-described example, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same or different between the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect). When the operation means to be operated is different, the overhead image displayed in each valid period is different.

  In the first operation reception effect, “the operation-induced process using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” is executed as the post-operation effect. “Operation-based processing using a first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives The “operation-induced process using the second effect member” may be performed as an effect after operation. Still further, an operation-induced process using an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed. However, in the post-operation effect according to the first operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The origination process is also executed as the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

  In the second operation reception effect, “the operation-induced process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value” is executed as the post-operation effect. However, “the operation-based process using the first effect member continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value” and “the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives The “operation-induced process using the second effect member” of which the execution state is continued until the time may be performed as an effect after operation. Furthermore, an operation-based process using effect members different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, but any operation after the operation according to the second operation reception effect may be performed. The cause process is also executed as continuing until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value.

  In the special operation reception effect, “the operation-caused process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received” "Operation-induced processing using the second effect member continued until reaching a defined time value" is performed as effect after operation, but the effect member is different from the first effect member and the second effect member The operation-caused process used may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, an operation-based process that is executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and an elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received is predetermined What is necessary is just to be mixed with the operation-induced process executed as being continued until the value is reached.

  Further, in the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 385 to 389, the valid period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the valid period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I try to do it. By setting such a long time, it is possible to enjoy the effective period with the above-mentioned dramatic strategy.

  In the first pre-permissible operation related display with a short display time (see FIG. 388), “expectation as to whether the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted is performed in a highly expected manner” or “big hit” In the second pre-permission operation-related display (see FIG. 389) with a long display time, the “post-operation effect that is performed when an effect is accepted is expected. It is desirable to be able to suggest an “expectation as to whether it is performed in a high manner” or “an expectation that a jackpot symbol appears”.

  In the “effective period of special operation reception effects” set as a relatively long time value, “after the operation performed when the effect reception is made by displaying any of a plurality of display modes having different degrees of expectation” It is desirable to be able to indicate the degree of expectation as to whether the rendition is performed in a highly expected manner or the degree of expectation with which the jackpot symbol appears.

  In addition, in the special operation reception effect, "at any time in the effective period when the effect reception is made," the effect by the first effect member generated due to the effect reception "is" attributable to the effect reception " In order to cause the player to recognize that the same effect content as the effect after the operation is to have the relationship in which the execution state is terminated earlier than the “effect by the second effect member that occurs”. desirable.

  In the above-described example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, the pachinko machine 1 can generate the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect based on the establishment of different effect conditions. However, the first operation reception effect does not occur as non-loading, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not be generated as non-loading, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect do not occur as they are not mounted, and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. .

  The special operation reception effects shown in the above-described explanation examples shown in FIGS. 385 to 389 output specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to the channel in a suppression manner or silence. In particular, a state in which the reception of the production is permitted may be generated.

[More detailed performance about the acceptance sound]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (such as advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (such as advance notice effect) is to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body operation (feature effect). As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, such as background depiction or movable body operation The expected effect is to be provided as a function having "a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) of the big hit being obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the identification of the highly expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops to SP reach (such as reach production with background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination. No matter which result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), if the design effect based on the specific change pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect acceptance Is allowed to generate an operation reception effect (valid period). However, as will be described later, the acceptable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated has a different aspect according to the result of the effect determination, and thereby the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is intended to indicate the rate of being played or the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected among the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed. Even when there is a special result obtained by the effect determination (for example, advance notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, if the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the operation for which the effect acceptance is permitted It is possible to generate a reception effect (effective period). However, if a predetermined change pattern is selected, no special result is obtained in the effect determination. Even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined change pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing, the operation reception effect (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the operation reception effect (effective period) generated with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (effective period) generated when the symbol effect based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach It is executed as a production.

  In addition to the above “specific variation pattern”, the variation pattern for generating an operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach even if any result is obtained as the preliminary effect determination is made. May also be provided. However, the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expectation change pattern (non-reach change pattern) even if any result is obtained as the preliminary effect determination. It is desirable to avoid this or to lower the selection ratio.

  By the way, an operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is determined in advance for an effect member to be effected as long as an operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Only the post-operation effect that generates the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. The reception performance (valid period) itself has poor performance, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced until the post-operation performance is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
・ During the execution period of the symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), “BGM reproduction (rendering sound of a specific type)” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) is in non-suppression mode Among the being output, the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) is given during the execution period of the symbol presentation (rendering pattern) based on the low expectation non-suppression reception effect which gives the operation opportunity and the high expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern). Depending on whether "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state (a playback period in which an audible sound is recorded among sound data has ended, a channel assignment In other words, it is possible to generate at least a high expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity.

  In such a configuration, when giving an operation opportunity, the output in the non-suppression mode of “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is maintained (low expectation non-suppression reception effect), “BGM reproduction There is a case where (a specific type of effect sound) is output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state (suppression operation reception effect), and the mode according to those operation reception effects (low expectation non-suppression reception Since the proportion (expected degree) of winning a big hit will differ according to the effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect, the effect (when the operation opportunity is given) when the operation opportunity is given Amusement entertainment can be improved by the performance of whether or not “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is suppressed.

  However, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is output in the suppression mode or in silence when the operation opportunity is given, compared with the low expectation non-suppression reception effect There is concern that the performance will be poor.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it will be described later, when generating the high expectation suppression reception effect, the specific sound which is not output when the low expectation non-control reception effect occurs is acceptable acceptance sound Can be output as. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in performance when a high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated is greater than the acceptable reception sound that is output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. This is used as a sound whose output state is maintained over a long period of time, and this also suitably suppresses that the presentation performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated becomes poor.

  On the other hand, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, operation is performed because “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is output in the suppression mode or silence at the time of giving the operation opportunity, or in a non-output state. There is also an aspect that it becomes possible to emphasize the staged sound according to this when the stage effect is generated, and it can be said that this is useful in improving the game interest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it will be described later, with regard to the acceptance sound that is output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is produced, the effect acceptance is made when the acceptance sound is in the output state The output state is ended based on the fact that the effect reception has been made. As a result, the production sound according to the post-operation production can be made to stand out without being disturbed by the acceptable reception sound.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect is “when the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed, the post-operation effect is not generated and the set time ends. "Non-automatic reception mode that can be generated", as well as "automatic reception mode capable of generating post-operation effects even if no operation is detected within a set time for which the reception of the performance is allowed" Can also be generated by

  That is, when the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, the same post operation operation as when the operation is detected is executed even if the operation is not detected within the set time for which the effect reception is permitted. As a result, the player does not perform the operation, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the effect can not be confirmed after the operation. However, although it will be described later, more strictly, the output time for the effect sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time for the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect is It is supposed to be shorter than it was.

  Moreover, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when no operation is detected, an effect reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within a set time (the automatic button function is enabled). After the operation reception is performed based on the automatically generated effect reception. In other words, in this case, since the reception of the production always occurs before the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, the reception of the production may be made within the set time within the time after the specific timing. It will disappear, and the length as an effective period in which presentation reception is permitted will come to be shortened substantially. Thus, unlike the case where the post-operation production is started after the set time has expired, the automatic button function is activated in such a way that the production tempo is accelerated rather than causing a production delay. Can be realized.

  In addition, when the automatic button function is enabled within the set time as described above, the operation opportunity is substantially lost despite the situation where the set time has not ended. It is expected that the player side will operate positively at an earlier stage within the set time, afraid of this, or will play a game with a sense of tension for the effect.

  In order to obtain such an effect, the “gauge display of how much effective time remains” displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed until a specific timing at which the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable not to indicate the remaining time, but to display the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. When such a display method is employed, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, the effect reception is always performed at a time point before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes “0”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, not only in the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, It is made to be able to output the reception permission sound which suggests that the effect reception is permitted or the effect reception is permitted. As a result, the effect reception is automatically generated when the user forgets to operate, and it is possible to preferably suppress the situation where the effect reception can not be generated due to his / her operation.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode is generated, the specification is not performed when the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Since the sound can be output as the acceptance acceptable sound, by confirming the type of the acceptance acceptable sound, an operation acceptance effect to be executed in the automatic acceptance mode is generated instead of the non-automatic acceptance mode. You will be able to recognize that

  On the other hand, in the post-operation effect, there is usually an effect risk that is executed in a mode with low expectation. Therefore, it is not always necessary to improve the game entertainment by operating the post-operation effect. There is also an aspect that is not limited. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the reception allowable sound is output for a sufficient time to indicate that the production reception is permitted, the reception allowable sound in the output state is displayed. By completing the process relatively early, “a time during which it is possible to think about whether or not to produce an effect is generated” is created while no acceptable sound is output.

  However, even if the acceptance sound is temporarily terminated early even in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, there is a concern that a misunderstanding may be caused that "the effect reception is not permitted because the automatic button functions". Arise. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to the present embodiment, the output state of the reception acceptable sound is maintained for a relatively long time, whereby the automatic button is not yet functioning and the production reception is permitted. It is suggested that the player is in the state, which in turn can encourage the player's operation in a sense of security that "the automatic button is not yet functioning".

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect, “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppression manner or silence, or is in a non-output state. An operation opportunity is given while a suppression reception effect (in this case, a high expectation suppression reception effect) or “BGM playback (a specific type of effect sound)” is output in a non-suppression mode. A non-suppression reception effect (here, a low expectation non-suppression reception effect) can be generated in an automatic reception mode or a non-automatic reception mode, or a production reception is permitted, or a production reception There is a technical feature in that it is made to generate the acceptance sound which suggests that it becomes an acceptable state, respectively in the form which makes their original rendition more enhanced.

  In the following, such technical features will be described. In explaining the technical features, the “acceptable sound” will be described again. It suggests that the output has been started within the set time and the reception of the production is allowed, or the output is started before the set time when the production reception is allowed and the production reception is allowed. It is suggested that it will be in a state of motion, for example, it will be output as an effect sound such as "Pikeen". However, in the case where the output state is set before the set time in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the output state of the “acceptable sound” is maintained in a manner that crosses the timing at which the set time occurs ( Within the set time (within the period during which production reception is allowed) is required), and more than the time from when the "acceptable sound" is set to the output state until the set time occurs, It is desirable to set so that the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the "acceptable sound" will be longer. In this sense, the “acceptable sound” is output only when a set time (valid period) occurs, and is in an output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that it is an output sound within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) in response to an operation by the player or as the output time elapses.

  In addition, “acceptable sound” may be assigned to a channel as single effect sound data and output (see FIG. 388), or another effect sound (for example, a set time (effective period) Output to be assigned to a channel as a single effect sound data combined with the omen effect performed before the occurrence of) or the effect sound output according to the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" etc. (Refer to FIG. 389), and the implementation method may be adopted appropriately.

  FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability change, non-time short), the start condition is satisfied (pending and taken), and as a result of the change pattern determination being performed, "predetermined change" in "low expected change pattern not even formed reach condition" If “pattern” is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. Then, after that, the variation design of the decorative symbol (such as the depiction of effects according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation production The effect (preliminary effect effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) according to the selected “predetermined fluctuation pattern”. The effect pattern determination (sub control side) is performed based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination (main control side) including each effect example described below, and the advance notice determination (sub control is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination When the control side is performed, regarding the processing relating to the preliminary presentation effect, the “variation pattern determination” may be set as the “effect pattern determination”, and the “variation pattern” may be replaced as the “effect pattern” and processed.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the predetermined change pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the change effect of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 390 (b). An operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated when a timing tr32 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start has arrived. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect according to the low expectation change pattern (predetermined change pattern),
-Set a set time during which the reception of the production is allowed while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (the production pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. 390 (a), (b)) ”and if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the reception of the production is permitted, the post-operation production does not occur and "Non-automatic acceptance mode (see Figure 390 (j))" where the setting time is ended
It is made to generate as "non-suppression / non-automatic receptionist effect" performed by.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (rendering pattern) according to the low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the generation of the operation reception effect is performed by the “sound of BGM reproduction” becoming a suppression mode. Because the set time (valid period) for which the stage reception is allowed without suddenly appearing, such as suggesting, is suddenly set (non-suppression reception stage), it is surprising from the player side. As a result, a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when attempting to operate. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time ends without any post-operation effects (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making the user aware of the risk of missing the opportunity for the production after the operation, it is preferable to feel tension when the production (production pattern) for the low-expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is being executed. Will be able to maintain.

  However, although it is executed as such a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without generating a post-operation effect contrary to the player's intention. If there are frequent occurrences, there is a concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 390 (b), (c), and (g), a set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the effect reception is allowed is generated. However, when the timing tr31 comes a little before, the output of the “acceptable sound” is started, and the output state is maintained in a manner straddling the timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the production acceptance is permitted at the timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs. It is expected that it is difficult to frequently generate that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without producing an effect. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs. For example, according to the generation timing of the set time tr32 May be generated.

  Although it will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first allowable sound output as an effect sound such as "Phiking!" And "Press!" The second allowable sound that is output as a message sound is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 390 (d) and (h), in the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect (rendering pattern) according to the low expectation change pattern (predetermined change pattern), The second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. The game is also limited by the output restriction applied to such "acceptable sound". A delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when a person tries to operate.

  By the way, as a countermeasure against the setting time (effective period) being suddenly set or being executed as a non-automatic acceptance mode during the execution period of the effect (rendering pattern) according to the low expectation variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), It is thought that the player who tries to try not to miss the chance of the occurrence of the effect after the operation may appear by continuously hitting the operation means (here, the operation button 410) from the time when the effect reception is not permitted. It is done. However, in this case, since the effect reception is permitted and the effect is started immediately after the operation, the started effect is “what is being performed according to the effect reception (effect after operation)”. However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is “automatically generated as a notice effect that has nothing to do with the reception of the production”, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 390 (particularly, FIG. 390 (c)), in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the production is accepted at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (valid period) itself ends, while the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not terminated halfway. The output state is maintained until the timing when the output is completed as one permissible sound (the same timing as when there is no operation (FIG. 390 (g)). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is “what is being performed (post-operation effect)” or “automatically generated as a mere notice effect unrelated to the effect reception” Kill as to become.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 390, when the effect is received within the set time (effective period) (in the figure, timing tr32a), the effect display device 1600 (the first display) is used as the effect after operation corresponding to the effect received. At least after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in (1 effect member) and after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, with regard to the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), even when the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), it is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33. On the other hand, as to the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is received. However, even when the effect reception is made at any timing, in the state where the timing tr33 has not ended, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) It is required to maintain the output state.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (effective period) is set comes, the effect display device 1600 operates the operation means to be operated by the low expectation non-suppression reception effect. While the insulted bird's-eye view image is displayed, gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has passed is performed. As a method of displaying a bird's-eye view image or a gauge display, for example, it is possible to adopt the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2), and those display images (a bird's-eye view image, a gauge display) Based on this, they are hidden (both are not displayed at the same timing).

  However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a “special effect mode (automatic button effect state)” that activates the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. The setting to the “special effect mode” and the setting cancellation may be enabled by the operation of the player. That is, in this case, even in the operation reception effect that occurs during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), in the state that is set to the “special effect mode” , "Non-suppression reception effect" and will be executed in the "automatic reception mode" described above, and only when it is not set to the "special effect mode" "non-suppress / non-automatic reception effect" Will occur as However, in this specification (in particular, “More detailed rendition of the acceptable sound for reception and the related description”), unless otherwise noted, the “special rendition mode” is not set. Occasionally, it is described as an example of effect when the "special effect mode" is not installed as the pachinko machine 1 concerned.

  FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-short time), the start condition is satisfied (dwelling termination), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, high expectation is developed to “SP reach (reach effect with background change etc.) Assuming that a “specific variation pattern” is selected from among the “variation patterns”, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a notice determination) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. Then, after this, the variation design of the decorative symbol (such as the depiction of the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production An effect corresponding to the result (notice effect) is additionally executed on the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected “specific variation pattern”.

  However, as described above, in the effect (effect pattern) related to the “specific variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 391 (b), no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). In addition, an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed is generated when a timing tr42 (a timing in the SP reach state) at which a specific time has elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation effect is generated.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (effective period) to be generated at the timing tr42 in the specific variation pattern is
-“Suppression acceptance effect” (FIG. 391 (a)) is set for setting a set time during which the acceptance of the effect is permitted while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is output in a suppression manner or silence. , (See (b)) ”, and even if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the reception of the production is permitted, When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the production reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation production is started based on the reception of the production “automatic reception” Aspect (see FIG. 391 (j))
It is made to generate as "suppression / automatic receptionist effect" executed by. In addition, as a technique for outputting the “BGM playback sound” in a suppression manner or silence, a method of setting a silent section (suppression section) in advance in the data of the “BGM playback sound” itself, A method of changing the setting of the volume value for the channel to which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is assigned to the suppression value (for example, "0"), a combination thereof, or the like can be adopted. As will be described later, this “suppression / automatic reception effect” is also referred to as “second suppression operation reception effect”, and the suppression mode here is also referred to as “strong suppression mode”.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the highly expected variation pattern (SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) related to the specific variation pattern), the “BGM playback sound” is suppressed. Since a set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed is set with a production such as suggesting the occurrence of the operation reception production by outputting in a mode or silence (suppression reception) From the viewpoint of the player), the player can easily perform the operation immediately after the operation reception effect is generated. In addition, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives at the latest. (Automatic reception mode), it is possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that does not miss the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation reception effect at the time of high expectation.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as in the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" in Figs. 391 (b), (c), (g), "in suppression / automatic reception effect". As shown in the figure, when the timing tr41 a little before the occurrence of the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) for which the rendering acceptance is permitted occurs, the "acceptable sound" is started to be output and the timing str42 is straddled In this way, the output state is maintained. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the suppression mode or silent state, a state in which the effect reception is permitted at timing tr 41 occurs soon Can be recognized, and it is expected that it will be difficult to frequently say that “the effect of the automatic button function is made to be accepted by the automatic button function, not against the player's intention,” Become so. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" may not necessarily be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) occurs. For example, it is generated according to the set time generation timing tr42. You may do so.

  However, for the timing tr40 at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in the non-suppressed mode to the state (or the non-output state) in which it is output in the suppressed mode or silent, the above-described operation In order to obtain the effect (suppression acceptance effect) suitably, as shown in FIGS. 391 (a) to (c), the relationship "the length of timing tr40 to tr41> the length of timing tr41 to tr42". It can be said that it is important to set so as to come much earlier than "the output start timing tr41 of the above-mentioned acceptance acceptable sound that precedes the set time," so as to have the property.

  In addition, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect production” according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (c), (d), (g), (h), the above-mentioned “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” Unlike in the case of "", not only the first acceptable sound that is output as a sound effect such as "pikein!" As "acceptable sound," but the second allowable sound that is output as a message sound such as "press!" Also, the timing of the timing tr41 arrives at the same time as the timing tr41 arrives, and the status of the output is maintained in the form straddling the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, the effect display device 1600 determines which operation means of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like) included in the pachinko machine 1 is to be operated. Since there is a possibility of being able to be recognized from when the overhead image of the operation means to be operated is not yet displayed (timing tr41 to tr42), an operation reception effect occurs immediately It becomes easier to operate. That is, as described later, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect production" according to this embodiment, "when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target" and "the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation target are When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target, a message sound such as “Press!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target. In such a case, a message sound such as "Settle!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391, the first and second allowable sounds are simultaneously started to be output, but the timings at which the first and second allowable sounds are respectively started to be output are made different from each other. Alternatively, the output state may be sequentially made. In this case, output of only one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound may be started from a state where the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and (h), the "first permissible sound" is adopted as the effect sound that is output for a relatively short time, and the "second permissible sound" is used. Is used as a production sound output over a relatively long time, but the length relationship between these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, with regard to the “first acceptable sound” and the “second acceptable sound”, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and (h), it is assumed that the output state is maintained over different times, and those outputs It is desirable that the time when the state is ended (time when the inaudible state) is made to come at different timings prior to the timing tr 42 A when the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how long the time until the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function is activated comes to rest, depending on which of the following situations the “acceptable sound” is in: It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently say that "the effect of the automatic button function is made to be accepted not by the player's own operation but against the player's intention".
-The first condition in which both the "first acceptable sound" and the "second acceptable sound" maintain the output state-The output state of one of the "first acceptable sound" and the "second acceptable sound" is maintained But the other has terminated the output state (inaudible status). The second condition-Both the "first acceptable sound" and the "second acceptable sound" have terminated the output state. Third situation (being inaudible)

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, "Pikien!") Is output as the first allowable sound. That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the acceptable reception sounds is output as an effect sound that is not output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, while the sound effect ( The first permissible sound) can be output as an effect sound that is output even in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, so that the “BGM playback sound” is in a state of being suppressed. While maintaining the stage performance suitably (second allowable sound), it is possible to more easily recognize that the reception of the stage is allowed (first allowable sound).

  It should be noted that the timings tr41 to tr42 (or timings tr31 to tr32) when the allowable reception sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output prior to the set time (valid period) or the haze image display. This time may be a minimum time (for example, one frame) in a control (processing) unit, or may be a time of two frames or more. That is, if the player can output the set time (valid period) or the spear image display as much as possible, the player is in a state where the stage reception is permitted or the operation means that is the operation target. Is likely to be recognized earlier by the amount of time that precedes it, so the time until the set time ends or when the automatic button function is activated It is expected to suppress forgetting to operate within the period until arrival.

  By the way, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic button mode, as described above, the operation opportunity can be lost by enabling the automatic button function (timing tr 42A) even within the set time (effective period). It is. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 (c) and (d), unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390 (c), the acceptable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound). When the effect reception is made when the one) is in the output state, the output state is ended based on the fact that the effect reception is made. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptance sound (the first acceptance sound and the second acceptance sound) is interrupted at that time, and this is a state where the effect acceptance is permitted ( As it becomes possible to recognize that the effective period has ended, "a state in which the reception of the effect has not yet occurred, and the automatic button function can be activated (a state in which the operation opportunity can be lost)" It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is in If the operation is performed and the effect is received before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (the effective period), the effect is received when the effect is received. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not activated even when the timing tr 42 A arrives, since the state in which acceptance is permitted is ended.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391, when the effect is received within the set time (effective period) (timing tr 42 a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (as an effect after operation according to the effect receiving) At least an after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and an after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. More specifically, for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), at any timing within the set time (effective period), the effect is received at a specific timing that comes after the timing tr43. In contrast to the non-display (not visible), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) maintains the output state for a predetermined time from the timing of receiving the effect. ing.

  However, as shown in FIG. 391, even when the effect reception is made at any timing within the set time (the effective period), the sound after the operation (output sound for the effect sound) is “BGM playback sound It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained at the time when the timing tr44 is returned from the suppression state (silence state) to the output in the non-suppression mode. On the other hand, with regard to the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the output state is ended at timing tr44 when the "sound of BGM playback" is returned to the output in the non-suppression mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, the "sound of BGM reproduction" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode, and the fact that the contents concerning the display effect are switched is generated. It is expected to be greatly changed and improve the game entertainment. Note that the “BGM playback sound” may be gradually returned by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. Further, for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be terminated not at the timing tr44 but at a specific timing after the timing tr44.

  In addition, also in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) is set comes, the effect display device 1600 operates the operation means being operated by the high expectation suppression reception effect. A hazy habit image is displayed, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is performed. In this respect, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, the non-automatic reception mode is also performed in the effect display device 1600 in view of the fact that a message sound (for example, "press!") As the second allowable sound is output. A message display (for example, “Press!”) That does not appear in the operation reception effect executed in the above is displayed. In addition, as a display method of a bird's-eye view image, a gauge display, and a message display, it is possible to employ | adopt the method shown in FIG. 206 (Z3) or FIG. 220 (R2), for example. The gauge display and the message display) are not displayed (all are not displayed at the same timing) when the set time has not yet elapsed based on the generation of the effect reception. The message display may not necessarily completely match the content of the message sound, as long as it prompts operation.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i), it precedes the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function within the set time (effective period) is activated. While the output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible state), the message display is maintained at the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function is activated, and further, After the automatic button function is activated, it is not hidden (not visible) until at least the timing tr43 at which the set time ends is reached. The display state may be maintained after that. Note that the set time (valid period) ends when the presentation is accepted, so in fact, it ends at the latest when the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated arrives. Therefore, "the timing tr43 at which the set time ends" strictly means the timing at which it is ended when the set time is temporarily continued, and the time set at the timing tr42 This is the timing that arrives after the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display is not hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target prompted by the message display. It will be possible to suggest to the player that the situation is not in place. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not instructed to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it suggests that the effect reception due to the operation is not generated. become able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect not executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 390) and the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 391) are both Within the set time (valid period), the remaining time display (gauge display) that suggests the remaining time until the state where the reception of the effect is allowed is completed can be performed. In the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses, and when this time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that it becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without detecting the operation, the automatic button function is activated and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, after the arrival of the specific timing tr42A, even if the set time has not yet passed, the stage reception is not allowed. Therefore, if the “remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the state where the effect reception is allowed to end” is performed within the set time of the operation reception effect (FIG. 391), it is normal. It is conceivable that the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed on the basis of the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

  In this point, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, the effect reception is permitted after the specific timing tr 42A arrives. Even though it disappears, the remaining time display (gauge display) is not based on the time until the specific timing tr 42A arrives, but the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the set time has elapsed It is trying to display. That is, in this case, as the time until the set time elapses decreases, the gauge amount decreases, and when the set time becomes "0", the dynamic display is performed so that the gauge amount also becomes "0". However, here, since it is always transferred to the state where the effect reception is not permitted before the set time becomes “0”, the effect reception is not permitted in the state where the gauge amount is left It will be transferred to the state.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is accepted when the automatic button function is enabled, the amount of gauge in the remaining time display (gauge display) is left unintentionally. On the other hand, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of “losing the operation opportunity”, which makes it possible to operate at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount in the set time (valid period) from the next time. Can be encouraged to do.

  Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the effect reception is generated by the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the set time has elapsed ( The gauge display can be hidden (not visible). On the other hand, when the production reception occurs due to the activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in a state where the set time has not elapsed, and at least the setting is performed. It is made to maintain "the aspect of the dynamic display to which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) reduces gradually" until time passes.

  According to such a configuration, when the presentation is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamic until at least the set time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is no situation in which an effect has been received by detecting an operation on an operation target that is prompted by a message sound or a message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not instructed to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it suggests that the effect reception due to the operation is not generated. become able to.

  As described above, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tr42 in FIG. 391, "when selecting operation button 410 as the operation target" and "select sword ornament 5001 as the operation target based on the result of the preliminary effect determination. There is a case. That is, in this case, there may be confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (effective period) for which the effect reception is permitted is generated, and the set time may be 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tr32 in FIG. 390, there is no “when selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, with regard to the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, it is operated against the player's intention to set it later than the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (effective period) has occurred. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of a situation where opportunities are lost.

  Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means of the above is operated, it is desirable that the effect is accepted and the effect is performed after the operation. In other words, the player may be confused if there is a situation in which the stage is not accepted despite operating the operating means. Since it is harsh to seek further operations on the operating means on the side, even if the wrong operating state is maintained, the production is accepted when the operating means on the operating side is operated It is desirable to do.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the matters described in the “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 178)” described above and other examples thereof can be appropriately adopted. In other words, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, tr44 in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, ts16 in the effect example shown in FIG. Become.

  However, as described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, so that the performance is poor compared to the non-suppression operation reception effect. Is concerned. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the allowable reception sound that is output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is greater than the allowable reception sound that is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the time during which the output state is maintained is different. One of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 390 (c) and (g) and FIGS. 391 (c) and (g). “Is set as the shortest aspect among the above-mentioned plurality of aspects. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped depends on which of the above-described plurality of modes is used to output the first allowable sound.

  In addition, “Which of the plurality of modes is to be output as the first acceptable sound” and “Which of the plurality of operation means is used as the operation target” can be obtained as separate determination results in the above-mentioned notice effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained within the notice effect determination as one determination result. However, in at least the first aspect among the plurality of aspects, the first permission is permitted in either the case where the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the case where the “sword decoration 5001” is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound can be selected. Also in the second and third modes, it is possible to select whether the operation button 410 is to be operated or the sword decorative body 5001 is to be operated. You may do it.

  FIG. 392 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the second aspect is used as the first acceptable sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  As shown in FIG. 392, this effect example is basically the same as the effect example described above with reference to FIG. 391 including the generation conditions and the contents of the effect (further, description of the other example, etc.). Is the same. However, in this presentation example, as a result of the announcement presentation judgment being made, at timing tr 41, the first allowable sound is outputted not in the first aspect but in the second aspect longer than the first aspect. The point differs in that the output state of the first acceptable sound is maintained for a longer time than the second acceptable sound.

  According to such a configuration, the output permission sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output over a longer time than the reception permission sound (first mode) output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. Since it can be output as a maintained sound, it is possible to suitably maintain the performance even in a situation where “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence when an operation opportunity is given Will be able to.

  In addition, in order to improve the performance in the suppression operation reception effect, for the first permission sound output in the second mode, a sound not output as the reception permission sound in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is used. It is desirable to do.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, as in the case of selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target and in the case of selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target based on the result of the preliminary presentation effect determination. It is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target. Accordingly, also in this effect example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner (for example, “Press!”) As in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 392 (c) and (g), the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. Also by terminating the output state of the first acceptable sound (inaudible state) before the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function is activated, the automatic button function is also performed in this presentation example. It is possible to infer from the output situation of the acceptance sound that the time until the timing to be activated tr 42 A arrives is left.

  In particular, in this effect example, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the “second allowable sound” output in the effect example shown in FIG. By confirming the above, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated is reached than in the case of the production example in FIG. become. In addition, since only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output in a longer different mode (second mode), the player side first uses the first permissible sound in common. 2 Estimate the “remaining time until the arrival of timing tr42A” with reference to the timing when the output state of the allowable sound is terminated, and thus the first allowable sound is obtained with a sense of security that is normally estimated. Since it will be possible to challenge in more detail and guess, it will be expected to keep the game entertaining suitable.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 392, the other matters are the same as those in the effect example shown in FIG. 391. For example, when an effect is accepted when an acceptable sound is in the output state, the output is output. The point where the state is ended halfway is also the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG.

  When high expectation suppression reception effect (Figs. 391, 392) occurs in the above-mentioned "special effect mode", the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be activated by the player's intention, the message is displayed even when the effect is accepted by the automatic button function being activated. It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until the timing tr43 and is not displayed before the timing tr43 (the timing when the effect reception is made or the timing delayed by the above-described time). Also, at this time, with regard to the timing at which the automatic button function is activated, when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, it does not arrive in the output state, but the first allowable sound is output in the second mode It is desirable to function so that the first allowable sound that arrives in the output state and is output in the second mode is terminated halfway.

  In addition, in the case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the acceptance permissible sound) is output in the first mode and in the case where the first permissible sound (effect sound as the acceptance permissible sound) is output in the second mode Not only the times for which the output state is maintained may be different from one another, but effect sounds different from one another may be used. For example, when the first allowable sound (sound effect as a reception allowable sound) is output in the first mode, an effect sound such as "pikein" is output, and the first allowable sound (sound effect as a reception allowable sound) When outputting in a mode, it is possible to output a rendering sound such as "Gaogao".

  In the above description example, the low expectation change pattern is defined as "the change pattern in which even the reach state is not formed", but is defined as "the change pattern in which the symbol is stopped without entering the SP reach state" The effect example shown in FIG. 390 may be performed when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the variation patterns.

  In addition, it is desirable that the “suppression / automatic reception effect” exemplified in the above explanation example cannot appear in the low expectation variation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) when in the normal gaming state. The “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in the explanation example can also appear in a highly expected variation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) including the above-mentioned “specific variation pattern” in the normal gaming state. . In other words, even in the case of a high-expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the production pattern), the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (basically) before the production progress to the SP reach state such as a non-reach state. Since the effect that appears also in the effect pattern) is executed, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 390 can also appear within the period. Even in such a configuration, when “suppression / automatic reception effect” appears (high expectation variation pattern), when “non-suppression / nonautomatic acceptance effect” appears (low expectation variation pattern or high expectation variation pattern) It can be said that the ratio (expectation) of the big hit symbol appearing higher when the symbol variation is stopped than the pattern).

  In addition, in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern corresponding to) generated when being in the normal gaming state, “BGM reproduction (rendering sound of a specific type)” is output in the suppression mode or silence when giving the operation opportunity It is desirable that the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. This is a state in which the "special effect mode" is not set, or the case where the "special effect mode" is not installed as the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, regarding the length of time from “timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated” to “timing tr43 when the set time elapses after the reception of the presentation is permitted”, the minimum time in the control (processing) unit ( For example, it may be one frame) or two or more frames. For example, the message display can be visually recognized at “timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated”, and such a visible state is at least “timing tr43 at which the set time has elapsed after the acceptance of the production is permitted”. If it continues until it arrives, it will be possible to suggest the original length as the set time (valid period), and there is a possibility of recognizing that no operation by the player was performed To be able to In the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in any operation reception effect, a message sound (second allowable sound) and a message display are displayed for “timing when the automatic button function is activated” within the set time. It is desirable to output in the relationship described above (see FIGS. 391 (h) and (i) and FIGS. 392 (h) and (i)).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIGS. 391 (i) and 392 (i), “the time during which the message display is left after the effect reception is made (in the example, the timing tr42A to tr43 In the case of “(time period)”, due to the common use of the program, it will appear also when the effect reception occurs at other timing (Fig. 390 (e), FIG. 391 (e), etc.) By using the program of, the automatic button function may be generated only when it is activated. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 390 (e), the operation related display is not displayed at timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 391 (e), the operation related display is not displayed at timing tr42a. Become.

  Further, in the above described example (FIGS. 390 to 392), the display effect (liquid crystal display) after operation in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the effect sound output after operation by the speaker (second effect member) (effect The sound may be started at the same time, but the effect may be performed after the operation so as to shift the start time of the effects. For example, in the situation where the effect sound output (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is started at timing tr42, the effect display device after the operation (liquid crystal display) is on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) The display effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed after the operation according to the timing at which the operation related display shown in FIGS. 390 to 392 is not displayed (or the timing at which the fade-out process is started) which has not been displayed yet. If it is started, the display effects can be switched smoothly.

  As described in the above-described “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 178)”, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, the precursor is in a period before the set time (effective period) An effect (for example, the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect”) may be performed. And in this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes in which the degree of expectation in which the jackpot symbol appears differs as a precursor effect, and to perform the precursor effect in any of these modes. Further, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as precursor effect sounds to be output during a period in which the precursor effect is performed, and a plurality of modes are output as a precursor effect sound according to the execution mode of the precursor effect It is desirable to make a selection. On the other hand, with regard to the first allowable sound, the first aspect and the second one are displayed with the bird's-eye image to be operated, the gauge display indicating the remaining time, and the message display of "Press!" It is output in any of a plurality of modes including modes.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391 or 392 is generated, the specific sound that is not output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. Since the first permissible sound or the second permissible sound of the aspect can be output as the permissible reception sound, it is preferable to suitably suppress the presentation performance when the suppression operation reception effect is generated. Will be able to Also, by confirming the type of acceptable reception sound, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is occurring in the automatic reception mode, not the non-automatic reception mode.

  In addition, with respect to the acceptance allowable sound of the non-suppression operation acceptance effect (FIG. 390), the first allowable sound that outputs the acceptance allowable sound as a sound effect and the second allowable sound that outputs the acceptance allowable sound as a message sound Among them, the second allowable sound is not prepared but only the first allowable sound is output, while the first allowable sound and the above-mentioned first allowable sound of the suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 391, FIG. 392) are output. It is made to be able to output both of 2 acceptance sounds. This makes it possible to favorably maintain the performance when the suppression operation reception effect is being performed.

  Further, in the above example of rendering, in the case where the same rendering sound is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppressing operation receiving rendering (FIG. 390) and the suppressing operation receiving rendering (FIG. 391, FIG. 392) (FIG. 390, FIG. 391) And the case where different effect sounds are output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 390 and 392).

  That is, when the acceptance acceptable sound different from the normal time is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the effect acceptance is in the permitted state, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, while outputting the second allowable sound (message sound) as a sound that is not normally output, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is also output during normal operation. Is desirable. Then, while the acceptance allowable sound is output in such a mode, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is also output as the effect sound (the second aspect) which is not output at a normal time with a predetermined probability, at this time If the proportion (expected degree) in which the big hit symbol appears is higher than when it is output in the first mode, “BGM reproduction (specific It is possible to favorably maintain the performance when the “type of effect sound)” is in the state of being output in the suppression mode or in silence. In order to obtain such an effect, when the suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first acceptance permission sound in the effect judgment such as the advance effect judgment. It is desirable that the ratio to determine the effect be higher than the ratio to determine to output the second aspect.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, not only the operation reception effects (FIG. 390) executed in the non-automatic reception mode but also the operation reception effects (FIGS. 391 and 392) executed in the automatic reception mode. In the event of the occurrence, a reception acceptance sound suggesting that the reception of the production is allowed or that the reception of the production is allowed can be output. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one's own operation opportunity is lost as a result.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within the set time (valid period). It is assumed that the effect reception is automatically generated when the specific timing tr 42A arrives while the effect reception according to the operation detection is not made. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect can be started within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not there is an operation. It is possible to make it automatic button-ization without making the flow of the subsequent presentation different from when there was no, or causing an extension during the presentation

  Further, in the above-described production example, “message sound that prompts to be operated (second allowable sound)” may be output as the allowable sound, and the message sound (second allowable sound) must be operated. It is not output in the “operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode” that is not received, but can be output only in the “operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode” that is received without operation. There is.

  That is, only in the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second allowable sound) directly representing that the operation should be performed is output, or various types of reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound, It is conceivable that the second allowable sound should be output, but in the post-operation presentation, there is a risk of presentation being performed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so that the post-operation presentation is performed It is not always good to operate it in order to improve the game entertainment. In this regard, the “operation reception effect executed in a non-automatic reception mode” is an effect that allows selection such as “do not generate a post-operation effect”. Avoid automatically expressing the effect as a message (second acceptable sound) and do not output a message sound (second acceptable sound) and do not have the option to generate a post-operation effect or not It is desirable to output the message sound (second acceptable sound) only in the operation reception effect performed in the mode, or to output more types of acceptable sound. In addition, in the “operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode”, if the set time ends without receiving the effect, the post-operation effect and the related effect will not be performed. The production will progress without suggesting the degree. In the non-moving reception effect, a message sound is not output in any operation reception effect, but in the “operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode”, a message sound is not output. An operation reception effect may be included.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of modes (“press!” And “sword!”) As the message sound (second allowable sound), and the effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 In the example, depending on whether the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 (based on the result of the notice effect determination), any one of the plurality of modes is selectively selected. I am trying to output. In this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and a message sound corresponding to the operation button 410 (“Press!”) Is output, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. It suggests that "big hit symbol appears when the said symbol change is stopped" by the effect after operation according to the effect reception compared with the time when the message sound according to ("Kotome!") Is output The ratio (expected degree) in which the presentation mode appears is set to be low. The ratio (expected degree) at which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, the message sound (second acceptable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second acceptable sound) is not output, the operation target Is not the sword decorative body 5001, and the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and an operation reception effect to be executed in a non-automatic reception mode is generated. In addition, at least in the normal gaming state, it is suggested that a post-operation effect that is executed when an effect is received with an operation reception effect that does not output a message sound, "a jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped" The ratio (expectation) of the effect mode to appear is the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect is received in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is output. “A big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped” It is made to be lower than the ratio (expectation) in which the production mode suggesting “appears” appears. In addition, 0% may be sufficient as the ratio (expectation degree) where the said production | presentation aspect appears, and 100% may be sufficient as it.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation reception effect is generated, first, “Is the message sound (the second acceptable sound) output?” Becomes a branch point for knowing the level of the expectation, and the message sound ( When the second allowable sound) is output, it is possible to know the level of expectation according to the mode. In addition, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, when the message sound (the second acceptable sound) is output, it is possible to enjoy the post-operation effect with a relatively high expectation. become. Therefore, when the message sound (the second acceptable sound) is output, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is executed in the automatic reception mode so that the post-operation effect is not missed. On the other hand, when the message sound (the second acceptable sound) is not output, the degree of expectation is relatively low, and "the sword ornament 5001", which is used only when the degree of expectation is high, becomes the operation target Will disappear. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the option of generating the post-operation effect by performing the post-operation effect in the non-automatic reception mode.

  Further, in the operation reception effect executed in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, when a set time (effective period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i) and 392 (g) to (i), for the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function within the set time (effective period) is activated. While the output status is terminated (inaudible status) prior to tr42A, the display status of the message display is maintained also at timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated, Furthermore, after the automatic button function is activated, the display is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr 43 when the set time ends is reached. That is, in this case, when the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display may be hidden at the stage when the set time has not elapsed according to the effect acceptance, but within the set time When the automatic button function is activated, the message display ("press!" Or "set!") Will be displayed continuously until at least the set time is over.

  According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display is not hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target prompted by the message display. It will be possible to suggest to the player that the situation is not in place. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not instructed to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it suggests that the effect reception due to the operation is not generated. become able to.

  Further, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391 and FIG. 392) in which the automatic button function is activated, the remaining time display (gauge display) is performed when the effect reception is made by the automatic button function being activated at timing tr 42A. Since the amount of gauge in the game will be left unintentionally, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of `` losing the opportunity to operate '' against the intention of the player. In the set time (valid period), it becomes possible to prompt the user to perform an operation at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount.

  Further, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391 and FIG. 392) in which the automatic button function is activated, when the effect is accepted by the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is set at least The dynamic display is continued until the time has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is no situation in which an effect has been received by detecting an operation on an operation target whose operation is prompted by a message sound or a message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not instructed to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it suggests that the effect reception due to the operation is not generated. become able to.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, since the same effect sound (the first allowable sound of the first aspect) is output as the reception allowable sound, either Even when the operation reception effect is generated, it is possible to appropriately convey to the player that the operation opportunity is being given. Moreover, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, since the second allowable sound not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is also output, which of the operation reception effects is generated It will also be possible to recognize Furthermore, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode in (a performance pattern corresponding to) a specific variation pattern, the ratio performed in the mode shown in FIG. 391 is relatively high. The rate executed in the mode shown is relatively low, and when executed in the mode shown in FIG. 392, the rate of being stopped by the big hit symbol is relatively high. That is, in this case, the first allowable sound is not the “first mode” and is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. Since it will be output in the game, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, in comparison with the case of the effect example shown in FIG. Since it may be used as in FIG. 392), it is preferable to suitably maintain the effect when “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is output in the suppression mode or silent mode. become able to.

  Further, in the effect example (suppression operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. It is assumed that the same acceptance allowance sound (first allowance sound of the first aspect) as that when the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 390) occurs may be generated. In addition, when the first permissible sound is output with the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the effect sound (first output is maintained for only a short time). In the aspect), a new performance is added by increasing the proportion of symbols to be stopped with the big hit symbol than when the first permissible sound is output in (Aspect) (FIG. 391). This makes it possible to recognize that the reception of the production is permitted, while providing the performance when “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is being output in a suppression mode or in silence. It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the first permissible sound is output with the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the first permissible sound is output. If the production is accepted during the period in which the sound is being output, it is set to a non-output (non-audible) state even during the output stage (see FIG. 392 (c)). . On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (first mode) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 390 and 391), the first permissible sound is “suppression operation reception effect”. Only when it is output in the "operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode" (Fig. 391), when the effect reception is made on the way of the output, it is not output (inaudible) at that time (See FIGS. 390 (c) and 391 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 390, even if the effect is accepted when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Note that the first permissible sound is in the output state even during the period of the timings tr41 to tr42. However, since the operation is not detected during the period, the first permissible sound is not received. It goes without saying that the output state is not interrupted.

  That is, as described above, in the non-suppression operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect occurs without the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" being suppressed, so the operation post effect is missed The possibility is relatively high, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that the post-operation effect can not be generated unlike the case where the operation reception mode is performed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, when these operation reception effects occur, it is assumed that some players repeatedly hit before the set time occurs. However, in this case, there is a concern that it will be difficult to understand if the operation is detected by the continuous hit, whether it is the effect generated as the effect after the operation or the advance effect not related to the operation, so as the first acceptable sound. It is desirable to eliminate such a concern by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduced data (FIG. 390). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, since there is no need to continuously hit, the first allowable sound is the first mode and the second mode when the player is hit continuously in order to suppress the game by such continuous hits. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the output was made (stopping the output in the middle).

  Even if the presentation is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display will be within the set time only when the operation detection is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. It may be displayed continuously until the timing of ending, or the dynamic display may be continued until the timing when the remaining time display (gauge display) ends within the set time (described above). Shared programs).

  In addition, as described above, in the post-operation effects, there is usually an effect risk that is executed in a low-expected aspect, so that the operation so that the post-operation effects are performed is performed in order to improve game entertainment. It is not always good. In this respect, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 390 (non-automatic reception effect), it is relatively early if the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output only for a sufficient time to suggest that the effect reception is permitted. By using the mode (first mode) that is terminated at the same time, “time for determining whether or not to generate the production reception” is created while the acceptable reception sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), since it is not necessary to create such a time, the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same aspect (first aspect). In addition, there is a case where the allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a longer mode (second mode) than this, and it is suggested that the degree of expectation varies depending on the mode. . In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptable sound for a relatively long time, it is possible to suggest that the automatic button function has not been activated yet, and there is a sense of security. Among them, it is possible to prompt the player to operate.

  In the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), the automatic button function is activated even when the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output in a long mode (second mode) (FIG. 392). The reception permission sound (first permission sound) is made inaudible before the arrival timing tr42A, and the two reception permission sounds (first permission sound and second permission sound) are set at different timings. It is made to end.

  As a result, it is possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated does not come until the reception acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) becomes inaudible. In the non-audible state, it becomes possible to indicate that the automatic button function can be activated soon if it is not operated quickly. At this time, in the second allowable sound whose output state is maintained longer than at least the long side aspect (second aspect) or the first allowable sound of the first aspect, the magnitude and pitch of the sound according to the passage of time It is desirable to change at least one of them in order to easily recognize how much time has passed.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, when an operation opportunity is given, "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" is output in a suppression mode or silent, thereby generating an effect after operation When it does, it is decided to do the creative device which the production sound which responds to this is heard clearly. In this respect, with regard to the acceptance allowable sound output upon occurrence of such a suppression operation acceptance effect, if the effect acceptance is performed when the acceptance allowable sound is in the output state, the effect is accepted based on the effect acceptance being performed. Since the output state is ended, it is possible to emphasize the effect sound according to the effect after the operation without being disturbed by the acceptance permission sound.

  In addition, in the above production example, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” occurs, even if the production acceptance is made when the reception permission sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. It was. However, instead of this, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is relatively high in expectation, for example, when it occurs in the SP reach state in the high-expectation fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern). Only when it is in the situation, in order to urge the concentration to the production, the production is performed when the acceptable reception sound (even if the same production sound (first mode) is output as the first allowable sound) is in the output state. You may make it interrupt this, if reception is made.

  In addition, although the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 described the case where "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurred, "non-suppression / automatic reception effect" or "suppress / non-automatic reception effect" etc. also occur. It may be made possible, and it may be made to advance production in the same mode, also when "non-suppression / automatic reception effect production" or "control / non-automatic reception effect production" occurs.

  Also, at the time of occurrence of the high expectation suppression reception effect, it is possible to output the third mode in which the output time is maintained as a first permissible sound for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 391) or the second mode (FIG. 392) When the third aspect is output, it is desirable that a rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is higher when the symbol variation is stopped than when the first aspect or the second aspect is output. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the degree of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first acceptable sound lasts, and the set time for which the presentation acceptance is permitted (effective It is possible to more suitably maintain the game entertainment within the period).

  At this time, in the third mode, it is desirable that the output state be maintained until timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function is activated comes. That is, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound lasts, it is necessary to confirm that the output is in the third mode instead of the first mode or the second mode. The longer the time it takes, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated, so it is possible to favorably maintain a sense of tension within the set time (valid period) during which production reception is permitted. It will be. Other matters when the third mode is output are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392, such as the fact that the presentation is interrupted when the third mode is in the output state. is there.

  Note that the automatic button function may be enabled whenever the timing tr42A within a specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) arrives, or a specific fluctuation when a big hit is obtained. It is activated when the timing tr42A in the pattern (the corresponding effect pattern) comes, but when the big hit is not obtained, the timing tr42A in the specific variation pattern (the corresponding effect pattern) comes It may not be activated.

  A plurality of types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (valid period), and in some of these effects, an acceptable sound (first) is generated when the set time (valid period) occurs. The permissible sound and the second permissible sound) may not be output. In other words, in this case, when the set time (effective period) during which the production reception is permitted occurs, there are “0” reception allowable sounds and “1” reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound). ) And the case where there are “2” permissible sounds (first permissible sound, second permissible sound), suggesting how much the pachinko machine 1 is “prompt for operation” Will be able to.

  As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting fade-out when the non-display timing comes may be adopted.

  In the production examples shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence during the period of timings tr40 to tr44. It may be made to be in an output state (for example, a reproduction period in which an audible sound is recorded in the sound data is ended, channel assignment is ended, etc.). That is, in this case, "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" as new data is allocated to the channel at timing tr44, and an output state is made.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above presentation example, as described above, the high expectation change pattern (SP reach change pattern) is developed into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) as a result of change pattern determination. When a specific variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as presentation determination (such as an advance notice determination), if the presentation of the particular variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the presentation is accepted The operation reception effect (valid period) that is allowed
-Set the set time for which the acceptance of the effect is permitted while the "sound of BGM reproduction" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in the suppression mode or in the silent mode "Reduction reception effect (Fig. 391 (a), (b) And (See FIGS. 392 (a) and (b)) ”and the operation on the operation means to be operated is not detected within the set time (timing tr 42 to tr 43) for which the effect reception is permitted. Even in the case where the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation effect is generated based on the effect reception being made. "Automatic reception mode (see FIG. 391 (j) and FIG. 392 (j))”
It is made to generate as "suppression / automatic receptionist effect" executed by.

  At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (notice effect determination), whether the sound effect (first allowable sound) among the acceptable reception sounds is output in a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode. , It is determined whether the message sound (second allowable sound) among the allowable reception sounds is to be output as “Press!” Or “Now!”, And the allowable reception sound (first 1) in a manner corresponding to the determination result. As described above, the allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output (FIGS. 391 and 392). As described above, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output. When the is output, the expectation is higher than when the "press!" Is output. At this time, as the order of high expectation, “second mode & sword!”, “Second mode & sword!”, “First mode & sword!”, “First mode & sword!” It is desirable to maintain the game entertainment when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

  And although this was also mentioned above, even if it is a case where it is a case where it is made to output any of a plurality of modes as the 1st acceptance sound in the "control / automatic reception effect production" concerning the above-mentioned production example, the 1st acceptance sound is in the output state When the effect is accepted, it is interrupted (see FIGS. 391 and 392). In addition, with regard to the second allowable sound, even when the output is made by either "press!" Or "set sword!", This is possible when the effect is accepted when the second allowable sound is in the output state. Was decided to be interrupted.

  However, instead of this, when an effect is received when the first allowable sound is in an output state in a mode different from the first mode among a plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the reception of the effect. However, when an effect is received when the first permissible sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without ending. That is, in this case, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, even if the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted in the middle and the expectation level cannot be recognized, the first aspect having the lowest expectation degree among the plural aspects Since it is possible to recognize that it is not, it will be expected to suppress the decline in the game interest. Further, even if a mode with a low expectation level appears in the post-operation effect, if the output state of the first allowable sound with the lowest expectation level is maintained among the plurality of modes, the post-operation effect is displayed. By re-recognizing that the rendering state is unlikely to have expectations in the first place, it becomes easier to accept the result appearing as the rendering after the operation, and it is expected to suppress the game interest from being significantly reduced.

  Even in the case of adopting such a modified example, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs within the predetermined variation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. The case where the first allowable sound is output in the second mode in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” within the specific variation pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 392. That is, among the above-described example effects, the “effect mode shown in FIG. 391” when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode by the “suppression / automatic reception effect” that appears in a specific variation pattern is “ Instead of the effect mode shown in 393, it will be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 393, also in “the effect mode shown in FIG. 393,” the contents described in “the effect mode shown in FIG. 391” and the contents described in the other example are basically the same. is there. However, in “the effect mode shown in FIG. 393”, even if the effect acceptance is made at timing tr 42 a when the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first aspect, the output state is interrupted triggered by the effect acceptance. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even if the “suppression / automatic reception effect effect” occurs in a specific variation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes (for example, a mode (for example, It has been described above that when output is made in the second mode) (for example, FIG. 392 (c)), when the effect reception is made at timing tr 42 a, the output state is interrupted based on the effect reception.

  According to such a configuration, when “suppression / automatic reception effect production” occurs in a specific variation pattern, the effect reception is performed at such an early timing that it is difficult to confirm which mode is the first allowable sound. Even if it is made, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by confirming whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is terminated with this as an opportunity. In particular, in this presentation example (FIG. 391, FIG. 393, etc.), from the timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (effective period), the first permissible sound is output in a form straddling the timing tr42 at which the set time is set. And since the first allowable sound is not interrupted regardless of the state from the output state at timing tr41 to the arrival of timing tr42, as the first allowable sound It becomes possible to function as time for “discriminating” which mode is.

  In this regard, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared as that the output state is maintained for a shorter time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. And Thus, even if the post-operation effect is started when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound It becomes possible to shorten the time when each output state overlaps, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first allowable sound output in the first mode can be output also in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 (refer to FIG. 390 (c)). In the example of the effect, the interruption is not triggered by the acceptance of the effect, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. Even if a situation not interrupted by the effect reception appears, it can be provided as an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  However, if the effect is accepted when the second allowable sound is in the output state, it is based on the effect acceptance being made even if any aspect is output as the first acceptable sound. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 392 (d) and 393 (d)). That is, in this case, while the function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the effect reception is made early is exhibited for the first allowable sound, the situation where the effect reception is made by the operation detection for the second allowable sound ( It will play a function to indicate whether or not there is a possibility that the operation opportunity may be lost by the automatic button function, and by giving these different functions to the acceptance permission sound, when the operation reception effect occurs It is possible to preferably maintain the fun of

  On the other hand, the acceptable reception sound output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 may be output in the first mode, or may be output in the special mode. However, it is desirable to maintain the output state without ending the output state even if an effect is received when the output is performed in a special mode. In addition, when outputting in a special mode, it is desirable to make the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing higher when the symbol is stopped than when outputting in the first mode. This percentage may be 100%. It may be outputted in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

  That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is adapted to maintain the output state in the non-suppressed mode, and there are problems such as poor rendering. Since it is not, it can be said that it is more desirable to be able to confirm the mode as the first allowable sound and to be able to recognize the degree of expectation even in the situation where the effect after operation is started.

  In addition, in the "suppression operation reception effect which gives an operation opportunity while the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state", the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in a non-suppressing manner even in a non-audible state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described example of the presentation, "the suppression of giving the operation opportunity while the specific type of the presentation sound is being output in the suppression mode or the silence or in the non-output state In the operation reception effect (FIG. 391 to FIG. 393), any one of "a plurality of modes in which the length of time for which the output state is maintained is different" is output when the set time (effective period) occurs. In the non-suppression mode, the output degree can be output, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) varies depending on the output mode. In this respect, also in the “non-suppression operation reception effect presentation which gives an operation opportunity in a situation where a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppression mode”, Acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) in a mode different from the first mode (such as different length, effect sound itself different, etc.) other than the case of outputting according to the non-suppressed mode in the first mode (FIG. 390) May be output depending on the non-suppression mode, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may be different depending on the output mode. According to such a configuration, both the acceptance permission sound output upon generation of the “non-suppression operation reception effect” and the acceptance permission sound output upon the generation of the “suppression operation reception effect” are set as “output state”. The output can be made in any of a plurality of modes in which the length of time to be maintained is different, and further, the degree of expectation becomes different depending on the output mode, so that “non-suppression operation reception effect” It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the effect reception is made, in any of the “suppression operation reception effect” and the “restriction operation reception effect”.

  FIG. 394 is a time chart illustrating an effect example in which the first allowable sound is output in a specific manner upon occurrence of a “non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)”.

  As shown in FIG. 394, in this effect example as well, parts that are not particularly noted are basically the same as in the effect example shown in FIG. However, in the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, when it occurs, an effect determination as to which of the plurality of modes is used to output the first allowable sound (for example, at the start of symbol variation) As a result of the effect determination being performed, as shown in FIGS. 394 (c) and (g), it is not the “first mode” but the “specific mode”. The case where it is output by is assumed, and it is in the production | presentation condition where the ratio in which a big hit symbol appears is high when symbol fluctuation is stopped rather than the case where it is output by "1st aspect." The specific aspect is output over a longer time than the first aspect.

  Here, in both the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the first permissible sound can be output by the first mode when these operation reception effects occur. Is described above (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)). That is, in this case, in both the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, when the operation reception effect is generated, the same effect sound is output over the same time as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output according to the specific mode when the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" is generated (Fig. 394), the first permission sound is the first when the "suppress / automatic reception effect" is generated. In the case of being output in two modes (FIG. 392), different effect sounds are output as different first allowable sounds over different times. In this effect example, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, it is output over a longer time than when the first allowable sound is output in the specific mode.

  However, on the other hand, when the same effect sound is output as the first permissible sound over the same period of time (see the first aspect (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)), the expectation degree (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) The “first mode” is output upon occurrence of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” or “suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)”). In this case, when the “first mode” appears when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs, the reception of the effect is performed. As for the degree of expectation (proportion) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear in the post-operation presentation according to the “first mode” when the “suppression / automatic reception presentation (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393))” occurs If the production receptionist The big hit symbol appears in effect after corresponding operation is lower than the expected level suggested (percentage). The expectation (percentage) may be 0% and 100%.

  On the other hand, the expectation level (when the “second mode (FIG. 392)” or the “specific mode (FIG. 394)” appears) when different production sounds are output as the first allowable sound for different times ( The percentage of jackpot symbols appearing is the same as the predetermined value regardless of which of “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect production” and “suppressed / automatic reception effect production” is output. The degree of expectation (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first permissible sound for the same time, either “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs. Expectations will not always be the same depending on Further, even when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first allowable sound, the “suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the case where the second mode is output as the first allowable sound. The same expectation as "automatic receptionist production" will be suggested.

  That is, in this case, regarding “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” and “suppression / automatic reception effect production”, even if the first acceptable sound is output in the same mode (first mode), the degree of expectation is made different from each other In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in a mode different from each other (second mode, specific mode), it is possible to make it appear that there is no expressive relationship with each other. . However, in reality, when the first acceptable sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the expectation degrees are made to be the same despite the fact that the effect sounds are different and the output time is different. It becomes possible to have a secret relationship. For example, in the case where "BGM playback" is suppressed and "BGM playback" is not suppressed at the occurrence of the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted, the normal (reception acceptable sound is the first aspect) In the case of being output as), the effect after different operation (different expectation) is started when the effect is accepted, so that the effects appear to be mutually independent of each other. However, when the acceptance allowable sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation when the stage is accepted while the stage is displayed as if the stage is different depending on whether or not “BGM playback” is suppressed. It will be expected to provide surprise rendition by secretly providing relevancy, such as being able to make the same content (same expectation) appear as a post-representation.

  In this case, in any of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” and “suppression / automatic reception effect production”, a plurality of modes will be prepared as the first allowable sound, but the “first embodiment used in common” "Is preferably set as a mode with the shortest output time among a plurality of modes for any operation reception effect. In addition, the "second mode" as the first acceptable sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among a plurality of modes that can be output when the "suppression / automatic reception effect effect" occurs, and The “specific mode” as the first acceptable sound is set as the longest mode of the output time out of a plurality of modes that can be output when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect effect” occurs. It is desirable that the output times of are different (for example, “output time of a specific aspect” <“output time of a second aspect”) in order to make it appear that there is no dramatic relationship with each other.

  Moreover, in "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production", even if the first allowable sound is output in either the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not ended at any time regardless of whether or not the effect reception is made. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first acceptable sound can be left even after the effect after operation is started, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed. In the situation where you are listening to this, despite the fact that the first allowable sound is output in the "specific mode" that pushes up to the same expected level as the relatively high expected "suppression / automatic reception effects" It becomes possible to eliminate the possibility of end. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first acceptable sound is interrupted when the effect reception is made by "suppression / automatic reception effect production" is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393.

  In the above-described effect example, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” (FIG. 392), and as the first allowable sound in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. The expected degree is the same as when the specific mode is output (FIG. 394). However, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the output time is maintained as a first allowable sound over a longer time than the “first mode (FIG. 391)” or the “second mode (FIG. 392)”. When the “third mode” is output, the “third mode” is output instead of the “second mode” as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”. In the case of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, “expectation” is set to be the same as when “specific mode” is output as the first allowable sound. The “third aspect” is as described above.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 394, when the effect is received within the set time (effective period) (timing tr 32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (No. At least after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in (1 effect member) and after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, with regard to the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), even when the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), it is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33. On the other hand, as to the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is received. However, even when the effect reception is made at any timing, in the state where the timing tr33 has not ended, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) It is required to maintain the output state.

  Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the length of the “time when the acceptable sound is output” is not the length of the “time when the sound data of the acceptable sound is allocated to the channel”, It means the length of time required for “time output as audible sound”.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in order to show that there is no production relationship between the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” and the “suppression / automatic reception production”, the “second mode” or “third” As for “Aspect”, “Suppression / automatic reception effect” and “Non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” can be output only by “Suppression / automatic reception effect”. It is desirable that the output can be made possible only by the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” among the “automatic reception effect” and the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. In addition, when the “second mode” and the “third mode” are prepared as output candidates in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, respectively, the “acceptance / automatic reception effect” specific acceptance allowable sound (second Even if the mode, the third mode) is output, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” will not necessarily have the same degree of expectation as when this specific acceptable sound (specific mode) is output. It is possible to more suitably improve the effect as the acceptance allowable sound that is output when the "suppression / automatic acceptance effect" occurs.

  Further, the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) does not have to be generated as an effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). As described above, the production may occur within the production period before the development to the SP reach state among the productions related to the expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern).

  By the way, in the above-mentioned effect example, the “weak suppression mode (the first suppression mode) with a relatively low degree of suppression is possible for“ suppression operation reception effect ”in which a certain type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) can be suppressed. A plurality of modes including at least a “suppression operation reception effect)” and a “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” in which the suppression degree is relatively high or in a non-output state are prepared. It is also good. In addition, when the effect sound of a specific type is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to “0”.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (valid period) in which the reception of the production is permitted is generated, it is possible to provide the production performance as to how much the specific type of the production sound is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned operation and effect, the degree of expectation depending on which of the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" has occurred It is desirable to make the (proportion of the jackpot symbols appear) different. Here, when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the expectation degree (ratio) that suggests that a big hit symbol appears in the “post-operation effect according to the effect reception” is “ When the strong suppression mode (the second suppression operation reception effect production) occurs, it is lower than the expectation (ratio) suggested that the big hit symbol appears in the "after operation according to the effect reception". The expectation (percentage) may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, with respect to the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”, an effect corresponding to a highly expected variation pattern that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) and a reach state are not formed (or While the reach state can be formed, it can appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern (which does not develop into SP reach), whereas “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) ) May not be generated in the low expectation effect pattern but may be generated as an effect corresponding to the high expectation change pattern. Even in such a configuration, the expectation when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs is the expectation when the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” occurs. It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

  Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more suitably, it is possible to generate a transitionable "special effect state" based on that the special effect condition is satisfied, and in the "special effect state", the player can Every time the effect is accepted during the set time (effective period) in which the operation promotion image (for example, the bird's eye image or the gauge display) prompting the user to operate is displayed, a certain type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", every time the set time (effective period) for which the effect reception is permitted is generated, the effect sound of a specific type (for example, the effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed by an amount In addition to the degree of expectation suggested by post-operation presentation, the degree of expectation is also suggested by such degree of presentation (how much it is suppressed). As a result, it is expected to further improve the game entertainment when the reception of the production is permitted.

  In addition, an effect pattern (for example, high expectation change) in which "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can be sequentially executed within the symbol variation An effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern among patterns may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" on the relatively low expectation level occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation on the relatively high expectation level" (second suppression operation) Since there is a possibility that the “reception effect)” will be generated, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment when it is recognized by the player that the degree of suppression of the specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). Will be able to.

In addition, in order to more suitably suppress the decrease in game entertainment when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)"
-When a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly anticipated variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach performance with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the performance determination Even if any result is obtained as (preliminary judgment etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern is generated when it progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, while “weak suppression mode (first suppression About the operation receptionist production) "
Even if the specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production determination (notice determination, etc.), it does not occur even if the production of the specific variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (predictive determination or the like), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern occurs when the effect has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern As compared with when “does not occur”, when the effect is accepted in the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”, the ratio in which the post-operation effect is executed in a high expectation mode is higher It is desirable to make it.

  In such a configuration, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" necessarily occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" Does not necessarily occur, and when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” has a high expectation after operation It becomes possible to draw attention to whether or not the “weak suppression mode (the first suppression operation reception effect presentation)” occurs because the rate at which the is performed becomes high. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the first suppression operation reception effect) is generated.

  FIGS. 395 to 397 show “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” in the rendering according to the high expectation variation pattern (for example, the specific variation pattern). ]] Is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in, when generating sequentially. FIG. 395 shows an example of rendering when operation detection occurs relatively early after the set time (effective period) occurs, and FIG. 396 compares after the set time (effective period) occurs. FIG. 397 shows an example of effect in the case where the operation is detected at the extremely late stage, and FIG. 397 shows an example of effect in the case where the operation is not detected within the set time (effective period).

  Now, as a result of the start condition being satisfied (deferred consumption) and fluctuation pattern determination being performed, "specific fluctuation pattern" in "high expected fluctuation pattern developed to SP reach (reach presentation with background change, etc.)" Is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. Then, after this, the variation design of the decorative symbol (such as the depiction of the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production The effect (e.g., advance presentation effect) according to the result of (preliminary judgment, etc.) is additionally executed to the selected "specific variation pattern" itself (effect pattern).

  However, in the "specific change pattern", about the effect contents that appear after the timing tr40 (the timing in the SP reach state) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the change effect of the decoration symbol is started. Is the same as that of the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. That is, first, when the timing tr40 comes, "a state in which the effect sound of a specific type (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or silence, even if any result is obtained as the advance effect determination. Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as a “strong suppression mode”, and the timing tr42 (decorative pattern of the decorative design is displayed while the “strong suppression mode” appears in this way. When a specific time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect, the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived, regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination. A production (effective period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect that occurs in the presence of the “strong suppression mode” is referred to as “second suppression operation reception effect”.

  On the other hand, in the "specific variation pattern", when the timing tr51 (the timing before the development to the SP reach state) arrives, a predetermined time has passed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol is started, as the advance effect determination Under the condition that the special result is obtained, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is additionally generated for the symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern. However, although it will be described later, the operation reception effect (effective period) generated at the timing tr 51 is different from the case of the operation reception effect (non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of the effect (strong suppression mode), processing may be performed to suppress the volume of “specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction)” under predetermined conditions.

  According to such a configuration, even if there is a situation in which an effect corresponding to the “specific variation pattern” is being executed, when a special result is not obtained as an effect determination (notice determination or the like), FIG. The production example shown in FIG. 392 appears, that is, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception production)” does not occur in the production according to the variation pattern, and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression) Operation reception effect) ”only occurs. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), as shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation) is performed within the effect according to the variation pattern. The “reception effect)” first occurs, and then the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 is further generated.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the effect contents after the timing tr40 arrives are the same as described with reference to FIG. 391, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In this case, for the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first acceptable sound is not the first mode shown in FIG. 391 or FIG. 392, the contents related to the effects shown in FIG. 391, such as being output in the second mode shown in FIG. Needless to say, the present invention is appropriately applied to the contents of the effects after the timing tr40 (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)) among the examples of effects to be performed.

  And, as described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. When a timing prior to the arrival of the effect arrives, an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated as a “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" generated at the timing tr51 in the fluctuation effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern,
-While the "sound of BGM playback" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in the non-suppression mode, set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is set, but within the set time (effective period) When the effect reception is made, “conditional suppression reception effect (FIG. 395) changes“ the sound of BGM reproduction ”from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (a mode having a relatively low suppression degree) triggered by the effect reception. (See (a) and (b)) ”and if no operation is detected for the operation means to be operated within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) in which the effect reception is permitted, The effect reception is not made, and as a result, each processing ("the sound of BGM reproduction" is changed from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode, or the after-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect Sound etc) is real The setting time without the (time) has finished elapsed "non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 397 (a), (b), see (f))"
It is made to generate as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception effect" executed by In addition, as a method of outputting the "sound of BGM reproduction" in the weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is assigned is a case of the strong suppression mode (for example, volume value (audible volume It is possible to employ a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, a volume value (audible volume) is “10”) whose suppression degree is lower than “0”).

  According to such “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic acceptance effect (first suppression operation acceptance effect)”, “effect sound of a specific type (a specific type of effect sound (unless the effect is accepted by the operation by the player) It is possible to make it appear that "non-suppression reception effect" shown in FIG. 390 and FIG. 394 is generated because there is no transition to “a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output in the suppression mode”. It will be. That is, in this case, it is recognized for the first time that it is not "suppression reception effect" by changing to "a state in which the effect sound of a specific type (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode" Since it becomes possible, it is possible to improve the game interest by providing a surprise effect.

  In order to obtain such an effect, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” can be generated depending on the result of the performance determination (notice determination, etc.). The variation pattern is selected only when it is in a special performance state (for example, a pre-reading performance zone), and when it is in the special performance state, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( As shown in FIG. 390, FIG. 394), a big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped rather than when the normal variation state in which the variation pattern that can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) is selected. It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production (FIG. 390, FIG. 394)” appears. In conjunction with the above-mentioned surprise effect elements, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

  Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-described effects more suitably, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can be generated in any of the "normal presentation state" and the "special presentation state". In the “normal presentation state”, “non-suppression / non-automatic receptionist presentation (figure) according to one variation pattern (one variation pattern that is paired in a double) 390, FIG. 394) and “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391, FIG. 392)” can be sequentially generated, and in the “special effect state”, one fluctuation pattern "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) · non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode) · automatic reception Production (FIGS. 391 and 392) ”will occur sequentially. It is desirable that way.

  In addition, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”, when the set time (valid period) has elapsed without receiving the effect, “specific effect sound (BGM playback sound) ) Is not shifted to the “state of output in a weakly suppressed manner”, and progresses to the subsequent production (FIG. 397). In other words, in this case, whether “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurred, and therefore, “normal effect state” and “special effect state” Since it is difficult to recognize which situation is present, the production after that will be advanced, so the expectation level is relatively low. Even when the “operation reception effect (effective period)” occurs, it is possible to more actively encourage the player to perform the operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” occurs, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( 390) ”occurs, the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the above-described acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) over the same period of time. Suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397) ”and“ non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390) ”are made difficult to recognize.

In addition, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) · non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395-397)" is the same as when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" occurs,
The output of the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is started when the timing tr50 slightly before the set time occurs, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr51. point,
· A point where a second permissible sound (for example, a message sound) is not output but only a first permissible sound (for example, a sound effect) is output · A set time (effective period) is set When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a habit image deceiving the operation means that is the operation target in the operation reception effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. We adopt each each constitution such as point that gauge indication is carried out each and so on, too, and "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode), non-automatic receptionist effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "non-suppression, etc." It is difficult to recognize which of the “non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” is occurring. Therefore, as a method of displaying a bird's-eye view image or a gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) is adopted as in the case where "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect effect (FIG. 390)" occurs. It is desirable that the same mode as the example of effect shown in FIG. 390 be adopted for the timing at which the display images (the bird's eye image, the gauge display) are made non-display based on the generation of the effect reception. desirable.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” according to this embodiment, the setting time (effective as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390) When the effect is accepted at the timing tr 51 a, tr 52 a (FIG. 395 (c), FIG. 396 (c)) that “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is in an output state after the period The time (effective period) itself is ended, while the "acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated halfway, but the timing at which it is outputted as the first acceptable sound (the same as when there is no operation) The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 397 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, even after the effect reception has been made by the operation of the player, only by listening to the reception permission sound (the first permission sound), “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception It becomes difficult to recognize which of the effect (FIG. 395 to FIG. 397) and the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” is occurring. That is, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, the state in which the effect sound of the specific type (sound of BGM reproduction is output in the weak suppression mode) Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that tension will be suitably maintained each time the effect is accepted.

  In addition, even in "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic acceptance effect (Figs. 395 to 397)", if the effect is accepted within the set time (effective period) (in the figure, timing tr 51a, 51b ), After operation according to the effect reception, after operation operation display (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and after operation sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) And at least occur. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, with regard to the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), even if the effect reception is made at any timing within the set time (effective period), it is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr52. On the other hand, as to the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is received. However, even when the effect reception is made at any timing, in the state where the timing tr 52 has not ended, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) It is required to set so as to maintain the output state.

  In addition, for the acceptable reception sound and operation-related display that appear in the “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)”, other examples or modifications to the effect example shown in FIG. It is desirable to use the same method.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” generated at the timing tr51 in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern is the effect. A process of outputting “BGM playback sound” in a weakly suppressed manner (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) is performed over a predetermined time from the timing of acceptance.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (valid period) has occurred (FIG. 395), the “BGM playback sound” is weakly suppressed (the degree of suppression is The timing tr53a returned from the relatively low mode to the non-suppressed mode also arrives relatively early. As a result, the period during which the “BGM playback sound” is set to the weakly suppressed mode and the “BGM playback sound” A relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) is provided between the period in which the strong suppression mode is set. On the other hand, when an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 396), the timing at which the “BGM playback sound” is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. tr53b also arrives relatively late. As a result, there is a comparison between the period when the “BGM playback sound” is set to the weak suppression mode and the period when the “BGM playback sound” is set to the strong suppression mode. Only a short interval (timing tr53b to tr40) can be held.

  That is, in this case, as the timing at which the player performs the operation in the first suppression operation reception effect is later (as the timing is closer to timing tr52), the period when the "sound of BGM reproduction" becomes the weak suppression mode ends The time until the period in which the “BGM playback sound” is in the strong suppression mode is started is shortened. Thus, depending on whether the timing at which the player performs the operation in the first suppression operation reception effect is early or late, the timing at which the strong suppression aspect appears comes relatively early after the weak suppression aspect is ended, and is continuous. It can appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being performed, or the timing of the strong suppression mode comes relatively late after the weak suppression mode is ended, and the “strong suppression mode” May become unrecognizable ", so that it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

  In this example, the length of time during which “BGM playback sound” is output in a weakly suppressed manner (a predetermined period of time) is set as the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). Although it is set to be the same as the execution time, it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time for which “BGM playback sound” is output in a weakly suppressed manner is set to be the same as or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is desirable to make it possible to emphasize the effect after the operation when the effect reception is made. Furthermore, even when the presentation is accepted at the latest timing tr52 in the set time (effective period) of the “first suppression operation acceptance presentation (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception presentation)”, the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time that the “BGM playback sound” is output in the weak suppression mode so that the end timing comes before the timing tr40 at which the strong suppression mode is started. In addition, in this example of presentation, the time of timing tr51a-53a and the time of timing tr51b-53b are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the effects according to one fluctuation pattern,
-The first suppression operation reception effect (period from the timing tr 50 to the end of the operation after operation) which suppresses the effect sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode) And · · second suppression operation reception effect to suppress effects sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound of BGM playback) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (post-operation effect is ended from timing tr40) Period)
Can be generated sequentially. And, as described above, the second suppression operation reception effect "is a variation pattern that will not be executed even if the effect mode (type of acceptance acceptable sound, operation target etc. may change depending on the result of the effect determination) The first suppression operation reception effect can occur on the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (such as advance notice judgment), while the effect is executed as “pattern effect based on ing.

  In addition, as described above, the first suppression operation reception effect is also determined by the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) even in the effect according to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) that does not generate the second suppression operation reception effect. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, only one of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect occurs during the symbol change, and the first suppression operation reception effect and the first [2] There are cases where the suppression operation reception effects are generated sequentially.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the period from "the timing at which the weak suppression mode is ended" to "the timing at which the strong suppression mode is started" Since the variable period is set to be variable according to the made timing, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is further performed after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is ended. It is possible to provide a performance as to whether or not it occurs, thereby improving the game entertainment. When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur sequentially, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (the ratio of being stopped with a big hit symbol) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. In addition, in the variation pattern that generates the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is before the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, an aspect in which the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher expectation (for example, the first acceptable sound is output in the second aspect) than when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is not generated. The rate of being executed is higher.

  By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) occurs, the degree of suppression is high (second suppression operation reception effect of strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression As described above, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first suppression operation reception effect of the aspect). However, when a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed, an attempt is made to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode). In fact, it is difficult to estimate without comparison, whether the degree of suppression is in a high state (strong suppression mode) or in a low state (weak suppression mode). This is especially true when there is no significant difference in the volume value when suppressed between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this creates a sense of tension when an operation acceptance effect occurs. Can be suitably maintained, and the player can be attracted to the performance.

  In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are output when a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed is generated. The first allowable sound is output as the same effect sound for the same time (in the figure, output in the “first mode”). That is, in this case, even if the first acceptable sound is confirmed, it can be difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode). By this, it is possible to maintain tension with respect to the effect more suitably, and to attract more and more players to the effect.

  However, in actuality, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced if it is impossible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect element which helps to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is within the period from the start of the operation reception effect to the end thereof. The following preparations will be made in a time-series manner.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the above-described situation appears in which the first allowable sound can be output as the same effect sound as each other over the same time (output in the first aspect in the drawing) Even if it is, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode based on the first permissible sound.

  That is, the first allowable sound that is output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is output for a predetermined time without ending the output even if the effect is received when in the output state. On the other hand, when the first acceptance sound that is output when the second suppression operation acceptance effect is generated is in the output state and the effect is accepted, The output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 395 and 396). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, which is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. The first permissible sound itself has a function useful for estimating whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, while making it difficult to estimate such a situation. Since it has been made to make it possible, it becomes possible to control that the game interest is reduced without being able to make the estimation.

  In addition to the first mode, the first allowable sound that is output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (the second mode, the third mode, or the like). ) Is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode when the first permissible sound is output, it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode without receiving the presentation when the first permissible sound is in the output state. This makes it possible to easily make an assumption as to whether it is desirable to maintain the game interest. However, in maintaining a sense of tension with respect to the production, the output in a mode (such as the second mode or the third mode) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation acceptance production occurs is more than the output in the first mode. It is desirable to make the execution rate low.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. By checking whether or not the allowable sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second allowable sound may not necessarily be prepared, and only the first allowable sound may be output in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression are also performed for the operation-related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the reception of the effect is allowed. Since there is a difference between the operation reception effect and the operation-related display, it is possible to estimate whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to appearing late with respect to the acceptable reception sound, there is only a difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. Therefore, some difficulty is left in the estimation of whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, and a sense of tension with respect to the performance is maintained.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is not possible to estimate whether the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is in effect when the output of the acceptance sound or the operation related display is finished. Also, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the execution mode of the effect after operation. That is, in the effect after the operation according to the first suppression operation reception effect, both "the effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are performed for "a certain period of time from the time when the effect reception was received" On the other hand, in the effect after the operation according to the second suppression operation reception effect, "the effect by the effect sound" is "that is performed for a certain time from the time when the effect reception was received", but "the liquid crystal display "Production by" is "finished when a predetermined timing tr44 arrives". That is, in this case, in the effect after the operation according to the second suppression operation reception effect, the time from the end of the “effect by the liquid crystal display” to the end of the “effect by the effect sound” at the timing when the effect reception is made. Becomes variable, and a large shift comes to occur, so by confirming such shift, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. .

  However, even if production elements that are useful for guessing are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are strong suppression modes or weak suppression modes. If there is something that can't be guessed, the game entertainment will eventually decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM playback is based on the reception of the effect within the set time (valid period). Is set to a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the BGM playback effect sound is changed to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred. A set time (valid period) is generated and the reception of the production can be made. According to such a configuration, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed by the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). Since the timing to be made to be different, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode also by confirming the timing.

  Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period) When the event occurs, the set time has passed without automatic reception of the production (see FIG. 397). That is, in this case, if there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) triggered by the reception of the effect for the specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound for BGM reproduction) Since there is no compensation for being unable to confirm the effect after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

  Further, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the "bGM playback reproduction sound" to the strong suppression mode is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect Or, it is set as the timing before that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback effect sound" to the weak suppression mode is ended is set to be later than the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode also by confirming the timing at which the "rendering sound for BGM reproduction" is returned to the non-suppression mode.

  Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above-described effect example, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) in the effect display apparatus 1600 (first effect member) regardless of which timing is received within the set time (effective period). The length of the period in which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged (see FIGS. 395 and 396). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depending on at which timing the effect is received within the set time (effective period). And the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed (see FIGS. 395 and 396).

  According to such a configuration, production performance is generated in “when to perform the production reception (operation)”, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed. Become.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, the first tolerance is set so that it is difficult to distinguish between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect that are different in the execution mode of the post-operation effect. Sounds are output as the same production sound over the same time, or production elements useful for distinguishing them are arranged in time series. As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest while maintaining a sense of tension with respect to the performance.

  Further, in the above configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect having different execution modes of the post-operation effect can be mixed within the effect according to one variation pattern. From this, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension about "when the effect reception (operation) is to be performed" whenever the operation reception effect occurs. In order to obtain such an effect, in addition to the aspect in which the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are mixed in the effect according to the one variation pattern, the effect according to the one variation pattern. It is desirable that an aspect in which only the second suppression operation reception effect (or the first suppression operation reception effect) appears within a plurality of times is made executable.

  In addition, if the purpose is to obtain only the effect by the effect on “when to perform the production reception (operation)”, a specific type of production in the first suppression operation reception production and the second suppression operation reception production. You may make it maintain the output in a non-suppression mode, without suppressing sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction).

  In addition, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member), regardless of at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. ) For the operation reception effect where the length of the period during which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel is made unchanged, a special result is obtained in the effect determination (e.g. notice determination) It is desirable that it cannot occur as a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern.

  That is, in this case, by confirming the execution mode of the effect after operation, it can be inferred that the special result is obtained in the preliminary effect determination (the expectation is relatively high). It becomes different from the fluctuation pattern which always occurs regardless of the result of the preliminary effect determination, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game when it is recognized that it is additionally performed, unlike the effect (pattern effect) of itself. It will be. It should be noted that the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) depend on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. The second suppression operation acceptance effect, in which the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel, changes, is generated only as an effect (pattern effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself. The variation pattern may be generated both as an effect (pattern effect) of the variation pattern itself and in a condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as advance notice determination).

  In addition, about the weak suppression mode which outputs "the effect sound of BGM reproduction" with the suppression degree lower than the strong suppression mode, when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur), it may appear You may That is, in this case, after the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the weak suppression mode is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without providing the operation opportunity. And the ratio according to which the degree of suppression is further increased until symbol fluctuation is stopped as the number of times of the weak suppression mode including the first suppression operation reception effect increases in the effect according to one fluctuation pattern If the ratio (the ratio at which the second suppression operation reception effect is further executed) is increased, it is possible to further improve the effect through the suppression state of “the effect sound of BGM reproduction”. In addition, when the effect is accepted within the set time (effective period) that occurs while "the effect sound of BGM playback" is not in the suppression mode, "the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases (figure Furthermore, it is possible to add further entertainingness to the presentation of the embodiment shown in 390 or the embodiment shown in FIG.

  Further, the strong suppression mode for the “BGM playback effect sound” may also appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation reception effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a presentation as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation acceptance effect occurs, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted within the set time (valid period). It was made to make it a suppression aspect (weak suppression aspect). However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated before the set time is generated, similarly to the case where the second suppression operation reception effect is generated. May be set to a suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (valid period) during which production reception is permitted is generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated when a predetermined timing comes depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set or the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of performance can be widened. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the “BGM playback effect sound” is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-inhibition mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect ends. It is desirable to make it come.

  Moreover, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and 395 to 397, in the second suppression operation reception production (strong suppression mode), the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode (suppression mode or The process of making the output silent or non-output) ends at the same timing as the end timing of the post-operation effect or before it, but the end timing of the post-operation effect has arrived You may make it finish later. Moreover, in this case, as long as at least the special symbol (decorative symbol) is in motion (unless the symbol variation is stopped), even if "the effect sound of BGM reproduction" is not returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode Good.

  As described above, the acceptable reception sound may not be generated a little before the set time (effective period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (effective period).

  In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIG. 391 to FIG. 393 and FIG. 395 to FIG. 397, the display effect after the operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) (liquid crystal display ) Is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the effect according to the variation pattern, while the effect sound output (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is accepted for the effect It was supposed to be terminated when a certain amount of time passed. However, instead of this, both after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are fluctuated It is also possible to end each at a predetermined timing in the effect according to the pattern, or after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), and a speaker (second effect member) Both the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the effect reception is made.

  In addition, the effect sound of the specific type to be suppressed (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is the timing when the effect changes in the effect according to the change pattern or the start of pattern change (for example, SP reach effect is started It is output when the timing etc. arrives. On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started from indeterminate timing (desired to be operated) within the set time.

  The specific variation pattern described in the example of effect shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 and the particular variation pattern described in the example of effect shown in FIG. It may be a fluctuation pattern. Further, the special effect state may be an effect state when the big hit probability concerning the big hit determination is relatively high, instead of the pre-read effect zone.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the “specific type of effect sound” is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode and output in an audible state. Even if the strong suppression mode is to make the “specific type effect sound” non-audible (silent (audible volume is 0) or non-output (channel assignment is terminated)). Good.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is an operation target and an operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the “first suppression operation reception effect”, only the operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the “second suppression operation reception effect”, refer to FIGS. 391 and 392. However, as described above, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode) based on the result of the preliminary announcement determination. ")" Has become. Therefore, when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that it is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the presentation has been received for “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”. The corresponding post-operation effects have the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is:
A first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion touched when the player operates) when the set time (effective period) is generated, and the operation receiving portion by the driving force when the set time (effective period) is generated An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode to be moved to a specific position. Here, the “first operation mode” assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” gives an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001. Referring to FIG. 198 (A3) and the like that the sword decorative body 5001 is “thing that can give an operation opportunity to the player in a state where the sword ornament 5001 has moved to a specific position”. As described above. However, one operation means (one operation receiving unit) may have a “first operation mode” and a “second operation mode”, and an operation opportunity may be given according to any of these modes.

And as this was also mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-A non-suppressed operation reception effect in which from the generation of the set time (effective period) to the execution of the effect after the operation is performed while outputting the specific type of effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) in the non-suppressed mode, and -A suppression operation reception effect is prepared for outputting a specific type of effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) in a suppression mode or silent state or in a non-output state, and further, as a suppression operation reception effect
-The first suppression operation reception effect that suppresses the effect sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound for BGM playback) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode) (for example, the above-mentioned "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect And the second suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned “suppression / automatic reception,” which suppresses the effect sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) with a relatively high suppression degree (strong suppression mode) Production)
Have prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception effect,
-While the specific type of production sound is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (in the suppression mode, being output in silence or in the non-output state), the first operation mode with respect to the operating means (Here, the operation button 410) is given a non-moving reception effect with suppression and an effect sound of a specific type is suppressed in a strong suppression mode (output in suppression mode or silence) Or in a non-output state), the controlled movement acceptance effect is provided in which the operation means is given an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the sword ornament 5001 is extracted). By preparing, the presentation performance when the operation opportunity is given is further improved.

  FIG. 398 shows an effect example (moving reception effect under suppression) that appears in “when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)” in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect). It is a time chart which shows. In the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), for the effect example (suppressed non-movement acceptance effect) that appears in “When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)”, This is as described with reference to FIG. 391 and FIG. 395 (period from the timing tr 40 to the end of the effect after the operation) and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 398, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), “when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)” is also received. In the production (suppression / automatic reception production), “the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” is basically the same as the portion not particularly described (FIGS. 391 and 392). 395 to 397), it is possible to appropriately adopt the related effects described above, and other examples and modifications.

  However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, the processing for moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position by the driving force when the set time (effective period) occurs is performed. Although it is required to carry out, there is a problem as to when to carry out the process.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state or probability changing short gaming state), first, as shown in FIG. 398 (c) and (h), As long as the timing tr40 at which the specific type of effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) is set to the strongly suppressed mode does not arrive, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode even if the set time for which the effect reception is permitted occurs. Is not given, and the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is only given. That is, in this case, as long as the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound for BGM reproduction) is not in the strong suppression mode, the player is no longer in the second operation mode even if the operation opportunity is given. However, it is possible to suppress the operation in the operation mode on the wrong side.

  On the other hand, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM playback) is set to a strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There are two possibilities, that is, and the case where an operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player is given the opportunity to give an operation opportunity in either the first operation mode or the second operation mode when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) has become a strong suppression aspect. As a result of being able to concentrate on '', it is possible to suppress the occurrence of operation errors among these.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, from the timing tr40 by concealing which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is granted until immediately before the operation opportunity is given. The tension and the game entertainment are suitably maintained until the production is accepted and the post-operation production is started. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and (h), when the timing tr42 when the set time (effective period) occurs, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. It is supposed to Here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the expectation level (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. The notice effect determination is performed so as to be.

  However, in this case, the effect reception itself is in a permitted state during a short time after the set time (effective period) has occurred (during the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed) Nevertheless, since it is difficult to operate the operation receiving unit properly, the length as the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced, which may reduce the fun of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and 398 (d), for the time required to move the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position, the acceptance acceptable sound Among the (first acceptable sound), the time is set to be shorter than the time until the first mode of the shortest output time ends the output. Thereby, even if any aspect (in addition to the first aspect, the above-described second aspect, third aspect, etc.) is output as the acceptance acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound), the effect acceptance is performed in the middle of the output state As a result, it is possible to make it possible to perform the output operation in the middle (the output end is possible in the middle), and even when the second operation mode appears, it is difficult to cause a rendering problem.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, with respect to the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force, there is no operation on the operation receiving portion, and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force. Therefore, it is moved at a higher speed so as to have a shorter time than the time required for moving from the original position to the original position (see FIG. 398 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it is possible to appeal a state where efforts are made to reduce the time that is substantially reduced as the set time (valid period), and a game caused by the reduction of the time. It is expected to suppress the dissatisfaction of the person.

  Moreover, in order to suppress such dissatisfaction more suitably, when generating the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect effect), the non-suppression shown in FIG. 390 as the set time (effective period) For the set time (effective period) of the operation reception effect of the mode (from timing tr31 to the effect after operation) or the operation reception effect of weak suppression mode (from timing tr50 to the effect after operation shown in FIG. 395) It is desirable to set a time value having a length equal to or longer than the time required to move the unit from the original position to the specific position. According to such a configuration, in the case of executing the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) in the second operation mode, a longer time value that has more than enough to compensate for the time that is substantially reduced Since a set time (effective period) is generated, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment. In this case, in order to make the program common, setting time with the same length may be set even when executing the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) in the first operation mode. desirable.

  However, as described above, during the times tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated, the effect is not substantially accepted, and the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced. In view of the above, when generating the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), the operation reception effect of the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 390 (from timing tr31 to after operation operation effect) as the set time (effective period) And for the set time (effective period) of the operation acceptance effect (from timing tr 50 to effect after operation) of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 395 “when the operation receiving portion is moved from the original position to the specific position Set a time value with a length greater than or equal to time and time from timing tr42A to tr43 after activation of the automatic button function. Rukoto can be said to be more desirable. Also in this case, in order to achieve commonality of the program, set a set time having the same length even when executing the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

  As described above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode and there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, As shown in 398 (a), (h) to (l), an effect reception is automatically generated at timing tr42A, and the post-operation display effect in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is based on the effect reception. (Liquid crystal display) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are executed at least as post-operation effects, respectively. However, in this case, although it is clear when viewed from FIGS. 398 (g) and 398 (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) becomes short. Therefore, there is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 398 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being performed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, "the speed at which the operation receiving unit is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is moved from the original position to the specific position It's daringly slower than "speed of time", so that it will be kept moving for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, the operation receiving unit transmits the movable presentation (post-operation presentation) in exchange for shortening of the execution time of the display presentation (liquid crystal display) after operation in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation member). Since it becomes possible to expect to function as a part of

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (h), “Moved effect from specific position to original position” by the operation receiving unit is after operation in response to automatic generation of the effect reception (automatic button function) It is started when a predetermined timing in the middle of the execution of the effect comes, but it may be started at the timing tr42A where the acceptance of the effect is automatically generated as in the post-operation effect.

  However, even if "moving from a specific position to an original position" is performed at a slow speed, it may not be possible to earn enough time as a movable effect with this alone, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain game interest. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (h), after the operation receiving unit is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position near the original position), vibration presentation is performed to vibrate the operation receiving unit. The period from the start of movement from the specific position to the original position (or a position near that position) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving portion is "by the operation receiving portion not operated by the player". It is made to function as a movable production period. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably realize the movable effect using the "operation receiving unit not operated by the player", and as a result of automatic generation of the effect reception, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) It is expected that the rendering performance when the execution time of the post-operation display rendering (liquid crystal display) is shortened is suitably maintained. In this case, if the operation receiving unit is made to emit light in a state where the operation receiving unit is moved from the specific position to the original position, it is more preferable that the operation receiving unit is used as a movable effect. It is possible to appeal to.

  Here, for the movable effect period (moving time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the “operation receiving unit that has not been operated by the player”, is the timing tr44 when the strong suppression mode ends? It is desirable that the timing be terminated before the timing tr44. As a result, the effect sound of the specific type is returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode, and it is possible to smoothly promote the progress (switching of effects) in the contents of the effect according to this.

  In addition, a difference from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that a message sound such as “Say me!” Is used as the second allowable sound (message sound). A message display such as “push-in” and a spear image based on the “sword decoration image SYG” may be displayed as output and operation-related display, respectively, so that an operation error is less likely to occur. become.

  In addition, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), no operation opportunity is given in such a second operation mode, but the "specific type of effect sound" is set to the weak suppression mode. If an operation opportunity is given under the control, it may also promote the operation error when the recognition of which one of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears is mistaken. In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 395 to FIG. 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs, the operation opportunity is performed with the “specific type of effect sound” in the weak suppression mode. Since the weak suppression mode is made to appear based on the effect reception being made without giving it, a useless sense of tension and anticipation that "the operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be given" It will be possible to provide an effect without having it.

  In the example of the effect (second operation mode), even when the operation receiving unit is operated within the set time, as in the case where the operation receiving unit is not operated within the set time, FIG. As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) within a period in which the post-operation effect is being executed comes, the vibration effect is made to vibrate the operation receiving portion. According to such a configuration, regardless of at which timing the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr 44 when the strong suppression mode ends is reached As a result, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will be ended soon and new presentation progress will appear.

  However, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, vibration presentation is started early based on the fact that the effect reception has been made by the operation, so that the effect after operation is being performed. A further improvement of the game interest may be achieved. That is, in this case, when the operation receiving unit is operated within the set time, the vibration effect is performed over a longer time than when the operation receiving unit is not operated within the set time.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, unless the specific type effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) is in a strong suppression mode, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. However, instead of this, when the effect acceptance is permitted when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is in the strong suppression mode, the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is not suppressed. The ratio at which the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode than when the effect reception is permitted when the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the weak suppression mode or the ratio (0 Or 100) may be increased.

  In addition, in the example of each effect (FIGS. 192 to 398) described above, in the operation reception effect where the automatic button function can be activated, the operation button effect is not activated as the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set a time value that is longer than the sum of the time until the set time has elapsed after the automatic button function is enabled for the set time (valid period). . According to such a configuration, a set time (valid period) having a longer time value that more than compensates for the time that is substantially cut off as a period during which the production reception is allowed is generated. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that may occur when in the normal gaming state,
・ Variation pattern based on the result of fluctuation pattern judgment Operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect production) to be executed as the effect (pattern effect) of itself It is ・ ・ that special result is obtained by the effect judgment (such as advance notice judgment) The operation reception effect (additional reception effect effect) to be executed as the effect performed additionally to the effect (effect pattern pattern) of the fluctuation pattern itself in the condition
At least to prepare.

  That is, the “internal reception effect” is obtained when a special result is obtained in the variation pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot determination (determination as to which variation pattern is used to execute the symbol effect) (a special variation pattern is selected). Then, it is determined that the execution is performed within the effect according to the determined variation pattern. On the other hand, the “additional reception effect” is obtained even if the “predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect” is obtained in the variation pattern determination (even if the predetermined variation pattern is selected). This is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that an “additional reception effect” is generated is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like) according to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, after the production according to the variation pattern is once started, the production determination is made rather than the occurrence of the “internal reception production” that is associated with the variation pattern (production pattern) and the occurrence of the production is confirmed. It can be said that it is more beneficial for the player to generate an “additional reception effect” that can be generated depending on the result of (preliminary judgment, etc.), and is more important in enhancing the game entertainment. Even if the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern, if an “additional reception effect” occurs in the effect, the “additional reception effect” The percentage (expected degree) in which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than the case where “” does not occur.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the inherent reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, a specific type effect sound (effect sound of “BGM playback”) is suppressed or In the case where the effect reception is permitted in silence output or in the non-output state, and in which the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of “BGM playback”) is output in the non-suppression mode In some cases, production reception is allowed. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, the reception of the effect is not allowed while being output in the suppression mode or silence, or in the non-output state, Production reception is allowed while a specific type of production sound is output in a non-suppressing manner. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, when the acceptance of the production is permitted, it is possible to add an additional effect by paying attention to whether the specific type of the production sound is output in a suppression mode, silence, or in a non-output state. It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the reception effect will occur, and it is expected to maintain the game entertainment interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the internal reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state is operated even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. When it is executed in an automatic reception mode capable of generating a post-production, and when an operation is not detected within a set time in which the reception of the production is permitted, the post-operation production is not generated and the set time is terminated. There are cases where it is executed in a reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effects that can occur when in the normal gaming state are not executed in the automatic reception mode, but are executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to recognize the possibility that an additional reception effect has occurred by paying attention to whether or not the effect reception is automatically (automatic button function) within the set time. As a result, it will be expected to maintain the game interest until the effect reception is made.

  FIG. 399 is a time chart showing the contents of an effect that appears when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 399, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (such as the notification determination according to the variation pattern 1) performed at the start of symbol variation, the notification effect At least a determination of whether to execute A is performed. As a result of the effect determination, when it is determined that the advance effect A is to be executed, the advance effect A is generated when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 arrives, against the symbol effect (effect pattern) It will be additionally executed (timing tr61 to tr62), and when it is not determined to execute the notice effect A, the notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 comes. The symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

  Here, when it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, when the timing tr61 arrives, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect are the variation pattern 1 itself (design) It is executed in addition to (production). Note that “additionally executing” can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. is there. At this time, all of the symbol effects based on the variation pattern 1 may be covered and the notice effect A may be displayed in such a manner that it cannot be viewed, or only a part of the symbol effects based on the variation pattern 1 may be covered. The notice effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the “ramp effect in response to the occurrence of the notice effect A” is output with priority over the “lamp effect based on the variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)”. Also, in the case of a production sound, by assigning a “production sound according to the notice effect A” to a channel different from the “production sound based on the variation pattern 1”, it is based on the “variation pattern 1 (production pattern)”. "Effect sound according to the advance effect A" is additionally output with respect to the effect sound.

  FIG. 400 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 400, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the performance determination performed at the start of symbol variation (such as a notice determination according to the variation pattern 2), “additional” It is determined at least whether or not to execute the “apparent reception effect”. Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this presentation example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390”. Therefore, if it is determined that the “additional reception effect” is to be executed as a result of this effect determination, the “additional reception effect” is determined based on the variation pattern 2 (the predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390). When the internal timing tr31 arrives, the symbol effect (effect pattern) is additionally executed (from the timing tr31 until the post-operation effect ends), and the "additional reception effect" is executed. If it is not determined, even if the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the “additional reception effect” does not appear, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is only executed. Become.

  Here, for the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” based on the fluctuation pattern 2 (predetermined fluctuation pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. Among them, the first permissible sound is output at timing tr31, the setting time (effective period) occurs at timing tr32, and the setting time ends at timing tr33 without the automatic button function being activated. Because these are as described above with reference to FIG. 390 and the like, the description will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400 is not particularly described as “the effect contents when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode” shown in FIG. 390. The parts are basically the same, and it is possible to appropriately adopt the related effects described above, other examples and modifications.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 400, an example in which the effect after operation according to the effect reception is executed in the form of the above-described other example in FIG. As stated. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, when the effect is received within the set time (effective period) (timing tr 32 a in the figure), based on the effect being received. And “post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)” and “post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)” as post-operation effects At least for the post-operation effects,
The "display after presentation (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (the first effect member)" is ended at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33 regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. ,
The “post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)” is executed in such a manner that it is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the effect reception is made. It will be.

  FIG. 401 is a time chart showing the contents of an effect that appears when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 401, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as the variation pattern determination result, any result is obtained in the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 3) performed at the start of the symbol variation. Regardless of whether or not it is performed, at timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3, processing for setting the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" to the above-mentioned "strong suppression mode" is performed, and the "strong suppression mode" At timing tr41 where the symbol appears, “inherent reception effect” will be generated as a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 to the end of the operation after operation).

  Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this effect example is the same as the “specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 391 to FIG. 393 or FIG. 395 to FIG. 398”. Therefore, for the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) shown in FIG. 401, the “BGM playback” effect sound based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (specific fluctuation pattern) is strongly suppressed (for example, silence (volume 0)). In the output state or the non-audible state such as the non-output state), when the timing tr41 arrives, a first allowable sound is output, and a set time (effective period) is generated at the timing tr42. When the “timing tr42A” before the timing tr43 at which the lapse of time arrives without receiving the production, the above-described automatic button function is activated, but these are described in “FIGS. 391 to 393 or FIG. The description will be omitted because it is as described above with reference to "395 to 398" and the like. That is, the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) shown in FIG. 401 is the same as the effect content of the “suppression / automatic reception effect” shown in FIG. 391. It is possible to employ | adopt suitably about FIG. 393, FIG. 395-FIG. 398 grade | etc.,).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal gaming state, during the period in which the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in a strong suppression mode, Although “effect” may occur, “additional reception effect” that is executed in addition to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern is not generated, whereas “BGM playback” During the period in which the production sound is in a non-suppressing manner, an “internal reception effect” that is a design effect based on the variation pattern may occur, or in addition to the design effect based on the variation pattern In some cases, an "additional reception effect" to be executed may occur.

  That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on the variation pattern is in a strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is an “additional reception effect” is excluded. As a result, it becomes possible to generate a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted while an environment is established in which the operation reception effect is executed in any mode. . On the other hand, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the non-suppression mode, it can be recognized that the additional reception effect may be generated. As a result, it is expected to maintain the amusement interest.

  In order to preferably obtain such effects, "additional reception effect" and "intrinsic reception effect" may appear in different fluctuation patterns 2, 3 etc. It is desirable that “additional reception effects” and “intrinsic reception effects” can be made to sequentially appear even within the effects according to the specific fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern 3). It is desirable that the “additional reception effect” occurs at a timing before the “internal reception effect”.

  More preferably, within the production according to one fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the “additional reception production” and the “internal reception production” are performed while the production sound of “BGM playback” is in a non-suppressing manner. ”Are allowed to appear in sequence, and the“ internal reception effect ”is further allowed to appear while the effect sound of“ BGM playback ”is in the strong suppression mode. According to such a configuration, when it is possible to grasp which of the “additional reception effect” and the “internal reception effect” is generated according to the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode) When it is difficult to determine which of the “additional reception effect” and the “internal reception effect” is occurring (non-suppression mode), the suppression mode for the “BGM playback” effect sound appears. Can improve the fun of gaming.

  Furthermore, if an operation reception effect (internal reception effect) occurs in the design effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern, the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in a strong suppression mode, It is desirable that "additional reception effect" does not occur within a period from the end of the reception effect to the stop of the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the operation reception effect is an “additional reception effect” at the time when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the strong suppression mode. In addition to being excluded, even the possibility of an “additional reception effect” appearing before the symbol fluctuation is stopped is also excluded, so that the “additional reception effect” occurs. On the other hand, the generated “internal reception effect” is executed in any manner (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, aspect of post-operation effect, etc.) without giving a sense of expectation to the user. You will be able to concentrate.

  In addition, when "additional reception effect" occurs, "inherent reception effect (both non-suppression mode and strong suppression mode)" occurs later than when "additional reception effect" does not occur. As described above, it is desirable that the rate of execution in a mode with a high degree of expectation (acceptable sound, type of operation means, mode of presentation after operation, etc.) be high.

  Also, as described above, when the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) is always generated during the period of the strong suppression mode. May be In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are candidates for selection in the variation pattern determination, “the strong suppression mode is selected, but the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) is performed during the strong suppression mode”. The variation pattern that does not occur ”is not included, and“ the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) during the strong suppression mode when included in the strong suppression mode ”is included. . Or, even if the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to the strong suppression mode, the period in which the strong reception mode is set may end without the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) being generated. You may In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are candidates for selection in the variation pattern determination, “the strong suppression mode is selected, but the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) is performed during the strong suppression mode”. “A variation pattern that does not occur” and “a variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (internal reception effect) during the strong suppression mode” when included in the strong suppression mode. .

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the “strong Even if the player does not notice that it is in the “suppression mode”, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is excluded based on the following effect elements.

  That is, when the “internal reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, first, even when the first allowable sound is the “additional reception effect” Even in the case where the effect sound that can be output is output over the same time (in the figure, output in the “first mode”), instead of the “additional reception effect” based on the first allowable sound, It is possible to recognize that the "inherent receptionist presentation" is occurring. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 400) output upon occurrence of the “additional reception effect” ends the output halfway even if the effect is received in the output state. The output sound is output for a predetermined period of time, while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode” and is output when the “internal reception effect” occurs. The first allowable sound to be played (see FIG. 401) is to terminate the output halfway according to the effect reception when the effect is received when the output state is made.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “intrinsic reception effect” is generated while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second permissible sound is also output, by confirming whether or not the second permissible sound is output, the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is eliminated. It is also possible to recognize that However, as described above, the second allowable sound may not necessarily be prepared.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 400 and 401, the operation related display (display for prompting the operation) appearing in the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is also possible. If the "intrinsic reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode" (with message display), the "additional reception effect" is generated It is possible to differentiate between cases (without displaying a message), and it is possible to recognize that the possibility that "additional reception effects" are occurring is also excluded.

  In addition, in the “internal reception effect” that occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, the automatic button function described above can be activated, In the “additional reception effect”, the automatic button function described above is not activated, and this also excludes the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred. It is possible to recognize.

  As described above, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, various effects other than the effect elements related to the “suppression mode” are generated. The fact that the “additional reception effect” is occurring in the element is different from the case where the “additional reception effect” is occurring, the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is relatively excluded. It is possible to easily recognize, and it becomes possible to promote concentration on the "intrinsic reception effects".

  On the other hand, when "inherent reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in "non-suppression mode", common points are added with "additional reception effect" and various effect elements. By making it difficult to recognize which of the "inherent reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" is occurring, the "additional reception effect" is generated. It is intended to provide an expressiveness that makes people aware of the possibility.

  FIG. 402 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the “internal reception effect” as the symbol effect based on the variation pattern occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”. It is. The “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402 corresponds to the variation pattern when a variation pattern different from “the variation pattern that can generate the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401” is selected. It may be generated as a symbol effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation acceptance effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401 is selected, a symbol effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern occurs. .

  As shown in FIG. 402, the "intrinsic reception effect" that occurs in the "non-suppression mode" also occurs in the "strong suppression mode", and the "inheritance shown in FIG. 401". As in the case of “Permanent reception effect production”, even when any result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary judgment), it always occurs when a predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the symbol effect arrives It has become a thing.

  However, the first allowable sound (first mode) output upon generation of the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 402 is the first permission output upon the generation of the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 400. As in the case of the sound (first aspect), even if the effect is accepted when in the output state, the output is not terminated halfway, but is output over a predetermined time (timing tr 72 a) . Therefore, when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to distinguish which of the "internal reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" is occurring based on this. .

  Further, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the second permissible sound is not output together with the output of the first permissible sound (first aspect), and this point is also shown in FIG. 400. It is the same as “Additional reception effect”.

  Further, in the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the operation means to be operated as an operation-related display (a display prompting an operation) appearing in a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted Only the insulted bird's-eye view image and the gauge display indicating the remaining time are displayed, and no message display is displayed, and in this respect as well as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400. It has become.

  Further, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the operation opportunity is given only to the “operation button 410”, and the “sword decorative body 5001” is not set as the operation target. This is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG.

  In addition, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, when the operation is not detected within the set time (effective period), the above-described automatic button function is not activated, and the post-operation effect is performed. The timing tr73 at which the set time (valid period) ends without occurring has arrived, and this is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG.

  In this way, when the “internal reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”, the “BGM playback” effect sound becomes the “strong suppression mode”. Unlike the case where an “internal reception effect” occurs, various effect elements are common with the occurrence of an “additional reception effect”, and an “additional reception effect” may occur. You can be conscious of sex.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the production sound of “BGM playback” is in the “non-suppression mode”, “internal reception production (internal reception production in which the automatic button function is not activated)” ”Occurs, there is a case where an allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output and a case where a set time is generated without outputting the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) itself. . On the other hand, when the “additional reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”, the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) itself is not output. A set time is not generated, and an acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is always output.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “non-suppression mode”, when the reception permission sound is output, the “internal reception effect” Or “additional reception effect” is difficult to recognize, but when the acceptable reception sound is not output, “internal reception effect” instead of “additional reception effect” It becomes possible to recognize that it is occurring. Whether or not an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output when the “internal reception effect” is generated while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”. It is desirable that it is determined according to the type of variation pattern, not the production determination. “Internal reception effect” in a non-suppression mode in which an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output, and “Internal reception effect” in a non-inhibition mode in which an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is not output In the case of, may be sequentially performed within the same symbol effect (for example, symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern).

  Further, according to the above configuration, when the operation acceptance effect in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, the “inherent acceptance effect” and the “additional acceptance effect” are generated when the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output. While it is difficult to recognize which is occurring, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is “inherent reception effect” when the reception permission sound (first permission sound) is not output. It becomes like this.

  In the "additional reception effect", it has been described that the first acceptable sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the presentation determination (preliminary decision), but the "differential reception effect" It may not be output when “internal receptionist effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in “non-suppression mode” (for example, “specification shown in FIG. 394 Aspects)). However, for the different aspect, it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of the first acceptable sound be lower than that output in the first aspect.

  With respect to the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, other examples and modifications relating to the operation reception effect shown in FIG.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 399 and FIG. 400, for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated as if the effect determination is performed while the symbol effect is being performed, but the effect determination is actually Is performed at the start of symbol variation.

  In addition, in the example of production shown in FIGS. 390 to 402, with respect to the aspect of the post-operation production according to the production acceptance, when the big hit is obtained by the big hit determination and when the big hit is lost by the big hit judgment You may make it different. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, the production examples are as shown in FIG. 390 to FIG. 402. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost in the big hit determination, FIG. Post-operation effects may be performed in a mode different from the effect example shown in 402.

  As described above, the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has conventionally been realized by executing a program that individually controls various effect devices, a program that links a plurality of effect devices, and the like. These programs are described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the rendering device for each notice content in addition to the commands related to the variation pattern, and are created by a highly skilled programmer. In the liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in a frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, symbol, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of gaming machines, it has been required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it has been necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, a high level of skill is required for each programmer and the development man-hours increase, making it difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of man-hours required for the test for the operation check and the quality improvement of the gaming machine also increases.

  Therefore, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of this embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) is not realized by the program code. In addition, the program data for the gaming machine is output by a tool for creating a liquid crystal rendering effect, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality. I am trying to do it.

  More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of an effect. Each block is provided with a flag (usability information) indicating whether or not an effect based on the block can be executed. This flag (usability information) is stored, for example, as rewritable information on the RAM.

  In the scenario data, for example, blocks corresponding to the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination are configured to be combined in time series. That is, when a start condition for starting symbol variation is established, an effect determination as to which type of effect is to be generated among those effects is performed first, and when the result is obtained, Based on the obtained result, the flag (usability information) is set to ON for the block corresponding to the effect type for which the determination result to be executed is obtained, and the determination result to be executed is obtained. For the block corresponding to the production type that has not been made, the flag (usability information) is kept off. Thereby, after symbol variation (variation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in time series (every unit time (one frame)) to correspond to the block set in the ON state Only the type of production is selectively executed.

  Here, with regard to scenario data, different data may be prepared for each type of fluctuation pattern, or may be prepared independently of the fluctuation pattern. When prepared as different data for each type of variation pattern, it will be configured as scenario data in which only the blocks corresponding to the production type that may occur separately for each variation pattern are combined in time series, Among the blocks, only the flag (usability information) of the block determined as the execution target is operated to the on state. On the other hand, when prepared as data prepared in common for each variation pattern, the blocks corresponding to all the production types (numbers corresponding to the blocks) are configured as scenario data stored by a table structure or the like. Of these blocks, it may be realized by operating only the flag (usability information) of the block determined as the execution target in the ON state. The scenario data prepared without depending on the variation pattern may be prepared in correspondence with the type of processing read out while processing (analyzing) the block (described later “ Scenario data related to effects after operation), in this case, scenario data corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern and scenario data not corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern are respectively prepared, which corresponds to the type of fluctuation pattern As for the scenario data that is not used, the processing load and the storage capacity can be suitably suppressed since the scenario data can be commonly used in the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects relating to lottery, effect and symbol substitution, and interactive effects for external input by the player occur, so each block operated in the on state is executed. It is impossible to achieve all the productions with just that.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to the present embodiment, processing identification information (rendering SW) for calling a program for executing effects or executing predetermined control at a predetermined timing is in a block or block. Are set (embedded) in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data associated with. Here, the process identification information (effect SW) is prepared for the types of programs to be called, and each type is set to an on state or an off state. Alternatively, processing identification information (rendering SW) that can always function as the on state may be prepared. As a result, when processing identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, etc., according to the type of the acquired processing identification information. The process of the content is called, and the called process is performed. The process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called or indicates the number in the table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored. It may be.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) embedded process identification information while executing and analyzing scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, etc., a program function corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information. Call dynamically (call back). Depending on the type (process content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of the lamp, operation of the feature, etc.) It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent production control, such as setting and updating of data in a predetermined area. In this way, by calling the program function with the process identification information, it is possible to realize display or non-display of rendering by a plurality of blocks, rendering and symbol replacement, and interactive rendering for external input by the player.

  The program function called by callback is incorporated in advance in the peripheral control unit 1530, and does not have to be newly created for each model of the gaming machine. Therefore, even designers and planners who do not have advanced program knowledge need only design the production of various productions. Otherwise, process identification information that calls predefined program functions is set. By this, it is possible to easily realize even complex rendering specifications. In addition, using the production creation tool, production blocks (liquid crystal production scheduler data) can be created in production units, and the development period can be greatly reduced. In addition, production contents can be created based on random lottery results. By performing a test using a flag (usability information) and process identification information without performing a test, simplification of the test process and significant reduction of the time required for the test can be realized.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game control means (main control) capable of giving a privilege based on the determination of the big hit and the predetermined determination result (big hit winning) obtained. Based on the substrate 1310), effect control means (peripheral control unit 1511) capable of executing processing relating to various effects based on fluctuation patterns according to the determination, and image data as a display area based on processing performed by the effect control means And image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) for outputting the information, and the effect control means reads out time-series image information (the above-mentioned scenario data and block, or liquid crystal presentation scheduler data), and the time-series image information And an image information processing unit capable of executing processing for displaying an image on the basis of.

  In addition, in the time-series image information (such as the scenario data and block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data described above) according to this embodiment, the processing identification information may be included at least in part. The information processing means can acquire the process identification information from the time-series image information, and can call a process according to the type of the acquired process identification information. In this way, while performing processing relating to an image every unit time (for example, one frame), processing relating to a rendering element (a lamp, a sound, a movable body, etc.) different from the image is based on a schedule for displaying an image. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start time from being shifted between the production elements when a single production is realized in cooperation with different production elements. Become.

  Although this point will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-series image information read out when the specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern, the process identification information is acquired every unit time. Sections can be included. In such a configuration, time-series image information which is data for specifying "processing for displaying an image" in a time-series manner, and when processing identification information which is data for specifying reading of processing is included in itself. Since the time series image information read out when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern is included in a section where the process identification information is acquired for each unit time, the fine timing Even in the case where it is necessary to perform the rendering process, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the effect with the display image.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect reception is performed while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state. Allowed special operation reception effects can be executed. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the effect is permitted in the operation related display before the allowance which is performed when such special operation acceptance effect is generated and the special operation acceptance effect. The allowable operation related display performed when the camera is in the ON state is displayed based on mutually different time-series image information (the above-described scenario data or block, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, or the like). That is, in the special operation reception effect according to the above configuration, since the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state, the operation effect is produced. It is expected to concentrate on. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the rendering performance becomes poor as much as the specific type of rendering sound is suppressed. In this respect, in the above configuration, the before-permission operation related display performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the allowable operation related display performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are performed. Since the display effects are displayed based on different time-series image information, it is possible to realize various effects for display effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when no operation is detected within a period during which the reception of the performance is allowed, a special operation reception effect that can generate a post-operation effect is executed. It is possible. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the effect is permitted in the operation related display before the allowance which is performed when such special operation acceptance effect is generated and the special operation acceptance effect. The allowable operation related display performed when the camera is in the ON state is displayed based on mutually different time-series image information (the above-described scenario data or block, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, or the like). That is, in such a special operation reception effect, even after the operation is not detected within a period in which the effect reception is permitted, it is possible to generate an effect after the operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the player can not perform the operation and as a result, the effect can not be confirmed after the operation. Moreover, in the above configuration, regarding the pre-permission operation related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the permissible operation related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is in a state in which the production reception is permitted, Since the display is made based on different time-series image information, it is possible to realize a variety of performances with respect to the display effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment.

  In addition, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment reads information corresponding to image data to be displayed from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the block, and performs liquid crystal display control on the read information. It is possible to output to the unit 1512. In this regard, as will be described later, the block is read as a first type block that is read after a wait time (wait processing period) required until the predetermined timing arrives, and without waiting time (wait processing period). A second type block is prepared.

  More specifically, the first type block is a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the availability information is set to the on state at the start of the variation pattern and the timing for starting the effect comes. It can be configured to be read out later. For the second type block, for example, within the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the first type block, the availability information corresponding to the second type block Can be configured to be read out without passing the wait time (wait processing period) by being set to the on state.

  That is, in this case, the second type block does not depend on the setting value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data shared among a plurality of timings and a plurality of fluctuation patterns. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the effect design and the effect change as well as the expectation of promoting the reduction of the processing load and the memory capacity.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect) among the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). The second time-series image information (the second block or the second liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) can be read out while the processing based on the scheduler data is being executed, and the second time-series image information is read out Then, the process based on the second time-series image information is changed to the execution state in place of the process based on the first time-series image information in the middle of execution. That is, in this case, it is possible to save the trouble of ending the processing based on the first time-series image information in the middle, and reduction in processing load and memory capacity can be expected.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “block” according to this embodiment will be described again. When it is assumed that the image displayed on the screen is composed of "a plurality of image elements (a plurality of layers)", it is prepared separately for those image elements (a layer), and to display the image elements The image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is provided with a process for reading out information (image number) corresponding to the image data (moving image or still image) to be output.

  Here, the processing (processing in the peripheral control unit 1511) for reading out the information (image number) corresponding to the image data is executed in the “peripheral control unit steady processing (FIG. 95)” activated every frame. It is determined for each frame whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be displayed currently based on the “block”, and if there is the information, it is read out, A drawing list is created based on the information read out for each frame and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). Thus, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads out the image data based on the drawing list, creates a display image, and then outputs the image to the display area, thereby displaying the image on the effect display device 1600. An effect will be realized.

  Here, the "block" itself may be configured as a data structure that designates "information (image number) corresponding to image data" every unit time, and in this case, the "liquid crystal" described above It is possible to omit the need for preparing "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data" separately from the "block" since it has the function as the rendering scheduler data ".

  However, the “block” according to this explanation example is for identifying the type of “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data”, and is currently displayed based on the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data” associated with the “block”. It is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be processed. If there is such information, it is read out and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). A plurality of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” may be associated with one “block”. In this case, these “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” are executed in a predetermined order. Alternatively, one of the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data" is selectively executed.

  Also, in the “block” according to this illustrative example, a “liquid crystal effect” in which a schedule for each frame regarding information (image number) corresponding to “image data in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)” is described. In addition to the “scheduler data”, information on what is executed as “processing related to lamp emission”, information on which is executed as “processing related to movable body operation”, and “processing related to sound output” It also includes information about what to do. That is, in this case, if a "block" for realizing a specific preview effect is read out, "image processing in the effect display device 1600" related to the specific preview effect based on the "block", Since “processing related to lamp emission”, “processing related to movable body operation”, and “processing related to sound output” are read out and executed, different rendering elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound) ), It is possible to prevent the start time from being shifted between the effect elements when one effect (specific notice effect) is realized.

  And as mentioned above, the "block" constitutes one scenario data together with or alone with other blocks, and "block" in which the availability information is in the ON state among the scenario data. By performing (analyzing) selectively only, the effect in the aspect according to the result of the effect determination is performed.

  However, as far as scenario data and blocks are concerned, any data may be used as long as it has a relationship that “scenario data can be configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of an effect”, separately from “block”. The detailed implementation method is not limited, including the provision of “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data”.

  FIG. 403 conceptually illustrates an example of processing procedures when various display effects are realized using “scenario data” and “block” when a specific variation pattern is selected based on the result of the big hit determination. It is a time chart. In FIG. 403, “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is described as “animation list”, but these are synonymous.

  As shown in FIG. 403, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this explanation example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. The blocks (the symbol block A, the symbol block B, the symbol block C, and the symbol block D) are combined in time series. However, in this embodiment, scenario data such as layer 1 and layer 5 scenario data, in which only one block indicating the content of the presentation is prepared, is also included.

  In addition, as will be described later, the scenario data according to this example includes “configured to selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated blocks”. In this case, only the unusable information corresponding to the selected block among the plurality of blocks is turned on, and the unusable information corresponding to the other blocks is left in the off state. Any one of them can be selectively executed. Or, the block according to this example includes “what is configured to selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, In this case, only the unavailable information corresponding to the selected liquid crystal effect scheduler data among the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data is turned on, and the unusable information corresponding to the other liquid crystal effect scheduler data remains in the off state. By making the above, any one of the plurality of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data may be made selectively executable.

  Now, assuming that a start condition for symbol variation (pending and holding) is satisfied, the peripheral control unit 1511 first acquires information on various determination results from the main control substrate 1310. The information acquired in this way also includes information on variation patterns, and the peripheral control unit 1511 reads out scenario data corresponding to the information (variation patterns), and associates the scenario data as a candidate for execution. An effect determination is performed as to which block (rendering effect) is to be executed among the plurality of blocks (blocks corresponding to the preliminary effects and the like). Then, for a block (rendering effect) for which an effect determination to execute is made among a plurality of blocks (rendering effect) associated with the scenario data, the availability information is operated (set) in the ON state, and executed. For the block (rendering) for which the effect judgment to the effect is not made, the availability information is kept in the OFF state.

  In addition, about the availability information matched with each block (effect), when starting scenario effect (the fluctuation effect by a decoration pattern) etc., when scenario data is read, it is made to operate (set) to an OFF state ing. Then, based on the scenario data read out in this way, the above-described process is performed as to which block's availability information is to be operated (set) in the on state.

  Here, regarding the “block” in which the availability information is operated (set) when the symbol effect is started, the symbol effect is executed (analyzed) immediately after the symbol effect is started based on the scenario data. It is executed (analyzed) in the form following another block (production) started based on the data, or executed at a timing after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) for the scenario data or block ( Analysis). However, the blocks (effects) also include “those which may be executed at a plurality of timings in one fluctuation pattern” and “thirks which may be executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns”. In other words, when starting the design effect, if the system is configured to operate (set) the availability information of all the blocks to be executed within the variation, “even if it is an effect mode in which the same content appears. If the execution timings are different, it is necessary to prepare scenario data (or blocks) in which different wait times (wait processing periods) are set. That is, in this case, although the same effect content is provided, different data is prepared and the effect is executed based on the data, so there is a concern that the processing load and the memory capacity may be adversely affected.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always targeted for execution, but the specific block (specific effect) is executed when executing the symbol effect. The symbol effect can be started in the off state without operating (setting) the availability information of the) in the on state. Such specific blocks (specific effects) correspond to “appearing EF block E”, “operation waiting block E”, “post-operation block E”, etc. in FIG. Will be described later. Among these, “block E after operation” is executed as an effect (effect for which an effect content dedicated to the big hit is prepared) that clearly indicates whether the player has won or failed the big hit.

  Further, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, even if it is a block (effect) that is obtained as a result of effect determination, it is executed at another variation pattern or at another timing. When the symbol effect is executed, it is possible to start the symbol effect in the off state without operating (setting) the availability information in the on state. Such blocks include “operation waiting block A” and “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” in FIG. 403. These blocks will also be described later.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied at timing ts1. Therefore, at timing ts1, scenario data separately determined for each layer is read out in a manner corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern. Subsequently, an effect determination is performed on which of the block associated with the scenario data thus read out and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is to be operated (set) in the ON state. Then, an operation (setting) for the availability information is performed based on the result of the effect determination. Then, the scenario data is separately executed (analyzed) separately for each layer while the operation (setting) on the availability information is performed in this manner, so that the rendering progresses in a mode according to the result of the rendering determination.

  However, instead of this, the presentation determination according to the type of the variation pattern may be performed before the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in a manner corresponding to the type of the variation pattern. Good. That is, in this case, the result of the effect determination executed before the scenario data is read out with respect to the blocks associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. It will operate on the basis of.

  Here, in “layer 1” of the plurality of layers, “background image” displayed from the time when the symbol effect is not executed (the symbol is stopped and the game is not executed). This corresponds to the scenario data block (normal background block). Therefore, in the “layer 1”, a new block is not read out when the timing ts1 arrives, and the block (normal background block) that is already in the execution state is continuously executed ( Analysis).

  More specifically, in the normal background block, “which image data” should be output at “which timing” as “image data for background image” stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 “Liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal background”, which is information (time-series image information) for the above, is associated with each other. That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511, the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal background" is executed (analyzed) every unit time (one frame), and as a result, "image data for moving background (moving image or Whenever information corresponding to “still image” is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one information (drawing list) may be created together with the information obtained from another frame, and may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 as the drawing list. As a result, the background depiction (normal background) according to the schedule defined in the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal background” is displayed on the rendering display device 1600. For blocks and scenario data that associate this "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal background", the timing when the power-on processing is finished, the corresponding rendering state (normal rendering state, high probability rendering state, special rendering mode, etc. It is desirable to be read out at the timing of entering the), and to be set as time-series image information in which a background image (background moving image) of the same contents is loop-displayed every predetermined time. In addition, the information corresponding to “image data for a background image (moving image or still image)” is displayed on the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 without creating information (drawing list) together with information obtained from another frame. You may make it transmit with respect to. The point is that the information corresponding to “image data (moving image or still image) for background image” may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any manner.

  The normal background image displayed on “Layer 1” based on the normal background block is SP on “Layer 3” based on “SP reach background block” and “SP end background block” described later. When the background image at the time of reaching is displayed, the background image on the “layer 3” is preferentially displayed and thus the effect display device 1600 is not displayed. However, as the internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on “Layer 3”, “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background” is displayed on “Layer 1”. The processing related to the normal background image based on the image is continuously executed, and is not set to the non-executed state according to the processing status of the SP background image on “Layer 3”. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403, in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of SP reach ends, the normal background is displayed again, and thus the normal background is displayed. Originally, a “design block D” for displaying a stopped design is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize in which effect state the winning symbol is displayed when the big hit symbol appears, and it is possible to suitably promote understanding of the game.

  On the other hand, “layer 2” corresponds to a scenario data block (symbol block) for “effect symbol (symbol displayed on effect display device 1600)”. In the specific fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 403, since the SP reach effect is developed, the scenario data of “layer 2” is associated with “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for change before reach”. "For symbol" for which "symbol block B" which associates "block for symbol A" with "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal reach variation" and "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach variation" It is stipulated that “block C” and “symbol block D” associated with “stop design liquid crystal effect scheduler data” are sequentially executed (analyzed).

  However, in recent years, during the period in which the SP reach background is displayed, the “effect design” is often displayed small in the effect display device 1600. Further, after the SP reach background is displayed, The presentation may be made such as to be returned, and then the SP reach background is displayed again. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that a shift may occur when there is some abnormality just by executing (analyzing) the display schedule for the “design symbol” and the display schedule for the “SP reach background” for each layer. Therefore, “symbol block C” associated with “SP reach variation liquid crystal effect scheduler data” may be executed based on the display schedule related to “SP reach background”. In this case, the process related to the background image functions to manage the schedule of the effect pattern.

  For example, for calling a process of turning on the availability information of the symbol block C at a predetermined timing in the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" described later. By attaching the process identification information, “pattern block C” and “pattern block D” can be executed based on the display schedule according to “SP reach background”. In this case, for "symbol block C" and "symbol block D", the availability information is kept in the off state when starting the symbol effect, and "symbol block A". ”And“ symbol block B ”are not included in the scenario data, and are configured as different scenario data.

  Also, “layer 3” corresponds to the blocks (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) of scenario data related to “background image after start of SP reach effect start”. In this respect, “the background image after the SP reach effect is started” should not be displayed when the symbol effect is started, but should be started from the middle of the symbol effect. Therefore, in the scenario data of “layer 3”, a waiting time (waiting processing period) is set which functions so as not to execute the block of “background image after the SP reach effect is started” until the corresponding timing comes. Yes. Thus, after passing a predetermined weight time (weight processing period) after the start of the symbol effect, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” are sequentially executed (analyzed), and accordingly Since the information can be read out for each frame, a background image of the SP reach effect appears on the effect display device 1600.

  In other words, in this case, the block includes a first type block (a block corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 403) read after a wait time (wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives, The second type block (blocks corresponding to layer 1, layer 2 and layers 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 403) to be read out without passing the wait time (wait processing period) is included. The second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data that is shared at all production timings, so that the processing load and memory capacity can be reduced. In addition to being expected, it becomes possible to facilitate the effect design and the effect change.

  In this point, in SP reach production, after the display production of the same contents is started regardless of the big hit, the production contents for the big hit (for example, the production contents that the character wins etc.) and the for loss It is often configured to suggest a determination result of a big hit by branching to any of the production contents (for example, the production contents that the character loses). In this case, although the display effect of the same contents is executed regardless of the hit of the big hit until the middle stage of the SP reach production, they are different blocks (block for big hit, block for lost) If it is displayed as image data or image data, the processing load and memory capacity may be adversely affected.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, with regard to scenario data relating to SP reach effect, a block (SP reach background block) corresponding to image data that can be shared between a big hit and a lost time, and a big hit and These blocks are divided into blocks (SP end background blocks) corresponding to different image data at the time of loss, and these are executed sequentially. As a result, the SP reach effect can be executed while suppressing the processing load and the memory capacity.

  By the way, in the scenario data relating to the SP reach effect, “SP reach background block” is read out after passing a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” is read out. Although these processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit time, in “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background”, a section in which the same process identification information is acquired for each unit time (one frame) is The effect reception period (effective period) is generated not by time management by a timer or the like but by each frame management of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data.

For example, in “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” shown in FIG. 403, the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is executed (analyzed) separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present. Process identification information "X1" is lined up every frame from the timing ts31 immediately after being done. Every time the process identification information "X1" is read out, the following "process X1" is read out and executed.
Process X1. A process in which an effect determination as to whether to generate an effect after operation corresponding to “block C after operation” is performed based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such process identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time is "Period period"), and in "process X1", the availability information of "block C after operation" associated with "layer 6" is turned on when effect determination is made. The operation (setting) is performed. As a result, the “post-operation block C” is read every unit time for the corresponding time, and the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler” associated with the “post-operation block C”. “Data C” is executed (analyzed) every unit time, and “process related to lamp emission” or “process related to movable body operation” associated with the “post-operation block C”. By performing execution of “processing related to sound output” and the like, it is possible to generate post-operation effects corresponding to “post-operation block C”.

  In this way, even in the frame following the start of execution of each process associated with "block C for post operation", the "liquid crystal effect scheduler for the SP reach background" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" "Data" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when an effect is received in the middle of a section (effect reception period) to which process identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time, “SP reach background for Processing identification information (here, “X1”) is read out from the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data”, and the “processing X1” corresponding to the processing identification information is executed. However, the “process X1” also includes a process of determining whether each process associated with the “post-operation block C” has been started to be executed. It is determined that the processing X1 is ended without performing any more processing based on the operation detection information by determining that the execution is started.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 403, four pieces of the same process identification information (here “X1”) are arranged from the timing ts31, but read out from the second process identification information (here “X1”). In “Process X1”, an effect is received, and “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data C” associated with “post-operation block C” is executed (analyzed) in “layer 6”. Assume the case. In this case, although the necessity of reading out the third and fourth process identification information (here, “X1”) filled in the figure is no longer lost, the “LCD reach scheduler for the SP reach background” The “data” is automatically read out during execution of the unit time. However, each time the information is read in this way, a process such as “End the process X1 because the post-operation effect has been executed” is executed in the “process X1” corresponding to the process identification information (here, “X1”). Thus, the process related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

  On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in “Process X1” (determination that the post-operation effect is not executed), the “post-operation block C” associated with “Layer 6” is used. The process X1 is ended with the availability information turned off. Then, until the section in which the same processing identification information (here, “X1”) is acquired every unit time (one frame) is ended, “the liquid crystal effect scheduler for SP reach background” every unit time (one frame). The process identification information (here, “X1”) is read out from the “data”, and the above “process X1” corresponding to this is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the above section is ended by the fourth process identification information (here, “X1”), the fourth process identification information is read out according to this. When the effect determination is not made in the process X1, the effect after that is developed without the effect being performed after the operation according to the “block C for after operation”.

  According to such a configuration, even after the effect after operation is performed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), “for SP reach background The same process identification information (X1) for reading out the “process X1 that can generate an effect after operation” from the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data ”will be acquired. However, since it becomes possible to function substantially as an effect reception period (effective period) simply by analyzing such information, it is possible to facilitate simplification and commonality of effect design Become.

  Note that FIG. 403 merely shows such processing as a concept, and in practice, processing identification information is not acquired over only four frames. If it is made to function as an effect reception period, normally, it is often set as a section in which the same process identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the effect reception period occurring at the timing ts31, and the same applies to the effect reception period occurring at other timings. Also, as described above, such processing identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. Good.

In addition, in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” shown in FIG. 403, processing identification information (here, “1”) related to the operation effect is added even at the timing ts41. However, the process identification information of “1” does not read “a process in which an effect determination is made as to whether an effect after operation is performed”, but is read and executed by the following “process 1”. It has become.
Process 1. For the player who is in a state where a prophetic effect (such as an appearance effect display) indicating that "a production reception acceptance period (a production reception acceptance can be made by an operation can be made by an operation (effective period)) is about to occur soon A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to “Appearance EF & operation waiting block D” for performing operation waiting effects (the above-mentioned overhead image, gauge display, etc.) for prompting the operation

  According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” separately from “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. However, the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D” can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) determined by the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. become. That is, in this case, the execution of the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” is started at every timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings, or the “SP reach background liquid crystal Since it is easy to start execution of “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” from “liquid crystal production scheduler data” within a variation pattern different from “production scheduler data”, production design can be simplified and shared Can be suitably implemented.

  When “appearing EF & operation waiting block D” is executed (analyzed), “appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” corresponding to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D” is read out. . These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, first, the “acceptance of production by operation” is not permitted. A section is provided in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an “acceptance period (valid period) that can be performed” will soon occur will be provided.

  However, in the “appearance EF & operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, an operation-waiting effect (the above-described samurai image or gauge described above) in which the effect acceptance period has occurred and the player is urged to perform an operation. A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to display etc. is acquired appears, and the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame) in the section. It has become.

That is, in "display EF & liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for operation waiting" executed (analyzed) from timing ts41, "Y3" every frame from timing ts42 separately from information corresponding to image data to be displayed at present The process identification information is attached in a line. Every time the process identification information of "Y3" is read out, the following "process Y3" is read out and executed.
Process Y3. Processing in which effect determination is performed as to whether or not an effect after operation corresponding to “post-operation block D” is generated based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, “Y3”) is attached every unit time is “the effect reception period during which the effect can be received by the operation (effective period) ) ". In addition, in the “process Y3”, when an effect determination is made, “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” on which the “process Y3” is read. The availability information of the “post-operation block D” associated with the same “layer 6” is operated (set) to the ON state.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block D” is read, various processes including “post-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data D” associated with the “post-operation block D” are respectively executed. As a result, post-operation effects corresponding to the “post-operation block D” are generated. From this point onward, the newly read “after-operation block D (after-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data)” is in the process of being executed “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (for appearing EF & operation waiting The liquid crystal effect scheduler data D) ”is changed to the execution state in“ Layer 6 ”.

  According to such a configuration, the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal), which is no longer necessary to be read because the production determination has been made simply by reading the“ post-operation block D ”. The production scheduler data D) ”and, further, the process identification information“ Y3 ”for reading“ process Y3 ”can be substantially invalidated (the production reception is not allowed). Thus, it is not necessary to separately perform determination and processing for ending these, and it becomes possible to favorably simplify and share the production design. In the example shown in FIG. 403, reading is performed from the second process identification information (here, “Y3”) in the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)”. In the “process Y3”, the presentation is accepted, and the “post-operation liquid crystal presentation scheduler data D” associated with the “post-operation block D” in the same “layer 6” is thereby executed (analyzed). The case is assumed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the section where the “ray portion” in “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” is erased by overwriting (substantially Corresponds to an invalidated section).

  That is, the processing identification information of “Y3” can be attached to the “LCD reachable scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)” side as in the effect receiving period generated from timing ts31. However, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting (displayed EF & operation waiting block D) associated with the same layer as the “after operation block D (liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for operation after operation D)” It can be said that it is possible to make it possible to exhibit such an excellent effect by having it attached to the ") side.

However, in the periphery control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts42, as “process identification information for reading out the process relating to the operation effect, Other than the process identification information of the above "Y3" included in the appearance EF & operation waiting block D) ",
The process identification information “Y2” included in “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)” is prepared.

  That is, as described above, the "layer 6" is the same as "the post-operation block D (the post-operation liquid crystal presentation scheduler data)". When the process identification information of “Y3” is added to this, the “after operation block D (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for after operation)” is executed. It is useful in that it will be erased (nullified) by itself. However, “the appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearing EF & operation waiting block D)” is included in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)” 1 The processing is performed (analyzed) by operating the availability information in the on state based on the processing identification information of "." Therefore, when there is a case where the frame processing to which the processing identification information of “1” is attached is skipped when the processing load is high or the like, “the appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearing EF & operation Waiting block D) This itself is not executed, which may result in the absence of an effect reception period (effective period) based on the process identification information of “Y3”.

  Therefore, in the periphery control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as the process identification information for reading out the process related to the operation effect (the process in which the effect determination about whether to generate the effect after operation based on the operation detection information) is performed. The process identification information of "Y2" and the process identification information of "Y3" are prepared, and the process identification information of "Y2" is on the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" side The process identification information of "Y3" is attached to the side of "appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearing EF & operation waiting block D)". As described above, as the process identification information for reading the process relating to the operation effect, the predetermined wait time (wait process) until the availability information is set to the on state at the start of the fluctuation pattern and the timing for starting the effect comes. The wait time (wait process) is set by the availability information being turned on in the process executed based on the type 1 block and the type 1 block that is read out after the period By preparing both of the second block and the second block to be read out without passing through the period), the above-mentioned risk that the effect receiving period (the effective period) will not occur is reduced. Will be able to.

  Here, in the “process Y3” executed based on the process identification information of “Y3”, when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the “after-operation block D” described above is operated to be in the on state The display effect after operation in the effect display device 1600 (post-operation effect) is executed. On the other hand, in "process Y2" executed based on the process identification information of "Y2", when the effect determination is made, "process related to lamp light emission", "process related to movable body operation", "related to sound output" Each process is started to be executed. Therefore, even if the process identification information of "Y3" is not read out, it is possible to realize the post-operation effect by lamp emission, movable body operation, and sound output by the process identification information of "Y2" It is done. “Process Y2” and “Process Y3” may be any processes that can generate different post-operation effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, although the same process identification information (here, “Y2”) is lined up from the timing ts42, it is read from the second process identification information (“Y2” here) It is assumed that the effect is accepted in the “process Y2” and that the effect after operation by the lamp emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output is executed. In this case, although the need for reading out the third process identification information (here, “Y2”) filled in in the same figure is no longer lost, “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background” Will be read out naturally during execution of each unit time. However, every time the data is read out in this manner, processing such as “finish processing Y2 since the effect after operation has been executed” is executed in the “processing Y2” corresponding to the processing identification information (here, “Y2”) As a result, the processing related to the production determination is substantially invalidated (the production reception is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
-The first special operation for which the effect reception based on the operation detection information is permitted is generated when a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state Receptionist production (demonstration reception period) ",
・ Regardless of the rendering state (rendering mode), even if the operation is not detected, the second special operation reception rendering (rendering acceptance period) that can generate the rendering after the operation
And the like can be executed as described above (see, for example, FIG. 178 and FIGS. 390 to 402).

  In the first special operation acceptance effect, the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed manner, silence, or in a non-output state, and therefore the operation effect is concentrated. Will be expected. However, in exchange for this, it is feared that the rendering performance will be poor by the amount by which the specific type of rendering sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state reception is permitted by the pre-permission operation-related display (prediction effect) performed when the first special operation reception effect is generated and the first special operation reception effect. The permissible operation-related display (such as the above-described spear image and gauge display) that is performed during the (valid period) is displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, a variety of performances can be realized with respect to the display effect, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state reception is permitted by the pre-permission operation-related display (prediction effect) performed when the second special operation reception effect is generated and the second special operation reception effect. The permissible operation-related display (such as the above-described wrinkle image and gauge display) performed during the (valid period) is also displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, a variety of performances can be realized with respect to the display effect, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

More specifically, in the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 403, the rendering acceptance is permitted while the specific type of rendering sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode, And, even when the operation is not detected, it is possible to generate the special operation reception effect (the first special operation reception effect or the second special operation reception effect) that generates the effect after the operation, and when the timing ts51 comes, The process identification information “2” is read in order to start the process related to the special operation reception effect. However, the process identification information “2” does not read out “the process in which the effect determination as to whether the effect is to be generated after the operation is performed” but the following “process 2” is read and executed. .
Process 2. Availability of use for “appearance EF block E” for performing a warning effect (appearance effect display, etc.) suggesting that an “accuracy reception period (effective period) during which an operation can be received by an operation” will soon occur. Process to operate (set) information on

  According to such a configuration, apart from the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”, the pre-permissible operation related display (prediction effect) dedicated block (block E for appearance EF) And the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for the appearance EF) must be prepared, but for the “appearance EF block E”, “the liquid crystal effect for the SP reach background” Execution can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) defined by the scheduler data. That is, in this case, execution of the “appearance EF block E” is started at every timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings, or the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler”. Since it is easy to start the “appearance EF block E” from “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from “data”, it is preferable to facilitate and share the effect design. Will be able to.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes different in the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation in which the big hit symbol appears) are separately prepared for the before-permission operation related display (predictive effect effect) and the during-operation operation related display. As it becomes possible to appropriately combine which combination to execute them, it is possible to make the variation as the effect colorful, and to be able to suppress the decrease in the game fun Become. Also, even when adopting in other variation patterns, although pre-permission operation related display (precursor effect) is a common aspect, effects such as executing in a permitted mode unique operation related display are realized. Things will also be possible.

  Here, when the “appearing EF block E” is executed (analyzed), the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for the appearing EF” corresponding to the “emergent EF block E” is read and executed (analyzed) Be done. When this "display EF for emergence EF data scheduler data E" is executed (analyzed), the effect (pre-permitted operation related display) by the predetermined effect display, from "the section where the effect reception is not permitted" from "the effect reception The image information (moving image or still image) to be executed in a form that crosses the "permitted interval" is acquired.

  However, for “appear EF block E” and “appearing EF liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E”, “perform processing determination to generate rendering after operation based on operation detection information” may be performed. Since the process identification information is not attached, the production reception period does not occur based on the block or scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when the timing ts52 is reached within the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”, “3” is generated in order to generate the effect reception period. The process identification information is read out. The process identification information “3” does not correspond to “a process in which an effect can be determined to generate a post-operation effect based on the operation detection information”, but is data that associates the following “process 3”. .
Process 3. “Usage information of“ operation waiting block E ”for performing an operation waiting effect (such as the above-described spear image or gauge display) that prompts the player to perform an operation in the state where the effect reception period has occurred. Process to operate (set) to ON state

  According to such a configuration, apart from “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)” and “appearance EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)”, Permissible operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned bag image and gauge display) dedicated block (operation waiting block E) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting) Although it is necessary to prepare, the “waiting operation block E” can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) determined by “the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the SP reach background”. become able to. In other words, in this case, the “operation waiting block E” is started at every timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings, or the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler”. Since it is easy to start execution of “operation waiting block E” from “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from “data”, it is preferable to facilitate and share the effect design. Will be able to

  Here, also in the effect reception period occurring at timing ts52, the same processing identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is attached to each frame as in the effect reception period in which the effect reception is permitted at timings ts31, ts42. It may be configured as an effect section. However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, this is realized by a method different from the effect reception period generated at the timings ts31 and ts42, and other effect reception periods are also configured by the method described below It may be.

  In other words, for the effect reception period that occurs at timing ts52, a state in which the effect reception is not permitted (off state) and a state in which the effect reception is permitted (on state) due to the state operation (off state, on state) of the operation state flag. And to create new When this method is adopted, not the process called based on the process identification information but the effect based on the operation detection information for each unit time (for each frame) in the “peripheral control unit steady process” shown in FIG. It is desirable to make a decision.

  For example, each time the “peripheral control unit steady process” is performed, the operation state flag is confirmed, and the operation detection information is operated on the condition that the operation state flag is in the on state (condition that it is in the effect reception period). Effect determination can be made on the basis of the after-operation effect. When the effect determination is made, the use availability information of the block corresponding to the effect after operation of the type according to the operation state flag being in the on state (here, “block for after operation E”) is operated in the on state ( Setting).

  That is, in this case, the operation state flags are prepared for the types of post-operation effects, and after determining the type of the operation state flag that is in the on state, the post-operation effects corresponding thereto are determined. The availability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) to the on state. The process for setting the operation state flag to the off state may be executed in the process for operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect in the on state, or the availability information is turned on. You may make it perform in the process called based on the process identification information attached | subjected to the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) operated to the state.

  Regarding the processing procedure in the case where such a method is adopted, the processing identification information of the above "3" is read out at the timing ts52 and the above "Process 3" is executed. Block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E waiting for operation) ”is read out and executed (analyzed).

The process of turning on the operation state flag may be performed within the above-mentioned "process 3", but in the example shown in FIG. 403, the above-mentioned "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler for operation waiting In the first frame (processing timing) when data E) is executed (analyzed), the processing identification information of “Z1” associated with the following “processing Z1” is read out.
Process Z1. Processing for turning on the operation state flag of the type associated with “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to “block for after operation E” is operated (set) to the on state at timing ts 52, and the determination based on the operation detection information in the “peripheral control unit steady process” described above By performing the process, the period during which the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state can be caused to function as the “production reception period”. In addition, while the operation state flag is maintained in the on state, the allowed operation related display (described above) based on the execution (analysis) of the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” The bird's eye view image, gauge display, etc. will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the pre-permission operation related display (the appearing EF block E (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for the appearing EF) associated with the layer 7 and the permission associated with the layer 6 The middle operation related display (operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) is executed so that the display periods partially overlap each other.

  Here, the pre-permissible operation related display associated with layer 7 is displayed on the near side of the permissible operation related display associated with layer 6 and is displayed preferentially. It has become so. Accordingly, the acceptance of the production is permitted from the time when at least a part of the permissible operation-related display is difficult to be visually recognized by the pre-permissible operation-related display. It is intended to provide such an effect that it is possible to receive an effect under the condition that it is difficult to visually recognize whether the aspect having the.

  In this respect, when an effect is received at timing ts53 which is a stage where such an effect reception period has not ended yet, the same layer as “block for waiting for operation E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for waiting for operation)” A process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “post-operation block E” associated with 6 in the ON state is executed in the “peripheral control unit steady process” described above. As a result, each process (lamp, movable body, sound, etc.) including the “post-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E” associated with the “post-operation block E” is executed. . At this time, in the layer 6, "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for after operation" associated with "block for after operation E" is associated with "block for waiting for operation E". Since the process is executed in place of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for the user, it is not necessary to perform a special process for terminating the "operation waiting block E" halfway. At this time, the process identification information of “Z3” described later included in the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” can also be erased (disabled) by itself. Become.

When the operation state flag is turned off, processing is performed to operate (set) the availability information of “block E after operation” in the “peripheral control unit steady processing” described above. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the first frame (when the above-described “after-operation block E (liquid-crystal presentation scheduler data E for after-operation) E” is executed (analyzed) is At the processing timing), the processing identification information of “Z2” is read out and the following “processing Z2” corresponding to this is executed to execute the processing based on “block for after operation E” after ending the effect reception period. I am trying to do it.
Process Z2. Processing for turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the pre-permissible operation related display (appearance EF block E (appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) remains in the screen (displayed state). As described above, there may be a case where an effect is received. Therefore, in the “process Z2”, it is determined whether or not the appearance EF block E (appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E) is in the execution state, and when it is in the execution state, the process of terminating the process is also performed. It is desirable to make it. However, after the “appearing EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for the appearing EF)” is continued without being interrupted, the image display based on the “post-operation block E” is displayed “for the appearing EF. Preferential execution (display on the front side of the image display (layer) based on the block EF for appearance EF) is performed in a range (for example, the entire screen) including at least all the “range where image display based on the block E is performed”. Thus, the image display based on the appearance EF block E may be hidden.

  In addition, in the “waiting operation block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)”, when the processing at the timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), it corresponds to “processing Z3” to end the effect receiving period. The attached process identification information “Z3” is read out. Here, when “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” is executed (analyzed) at timing ts54, “after operation block E (after operation) corresponding to the same layer 6”. Means that the “waiting operation block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” is not overwritten by the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, that is, the timing ts54 arrives. This means that there is no directing to the stage. However, the effect reception period that occurs from timing ts52 is the same as the “post-operation block E” that is the same as when the effect is received, even if the effect is not received between timing ts52 and ts54. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation reception effect" for operating (setting) the availability information in the ON state ("automatic button function" described above).

Therefore, in “processing Z3” executed based on the processing identification information “Z3” read at timing ts54 in “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)”, the following processing is executed. It has come to be.
Process Z3. Among the operation state flags, processing for turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with “post-operation block E” is performed, and the availability information of “post-operation block E” is turned on. Processing to operate (set) is performed

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period occurring from the timing ts 52, even if the effect is not received within that period, the same block as when the effect reception is made is read out, and the block Since the post-operation effect associated with is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the player forgets to operate. In addition, the post-operation effect is not executed after the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52) is ended, but in the final frame of the process related to the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52) (processing of timing ts52). Since the processing for reading out the same block as when the reception was made is performed, it is possible to realize smooth progression of the rendering without causing a gap between when the operation is performed and when the operation is not performed. become able to.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, the display image (the bird's-eye view image or the gauge display) based on the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” is accepted for the effect by the operation by the player. A process to hide this based on the fact that the effect reception has been made, in either the case where it has been performed or the case where the effect reception has been made by enabling the automatic button function (here, “Operation Since the back block E ′ ′) is to be executed, it is possible to develop the effect in the same manner even if the player forgets to operate the game, thereby suppressing the decline in the game entertaining It will be expected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 403, the above-described “first” is executed during the production reception period generated from the timing ts52 while a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed manner at the time of the production reception period. It also functions as a “special operation reception effect”. Also in the “first special operation acceptance effect” shown in FIG. 403, at the time when the effect is accepted, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is not returned to the non-suppression mode but continues to be output in the suppression mode. Then, within the period in which the post-operation effect is being executed, the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is set to be returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

  Note that “specific type effect sound” means a sound of “BGM playback” (normal background or SP background BGM playback), but here, in particular, it corresponds to “SP reach background block” This corresponds to the sound (SP reach BGM playback sound) that is output by executing the attached “processing related to sound output”. About the suppression aspect and method, it is possible to employ | adopt suitably the aspect and method mentioned above.

  In the above configuration, when the operation reception effect (timing ts52 to ts54) is generated while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is suppressed (or even if the effect is not received) In the case of generating an operation reception effect in which the same post production operation is performed as when the operation is performed), a pre-permission operation related display (appearing EF block E) and an allowed operation related display (operation waiting block) performed at the time of occurrence As for E), they are executed based on different blocks (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data). As a result, a variety of performances can be realized with respect to the display effect, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in such operation reception effects (first special operation reception effect, second special operation reception effect) at timings ts52 to ts54, images (pre-allowable operation related display) displayed by different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). , Allowed operation related display) is displayed so that there is a period overlapping in time. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a presentation effect (such as the above-mentioned difficulty in visual recognition) related to “pre-permission operation-related display” and “permitted operation-related display”, so that a decrease in game entertainment can be suppressed. become.

  On the other hand, the operation reception effect that occurs when the "specific type of effect sound" is not suppressed, such as the operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts41 (or when the effect reception is not made, the post operation effect occurs In the non-operation accepting effect), the pre-permissible operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, unlike the operation reception effect at the timings ts 52 to ts 54 (the operation reception effect that suggests a hit of the big hit by the effect after operation), such operation reception effect occurs according to the result of the effect determination (prediction determination) As the non-permitted operation related display and the allowed operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data), the handling according to the determination result is facilitated. Can be more beneficial.

  However, even in the case where the non-permitted operation related display and the allowed operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) in this way, although it is on one layer, the pre-permitted operation related There is a time when both the display of the allowable operation related display and the display of the allowable operation related display are displayed overlapping each other in time (for example, one of the allowable operation related display is displayed. It is desirable to carry out those renditions (as it is considered as a mode in which the part is difficult to see).

  The process identification information read out based on the block of the operation related display before permission (the block for appearance EF (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for appearance EF)) for the block of operation related display for permission (operation waiting block E) The availability information may be operated in an on state within the process according to the process.

  The operation reception effect for which the effect reception is permitted at timings ts 52 to ts 54 may be performed as at least one of the first special operation reception effect described above and the second special operation reception effect described above, for example, 178, FIG. 390 to FIG. 393, FIG. 395 to FIG. 398, FIG. 401, etc. are executed as any of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression) described above with reference to Also good. In this case, for the other operation reception effects among the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 403, for example, the operation reception effects described above with reference to FIG. 394, FIG. 400, FIG. It may be executed as one of the effects). In addition, each of the other examples of the operation reception effects described later may be appropriately adopted.

  For example, different blocks are used for the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) generated at timing ts42. In the reception effect, the same reception permission sound may be output when the effect reception is made (the first permission sound shown in FIGS. 390 to 402).

  In addition, in the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52, when the effect reception is made during the output of the reception allowable sound, the output state is terminated halfway, but the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts42 In the operation waiting block E), even if the effect is accepted during the output of the acceptance allowable sound, the output state is maintained (the first allowable sound shown in FIG. 390 to FIG. 402), etc. It is possible to adopt.

  By the way, as for scenario data relating to SP reach effects, blocks corresponding to image data that can be shared between big hit and lost time (SP reach background block) and blocks corresponding to different image data for big hit and lost time As described above, the blocks are divided into (SP ending background block) and are executed sequentially. In this respect, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts 55 at which the “SP reach background block” is shifted to the “SP ending background block” is within a period in which the post-operation effect is executed. It is set to come by all means.

  In other words, in the operation reception effect in which the reception of the production is permitted at the timing ts52, the production reception (including the automatic button function described above) is performed at any timing within the production reception period (timing ts52 to ts54). However, the predetermined time from the timing ts54 is set as a period during which the post-operation effect is always executed (time setting required to execute the post-operation effect). In the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, the display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the “post-operation block E” (the display effect after the operation in the effect display device 1600 (after the operation) Effect)) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is prioritized over display based on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP ending corresponding to the “SP ending background block”. (Displayed on the front side of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP end background block). In this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set as a longer time than the display time of the image executed based on the operation waiting block E. The minute functions as a “period in which the post-operation effect is always executed”.

  Within the period in which the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to such “post-operation block E” is being executed, the “SP reach background block” is shifted to the “SP end background block”. By doing so, the "SP reach background block display (blocks shared in the win)" and "SP end background block display (blocks used only in either of the wins)" in a completely different atmosphere Even if it is a case where the production is designed so that the feeling of incongruity is not felt, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In addition, in the scenario data of “layer 4” and “layer 5”, a block that does not relate to any image but merely functions as time series data for calling processing at a certain timing (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) It corresponds to. That is, the block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) itself does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and does not participate in any image display. "Data calling block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler for data calling Data structure (empty time-series image information) that can be said to be "data" is adopted. Even if such a block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed in the layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data).

  There are two types of data call blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call). First, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 4”, the timing ts21 for calling the process at the start of symbol variation A wait time (wait processing period) is set which functions so as not to execute the data calling block B (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for data calling) until the arrival of When the timing ts21 arrives after such a wait time (wait processing period), the “data call block B” is executed (analyzed), and as a result, the “data call block B” corresponding to the “data call block B”. Liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B for data recall is executed (analyzed).

Here, the process identification information of “X2” is attached to each “unit time” to “data call block B” or “data call liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B” corresponding to the “data call block B”. Each time the process identification information of "X2" is read, the following "process X2" is executed.
Process X2. A process in which an effect determination as to whether to generate an effect after operation corresponding to “block B for after operation” is performed based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In this “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)”, a section in which the processing identification information “X2” is attached for each unit time is expressed as “the effect reception that can be performed by operation”. It is made to function as “period (effective period)”, and in the above “process X2”, when effect determination is made, the availability information of “block B after operation” associated with “layer 6” is turned on The state is manipulated (set). As a result, “post-operation block B” is executed (analyzed), and “post-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B” associated with the “post-operation block B” is executed for each unit time ( “Processing related to lamp emission”, “Processing related to movable body operation”, “Processing related to sound output”, etc. associated with the “block B for post-operation” as well as being analyzed) By starting execution, it is possible to generate post-operation effects corresponding to the “post-operation block C”.

  Even in the next frame in which the processing associated with the “post-operation block B” is started, the “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” Executed (parsed). Accordingly, when an effect is received in the middle of a section (effect reception period) in which the process identification information (here “X2”) is attached every unit time, the “data call block B Processing identification information (here, “X2”) is read out from “(liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B for data call)”, and the “processing X2” corresponding to the processing identification information is executed. However, the “process X2” also includes a process of determining whether each process associated with the “post-operation block B” has been started to be executed. By determining that it is in a state in which execution is started, the “process X2” is terminated without performing any further processing based on the operation detection information, and this is described in the above-mentioned “process X1”. That's right.

  On the other hand, when the effect judgment is not made in the “process X2” (it is judged that the effect is not to be executed after the operation is performed), the use of the “block B for after operation” associated with the “layer 6” The process X2 is terminated while the availability information is kept off. Then, until the section in which the same processing identification information (here “X2”) is acquired every unit time (one frame) is completed, “data call block B (data call block B Process identification information (here, “X2”) is read out from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” and the “process X2” corresponding thereto is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the above section is ended by the sixth process identification information (here, “X2”), the sixth process identification information is read out according to this. When the effect determination is not made in the process X2, the after-effects corresponding to the “post-operation block B” are not executed and the subsequent effects are advanced.

  According to such a configuration, after executing the effect after operation (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), The same process identification information (X2) for reading out the "process X2 that can generate an effect after operation" from (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call) will be acquired. However, since it becomes possible to function substantially as an effect reception period (effective period) simply by analyzing such information, it is possible to facilitate simplification and commonality of effect design Become.

  Here, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) corresponding to “Layer 4” does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and “Process X2” read from the process identification information “X2”. Also does not read the "block for operation waiting". Therefore, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts21, the reception of the effect is allowed in a state where no habit image or gauge display is performed. Is realized by "."

  According to such a configuration, “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” can be shared even when another variation pattern is selected. By preparing scenario data with different set values of the wait time (wait processing period), it is possible to make it appear at another timing.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 5”, the data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) is executed without passing through the wait time (wait processing period). A substantial weight function works in the calling block A (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A for data calling). That is, in the data calling block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling), no image information and processing identification information are read out until the timing ts11 arrives, and “4” is reached when the timing ts11 arrives. The process identification information is read out. However, the process identification information of “4” does not read “process for effect determination on whether to generate post-operation effect”, but reads and executes “process 4” below. It has become.
Process 4. For a player who is in a state where an indication effect (such as an appearance effect display) suggesting that an “effect reception period (effective period) during which an operation can be received by an operation” will soon occur, and an effect reception period has occurred. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” for performing the operation waiting effects (such as the above-described spear image and gauge display) for prompting the operation.

  According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare the data calling block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling) separately from the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A”. With respect to “waiting block A”, processing identification information “4” is attached also from a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A) different from “data calling block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call)”. Since it becomes possible to call appropriately only by itself, facilitation and commonality of effect design can be suitably achieved.

  When “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” is executed (analyzed), “appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” corresponding to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” is read out. . These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the “appearance EF & operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A”, first, while the acceptance of the effect is not permitted, A section is provided in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an “acceptance reception period (valid period) that can be accepted” will occur soon will be provided.

  However, in “appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A”, an effect waiting period is occurring in the middle of the condition, and an operation waiting effect (prompt image or the A section where image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to the gauge display etc. is acquired appears, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame) It has become.

That is, in the “appearance EF & operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” executed (analyzed) from timing ts11, “Y1” is displayed for each frame from timing ts12 separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. "" Process identification information is attached in a line. Every time the process identification information of "Y1" is read, the following "process Y1" is read and executed.
Process Y1. A process in which an effect determination is made as to whether or not an effect after operation corresponding to “post-operation block A” is generated based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a section to which such processing identification information (here, “Y1”) is attached per unit time is “a production reception period (effective period during which production reception can be performed by operation Function as ")". In addition, in the “process Y1”, when an effect determination is made, “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” on which the “process Y1” is read. It is made to operate (set) the availability information of "block A after operation" associated with the same "layer 6" as in the above.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block A” is read, various processes including “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” associated with the “post-operation block A” are executed. As a result, a post-operation effect corresponding to “post-operation block A” is generated. From this point onward, the newly read “block for after operation A (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A for after operation) A” was in the process of being executed, and “block for appearing EF & waiting for operation A (emerging EF & waiting for operation The “layer 6” is put into an execution state in place of the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A)”.

  According to such a configuration, the appearance EF & the operation waiting block A (the appearance EF & the liquid crystal for the operation waiting are no longer necessary because the effect judgment is made only by reading the "block for operation A after operation". It becomes possible to substantially invalidate the process identification information of “Y1” for reading out “process scheduler data A)” and “process Y1” (to make the process of accepting the process unacceptable). Thus, it is not necessary to separately perform determination and processing for ending these, and it becomes possible to favorably simplify and share the production design. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the second process identification information (here, “Y1”) in “appear EF & operation waiting block A (appear EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is read out. In the “process Y1”, an effect is received, and “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” associated with “post-operation block A” is executed (analyzed) in the same “layer 6”. The case is assumed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the section where the “ray portion” in “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is erased by overwriting (substantially This corresponds to the invalidated section).

  In the “layer 4”, it is decided to set an effect section in which the process identification information is attached to each frame on the “data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)” side. However, the effect section may be set in a block read out from the “data calling block” as in “layer 5”. Also, in "layer 4", as shown in "layer 5", this is realized by making the substantial weight function work in the data calling block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for data calling). It is also good.

  Further, in the “layer 5”, setting an effect section in which the process identification information is attached to each frame on the block side read out from the “data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call)”. did. However, the effect section may be set in the “data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call)” as in “layer 4”. Also in the “layer 5”, as shown in the “layer 4”, this is realized by setting a weight for causing the data calling block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for data calling) itself to stand by. It is also good.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403, when the process identification information of “1” or “4” is acquired, it suggests that “the effect reception period (effective period) in which the effect can be received by the operation (effective period)” will occur soon. To perform an indication effect (such as an appearance effect display) to be performed, and an operation waiting effect (such as the overhead image or the gauge display described above) for prompting the player to perform an operation while the effect reception period is occurring. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block” in the on state is executed. However, it is not always necessary to execute the prognostic effect (appearing effect display etc.), and it is in a state in which the effect reception period is occurring, and the operation waiting effect effect (the above-mentioned overhead image or gauge to urge the player to operate) For example, a process for operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “operation waiting block” for performing display (such as display) may be executed. That is, in this case, as soon as the “operation waiting block” is read, the process identification information associated with the “process that can be determined for presentation” is acquired.

  Further, as described above, in the effect reception period that occurs at the timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42, as in the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts51, it may be realized by setting the operation state flag.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, the process identification information of “Y2” and the process identification information of “Y3” are set to be read out at the same timing as each other, but are read out at different timings from each other. You may make it set.

  Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the block and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block are separately provided. However, these may be configured as one piece of data.

  Further, regarding the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) for which information corresponding to the image data is acquired every unit time (every frame), all of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) at the first processing timing (frame). Information corresponding to moving image data over a period may be configured to be acquired. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is acquired only at the first processing timing (frame), and thereafter, the information corresponding to the image data is analyzed every unit time (every frame). It is not acquired, and only when the process identification information is attached, the process according to it is executed.

  For blocks (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) for which availability information is set to ON, execution (analysis) may be performed within the processing timing for which availability information is set to ON, or availability information may be ON. The processing may be performed (analyzed) at a processing timing after one of the processing timings set in.

  Also, “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” and “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” Although different process identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired, the same information may be acquired as "information corresponding to image data". Further, the length as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) and the length as an effective period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same bird's-eye view image and gauge display will be displayed over the same time.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403, when a specific variation pattern is selected and a background display effect for specific reach (SP reach background block, SP end background block) is executed, a big hit (predetermined determination result) ) Is obtained and when it is not obtained, an effect section (SP reach background block) in which display data is shared and a big hit (predetermined determination result) are obtained and not obtained It is made to be executed in a form divided into a presentation section (SP ending background block) in which different display data is used depending on the case. In such a configuration, when performing a background display effect for a specific reach, different display data is not used for the entire period depending on whether a predetermined determination result is obtained or not obtained, Since the display data is shared until the section (timing ts55) and the winning (determination result) is indicated using different display data only in the remaining period, the processing load and the memory capacity are expected to be reduced. Become.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the post-operation presentation (in the “layer 6” different from the “layer 3” where the background display effect for the specific reach is executed, so as to straddle (include) the timing ts 55) The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is given priority display (SP) over the background display effect (layer 3) for the specific reach. The “big hit (predetermined determination result) in layer 3” and the result obtained in layer 3 are obtained by displaying them on the front side of the image display based on the reach background block and the SP end background block). There is no change from the effect section in which the display data is shared in the non-display case to the effect section in which different display data is used when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained. (Or make it difficult to see). As a result, "a presentation section in which display data is shared depending on whether a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not obtained" and "a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design a stunning connection well with a staging section in which different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained, it is possible to hide (fake) this after the operation. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the production design. In this sense, it is desirable that, in the post-operation effect, processing for moving the movable body to the front of the display screen is also performed.

  In addition, with regard to the post-operation effect (post-operation block E) executed so as to straddle (include) the timing ts55, even if the operation is not detected within the effect reception period, it is automatically performed regardless of the effect mode. Since it is configured to be executed automatically, “the stage where the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and the case where it is not obtained” and “the big hit (predetermined It is possible to reliably conceal the connection with the effect section in which different display data are used depending on whether the determination result is obtained or not obtained.

  In order to obtain such effects, the timing ts55 at which the effect section is switched is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed. The period before the timing (if the end timing of the post-operation effect deviates depending on the operation timing, the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed when the effect is received at the earliest timing in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing ts52. It will be required to set within a period prior to the timing of non-display. In such a configuration, display processing (SP reach background block, SP end background block) is executed in “Layer 3”, but a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. .

  However, “a presentation section in which display data is shared depending on whether a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not obtained” and “a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained About the composition which makes the background display effect (layer 3) non-displayed at the change timing with the effect section where different display data is used in the case where it is not obtained, it is made feasible when the big hit is won. And may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. For example, even when the jackpot is not won, the effect (for losing) is executed after the operation, but the effect after the operation is not performed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, but a partial effect display, etc. It is possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (layer 3) by performing the process as

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 403, “post-operation block E, which is read out based on the reception of the presentation within the period of timing ts52 to ts54 as one of a plurality of blocks corresponding to a specific variation pattern. "To prepare. For the “post-operation block E”, the presentation is automatically received even when no operation is detected within the period of timing ts52 to ts54 (the same program as when the operation is detected is automatically generated). Since the generation is made by the execution, it is possible to provide an unconventional, dramatic effect.

  In this respect, although illustration is omitted, even if the first fluctuation pattern or the second fluctuation pattern different from the specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the “post operation block E” can be executed. It is also good.

  For example, in the first variation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block” of the effect contents corresponding to the first variation pattern are sequentially executed, as shown in FIG. Similar to the specific variation pattern, the process identification information of “2” and the process identification information of “3” are respectively read out based on “SP reach background block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data)”. That is, in the first variation pattern, although the effect contents of the SP reach background (“information on image data acquired from liquid crystal effect scheduler data”) are different, the same as the specific variation pattern, the pre-permission operation related display (precursor effect ) And the permitted operation related display (摸 image, gauge display, etc.) is performed, and the same “after operation” is also performed as the effect after operation when the effect reception is made in the operation reception effect generated in this way Block E "is to be executed.

  Moreover, in the first variation pattern, even if no operation is detected in the operation reception effect, the effect reception is automatically performed, and the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” The point that the switching of the background effect is not displayed by executing the effect after the operation so as to cross (including) the switching timing of “is similar to the specific variation pattern”.

  In addition, “the stage where the display data is shared between when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (Layer 3) is not displayed at the switching timing with “the effect section in which different display data is used when it is not obtained”, the first change pattern is the same as the specific change pattern. It may be possible to execute when the big hit is won, and may not be executed when the big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, even when a different background effect (SP reach effect) is executed between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern, the different background effect is not displayed when the big hit is won. In this way, the same production (post-operation production) will always appear, and it will be possible to recognize that the winner has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, the player recognizes that the jackpot has been won at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) that differs between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern appears. Will be able to In other words, in this case, when winning the big hit, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won by making the “background effect” different in the effect contents depending on the variation pattern not displayed and making sure that one effect content appears. On the other hand, when you lose a big hit, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that you have lost the big hit by displaying “background effects” with different effects depending on the fluctuation pattern without displaying them. Be able to do something, and be able to sustain a sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, also in the second variation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block” of the effect contents corresponding to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” in the second variation pattern may have “1” processing identification information, but “2” processing identification information and “3” processing identification information. Processing identification information is not included, and an operation reception effect that can generate a post-operation effect that straddles the transition timing does not occur immediately before the transition to the “SP ending background block”. .

  In this point, in the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" according to the second variation pattern, the process identification information of "5" (not shown) is acquired at a predetermined timing when the effect acceptance is not permitted. "The process (process 5) of operating the availability information of the block E after operation to the on state is executed based on the fact that the process identification information of" 5 "is acquired. It is supposed to be.

  Then, in this way, the availability information of the “post-operation block E” is turned on, so that the “operation” is the same as the “specific variation pattern” or the “first variation pattern” even in the second variation pattern. The same post-operation effect based on “rear block E (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” straddles (includes) the switching timing between the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block”. Will be executed on another layer.

  In such a configuration, when the second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed, the period during which the production acceptance is permitted is the place where the production design should be performed as a display related to the background production. Since the “post-operation block E” is intentionally executed as a block different from the background image block at a predetermined timing within the production section where no occurrence has occurred, the 摸 image or gauge display is not displayed and the operation is not performed. In spite of the fact that the reception of the production is not allowed and even the reception of the production is not permitted, the post-operation production (post-operation block E) when the production is accepted with another variation pattern suddenly appears. , It will be expected to improve the game interest.

  According to such a configuration, even in the second variation pattern, “the effect section in which display data is shared between when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “big hit Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design and produce a connection in a presentation with “a section where different display data is used depending on whether (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not obtained, it may not be possible. Can be concealed, and directing design can be facilitated.

  In addition, “the stage where the display data is shared between when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (Layer 3) is not displayed at the switching timing with the “effect section in which different display data is used depending on whether the display data is not obtained”, even in the second change pattern, As in the variation pattern 1, it may be made executable when the big hit is won, and may not be executed when the big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, although a background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern is being executed, a different background effect is not displayed when the big hit is won. The same rendition (post-operation rendition) will always appear in a form that allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, the player recognizes that the jackpot has been won at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) that differs from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern appears. Will be able to In other words, in this case, when winning the big hit, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won by making the “background effect” different in the effect contents depending on the variation pattern not displayed and making sure that one effect content appears. On the other hand, when you lose a big hit, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that you have lost the big hit by displaying “background effects” with different effects depending on the fluctuation pattern without displaying them. Be able to do something, and be able to sustain a sense of expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example, the operation reception effect is performed based on various processing identification information attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach). The process identification information may not be attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach), and for example, the symbol block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for symbol) , And a call block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for calling) may be read out from another block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data).

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example, the lines in the process read based on the process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc. In the effect determination, the effect determination based on the operation detection information for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is exemplified. However, the specific operation means is not limited to the operation button 410, and may be other operation means. In addition, a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, all or part of the above-described effect determination based on the process identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", "Y3", etc. It is determined to which of the sword effect operation units 5000, etc.) the operation opportunity is given, and whether or not the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given has been operated (production determination May be determined. According to such a configuration, it is determined which of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword effect operation unit 5000, etc.) the operation opportunity is to be given, and the operation means corresponding to the determination is determined. In order to realize the operation reception effect to which the operation opportunity is given only, even when the operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the processing identification information, the liquid crystal effect scheduler, the block, etc. are shared To be able to. Alternatively, operation opportunities may be given to both different operation means, and post-operation effects based on the process identification information may be executed based on the fact that one operation means operated earlier is accepted for effect presentation .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example thereof, a plurality of pre-permission operation related displays in the appearance EF block E may be provided. For example, a normal appearance EF block E1 that does not involve movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410, and a special appearance EF block E2 that involves movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410. Can be provided, and execution (analysis) or the like can be exemplified according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, it is possible to save the blocks by using in common the block following the appearance EF block E1 and the appearance EF block E2 (either or both of the operation waiting block E and the post-operation block E). It becomes like this.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example thereof, based on the processing identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to the block and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. By executing the processing to be read, it is possible to accept an operation for a specific operation means. However, in addition to this, a predetermined operation means different from a specific operation means is included in a process (for example, peripheral control unit steady process) that has nothing to do with the process identification information attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Then, an operation may be accepted, and a change corresponding to the acceptance may be generated for the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the progress of the production due to the block, the liquid crystal production scheduler data, etc., the operation for the predetermined operation means can be properly accepted. It can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, the block itself is not made to appear by the player operation different from the processing of performing the effect determination based on each processing identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”. It may be possible to invalidate all of the rendering elements (display, sound, movable) associated with the target block. In such an arrangement, it is possible to save layers.

  In addition, the period of effect determination so that part of each process identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2” and “Y3” is converted to other process identification information by the player operation You may change the timing.

  The specific layer may be used from before the start of the target fluctuation, and may be used across multiple fluctuations.

  You may make it use a block not only during a fluctuation | variation but during a hit game. In addition, it is possible to provide the block which straddles during the fluctuation game and during the hit game, and the block which straddles during the hit game and during the definite change, the processing identification information is also included in these blocks and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding to the block. It may be attached.

  Further, “Y3” may be attached only to a block (or liquid crystal effect scheduler data) executed during the probability changing state, and the type of processing identification information read out may be changed according to the gaming state.

  In addition, during error notification (error notification) or the like, it is desirable not to erase the block being executed or the process identification information for which an error image is displayed or an error sound is output. As a result, it is possible to appropriately restore the effect after the error is released.

  In addition, among the inventions included in the example shown in FIG. 403 and other examples thereof, the effects described even if the technology such as the block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) or the process identification information is not necessarily used are exhibited. What can be done may be realized by other methods.

[Production judgment based on operation detection information before valid period]
Generally, when the effect reception period (effective period) for which the effect reception is permitted is generated, the “overhead image” or the “gauge display (bar display)” described above is displayed according to the timing of the generation. In this regard, when playing for a long time or playing many times, it is possible to predict at which timing within the fluctuation pattern the “eyelid image” or the “gauge display” is displayed. In this case, some players can not wait to operate, and some players operate in anticipation of the timing that the “摸 image” or the “gauge display” will be displayed. At this time, if it is operated just before "the bird's-eye view image" or "gauge display" is displayed (immediately before the effect reception period occurs), "the bird's-eye view image" or "gauge display" is displayed It is misunderstood as if it was operated in the state (the state where the effect reception period is occurring), and as a result, the re-doing of the operation within the effect reception period (the effective period) is delayed and the effect is received There was a case where the production reception period (valid period) would end without being completed.

  In this respect, in the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment (for example, the effect reception period generated at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403), the effect reception period (the effective period from the predetermined timing in the mth frame after the start of fluctuation). As described above, even if the operation is not performed in the effect reception period, the effect is determined by the automatic button function to enable the generation of the effect after the operation when it is assumed that the) occurs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the effect can not be confirmed after the operation even if the reworking of the operation within the effect reception period (the effective period) is delayed in the above-mentioned situation become able to.

  However, in this case, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, the player cannot feel the actual feeling that caused the post-operation effect due to the operation by the player. Therefore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the effect determination for generating the post-operation effect is allowed only within the effect reception period (effective period), but the operation state detection is performed. Even if it is done (immediately) in a period (immediately before) before the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, this is used as a target of the effect determination (determination material). According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period), the operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period) After the operation, the effect will be executed considering that it is That is, in this case, even the player side feels that the effect is produced after the operation caused by the operation, so that the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, although this will also be described later, even if the operation state is detected within the period (immediately before) that the effect reception period (the effective period) occurs, the operation state exceeds the specific time When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs while maintaining the above, it is not determined that the effect reception is to be made in the m-th frame. According to such a configuration, it is possible to fairly give the effect reception receiving condition to the player, and it is expected to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  Also, although this will be described later, at least in a predetermined operation reception effect, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs from a predetermined timing in the m th frame after the start of fluctuation, the m th frame is started In the display area of the effect display device 1600, "the overhead view image (or the gauge display suggesting the remaining time) over the operation means" is not displayed yet. That is, in this case, since a period in which the acceptance of the production is allowed from the time when the samurai image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, the player runs ahead, As a result, even if the operation is performed immediately before the heel image (or gauge display) is displayed, an effect is accepted, and there is a situation where the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation. It will be possible to suppress.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “effect reception period (effective period)” according to this embodiment will be described again. “Effective period” means “a period from the start of a process that generates a state in which an acceptance of an effect is permitted to the end of the process”. Here, the “process for generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted” is different in the details depending on the realization method of the “effect reception period (effective period)”, but for example, “the operation state flag (see FIG. 403) Corresponds to “a process for turning on”, “a process for setting a timer”, “a process for calling a process for determining production acceptance based on process identification information” (see FIG. 403), and the like. That is, "effect reception period (effective period)" corresponds to "effect section (period) from the time when processing for generating a state in which effect reception is permitted is executed to the lapse of a predetermined time period", This predetermined time is "time until the operation state flag is turned off" or "time until time-up of the timer", "the effect section where the same process identification information is attached in every frame is finished" It corresponds to "time until it is done". Then, within such a "effect reception period (effective period)", determination processing as to whether or not the effect reception is to be made is performed every predetermined time (for example, every one frame) based on the detection of the operation state. In the “determination process as to whether the effect reception is made” according to this embodiment, not only “detection of the operation state” performed within the “effect reception period (effective period)” but also The feature is that “operation state detection” performed before the “production reception period (valid period)” occurs. As such an “effect reception period (valid period)”, it is common to create a period of about 100 frames, for example.

  FIGS. 404 to 409 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of processing performed before and after the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. In each example described below, a case is described where image display is performed using "block" and "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data" described with reference to FIG. 403, but the display method is not limited to this. There is no limitation on the implementation method as long as image control is performed in units of frames. In addition, although the process of generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted is also illustrated as the process of turning on the operation state flag, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process of setting a timer or Another method may be used, such as a process of calling the process for determining the effect reception determination based on the process identification information.

  FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when there is no operation detection before and after the effect reception period (effective period).

  Now, when a special operation reception effect (for example, the effect reception period generated at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403, etc.) occurs in a specific change pattern, “effect” in the “m” th frame after the start of symbol change It is assumed that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state as a process of causing a state in which acceptance is permitted. Note that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state at the halfway “timing t1 (m)” in the “m” -th frame because “the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state”. Even if the “process” itself is executed based on the arrival of the “m” th frame, more strictly, the start timing of the “m” th frame is related to the execution of other processes. It is impossible to execute all of the various processes including the above process, and the processes are executed with a delay from the “frame start timing” while the various processes are executed in a predetermined order. Because it is always.

  In this way, when the operation state flag is operated to the on state, a production section (production reception period) for which production reception is permitted is generated, and within the production reception period, based on the operation detection information every predetermined time. A “determination process as to whether to generate an effect after operation” is performed.

  The effect reception period according to this example is described as “special operation reception effect” shown in FIG. Therefore, as described above, the "peripheral control unit steady state operation is performed regardless of whether the effect reception period has occurred (the operation state flag is in the on state) as to" the determination processing as to whether the effect is generated after the operation ". “Processing” is executed as “production determination based on operation detection information” for each unit time (for each frame). And by continuing this even after the effect reception period, the "determination processing as to whether the effect is to be generated after operation" is performed based on the operation detection information at every predetermined time even within the effect reception period. (In the drawing, “timing t2 (m)”, “timing t2 (m + 1)”, “timing t2 (m + 2)”, “timing t2 (m + 3)” are respectively executed). That is, in this case, the “determination process as to whether the effect is to be generated after the operation” is executed even in a frame or the like before the “m” -th frame, but the operation state flag is in the OFF state Since it is as mentioned above that in a situation this is substantially nullified, it shall be omitted in the figure.

  Also, in this example, the order of various processes performed when a new frame arrives is set to “after operation” rather than the order in which “processing to set (set) the operation state flag to the on state” is executed. The order in which the “determination process for generating an effect” is executed is set later, and thereby the effect is generated in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set). It is made to be able to receive (determination to generate an effect after operation). However, with regard to the order, the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state may not necessarily be performed first. The order in which the “determination process” is executed may be set first. In this case, in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) in the ON state, the “determination process for generating the post-operation effect” itself is not performed. There will no longer be accepted (judgement of generating effect after operation).

  Conventionally, at timing t1 (m) in the "m" -th frame, "processing to generate a state in which effect reception is permitted (here," processing to operate the operation state flag on ") is executed. On the basis of the operation detection information acquired within the period after the processing is executed (here, the “period in which the operation state flag is in the on state”), “whether to generate the post-operation effect” The "determination process" was to be executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 404, at timing t2 (m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether or not there is an operation within the period of timing t1 (m) to t2 (m). If it is determined that there has been an operation, the effect is executed after the operation, and if it is not determined that the operation has been performed (or the operation state has been detected, but the length of time maintained as the operation state is incorrect If it is determined that the effect is sufficient) the effect is not executed after the operation and it is operated whether or not the operation is performed within the period of the timing t2 (m) to t2 (m + 1) at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the next frame. The processing of determining again based on the detection information is performed for each frame.

  However, in this case, if there is a person who can not wait for the operation and expects the timing to accept the production reception period, it will be received without the production reception period. As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (effective period) will end. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as described above, the “effect determination to generate the post-operation effect” is allowed only within the effect reception period (effective period). "Detection of the state" Even if it is made within the period (immediately before) that the effect reception period (the effective period) occurs, it is used as the target of the operation detection judgment (determination material) I dare to use it.

  For example, in such an operation detection determination, in order to avoid an erroneous detection due to chattering or the like, it is usually used as a determination condition that "the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more". Made. In this respect, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the operation detection information before the timing t1 (m) arrives is also used, and within the period from the timing t1 (m) to t2 (m) “Even if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is not maintained in the operation state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more, the predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more before timing t1 (m) If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state for a period of time, it is determined that the operation has been performed, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period), the operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period) After the operation, the effect will be executed considering that it is That is, in this case, even the player side feels that the effect is produced after the operation caused by the operation, so that the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  It does not specifically limit about which one is used as a more concrete structure regarding such operation detection information. In this respect, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the operation state is maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more for each frame. For frames whose operation state has been maintained (continued) over time (for example, 3 ms), leave a history as "ON frame" and treat a frame without a history as "ON frame" as "OFF frame" I have to. The history may be left at the end of the frame or at the start of the next frame, or the history as "ON frame" may be left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). You may

  As will be described later, in the “determination process for generating post-operation effects” according to this embodiment, the three frames in which the history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When operation detection information is obtained in a form in which the operations are arranged, an effect is received (determination that there has been an operation) and an effect after the operation is made executable.

  Since the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is an “ON frame” or an “OFF frame” at the end of the frame and leaves the history, FIG. In the “determination process as to whether or not to generate an effect after operation” performed at timing t2 (m) shown in, the “m” th frame including the timing t2 (m) is not used as a determination material. That is, in this case, the “m−3” th frame, the “m−2” th frame, and the “m−1” th frame are used as determination materials, and they are “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, “ON It is determined whether or not the history is left as "frame". On the other hand, when the history as "ON frame" is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the "operation performed at timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. In the “determination process regarding whether to generate the post-effect”, the “m” -th frame including the timing t2 (m) is also used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame are used as determination materials, and they are "OFF frame", "ON frame", "ON frame" It will be determined whether or not the history is left.

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 404 shows a case where no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (effective period). Therefore, at the determination timing (in the figure, at timing t2 (m), t2 (m + 1), t2 (m + 2), t2 (m + 3)) in each frame after the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. It will be determined that the history as "OFF frame", "OFF frame" and "OFF frame" is left, and there will be no effect acceptance (determination that there has been an operation) and there will be an effect after operation Not run.

  By the way, with respect to the image displayed on the effect display device 1600, a delay of two frames (or one frame) occurs after the processing related to the display in the peripheral control unit 1511 is started until it appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing for determining which image is used as an image according to various determinations or creating a drawing list in response to the determination) Processing in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that has received the processing result (information related to an image such as a drawing list) on the peripheral control unit 1511 side (preparation buffer (buffer in non-display state) of so-called double buffering) This is because the drawing process on the) side also requires one frame.

  Therefore, conventionally, with regard to the processing relating to “effect during effective period (operation waiting block E)” by the peripheral control unit 1511, a frame two frames before the “m” th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs Starting from (the “m−2” -th frame), effects are made to appear on the effect display device 1600 during the effective period from the “m” -th frame.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at the time when the m-th frame is started, “effective period production (operation waiting block)” is still displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600. One of the features is that the period up to the “m−1” th frame immediately before the production reception period (valid period) occurs is the “period before the valid period (such as effect production). “Processing period for“ appearance EF block E ”)” and the period from the “m” th frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs “ A processing period for the operation waiting block E ")" is set. As shown in FIG. 403, the processing period for the effect before the effective period (the “appearance EF block E” such as the effect effect) is continued after the “m” -th frame, It may be made to overlap with a processing period for effect (“block for waiting for operation E such as overhead image or gauge display”) during the period.

  More specifically, in a predetermined period until the “m” th frame arrives (or after that), a drawing list is created based on information corresponding to “effects before the effective period (such as effect effects)”. It is prepared and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). In contrast, the predetermined period after the arrival of the “m” th frame (the period during which the effect during the effective period is performed) is drawn based on the information corresponding to the “effect during the effective period (such as 摸 image and gauge display)” A list is created and sent to the image control unit (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 404, in the peripheral control unit 1511 up to the “m−1” th frame (or even after that) “effect before the effective period (block E for appearance EF)” The process relating to is performed, and the process relating to “during effect (operation waiting block E)” is executed after the “m” th frame, but in the effect display device 1600, the “m” th frame is "Effective pre-effective period effect (display based on block E for appearance EF)" is still in the process of execution, and "Effective period effect (display based on operation waiting block E)" is finally started in the "m + 2" th frame Will be That is, in this case, since "during effect, display based on operation waiting block E" is not yet displayed ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame) internally, the effect is accepted As a period in which the user's permission is allowed to occur, the player has been ahead, and as a result, the player has operated immediately before the "during effect (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is displayed. Even in such a case, the presentation is accepted, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the post-operation presentation cannot be confirmed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 404, the process relating to the “effective period before effect (display based on the block E for emergence EF)” and the process relating to “effect during the effective period (display based on the block E for emergence EF)” For convenience of explanation, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes each frame. However, in the case where these effects are displayed by moving image data, the peripheral control unit 1511 only needs to create a drawing list based on “information corresponding to the moving image” in the start frame of those processes. That is, in this case, in each of the subsequent frames, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) automatically performs processing for reading and displaying image data. In the unit 1511, this may not necessarily be performed for each frame.

  FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m + 1” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the “determination process for generating the post-operation effect” according to this embodiment, the three frames in which the history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When operation detection information in a lined-up mode is obtained, an effect is received (determination that there has been an operation) and an effect after operation is made executable.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 405, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” -th frame (timing before the determination timing of the effect reception). The "m + 1" th frame itself is also to leave a history as an "ON frame" at the end of the frame. However, at the timing t2 (m + 1) within the frame, all of the three frames (the “m−2” frame, the “m−1” frame, and the “m” frame) to be determined are included. Since this is the "OFF frame", there is no case where the effect reception (determination that there has been an operation) is made.

  Even at the timing t2 (m + 2) in the “m + 2” th frame, which is the next frame, the three frames (“m−1” th frame, “m” th frame, “m + 1” th frame) to be determined are Since the history as “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “ON frame” is left, respectively, production reception (determination that there has been an operation) is not made.

  Further, at timing t2 (m + 3) in the “m + 3” th frame which is the next frame, three frames (“m” th frame, “m + 1” th frame, “m + 2” th frame) to be determined are: The history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left, respectively, and the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is made.

  According to such a configuration, since the “m + 1” -th frame and the “m + 2” -th frame are “ON frames”, the operation state is longer than a predetermined time over two frames within the production reception period (effective period). It can be determined that the situation is maintained (for example, 3 ms). In addition, when the “m” th frame is “OFF frame”, it can be determined that the operation has been started within the effect reception period (effective period). In other words, in this case, it means that the operation is properly performed within the period in which the production reception is permitted. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. ) (Here, at timing t2 (m + 3)), an effect is accepted, and an effect after operation (here, “block E for operation”) corresponding to this is executed (started). In this example, the process of turning off the operation state flag is executed at the time when the presentation is accepted, but the operation state flag may be turned off at the end of the frame. It is sufficient that the operation determination process is not performed (substantially) in the next frame by executing the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the effect reception being made.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when the effect is received at timing t2 (m + 3), “post-operation effect (operation) is performed from the frame (the“ m + 3 ”-th frame) It is decided to carry out the processing relating to the block E) for later use. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display corresponding to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the “m + 5” -th frame (not shown) after two frames.

  FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 404.

  As described above, in the “determination process for generating the post-operation effect” according to this embodiment, the three frames in which the history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When operation detection information in a lined-up mode is obtained, an effect is received (determination that there has been an operation) and an effect after operation is made executable.

  Also, as described above, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the “determination of effect to generate effect after operation” is permitted only within the effect reception period (effective period), but “operation "Detection of the state" It is a target of the operation detection judgment even if it is made within a period (immediately before several frames) before the effect reception period (the effective period) occurs. I am trying to use it as a material.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation is started in the “m−2” th frame two frames before the “m” th frame in which the production reception period (effective period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, the information obtained by the operation at such a timing is not used in the determination related to the production reception. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an effect reception period (effective period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) in the “m” frame, the timing t2 in the “m” frame. In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the previous three frames (the “m−3” frame, the “m−2” frame, and the “m−1” frame) is used as an effect reception. It is supposed to be used in this judgment. In this example, these frames ("m-3" frame, "m-2" frame, "m-1" frame) are respectively "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". As a result, a production reception (determination that there has been an operation) is made.

  According to such a configuration, the “m−3” frame is an “OFF frame”, and the “m−2” frame and the “m−1” frame are “ON frames”. Therefore, it can be determined that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 3 ms) over two frames immediately before the production reception period (effective period) occurs. That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the “m−2” th frame two frames before the “m” th frame in which the production reception period (effective period) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 406, the presentation is accepted within the presentation acceptance period (effective period) (here, timing t2 (m)), and the post-operation presentation corresponding to this is received (here, “post-operation block E”). ) Will be executed (started). When such a configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. 406, the production reception period (valid period) itself ends in an extremely short time that does not continue even one frame, but the production reception period (valid period) Even if the operation is started immediately before anticipating that the (period) will occur, it will be treated as if the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period) and the post-operation effect will be generated Will be able to That is, in this case, even the player side feels that the effect is produced after the operation caused by the operation, so that the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  However, if the effect receptionist in such an aspect is frequently given out, the meaning of the effect reception period (the effective period) itself may be lost, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, at timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, the effect reception is received based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period). When it is done, the post-operation effect is performed without the overhead image or the gauge display being displayed. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to give some doubts as to whether “post-operation effect” is generated due to the operation opportunity being given, the effect reception period (effective It can be expected that the operation is started before the period) occurs.

  Note that there is no particular limitation on a technique for realizing that “post-operation effects are executed without displaying a habit image or gauge display”. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the processing related to “the effect during the effective period (operation waiting block E)” is performed from the “m” th frame without considering the delay of two frames. Then, when an effect is accepted at timing t2 (m), processing related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is performed from the frame (“m” th frame) where the effect is accepted. I am doing so. As a result, as shown in FIG. 406, the process related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is executed without executing the process related to “effective period effect (operation waiting block E)”. As a result, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying a spear image or gauge display.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is maintained across the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame. It was decided to explain what judgment is made under the assumption and the effect according to the judgment is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 407, the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is not maintained across the timing t 2 (m) in the “m” th frame, “m Even if the “m-2” th frame and the “m-1” th frame have left histories as “ON frames” even if the “-1” th frame is ended (each If the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing as described with reference to FIG. 406, and the same effect is performed according to the determination.

  In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 406, the player's operation is not detected at all after the production reception period occurs, and is performed only within the period before the production reception period occurs. Although there are not, determination conditions (“m-3” -th frame, “m-2” -th frame, and “m-1” -th frame for the effect reception at timing t2 (m) are “OFF frames”, respectively. , “ON frame” and “ON frame” as long as the history is satisfied), the presentation is accepted even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m). Post production will be executed.

  About such composition, the same thing can be said, when operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 405, the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), and the timing is before the timing t2 (m + 3) in the “m + 3” -th frame, or “m + 2”. Even if the operation state is finished in the th frame, the judgment conditions (“m” frame, “m + 1” frame, and “m + 2” frame for the production reception at the timing t2 (m + 3) are “ As long as the history of “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” is satisfied), even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), FIG. As shown, the effect is accepted, and the effect is executed after the operation.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing when the "determination according to effect reception" is performed, and the timing when the "determination according to effect reception" is performed The operation to be operated when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in a period earlier than that of the operation state (in this embodiment, the operation state is maintained for 2 minutes or more for each predetermined time or more) The production is accepted as if the operation was properly performed on the means, and the post-operation production is executed.

  Here, the operation detection information obtained before the production reception period (valid period) occurs is stored in the “determination process for production reception” performed after the production reception period (valid period) occurs. If it is simply used as a judgment material, for example, even when a sign production (appearance effect) is not executed, there is no sign that a production reception period (valid period) will occur. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that a person who will be able to accept the production will appear. That is, if the operation in such a mode is accepted, the meaning of the effect reception period (the effective period) itself may be lost, and there is a concern that the game interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment detects whether “OFF frame” and “ON frame” exist instead of only “ON frame” as a determination target. As a result, the above-mentioned concerns are resolved. In this embodiment, ON / OFF is determined on a frame-by-frame basis, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, “determining the timing at which an operation is started by detecting the rising or falling of a sensor signal, A technique may be adopted in which the effect is accepted on condition that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more from the timing. Even in such a case, it is possible to determine how long the sensor signal rise or fall timing occurs before the production reception period (valid period) occurs, or to maintain the operation state. It is possible to solve the above-mentioned subject by judging how long it continues.

  FIG. 408 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when an operation is started from the “m−3” frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 404.

  As shown in FIG. 408, in this example, the operation started in the “m-3” th frame three frames before the “m” th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is the effect It is assumed that the "m + 2" th frame in the reception period (the effective period) is continuously performed. Also in this example, when the effect reception period occurs, first, "determination according to effect reception" is performed at timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, and in this determination, since the effect reception period occurs The operation detection information acquired before (in this case, the operation detection information acquired in the “m−3” th frame, the “m−2” th frame, and the “m−1” th frame) is used as the judgment material It is supposed to be

  However, in this example, the “m−3” -th frame, “m−2” -th frame, and “m−1” -th frame respectively have the history as “ON frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” Since it is in the state where it is in, the effect reception (the determination that there is an operation) is not made as a result of the "determination concerning the effect reception" at the timing t2 (m). Not only that, but also in "determination related to effect reception" performed after the next frame such as timing t2 (m + 1), "ON frame", "ON frame", "ON" in the three frames to be the determination target Since only the history as a frame is left, as long as the operation state from the “m−3” th frame is maintained, the effect is produced as a result of “determination according to effect reception” performed in each frame There is no acceptance (determination that there has been an operation).

  That is, in this case, if the operation state maintained from the “m−3” th frame is temporarily ended and a frame in which the history as “OFF frame” is left is created, the operation is not performed again, and the effect reception is accepted. It is possible to prevent (a determination that there has been an operation) being made. As a result, even if the omen effect (appearing effect) is not executed, and the operation state is maintained even from the situation where there is no sign that the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, based on this, It can be suitably avoided that the effect is accepted.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 405 to 408, when the effect is accepted at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, the effect is displayed after the operation without the overhead image or the gauge display being displayed. (See FIG. 406 in particular). However, in this case, it is not possible to feel the feeling that the effect has been generated after the operation due to the operation, and there is a concern about a decrease in the game interest, so the effect may be accepted at any timing within the effect reception period. However, the progress of the presentation may be performed so that the habit image and the gauge display are always displayed. In this case, the feature that "at the time when the m-th frame is started," during effect, the block waiting for operation (operation waiting block) "is not displayed yet in the display area of the effect display device 1600" It is not always necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave it.

  The method for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited. For example, the timing at which “a process for operating (setting) the operation state flag to an on state” is performed in the frame and “determination for production reception” This can be realized by setting the timing of “processing” to be opposite to that in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 409 shows an effect reception period (valid) when the timing at which the “operation state flag is turned on (set)” in the frame is performed after the “determination process for effect reception”. Period) is a flowchart showing an example thereof.

  As shown in FIG. 409, assuming that the “m” -th frame has arrived, first, at timing t12 (m) in the frame, a process is performed in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state. Done. As a result, the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, but in the “m” -th frame, “determination processing according to effect reception” is performed after the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. There is nothing.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in the “m” -th frame, the timing at which the “determination processing according to effect reception” is performed comes before the timing t12 (m). At this time, the "determination processing according to effect reception" itself is not performed, or the "determination processing according to effect reception" is performed, but in a state where the effect reception period (effective period) has not occurred. It is determined that the effect is not accepted as being present.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent presentation acceptance in a frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the presentation acceptance period (effective period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, “during effective period (operation waiting block E) in peripheral control unit 1511 regardless of the status of the operation Processing is always performed, and a display image (representation during the effective period) corresponding to the processing can be made to appear on the effect display device 1600 at the “m + 2” th frame after two frames. become.

  In other words, in this case, the “m−2” frame, the “m−1” frame, and the “m” frame are “OFF frames” at the shortest. , “ON frame”, “ON frame”, and the timing t11 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” -th frame has arrived. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs processing related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” based on the reception of the effect. At this time, in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512), the preparation buffer (of the double buffering) based on the processing result related to “effective period effect” processed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the “m” -th frame. The drawing process on the non-display state buffer side has already been performed (see “Processing in Image Control Means” in FIG. 409).

  Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 409, even when the production reception is performed in the shortest time after the production reception period has occurred, the production display device 1600 displays “the production during the effective period” at the “m + 2” th frame. ”And the“ m + 3 ”frame, the“ post-operation effect ”is displayed, so that the post-operation effect can be started after the heel image or gauge display is displayed. become.

  However, the method for starting the effect after operation after displaying the overhead image or the gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. For example, as in the case shown in FIG. 404, in a frame where an effect reception period (effective period) occurs (here, the “m” th frame), the effect can be received at timing t2 (m). Thus, even when the presentation is accepted at the timing t2 (m), at the timing t2 (m), the processing related to the “production during the effective period (operation waiting block E)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. It may be performed.

  That is, in this case, one frame of the frame for performing processing relating to “effect after operation (block E for operation after operation)” in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the effect reception being made is one frame to the frame for which the effect reception is made Will be delayed only. Therefore, even when the effect is accepted at timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, “during effect during the effective period (for operation waiting in the periphery control unit 1511 in the“ m ”th frame is received in the“ m ”th frame. The process relating to “block E)” is performed, and in the next frame “m + 1” th frame, the process relating to “effect after operation (block E after operation)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511 . Such "delay" is not limited to the frame (here, the "m" th frame) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, and occurs even when the effect reception is made in any frame. . Even with such a method, even if the effect reception is made at the shortest after the effect reception period occurs, it is possible to start the effect after operation after displaying the bird's-eye view image or the gauge display. Become.

  As described above, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples, in the “determination process for effect reception” performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, the m-th frame is started. The “detection information from the operation detection means” acquired in the previous “m−1” th frame is also used as the determination material according to the effect reception. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples thereof, the “from the operation detection means acquired in the“ m−1 ”th frame before the start of the“ mth ”frame” is used. Both “detection information” and “detection information from the operation detection means” acquired in the “m−2” th frame are used as determination materials for receiving the effect. In other words, in this case, even if the operation is performed immediately before (in the extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the generation of the effective period) in anticipation of the generation reception period (the effective period), this is performed. Since the post-operation effect is executed assuming that the operation was performed within the reception period (valid period), the player can also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation. Come to remember.

  Moreover, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time when the “determination process for effect reception” in the m-th frame is performed, the “operation detection unit” acquired in the frame before the m-th frame Production reception can be made based on “detection information from”. In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only in anticipation of the production reception period (valid period) occurring (just within a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the valid period). Since the post-operation effect is executed as if the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period), the post-operation effect is also caused by the operation on the part of the player. I will remember the feeling that occurred.

  However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to the “ON frame” at the end of the frame, the frame is set to the “ON frame” when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed in the frame. It may be operated (set). In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detecting means) acquired from the start of the mth frame until the production reception period (valid period) occurs is also used as a determination material for the reception of the production. It will be used. That is, in this case, an operation is performed in each of the “m−1” th frame and the “m” th frame (for example, maintaining the operation state in 3 ms or more), and the operation is performed in the “m-2” th frame. When it is determined that it has not been performed (for example, the operation state is less than 3 ms), an effect is accepted. According to such a configuration, since the time until the player's operation is used as the determination material is shortened, it is possible to provide a post-operation effect with high immediate reactivity.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 404 to 408 or another example thereof, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the overhead image or the gauge display is not displayed yet in the display area. ing. When an effect is received within the m-th frame, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying (creating) the button image or gauge display. That is, in this case, even in the case where the operation state is maintained only immediately before (within a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the expiration period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the effect reception period (the validity period). Although this is regarded as having been operated within the effect reception period (the effective period) and the post-operation effect is executed, “when the post-operation effect is generated in such a mode This makes it possible to impart an effect such as a button image or a gauge display not being displayed, and to prompt appropriate operation within the effect reception period (effective period). For example, when the button image or the gauge display is to be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, it is not possible to visually recognize which of the modes is displayed, which is suggested by the mode. There is a demerit such as the inability to grasp the degree of expectation.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples, when the production reception period (effective period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long time, the production reception is not performed. It becomes possible to urge to operate in a proper manner for the effect reception period.

  However, on the other hand, when the production reception period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than a specific time, not for a long time, the production reception is accepted. Even if the operation is performed just before the period (effective period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the period (effective period), this is regarded as the operation being performed within the effect reception period (effective period), and the post-operation effect As a result, the player can feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation.

  In addition, it is not only sufficient to maintain the operation state in a time shorter than a specific time, but it is also required that the operation state be maintained for a time longer than a predetermined time in order to receive the effect. As a result, false detection due to chattering or the like can be suitably avoided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 409 or another example thereof, in the process in the “m-th” frame in which the effect reception period starts, even if any operation detection information is obtained, the process related to the post-operation effect ( Among the display processing in the effect display device 1600, the processing related to lamp emission, the processing related to sound output, and the processing related to the movable body operation), at least the display processing in the effect display device 1600 is “information corresponding to image data of post-operation effects. , “Processing to read out in peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and processing (processing to read out information corresponding to image data waiting for operation in peripheral control unit 1511) is in a state where no presentation is accepted. I decided to do it. According to such a configuration, even if any operation information is obtained in the mth frame in which the production reception period starts, the processing (production of the production is not performed in the mth frame). At least a part (display processing in the effect display device 1600) of the display processing in the display device 1600, the processing related to lamp light emission, the processing related to sound output, and the processing related to the movable body operation is necessarily performed. In other words, in this case, with respect to the display on the effect display device 1600, processing (processing for reading the information corresponding to the image data of the effect after operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) corresponding to the reception of the effect is started with a delay. Before that, the process (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the presentation is not accepted is surely executed. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the "post-operation effect" is an effect started due to the operation by the player.

  In addition, although it mentioned above as another example of the example shown in FIG. 409, the effect judgment can be made based on the operation detection information also in the "m-th" frame in which the effect reception period starts, and then the effect In the frame in which the determination is made, the “process for reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and the “information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect is displayed in the next frame. , A process of reading in the peripheral control unit 1511 ”may be executed. That is, in this case, among the processes related to the post-operation effects (display processing in the effect display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, and processing related to the movable body operation), at least the display processing in the effect display device 1600 is effect determination. In the frame in which the production is not performed, the process (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the production is not accepted is executed. However, at this time, among the processes related to the post-operation effect (display process in the effect display device 1600, process related to lamp emission, process related to sound output, process related to movable body operation), for example, “process related to lamp emission” and “process related to sound output” With regard to “processing”, processing for reading “information about the light emission mode after operation” and “information about sound output after operation” may be performed in the frame where the performance determination has been made. That is, in this case, the output of the lamp and the sound is started in the form after the operation based on the read information in the frame in which the effect determination is made or in the next frame.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 403, when a technique for displaying an effect image by a block is adopted, and when an effect is accepted by an operation, a “block for operation” for executing the effect after the operation is performed. In addition, an “annihilation EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for annihilation EF)” for displaying an annihilation effect image until the operation promotion image such as the cocoon image or gauge display that has been displayed until it is hidden is displayed. It may be performed. According to such a “disappearing EF block (disappearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data)”, for example, an image that fades out when a spear image or gauge display is received as an effect reception (an image that is gradually hidden) Can be displayed. Further, such “disappearing EF block (disappearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” may be executed when the effect reception period ends without performing the post-operation effect. The “disappearing EF block (disappearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” is also added to a background block (background liquid crystal effect scheduler data), an operation waiting block (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data), and the like. It can be configured to be executed by operating the availability information in the process read based on the process identification information.

  In addition, about "the process which generates the state in which the effect reception is permitted (the process of operating the operation state flag to the on state (setting))" described in FIG. 404 to FIG. It may be executed based on (elapsed time) or the like, and may not necessarily be triggered by a frame.

  In addition, the “摸 image” or “gauge display” may be displayed as an effect before the effective period (display based on the block EF for appearance EF). However, the display mode when the effect before the effective period (display based on the block EF for appearance EF) is performed may be displayed in a translucent manner or displayed in a dull manner with another effect display. It is required to display the "overhead image" or the "gauge display" in a mode different from that when the "during effect (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is being performed, for example, during the effective period. At this time, in the effect before the effective period (display based on the block E for the appearance EF), one of “摸 image” and “gauge display” may be displayed, and the effect may be advanced without displaying one of them. .

[Additional performance for bird's eye image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (such as advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (such as advance notice effect) is to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body operation (feature effect). As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, such as background depiction or movable body operation The expected effect is to be provided as a function having "a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) of the big hit being obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the identification of the highly expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops to SP reach (such as reach production with background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination. No matter which result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), if the design effect based on the specific change pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect acceptance Is allowed to generate an operation reception effect (valid period). However, as will be described later, the acceptable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated has a different aspect according to the result of the effect determination, and thereby the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is intended to indicate the rate of being played or the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected among the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed. Even when there is a special result obtained by the effect determination (for example, advance notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, if the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the operation for which the effect acceptance is permitted It is possible to generate a reception effect (effective period). However, if a predetermined change pattern is selected, no special result is obtained in the effect determination. Even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined change pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing, the operation reception effect (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the operation reception effect (effective period) generated with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (effective period) generated when the symbol effect based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach It is executed as a production.

  In addition to the above “specific variation pattern”, the variation pattern for generating an operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach even if any result is obtained as the preliminary effect determination is made. May also be provided. However, the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expectation change pattern (non-reach change pattern) even if any result is obtained as the preliminary effect determination. It is desirable to avoid this or to lower the selection ratio.

  By the way, an operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is determined in advance for an effect member to be effected as long as an operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Only the post-operation effect that generates the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. The reception performance (valid period) itself has poor performance, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced until the post-operation performance is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” corresponding to the change pattern (effect pattern) is not suppressed. During the execution period of low-expectation non-suppression reception effects that give operation opportunities in the output, and / or symbol effects (effect patterns) based on high-expected fluctuation patterns (specific fluctuation patterns) The corresponding “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppression mode or silence, or is not output (the playback period in which audible sound is recorded in the sound data has expired, channel assignment) Such as to allow at least the occurrence of high expectation suppression reception effects to give an operation opportunity while being made to And that it is as described above (Figure 190 to Figure 303, Figure 385～ Figure 409).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the cocoon image displayed in the operation reception effect is further displayed as an integrated cocoon image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the cocoon image. Thus, the game entertainment is improved when the operation reception effect (valid period) occurs. For such an integrated habit image, an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (effective period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. In addition, the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 190 to 303, 385 to 409) are also realized by replacing the display mode of the illustrated haze image with any of the integrated haze images described below. It is desirable to do it in order to improve the game interest.

Hereinafter, a case where the bag image is displayed as an “integrated bag image” will be described.
First, to explain "the bird's-eye view image" again, as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is to be given in the operation reception effect, there is an "operation receiving portion" which receives the operation by the player, and the periphery of the operation receiving portion. A “periphery decoration portion” to be decorated is provided. In this regard, the "overlook image" means an image that looks over the "operation receiving unit" of such operation means. The "operation receiving portion" is usually provided to be displaced by an operation by the player, and the "peripheral decoration portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (rendering operation unit 400) illustrated in FIG. 39, FIG. 40, etc., the “operation receiver” corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410) and the “peripheral decoration” is the frame unit 415. It is equivalent to. Further, in the case of the operation means (sword decoration 5001) illustrated in FIG. 192, 222, etc., the “operation receiving portion” corresponds to the sword 5010 and the “peripheral decoration” corresponds to the sheath 5020. Become.

  FIG. 410 shows the “unified overhead image” displayed when an operation reception effect (effective period) occurs with respect to the operation means provided with the “operation receiving portion” which receives the “pressing operation” by the player. It is a figure which shows the example.

  In this explanatory example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an “operation receiving portion” on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001. In other words, the pattern button 5014 is pushed into the handle 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means) when a “pressing operation” is performed by the player, and the detected information is used to produce an effect (such as a trigger for the post-operation effect). ). According to such a configuration, the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation unit has a “pattern button 5014” that can be moved (moved up and down) with respect to the handle 5012 and a movement (up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving parts with possible "pattern part 5012" will be provided.

  FIG. 410 describes the “integrated bird's-eye view image” when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 when the predetermined variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the example described below, starting with FIG. 410, the “unified overhead view image” for giving the operation opportunity to the handle button 5014 is not the handle button 5014 but the operation for the operation button 410. You may make it apply as an "integrated bird's-eye view image" when the operation reception effect (effective period) to which an opportunity is provided generate | occur | produces. That is, in this case, “the overhead image through the operation button 410” illustrated in each of the effects described above (FIG. 190 to FIG. 303, FIG. 385 to FIG. 409) is described as an “integrated overhead image” described below. It is possible to replace, and in this case, the handle button 5014 is not provided and this will be omitted as a member.

  As shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). In the case where an effect (effective period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button bag image BMG with the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. The combined bird's-eye view images IGa to IGd are displayed. In the example shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are not individually prepared as image data, but are integrated into one piece of image data (integrated). It is designed to be displayed only as a colored image (IGa-IGd). In addition, when the integrated bag images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as “press” and “down arrow” are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “first effect mode with a relatively low degree of expectation” and the “relative effect are relatively low as post-operation effects to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) A plurality of effect modes including “the second effect mode with a high degree of expectation” are prepared, and one of the effect modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination) . In this respect, in the example shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d),
-The mode (integrated bird's-eye view image IGb) shown in FIG. 410 (b) than when the mode (integrated bird's-eye view image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) appears in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) When the appears, the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” as the effect after the operation is higher,
-The mode (integrated bird's-eye view image IGc) shown in FIG. 410 (c) than when the mode (integrated bird's-eye view image IGb) shown in FIG. 410 (b) appears in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) When the appears, the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” as the effect after the operation is higher,
-The mode (integrated bird's-eye view image IGd) shown in FIG. 410 (d) than when the mode (integrated bird's-eye view image IGc) shown in FIG. 410 (c) appears in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) Based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination) so that the appearance ratio of “second effect mode with relatively high expectation” becomes higher as a post-operation effect when It is made to display one of the materialized eyelid images IGa to IGd.

  It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated haze images IGa to IGd. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the effective period simply by preparing at least two aspects. Further, a mode different from the above four modes (integrated overhead view images IGa to IGd) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared modes may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
· Operation means (sword decoration 5001 having an operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) displaced by an operation by the player and a peripheral decoration portion (handle 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof Production operation unit 400),
Integrated bird's-eye view image display means for displaying a bird's-eye view image looking over the operation receiving unit as integrated bird's-eye view images IGa to IGd integrated with the peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the bird's-eye view image;
-An operation reception execution means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion when the player performs an operation when the integrated heel image is displayed, The integrated bird's-eye view image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated bird's-eye view images IGa to IGd).

  The details of the “integrated bird's-eye view image” shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d) will be described separately for these aspects (integrated bird's-eye view images IGa to IGd).

  First, “an integrated bird's-eye view image IGa” shown in FIG. 410 (a) is configured to have a normal button bird's-eye view image BMGa and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa for decorating its peripheral edge. However, in the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGa”, the normal button bird's-eye view image BMGa is displayed as “an image obtained by looking over the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given”. On the other hand, in general, the peripheral decoration image SSGa is “a peripheral decoration (pattern portion 5012 or a frame actually provided on the periphery of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is to be applied) The peripheral of the normal button bird's-eye view image BMGa is to be decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600 without looking back at the unit 415).

  According to such a configuration, first of all, even when a plurality of operation means are provided, it is determined whether an operation opportunity is given to which of the operation means (operation means to be operated ( Can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button bag image BMGa. In addition, a normal button bird's-eye view image BMGa itself is not a real rim decoration portion, but is a luxurious and large image integrated with a rim decoration image preferable to improve the decorativeness and presentation (an integrated eyelid image IGa ) Will be displayed, it is expected that the dramatic impact when the normal button bag image BMGa is displayed will be enhanced, and the game entertainment will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration part luxurious, and it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom in performance without being trapped by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration part. become.

  In the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGa” shown in FIG. 410 (a), the peripheral decoration image SSGa is usually expressed as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button bird's-eye image BMGa), and the upper surface thereof is A predetermined decoration is given to warn that the button has a high degree of danger. As described above, these “pedestal” and “predetermined decoration” are different in shape from the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

  In this regard, in the “integrated bag image IGa” according to this embodiment, a display target region for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 411 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so as to decrease the display area in the display target region as time elapses. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including “0”) from a predetermined maximum display area when no operation is accepted within the effective period. It is displayed so as to decrease as time elapses until the display area is reached. That is, in this case, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa not only bears the function of suggesting the operation means that is the operation target, but also indicates the remaining time until the state where the operation reception is allowed (valid period) is ended. It will also be responsible for the remaining time suggestion function.

  In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 410 (a), a division image KG is provided which divides the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from the other area in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. . An area surrounded by the partition image KG functions as a “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. However, the divided image KG may not necessarily be displayed, and a predetermined range in the peripheral decoration image SSGa may generally be set as the “display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 410 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black stripes") is provided in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. A gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in an overlapping manner with respect to the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be viewed in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that the gauge image GG is full. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained over the entire period until it becomes empty.

  When such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is realized, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the method of displaying images separately, it is also possible to adopt a method of changing and displaying the color of the display target area itself to which a predetermined decoration has been applied between a portion with a gauge and a portion without a gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist alone as image data, and the gauge image GG can be represented only by the color change of the predetermined decoration in the display target area.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 410 (a), the predetermined decoration (here, “white and black stripes”) provided in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the normal peripheral decoration Since application is made in such a manner as to extend over other areas in the image SSGa, the integrated decoration of the display target area itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be further enhanced. Thus, it is expected more suitably that the game entertainment is improved when the “integrated bag image IGa” is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 410 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) for displaying “unified overhead image Iga” is generated in effect display device 1600, a pattern button to be operated 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button down image BMGa in the "integrated down view image IGa". That is, as described later, a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared for button bird's-eye view image BMG, and a normal button bird's-eye view image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. By adopting this, it is possible to recognize the mode (expected degree) as the button overhead image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target without visually recognizing the normal button overhead image BMGa.

  The “button habit image BMGa (FIG. 410 (a))” does not necessarily have to be an exact habit of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. What is necessary is just to display with the replication level (deformation etc.) of the grade which can recognize which operation means.

  On the other hand, “integrated bag image IGb” shown in FIG. 410 (b) is basically the same as “integrated bag image IGa” described above, The peripheral edge decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the “integrated bag image IGb”, the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the “normal edge decoration image SSGa” described above, but the button button image BMG is displayed as described above. Instead of “BMGa”, it is displayed as “special button bag image BMGb” having a different shape.

  More specifically, in the "integrated bird's-eye view image IGb" shown in FIG. 410 (b), the special button bird's-eye view image BMGb looks at the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. It is not displayed, and is displayed as an image having a shape different from the “button overhead image BMGa (FIG. 410 (a))” in which the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is turned. However, when such a display method is simply adopted, when the “integrated overhead view image IGb” is displayed, it may be difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operation means is the operation target.

  However, as described above, in the “integrated bag image IGa”, the “button bag image BMGa” with the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) being operated is displayed in an integrated manner with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Therefore, the “normal edge decoration image SSGa” itself has a function that suggests that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is an operation target. In this regard, in the “integrated bag image IGb”, the “special button bag image BMGb” is displayed in such a manner that it is integrated with the “normal edge decorative image SSGa”. Even if “BMGb” does not appropriately hesitate the operation target, the entire “integrated bag image IGb” may indicate that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. become able to. In order to suitably obtain such an action effect (a function for suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decorative image SSGa), the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” is different from the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to display (such as the handle portion 5012) when it is an operation target.

  According to such a configuration, the button bird's-eye view image BMG looking over the operation receiving portion and the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery thereof are displayed as an integrated bird's-eye view image, thereby integrating the unit It becomes possible to display the button 摸 image BMG, which is only a part of the 摸 image, with a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily caught by the shape of the operation means to be operated It will be expected to improve the game interest by the nature and decoration.

  In the "special button bird's-eye view image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. 410 (b), it is depicted in a more stylish design than the "button bird's-eye view image BMGa" as a button having a streamlined shape, and on the top The wording "DANGER" is to be applied. The appearance of the “special button 摸 image BMGb” which does not exist as a part of such a pachinko machine 1 makes it possible to make the player easily feel a premium, and the “button 摸 image BMGa” appears It is expected to make you feel instinctively higher than expected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 410 (b), it is also an operation target when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated overhead view image IGb” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button 摸 image BMGb in the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGb”. That is, with the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated, light emission is enabled in a mode according to the type of the button eyelid image BMG in the "integrated eyelid image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation) as the button bag image BMG can be recognized only by confirming the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target.

  On the other hand, the “integrated bag image IGc” shown in FIG. 410 (c) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGa” described above. A peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGc”, the button bird's-eye view image BMG is displayed as the same as the “normal button bird's-eye view image BMGa” described above. It is displayed not as “image SSGa” but as “special edge decoration image SSGb” having a different shape.

However, the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is also the same as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” in the following points.
"The display of the effect is not over the peripheral decorative portion (the handle 5012 or the frame unit 415) actually provided on the peripheral of the handle button 5014 (or the control button 410) to which the operation opportunity is to be given The periphery of the button bird's-eye image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect in the device 1600.
A display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

  According to such an “integrated bag image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))”, it is possible to operate any of the operating means when the “integrated bag image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” is used as a reference. The “integrated bird's-eye view image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))” can be greatly changed in shape as a whole without causing a shape change in the “button bird's-eye image BMG” indicating whether an opportunity is given become able to. As a result, it is possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decoration and performance by causing a shape change without sacrificing the suggestion function of the operation target.

  Further, in the “special peripheral decorative image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))” according to this embodiment, an image at least a part of which has the same decoration as the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa (FIG. 410 (a))”. Is displayed. Therefore, the same post-operation effects are targeted for the cases where the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” and the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGc (FIG. 410 (c)) appear. It can be suggested that it is a specific operation reception effect (effective period).

  In particular, in the “special edge decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))” according to this embodiment, another member having a special decoration is added to the “normal edge decoration image SSGa (FIG. 410 (a))”. The whole image is displayed as an enlarged image. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is displayed as a development of “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”, and the degree of expectation is more than that when “button overhead image BMGa” appears It is expected to make you feel instinctively high.

  Also, "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 410 (c))" has a shape / decoration different from "normal peripheral decoration image SS Ga (Fig. 410 (a))", but a gauge image (predetermined image) No change occurs in the display target area of GG itself.

  That is, when a part of such an integrated bird's-eye view image IG is used as a display target area of the gauge image GG, is the display target area or the gauge image only “part of a mere decoration” or “remaining It is difficult for the player side to distinguish whether it is a “part having a function that suggests time”. In this respect, a gauge that has an important function such as “propose a remaining time” between “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 410 (a))” and “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))” The shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed, and the shape change is generated in the other part, so that the shape change can be performed without sacrificing the function of the remaining time. This makes it possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decoration and performance.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 410 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which “integrated bag image IGc” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also set as an operation target. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button bag image BMGa in the “integrated bag image IGc”. That is, with the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated, light emission is enabled in a mode according to the type of the button eyelid image BMG in the "integrated eyelid image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation) as the button bag image BMG can be recognized only by confirming the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, the normal button bird's-eye view image BMGa when the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGc” is displayed is displayed in a color (for example, “green”) different from that when the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGa” is displayed You may In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

  On the other hand, the “integrated bag image IGd” shown in FIG. 410 (d) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGa” described above. A peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the “integrated bag image IGd”, the button bag image BMG is not displayed as the above-mentioned “normal button bag image BMGa” but as a “special button bag image BMGb” having a different shape. The peripheral decorative image SSG is also displayed as “special peripheral decorative image SSGb” having a shape different from “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” described above.

  That is, in the “integrated bag image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))”, the “special button bag image BMGb” used in the “integrated bag image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))” and the “integrated bag image IGc”. The “special peripheral decorative image SSGb” used in (FIG. 410 (c)) is displayed as an integrated image. According to such a configuration, the effects achieved by the “special button bag image BMGb” described above with respect to the “integrated bag image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))” and the “integrated bag image IGc” (FIG. 410 ( c)) ”and the above-mentioned“ special edge decoration image SSGb ”, the above-described effects can be obtained, and when“ integrated bag image IGa (FIG. 410 (a)) ”is used as a reference, Since both aspects of the button bird's-eye image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that the instinctive feeling of high expectation degree can be felt.

  On the other hand, since both the button bag image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change their modes, the same decoration and shape appear in some areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG. Identification for the same post-operation effect in the case where the “integrated bag image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” and the case where the “integrated bag image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))” appears. It is possible to suggest that the operation reception effect (effective period) is.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 410 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which “integrated bag image IGd” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also set as an operation target. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button 摸 image BMGb in the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGd”. That is, with the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated, light emission is enabled in a mode according to the type of the button eyelid image BMG in the "integrated eyelid image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation) as the button bag image BMG can be recognized only by confirming the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, the special button 摸 image BMGb when the “integrated 摸 image IGd” is displayed is displayed in a color (for example, “rainbow color”) different from that when the “integrated 例 え ば image IGb” is displayed. You may do so. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in rainbow color.

  As shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing and a predetermined operation reception effect (effective period) Is generated, the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are integrated to display the integrated bag image IG. The other side can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. For example, when the button down image BMG is displayed as the "normal button down image BMGa", the peripheral decoration image SSG may be displayed as either the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" Fig. 410 (a), (c). Also, when the button down image BMG is displayed as the "special button down image BMGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG may be displayed as either "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" Fig. 410 (b), (d). Further, when the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as “normal edge decoration image SSGa”, the button bag image BMG can be displayed as either “normal button bag image BMGa” or “special button bag image BMGb” ( Fig. 410 (a), (b). Further, when the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as “special edge decoration image SSGb”, the button bag image BMG can be displayed as either “normal button bag image BMGa” or “special button bag image BMGb” ( Fig. 410 (a), (b).

  According to such a configuration, although the button overhead view image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated and displayed, only one side thereof is changed when the mode changes. Therefore, if one side where the mode is not changed is seen, it can be easily recognized that a predetermined operation reception effect (effective period) is generated even if the other side is displayed in any mode. By looking at the other side where the aspect is changing, it is possible to preferably recognize the degree of expectation. The mode may not be changed on one side of button bird's-eye view image BMG and peripheral decoration image SSG, and the mode may be changed only on the other side.

  Further, in the integrated heel image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated bag image IG is displayed during the operation reception effect (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to decrease the display area in the display target area as time elapses. It is possible. That is, in this case, the “peripheral decoration image SSG” bears a remaining time suggesting function that suggests the remaining time until the state in which the operation reception is permitted is terminated, and indicates which operation means the operation target is. By recognizing the remaining time and the operation target by recognizing the remaining time and the operation target by recognizing the remaining time and the operation target by being displayed as an integrated 摸 image IG integrated with the “button 摸 image BMG” that bears the suggested function Thus, it is expected that the game entertainment at the time when the operation reception effect (valid period) is generated is suitably maintained.

  Also, in the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. And the non-display area of (There are a portion having the function indicating the remaining time and a portion not having the function indicating the remaining time). That is, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not intended only to suggest the remaining time of the operation reception effect (valid period), and in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, the “decoration of the button bag image BMG” It is possible to actively adopt a display mode for the purpose of `` enhancing the performance '', so that the performance when the operation reception effect that is an important performance is generated is suggested while suggesting the remaining time It can be improved significantly. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more preferable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said.

  In the integrated overhead image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the button overhead image BMG may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. However, even when the “handle portion 5012” which is the peripheral decorative portion is one aspect, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the operation receiving portion has a plurality of modes (a plurality of luminescent colors) ) To change to either. Therefore, when the button bird's-eye view image BMG changes, it can be confirmed only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the copy target.

  Also, in the integrated overhead image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), when the button overhead image BMG is displayed in one aspect, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be displayed in any of a plurality of aspects. However, as a matter of fact, "the handle 5012", which is the peripheral decorative portion, does not change to any of a plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the button bird's-eye image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not have to be adjusted to the aspect of the “pattern portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration portion, and it is possible to perform various depictions preferable for enhancing the effect. In addition, about "pattern part 5012" which is a peripheral decoration part, it may be provided as what can not be originally changed into a plurality of modes, such as non-light emission.

  In addition, in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), there is also a case where both modes of the button bird's-eye view image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change (FIG. 410 (d)). However, it is desirable that the aspect of both the button bird's-eye view image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG changes as the entity, when the “handle portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration portion is one aspect.

  A different aspect appears in the “pattern part 5012” which is the peripheral decoration part in the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the peripheral decoration image SSG is “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” You may do so. However, while the peripheral decoration image SSG changes at least in the case of “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”, the peripheral decoration part is changed. In the “pattern portion 5012”, it is desirable to cause only a change in form (for example, a change in light emission form) that does not involve a change in shape. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decorative portion as a shape which is not possible to change its shape in the first place in order to emphasize the virtual rendering function by the peripheral decorative image SSG.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a bird's-eye view image, in addition to a button bird's-eye view image BMG looking over the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) TMGs are prepared, and the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG is made different depending on which of the haze images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral decorative image SSGa, b for decorating the peripheral edge of the button bird's-eye view image BMG can not be displayed when a bird's-eye view image different from the button bird's-eye view image BMG is displayed. The decoration image SSGa, b itself can be expected to have a “function that suggests which operation means the operation target is”.

  When the form as the peripheral decoration image SSG is different according to the form of the bird's-eye view image (button bird's-eye view image BMG, pattern rattan image TMG), the form (thickness) as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image It is desirable to make the lengths different. The operation acceptance effect in which the button overhead image BMG is displayed and the operation acceptance effect in which the pattern overhead image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (which is generated according to the effect determination Or may be effects generated at different timings or timings. The edge decoration image SSG that appears when the button bag image BMG is not the image of the edge decoration part, and the edge decoration image SSG that appears when it is the handle bag image TMG is an image of the edge decoration part. May be. However, even if the form (thickness, length) as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different, it is preferable that the set time as the operation reception effect (effective period) may be the same.

  Further, in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG A predetermined decoration (here, “striped pattern”) is applied across the image, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a form overlapping the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration is expanded, so that the game interest can be improved. become able to.

  In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in a superimposed manner on a display target area to which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be viewed in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that the gauge image GG is full. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained over the entire period until it becomes empty.

  However, the predetermined decoration may not necessarily be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serves as) a predetermined decoration, and in this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. Accordingly, the player who dislikes the decrease of the predetermined decoration is encouraged to perform an operation at an early stage.

  Also, in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the peripheral edge decorative image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014 or the operating button 410) to be operated. The image does not look over the peripheral decorative portion (the handle portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided in the image, and is an image representing a non-substantive object as a gaming machine part. Accordingly, it is possible to realize a more flexible decoration / rendering performance that is not confined to the entity as a gaming machine part.

  Further, in the integrated overhead image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), among the button overhead image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. That is, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG representing an object without substance, without changing the shape of the button bird's-eye view image BMG. It is possible to realize a display with higher presentation and decoration by making the shape of the integrated bird's-eye view image different, while appropriately indicating whether it has become.

  Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the shape may not be changed when the button bag image BMG is in one mode, and only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is permitted because the peripheral decoration image SSG represents a non-substantive object, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button overhead image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that there is great technical value in changing the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG.

  In the integrated bird's-eye view image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG is changed in a form of enlarging the form. As will be described later, as such a method of changing the form, any one of a method of increasing the number of objects represented as an image (such as the number of decorations) or a plurality of modes having different outline shapes (rectangular parallelepipeds, spheres, etc.) It is possible to employ a method for displaying the image displayed by the image display device, or a method in which a target range displayed among predetermined objects represented as an image is expanded. Moreover, although this is also mentioned later, about the form change of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the effect which performs a step change from the form with a low degree of expectation to the form with a high degree of expectation is performed as a omen effect. The operation reception in the operation reception effect may be permitted while the changed form is maintained.

  In addition, in the integrated heel image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the gauge image (including the peripheral decoration image SSG) included in the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in any form. The display target area of the predetermined image) GG is not changed (at least the shape is changed) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if a change occurs in the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG, it is possible to suitably maintain the suggestion function as to how much remaining time remains, and thus, for the important function, , The degree of expectation can also be suggested by a shape change in another area different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

  Depending on which one of the above-described effects is intended to be played, the peripheral decoration image SSG may not necessarily represent an object without substance, and the peripheral decoration provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion It may be displayed as an image with a part of it.

  In addition, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d) can be dynamically displayed during the “valid period for which operation reception is permitted” such as predetermined operation reception effects. In this way, the player is prompted to operate.

  However, in the integrated overhead image IG according to this embodiment, although the button overhead image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated and displayed, the button overhead image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed. Only one side is displayed dynamically and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, it is displayed on one side so that the other side stays on the spot while contributing to the improvement of the rendition when the key effect which is the important rendition is generated by the dynamic expression on the one side. By doing this, when the integrated overhead image IG is viewed as a whole, it is not moved and displayed, so that the visibility can be suitably secured.

  In the integrated bird's-eye view image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the button bird's-eye view image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced in its movable range. The peripheral decorative image SSG is not displayed dynamically. Then, a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side (peripheral decorative image SSG) which is not dynamically displayed, and when the integrated overhead image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area can be displayed so that the display area in the display target area decreases with time.

  As described above, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side (the peripheral decoration image SSG which is the side not displayed dynamically) of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG which secures preferable visibility. Thus, although there is an effect when the operation reception effect, which is an important effect, is generated by the dynamic display with the button 摸 image BMG, how much time is left for which the effect reception is permitted? Can be easily recognized.

  Further, on the side of the integrated bag image IG that secures favorable visibility (the peripheral decorative image SSG that is not dynamically displayed), in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image ( An area where the predetermined image) GG is not displayed is also included. That is, in this case, when performing an effect that suggests the degree of expectation on the side of securing the favorable visibility in the integrated bag image IG, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent adverse effects on the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

  Of the peripheral decorative image SSG, a region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG itself, and the button bag image BMG have a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. Any one of the modes is displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), but the degree of expectation differs depending on the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself. A plurality of modes may be provided, and any of these modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the button bag image BMG is displayed as an integrated bag image IG integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button bag image BMG. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the peripheral decorative image SSG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG just a decoration or pattern in the peripheral decorative image SSG? There is a concern that it will be difficult to grasp whether the function has a function to indicate the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that the game entertainment may be deteriorated due to the difficulty in grasping to which position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced by mixing with the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG. .

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when at least the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the effective period), the gauge image In a display target area where a predetermined image) GG can be displayed, an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed can be displayed.

  More specifically, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG In the display target area, display is performed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, according to the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is also displayed to be displaced in the same manner.

  According to such a configuration, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the effective period comes to an end, the position of the "specific image" even if it can not recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is a mere decoration or an indication of the remaining time. By confirming, the remaining time can be recognized. In this sense, when such a “specific image” is displayed, it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not necessarily displayed.

  FIG. 411 is a diagram showing a display example of the integrated overhead image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation acceptance is permitted.

  As shown in FIG. 411, if the timing A0 at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which the operation reception is allowed is started within the predetermined fluctuation pattern, the effect display device 1600 In addition, an integrated hail image IG, an operation promotion image such as “Press!” And “Down Arrow” are displayed.

  In this example, as the integrated haze image IG, the mode (integrated haze image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) is displayed, but based on the result of the production determination, FIGS. 410 (b) to (d) It may be displayed in any of the modes shown in. Even in the case where the integrated bag image IG is displayed in any manner, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed within the effective period, or the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” causes a change in the aspect described below according to the passage of time.

  As shown in FIG. 411 (a), first, in the integrated bag image IG at the timing A0 (effective period start timing), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. It will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full-size mode, it is possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 411 (a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The “specific image whose aspect is partially changed” is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, whether “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed It is possible to easily grasp whether it is in a state where the predetermined time has already passed (a state in which the remaining crotch is decreasing) since the acceptance of the operation is permitted, only by confirming.

  However, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is first from timing A 0 (the start timing of the effective period) The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner such as "the display area increases by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time" until a predetermined time (a time required to complete appearance of the specific image) elapses. Is displayed in the display target area.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 411 (b), in the integrated bag image IG at the timing A1 when a little time has elapsed from the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG "Specific image TG" as a specific image different from the above or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed "appears up to the point where about half of the image can be viewed It can be seen that it is in the stage of increasing the display area as time passes.

  As shown in FIGS. 411 (c) and 411 (d), in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG at the timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has elapsed, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The “specific image TG” as the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” has already appeared in its entirety, and the gauge image is not increased without increasing the display area. It can be seen that (predetermined image) GG is displaced in the display target area.

  That is, as described above, the “specific image TG” is the gauge image (predetermined image) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Image) Displayed at or near the end of the GG, and gauge image (predetermined image) displayed to displace the display position according to the displacement of the end of the GG (following) It has become.

  The “specific image TG” according to this embodiment is displayed at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as an image in which a star-shaped mark is given in a white square space. It has become a thing. However, the “specific image TG” may not be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. For example, the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a partially changed manner, such as an image in which the same image gradually becomes thinner over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

  In any case, the "specific image TG" essentially functions as a part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG indicating that the remaining time is lost by the display area becoming a minimum value (here "0"). Therefore, at least a part (or all) may not be displayed at the time when the remaining time disappears (the end of the effective period), and the display state is maintained.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 411 (e), in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the effective period, The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is “0”, and the display area of the “specific image TG” is left by about half. Then, when the operation is not accepted until this state, the period in which the operation acceptance is permitted is ended in this state, and the integrated overhead image IG is not displayed.

  However, as described above, the “specific image TG” does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, in the integrated overhead image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the effective period, it is most desirable to display so that all the display area of the "specific image TG" remains. You may make it do.

  However, it is difficult to realize the display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is exactly “0” in accordance with the end of the effective period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the display position of the “specific image TG” is adjusted in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Since the image is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, the image up to where the image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image ( It becomes possible to obscure the predetermined image) GG.

  That is, the “specific image TG” is not hidden when the effective period ends, and the display area of the majority (half or more or all) remains, but from the player side. When viewed, it appears that the display area is a part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to a minimum value (not shown here) when the effective period ends. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be longer than the actual image, it is possible to make the effective period appear to remain more than the actual. Thus, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest during the operation reception effect.

  On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left and ended, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to display so that the display area of “specific image TG” is reduced even if the period does not end immediately, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity due to a gap between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period. That is, in this case, with regard to “specific image TG”, it can be expected to play a role as a buffer unit capable of absorbing such a temporal shift.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 411, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed at timing A0 which is the start timing of the effective period. The “specific image” is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” You may make it display in the display object area | region of image (predetermined image) GG.

  According to such a configuration, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is a part of the gauge image GG Since it will be able to look positively as if it is, it will appear as if the period of time longer than the appearance is set as the validity period, of the game entertainment when the validity period occurs It is expected to improve.

  FIG. 412 is a diagram illustrating another display example of the integrated haze image IG from the start to the end of the effective period in which the operation acceptance is permitted.

  Now, assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period during which operation reception is permitted (predetermined operation reception effect) has arrived within the predetermined variation pattern, the effect display device 1600 also has an example shown in FIG. In addition, an integrated hail image IG, an operation promotion image such as “Press!” And “Down Arrow” are displayed.

  Also in this example, the mode (integrated bag image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) is displayed as the integrated bag image IG. However, based on the result of the production determination, FIGS. It may be displayed in any of the modes shown in d). Even in the case where the integrated bag image IG is displayed in any manner, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed within the effective period, or the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” causes a change in the aspect shown in FIGS. 412 (a) to (d) as time passes. .

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 412 (a), in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG at the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the entire display target region. It is not displayed, and "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and "specific image TG" are respectively displayed. When the timing is A0 (the start timing of the effective period), only a part of the “specific image TG” may be displayed, but here, the whole is displayed. According to such a configuration, it seems that the “specific image TG” functions as a part of the “gauge image GG”, so it seems that a longer time remains than it looks. Is possible.

  The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image expressing “eraser” and is not included in the area (display target area of the gauge image GG) surrounded by the divided image KG, and other areas (of the peripheral decoration image SSG) In other words, it is displayed with a size that spans an area in which the aspect can change according to the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the “specific image TG” more noticeable than the “gauge image GG”, and to prevent the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible to recognize how long the remaining time is. Be expected.

  Further, in this example, when time elapses from timing A0 to become timings A2 and A3, and the “specific image TG” is displaced, as shown in FIGS. 412 (b) and (c), the “specific image TG” is displayed. The portion through which "has passed" is changed to a "white area" as if it was erased by the eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the “gauge image GG” expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and glossy expressions) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the “specific image TG”. When the reduced area is expressed by only one color, the contrast with "specific image TG" as a boundary becomes prominent, suggesting how much time is left. It becomes possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the picture is The color appearing in the reduced area is preferably a color not used in the "gauge image GG".

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 412, the “specific image TG” is one of the gauge images (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time has disappeared due to the display area becoming the minimum value (here, “0”). It is not intended to function as a part, and at the time when the remaining time runs out (at the end of the effective period), at least a part (or all) may not be hidden and the display state may be maintained. Become.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 412 (d), in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG when the timing is A4, which is the end timing of the effective period, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0". The display area of "specific image TG" is left as it is. Then, when the operation is not accepted until this state, the period in which the operation acceptance is permitted is ended in this state, and the integrated overhead image IG is not displayed.

  However, also in this example, in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the effective period, a part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is not displayed and a part is left May be displayed.

  Even in this example, the “specific image TG” is displayed so as to displace its display position in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (following form), When viewed from the player side, it is possible to make it ambiguous to what extent the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It will be.

  That is, the “specific image TG” is not hidden when the effective period ends, and the display area of the majority (half or more or all) remains, but from the player side. When viewed, it appears that the display area is a part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to a minimum value (not shown here) when the effective period ends. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be longer than the actual image, it is possible to make the effective period appear to remain more than the actual. Thus, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest during the operation reception effect.

  On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left and ended, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to display so that the display area of “specific image TG” is reduced even if the period does not end immediately, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity due to a gap between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period. That is, in this case, with regard to “specific image TG”, it can be expected to play a role as a buffer unit capable of absorbing such a temporal shift.

  In the example shown in FIG. 412, the images of “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” are made different from those in the example shown in FIG. 411. However, the same image may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 411, the same image as that of the example shown in FIG. 412 may be used. Also, an effective period in which the images of “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411, and images of “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” in the mode shown in FIG. The term of validity may be generated separately from the term of validity displayed. In this case, in the effective period in which the mode shown in FIG. 411 appears and the effective period in which the mode shown in FIG. 412 appears, the shape of the integrated bag image IG itself or at least the display target region of the gauge image GG is mutually different. It is desirable to make them different.

  As described above, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is dynamic during the effective period of the predetermined operation reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 411 (a) to 411 (e) and 412 (a) to 412 (d). Thus, the player can be prompted to perform an operation. However, as also described above, the button bag image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within the movable range, whereas the edge decoration image SSG is displayed. Does not display this dynamically. Then, in the peripheral decoration image SSG on the side where such dynamic display is not performed, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and in the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( Since the predetermined image) GG is changed, it is possible to easily recognize how much time remains until the effective period ends even if the integrated bird's eye image IG dynamically displayed is displayed. Will be able to.

  The “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” may be displayed as one image data, or may be displayed as separate image data.

  According to the configuration shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the “specific image TG” has the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” in the display target area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. Displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" that is displaced when being reduced, and displaces the display position according to the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (prescribed image) GG" Is displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player side, it is ambiguous to what extent the image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Will be able to.

  In addition, the “specific image TG” shown in FIG. 411 is not displayed when the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is the maximum value, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the acceptance of the operation. During the lapse of time (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the “specific image TG” is compensated by compensating for the decrease in the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. To increase the According to such a configuration, the remaining time suggested by the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” does not decrease at the beginning of the predetermined period after the effective period starts. As a result, it is possible to favorably maintain the amusement interest.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 411 and FIG. 412, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (e)) based on the result of the big hit determination (representation determination). Although the display shape of “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG” may be the same, even when displayed in any of these modes. It is desirable to make it. Each aspect (pattern, color, etc.) of “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG” may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but a function that suggests the remaining time is provided. In order to maintain suitably, it is desirable that the other aspect is not changed even if the aspect of one of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” changes. For example, if the mark attached to the “specific image TG” shown in FIG. 411 is not a star shape but a double circle, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. Since the degree of expectation (double circle) is gradually made visible while the image “GG” is reduced, it is expected to improve the game interest.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the “specific image TG” is not at least partially (or may be all) even when the operation is not performed by the player and the validity period ends. The display state is maintained instead of being displayed. However, for the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 411 and FIG. 412, when the timing A4 arrives without any operation by the player, the operation is received internally and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, the operation It is desirable to make it function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect effect" in which the sound is output according to the reception). In this case, the timing A4 may be a timing at which the valid period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after the timing. In any case, the timing A4 is the time after the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is not displayed (the timing at which the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is not displayed, or the timing after that) and the “specific image TG”. It is desirable to set as timing to arrive in a state where at least a part is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even when a situation in which an operation by the player is performed immediately after the acceptance of the operation is not allowed, even immediately before the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is performed, Since the specific image TG is to be displayed, it may appear as if the after-operation display or the after-operation sound output was started in response to the operation being received by the player in time due to the operation by the player being in time become able to. The “specific image TG” may be displayed also at the time when display after operation or sound output after operation is started (for example, after display after operation or sound output after operation is started, it is faded out Etc. that gradually disappear.)

  When it is assumed that the valid period for which such automatic acceptance is performed is the first valid period generated by the satisfaction of the first condition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is different from the first condition in the second condition. When the condition is satisfied, a second effective period during which automatic acceptance is not possible can be generated. Even in the second effective period, the button bird's-eye view image BMG is displayed as an integrated bird's-eye view image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge, and a gauge image (predetermined image) The display target area of) GG is included. However, the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the second effective period generated by the establishment of the second condition, but the “specific image TG”. Is not displayed. The integrated bag image IG displayed within the first effective period and the integrated bag image IG displayed within the second effective period are displayed as the same image except that the “specific image TG” is not displayed. It can be done.

  That is, in the second valid period generated by the establishment of the second condition, different from the first effective period generated by the establishment of the first condition, when the set time elapses without the player's operation being performed, The automatic acceptance does not function, and the second valid period ends in such a manner that no post-operation display or post-operation sound output (or both) is generated. Therefore, if there is a case where the display of "specific image TG" is left when the acceptance for the operation by the player is not permitted, the effective period ends even though the remaining time has not been digested. This may cause misunderstanding as if it had been done, which in turn could lead to a decline in the entertainment interest. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable that the “specific image TG” is not displayed over the entire period from the start to the end.

  In this case, it is desirable that the lengths of the set time (the time from the acceptance of the operation acceptance to the end) are different between the first effective period and the second effective period. It is also desirable that the display changes (post-operation display) and sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when an operation is accepted are different from each other.

  In addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is met, the third valid period for which automatic acceptance is performed may be enabled (for example, generated when the third condition is met), A fourth valid period in which automatic acceptance is not made may be possible (for example, occurring when the fourth condition is met) other than the second valid period which occurs when the second condition is met. The point is that at least the first validity period in which processing related to display or sound is performed in the above-mentioned manner is included in the validity periods for which automatic reception is made (effective periods with different occurrence conditions). Among the effective periods in which no action is taken (effective periods with different occurrence conditions), at least a second effective period in which processing for display and sound is performed in the above-described manner may be included.

In addition, the “first effective period” here is
-It does not mean that the display after operation and the sound output after operation are output regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the effective period only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set,
-Regardless of the effect state, it means that the display after operation and the sound output after operation are output regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the effective period. In the first place, the "special effect state (automatic reception mode)" or the "plural effect states" may not necessarily be prepared as the effect state. It should be noted that if “second effective period” occurs when “special effect state (automatic reception mode)” is set, any one may be adopted as to whether or not automatic reception is activated. (For example, "the automatic reception may not necessarily be activated regardless of the state of presentation"), it has nothing to do with the configuration according to the technical feature described here.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a non-linear specific shape. More specifically, when the effective period of the operation reception effect occurs, the integrated overhead image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the areas forming the integrated overhead image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) In the non-linear area of the unit, display is performed to reduce the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as time passes. According to such a configuration, since the decorativeness itself appears to reduce the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as time passes, the remaining time as the effective period is digested. It will be possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment in the middle.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG having a specific pattern applied to the display target area and a gauge image having a predetermined transmittance (Predetermined image) GG is displayed superimposed on this, or gauge image (predetermined image) GG Because a specific pattern is applied to itself, the gauge image (predetermined image) according to the passage of time It is possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image (predetermined image) as time elapses. It is possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG.

  Although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the display target area of the non-linear specific shape shown in FIG. 411 and FIG. 412 is referred to as "first display target area". A second display target area having a shape (non-similar shape) different from the non-linear specific shape and having a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts reducing the display area until the display area ends The operation reception effect (effective period) in which is displayed can be generated under different conditions. Then, the operation reception effect (the effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed is ended when the first set time has elapsed while the operation by the player is not performed, and by the player An operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed while there is at least a case where the operation is not performed and is ended when the second set time has elapsed May end when the first set time has elapsed without the player performing an operation, but when the second set time has elapsed without the player performing the operation. There is no case to be terminated.

  In this respect, an operation target to which an operation opportunity is given by an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed By making the (operation receiving unit) different, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different, and the operation targets are different. Together with other things, you will be able to urge you to enjoy the operation reception effects with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed are different from each other. The bag image is displayed in a form integrated with the peripheral decoration image. As for the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations for the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed. However, in any case, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part of the display area. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes.

  Moreover, in order to obtain the above-described effects, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the “non-linear specific shape”, and the “shape different from this (non-similar shape)”. In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (first set time) is set as each other, “big hit as display after operation and sound output after operation It is desirable to make the rate of appearance of “meaning to indicate things” different. The ratio may be “0%” or “100%”.

  The same set time (first set time) between the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed In some cases, it is desirable to give the same opportunity for accepting operations regarding the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output. At different setting times, it is desirable that an opportunity to receive an operation regarding a different post-operation display or a post-operation sound output is given.

  Also, in the examples shown in FIG. 411 and FIG. 412, the operation related display such as “Push!” Or “Down arrow” is superimposed on the integrated bird's-eye view image IG to match with the integrated bird's eye image IG. When you see them, you are more strongly expressing that you are in a situation to operate. However, here, an operation-related display such as “Press!” Or “Down arrow” is displayed overlapping the button 摸 image BMG (in any dynamic display timing) that suggests an object to be operated. In addition, it does not overlap with the gauge image (predetermined image) GG indicating the remaining time or the specific image TG.

  In such a configuration, operations such as "press!" Or "down arrow" in a form avoiding important information such as button bird's-eye image BMG, gauge image (predetermined image) GG, specific image TG, etc. in integrated bird's-eye view image IG Since the related display is superimposed on the integrated bird's-eye view image IG, the player can be strongly urged to operate while properly transmitting important information. It goes without saying that this is nothing more than the button bird's-eye view image BMG is displayed as an integrated bird's-eye view image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the operation display performed when the operation reception is performed within the effective period as the effective period in which the operation reception is permitted, And after the operation, a plurality of (types) different effective periods of the sound output are prepared. The generation conditions of the effective periods are different from each other, and when any of the generation conditions is satisfied, the effective period of the type corresponding to that is generated.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the “specific image TG” is displayed within the effective period in a plurality of effective periods (first effective period) And those in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed within the effective period (second effective period) are included at least. Hereinafter, in this example, the “first effective period” and the “second effective period” are referred to as the “first effective period” in which automatic reception is performed and the “second effective period” in which automatic reception is not performed. However, it may be applied as a different effective period.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, in performing the prognostic effect (specific display) indicating that the operation reception is permitted, the prognostic effect (specific display) is received Is executed before and after the generation timing of the allowable valid period. According to such an indication effect (specific display), since the effective period comes to be generated while the flashy effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the fun of the game when the effective period occurs. become able to.

  However, when the prognostic effect (specific display) is executed in such a mode, the prognostic effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed on the integrated overhead image IG, and therefore, when the effective period is started, the integrated effect is integrated. Even if the metamorphosis image IG is displayed (internal layer display), a portion overlapping with the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (not visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the precursor effect (specific display), it is difficult to visually recognize a portion of the integrated bag image IG that overlaps the precursor effect (specific display). In any case, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce its display area under such a situation where visibility is difficult.

  That is, in this case, a precursor effect (specific display) is not displayed, or a portion overlapping with the precursor effect (specific display) disappears, and the whole (or a gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target of the integrated overhead image IG When the visibility of the entire area is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, so from the viewpoint of the player, the effective period (set time) You can remember the impression as if the

  On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" which appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player side . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, “a precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or a precursor effect (specific display) is executed among a plurality of types of effective periods. In the second valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not decrease at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is finished, the second valid period is generated until the end During this period, "specific image TG" is not displayed at all. On the other hand, among the multiple (types) of valid periods, the gauge image is generated when “the precursor effect (specific display) occurs in the middle of execution and the entire integrated bag image IG is visible (or easily visible). In the “predetermined image” first effective period in which the display area of the GG is reduced, the “specific image TG” is displayed within the first effective period.

  According to such a configuration, the gauge image (predetermined image) is displayed in the first effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the prognostic effect (specific display) is not displayed. The gauge image is displayed when the entire integrated bird's-eye view image IG (or the display target region of the gauge image GG) becomes visible since the “specific image TG” is displayed in the display target region of the GG. It becomes possible to make it appear that the display area of the GG is not reduced so much, and the decline of the game entertainment is suppressed.

  On the other hand, the second effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not decrease or the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed when the precursor effect (specific display) is not displayed When the “specific image TG” is displayed, for example, in the case of the display mode of FIG. 411, when the effective period occurs, the “specific image TG” is not displayed and the effective period occurs. When it is seen that “specific image TG” gradually appears as time passes from the point of time, it may be overlooked that this does not function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. That is, in this case, since the game entertainment interest is likely to deteriorate with the exaggerated expression of the remaining time, the “specific image TG” is displayed in such a second effective period. It is desirable from the viewpoint of suppressing the decline of the game interest.

  In addition to the second effective period, “a precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or a precursor effect (specific display) is executed but the precursor effect (specific display) is included in a plurality of (types) effective periods. The effective period (fifth effective period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the) is ended may be prepared under different generation conditions. In addition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases when “the precursor effect (specific display) occurs and when the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easily visible). The “valid period (sixth valid period)” may be prepared under different generation conditions, and at this time, whether or not the above “specific image TG” is displayed may be appropriately set. Good. The point is that at least the second valid period in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed and the first valid period in which the “specific image TG” is displayed are included in the plurality (types) of valid periods. If so, at least when the effective period has occurred, the above-mentioned effects come to be exhibited in relation to the prognostic effect (specific display).

  In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG is replaced with the mode shown in FIG. You may make it perform.

  FIG. 413 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect progress when the first effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period.

  FIG. 413 (a) shows the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, with the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being 0. This shows the production status being performed at.

  FIG. 413 (b) shows the effect status in which the prognostic effect (specific display TH) is started on the effect display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 413 (a) is being executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 413 (b), it can be seen that at least the effect display device 1600 is in a situation where the integrated overhead image IG has not appeared yet. However, since the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is internally displayed from when the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed by being displayed. The entire overhead image IG may not be visible (or may not be visible with a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, the operation acceptance is permitted (the effective period is started) from when the indication effect (specific display) is started.

  In FIG. 413 (c), as a result of the advancement effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 413 (b) progressing and the area where the advancement effect (specific display TH) is displayed is reduced, The part which does not overlap with the prognostic effect (specific display) appears, and shows the situation where the part is displayed in the state of good visual recognition.

  That is, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 413 (b)) that comes after the appearance of the situation shown in FIG. 413 (b) and is shown in FIG. 413 (c) Display (display on layer processing) is executed at least in an internal process when the "specific timing (timing when the effective period starts)" that is the timing that comes before the occurrence of It has become. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 413 (c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be visually recognized (or visually recognized) because it overlaps the preferential display (specific display TH). Although it is difficult), the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progressed). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap the precursor effect (specific display TH).

  According to such a configuration, the prognostic effect (specific display TH) is performed in a form straddling the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the generation of the effective period is the prognostic effect By (specific display TH), at least a part of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is not visible or difficult to see. That is, in this case, since the entire image of the integrated bag image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the expectation level (the mode of the peripheral decorative image) suggested by the mode of the integrated bag image IG ) And the operation target (the mode of the button） image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the effective period is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 413 (c), although it is difficult to visually recognize the button down image that looks over the operation target, the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is used for the peripheral decoration image to decorate the peripheral In other words, it is in a state in which it is possible to recognize that it is a “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa”. In the example shown in FIG. 413 (c), since the “specific image TG” is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize, the type (specific image TG) is originally displayed when the effective period starts ( It is made difficult to distinguish whether it is a type (see FIG. 411) which does not display “specific image TG” at the time when the valid period starts or does not appear at the time when the valid period starts (see FIG. 412) There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 412, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopting it, it can be said that executing the adverbial effect in the manner described above is particularly effective in suppressing the decline in game entertainment.

  In FIG. 413 (d), as the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 413 (b) is further developed, there is no part overlapping with the integrated overhead image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG). (Here, the admonition has been hidden).

  As shown in FIG. 413 (d), when the entire integrated haze image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a state of good visibility, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area is already reduced, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” is already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has already appeared). That is, in this case, since "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", a display area larger than the actual display area applied to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is obtained. It is possible to make it appear as if the display area has not been reduced so much. As a result, it can be expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursor effect (specific display TH) ends.

  In (e) of FIG. 413, the operation acceptance is not performed until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes the minimum value (here, “0”), and the effective period ends (or the effective period ends). Shows an example of an image appearing in the effect display device 1600).

  As shown in FIG. 413 (e), at least a part (or all) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even when the effective period ends. In this respect, in the first valid period, as described above, even after the player does not perform the operation within the period, the same post-operation display or post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed is performed (FIG. 413). (See (f)).

  According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which an operation by the player is performed immediately after the validity period ends (operation reception is no longer allowed), the post-operation display Since the "specific image TG" is displayed immediately before or after the operation sound output is performed, the display or operation is performed after the operation by the player is made in time and the operation acceptance associated with this is generated. It will be possible to make it appear as if the after sound output has been started. In particular, when a precursor effect (pre-display) is performed in such a mode, a gauge image (predetermined when the entire overhead view of the integrated overhead image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) The display area of the image GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already been started. That is, in this case, the possibility that the operation by the player will not be in time will increase, so even after the operation by the player has not been performed within the effective period, the display after the operation with the “specific image TG” displayed It can be said that performing a sound output after an operation is particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in game entertainment.

  Incidentally, with regard to the development of effects in the aspect shown in FIG. 413, there are cases where “specific image TG” is displayed in the aspect shown in FIG. 411 and “specific image TG” is displayed in the aspect shown in FIG. It may be applied to any of the above.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 413, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated bird's-eye view image IG are displayed in separate layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is displayed preferentially by appearing in FIG. 413. It was decided to realize the production progress in the aspect. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to store the effect progress in the form appearing in FIG. 413 as one moving image data and reproduce the moving image data to realize this. The method is also applicable to each example described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 413, the aspect (integrated bird's-eye view image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) is made to appear as the integrated bird's-eye view image IG. However, as described above, the integrated overhead image IG may be made to appear in any of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). . Then, when adopting such a method, it is more desirable from the viewpoint of improving the fun of playing a game, to execute the prognostic effects in the mode shown in FIG. 414 to FIG.

  FIG. 414 to FIG. 416 are diagrams showing a modification example of the presentation progress when the first effective period occurs among the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  FIG. 414 (a) shows an effect display device with a first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state where the number of holds is 0 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) The production status at 1600 is shown.

  FIG. 414 (b) shows an effect in which the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is started on the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 414 (a). Indicates the situation.

  This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect is performed. It functions as an effect to

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), Either “the image shown in FIG. 415 (c)” or “the image shown in FIG. 416 (j)” is displayed, whereby “normal button 摸 image BMGa” and “special” are displayed as the button 摸 image BMG. It is suggested which of the “button 摸 image BMGb” is likely to appear.

  Here, when “the image shown in FIG. 415 (c)” is displayed, there is a high possibility that the “normal button 摸 image BMGa” is displayed as the button 摸 image BMG (here, “100%”). Would be suggested.

  The “image shown in FIG. 415 (c)” according to this example is the “integrated bird's-eye view image Iga” in an aspect (here, translucent) different from that in the normal state (the aspect shown in FIG. 410 (a)). It is displayed as the represented image IGa '. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, with regard to “the image shown in FIG. 415 (c)”, the “integrated bird's-eye view image Iga” may be displayed as it is in the mode shown in FIG. Alternatively, the “normal button bird's-eye image BMGa” may be displayed as a single image without being integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Even when the “normal button bag image BMGa” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (a)) or in the normal mode (FIG. 410 (a)). The image may be displayed as an image expressed in an aspect (here, translucent) different from the aspect shown in).

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 415 (c), it is similar to the degree to recall “normal button 摸 image BMGa” itself or “normal button 摸 image BMGa” shown in FIG. 410 (a) At least an image BMGa ′ having an outline is displayed. Thus, the effective period in which “normal button bird's-eye image BMGa” is displayed as “integrated bird's-eye view image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” integrated with “normally peripheral decoration image SSGa”, or “special rim decoration” It becomes possible to suggest that the effective period displayed as “Integrated overhead image IGc (FIG. 410 (a))” integrated with the image SSGb ”occurs.

  After the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) shown in FIG. 415 (c) is displayed, the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) is not the “integrated bird's eye image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))”. , An effect suggesting (recalling) that there is a possibility of being displayed as “integrated haze image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 415 (d), “special peripheral decoration image SGSb is expressed with respect to“ image IGa ′ expressing integrated bird's-eye view image IGa ”(or image BMGa ′ expressing normal button eyelid image BMGa)”. The image SSGb ′ ”is depicted as an effect that gradually approaches. As a result of performing such an effect, “special peripheral decoration image SGSb is expressed with respect to“ image IGa ′ expressing integrated bird's-eye view image IGa ”(or image BMGa ′ expressing normal button eyelid image BMGa)” When the image SSGb ′ ′ is integrated in a form to which the image SSGb ′ ′ is added, a valid period in which the “integrated overhead image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))” appears is generated. On the other hand, "an image SGSb 'expressing a special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "an image IGa' expressing an integrated overhead image IGa (or an image BMGa 'expressing a normal button eye image BMGa)" When it is not integrated, the effective period in which "an integrated bird's-eye view image IGa (Fig. 410 (a))" appears is generated.

  FIG. 415 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started in the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 415 (d) is performed. There is.

  This second sign production (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first production pattern (variation pattern) has advanced to the second timing, and suggests that operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as an effect. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is the “image IGa ′ representing the integrated overhead image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ representing the normal button overhead image BMGa)”. The “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is to be started while gradually approaching, and at the time when it is started, “the image IGa ′ representing the integrated overhead image IGa ( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the image BMGa ′) representing the normal button bird's-eye image BMGa ”and the“ image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb ”are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 415 (e) progresses, any one of “image shown in FIG. 415 (f)” and “image shown in FIG. 415 (h)” is determined based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situation and the image content shown in FIG. 415 (f) and FIG. 415 (h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned “the situation and the image content shown in FIG. 413 (c)”. As a result of the development of the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2) shown in FIG. 7 and the reduction of the area displayed by the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2), the integrated overhead image IG is displayed. A portion that does not overlap with the prognostic effect (specific display) appears, and indicates a state or image content in which the portion is displayed in a well-recognized state.

  That is, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 415 (e)) that comes after the appearance of the situation shown in FIG. 415 (e), and FIG. 415 (f) or FIG. When the “specific timing (timing to start the effective period)”, which is the timing that comes before the situation shown in 415 (h) appears, displays at least internally processing (display on layer processing) ) Is to be implemented. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 415 (f) or 415 (h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is displayed as a second precursor effect (specific display TH2) to be preferentially displayed. Although it is not visible due to overlapping (or difficult to see), the reduction of the display area of “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of “specific image TG” has already started ( Progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed in a form straddling the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the effective period has not occurred. For a predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated overhead image IG can not be viewed or is difficult to be viewed by the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the entire image of the integrated bag image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the expectation level (the mode of the peripheral decorative image) suggested by the mode of the integrated bag image IG ) And the operation target (the mode of the button） image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the effective period is started.

  In this respect, when the situation shown in FIG. 415 (f) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated overhead image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 415 (d) and (e), “the image IGa ′ representing the integrated bird's-eye view image Iga ′ (or the normal button eyelid image BMGa is It can be recognized that the image BMGa ') has failed to be combined with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 415 (g), the integrated overhead image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)). The whole story of will appear. Since the presentation progress after that is as described above with reference to FIGS. 413 (d) to (f), it is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 415 (h) appears, it can be recognized that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". From the result shown in FIG. 415 (d), “image IGa ′ representing integrated overhead image IGa (or image BMGa ′ representing normal button overhead image BMGa)” is “special peripheral decoration image SSGb It is possible to recognize that the image has been successfully combined with the image SSGb ′ ”representing“. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 415 (i), the integrated overhead image IGc (see FIG. 410 (c)) The whole story of will appear. The subsequent presentation progress is that only the integrated overhead image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) is replaced with the integrated overhead image IGc (see FIG. 410 (c)), and FIG. 413 (d)- Because it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when “image shown in FIG. 416 (j)” is displayed, there is a high possibility that “special button 摸 image BMGb” is displayed as the button 摸 image BMG (here, “100%”) Will be suggested.

  In the “image shown in FIG. 416 (j)” according to this example, the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGb” is in a mode (here, semi-transparent) different from that in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (b)). It is displayed as the represented image IGb '. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, with regard to “the image shown in FIG. 416 (j)”, the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGb” may be displayed as it is in the mode shown in FIG. Alternatively, the "special button bird's-eye view image BMGb" may be displayed as a single image without being integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Even when the “special button bag image BMGb” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (b)) or in the normal mode (FIG. 410 (b). The image may be displayed as an image expressed in an aspect (here, translucent) different from the aspect shown in).

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 416 (j), it is similar to the degree to recall “special button 摸 image BMGb” itself or “special button 摸 image BMGb” shown in FIG. 410 (b) At least an image BMGb ′ having an outline is displayed. Thereby, the effective period in which "special button bird's-eye view image BMGb" is displayed as "integrated bird's-eye view image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))" integrated with "usually peripheral decoration image SSGa" It can be suggested that the effective period displayed as “Integrated overhead image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))” integrated with the image SSGb ”will occur.

  After the image IGb '(image BMGb') shown in FIG. 416 (j) is displayed, the image IGb '(image BMGb') is not the "integrated overhead image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))". , An effect that suggests (recalls) that there is a possibility of being displayed as “integrated haze image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 415 (k), “special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to“ image IGb ′ which represents integrated bird's-eye view image IGb ”(or image BMGb ′ which represents special button 摸 image BMGb)”. The image SSGb ′ ”is depicted as an effect that gradually approaches. As a result of performing such an effect, “special peripheral decoration image SGSb is expressed with respect to“ image IGb ′ expressing integrated bird's-eye view image IGb ”(or image BMGb ′ expressing special button 摸 image BMGb)”. When the image SSGb ′ ′ is integrated in the added form, a valid period in which the “integrated overhead image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))” appears is generated. On the other hand, "image SGBb 'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGb' expressing the integrated overhead image IGb (or image BMGb 'expressing the special button bird image BMGb)" When it is not integrated, the effective period in which "an integrated bird's-eye view image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))" appears will occur.

  FIG. 416 (l) shows an effect situation in which the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is started in the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 416 (k) is performed. There is. Instead of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), it may be executed as a third precursor effect different from this (third specific display).

  As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) has progressed to the second timing, and operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as an effect suggesting that. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is the “image IGb ′ representing the integrated overhead image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ representing the special button overhead image BMGb)”. The “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is to be started while gradually approaching, and at the time when it is started, “the image IGb ′ representing the integrated overhead image IGb ( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the special button “image BMGb ′ expressing the image BMGb” and the “image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 416 (l) progresses, any one of “image shown in FIG. 416 (m)” and “image shown in FIG. 416 (o)” is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situation and the image content shown in FIG. 416 (m) and FIG. 416 (o) are basically the same as the “the situation and the image content shown in FIG. 413 (c)” described above, and FIG. As a result of the development of the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2) shown in FIG. 7 and the reduction of the area displayed by the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2), the integrated overhead image IG is displayed. A portion that does not overlap with the prognostic effect (specific display) appears, and indicates a state or image content in which the portion is displayed in a well-recognized state.

  That is, the integrated haze image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 416 (l)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 416 (l) appears, and FIG. 416 (m) or FIG. When “specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)” arrives before the situation shown in 416 (o) appears, at least the internal processing is displayed (display on the layer processing) ) Is to be executed. Accordingly, at the time shown in FIG. 416 (m) and FIG. 416 (o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is preferentially displayed with the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (although it is invisible (or difficult to recognize visually) by overlapping. Progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed in a form straddling the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the effective period has not occurred. For a predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated overhead image IG can not be viewed or is difficult to be viewed by the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the entire image of the integrated bag image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the expectation level (the mode of the peripheral decorative image) suggested by the mode of the integrated bag image IG ) And the operation target (the mode of the button） image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the effective period is started.

  In this respect, when the situation shown in FIG. 416 (m) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated overhead image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Because it is in a state that can be recognized, as a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 416 (k) and (l), “an image IGb ′ representing the integrated bird's-eye image IGb” (or a special button 摸 image BMGb is represented It can be recognized that the image "BMGb ')" has failed to be combined with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 416 (n), the integrated overhead image IGb (see FIG. 410 (b)) The whole story of will appear. In the subsequent stage of development, the integrated bag image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) is simply replaced with the integrated bag image IGb (see FIG. 410 (b)). Because it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 416 (o) appears, it can be recognized that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". From the result shown in FIG. 416 (k), “an image IGb ′ representing the integrated overhead image IGb (or an image BMGb ′ representing the special button overhead image BMGb)” is “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb. It is possible to recognize that the image has been successfully combined with the image SSGb ′ ”representing“. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 416 (p), the integrated overhead image IGd (see FIG. 410 (d)). The whole story of will appear. The subsequent rendering progress is that only the integrated bird's-eye view image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) is replaced with the integrated bird's-eye view image IGd (see FIG. 410 (d)), and FIG. Because it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 414 to FIG. 416, when FIG. 415 (c) appears, the probability that the “special button 摸 image BMGb” appears as the button 摸 image BMG is “0%”, but as the button 摸 image BMG You may make it have a slight probability that "the special button bag image BMGb" will appear. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 415 (e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 415 (f) → (g), (h) → (i), FIG. 416 (m) → (n), There is a possibility that the production progress will be executed in the form of o) → (p).

  According to such a configuration, at which point in FIG. 415 (f), (h) and FIGS. 416 (m), (o) appear, in which aspect the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed. Although it can be recognized, it can not be recognized as to which mode the button- 摸 image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is suggested step by step according to the situation relating to the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), and the game entertainment can be improved. . In particular, when the button bag image BMG can indicate any of a plurality of operation means having different operation objects depending on the display mode, the effective period has started and the operation-related expectation level is also suggested. In spite of the situation, the state where the operation target cannot be recognized occurs, so that the degree of attention to the effect can be remarkably improved.

  However, even in the situation where FIGS. 415 (f) and (h) and FIGS. 416 (m) and (o) appear, the buttons on the operation means (operation receiving unit) which is the operation target by the player are It is desirable that light emission (for example, light emission from the time of occurrence of the effective period) is performed in a mode according to the type displayed as the overhead image BMG. According to such a configuration, a highly motivated person who tends to look directly at the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the “type displayed as the button bag image BMG”. Thus, the player can be encouraged to operate.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) may not necessarily be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 414 (a) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIG. 415 (c) or 416 (j).

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) may not necessarily be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 415 (d) or 416 (k) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIGS. 415 (g), (i) or 416 (n), (p). Good. That is, in this case, the effect shown in FIG. 415 (d) or 416 (k) functions as a prognostic effect. At the time of transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be already reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not be reduced. In the case where the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased at the time of the transition, the gauge image is in the situation shown in FIG. 415 (d) or 416 (k). (Predetermined image) GG will start to decrease its display area.

  Moreover, about the production | presentation of FIGS. 414-416, you may make it omit the part according to the aspect prepared as the integrated haze image IG. For example, when the aspect shown in FIG. 410 (b), (d) is not prepared as the integrated bird's-eye view image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. At this time, it may be omitted also in FIG. 415 (c).

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, the image BMG ′ (or the button 摸 image BMG itself representing the button 摸 image BMG before the acceptance of the operation (before the generation of the effective period) Image is displayed (FIG. 415 (d), FIG. 416 (k)), but in the situation (before the occurrence of the effective period), an image BMG ′ (or a button Is not dynamically displayed so as to depict a state in which it is displaced within the movable range of the operation receiving portion. According to such a configuration, even if the button bag image BMG or the image BMG ′ representing the button bag image BMG is displayed prior to the generation of the effective period, the effective period has not yet occurred. Can be implicitly suggested, so that the player can concentrate on the performance without worrying about the remaining time of the effective period. In addition, when the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2) is being performed, the effect reception is permitted, so it is difficult to visually recognize whether the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2) is visible or not The dynamic display of the button 摸 image BMG is performed among the above.

  FIGS. 417 to 421 are diagrams showing an example of the progression of effects when the second valid period occurs in the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

  That is, in FIGS. 413 to 416, an effective period (first effective period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the indication effect (specific display) is hidden is generated. In the case, the example concerning the production progress was explained. On the other hand, in FIGS. 417 to 421, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced or the precursor effect (specific display) is performed when the precursor effect (specific display) is not displayed. In the case where an effective period (second effective period) occurs without being distracted, an example of the development of the effect will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, basically, when a valid period during which an operation is allowed is generated, a predetermined sign effect (a sign display) is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG” within the effective period can be executed. Gage image (predetermined image) GG even if a predetermined antecedent effect (precursor indication) itself is not performed when an effective period occurs or a predetermined anomalous effect (precursor indication) is performed in order to highlight the feature when performing an effect The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not yet reduced and the situation where the display area is at the maximum value appears when the entire display target area is visually recognized well.

  Here, as the “display mode that characterizes the movement of the gauge image GG”, normally (see FIGS. 411 to 416 and the like), the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the effective period. When the effective period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), “the operation is not performed within the effective period and the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation are performed. However, at the end of the effective period, the display area of the gauge image GG does not become a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), and has a predetermined display area. It is possible to cite “the first display mode”. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to see that much time remains until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”). Becomes aware of the possibility that the effective period is abruptly ended, so that the tension during the effective period can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, as the “display mode that characterizes the movement of the gauge image GG” (see FIGS. 411 to 416, etc.), the gauge image GG usually decreases the display area per unit time within the effective period. However, “the second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the effective period” can be cited. According to such a configuration, even if it seems that there is only a small amount of time remaining until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player can It becomes aware of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and the decline in game entertainment will be suppressed.

  That is, in the example described below, “a display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG” using at least one of such “first display mode” and “second display mode” The example of a display about the case where is executed is shown.

  First, FIG. 417 (a) shows the second effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, with the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the normal gaming state where the number of reservations is 0. The rendering situation being performed on the display device 1600 is shown.

  In FIG. 417 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 417 (a), an effective period in which operation acceptance to the operation means (operation receiving portion) is permitted occurs. The integrated overhead image IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 417 (b), when the integrated heel image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is a predetermined maximum value and has not yet been reduced. .

  In addition, when executing the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG” within the effective period, the time (set time) set for the effective period (second effective period) is “ The display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG is made longer than the time (set time) set for the effective period (first effective period) in which it is not executed. This is nothing but the time required to execute a display mode that gives a characteristic to the movement of the gauge image GG within the effective period. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the first valid period in which the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed, and the "movement of the gauge image GG The integrated bird's-eye view image IG itself is the same even though the set time until the end of the effective period is different from the second effective period in which the “display aspect characterized in FIG. The images are displayed in a similar relationship (in this example, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG is the same display area). According to such a configuration, the first effective period in which the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" is not performed at first glance, and the "movement of the gauge image GG are characterized. It is difficult to recognize that the setting time is different in the second effective period in which the “display mode” is executed, but when a situation in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the time in the non-reduced situation It becomes possible to estimate that setting time is longer than it looks by adding.

  In addition, when the production situation shown in FIG. 417 (b) occurs, a precursor production suggesting the occurrence may be performed. However, the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed when the entire integrated overhead image IG (at least the “display target area of the gauge image GG included in the integrated overhead image IG”) is displayed without overlapping with the precursor effect. Is a maximum value, and it is required to be in a situation that has not yet been reduced.

  That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases in a state (within the valid period) in which operation acceptance for a predetermined operation display and a predetermined operation sound output is permitted. When the effect situation shown in FIG. 417 (c) appears after a predetermined time has elapsed from the effect situation shown in FIG. 417 (b), the gauge image GG is The display area is maintained in a state in which the display area corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time) is reduced, and the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is started.

  Such “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is continued for a predetermined time after the period has occurred, as shown in FIGS. 417 (c) and (d). It has become. However, even in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, the operation acceptance remains in the permitted state, and the effective period when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is operated As a result, the integrated haze image IG is not displayed, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 417 (g)).

  According to such a configuration, since “a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” appears within the effective period, the display area of the gauge image GG is continuously reduced at a constant rate. Thus, it can be suggested that there is a margin in the remaining time until the effective period ends.

  In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as an allowable state, so that an image as if the effective period has been extended can be provided. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved when the effective period is in effect.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 417 (c) and (d), in the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the decorative symbol SZ displayed up to that point is not displayed or is difficult to see. It is made to be in a state, and this makes it possible to prompt the user to gaze at “a display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”.

  However, when a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the player may be misunderstood that the image in the display screen suddenly comes to a standstill, that is, the so-called "freeze effect" occurs. That is, since "freeze effect" does not show any reaction over a predetermined time, and is generally known as a display mode that can not cancel the state, false recognition that operation acceptance is not permitted It is feared that the player's willingness to operate may be lost, and the interest in gaming may decline. In particular, in this example, the decorative symbol SZ is in a non-displayed state or in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize, and this may also cause an erroneous recognition that operation acceptance is no longer allowed.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated overhead image IG itself is not made stationary in a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. While the gauge image GG included in the IG is set to a static state, the button 摸 image BMG included in the integrated 摸 image IG is dynamically displayed (displacement within the movable range of the operation receiving portion is depicted. Display) is continued.

  According to such a configuration, a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears while the dynamic display of the button 摸 image BMG is continued, and the operation acceptance is not permitted ( It is possible to suppress the possibility of being erroneously recognized as a freeze effect), and it is expected to suitably maintain the player's desire to operate.

  Here, the dynamic display based on the button bird's-eye view image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined operation (such as an operation of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiving unit). In this regard, in the effective period (the first effective period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416, etc.) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is not displayed, the setting is made. While the predetermined operation by the button 摸 image BMG is repeated n times before the time ends, the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed In the effective period (second effective period shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 and the like) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time of being set, the “display area of the gauge image GG is reduced in the set time”. It is desirable that the predetermined action by the button 摸 image BMG can be performed as a display that is repeated m (> n) times only within the not-in-time period.

  According to such a configuration, when the state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG decreases over a longer time than the first effective period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416 and the like. As a result, the state that is not performed will continue, so even if you are surprised at the occurrence of the state and take time to grasp the situation, you have enough time to operate. , It will be expected to maintain the game interest favorably. In addition, as an effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the indication effect (specific display) is not displayed, an effective period different from the first effective period illustrated in FIGS. 413 to 416 and the like is effective. If there is a period (that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output), than the longest of each time (set time) set for the effective period, Of the second effective period shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 and the like, it is desirable to increase the number of predetermined operations by the button bag image BMG within the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. .

  As described above, at the time when such a second effective period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is ensured satisfactorily, and its display area is set to a predetermined maximum value. It is displayed (FIG. 417 (b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 412, if the specific image TG may be displayed in a state of good visibility in the display target area of the gauge image GG, the specific image TG is displayed. However, it may seem that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 411, when the specific image TG appears in a state of good visual recognition as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG is displayed. It becomes clear that the image does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered by exaggerating the length of the remaining time as the effective period.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second effective period. Therefore, even if the reduction of the display area of the gauge image GG is started from the situation shown in FIG. 417 (b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed in a state where the specific image TG is not displayed. Is reduced to a predetermined value, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 417 (c) and (d)).

  In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is ended while the operation by the player is not received, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced again. In this state, the decorative design SZ is displayed again or is easily visible. After that, when the display area of the gauge image GG becomes a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 417 (e)), the time (set time) set for the second valid period is up. When the second effective period is ended, the operation related image including the integrated overhead image IG is hidden (FIG. 417 (f)). Here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is “0”, ie, non-display (FIG. 417 (e)), the time (set time) set for the second valid period is up Then, the second effective period is ended, and the operation related image including the integrated overhead image IG is not displayed (FIG. 417 (f)).

  As described above, in the second valid period, when the set time elapses without the operation acceptance being performed (FIG. 417 (f)), the same operation as when the operation acceptance is performed in the second valid period. The rear display and the post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning), and also in this point, they are different from the first effective period. However, instead, in the second valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the setting time for the first valid period, and operation acceptance is also allowed in the display period in the stopped state. As described above, it can be said that the situation that the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) can not be made in time is difficult to occur. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 417, the gauge image GG is normally determined within the effective period as the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" (see FIG. 411 to FIG. 416 etc.). The case where “the second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the effective period” has been described in terms of reducing the display area at a constant speed. However, as described above, as the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”, normally (see FIG. 411 to FIG. 416 etc.), when the operation is not performed within the effective period, The effective period ends when the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”). “The operation is not performed within the effective period and the display after operation and the sound output after operation are performed. However, at the end of the effective period, the display area of the gauge image GG does not become a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), and has a predetermined display area. The first display mode "may be further applied. And, when adopting such a method, it is intended to improve the game fun by executing it in one of the modes shown in FIGS. 418 and 419 or the modes shown in FIGS. 420 and 421. More desirable.

  418 and 419 are diagrams showing an example of the effect progress when the second effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  The situations shown in FIGS. 418 (a)-(d) are the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 417 (a)-(d) or their alternatives. Therefore, also in this example, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs in the middle of the second effective period, and includes the period within the second effective period. When the operation reception is performed, the display after operation and the sound output after the operation based on the operation reception are performed (see FIG. 419 (g)).

  However, in this example, even if the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends without the operation being accepted by the player's operation, the gauge image GG reduces the display area again. It will not be displayed. In this example, the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is continued until the time set for the second effective period (set time) elapses. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (predetermined value) as shown in FIGS. 418 (d) and 419 (e). In this state, the operation related image including the integrated haze image IG is hidden. In this state, the decorative design SZ is displayed again or is easily visible.

  As described above, also in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without the operation acceptance being performed (FIG. 419 (e)), the operation acceptance is performed within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as at the time are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning). However, instead of the second effective period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first effective period, and the operation is performed in the display period in the stopped state. As described above, the acceptance is to be permitted.

  However, in this example, the second effective period is not reduced until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the display area corresponding to the predetermined value remains. Since it is made to end, the player side may not be able to operate despite the intention to operate, and the situation that the second valid period ends may occur, and the gaming interest is reduced. I have a concern. Therefore, in this example, after the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a specific condition (for example, symbol stop or not 10 seconds before the symbol stop) is satisfied. The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the second effective period. When the operation is accepted, the second valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second effective period ends without any operation by the player, a special effective period for regenerating the second effective period is generated from the end point. It can be said that

  According to such a configuration, even if the second valid period ends as a result of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, even if the second effective period ends, the operation by the player can be performed as shown in FIG. It is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 419 (e), when the player performs an operation on the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is performed based on the reception of the operation. The valid period starts from the beginning (FIG. 419 (f)). Thereafter, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 418 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 419 (e) and (g). Therefore, even when an operation is accepted within the second valid period regenerated in this way, post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 419 (g)). ).

  When the operation acceptance is performed in the special effective period shown in FIG. 419 (e), the image shown in FIG. 419 (f) (the same as the image shown in FIG. 418 (b)) appears as a display after operation. It will be. Such an image is displayed on the image display after the operation is performed based on the operation acceptance in the second effective period (such as FIG. 418 (b) to (d) or 419 (f)). It is different. In addition, the post-operation sound output executed based on the acceptance of the operation during the special effective period shown in FIG. 419 (e) is similarly the second effective period (FIGS. 418 (b) to (d) or 419 (f) etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation.

  FIG. 420 and FIG. 421 are diagrams showing a modification example of the effect progress when the second effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  The situation shown in FIG. 420 (a) is the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 417 (a) and 418 (a) and other examples. However, in this example, when the second effective period occurs and the integrated overhead image IG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 420 (a) is being performed, A "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is generated for a predetermined time after the integrated overhead image IG is displayed (Fig. 420 (b), (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value when the integrated overhead image IG is displayed, the gauge image GG has the maximum display area. It will be maintained as it is.

  It should be noted that the operation acceptance is permitted even during the period when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG and the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and when the operation is accepted The configuration and progress in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, such as the execution of the after sound output, are the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. .

  Also in this example, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 418 and 419, “the display area of the gauge image GG decreases until the time (set time) set for the second effective period elapses. The period not to be done is to be continued. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is completed, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (maximum value) as shown in FIGS. 420 (c) and 421 (d). In this state, the operation related image including the integrated haze image IG is hidden. In this state, the decorative design SZ is displayed again or is easily visible.

  Thus, also in the second effective period according to this example, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIG. 421 (d)), the operation is accepted within the second effective period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (the automatic reception effect is functioned). However, instead of the second effective period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first effective period, and the operation is performed in the display period in the stopped state. As described above, the acceptance is to be permitted.

  However, also in this example, the second effective period is not reduced until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the display area corresponding to the maximum value remains. As a result, it is possible for the player side to end the second valid period without being able to operate despite the intention to operate, and the gaming interests are reduced. There are concerns. Therefore, also in this example, after the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a specific condition (for example, symbol stop or 10 seconds before the symbol stop) is satisfied. While not being performed, the operation means is given to the same operation means (the handle button 5014 or the operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the second effective period. Based on this, the second valid period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period is generated.

  According to such a configuration, even if the second valid period ends as a result of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, even if the second effective period ends, the operation by the player can be performed as shown in FIG. It is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 421 (d), when the player performs an operation on the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second is based on the reception of the operation. The effective period is started from the initial state (FIG. 421 (e)). Thereafter, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 420 (b), (c), 421 (d), and (f). Therefore, even when an operation is accepted within the second valid period regenerated in this way, post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 421 (f)). ).

  However, in this example, even when the second effective period reoccurs, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs from the time of the reoccurrence. In the situation shown in, the decorative symbol SZ is made non-displayed or in a state of being hardly visible.

  That is, the “image shown in FIG. 421 (e)” that appears as the post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 421 (d) is “the image shown in FIG. 420 (b)”. Is the same. Such an image is displayed after the operation (figure 421 (f) shown in FIG. 421) when the operation is accepted in the second effective period (FIG. 420 (b), (c), FIG. 421 (d), etc.). )) Is different from the image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the reception of the operation during the special effective period shown in FIG. 421 (d) is also the second effective period (FIG. 420 (b), (c) and FIG. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 421 (f)) that is executed based on the reception of the operation in 421 (d) or the like.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIGS. 420 and 421, the entire period from the start of the second valid period to the end is to function as a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. In any situation, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced.

  In the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 419 (e) or FIG. 421 (d), the integrated overhead image IG may be displayed as in the second effective period. However, the second effective period and the special period are used so that it is easy to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation have different effective periods (second effective period, special effective period). In the effective period, it is desirable that at least one of the display position and the size of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG be different. That is, in this case, at the end of the second effective period, the integrated overhead image IG of the aspect corresponding to the second effective period is not displayed, and the integrated overhead image IG of the aspect corresponding to the special effective period is newly added. Will be displayed. When displaying the integrated bird's-eye view image IG in the special effective period, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced” may be generated within the effective period, or a “period in which the display area of the gauge image is not ”May not be generated.

  The “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG” shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 is executable when the integrated overhead image Iga is displayed among the integrated overhead images IGa to IGd. It is desirable that the integrated overhead images IGb to IGd are not executed when the integrated overhead images IGb to IGd are displayed. That is, although the integrated bird's-eye view image IGa is displayed as a mode with the lowest degree of expectation, when the integrated bird's-eye view image Iga is displayed, “the movement of the gauge image GG shown in FIG. Since there is a possibility that the “display mode having a feature” appears, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 418 to FIG. 421, when the operation-related image (integrated bird's-eye view image etc.) is displayed in the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" Even if a situation in which the operation related image is to be hidden appears as a result of the elapse of the predetermined setting period (second effective period) without the operation being performed, the operation acceptance occurs and the display change (or the display change (or , A sound output after operation) can be generated. More specifically, even when the predetermined setting period (the second valid period) is ended, if the operation receiving unit (operation means) which has been prompted to operate by the integrated bird's-eye view image IG until then is operated It is possible to re-generate a predetermined setting period (second effective period), and operation acceptance is permitted in the re-generated predetermined setting period (second effective period) (see FIG. 419 (e), (f) and FIGS. 421 (d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined setting period (the second valid period) is ended without understanding "the display mode having a feature in the movement of the gauge image GG". Since the predetermined set period (second effective period) can be re-generated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

  On the other hand, in a predetermined setting period (first effective period) in which the operation-related image (such as the integrated bag image IG) is not displayed in the “display mode that characterizes the movement of the gauge image GG”, the operation reception is not performed. After the predetermined set period (first effective period) ends without being performed, even if the operation receiving portion (operation means) that has been urged by the integrated heel image IG is operated, the predetermined set period The (second effective period) is not regenerated (FIGS. 413 to 416).

  In addition, about the predetermined setting period (the second effective period) in which the operation related image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG etc.) is displayed in the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" It does not have to occur during the execution period. For example, it may be a period generated using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of the symbol variation, or a period during which the symbol variation is not executed, such as during the execution period of the big hit game or before the big hit game is started. May occur.

  Also, according to the example shown in FIGS. 413 to 421, a longer time is set in the second effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421) than in the first effective period (FIGS. 413 to 416). However, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar relationship in the first effective period and the second effective period (in the above example, integrated The fossil image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When displaying the integrated bird's-eye view image IG in a similar relationship, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button's eye-gage image is the same, so it is set as the set time (set time) It is expected that the length of the will appear to be the same. According to such a configuration, the first effective period in which the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" is not performed at first glance, and the "movement of the gauge image GG are characterized. It is difficult to recognize that the setting time is different in the second effective period in which the “display mode” is executed, but when a situation in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the time in the non-reduced situation It becomes possible to estimate that setting time is longer than it looks by adding.

  When the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is displayed in a similar relationship between the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416) and the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421), “gauge image It is desirable that the integrated overhead image IG smaller than the first effective period be displayed in the second effective period in which the “display manner characterized by the movement of GG” appears.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 413 to 421, during the first effective period (FIGS. 413 to 416), if no operation is accepted, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, “ 0 ”), but in the second effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421), if no operation is accepted, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. It is finished in the state. That is, if the time set for the effective period (set time) is long, the tension during the effective period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, “ By giving the possibility that the effective period can end even if it does not become “0”), it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described example, when the integrated bag image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the precursor effect is being performed (first effective period), the precursor When the integrated bag image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the precursor effect is performed but at least the precursor effect is performed (second effective In the period, the displayed image in the display target area of the gauge image GG is made different. In this case, aspects of the gauge image GG itself may be different from one another. “The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced while the precursor effect is performed but at least the precursor effect is performed” means that the gauge image is displayed over the entire effective period as illustrated in FIGS. 420 and 421. It is a meaning including the case where the display area of GG is not reduced.

  In this regard, according to the above-described example, in the first effective period (FIGS. 413 to 416), the specific image TG is displayed and the specific image TG is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without being operated. In the second valid period (FIGS. 418 to 421), the specific image TG is not displayed and the gauge image GG (display is displayed in the state where the set time elapses without any operation being performed. The target area was displayed as shown. According to such a configuration, in the first effective period, it becomes possible to make the effective period appear longer as long as the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the effective period. In the second effective period, By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the effective period, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension by making it appear that the effective period ends earlier than expected by the player. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, in the second effective period, at the end of the effective period, the display area of the gauge image GG (display target area) remains large (at least an area larger than half of the maximum value). It is desirable to do so.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a manner in which the display area is reduced every unit time in the first effective period (FIGS. 413 to 416). However, in the second effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421), an aspect in which the display area is not reduced is displayed. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the feeling of tension is suitably maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the button bird's-eye view image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to describe a state in which the operation receiving unit is displaced in any of the first valid period and the second valid period. Although the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the second valid period with the first mode. It is made to be displayed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the above-described example, although the button bird's-eye view image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG) When the button bird's-eye view image BMG is dynamically displayed among the integrated bird's-eye view images IG, the gauge image GG is in a decreasing state and the gauge image GG is not in a decreasing state. I want to be there. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG does not decrease, the fact that the operation acceptance is permitted by the dynamic display of the button MG image BMG is preferably made as the integrated overhead image IG. It can be suggested.

  Further, according to the above-described example, only when the normal button 摸 image BMGb is displayed as the normal button 摸 image BMGb, the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a feature. It is possible to display the “display mode provided”. In addition, when the normal button bag image BMGa is being displayed, not only the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG” may be displayed, but also the “gauge image (predetermined image) ) Display mode with characteristics of GG movement "is not displayed, and gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a mode (normal mode) that appears even when special button bag image BMGb is displayed. I was there. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the normal button bag image BMGa having a lower expectation than the special button bag image BMGb is displayed.

  Particularly, in the second effective period shown in FIG. 420 and FIG. 421, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the mode (color, etc.) in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Even one aspect is displayed. That is, in this case, although the remaining time indicating function and the expectation indicating function by the gauge image GG itself are lost and no information is obtained from the gauge image GG, the display target area of the gauge image GG In the integrated bird's-eye view image IG, the gauge image GG is displayed statically (in an area-invariant manner). According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second effective period is not an image indicating the remaining time or the degree of expectation, but functions only as a mere decoration image in the integrated overhead image IG. Therefore, the function can be greatly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed within the first effective period, and the game interest is improved by the diversity concerning the expression as the gauge image GG. That is expected.

  The occurrence conditions of the first effective period and the second effective period may be different from each other. For example, it may be generated at different timings within one symbol fluctuation period. Further, the first effective period means a period during which operation acceptance for the first after-operation display and the first after-operation sound output is permitted, and the second effective period is the first period. It means a period during which operation acceptance is permitted for the second after-operation display different from the after-operation display and the second after-operation sound output different from the first after-operation sound output, and within each of those periods The responses (display change, sound output) that appear when the operation is accepted are different from each other.

Also, for the integrated overhead image IG,
・ After the indication effect (specific display TH) is started, the display area of the gauge image GG is changed every unit time since the indication effect in the display state and the “integrated bag image IG” overlap. Reduced mode (FIGS. 413 to 416);
-The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even when the precursor effect is started to be displayed, at least the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated overhead view image IG" overlap with each other Aspect (FIGS. 417 to 421)
It was made to be. According to such a configuration, as a result of the precursor effect, whether or not the display area has already been reduced when the visibility of the gauge image GG is ensured and whether or not the precursor effect has been performed. When the entire gauge image GG can be visually recognized, the display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced, which provides the fun of production using the visibility of the gauge image GG. Will be able to

  In particular, when an aspect (FIGS. 417 to 421) is not adopted in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the entire gauge image GG is made visible regardless of whether or not the admonition effect is performed. As long as the display aspect in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite the validity period can appear further, the gaze on the gauge image GG can be further enhanced.

  Note that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the indication effect is not displayed or even when the indication effect is started and at least the indication effect in the display state and the “integrated bag image IG” overlap. In the case of adopting the mode that is not performed (FIGS. 417 to 421), the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced within the effective period appears (FIGS. 417 to 421), and the gauge image GG A display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the generation condition of the second effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421) in which a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears is the second condition, the display in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The generation condition of the specific effective period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

  In the above-described example, there may be a display in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced according to the passage of time and a case in which the display is not performed during the period in which the button 摸 image BMG is displayed. did. When the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed within the effective period and may be hidden. Nevertheless, for the display target area of the gauge image GG, the display area is not reduced with time as well as the first effective period in which the display is performed to reduce the display area with time. Since it is displayed even during the effective period, it is expected that it is preferably suggested that the reception of the performance is allowed.

  In the above-described example, the time (set time) set for the effective period (second effective period) has elapsed without displaying by the gauge image GG to reduce the display area as time elapses. When the validity period ends, the automatic reception function is not activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is sometimes activated, the tension due to the fact that the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image GG may be completely lost. ), It is desirable not to activate the automatic reception function (in any production mode). On the other hand, regarding the above-described first effective period, it is desirable that the automatic reception function is enabled (in any production mode).

  In addition, when the button 摸 image BMG and the gauge GG are displayed separately and a display method that pursues only the gauge function (remaining time suggesting function) is adopted, a method that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is adopted. In this case, although the gauge image GG is displayed, a feeling of discomfort may be felt for the remaining time suggesting function not to be exhibited. In this respect, in the above-described configuration, the button overhead view image BMG is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, a pattern can be seen on the back side, or the gauge image GG itself can be made to have a plurality of colors. Since this itself has decorativeness in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG, it is expected that it is expected to suppress a sense of discomfort when a situation in which the remaining time suggestive function is not exhibited by the gauge image GG appears become.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, prior to the occurrence of the first effective period, as the “button 摸 image BMG”, a mode with low expectation (normal button 摸 image BMGa) and a mode with high expectation As for the effect of which (special button 摸 image BMGb) appears, and the “periphery decoration image SSG”, a mode with a low degree of expectation (normal peripheral decoration image SSGa) and a mode with a high degree of expectation (special peripheral decoration image) It was made to make staged appearances of which one appears with SSGb). However, such effects can also be made to appear by the method described below.

  FIG. 422 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the effect that suggests the degree of expectation concerning the integrated haze image IG step by step.

  First, FIG. 422 (a) shows the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is in the state of holding number 0 in the normal gaming state The rendering situation being performed on the display device 1600 is shown.

  In FIG. 422 (b), during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The effect state in which the button bag image BMG is displayed is shown.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b), the button bag image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the “peripheral decoration image SGG”, but remains in a single display state. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (b), the button bag image BMG is displayed in either a mode with a low degree of expectation (normal button bag image BMGa) or a mode with a high degree of expectation (special button bag image BMGb). In the figure, a case is shown in which an aspect with a high degree of expectation (special button 中 で image BMGb) appears. Which of these modes is displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  FIG. 422 (c) shows an effect situation in which the special button bird's-eye view image BMGb shown in FIG. 422 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  However, the progress of the presentation from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the button 摸 image BMG (the normal button 摸 image BMGa, the special button 摸 image BMGb) shown in FIG. 422 (b) is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG (the first effective period). ) Occurs, it is effective after the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. Does the period (first effective period) occur, or the effective period (first effective period) occurs without producing the integrated 摸 image IG without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c)? You will be able to offer something interesting about what to do. When the effective period (first effective period) occurs without becoming the integrated bag image IG, the gauge image GG is displayed as an image different from the button bag image BMG. In the divided area of), the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. In this case, it is desirable not to display the specific image TG.

  In addition, it is expected that the button bird's-eye view image BMG is stopped at the big hit symbol than when the effective period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG when the effective period occurs after being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable that the degree (rate) be high. Moreover, when the special button bird's-eye view image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b), FIG. 422 (c) is displayed more than the case where the normal button bird's-eye view picture BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the rate of progress to the situation shown in FIG. The percentages may include “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (c), the button bag image BMG includes a peripheral decoration image with a low expectation (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a peripheral decoration image with a high expectation (special peripheral decoration). The image BMGb) is provided with a presentation as to whether it is integrated with the image BMGb), and the figure shows a case where a highly expected aspect (special peripheral decorative image BMGb) appears. . Which of these modes is displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  It should be noted that the peripheral decorative image BMG (normal peripheral decorative image BMGa, special peripheral decorative image BMGb) according to this example is different in image type from those shown in the above-described examples (FIGS. 410 to 422) for convenience of explanation. Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decorative image BMG according to this example has a box shape for storing the button bag image BMG, and the normal peripheral decorative image BMGa is provided with a heart pattern (not shown). On the other hand, in the special peripheral decorative image BMGb, a check pattern is applied. Then, “regions from the upper right to the lower left” of the regions provided with the patterns are displayed as display target regions of the gauge image GG.

  The image shown in FIG. 422 (c) functions as an image (integrated bird's-eye image) IGd in which the special button bird's-eye view image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated, and as a meaning on presentation, This is the same as 410 (d).

  FIG. 422 (d) shows an effect situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated bag image IGd shown in FIG. 422 (c).

  However, the progress of the presentation from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the effective period (first effective period) while the first additional decoration HS1 is not added to the integrated overhead image IG (integrated overhead image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 422 (c). Is prepared from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d), and is effective after the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Whether a period (the first validity period) occurs, or the presentation progress to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) is not made, and the first additional decoration HS1 is not added, and the validity period (first validity period) Will be able to provide an enjoyment of what happens.

  In addition, when a valid period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated haze image IG, the first additional decoration HS1 is not added to the integrated haze image IG and a valid period occurs. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) to stop at the big hit symbol is higher than the case. When the special button bird's-eye view image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) or when the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c), FIG. 422 (b) Progress to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) than when the normal button bird's-eye image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 42 or in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) It is desirable that the ratio of the first additional decoration HS1 to be added is increased. The percentages may include “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (d), the first additional decoration HS1 provides a stunning performance as to whether it is added in a mode with a low expectation or a mode with a high expectation. You may do it.

  FIG. 422 (e) shows the effect status in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated overhead image IGd shown in FIG. 422 (d).

  However, the presentation may not necessarily be progressed from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e). For example, the effective period (first effective period) while the second additional decoration HS2 is not added to the integrated overhead image IG (integrated overhead image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 422 (d). Is prepared from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e), and is effective after the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Whether a period (the first validity period) occurs, or the presentation progress to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) is not made, and the second additional decoration HS2 is not added, and the validity period (the first validity period) Will be able to provide fun about what happens.

  In addition, when a valid period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated haze image IG, an effective period occurs without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated haze image IG. It is desirable that the expectation (percentage) to be stopped in the jackpot pattern be higher than in the case. Further, when the special button bag image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) or when the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c), FIG. 422 (b). In the situation shown in FIG. 422, the normal button bag image BMGa is displayed, or in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c), the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the rate at which the second additional decoration HS2 is added be high. The percentages may include “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (e), the second additional decoration HS2 provides staging that indicates whether it is added in a mode with a low expectation or a mode with a high expectation. You may make it do.

  FIG. 422 (f) shows an effect situation in which a valid period (first valid period) is generated in a state where the integrated overhead image IGd shown in FIG. 422 (e) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 422 (f), when a valid period (first valid period) occurs, an operation instruction image such as "press" or "down arrow" is displayed. In addition to this, the above-described specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and the operation acceptance is also permitted by confirming the specific image TG. You will be able to recognize that. Note that the specific image TG according to this example is different in image type from the above-described examples (FIGS. 410 to 422) for convenience of explanation, but basically the same. It is displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced in accordance with the “end portion of the gauge image GG” that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG decreases. Will be.

  Note that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 411 (a method that is not displayed at the start of the effective period and is gradually displayed as time elapses). It may be displayed by the same method as the example shown in FIG. 412 (the method in which the whole is displayed when the valid period is started).

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low-expectation mode (snail character) or a high-expectation mode (frog character), which is not shown. In the figure, the case where the aspect with a high degree of expectation appears is illustrated. The specific image TG is displayed with a higher expectation when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) than when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c). The ratio is high, and the situation where the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) is higher than the case where the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d). It is desirable to increase the ratio at which the specific image TG is displayed. The percentages may include “100%” or “0%”.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a presentation as to how much the operation-related image can be advanced to a mode with high expectation before the effective period occurs. For this reason, it is possible to improve the game entertainment related to the operation in a state where the effective period has not yet occurred. In addition, while expecting the degree of expectation by the operation-related images (button bag image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) until the effective period occurs, after the effective period has occurred, Since the degree of expectation is further suggested by another image (specific image TG), it is possible to favorably improve the interest over a period from before the occurrence of the effective period to after it occurs. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 422, the timing of whether or not the rendering progressed from FIG. 422 (b) to FIG. 422 (c), and the rendering progressed from FIG. 422 (c) to FIG. 422 (d) Operation-related images (such as a button bird's-eye image, a peripheral decoration image, an additional decoration, etc.) at the timing of whether or not the rendering is progressed from FIG. 422 (d) to FIG. 422 (e). It may be made to hide once. That is, in this case, when the operation-related image (button bird's-eye image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) is displayed again, to provide an interest of whether the rendering progressed or the effective period has occurred. Will be able to

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 422, the button bird's-eye view image, the peripheral decoration image, the additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the effective period at the stage before the effective period occurs. You may make it display by (flashing, translucent etc.).

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 422, it is desirable that the time required to suggest the degree of expectation step by step with the operation-related image before the effective period occurs is longer than the set time for the effective period. .

  By the way, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to this embodiment, a “pattern portion 5012” that can be moved (moved up and down) relative to the sheath portion 5020 and a “pattern that can be moved (moved up and down) relative to the handle portion 5012”. It has been described above that two operation receiving portions for the button 5014 "are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when generating an effective period (operation reception effect) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the effective period (operation In the reception effect), both the “pattern bag image TMG” with the handle part 5012 and the “button bag image BMG” with the handle button 5014 displayed are displayed. In an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle part 5012, operation reception to the pattern button 5014 is not allowed, and an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014. ), The operation reception for the handle 5012 is not allowed.

  In such a configuration, if a valid period (operation acceptance effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 occurs, is operation acceptance for the handle 5012 permitted or operation acceptance for the handle button 5014 Can be made difficult to recognize. That is, when the operation is accepted in the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the operation is performed after the operation is received in the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 The rate at which a mode that suggests that the big hit symbol is stopped as a display (or a mode that indicates that the big hit symbol is stopped as a sound output after operation) is high. The ratio may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, while it is difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance to the handle 5012 is permitted or the operation acceptance to the handle button 5014 is permitted, the operation acceptance to the handle 5012 is permitted. When the player comes to recognize the character, the player operates the handle 5012 in a sense of exhilaration, which makes it possible to significantly improve the game interest.

  In order to obtain such an operational effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation reception on the handle 5012 is permitted or the operation reception on the handle button 5014 is permitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effective period (operation reception effect effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, to emit light from the handle 5012 (the light emitting unit) is of course The light emitting portion of the handle button 5014 on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given is made to emit light. That is, in this case, in the effective period (operation reception effect) in which both the “pattern cocoon image TMG” wandering the pattern portion 5012 and the “button heel image BMG” wandering the pattern button 5014 are displayed, the pattern portion 5012. Even when the handle button 5014 is directly viewed, it is difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given. In such a situation, the player recognizes that the operation reception for the handle 5012 is permitted, and thus the player performs an operation on the handle 5012 in a sense of uplifting. Can be significantly improved.

  That is, in the effective period (operation reception effect effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the handle only by directly viewing the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 or slightly seeing the effect display device 1600 It is difficult to recognize whether an operation opportunity is given to 5012 or whether an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. From the person who has played the pachinko 1 for the first time (beginner), the person who is not familiar with complicated rendering specifications (such as an elderly person), etc., an operation opportunity is given to any of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 It can be said that it is difficult to recognize

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after generating “a period of time in which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given” as described above, It is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given within its effective period, but it can be recognized if it takes a certain amount of time Thus, the button bag image BMG and the pattern bag image TMG are respectively displayed.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, a “shoe candy image TMG” that looks like the handle 5012 and a handle button 5014. Both the “button 摸 image BMG” with the 摸 displayed are displayed respectively, but among the 摸 images, the “pattern 摸 image TMG” on the side where the operation reception is allowed is dynamically displayed. The “button 摸 image BMG” on the side where the “.” Is not allowed is not dynamically displayed. Here, “dynamic display” refers to, for example, a display depicting the situation in which the operation receiving part is displaced in the movable range (in the case of the handle 5012, movement (vertical movement) with respect to the sheath 5020) This corresponds to the displayed display, and in the case of the handle button 5014, it corresponds to the display depicting the behavior (up and down movement) with respect to the handle 5012).

  Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given within the effective period. However, when a predetermined time sufficient for recognition as a dynamic display (moving image) has passed, the behavior at the time of operation appears as a dynamic display in the pattern 摸 image TMG, but the behavior at the time of operation in the button 摸 image BMG Becomes aware that it does not appear as a dynamic display, it is possible to recognize which of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given. Then, when the player recognizes that the operation receiving unit (the handle 5012) having the higher degree of expectation is permitted to receive the operation, the player performs the operation on the handle 5012 in an uplifting feeling. This makes it possible to significantly improve the game interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “pattern bag image TMG” and the “button bag image BMG” are displayed in an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern unit 5012. In addition, by displaying these spear images as “integrated spear images” that are integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates their peripheral edges, an improvement in game entertainment when an operation reception effect (valid period) occurs In order to The functions and modifications as such an integrated haze image are basically as described above. For example, the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 410 to 422 may be displayed so as to further display (include) the “pattern bag image TMG” in addition to the “button bag image BMG”. Good.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “button bag image BMG” and the “pattern bag image TMG” are displayed as a “composite bag image HMG” in which at least a part of the sword decorative body 5001 is masked. The "composite bird's-eye view image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated bird's-eye view image IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery.

  FIG. 423 is a diagram illustrating an example of an “integrated bag image IG” displayed when an operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for the handle 5012.

  As shown in FIG. 423 (a) to (d), the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment generates a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 In the case of the effect display device 1600, the “pattern eyelid image TMG” in which the handle portion 5012 is turned into a “composite eyelid image HMG” integrated with the “button eyelid image BMG” The image HMG is displayed as integrated overhead images IGe to IGh integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery thereof. In the example shown in FIGS. 423 (a) to (d), “pattern drop image TMG”, “button drop image BMG” and “peripheral decoration image SSG” are not prepared individually as image data, and they are It is displayed as one integrated image data (integrated overhead images IGe to IGh). Further, when the integrated bird's-eye view images IGe to IGh are displayed, operation prompting displays such as “push in” and “lower left arrow” are also displayed, but are omitted here for convenience of description.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “relatively as a post-operation effect to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. A plurality of production modes including “first production mode with low expectation” and “second production mode with relatively high expectation” are prepared, and these productions are based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination). It is intended to carry out any of the aspects. In this respect, in the example shown in FIGS. 423 (a) to (d),
-The mode (integrated 摸 image IGf) shown in Fig. 423 (b) rather than the case (integrated 摸 image IGe) shown in Fig. 423 (a) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period) When the appears, the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” as the effect after the operation is higher,
-The mode (integrated 摸 image IGg) shown in Fig. 423 (c) rather than the case (integrated 摸 image IGf) shown in Fig. 423 (b) appears in a specific operation reception effect (effective period). When the appears, the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” as the effect after the operation is higher,
-The mode (integrated 摸 image IGh) shown in Fig. 423 (d) rather than the case (integrated 摸 image IGg) shown in Fig. 423 (c) appears in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). Based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination) so that the appearance ratio of “second effect mode with relatively high expectation” becomes higher as a post-operation effect when One of the colored eye images IGe to IGf is displayed.

  All of the four aspects shown as the integrated soot images IGe to IGh are not necessarily prepared. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the effective period simply by preparing at least two aspects. Further, modes different from the above four modes (integrated overhead view images IGe to IGh) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared modes may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
-Operation means (sword decorative body 5001) having an operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) that is displaced by an operation by a player, and a peripheral decorative portion (sheath portion 5020 or the like) provided on the periphery thereof;
-Integration to display the cocoon image (pattern cocoon image TMG) with the operation receiving unit (pattern unit 5012) as integrated cocoon images IGe to IGh integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the cocoon image An overhead image display means,
An operation reception executing means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) when the player performs an operation while the integrated bag image is displayed; The integrated bird's-eye view image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated bird's-eye view images IGe to IGh).

  The details of the “integrated bird's-eye view image” shown in FIGS. 423 (a) to (d) will be described separately for these aspects (integrated bird's-eye view images IGe to IGh).

  First, the “integrated cocoon image IGe” shown in FIG. 423 (a) has a pattern cocoon image TMGe, a button cocoon image BMGe (composite cocoon image HMGe), and a normal rim decoration image SSGe that decorates the rim. Is configured. However, in the “integrated cocoon image IGe”, the pattern cocoon image TMGe and the button cocoon image BMGe (composite cocoon image HMGe) are “an image in which the pattern portion 5012 that is an object to which an operation opportunity is given” and “ Whereas an image with a pattern button 5014 that is not subject to an operation opportunity is displayed as an integrated image, the normal peripheral decorative image SSGe is a subject to which an operation opportunity is given. The peripheral decorative part (sheath part 5020 etc.) actually provided at the periphery of the handle part 5012 is not curled.In the normal peripheral decorative image SSGe according to this example, a part of the peripheral decorative part (sheath part 5020 etc.) is scrubbed. Many portions of the image SSGe are used as virtual decorations on the display effect on the effect display device 1600 as a pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe). It has become a thing to decorate the edge.

  In the “integrated cocoon image IGe” shown in FIG. 423 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a treasure box in which several treasures including the handle cocoon image TMGe (composite cocoon image HMGe) are stored. As described above, these “treasure” and “treasure box” have shapes different from those of the existing peripheral decoration and are expressed as different decorations.

  In this regard, in the “integrated bird's-eye view image IGe” according to this embodiment, a display target region of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area as time passes. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including “0”) from a predetermined maximum display area when no operation is accepted within the effective period. It is displayed so as to decrease as time elapses until the display area is reached.

  In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 423 (a), a division image KG is provided which divides the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from the other area in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. . An area surrounded by the partition image KG functions as a “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as a section image KG, and “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is displayed in the necklace. However, the divided image KG may not necessarily be displayed, and a predetermined range in the peripheral decoration image SSGa may generally be set as the “display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 423 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which “integrated bird's-eye view image IGe” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, the handle to be operated In the first mode, the light 5012 is made to emit light (e.g., light emission with the same color (e.g., "blue" in FIG. 423 (a) as the pattern eye image TMGe in the "integrated eye image IGe")). In addition, the pattern button 5014 which is not the operation target also emits light in the fifth mode (for example, "blue" in the same color as the button down image BMGe in the "integral down view image IGe" (Fig. 423 (a) It is made to emit light). Although the same color is used here, the first aspect and the fifth aspect may be different colors.

  In contrast, the “integrated bag image IGf” shown in FIG. 423 (b) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGe” described above, and the handle bag image TMGf and the button bag image BMGf ( The composite haze image HMGf) and the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated bag image IGf”, there is no shape change in the pattern bag image TMGf and the button bag image BMGf (composite bag image HMGf). However, for the peripheral decoration image SSG, the above-mentioned “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” and the treasure box itself are displayed as the same thing, but the amount and type of the treasure that is contained in the “first special peripheral edge” has increased. It is displayed as “decorative image SSGf”. The amount and type of treasure are increasing, and the necklace, the treasure sword, and the cup are also displayed in the case of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” and are common.

  Further, in the “integrated bag image IGf” shown in FIG. 423 (b), the “necklace (partition image KG)” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is accompanied with the increase in the amount and type of treasure. The shape is changed so that the display mode of the gauge image GG is made different. According to such a configuration, the shape as the display target region of the gauge image GG is different (not similar) depending on which of the plurality of modes with different expectation levels is displayed. It can be made difficult to recognize how much remaining time is remaining while being reduced, and it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 423 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated bag image IGf” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated. The portion 5012 emits light in the second mode (for example, emits light in the same color as the handle cocoon image TMGf in the “integrated cocoon image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 423 (b)). In addition, the pattern button 5014 that is not an operation target also emits light in the sixth mode (for example, “green” in FIG. 423 (b), for example, the same color as the button 摸 image BMGf in the “integrated 摸 image IGf”). It is made to emit light). Here, the same color is used, but the second mode and the sixth mode may be different colors.

  On the other hand, the “integrated bag image IGg” shown in FIG. 423 (c) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGe” described above, and the handle bag image TMGg and the button bag image BMGg (composite bag image IMG). The image HMGg) and an edge decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the image HMGg) are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated bag image IGg”, there is no shape change in the pattern bag image TMGg and the button bag image BMGg (composite bag image HMGg). However, for the peripheral decoration image SSG, the treasure itself is displayed as the same as the above-described “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe”, but the (second) special peripheral decoration is different in the treasure box (the shape) for storing them. It is displayed as “Image SSGg”.

However, the “second special peripheral decoration image SSGg” is also the same as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” or the “first special peripheral decoration image SSGf” in the following points.
“A virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600 is not observed, because the peripheral decorative part (such as the sheath part 5020) actually provided at the periphery of the handle part 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not hesitated. As a decoration, the peripheral edge of the handle bag image TMGg (composite bag image HMGg) is decorated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 423 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which “unified overhead image IGg” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated The portion 5012 emits light in the third mode (in FIG. 42C, for example, it emits light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the pattern eyelid image TMGg in the “integrated eyelid image IGg”). In addition, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target emits light in the seventh mode (for example, "red" in the same color as the button down image BMGg in the "integral down view image IGg" (FIG. 423 (c) It is made to emit light). Although the same color is used here, the third mode and the seventh mode may be different colors.

  On the other hand, the “integrated bag image IGh” shown in FIG. 423 (d) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGe” described above, and the handle bag image TMGh and the button bag image BMGh (composite bag image IMG). The image HMGh) and an edge decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the image HMGh) are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated bag image IGh”, there is no shape change in the pattern bag image TMGh and the button bag image BMGh (composite bag image HMGh). However, with respect to the peripheral decoration image SSG, compared with the above-mentioned “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe”, the amount and type of treasure are increased, and the treasure box (the shape) for storing them is also different from “third”. It is displayed as "special peripheral decoration image SSGh".

  In addition, in the “integrated bag image IGh” according to this example, the shape of the “necklace (partition image KG)” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes with the increase in the amount and type of treasure. Thus, the display mode of the gauge image GG is made different.

However, the “third special peripheral decorative image SSGh” is the same as the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGe” in the following points.
“The virtual decorative portion (such as the sheath portion 5020) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle 5012 to which the operation opportunity is to be provided is not virtual, on display effect in the effect display device 1600 As a decoration, the peripheral edge of the handle bag image TMGh (composite bag image HMGh) is decorated.

  That is, in the “integrated bag image IGh (FIG. 423 (d))”, a part (the treasure) in the “first special peripheral decorative image SSGg” used in the “integrated bag image IGf (FIG. 423 (b))”. ) And a part (treasure box) in the “second special peripheral decorative image SSGg” used in the “integrated bag image IGg (FIG. 423 (c))”. Yes.

  On the other hand, since the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the “integrated bag image IGe (FIG. 423 (a))” appears and “integrated” It can be suggested that it is a specific operation reception effect (valid period) for the same post-operation effect when the “haze image IGh (FIG. 423 (d))” appears.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 423 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which “integrated bag image IGh” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated. The portion 5012 emits light in the fourth mode (for example, emits light in the same color as the pattern cocoon image TMGh in the “integrated cocoon image IGh” (eg, “rainbow color” in FIG. 423 (d)). . Further, the pattern button 5014 that is not an operation target also emits light in the eighth mode (for example, the same color as the button 摸 image BMGh in the “integrated 摸 image IGh” (in FIG. 423 (d), for example, “rainbow color”). It is made to emit light). Although the color is the same here, the fourth aspect and the eighth aspect may be different colors.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 423 (a) to (d), the pattern bag image TMG and the button bag image BMG (composite bag image HMG) are displayed in the same shape regardless of the mode. However, as the amount or type of treasure changes (Fig. 423 (b), (d)), or as the treasure box changes (Fig. 423 (c), (d)) The shapes of TMG and button bag image BMG (composite bag image HMG) may be made different.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 423 (a) to (d), in each aspect, the pattern / eyelid image TMG and the button's eyelid image BMG (composite bird's-eye view image HMG) are displayed in different colors. May be displayed.

  When the button bag image BMG with the handle button 5014 displayed is displayed, in the example shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the edge decoration image SSGa, b is integrated with the button bag image BMG and displayed. I tried to do it. In this regard, also in the example shown in FIGS. 423 (a) to (d), the button bag image BMG with the handle button 5014 displayed is displayed, but the edge decoration image SSGa, b is not displayed. . That is, since the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration on the display effect in the effect display device 1600, the case shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d) and 423 ( In the case of the example shown to a)-(d), it is possible to be made to be displayed as a completely different image, and, thereby, it becomes possible to provide various stage effects.

  Besides, in the configuration according to the example shown in FIGS. 423 (a) to (d), the parts having the same functions as the examples shown in It goes without saying that the same effects as the various effects described above with reference to d) are achieved. Moreover, in the example shown to FIG. 423 (a)-(d), these can be suitably employ | adopted about the modification and effect example which were mentioned above with respect to the example shown to FIG. 410 (a)-(d).

  Further, also in the effective period in which the integrated overhead image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 423, the same as in the effective period in which the integrated overhead image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. The “specific image TG” is displayed.

  However, in the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated bag image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 410, the type of the effective period (the type as the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, or the indication effect) Depending on the type, the “specific image TG” may be displayed and the “specific image TG” may not be displayed. In the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the IG is displayed, the “specific image TG” is displayed regardless of the type of the effective period (the type as the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, the type of the indication effect, etc.). It is always displayed.

  That is, in the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated bag image IG is displayed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 423, the “state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” illustrated in FIGS. It does not include the effective period to be generated as an effect. Therefore, it is desirable to display the “specific image TG” in order to clarify how much remaining time remains. When the “specific image TG” is displayed, the gauge image GG is not necessarily displayed.

  The "specific image TG" when the integrated overhead image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 423 may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411 or displayed in the mode shown in FIG. You may do it.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 423, an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 in a state where the handle 5012 is moved from the original position to the specific position, whereby movement from the specific position to the original position The operation (sword operation) is allowed to be permitted. However, when an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the handle 5012 may not necessarily be moved from the original position to the specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is in the original position, thereby allowing an operation of moving from the original position to a specific position (surgery operation).

  FIG. 424 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect (operation reception effect) when the integrated bag image IG is displayed in the manner illustrated in FIG. 423.

  FIG. 424 (a) shows the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, with the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being 0. In the effect situation being performed in, the effect situation in which the display concerning the indication effect (specific display TH3) is started in the effect display device 1600 is shown. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. When the effect pattern is the same, the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 413 to FIG. 416 and the effective period shown in FIG. 424 are generated at the first timing and the second timing in the effect pattern, respectively. Alternatively, only one of the effective periods (operation acceptance effect) may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination.

  The precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is also executed across the generation timing of the effective period for which operation acceptance is permitted, and at this time, operation acceptance to the handle 5012 ( The production reception) is not permitted and the valid period has not occurred.

  In this respect, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by the display (the dynamic display by the lid portion of the treasure box) of the integrated overhead image IG itself. At the time point shown in FIG. 414 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decorative image SSG of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is displayed as the “closed mode”, and thereby the pattern / eyelid image TMGe (composite bird's-eye view image HMGe) Are not displayed as an image (by the specific indication TH3 which is the lid portion of the treasure box), and are in a non-visible state (or in a non-visible state).

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 424 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decorative image SSG of the integrated bag image IG has a relatively low expectation shown in FIGS. 423 (a) and (b). And the relatively high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 423 (c) and 423 (d), which provides the stage effect, and in the figure, it is expected that The case displayed in the lower mode (FIGS. 423 (a), (b)) is illustrated. Which of these modes is displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). The explanation of the case where the treasure chest is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation will be omitted, but the progress of the subsequent production in the same manner as the case where the treasure chest is displayed in a manner with a low expectation described below. Will be done.

  FIG. 424 (b) shows the time when the indication effect shown in FIG. 424 (a) progresses (the treasure box lid portion (specific display TH3) is opened and the region displayed overlapping “treasure” is time). In the case of “Treasure”, the portion that does not overlap the treasure box cover (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility. Is shown.

  That is, when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 424 (a) progresses, a specific timing comes and a valid period for the handle 5012 occurs. When the effective period occurs, as shown in FIG. 424 (b), the handle 5012 to be operated starts moving to the “specific position” by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the “pattern part 5012” that is the operation target and the “pattern button 5014” that is not the operation target start light emission in a predetermined mode (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

  However, at the time when such light emission is started, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 424 (a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 424 (b), in the integrated bag image IG, the lid portion (specific display TH3) of the treasure box is “opened” from “closed (full closed)”. It is in the state of describing the change to (full open). Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 424 (b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is “a precursor effect (specific display TH3) drawn (represented) to be on the front side thereof”. The display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already been started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progressed). ) Is in the situation. In this example, the entire specific image TG overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display TH), and is not displayed as an image.

  According to such a configuration, a precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed in a manner straddling the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the effective period is generated is In addition, at least a part of the integrated haze image IG cannot be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize by the precursor effect (specific display TH3). That is, in this case, the entire image of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG (patterned bird's eye image TMG and button bird's-eye view image BMG (composite bird's-eye view image HMG), peripheral decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually exposed within the effective period. Since it comes to follow, the expectation (embodiment of the peripheral decoration image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated heel image IG and the interestingness about which the operation target (the aspect of the pattern heel image) is, It becomes possible to maintain it for a predetermined time after the effective period starts.

  That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 424 (b), the "treasure" which is the contents of the treasure box is displayed in an aspect (the aspect having a relatively low degree of expectation shown in FIG. 423 (a)). And at least the case where the amount and type are displayed in a mode (a mode with a relatively high expectation shown in FIG. 423 (b)). It provides an effect on what is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 424 (b), it is possible to recognize that “treasure”, which is the contents of the treasure box, is displayed in a mode with a large amount and type (a mode with high expectation). ing. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 424 (b), since the “specific image TG” is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize, the type (“specific image TG”) is originally displayed when the effective period starts ( It is made difficult to distinguish whether it is a type (see FIG. 411) which does not display “specific image TG” at the time when the valid period starts or does not appear at the time when the valid period starts (see FIG. 412) There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 412, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopting it, it can be said that executing the adverbial effect in the manner described above is particularly effective in suppressing the decline in game entertainment. Note that the explanation of the case where “Treasure” is displayed in a mode with low expectation will be omitted, but this is the same as the case where “Treasure” is displayed in a mode with high expectation described below. Subsequent production progress will be made.

  FIG. 424 (c) overlaps with the integrated overhead image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) as a result of the precursor effect (the display according to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 424 (b) being further developed. This shows a situation in which the portion (portion depicted so that the specific display TH3 is on the front side of “treasure”) has disappeared. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, and the display is maintained while the integrated haze image IG is displayed, which is a time point before the effective period starts. Thus, it is possible to provide one effect over the period from the end of the game to the end of the game, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  As shown in FIG. 424 (c), when the entire treasure of integrated bird's-eye view image IG (or the display target area of gauge image GG) is in a good visual recognition state, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already been started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has already appeared). That is, in this case, since "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", a display area larger than the actual display area applied to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is obtained. It is possible to make it appear as if the display area has not been reduced so much. Thereby, when the omen effect (effect of opening the lid portion which is the specific display TH) is finished, the decrease in the game interest due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased is suppressed. Can be expected. The “specific image TG” according to this example is displayed as an image representing “light” displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 424 (c), the pattern cocoon image TMG of the integrated cocoon image IG is dynamically displayed (display depicting how the pattern portion 5012 is displaced within the movable range). However, as described above, the button bag image BMG is not dynamically displayed (display depicting how the pattern button 5014 is displaced within the movable range).

  In FIG. 424 (d), the operation acceptance is not performed until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes the minimum value (here, “0”), and the effective period (set time) ends (or An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 immediately before the end of the effective period is shown. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 424 (d) appears, it is assumed that the operation reception is barely permitted in time, but the operation reception is already in the state where the screen appears. It may be allowed to become unacceptable. However, in this case, the pattern portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014 are in a state where each light emission has already ended. In this case, images such as “push in!” And “lower left arrow” may be hidden. In any case, at least a part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even when the valid period ends.

  When the effective period ends, the light emission of the handle 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are both ended. In this regard, during the effective period in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed even if no operation is performed by the player within the period. Is performed (see FIG. 424 (e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (such as FIG. 413 (e), (f)) that functions within the first valid period described above.

  According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which an operation by the player is performed immediately after the validity period ends (operation reception is no longer allowed), the post-operation display Since the "specific image TG" is displayed immediately before or after the operation sound output is performed, the display or operation is performed after the operation by the player is made in time and the operation acceptance associated with this is generated. It will be possible to make it appear as if the after sound output has been started. In particular, when a precursor effect (pre-display) is performed in such a mode, a gauge image (predetermined when the entire overhead view of the integrated overhead image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) The display area of the image GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already been started. That is, in this case, it is considered that there is a high possibility that a situation where the player's operation is not in time will occur. It can be said that outputting the sound after the operation or the operation is effective in suppressing the decrease in the entertainment interest. Further, in this example, the pattern button 5014 on the side where the operation opportunity is not given is put into a light emitting state in accordance with the occurrence of the effective period, and the operation opportunity is given to either the pattern part 5012 or the pattern button 5014. It makes it difficult to recognize the In other words, in this case, there is a high possibility that the operation within the effective period will not be in time, so it can be said that it is effective in suppressing a decrease in the gaming fun when the operation is not in time.

  As for the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 424, the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411 and the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. It may be applied to any of the above.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 424, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated overhead image IG are displayed in different layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is displayed in a priority manner and appears in FIG. We decided to realize the presentation progress in the form. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be realized by storing progression of effects in the aspect shown in FIG. 424 as one moving image data and reproducing the moving image data.

  In the example shown in FIG. 424, the aspect (integrated bird's-eye view image IGa) shown in FIG. 423 (b) is made to appear as the integrated bird's-eye view image IG. However, as described above, the integrated overhead image IG may be made to appear in any of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIG. 423 (a) to (d)) based on the result of the big hit determination (representation determination) .

  According to the example shown in FIG. 424, first, when the treasure box which is a part of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is displayed prior to the occurrence of the effective period, the treasure box “highly expected mode” The first performance is provided as to whether the display is “a mode with low expectation”. In addition, after the effective period has occurred, in the description that the treasure chest of the integrated bird's-eye view IG is gradually opened, "treasure" is either the "high-expected mode" or the "low-expected mode". The second presentation performance about whether or not to be displayed is provided. That is, in this case, since the degree of expectation is suggested by the staged effects (first effect and second effect) performed over the generation of the effective period, the effective period occurs. It is expected that the game entertainment interest in the period from before to after occurrence will be suitably improved.

  In addition, since such step-by-step rendering is realized by the depiction of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG itself (description over the lid portion of the treasure box), the other image (the specific display TH shown in FIG. 413) As a result of being disturbed, etc.), stress is less felt than in the case where the visibility of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is taken away, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest. However, also in the example shown in FIG. 424, the aura effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 415, the aura effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG.

  In FIG. 424, when the first rendering condition is satisfied, the bird's-eye view of the operation object is integrated with the “peripheral decorative image (first decorative image)” including the display target area of the gauge image. In the case of displaying as a bird's-eye view image, an example (first operation acceptance allowable period) according to the development of the effect has been described. On the other hand, in FIG. 425 and FIG. 426, when the second rendering condition is satisfied, the bird's eye view of the operation object is displayed as “the peripheral decoration image (first decoration image) including the display target area of the gauge image In the case where the image is displayed as “not integrated with the image”, an example (second operation acceptance allowable period) relating to the progress of the effect will be described. The example shown in FIG. 424 and the example shown in FIGS. 425 and 426 do not necessarily give an operation opportunity to the same operation object, but give an operation opportunity to the same operation object. If it is, it is desirable that the bird's-eye view image itself, which looks over the operation target, is displayed as the same image (including similar figures).

  Here, as a mode in which a cocoon image showing the operation target is displayed as “an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image”, for example, A mode that is displayed as a single image that is not integrated with the decoration image in the first place, or a habit image that looks like an operation target is displayed as an image that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image The aspect etc. which are made can be employ | adopted. According to such a configuration, when a valid period occurs, when a gutter image that looks at the operation object is displayed as a single image, a gauge image is displayed in the image, and when the operation object is frustrated When the heel image is displayed as one image, the gauge image may not be displayed in the image, so that the tension during the effective period can be suitably maintained.

  The example described below shows a display example in which the bird's-eye view image looking over the operation target is displayed as "an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image not including the display target area of the gauge image".

  First, in FIG. 425 (a), in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed in a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation performed by the apparatus 1600, the production situation in which the display related to the precursor production (specific display TH3) is started in the production display apparatus 1600 is shown. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIG. 413 to FIG. 416 and FIG. 424. If they are the same effect pattern, they may be generated at the first timing and the second timing in one effect pattern, respectively, and any of the valid periods (operation reception effects) based on the result of the effect determination. Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern.

  In this example, the situation shown in FIGS. 425 (a) and (b) is basically the same as the situation shown in FIGS. 424 (a) and (b), and the description of the same configuration is omitted. However, the “treasure (second decoration image)” that is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 425 (b) is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 424 (b). The content is different from the existing "treasure (the first decoration image)". In other words, as described above, the “an image of the operation object that is deceived” is displayed as “an image that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image”. With respect to the “rim decoration image not including the display target area of the gauge image”, the portion displayed as the same image as the “rim decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image” described above and a portion displayed as a different image are included. There is something.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 425 (c), the “treasure (second decoration image)” of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example includes the “holy cup” in FIG. 424. This is the same as the “treasure (first decorative image)” shown. However, in the “treasure” of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, “gold bars” and “necklaces (display target area of gauge image GG)” shown in FIG. An image filled with gold coins is displayed. The treasure box shown in FIG. 425 (c) is the same as the treasure box shown in FIG. 424 (c), and the same is true in that the treasure box is displayed in any of the plurality of modes shown in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, even when the specific display TH3 has no part drawn so as to be on the front side of the "treasure (peripheral decorative image SSG)" (FIG. 425 (c)), The gauge image GG is no longer displayed in the “treasure (rim decoration image SSG)”. That is, in this case, it is not possible to find the gauge image GG while the "treasure (peripheral decorative image SSG)" is gradually recognized to be good by the specific display TH3. It is possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension as to whether or not only time is left.

  In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The same image (such as the Holy Grail) as in the case (FIG. 423 (c)) is intentionally displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed somewhere, and thereby the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. At the point of recognizing that this is not displayed anywhere, it seems that a certain amount of time has already passed since the effective period has occurred, so tension can be felt during the effective period. It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 425 (b) to (d), the gauge image is an integrated bird's-eye image IG in which the handle-pattern image TMG in which the operation target is overlooked is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. The display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated bag image IG. That is, in this case, the gauge image is not displayed, and it is difficult to recognize how much time remains in the effective period, so that the tension during the effective period can be suitably maintained. Note that the display target area of the gauge image may not necessarily be displayed. For example, the gauge image is displayed as an image different from the integrated overhead image IG, and the display area thereof is reduced according to the passage of time You may do so.

  FIG. 425 (d) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the set time for the effective period has elapsed and the effective period is about to end. As described above, in this example, the gauge image is not displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 425 (d), no indication is made that the validity period is about to end, and the player can see the image even if the image is viewed visually. I can not recognize something.

  However, even in the effective period according to this example, in the handle pattern image TMG that is an operation target, a display that depicts the manner in which the handle portion 5012 reciprocates (reciprocates from the original position to the specific position) within its movable range. (Dynamic display) has been done. In this regard, the effective period according to this example is such that the reciprocating motion is repeated N times (N may not be an integer) after the occurrence of the period, If the dynamic display by the handle image TMG is continuously watched, it is possible to recognize how much remaining time (how many reciprocating motions) remains as the effective period.

  Even during the effective period according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 425 (c) and 425 (d), in the button bag image BMG, a display (moving motion) depicting how the handle button 5014 reciprocates within its movable range. Display does not take place. In this respect, in the effective period in which the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed, the operation receiving unit (here, the pattern button 5014) corresponding to the overhead image on the side where the dynamic display is not performed is operated. Even in this case, display after operation or sound output after operation may be performed according to the operation reception.

  In other words, in the effective period according to this example, the player is in a hurry to operate because the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, and as a result, the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed Therefore, even if the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated, unlike the case shown in FIG. 424, the post-operation display and the operation are performed. It is desirable to suppress the fall of the game interest by performing the after sound output. Examples of the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output in this case include a display and sound output such as “Push the pattern part instead of the pattern button!”. Therefore, even if the operation receiving unit on the side not dynamically displayed is operated and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed accordingly, the valid period is ended or the set time is exceeded. It is desirable not to be reset or to continue the pattern display TMG without stopping the dynamic display. When the handle 5012 is operated within the effective period thus continued, post-operation display and post-operation sound output corresponding to this are performed (see FIG. 426 (h)). The post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case are the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the non-dynamic display side operation receiving section is operated (for example, “ It is needless to say that the contents are different from the contents such as However, “within the effective period, the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the button bag image BMG that is not dynamically displayed is not operated, and the pattern card image TMG that is displayed dynamically is displayed. Post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, “Congratulations!”, Etc.) when the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) is operated, and “button 摸 image not dynamically displayed within the valid period After the operation receiving portion (pattern button 5014) corresponding to BMG is operated, the post-operation display when the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern collar image TMG is further operated It is desirable for the post-operation sound output (for example, “Congratulations!

  FIG. 426 (e) shows an example of an image that appears on the effect display device 1600 when no operation is accepted within the time (set time) set for the effective period according to this example.

  That is, in the effective period according to this example, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIGS. 425 (d) and (e)), the operation is received with respect to the handle 5012 within the effective period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when they were made are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions).

  However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed in the integrated bag image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as a separate image. Although there is a possibility that the effective period ends without being able to operate even though there is an intention to operate, there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, in this example, after the validity period ends without any operation by the player, a specific condition (for example, symbol stop or not 10 seconds before the symbol stop) is not satisfied. An operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (here, the handle portion 5012) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the effective period, and when an operation on the operation means is accepted, Based on the above, the valid period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the effective period ends without any operation by the player, a special effective period for regenerating the effective period is generated from the end of the effective period.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 426 (h), the operation by the player causes the operation to be performed even if the effective period is ended as a result of the elapse of the predetermined setting time while the operation by the player is not performed. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 426 (e), when the player performs an operation on the handle 5012, the effective period starts from the fact that the operation is accepted. (4 (f) and (g) in FIG. 426). After that, the contents as described above with reference to FIGS. 425 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 426 (e) and (g) will be repeated again. Therefore, even when the operation acceptance is performed within the re-generated effective period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed in the above-described manner (FIG. 426 (h)). reference).

  If an operation is accepted in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 426 (e), the images shown in FIGS. 426 (f) and (g) (FIGS. 425 (b) and (g) are displayed as post-operation displays. the same as the image shown in c) will appear sequentially. Such an image is a post-operation display that is executed based on an operation being accepted during the effective period (FIGS. 425 (b) to (d), FIGS. 425 (f), (g), etc.). Are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 426 (e) is also the effective period (FIGS. 425 (b) to (d) and FIG. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation at 426 (f), (g) and the like.

  In the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 425 and 426, since the specific image TG is not displayed, the generation of the effective period does not necessarily require the prognostic effect (dynamic display by the specific display TH3). Also good. For example, when a predetermined condition for permitting operation acceptance for a predetermined after-operation display (predetermined operation after-sound output) is satisfied (when a predetermined timing arrives), the situation shown in FIG. 425 (c) is made to appear. Thereafter, the display may be advanced in the same manner as in the above-described example.

  In the example shown in FIG. 424 to FIG. 426, although it was decided to display the pattern eyelid image TMG and the button eyelid image BMG as one image (composite eyelid image HMG), these eyelid images are respectively displayed as separate images You may make it display. In the example shown in FIG. 424 to FIG. 426, the "button bird's-eye view image BMG" and the "pattern-scallop image TMG" are displayed as one image (a composite bird's-eye view image HMG) including both the bird's-eye view images, The "composite bird's-eye view image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated bird's-eye view image IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery thereof. However, the "button bird's-eye view image BMG" and the "patterned-tie image TMG" are respectively displayed as separate images, and at least one of the bird's-eye-viewed images is integrated with the peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery thereof. It may be displayed as an image. For example, if “pattern rouge image TMG” is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image, and “button rouge image BMG” is displayed as a single separate image, “pattern roar image It is possible to make "patterned image TMG" more noticeable while displaying both TMG "and" button 摸 image BMG "simultaneously, and the operation corresponding to" patterned image TMG " It is possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving portion (the handle 5012) should be operated. At this time, while "pattern image TMG" in the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is displayed dynamically, "button 摸 image BMG" displayed as a single image is not displayed dynamically, and so on. The configuration and other examples can be similarly applied.

  Further, in the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 424, both the button bag image BMG and the pattern bag image TMG are displayed. Only the overhead image TMG may be displayed.

  Further, it is preferable that the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 425 and 426 be generated as a setting time longer than the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. In this case, the manner in which the heel image (here, the heel image TMG) is dynamically displayed within the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 424, and the speed of reciprocation are shown in FIGS. 425 and 426. It is desirable that the modes (such as the speed of reciprocation) in which the bird's-eye view image (here, the pattern eyelid image TMG) is dynamically displayed within the indicated effective period (operation reception effect) be the same as each other. According to such a configuration, even when the gauge image GG is not displayed, it is possible to check with the situation that the dynamic display of the overhead image is performed based on the case where the gauge image GG is displayed. You will be prompted to operate.

  In the example illustrated in FIGS. 424 to 426, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be a “treasure” image, and the treasure chest may not necessarily be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 424, when the operation receiving unit corresponding to the bird's-eye view image not dynamically displayed is the “first operation receiving unit”, in the example shown in FIG. 425 and FIG. The operation receiving unit corresponding to the image may be the “first operation receiving unit”. However, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 424, when the operation receiving unit to be dynamically displayed is the “second operation receiving unit”, a bird's-eye view image not to be dynamically displayed in the examples shown in FIGS. It is desirable that the operation receiving unit corresponding to と な る be a “third operation receiving unit” different from the “second operation receiving unit”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to respectively generate two types of operation reception effects in an aspect in which the display relationship concerning the three operation objects (operation receiving units) slides. , It will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 425 and 426 may not necessarily occur during the execution period of the symbol variation. For example, it may be a period generated using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of the symbol variation, or a period during which the symbol variation is not executed, such as during the execution period of the big hit game or before the big hit game is started. May occur.

  In addition, in the effective period (operation reception effect effect) shown in FIG. 425 and FIG. 426, as in the effective period in the example shown in FIG. 418 to FIG. Alternatively, it may be easy to notice that the gauge image is not displayed, because the gauge image is not displayed.

  As the effective period for displaying the image shown in FIG. 424 (c), a plurality of effective periods with different generation conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIG. 424 may not be performed in all of the valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIG. 424 may be performed in at least one valid period.

  As the valid period in which the image shown in FIG. 425 (c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods having different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 425 and 426 may not be performed in all of the valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIGS. 425 and 426 may be performed in at least one valid period.

  Unlike the case of the effective period shown in FIG. 424, in the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 425 and FIG. 426, a plurality of modes (such as color) can not be displayed as overhead images. It may be possible to display only in the mode.

  The effective period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is not displayed can be generated only when an operation opportunity is given to one of the pattern portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014, and an operation opportunity is provided to the other. When provided, a valid period (operation reception effect) may be generated in which the gauge image is displayed.

[Integrated 摸 image, pre-validation effect, 摸 image disappearance effect]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (such as advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (such as advance notice effect) is to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

  As described above, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control for displaying the effect content according to the result of the effect determination on the effect display device 1600 is performed, thereby determining the big hit determination. The variation effect by the decorative design according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative symbol is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body operation, etc. The expected effect is to be provided as an effect having “the degree of anticipation that a big hit has been obtained, that is, a function indicating a ratio (including 0% and 100%)”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) developed as SP reach (such as reach effect accompanied by background change) as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, If a variation pattern of is selected, even if any result is obtained as an effect determination (such as an advance notice determination), if the pattern effect based on the particular variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect is accepted It is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that is acceptable.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected among the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained by the effect determination (for example, the advance notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, if the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the effect acceptance is acceptable. It is possible to generate an accepted acceptance status (effective period). However, when a predetermined change pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the effect determination, the acceptance permission state (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined change pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing . Moreover, the acceptance permission state (effective period) generated with a predetermined change pattern is different from the acceptance permission state (effective period) generated when the symbol effect based on a specific change pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach It is executed as an effect.

  In addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern", the variation pattern for generating the acceptance permission state (the effective period) at the predetermined timing during the SP reach even if any result is obtained as the preliminary presentation effect determination. May also be provided. However, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance status (effective period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the preliminary presentation effect judgment is included in the low expectation variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to avoid this or to lower the selection ratio.

  By the way, the acceptance permission state (effective period) which can occur under these conditions etc. is determined in advance for the effect member to be the effect object, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Reception is only performed after generating operations (at least one of the display change on the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body). The permissive state (effective period) itself has poor rendering ability, and there is a concern about a decrease in game entertainment until the rendering is performed after the operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is to be provided is selected when the acceptance permission state (effective period) to which the operation opportunity is to be generated occurs. By displaying the blurred bird's-eye view image as an integrated bird's-eye view image (see FIG. 410) integrated with the peripheral decoration image for decorating the peripheral edge of the bird's-eye view image The reduction is suppressed. For such an integrated habit image, an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (effective period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. In addition, the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 190 to 303, 385 to 409) are also realized by replacing the display mode of the illustrated haze image with any of the integrated haze images described below. It is desirable to do it in order to improve the game interest.

  Note that the “integrated haze image” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 410 to 426, or as another example or modification thereof. A display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. Further, as the “integrated bag image”, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 410) having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and the same is true for displaying in any of these modes.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance permission state occurs, an acceptance permission sound indicating that an operation acceptance is permitted or an operation acceptance is permitted is generated. It is made to output, and it is made to make it hard to produce operation by this. Here, “acceptable sound” means that when a sound starts to be output, an acceptable state of acceptance (valid period) always occurs while this sound is output (while sound data is assigned). , It is the sound in the state where the acceptance permission state (effective period) has already occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of reception permission states including a first reception permission state and a second reception permission state are prepared as the reception permission state (valid period). Yes. Here, the first acceptance allowable state can be generated when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern), but the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). Of these, a valid period that cannot occur with a predetermined fluctuation pattern (or any of the low expected fluctuation patterns) (based on the fact that the first condition is established in the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination) Generated validity period). In addition, the second acceptance allowable state is selected when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). The effective period that can be generated in any case (or at least one of those fluctuation patterns) (the second condition different from the first condition in the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination is (Effective period generated on the basis of establishment).

  The "integrated bird's-eye view image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in any of the first acceptance permission state and the second acceptance permission state. Here, it is assumed that the first acceptance permission state and the second acceptance permission state both occur as acceptance permission states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410). The “integrated bird's-eye view image” displayed in the first acceptance acceptable state or the second acceptance acceptable state is an image in which the same operation means (operation button 410) is viewed.

  However, a special aspect with a high degree of expectation (for example, the aspect shown in FIG. 410 (d)) among the plurality of aspects prepared as the “integrated bag image” is the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state. Of these, display is possible only in the first reception-permitted state, and in the second reception-permitted state, display is possible only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (c)). ing. In the first acceptance-permitted state, the determination as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d)) is to display the “integrated bag image” based on the result of the jackpot determination. The “integrated bag image” is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of this determination. Even in the second acceptance-permitted state, whether to display the “integrated bag image” in any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 410A to 410C) that do not include a special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination The determination may be performed, and the “integrated bag image” may be displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the determination.

  In such a configuration, two types of acceptance acceptable sounds (a first acceptable sound and a second acceptable sound) are output in the first acceptance acceptable state, and in the second acceptance acceptable state, One type of acceptance acceptable sound (third acceptance acceptable sound) is output. Here, the first acceptable sound and the third acceptable sound are output as sound effects such as "Pikeen!", For example, and may be output as the same sound as each other or different from each other. It may be output as a sound. On the other hand, the second allowable sound is output as a message sound such as “Press!”. However, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound, and if it is a sound different from the first allowable sound and output over a different output time, two types of acceptance allowable. It is possible for the player to appropriately recognize that the sound (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) is being output.

  Here, in the first acceptance permission state, it has been described above that the “integrated bird's-eye view image” can be displayed also by an aspect different from the special aspect (an aspect having a relatively low degree of expectation). Even in this case, two types of acceptance acceptable sounds (a first acceptable sound and a second acceptable sound) are output. That is, in this case, when only one type of acceptance acceptable sound is output when the acceptance permissible state occurs (displays the integrated overhead image), the special aspect is not displayed as the “integrated overhead image”, and the special aspect Different modes are displayed, but when two types of acceptance acceptable sounds are output, a special mode is displayed as an “integrated bird's-eye view image” and a mode different from the special mode is displayed And there will be.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the “integrated bird's-eye view” is displayed in the special mode based on which mode the acceptance acceptable sound is output, and the acceptance is acceptable. It becomes possible to improve the game interest when a state occurs.

  In addition, when the “integrated bird's-eye view image” is displayed in the first acceptance acceptable state or the second acceptance acceptable state, the pre-rendering effect (precursor effect) is executed prior to this, and the integrated overhead image is generated. In the state in which such pre-effects are being executed, the “image relating to the pre-effects” is displayed (displayed in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize) in an overlapping manner with at least a part of the image. Then, in the integrated overhead-view image, the portion overlapping with the “image according to the previous effect” is gradually reduced as the “image according to the previous effect” is gradually reduced, or the transmittance of the “image according to the previous effect” gradually As a result, the mode (whole) becomes dew (displayed in a state of being easily visible) late to the occurrence of the acceptance permission state by being finally hidden. Such previous effects (precursor effects) are, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (b) and (c) and FIGS. 415 (c) to (f) and the like, and are performed in the same manner as this. You may do it.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, although described later, the second allowable sound does not start output at the timing when the first allowable sound is output, but starts output in a delayed manner. ing. However, at the time when the first permissible sound precedes and starts output, "the integrated bird's-eye view image itself is not displayed or it is difficult to recognize the form even if it is displayed". At the same time, even when the second allowable sound is delayed and started to be output, at least a part of the integrated bird's-eye view image is in a state where the image according to the preceding effect (prediction effect) is displayed in an overlapping manner from the front side This makes it difficult to see. It should be noted that the acceptance permission state (effective period) is generated when the pre-effect (pre-event effect) is started or during the execution period, and at least when the output of the second permission sound is started It is either in the state of having already occurred or is generated in accordance with the start of the output.

  According to such a configuration, when there is at least a condition that “the first acceptable sound is output and the second acceptable sound is not output”, two types of acceptance acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound and The first admission permission state in which (second admission sound) is output occurs (or occurs), or the second admission permission state in which only one type of admission permission sound (first admission sound) is output occurs ( It is difficult to recognize what is or is occurring. However, when a situation such as “the second allowable sound starts to be output after the first allowable sound is output” appears, two types of allowable reception sounds (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) are output. It is possible to recognize that the first acceptance permission state is occurring, and also that the integrated overhead image may be displayed in a special manner.

In other words, in this case, in a state where it is difficult to recognize in which form the integrated haze image is displayed (or whether it is displayed)
When shifting from “a state where only the first permissible sound is output out of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound” to “a state where at least the second permissible sound is output” (first acceptance permissible state) When,
・ When the state does not shift from “a state where only the first permissible sound is output among the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound” to “a state where at least the second permissible sound is output” (second acceptance permissible state) Thus, it is possible to suggest the “possibility that the integrated haze image is displayed in a special mode” by the mode of “transition concerning the output of the acceptable sound for acceptance”. Therefore, while in the “state where only the first permissible sound among the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output”, before the image related to the previous effect (prediction effect) is hidden, It becomes possible to be interested in whether or not the output of the second permissible sound is started, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment. As a result, if the second permissible sound is output while the image related to the previous effect (prediction effect) is displayed, an integrated image having a special aspect is displayed (displayed). It is possible to provide a performance such that the integrated habit image is gradually exposed in such a sense of expectation.

  Note that, as described above, even when the output of the second permissible sound is started, at least a part of the integrated haze image is difficult to be visually recognized by the “image related to the previous effect”. Therefore, although it can be recognized that the integrated bird's-eye view image may be displayed in a special mode, it is in a situation where it can not at least easily be recognized as to in which mode the integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed. Needless to say. Further, when the second allowable sound starts to be output, the first allowable sound may remain in the output state, or the first allowable sound may have ended the output state. .

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance acceptable state) different from any of the first condition (first acceptance acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptable state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed without outputting any acceptance acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound or the second acceptable sound), and the operation means (here, here) is displayed When an operation on the operation button 410) is accepted, a display change or an output sound after operation may be generated as when the operation is accepted in the first acceptance acceptable state or the second acceptance acceptable state. Good. In this case, the contents of the display change and the post-operation output sound may be different depending on the type of the acceptance permissible state (the first acceptance permissible state, the second acceptance permissible state, and the third acceptance permissible state).

  That is, by displaying the integrated bird's-eye view image without outputting any acceptance acceptable sound, it becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp when the operation acceptance becomes acceptable, which is related to the operation It will be possible to improve the fun of gaming. Therefore, when adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated bird's-eye view image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed in any of the modes shown in FIGS. It is desirable to According to such a configuration, a “gauge stop period” in which the gauge image GG is not reduced may be generated, or the area of the gauge image GG may not be a predetermined value (0) and may be integrated while leaving the area. Since the image is hidden, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the reception permission state is occurring, and it is more preferable to improve the game-related fun associated with the operation. Will be able to

  Alternatively, when the integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed without outputting any acceptance acceptable sound, the gauge image is not displayed in the integrated bird's-eye view image, and even the display target area is not provided. It is also good. As such a display method, although the operation target is different, it is as described above with reference to FIGS. 425 and 426. For example, “the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the display of the gauge image GG is The same image (peripheral decoration image) as that in the case where the target area is displayed is intentionally displayed as being included, or the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated bird's-eye view image The technical idea such as “to do so” is equally applicable. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension about how much time is left, and it is possible to more suitably improve the fun of the game related to the operation. become able to.

  In addition, even in the case of the acceptance permission state according to this example, the case where the operation acceptance in the non-suppressing mode of the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is permitted, and the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction Is allowed to be accepted in the suppression mode or in a non-output state. The phrase “output a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) in a suppression mode” according to this example includes the case where a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output at volume “0” (silence output) is there. The "non-output state" is, for example, a meaning including the case where no assignment to a channel is made.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception permission state in which the operation reception in the non-suppression mode is permitted while the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is output, and the effect of the specific type Although there are a plurality of reception permission states in which the operation reception is permitted in the state where the sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, a plurality of each are prepared. In the "permitted state" and the "third acceptance acceptable state", acceptance acceptance is permitted in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. One of the states is included, and the above-mentioned "second acceptance permission state" is the operation acceptance in the situation where the specified type of rendering sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppression mode. Out of acceptable acceptance states It has become what is included as one.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM playback (specific type of production sound) is suppressed or not output, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the integrated haze image is displayed in a special mode. Because it will be possible to do so, while avoiding the situation where the performance is poor, while the sound of BGM playback is suppressed or in a non-output state, it will have more concentration and enjoy the production You will not be able to.

  It should be noted that “the acceptance acceptable state in which the operation acceptance in the state where the specified type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or the non-output state is permitted” is the output in the non-suppression mode It may be a mode in which the acceptance permission state is generated after outputting the suppression sound of the specific type being played (BGM reproduction) or in the non-output state, or the effect sound of the specific type (( In the BGM playback mode, the acceptance permission state is generated in the non-suppression mode, and a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed in the suppression mode (or simultaneously with this). Or the non-output state. The point is that the operation acceptance can be performed while the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state.

  Further, even in the acceptance-permitted state according to this example, when an operation is not detected within the set time in which the operation acceptance is permitted, the automatic acceptance mode is executed that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. There are cases in which it is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected.

Here, the reception permission state in which the “automatic reception mode” is executed among the reception permission states is as described above.
-It does not mean that the display after operation and the sound output after operation are output regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the effective period only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set,
-Regardless of the state of effect (state of effect setting), this means that after operation display or after operation sound output is output regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the effective period. In the first place, the "special effect state (automatic reception mode)" or the "plural effect states" may not necessarily be prepared as the effect state. Whether the automatic reception is enabled when the reception permission state in which the “non-automatic reception mode” is executed among the reception permission states occurs when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set. Any may be adopted (for example, “automatic reception is not necessarily activated regardless of the production state”) or “when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set” (The automatic reception may be activated as well), and the configuration is not related to the technical features described here.

  More specifically, when settings relating to a game can be made during the demonstration screen (period in which symbol variation is not executed), even if any of those settings is selected, “of the acceptance acceptable states” In the acceptance acceptance state in which “automatic acceptance mode” is executed, automatic acceptance is always enabled. Then, among the settings, when there is at least a specific setting condition, the reception permission state in which the “automatic reception mode” is executed and the reception permission state in which the “non-automatic reception mode” is performed are different generation conditions. It can be generated originally. The settings relating to the game include settings such as volume, brightness, and appearance occurrence probability in addition to the special effect state (automatic reception mode), and the settings relating to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) are necessarily installed. It doesn't have to be a thing. When the setting relating to the special rendering state (automatic reception mode) is loaded, in the “specific setting condition”, the special rendering state (automatic reception mode) is not set.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, an acceptance permitting state in which the “automatic acceptance mode” is executed and a “non-automatic acceptance mode” are executed at least under certain setting conditions. There are a plurality of acceptable reception states, but the “first acceptable reception state” described above is included as one of the acceptable reception states in which the “automatic reception mode” is executed. The above-mentioned “second reception permission state” and “third reception permission state” are included as one of the reception permission states in which the “non-automatic reception mode” is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the first acceptance permission that the integrated bird's-eye view image may be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410 (d)) In the state, the “automatic reception mode” is executed. Therefore, even if the operation is forgotten when the integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed in the high expectation special mode (the high stop ratio of the big hit design than other modes), the post operation operation effect It is possible to generate (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the change in the effect sound in the speaker, the change in the light emission by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment Will be able to. On the other hand, the second acceptance permission state or the third state in which there is no possibility that the integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410 (d)) In the acceptance permission state, the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is to be executed, so it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest at the time of forgetting the operation, and preferably for the feeling of tension when the operation acceptance is permitted. You will be able to maintain it.

  Also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptable reception sound is output overlaps with the acceptable reception state, and the operation is accepted when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state. Then, based on the reception of the operation, the output state of the acceptable sound for acceptance can be terminated halfway (can be made inaudible).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway is the timing at which an operation by the player is detected (operation acceptance). Anxiety is suppressed as to whether the reception has been made or the operation has not been received yet.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptance acceptable sound is output overlaps with the acceptance acceptable state, but when the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state Even if the operation is accepted, it may be maintained without being able to terminate the output state of the acceptance sound (can be made inaudible) on the basis of the acceptance of the operation. I have to. As described later, although there are a plurality of acceptance permission states in which the acceptance permission sound is ended halfway and a plurality of acceptance permission states in which the acceptance permission sound is not ended halfway, the above-mentioned "first acceptance permission state" Is included as one of the acceptance acceptable states in which the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway, and the “second acceptance acceptable state” described above is an acceptance acceptable state in which the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated halfway It is included as one of the

  According to such a configuration, the first reception allowance that there is a possibility that the integrated spear image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410 (d)) (the possibility that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced when the user forgets to operate it). In the state, when the operation acceptance is made while the acceptance permission sound is output, this is ended halfway. Therefore, when the integrated cocoon image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the ratio of being stopped with a big hit symbol is higher than other modes), “Whether the operation has been accepted or the operation has been accepted. It is possible to concentrate on post-operation effects such as post-operation display, post-operation output sound, light emission change due to lamps, effect operation with movable decorations, etc. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state where there is no possibility that the integrated spear image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410 (d)) (the possibility that the game entertainment will be remarkably reduced when forgetting to operate) Even if the operation is accepted when the permissible sound is being output, this is not terminated in the middle, so that the feeling of tension when operating is suppressed while suppressing the decline in the gaming interest. It can be suitably maintained.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or the operation acceptance in the non-output state is permitted, When the integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410 (d)), the integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIG. 410 (a) to (c)) There are times when

  More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the reception permission state where operation reception in a state where a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in a non-output state is permitted. In addition to the first acceptance permission status that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, at least the fourth acceptance permission status that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied is included, and in the first acceptance permission status, integration is performed. When a bird's-eye view image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410 (d)) and when an integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 410 (a) to (c)) However, in the fourth acceptance state, the integrated bird's-eye view image is not displayed in the special mode (see FIG. 410 (d)), and is different from the special mode (FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d)). It is made to be displayed only by c). Then, in the first acceptance permission state, when the operation acceptance is performed when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state, the output state of the acceptance permission sound is ended halfway based on the operation acceptance (inaudible In the fourth acceptance permission state, when the operation acceptance is performed while the acceptance permission sound is in the output state, the output state of the acceptance permission sound is enrouted based on the operation acceptance. It does not let it end (it does not make it inaudible).

  According to such a configuration, a reception permission state occurs in which operation reception in a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state is generated and the reception is performed. When the integrated bird's-eye view image is displayed in the special mode in the permission state, the reception permission sound is ended halfway based on the operation reception. On the other hand, if a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or a non-output state is generated, an acceptance acceptable state occurs in which an operation acceptance is accepted and integrated in the acceptance acceptable state. When the image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, there are cases where the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway based on the operation acceptance and the acceptance acceptable tone is maintained without being terminated halfway. It will be.

  That is, in this case, the integrated bird's-eye view image is a special mode in a reception permission state in which operation reception in a non-output state is permitted or a production sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode. Is displayed in a different mode (a mode in which there is a low possibility that the game interest will be significantly reduced when the user forgets to operate), even if the operation is accepted, the acceptance permission sound is terminated halfway according to the operation acceptance and acceptance Since there is a case where the allowance sound is maintained without being ended halfway, it may be the reason that the operation acceptance is not made when the acceptance permission sound is not ended halfway, or the operation acceptance It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether or not the fourth acceptance permission state is occurring but it is possible to maintain a sense of tension while suppressing a decrease in game entertainment. It is possible So as to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first acceptance permission state occurs, a wide area using at least a half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) prior to this. When the second reception allowed state occurs, the narrow-area pre-production that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started prior to this. It has come to be. Then, the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image) that looks at the operation receiving unit is displayed both in the period in which the wide-area type front effect is being executed and in the period in which the first reception permission state is occurring. However, the period during which the wide-area type pre-effect is being executed and the period during which the first acceptance permission state is occurring are displayed in different modes.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the display is performed in the period in which the integrated reception image (ie, the image) is displayed during the period in which the wide-area type front effect is being executed, and in the period in which the first reception permission state is occurring. In the integrated cocoon image (contained image), although the same operation receiving unit (operation button 410) is displayed, it is displayed based on different image data, As a result, not only the color arrangement but also the contour shape itself is displayed as being different.

  According to such a configuration, when performing the wide-area type pre-production, the degree of freedom is increased without being caught by the form (image data) of the integrated bag image (摸 image) displayed in the first reception-permitted state. Since it becomes possible to display an integrated 摸 image (摸 image) with a high independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the performance when performing a pre-production (wide-area type pre-production) in a wider range. It will be. It is obvious that such effects can not be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on single image data.

  Also, in the acceptance-permitted state in which the wide-area type front effect is executed, the big-hit effect that appears only when the big hit is obtained as the post-operation effect, compared to the acceptance-permitted state in which the narrow-area type front effect is executed. The rate at which the aspect appears is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of reception permission states are prepared as reception permission states corresponding to the wide area type front effect (a wide area type front effect is executed). A first acceptance permission state and a third acceptance permission state are prepared as one. In addition, a plurality of acceptance acceptable states are also prepared as acceptance acceptable states corresponding to the narrow-area pre-effects (where the narrow-area pre-effects are executed), and the second acceptance is acceptable as one of the acceptance acceptable states. A state and a fourth acceptance permissible state are prepared.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first acceptance permission state, an operation in a state where the specified type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. As described above, the second reception permission state is such that the operation reception can be performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is in the non-suppressed mode. As you did. That is, when a narrow-area type pre-production that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, an operation is accepted while the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is in the non-suppression mode without being in the suppression mode. Since it can be made (2nd reception permission state), the fall of the game entertainment attraction by not having performed the wide area type | formula front production relatively excellent in performance can be suppressed now. On the other hand, if an effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppression mode or an operation can be accepted in a non-output state, a wide-area type that is relatively superior to the effect. Because the previous performance is performed (first reception permission state), the game due to the fact that the operation reception was not performed while the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) was output in a non-suppressed manner Deterioration of interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when there is at least a specific setting condition (one production state), no operation is detected within a set time in which the operation reception is permitted in the first reception permission state. Is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second reception permission state, the operation is detected within a set time in which the operation reception is permitted. As described above, it is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception permission state in which the wide-area type pre-stage effect is performed, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered when the operation is forgotten due to its high performance, but it is executed in the automatic reception mode. Since it becomes, it becomes possible to suppress a drop in the game interest when there is a forgotten operation. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state where the narrow-area type pre-production is performed, it is suggested in a relatively inconspicuous manner that the operation reception is permitted, but in this case, the production is firmly Only those who have noticed that they will be able to accept operations will be able to entertain post-operation effects such as post-operation display and output sound after operation. You will be able to maintain.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in an acceptance-permitted state in which operation acceptance is permitted in a non-output state. Includes at least the first acceptance permission state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance permission state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. It is as having mentioned above. In this regard, in the fourth reception permission state, an operation can be received while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the fourth suppression mode. In the state, a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while being in a non-output state. I have to. In addition, when the fourth reception permission state occurs, execution of a narrow-area type pre-production that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started prior to this. That is, when a narrow-type pre-production that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, even if a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is set to a suppression mode, the degree of suppression is reduced. (Fourth acceptance acceptable state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that the wide area type pre-representation superior to the rendition is not performed. On the other hand, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while the non-output state is set. In the case (first reception permission state), since the wide-area type front effect that is relatively superior in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is not low. A drop in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player accepts an operation when the first acceptance permission state occurs and the spear image (integrated spear image) is displayed, the operation acceptance is performed. A corresponding post-operation effect (at least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, an effect sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is started to be executed, and a 摸 image (integrated 摸) When non-displaying an image), a wide area type extinction effect (wide area type extinction effect) using at least a half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is performed If the player accepts the operation while the second acceptance permission state occurs and the spear image (integrated spear image) is displayed, the operation is performed according to the operation acceptance. Execution (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decoration) is started, and the overhead image (unified overhead image) is not A narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow type type disappearance effect) using only a half area of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600 etc.) when displaying is performed.

  Here, the annihilation effect (wide-area annihilation effect, narrow-area annihilation effect) means that a part or all of the overhead image (integrated overhead image) in the display state is made invisible or not visible. These are “an image different from the cocoon image” and “display effect on the cocoon image”. As such an annihilation effect (annihilation effect), for example, it may be executed as an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the overhead image (integrated overhead image) is displayed. The bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image) and the image (disappearing effect) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and a part or all of the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image) It may be made to express the situation that it becomes difficult to visually recognize by the effect), or it is executed by changing the display mode of the overhead image (integrated overhead image) itself (display effect) It may be However, in order to indicate the degree of expectation as such a disappearance effect, or to improve the game interest, it is necessary to hide the bird's eye view image (integrated bird's eye view image). Needless to say, it is more desirable to display the image as a separate image.

  In addition, “when the overhead image (integrated overhead image) is not displayed, the annihilation effect is executed” means that “the overhead image (integrated overhead image) is not displayed. · · An annihilation effect may be executed, or “while the overhead image (integrated overhead image) is becoming non-displayed (the overhead image (integrated overhead image) itself has high transmittance) And so on etc.) ... may be "the annihilation effect is executed", or "the annihilation effect may be executed after hiding the overhead image (integrated bird's-eye image)". , And any of these aspects. In addition, in the process of the overhead image (integrated overhead image) becoming non-displayed, when the transmittance of the image itself is increased, when “the overhead image (integrated overhead image) is not displayed” ... Disappearance effect is executed ”.

  According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance by the player is started and the haze image is hidden, the wide-area disappearance effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. In some cases, the narrow area annihilation effect is executed, so that it is possible to enhance the rendering effect until the overhead image (the integrated overhead image) disappears.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when such an annihilation effect (image at the time of annihilation) is executed, the narrow-area annihilation effect (image at the time of a narrow area) The background image that was displayed prior to the display of the area-type annihilation image) is displayed until the non-display of the narrow-area While (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed, it is displayed (maintained) without being changed. On the other hand, in the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance time image), the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance time image) is displayed before being displayed based on the operation acceptance by the player. The background image is different until the wide area annihilation effect (wide area extinction image) is not displayed or after the post-operation effect (display after operation or output sound after operation) is performed. It is supposed to change to an image.

  That is, when the wide area type annihilation effect (wide area type annihilation image) is executed, not only the の image (integrated 摸 image) but also at least a part of the background image includes the wide area type annihilation effect (when the wide area type annihilation image is displayed). The background image is changed (replaced) to a different background image at the timing when such a wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) is executed. Thus, it is possible to realize smooth rendering transition (transition to a new rendering phase) using button rendering. For example, the wide area type disappearance effect (the wide area type disappearance image) is an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the habit image (integrated habit image) is displayed and the layer on which the background image is displayed. Alternatively, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and one of the 摸 images (integrated 摸 image) is included in the moving image. A state in which a part or the whole or a part or the whole of a background image becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image (disappearing effect) may be expressed.

  On the other hand, when the narrow area annihilation effect (narrowed area annihilation image) is executed, while the narrow area annihilation effect (narrowed area annihilation time image) is hidden or after operation Since the background image is not changed while the effect (display after operation and output sound after operation) is being performed, the effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) is not realized. Therefore, as a player, in addition to the post-operation effect, the player is interested in which of the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) or the narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow area type disappearance image) is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment associated with the bird's-eye view image from when the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image) is displayed until it is hidden.

  In addition, when the wide area type disappearance effect (image when the wide area type disappears) is displayed, the big hit is obtained as a post-operation effect than when the narrow area type disappearance effect (the image when the narrow area type disappears) is displayed. The ratio of appearances at the time of a big hit that appears only when the player is playing is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of reception permission states are prepared as the reception permission states corresponding to the wide area type disappearance effect (the wide area type disappearance image) (the wide area type disappearance effect is executed). A first acceptance permission state and a third acceptance permission state are respectively prepared as one of the acceptance permission states. In addition, a plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states corresponding to the narrow region disappearance effect (image when the narrow region disappears) (the narrow region extinction effect is executed). The 2nd acceptance acceptance state and the 4th acceptance acceptance state are prepared as one of.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception allowed state, a game in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state The second reception permission state is such that the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is in the non-suppressed mode. It is as having mentioned above. That is, when a narrow-type annihilation effect that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is not in the suppression mode but is in the non-inhibition mode. Since the operation can be accepted (second acceptance permissible state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the wide-area disappearance effect that is relatively superior in performance is not performed. On the other hand, if the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or is in a non-output state, the effect is relatively Since a superior wide-area extinction effect is performed (first reception allowance state), an operation reception by the player while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed manner It will be possible to suppress the decline in the game interest due to not being made.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when there is at least a specific setting condition (one production state), in the first reception permission state, an operation is detected within a set time in which operation acceptance by the player is permitted. When the operation is not performed, it is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second reception permission state, the operation reception by the player is permitted within a set time. As described above, when an operation is not detected in the above, the non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as that when the operation is detected is performed. That is, in the first reception permission state in which the wide area type disappearance effect is performed, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered when the operation is forgotten due to its high performance, but it is executed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the operation is forgotten. In other words, in this case, even when the player does not accept the operation and the automatic acceptance functions, the wide area type disappearance effect is executed in the same manner as when the player accepts the operation. On the other hand, in the second acceptance-permitted state in which the narrow area-type disappearance effect is performed, since it is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode, a set time elapses without any operation by the player (second acceptance tolerance) When the state is finished), the post-operation effect (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is not performed. It will be hidden. In this regard, in the second acceptance permission state, the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed even when the haze image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not executed, and this causes forgetting to operate. As a result, it is intended to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the post-operation effect is not executed. At this time, the narrow area type disappearance effect may be executed in the same mode (the same image) as when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception allowed state according to this example, the narrow-type disappearance effect that appears when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is executed, and the post-operation effect is not executed because the operation is not accepted A mode (image) that is different from the narrow-type annihilation effect appearing in FIG.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a reception that allows a player to accept an operation while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed state or in a non-output state. The allowable state includes at least the first reception allowable state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth reception allowable state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. It is as having mentioned above. In the fourth reception permission state, the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the fourth suppression mode. In the reception-permitted state, a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is operated by the player while in a non-output state As described above, the reception can be made. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player accepts an operation in the fourth reception permitted state, the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed instead of the wide area type disappearance effect. . That is, when a narrow-type extinction effect that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is set in a suppression mode prior to that effect, but the suppression degree is lowered. For this reason (fourth reception permission state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the wide-area disappearance effect that is relatively superior in performance is not performed. On the other hand, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while the non-output state is set. In the case (first reception permission state), since the wide-area disappearance effect that is relatively superior in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is not low. A decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  FIG. 427 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when the second condition is satisfied and the second acceptance permission state is generated under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 429 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a fluctuation pattern in which the second acceptance permission state occurs.

  Now, assuming that the start condition is established (holding digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the “second change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decoration symbol SZ (effect description according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in “the state shown in FIG. 429 (a)”). ), Within the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “second variation pattern” itself. It will be.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained by the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern (when the second condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is shown in FIG. 427 (b) The second acceptance permission state (effective period) in which the operation acceptance for the second operation after the second operation is permitted when the timing tB3 when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation design of the decorative symbol SZ. (Corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 429 (d)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second acceptance permission state (valid period) is
-"BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" corresponding to the second variation pattern, for example, operation reception while the normal variation BGM playback sound maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode The operation is not permitted within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which the “non-suppression acceptance permissible state (see FIGS. 427 (a) and (b)”) is permitted and the operation acceptance is permitted. In the case, the "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 427 (h))" does not generate the post-operation effect (the post-second effect effect) corresponding to the second acceptance permission state.
It is made to generate as "non-suppression / non-automatic receptionist effect" performed by.

  According to such a configuration, the setting time in which the operation acceptance is permitted without an effect such as suggesting the occurrence of the acceptance permission state by the “sound of BGM reproduction” becoming the suppression mode Because the player side is suddenly set (non-suppressed reception effect), the player side is struck by surprise, and a delay tends to occur at the beginning of the movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), then the set time is ended without generation after the operation (non-automatic reception A mode of feeling can be suitably maintained by being aware of the risk of missing the generation opportunity of the post-operation presentation (here, the second post-operation presentation).

  However, such “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effects” is performed after operation (here, after the second operation) in a mode that appears only at the time of big hit than “suppression / automatic reception effect” described later. Although the percentage (which may be 0% or 100%) is low, the game interest may be lowered if there is no such thing as the effect after the operation against the player's intention. Concerned. Therefore, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 427 (b), (e) and (i), a setting time (timing tB3 to tB4) at which operation acceptance is permitted occurs. Also, when the timing tB2 a little earlier comes, the output of "acceptable sound (here, first acceptable sound)" is started (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 429 (c)"), and the timing within the set time Even if the operation is accepted at tB 3 a, the output state is maintained in a form straddling this. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance is permitted at timing tB2 slightly before timing tB3 at which the setting time (the timing tB3 to tB4) of the second acceptance allowable state is set. It may be difficult to frequently say that the player's operation is not in time because it is delayed to notice that the reception has been accepted, and that the post-operation effect (here, the second operation after the second operation) does not occur. Expected. However, the “acceptable acceptable sound (here, first acceptable sound)” may not necessarily occur before the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) occurs. For example, the occurrence time of the set time You may make it generate according to the generation timing of tB3.

  Although it will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first allowable sound output as an effect sound such as "Phiking!" And "Press!" The second allowable sound that is output as a message sound is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 427 (f) and (j), in the second allowable reception state, the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. Is output, and a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of the movement when the player tries to operate even by such output limitation on the “acceptable sound”.

  By the way, in the second acceptance permission state, as a measure against sudden setting time being set or being executed as a non-automatic acceptance mode, the operation means (in this case, the operation means from the time when the operation acceptance is not permitted It is conceivable that a player who tries to keep an opportunity to generate an effect after operation may appear by repeatedly hitting the button 410). However, in this case, since the effect is accepted immediately after the operation acceptance is permitted, the started effect is "what is being performed according to the operation acceptance (effect after operation)". It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect not related to the operation reception", and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 427 (particularly, FIG. 427 (e)), in the second acceptable state, the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is generated after a set time (valid period) occurs. When the production is accepted at the timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself is terminated, but the “acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is not terminated halfway and is used as the first acceptable sound. The output state is maintained until the timing of finishing the output (the same timing tB3c (FIGS. 427 (e) and (i) as when there is no operation). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether the event is “what is being performed (post-operation effect)” or “automatically generated as an effect unrelated to operation reception”. Yo To become.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 427, when an effect is received within the set time of the second reception permission state (in the figure, timing tB3a), an effect display device is provided as an effect after operation corresponding to the operation reception. At least an after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the 1600 (first effect member) and an after-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 427 (d) See). In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, with regard to the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), even if the effect reception is made at any timing within the set time (effective period), it is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tB4. On the other hand, with regard to the post-operation output sound (rendering sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is made. However, even when the operation is accepted at any timing, when the timing tB4 has not ended, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output. It is required to maintain the state.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 427, when the timing tB2 before the timing tB3 at which the setting time of the second acceptance permissible state is set comes, the operation means as the operation target in the effect display device 1600 While the bird's-eye view image is displayed, gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed respectively (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 429 (c)”). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance is permitted at timing tB2 slightly before timing tB3 at which the setting time (the timing tB3 to tB4) of the second acceptance allowable state is set. It may be difficult to frequently say that the player's operation is not in time because it is delayed to notice that the reception has been accepted, and that the post-operation effect (here, the second operation after the second operation) does not occur. Expected. In this example, the timing at which the bird's-eye view image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound) starts output, but the invention is not limited thereto. Either one may be started earlier It may be. Alternatively, only one of the bird's-eye view image and the acceptance permission sound (for example, only the bird's-eye view image) may be started before timing tB3.

  In addition, as described above, the eyelid image displayed when the second acceptance-permitted state occurs (an image in which an operation receiving unit that is an object to which an operation opportunity is given) is an edge that decorates the periphery of the eyelid image It is displayed as an integrated bird's-eye view image IG integrated with the decoration image. The “integrated bag image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 410 to 426, or as another example or modification thereof. For example, a gauge image (predetermined in the peripheral decoration image) An image) GG display target area (partition image KG) is provided. Moreover, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 410) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the “integrated bird's-eye view image IG”, and the same applies to the point of selectively displaying any of these modes. However, a special aspect with a high expectation degree (for example, the aspect shown in FIG. 410 (d)) among the plurality of aspects prepared as the “integrated bag image” in the second acceptance-permitted state is selected (selected). Is not included as a subject of (a), and can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the normal mode and the like shown in FIG. 410 (a)). In the example shown in FIG. 429, an integrated overhead image Iga having the lowest degree of expectation is displayed as the integrated overhead image IG.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 427 (c) to (f), it is assumed that the operation t has been received when the timing tB3a arrives while such an integrated bag image is displayed. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example has a post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change due to the lamp, and due to the movable ornament. As at least one effect operation), an output related to the liquid crystal display and an output related to the effect sound are each started (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 429 (f)”).

  However, as shown in FIGS. 427 (c), (d) and 429 (f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated overhead image IG is not displayed at the time when the effect after operation is started. It is not turned on, and maintains the display state. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that point in time (timing tB3a), the change resulting from the integrated haze image IG (specific layer) does not occur, and a little time ( Until the timing tB3b at which the predetermined time has elapsed comes, the "display on the integrated overhead image IG" is continued in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted, The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. In the example shown in FIG. 429, a notice of conversation (which may be a chance) by the princess character is displayed as an effect (output according to the liquid crystal display) after the operation.

  Then, when the timing tB3b arrives, the image KSE (disappearance effect) displayed in a form in which a part or the whole of the integrated bird's-eye view in the display state is made difficult or not visible appears ("Figure 429 Corresponds to the situation shown in (g)). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer prior to the layer on which the integrated overhead image IG is displayed, or the integrated overhead image IG and the image concerned (disappearance effect ) Is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and a state in which a part or the whole of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image KSE (disappearing effect) is expressed in the moving image. It may be as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 427 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated bag image IG is not displayed even when such an image KSE (disappearing effect) starts to be displayed. It is not turned on, and maintains the display state. More specifically, even in a situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer where the integrated 摸 image IG is displayed, a change caused by the integrated 摸 image IG is caused. In addition, the display area of the gauge image GG is set to develop reduction in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on the layer on the front side, the haze image and the gauge image GG are difficult to view or are not visible.

  That is, in this case, the image KSE of the annihilation effect (the same also in the case of the image HSE of the wide area annihilation effect described later) is made for the purpose of making it difficult to visually recognize the overhead image A bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG) displayed on a specific layer (lower side (lower priority side) than a predetermined layer) despite being in a state of displaying on a predetermined layer The display in the mode when the operation acceptance is permitted is maintained, and no change occurs. In addition, also for the gauge image GG, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced is continued across the operation reception. As a result, even if it is in the process of making it difficult to visually recognize the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG) or making it impossible to visually recognize, visually recognize (at least a part of) the mode when the operation acceptance is permitted. As a result, the time to be maintained as the state shown in FIG. 429 (f) can be shortened.

  Then, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated overhead image IG is ended within a period (timing tB3b to tB3d) in which the image KSE of the annihilation effect is displayed (display on the layer (see FIG. 429 (i)). After this, the annihilation effect (in this case, the narrow area type annihilation that uses less than half of the predetermined display area under the condition that the integrated 摸 image IG is not displayed on the layer as well) (Effect) image KSE is displayed. Such an extinction effect image KSE is not displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tB3d) after the display thereof is started (timing tB3b) (see FIG. 429 ( equivalent to the situation shown in j)). In this regard, with regard to this non-display timing tB3d, even if the operation is accepted at any timing, the display change (here, liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the effects after the operation is performed. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the period of execution. That is, although it will be described later, the image KSE of the disappearance effect and the integrated overhead image IG are displayed in the layer on the front side of the image (display of the conversation announcement by the princess character) concerning the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in an overlapping form. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 429 (g) to 429 (i), while the image KSE of the annihilation effect is displayed, the image according to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (the conversation announcement by the princess character) It is supposed to be difficult. The same applies to the wide area annihilation effect.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation is accepted, first, the post-operation effect is started, and at the time when the operation is accepted, the integrated bag image IG is displayed in any manner. It will be maintained in a state where it can be grasped (in which mode of FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), how long the remaining time suggested by the gauge image GG, and so on) Corresponding to the situation shown in 429 (f)). After this, among the post-operation effects, display of the disappearance effect image KSE in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize the “image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600” and the integrated haze image IG is started. (Corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 429 (g)”). As described above, the annihilation effect includes a narrow-type annihilation effect with low performance and a wide-area annihilation effect with low performance. Here, the annihilation effect is executed as a narrow-type annihilation effect. While the annihilation effect image KSE is displayed, the integrated 摸 image IG is not displayed (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 429 (i)”). When the image KSE is hidden, the “image relating to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (conversation notice by the princess character)” of the post-operation effect is finally made visible in a clear state (“ This corresponds to the situation shown in FIG. 429 (j).

  That is, in this case, when the operation reception is made, first, it is possible to enjoy what aspect the aspect of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG was, and then it is possible to enjoy what aspect appears as an annihilation effect. Since it becomes possible to enjoy what kind of aspect (here, any of a plurality of conversation announcement modes different in the degree of expectation) appears as an effect after operation, when operation acceptance is done by such various effects It will be possible to improve the fun of gaming.

  In order to suitably obtain such effects, the timing at which the display of the image (post-operation effect) for display change in the effect display device 1600 is started is not the timing tB3a, but the timing tB3b or the annihilation effect It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing as being within the period being executed (timing tB3b to tB3d). However, also in this case, since the execution after the operation by the effect sound and the lamp is started to be executed at the timing tB3a, the start timing of the after-operation presentation itself remains the timing tB3a.

  On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 427 (g) to 427 (j), it is assumed that the setting time has elapsed (the second acceptance permission state is ended) while the operation by the player is not detected. As described above, since the second acceptance permission state is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode, when the set time elapses without the player's operation being performed, the post-operation effect is not performed. The overhead view image (here, the integrated overhead view image IGa) is to be hidden.

  However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 427 (b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted (the second acceptance permission state) is ended, The bird's-eye view image (here, the integrated bird's-eye view image IGa) on the specific layer is not hidden, and maintains the display state that appeared when it was in the acceptance state. More specifically, even if the operation acceptance is not permitted, a change caused by it does not occur with respect to the overhead image (here, the integrated overhead image IGa) at that time (timing tB4). Until the timing tB4a when a short time (predetermined time) has elapsed from when the “display on the overhead image” is continued in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted, Yes. Further, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is slightly left even when the state of accepting the operation acceptance (the second acceptance acceptable state) is ended, and the display area is displayed after the timing tB4. The display area is reduced in the form of “0”.

  According to such a configuration, the overhead view image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation) even when the valid period (the second acceptance acceptable state) is ended without any operation. It will be possible to check if it was. In addition, since the display area of the gauge image becomes “0” after the expiration period ends, it is possible to urge “I was sad” when the operation acceptance was not in time at the last moment. As a result, it is expected to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In this example, the valid period (second reception permission state) is ended without receiving any operation from the time tB3a when the operation is received until the eyelid image is not displayed (not visible). The time from the timing tB4 until the haze image is hidden (not visible) is shortened.

  Further, as described above, in the second acceptance permission state, when the set time has passed without the operation by the player being detected, the post-operation effect is not executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 427 (g), when the bird's-eye view image (here, the integrated bird's-eye view image IGa) is not displayed, the narrow-area type disappearance effect is executed, The bird's-eye view image (here, the integrated bird's-eye view image IGa) is made to be hidden while the narrow area type disappearance effect is being executed. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of production, the narrow area type disappearance effect (FIG. 427 (g)) when the effect after operation is not executed is the narrow area type disappearance effect when the effect after operation is performed It is made to carry out in the mode (image) different from (FIG. 427 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation has been accepted (whether or not it is in time), it is possible to properly understand it by confirming the mode of the narrow area type disappearance effect As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in amusement interests due to the inability to grasp whether the post-operation effect is being performed. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 427 (g) in FIG. 427 (g)) with respect to the mode of the narrow area type disappearance effect (FIG. 427 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed. It is desirable not to appear in). However, for example, the narrow area disappearance effect (FIG. 427 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is defined as “A (for example, change in the heel image itself)” and “B (for example, 摸 image). If the two modes of “different image display” ”are executed in combination, the narrow area type disappearance effect (FIG. 427 (g)) when the post-operation effect is not executed is executed as“ A ”. May be Even in such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation was not accepted when the “B” mode does not appear in the narrow area type disappearance effect, and the post-operation effect is being performed. It is possible to avoid the decline of the game interest due to not being able to grasp the

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 427, when the timing tB1 before the timing tB3 at which the second acceptance-permitted state occurs arrives, a narrow-area type front effect that uses only less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. This is started (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 429 (b)”). Then, during the period in which the image KTH related to such a narrow-area type pre-production is displayed, first, the display of the heel image (here, the integrated heel image IGa) that looks like the operation receiving portion, and the first tolerance Sound output is started (timing tB2, corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 429 (c)”). At the time when the display of the cocoon image (here, the integrated 摸 image IGa) is started, a part or the whole of the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH related to the narrow area type front effect. It has become difficult. That is, as the time lapses, the display range of the image related to the narrow area type pre-production is reduced or the transmittance is increased, so that “摸 image (integrated 摸"Improving the visibility of the image IG)" is provided (Fig. 429 (b)-(d)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the narrow-area type front production is being executed, and the second image is displayed while the heel image (here, the integrated heel image IGa) is being displayed. The timing tB3 at which the acceptance permission state occurs comes, and the operation acceptance is permitted (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 429 (d)"). In other words, in this case, since the acceptance of the operation is allowed at a stage where the visibility of the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) is improved, Confirm the mode (expectation) as the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) so that the operation is accepted (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation). After that, it is possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether the operation is accepted (post-operation effect) and is not displayed.

  Here, as an image KTH used for such a narrow-area type pre-production, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) is displayed. Alternatively, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image) and the image (narrow region type pre-production) are displayed as a single moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) is displayed in the moving image. It is also possible to express a state in which is gradually raised.

  Note that, in the narrow-area type pre-production, not only the image display on the production display device 1600 but also the production of the production sound related thereto may be performed. However, in view of the fact that the second acceptance permission state is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension regarding operation-related, the narrow-area pre-rendering is It can be said that it is desirable to increase the concentration of the production effect without performing the output of the production sound related to this, and executing it as the image display in the production display device 1600.

  In addition, a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation may be prepared as the narrow-area pre-effects, and any one of the modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination. . However, in view of the fact that the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and the post-operation effect is not executed when forgetting to operate it, It is desirable to prepare only one aspect and to be displayed only by the one aspect in order to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the user forgets to operate.

  FIG. 428 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of effects when the first condition is satisfied and the first reception permission state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 430 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the variation pattern in which the first reception permission state occurs.

  Now, assuming that the start condition is established (holding digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the “first change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, a variation effect of the decoration symbol SZ (effect description according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in “FIG. 430 (a)”). ”), Within the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed on the selected“ first variation pattern ”itself. It will be.

And as described above, in the effect according to the “first variation pattern”, even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination), as shown in FIG. 428 (b), the decorative symbol The above-mentioned first reception where the operation acceptance for the effect after the first operation is permitted when the timing tC4 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation presentation of SZ has come An allowable state (valid period) is generated (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 430 (g)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first acceptance permission state (valid period) is as follows.
・ The operation of accepting the operation while the “sound of BGM reproduction” corresponding to the first variation pattern is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state is “permission acceptance permitted state (FIG. 428 (a), And (b) even if no operation is detected for the operation means to be operated within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) in which the operation acceptance is permitted. When the timing tC4f within the set time arrives, the effect is started after the operation "automatic reception mode (see FIG. 428 (h))"
It is made to generate as "non-suppression / non-automatic receptionist effect" performed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also referred to as a “strong suppression mode”.

  According to such a configuration, since “BGM playback sound” is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state, operation reception is permitted (suppression reception effect), From the user's side, it becomes easy to operate immediately after the set time (effective period) occurs. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the post-first operation effect) has the timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Because it is automatically generated when it arrives (automatic reception mode), you can enjoy operating with a sense of security without missing the highly anticipated post-operation effects. . That is, in such a “suppression / automatic reception effect”, a ratio (0% or 100%) where the post-operation effect is performed in a mode that only appears at the time of a big hit than the above-mentioned “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. As described above, it is also good.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" also in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", FIGS. 428 (b), (e), (i) As shown in FIG. 6, when the timing tC3 slightly before the occurrence of the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) for which the effect reception is permitted occurs, the "acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)" The output is started, and the output state is maintained by crossing the timing tC4 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 430 (f)"). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that "the sound of BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" is output in the suppression mode or is not in the non-output state, the operation at timing tC3 It will be possible to recognize that a state where acceptance is permitted will occur soon, and that "a player can receive an effect by enabling the automatic button function instead of his own operation, contrary to the player's intention." It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" may not necessarily be generated before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) occurs. For example, it may be generated according to the set timing tC4. You may do so.

  In addition, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effect (prevention reception rendition) more suitably, the state or non The timing tC2a to be shifted to the “output state” is different from that shown in the figure. It can be said that it is desirable to set the output much earlier than the output start timing tC4 of the above-mentioned acceptance acceptable sound that precedes the set time. For example, the timing tC2a may come before the broad-area-type effect is started.

  Also, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 428 (f) and (j), unlike the above-mentioned “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, “ As the “acceptable sound”, not only the first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as “Pickin!” But also the second allowable sound that is a message sound such as “Press!” Is output. In addition, in this example, the second permissible sound is delayed by a predetermined time with respect to the timing tC3 at which the output of the first permissible sound is started, and the operation reception is already permitted (valid period). The output is started at the timing tC4a that arrives at the

  In other words, in this case, in the second acceptance allowable state (valid period) in which the integrated bag image IG (cage image) cannot be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is set time (valid period). The output is started immediately after the occurrence of the second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the 1st reception permissible state (valid period) in which integrated haze image IG (haze image) can be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the 1st permissible sound is set time (valid period). The output is started without being delayed, and the second allowable sound is started after the set time (effective period) is generated.

  According to such a configuration, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is started to be output when the integrated overhead image IG (overhead image) is in a situation where it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize by the previous effect. After that, when the first acceptance permission state (effective period) is generated, it is possible to shift to a state in which both the first allowance sound (sound effect) and the second allowance sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated bird's-eye view image IG (bird's-eye view image) is displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second acceptable sound (message sound) is further output. Will be able to That is, if the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output while the first allowable sound (sound effect) is in the output state, an integrated overhead image with a specific high expectation mode (special mode) It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for IG (over view image) to be displayed, and such an integrated over view image IG (over view image) is gradually made to be exposed (clear). Will be provided. Although this will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 428 (c) and (f), the “second wide-area type front effect” of the wide-area type front effects is being executed (image of the front effect Is displayed), the second allowable sound starts to be output.

  As described later, in the case of "suppression / automatic reception effect production" according to this embodiment, "when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target" and "the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation target" based on the result of the preliminary effect determination. When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target, a message sound such as “Press!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target. In such a case, a message sound such as "Settle!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 428 (e), (f), (i), and (j), the “second allowable sound” is adopted as a production sound that is output for a relatively short time. Although the “first permissible sound” is adopted as the effect sound output over a relatively long time, the length relationship between the permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, with regard to the “first acceptable sound” and the “second acceptable sound”, as shown in FIGS. 428 (e), (f), (i) and (j), the output state is maintained for different times. In addition, the timing when the output state is ended (the timing when the non-audible state is set) is made to arrive at different timings before the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable to make it. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated depends on whether the “acceptable sound” is in the following situation. As a result, it is expected that it will be difficult to frequently produce “acceptance of production by the activation of the automatic button function, not the player's own operation, contrary to the player's intention”.
-The first situation where only the "first acceptable sound" of the "first acceptable sound" and the "second acceptable sound" maintains the output state-Both the "first acceptable sound" and the "second acceptable sound" The second state in which the output state is maintained ・ The “first acceptable sound” maintains the output state, but the “second allowable sound” ends the output state (inaudible state A) Third situation ・ The fourth situation where both the “first acceptable sound” and the “second acceptable sound” have ended the output state (inaudible state)

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” in the effect example shown in FIG. 427 and “suppression / automatic reception effect production” in the effect example shown in FIG. The same production sound (for example, “Pikkin!”) Is output as the “first allowable sound”. That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) of the acceptance allowable sound is output as an effect sound not output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic acceptance effect”, but the sound effect (a part of the acceptance allowable sound) As for the first allowable sound), since “the sound of BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is suppressed since it can be output as the effect sound that is also output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” It is possible to more easily recognize that the reception of the effect is permitted (the second acceptable sound) while suitably maintaining the effect when the user is Permissive sound). However, in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. 427 and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. You may output it.

  In addition, about the time length between the arbitrary timings shown in each figure mentioned above and each figure mentioned later, the minimum time (for example, 1 frame) in a control (process) unit may be sufficient, and 2 frames The above time may be used. For example, if the reception permission sound (the first permission sound) can be output even slightly prior to the set time (the effective period), the player is in a state where the operation reception is permitted (or Can be recognized earlier by the preceding time, so it is within the period until the set time ends and the period until the timing when the automatic button function is activated comes It will be expected to suppress forgetting to do the operation inside.

  Further, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 427, in the effect example shown in FIG. 428, the operation is performed when the acceptance allowable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is in the output state When the reception is made, the output state is ended halfway based on the reception of the operation. That is, in this case, when the player performs an operation, the output of the acceptance sound (the first acceptance sound and the second acceptance sound) is interrupted at that time, and the operation acceptance is thereby permitted ( It is possible to recognize that the validity period has ended. As a result, it becomes difficult to cause an erroneous recognition that the operation acceptance has been made despite the fact that the operation acceptance has not been made, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation where the automatic reception function is activated against the intention of the player. become able to. If the operation is performed and the operation is performed before the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (the effective period), the operation is performed when the operation is performed. It is needless to say that the automatic button function is not activated even when the timing tC4f comes, since the state where the acceptance is permitted is ended.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 428 (e) and (f), the first allowable sound starts to be output without delay of the set time (effective period), and the second allowable sound is set to the set time (effective). The output is started late for the occurrence of the period. According to such a configuration, the first permissible sound starts to be output no matter how soon the player's operation is accepted, but the second permissible sound depends on the timing at which the operation is accepted. (When an operation is accepted between timings tC3 and tC4a), the state in which the operation acceptance is allowed is ended without starting the output, and as a result, the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ) Will be executed. Note that when the operation is performed between timings tC3 and tC4, the operation is not accepted, and the first allowable sound is not terminated in response to the operation. In addition, when the operation is received before the timing tC4a arrives, the output of the second allowable sound is not started.

  According to such a configuration, after confirming that the second permissible sound is output (after confirming that it is in the first permissible acceptance state), the post-operation effect is started, or the first (2) A game whether to start the post-operation effect without confirming that an allowable sound is output (without recognizing whether it is in the first acceptable state or the second acceptable state) Since it will be possible to entrust the selection to the player side, the range of games will be widened, and it will be expected to improve the game entertainment.

  Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 428 (c) and (f), within the period from timing tC3 to tC4 a The part is not hidden and is kept in the display state. That is, in this case, in a situation where the second acceptable sound is not yet output (timing tC3 to tC4a), the aspect (expected degree) can not be clearly viewed by the pre-effect also for the integrated overhead image (overhead image) Therefore, it is possible to make the above-described game characteristics such as “entrusting selection to the player side” more interesting.

  Also in this production example, as shown in FIG. 428 (d), when an operation is accepted within a set time (effective period) (in the figure, timing tC4b), an after-effect produced according to the operation acceptance. (Here, the first post-operation effect) As the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) At least occurs (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 430 (i)”). Here, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 427, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is the timing even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast to the non-display (not visible) at a specific timing (same timing) that comes after tC5, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is determined in advance from the timing when the operation is accepted. The output state is maintained for a certain amount of time (fixed time). In the example shown in FIG. 430, a background notice by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output relating to liquid crystal display).

  However, as shown in FIG. 428, even when the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), the “BGM playback sound It is desirable to set the output state so as to be maintained when the timing tC6 when the effect sound of the specific type becomes "output in the non-suppression mode" from the suppression state (non-output state) comes.

  On the other hand, with regard to the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state is ended at timing tC6 when the "sound of BGM reproduction" becomes the output in the non-suppression mode. That is, in this case, at timing tC6, the "sound of BGM reproduction" becomes an output in the non-suppressed mode, and both of the contents related to the display effect are switched, so that the effect is greatly increased. It will be expected that it will be changed and the game interest will be improved. However, instead of this, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may be maintained when the timing tC6 arrives. The "sound of BGM reproduction" may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

  In addition, also in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 428, when the timing tC3 before the timing tC4 at which the setting time of the first acceptance acceptable state is set comes, the operation to be operated in the effect display device 1600 While the bird's-eye view image showing the means being displayed is displayed, gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is performed respectively (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430 (f)”). This makes it possible to recognize that the operation acceptance is permitted at timing tC3 slightly before timing tC4 at which the setting time (the timing tC4 to tC5) of the first acceptance allowable state is set. It may be difficult to frequently say that the operation by the player is not in time because it is late to notice that the reception has been accepted, and that the effect after operation (here, the effect after the first operation is not generated) ends. It will be expected. In this example, the timing at which the bird's-eye view image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound) starts output, but the invention is not limited thereto. Either one may be started earlier It may be. Or you may make it start only any one of a haze image and a reception permissible sound (for example, only a haze image) before timing tC4.

  In addition, as described above, the overhead image displayed when the first acceptance permission state occurs (the image obtained by looking over the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is to be applied) is also the peripheral edge to decorate the peripheral edge of the overhead image It is displayed as an integrated bird's-eye view image IG integrated with the decoration image. The “integrated bird's-eye view image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 410 to 426, or as another example or a modification thereof. A display target area (partitioned area KG) of a predetermined image) GG is provided. Moreover, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 410) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the “integrated bird's-eye view image IG”, and the same applies to the point of selectively displaying any of these modes. However, unlike the second acceptance acceptable state, in the first acceptance acceptable state, the special aspect having a high degree of expectation (for example, FIG. 410) among a plurality of aspects prepared as the “integrated bird's-eye view image IG”. As described above, the aspect (integrated bird's-eye view image IGd) shown in (d) is included as a target of the lottery (selection) and can be displayed.

  By the way, in the first reception permission state (FIG. 428) executed in the automatic reception mode, the remaining time is displayed with reference to the time until the timing tc4f when the automatic button function is activated when there is no operation ( It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first acceptance-permitted state (FIG. 428) according to this embodiment, the remaining time is displayed with reference to the time until the timing tC5 when the set time elapses instead of the time until the timing tc4f arrives ( The gauge image GG is displayed dynamically. That is, in this case, as the time until the set time elapses decreases, the gauge amount decreases, and when the set time becomes "0", the dynamic display is performed so that the gauge amount also becomes "0".

  According to such a configuration, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) will be left when the post-operation effect is started to be executed due to the automatic button function being activated. It is possible to indicate that there is a risk of losing the operation opportunity against the player's intention, and this makes it possible to set the next time (the effective period) regardless of the gauge remaining amount It will be possible to prompt you to perform the operation at an early stage.

  However, in the first acceptance permission state (FIG. 428) executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the same post-operation effect as when there is an operation acceptance may not necessarily be started within the set time, and the set time It may be started when ending or after ending.

  In addition, the integrated cocoon image IG (摸 image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 428 is not necessarily the same as the integrated 摸 image IG (摸 image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 427. Good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 427, the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 428, the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target. May be described realistically.

  In the example shown in FIG. 427, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target, and the operation button 410 is displayed as an integrated ＩＧ image IG (摸 image) in which the operation button is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 428, the handle 5012 (sword decorative body 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target, and is displayed as an integrated cocoon image IG (a cocoon image) in which the handle portion is displayed (see FIG. 423 (a) to (d)). The “integrated bag image IGe to IGh” is as described with reference to FIGS. 423 to 426, or as another example or modification thereof. For example, a gauge image is included in the peripheral decoration image. A display target area (section image KG) of (predetermined image) GG is provided. Moreover, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 410) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the “integrated bird's-eye view image IG”, and the same applies to the point of selectively displaying any of these modes.

  As described above, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tC4 in FIG. 428, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target, based on the result of the notice effect determination. " That is, in this case, there may be confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (effective period) for which the effect reception is permitted is generated, and the set time may be 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at timing tB3 in FIG. 427, there is no “case where the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated may be set after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of a situation where opportunities are lost.

  Also, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 428, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state Even when the operating means is operated, it is desirable to receive the presentation and execute the post-operation presentation. In other words, the player may be confused if there is a situation in which the stage is not accepted despite operating the operating means. Since it is harsh to seek further operations on the operating means on the side, even if the wrong operating state is maintained, the production is accepted when the operating means on the operating side is operated It is desirable to do.

  Note that, as described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, the specific type of production sound is set to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode before the operation opportunity is given, and thus compared to the non-suppression operation reception effect. There is a concern that the performance will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) that is output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the time during which the output state is maintained is different. One of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first acceptable sound is the mode shown in FIG. 428 (e), and the “time maintained as the output state” is set as the shortest mode among the above-mentioned plurality of modes. It is Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped depends on which of the above-described plurality of modes is used to output the first allowable sound.

  In addition, “Which of the plurality of modes is to be output as the first acceptable sound” and “Which of the plurality of operation means is used as the operation target” can be obtained as separate determination results in the above-mentioned notice effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained within the notice effect determination as one determination result. However, in at least the first aspect among the plurality of aspects, the first permission is permitted in either the case where the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the case where the “sword decoration 5001” is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound can be selected. Also in the second and third modes, it is possible to select whether the operation button 410 is to be operated or the sword decorative body 5001 is to be operated. However, it is preferable to prepare an aspect in which the output is enabled only when the "sword decoration 5001" is to be operated. Then, even when the first allowable sound is output in any of these modes, the output state is maintained with a length equal to or longer than the time value required for the mode shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 428 (c) to 428 (f), it is assumed that the operation acceptance is performed while the timing tC4 comes while the integrated overhead image IG (here, the integrated image IGd) is displayed. doing. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the effect after operation (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decorative body As at least one of the rendering operations, an output of the liquid crystal display and an output of the rendering sound are respectively started.

  However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 428 (c) and (d), also in this example, the integrated haze image IG on the specific layer is not hidden when the post-operation effect is started. , Maintain the display state from the time of being in the acceptance permission state. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at the time (timing tC4b, which corresponds to the “situation shown in FIG. 430 (i)”), the integrated haze image IG is attributed to it. No change is made, and until the timing tC4c when a short time (predetermined time) has passed, the “integrated bag image IG is applied in the same manner as when the operation reception is allowed” “Display” is continued, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before.

  Then, when the timing tC4c arrives, the image HSE (disappearing effect) displayed in a form in which it is difficult to visually recognize or make a part or the whole of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG in a display state invisible (see FIG. Corresponding to the situation shown in 430 (j)). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer (predetermined layer) preceding the specific layer on which the integrated bird's eye image IG is displayed, or the integrated bird's eye image and the said Display an image (annihilation effect) as one moving image prepared in advance, and express a state in which a part or the whole of the integrated bird's-eye view image becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image (annihilation effect) in the animation. As described above, it may be the same.

  As shown in FIG. 428 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, the integrated overhead image IG is displayed on a specific layer and an image HSE displayed on a predetermined layer Even when the disappearing effect is started to be displayed, it is not hidden, and the display state is maintained as it is when it is accepted. More specifically, even in a situation where the annihilation effect is displayed (timing tC4c), in the specific layer where the integrated overhead image IG is displayed, a change caused by the occurrence occurs in the integrated overhead image IG. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is set to develop reduction in the same manner as before. However, when the annihilation effect is displayed on the predetermined layer on the front side, the bird's-eye view image or the gauge image GG is not easily visible or becomes gradually invisible.

  Then, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated haze image IG ends within the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) during which the image HSE of the disappearance effect is displayed. An image HSE of an extinction effect (here, a wide area annihilation effect that uses half or more of the predetermined display area) is displayed under the situation where the IG is not displayed on the specific layer as well. The image HSE of such an annihilation effect is configured to be non-displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4g) since the display is started (timing tC4c). In this regard, at this non-display timing tC4g, even when the operation is accepted at any timing, the display change (in this case, liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the effects after operation is It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period of execution. That is, although described later, the image HSE of the disappearance effect and the overhead image (integrated overhead image) are displayed on a predetermined layer on the front side of the image (post-operation effect) according to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps this. Therefore, while the image HSE of the disappearance effect is displayed (FIGS. 430 (j) and (k)), it is difficult to visually recognize the image related to the display change (post-operation effect) on the effect display device 1600. There is.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation reception is performed, the integrated overhead image IG is displayed in any form at the time the operation reception is performed, in addition to the start of the effect after the operation. It is maintained as a state where it can be grasped (in which mode of FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), how long the remaining time suggested by the gauge image GG, etc. is). After this, among the post-operation effects, the image HSE of the disappearance effect in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)” and the integrated bag image IG. The display by will be started. As described above, as the annihilation effect, there are a low-range narrow area annihilation effect and a low-range wide area annihilation effect, which are executed as a wide-area annihilation effect here. When the integrated overhead image IG is hidden while the image HSE of the annihilation effect is displayed, and then the image HSE of the annihilation effect is hidden, the post-operation presentation is performed. "Image relating to display change in the effect display device 1600 (background notice by princess character)" can finally be viewed in a clear state (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 430 (l)").

  That is, in this case, when the operation reception is made, first, it is possible to enjoy what aspect the aspect of the integrated bird's-eye view image IG was, and then it is possible to enjoy what aspect appears as an annihilation effect. Since it becomes possible to enjoy what kind of aspect appears as the effect after the operation, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the operation reception is made by such various effects.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the timing at which the display of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is started is not the timing tC4b, but the timing tC4c or the annihilation effect It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing as being within the period being executed (timing tC4c to tC4g). However, also in this case, the post-operation effect by the effect sound and the lamp is started to be executed at the timing tC4b, so the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains at the timing tC4b.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 428 (g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time has passed without the player's operation being detected (the first acceptance permission state has ended). As described above, since the first acceptance-permitted state is executed in an automatic acceptance mode, the post-operation effect is performed even when the set time has elapsed without any operation by the player. The haze image (here, the integrated haze image IG) is not displayed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 428 (b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the operation by the player is accepted even when the automatic button function is enabled, , The overhead view image (here, the integrated overhead view image) is not hidden and maintains the display state. More specifically, even when the automatic button function is enabled, at that time point (timing tC4f), a change resulting from it does not occur with respect to the haze image (here, the integrated haze image). Until the timing tC4fa at which a little time (predetermined time) has passed, the “display on the bag image” in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. There is. Further, in this example, the gauge image GG is left with a slight display area even when the state where the operation reception is permitted (second reception permission state) is ended, and the display area after the timing tC4f. The display area is reduced in the form of “0”.

  According to such a configuration, even when the post-operation effect is started by enabling the automatic button function, the cocoon image is displayed in any aspect (any one of a plurality of aspects having different expectations). It will be possible to check if it was.

  Also, in this example, the eyelid image is hidden (not visible) from the timing tC4c when the operation is accepted until the eyelid image is hidden (not visible) and the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is enabled. The time until it is made) is made to be the same.

  In this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), as shown in FIG. 428 (g), the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image IG) is not displayed. When the image is to be displayed, the wide area type annihilation effect is executed. While the wide area type annihilation effect is being executed, the haze image (here, the integrated haze image) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, an image relating to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 428 (c)) when the operation by the player is accepted, and when the automatic button function is activated. The image according to the wide area annihilation effect (FIG. 428 (g)) is performed in the same manner (any image is “image HSE”). This is a part different from the case shown in FIG. 427 (in the case where the narrow area annihilation effect when the bird's-eye view image is not displayed in the non-automatic reception mode is different from that at the time of operation).

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation reception is not in time for the last minute, the same mode appears as when the operation reception is in time. Can be encouraged to think that “the execution has started”, and it is expected to suppress the decline of the game entertainment interest.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 428, when a timing tC1 before the timing tC3 at which the first acceptance permission state occurs comes, execution of a wide-area pre-rendering operation using half or more of the predetermined display regions is started. (Corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 430 (b)”). Then, during the period in which the wide area type pre-production is being executed, display of the heel image (here, the integrated heel image IG) that looks at the operation receiving unit and the output of the first allowable sound are started ( Timing tC3, corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 430 (f)”. At the point in time when display of the cocoon image (here, the integrated 摸 image IG) is started, it becomes difficult to visually recognize a part or the whole of the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) by the image related to the wide area type front effect. ing. That is, according to the passage of time, the display range of the image according to the wide-area type front effect is reduced or the transmittance thereof is increased, so that “the overhead image (integrated overhead image "The effect of gradually increasing the visibility of) is provided (FIGS. 430 (f) to (h)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, the wide area type previous presentation is executed, and the first reception is received while the overhead image (here, the integrated overhead image IG) is displayed. The timing tC4 at which the allowable state occurs is reached, and the operation acceptance is permitted. In other words, in this case, since the acceptance of the operation is allowed at a stage where the visibility of the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) is improved, Confirm the mode (expectation) as the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) so that the operation is accepted (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation). After that, it is possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether the operation is accepted (post-operation effect) and is not displayed.

  Here, as an image used for such wide-area front rendition, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the overhead image (integrated overhead image IG) is displayed may be used. Displaying the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image) and the image (wide area type pre-rendering) as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image) is gradually enhanced It may be one that expresses how it goes.

  It should be noted that, in view of the fact that the wide-area type pre-representation implies the occurrence of a relatively high expectation of the first acceptance permissible state, unlike the case of the second acceptance permissive state, the effect display device 1600 It is desirable not only to display an image but also to output a production sound related to this. And it is good also as performing so that a part of effect sound concerning such a wide area type front effect may function as the 1st permissible sound.

  In addition, as a wide-area type pre-production, preparing a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, and selectively displaying one of these modes based on the result of the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination, It is desirable to improve the game interest.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 428 (c), the wide-area type pre-production according to this example is started when the timing tC1 within the “first variation pattern” arrives, and the first acceptance permission state occurs. It is executed across the timing tC4 and is ended within the set time of the first acceptance acceptable state. However, the first wide-area type pre-production and the second wide-area type pre-production are sequentially executed as the wide-area type pre-production between the start and end of such a wide-area type pre-production. It is like that. About these two wide area type pre-effects, it may be displayed as one animation data, and may be displayed as animation data different from each other.

  Here, the first wide area type previous effect is started when the timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430 (b)”), and the second wide area type previous effect is the timing The display starts in place of the first wide-area type pre-rendering when tC2 arrives (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430 (e)”), but any of these pre-renderings is displayed Even during the period, during the period in which the previous effect is displayed, “a habit image that looks like the operation means to be operated” is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 428 (c), when the timing tC1a within the period in which the first wide-area type pre-production is executed, the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed. This makes it possible to recognize at a relatively early stage which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430 (c)”). In FIG. 430 (c), the image HTH1 resulting from the first wide-area type pre-production is depicted as creating an “image in which the entire cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image) is outlined”. It is a mere whiteout state, and it can not be said that it is the image which looked over the production button which is the operation object. After this, the “image A1 in which the entire overhead view image (here, integrated overhead view image) is whitened” is at least the outline of the overhead view image (here, the integrated overhead view image) by at least one of the decoration and the pattern. The image is displayed as a framed image A2 (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430 (d)”), which suggests that the operation object is a rendering button. From this, it can be said that such an "image A2" is a bird's-eye image looking over the operation means to be operated. That is, it is executed as an effect that makes such an image A2 appear as if it were generated by the “image HTH1 by the first wide area type previous effect”. The “contour of a bird's-eye view image (here, integrated bird's-eye view image)” means the contour of the operation receiving unit (here, the contour of the operation receiving unit and the contour of the peripheral decoration image).

  However, when timing tC2 arrives, “image A2 as a bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye image)” and “image HTH1 according to the first wide-area type pre-representation”, which had been in the display state, are not displayed either The execution of the "second wide area type pre-rendering" is started in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 430 (e)"). Then, when the timing tC3 within the period in which the second wide-area type pre-effect is performed comes, the overhead view image (integrated overhead view image IG) is displayed again (“the situation shown in FIG. 430 (f)). Equivalently, a timing tC4 at which the first acceptance permission state occurs is reached in the displayed state (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430 (g)”). That is, the second bird's-eye view image (FIGS. 430 (f) to (k)) is continuously displayed until the operation acceptance is permitted and at least the operation is not permitted. The operation is accepted while the image is displayed, and the post-operation effect (here, the effect after the first operation) is started to be executed.

  That is, in this case, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance permission state, the pre-rendering is performed twice, and among those pre-renderings, “does not appear before the operation acceptance is permitted. The first bird's-eye view image (Fig. 430 (c), (d)) and "The second bird's-eye view image (Fig. 430 (f) to (k) continuing the display state even after the acceptance of the operation acceptance) According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a higher degree of freedom without taking into consideration the mode (such as the result of the effect determination) that should be displayed when the acceptance permission state is occurring. Since the overhead image (the overhead image (the first time the image is hidden before the operation acceptance is permitted) can be displayed under the effect design, the width of the effect can be expanded. In this sense, “operation acceptance is permitted The bird's-eye view image (first time) which is not displayed before "is displayed as an aspect (an aspect different from any of the aspects shown in FIG. 410) which can not be displayed when the operation acceptance is within a permitted period. It is desirable to do so.

  Here, the heel image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type front effect is being performed is the same as the heel image displayed while the narrow-area type front effect is being performed as described above. Since the display state is continued even after the state in which the operation acceptance is allowed occurs, it is displayed as one of a plurality of modes shown in FIG. 410 (in the example shown in FIG. 428). , An integrated bag image IGd) which is a special embodiment. On the other hand, for the haze image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type front effect is being performed, at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from any of the aspects shown in FIG. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image (in this case, the image A2). For example, the shape is expressed by deforming the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target, such as rounding the outline part of the eyelid image, or using many curves without using a lot of straight lines. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying as an image. In the narrow-area pre-rendering described above, an image having at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from that in the acceptance state does not appear.

  In addition, when the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, the habit image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type pre-production is performed is a plurality of images shown in FIG. Regardless of which mode is displayed, the habit image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type pre-production is being performed can be displayed in one mode (the same mode). It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, the first wide-area type pre-production can be used only for “indicating which type of operation means will soon be provided with an operation opportunity”. According to such a first wide-area type previous production, the player can be made to recognize the operation object without deteriorating the gaming interest, and thus the operation object can be recognized by the player. Therefore, the stage shifts to the second wide-area type preproduction where the degree of expectation is suggested.

  In order to suitably obtain such effects, the first wide-area type front effect is the operation means (sword decoration) on the side with higher expectation among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). It may be more desirable to be performed only when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001). In other words, in this case, either a case where an acceptance-permitted state where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 occurs, or a case where an acceptance-permitted state where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. However, prior to this, the wide area type front effect can be executed, but for the first wide area type front effect, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 have an operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001. It will be executable only when granted. In this case, the first reception permission state may be generated as a reception permission state in which an operation opportunity can be given only to the sword ornament 5001. On the other hand, the second wide-area type front effect is executed either when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. It is possible. At this time, the second wide-area type front effect is executed in the same manner when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. Alternatively, it may be executed in a different manner.

  Further, when the heel image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type front effect is performed is displayed as the integrated heel image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is included in the peripheral decoration image. Even in such a case, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed for the overhead image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area-type effect is being performed. You may make it display as an image which does not contain. In this case, needless to say, the shape as a haze image (integrated haze image) is different. At this time, the heel image may be displayed as an integrated heel image that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place. May be displayed.

  According to the above-described effect example, in the second acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 427, the spear image (integrated spear image IG) is not displayed in a special manner, and the first permissible sound is output as the permissible reception sound. However, the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptable state shown in FIG. 428, the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound are respectively accepted as acceptable sounds. It is possible to output. However, even in the first acceptance-permitted state shown in FIG. 428, even when a different aspect (low-expected aspect used in FIG. 427) is displayed as a spear image (integrated spear image IG). The acceptable reception sound is processed as described with reference to FIG. 428, and it goes without saying that the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can be output as the acceptable reception sound.

  At the start of the output of the second allowable sound (message sound), the image concerning the wide-area-type effect remains, and it is difficult to visually recognize the aspect of the overhead image (integrated overhead image IG). In a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the aspect of the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG), transition from a state in which only the first acceptable sound (sound effect) is output to a state in which a second acceptable sound (message sound) is also output Since it is possible, the possibility that the overhead view image (integrated overhead view image IG) is displayed in a special mode can be suggested by the acceptance sound. That is, if the second acceptable sound (message sound) is output, it is possible to have an expectation that the overhead image (integrated overhead image IGd) having the special aspect is exposed, Among them, the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG) comes to be exposed gradually.

  Although the integrated bird's-eye view image IG includes the display target area (section image KG) of the gauge image GG, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is displayed in either the low expectation mode (IGa) or the high expectation mode (IGd) Even in the case, the display target area of the gauge image GG (the target part where the gauge image GG is displayed and the part which increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, the remaining time is easily recognized regardless of the manner of the haze image.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 410, in the low expectation mode (IGa) and the high expectation mode (IGd), not only the overhead image but also the mode of the peripheral decoration image is different. Further, although the operation means (effect button and the like) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the overhead image, the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  According to the above-mentioned effect example, when in the predetermined gaming state, the reception permission state at the time of suppression where the operation reception is permitted while the specific effect sound is suppressed, and the specific effect sound is suppressed. Although there are a plurality of non-suppressed permitted states where operations can be accepted without being received, there are multiple cases, but the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is a special mode in the first accepted state among the permitted states at the time of suppressing While being able to be displayed, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG can not be displayed in the special mode (IGd) in the second mode of the non-suppressed state and is different from the special mode. Can be displayed. In the second acceptance permission state, the integrated bird's-eye view image IG is not selectively displayed from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) with different degrees of expectation excluding the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa) May be displayed only. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect sound is suppressed, it can be suppressed that the effect is less felt than in a case where the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance permission state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance permission state) and the second condition (second acceptance permission state) is satisfied. In this case, after displaying the integrated bag image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated bag image is one of the modes illustrated in FIGS. 417 to 421 (for example, the modes illustrated in FIGS. 420 and 421). ) Is used for display as described above. However, in the case where such a third acceptance permission state (a valid period during which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease) is generated, prior to this, “BGM playback sound (specific type) Display sound) is changed from the non-suppressed state to the suppressed state (or non-output state), and the post-operation display that does not appear in other acceptable reception states including the first acceptable reception state and the second acceptable reception state ( It is desirable that post-operation effects) and post-operation output sounds be executed. In other words, when the “accepted BGM playback” is set to the suppressed state (or the non-output state) when the acceptance permission state occurs, it is expected that a highly expected aspect (special aspect) is displayed as the integrated haze image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, only the “BGM playback sound” is inferior to the case where the sound is output in a non-suppressed manner. There is concern about a decline in interest. In this regard, in the third acceptance-permitted state, after allowing the appearance in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the post-operation display that appears only when this aspect appears is executed. Even if the special aspect does not appear as the integrated bird's-eye view image IG, it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in the game interest.

  However, in any of the first acceptance permission state and the third acceptance permission state, "sound of BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" in the suppression state (or non-output state) is triggered by the operation reception It is desirable that the display change and the post-operation output sound be executed while maintaining the suppression state (or the non-output state) without the output resuming in the non-suppression mode.

  In addition, even when the “BGM playback sound (specific type effect sound)” is in the reception-permitted state that occurs after the suppression state (or the non-output state) is set, Unlike the case of the one reception permission state, the integrated bag image IG is not displayed in a special mode, and can be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the “BGM playback sound (specific type effect sound)” is set to the suppressed state (or the non-output state), any of the first reception allowable state and the third reception allowable state is determined. It is possible to add interest about what occurs.

  Further, in the third acceptance-permitted state, it is executed as an effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. Instead, an aspect that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG (FIG. 425, FIG. The mode shown in FIG. 426 may be executed as an effective period during which the haze image (which may be an integrated haze image or not an integrated haze image) is displayed. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that similar effects can be achieved. Needless to say, in this case, the gauge image GG itself is not displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types having different generation conditions are prepared as the reception permission state, but this is a case where a reception permission state different from the first reception permission state occurs. However, it is desirable that the integrated bird's-eye view image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd) if this is an acceptance permitted state of a specific type. However, it is possible to execute the automatic acceptance mode for the reception allowance state in which the integrated bag image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd) in order to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when a forgetful operation occurs. Is desirable.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 428, the automatic button function is activated at a predetermined timing within the set time (valid period), but automatically when the set time (valid period) ends or after it ends. The button function may be activated, and execution of “the same post-operation effect as when a player's operation is accepted within the valid period” may be started. In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is activated is the same as the “processing from timing tC4f” shown in FIGS. 428 (g) and (h).

  With regard to the image applied to the annihilation effect shown in FIGS. 429 and 430, the image itself is set to a predetermined transmittance so that the image on the back side can be viewed though it is difficult. Good.

  According to the effect example shown in FIG. 427 to FIG. 430, when the operation by the player is accepted or the automatic button function is activated and the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the overhead image Both the aspect of the image conversion image IG) and the aspect of the gauge image GG are displayed in a state of good visual recognition without being difficult to visually recognize by the annihilation effect (FIG. 429 (f), See FIG. 430 (i)). This makes it possible to enjoy the post-operation presentation while recognizing in what manner the overhead image (integrated overhead image IG) is displayed and how long the remaining time is left, It will be possible to improve the game interest.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 429, even if the operation acceptance is made in the second acceptance permission state and the effect after operation (effect after second operation) is executed, the background image is displayed before and after the effect after operation is started. This is maintained without switching. On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 430, when the operation acceptance is made in the first acceptance permission state and the effect after operation (effect after the first operation) is executed, before and after the effect after operation is started The background image is switched (the space background after the operation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and even if the user forgets to perform the operation, the background image can be appropriately switched. Can progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the acceptance acceptance state where the automatic acceptance function is not activated, the background image is not changed, so that when the user forgets to operate, the background image is not switched or only the background image is displayed. It becomes possible to avoid an unfavorable event such as a sudden change.

  In addition, in the second acceptance permission state, after the operation acceptance (or the automatic button function activation) is performed, many parts of the display area can not be viewed by overlapping with the image HSE applied to the wide area annihilation effect. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, if there are only a few parts that do not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide area annihilation effect, the form after the operation is confirmed by confirming the image in that part. Can be recognized, and the demerit due to the execution of the wide area type extinction effect can be eliminated. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, when the operation is accepted in the second acceptance permitted state (or the automatic button function is enabled), the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing after the operation is relatively high. The background image when the post-operation effect is executed is made different between when the effect is executed and when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing is relatively low. Is more desirable. These percentages may be 0% or 100%. In this case, while the background image itself is changed when the effect after operation is executed in a mode in which the ratio of occurrence of the jackpot symbol is relatively high, the effect after operation in a mode in which the ratio of occurrence of the jackpot symbol is relatively low When this is executed, the background image may be maintained without being changed.

  In the example of the effect described above, when providing the operation opportunity, the effect sound of the specific type is output in the non-suppression mode (second acceptance acceptable state), and the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode There is a case where it is made non-output state (the first acceptance permission state), and the ratio (expected degree) that the post-operation effect is executed is different in a mode that appears only at the time of big hit depending on the type As a result, it is possible to improve performance when an operation opportunity is given. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in the first acceptance-permitted state, when the operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is set in a state of being output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state, and thereby when a post-operation effect is generated In order to make the production sound corresponding to this stand out, it is decided to make a production device. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the acceptable reception sound that is output when the first acceptable reception state occurs, if the production is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the production acceptance is performed. Since the output state is terminated based on this, it is possible to make the production sound according to the post-operation production stand out without being disturbed by the acceptable reception sound.

  A plurality of types are prepared as acceptance acceptance states in which integrated bird's-eye view image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd), but in any of these acceptance acceptance states, operation acceptance is performed when the reception acceptance sound is in the output state It is desirable that the acceptance permission sound be terminated halfway. On the other hand, a plurality of types are prepared as the acceptance permission state in which the integrated bird's-eye view image IG can not be displayed in the special mode (IGd), but when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state A reception permission state in which the reception permission sound is ended halfway when the operation reception is performed, and a reception permission state in which the reception permission sound is not ended halfway when the operation reception is performed when the reception permission sound is in the output state It is desirable to include both with the second acceptance status (such as may occur under different conditions).

  As described above, there are sound effects and message sounds in the acceptance acceptable sound. In this regard, the message sound is always interrupted when an effect is received even when the integrated bag image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), whereas the sound effect is When the integrated haze image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), it is not interrupted when it is interrupted when the presentation is received when in the output state (first reception allowable state). It is desirable that there be a time (second acceptance acceptable state). It is desirable that a plurality of types of acceptable reception states including the first acceptable reception state are prepared as acceptable reception states in which the message sound is output.

  The wide-area pre-representation shown in FIG. 428 and FIG. 430 is realized by sequentially executing the first wide-area pre-representation and the second wide-area pre-representation. In this regard, in both the first wide-area type pre-production and the second wide-area type pre-production, a cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) in which the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target is displayed is displayed in both of the previous productions. However, the cocoon image A2 displayed within the execution period of the first wide-area type pre-production is the cocoon image (integrated ＩＧ image IG) displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state (first acceptance-permitted state). Is not a gradual change to the overhead view image (integrated overhead view image IG).

  That is, the bird's-eye view image A2 (FIG. 430 (d)) displayed in the first wide-area type front effect is not displayed when the second wide-area type front effect is executed prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance permission state. The display state is set (a state where it cannot be visually recognized). Then, after a predetermined period of time in which no bird's-eye view of the operation object is displayed (maintained as a non-visible state) (FIG. 430 (e)), as a bird's-eye view within the execution period of the second wide area type pre-rendering An image different from the bag image A2 displayed in the first wide area type previous effect is displayed (FIG. 430 (f)). Then, this "browsing image within the execution period of the second wide-area type previous effect" is the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG) itself displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state (first acceptance acceptable state). The overhead view image (integrated overhead view image IG) is displayed by being displayed in the form of straddling the occurrence of the acceptance acceptance state (the first acceptance acceptance state) together with the image HSE according to the second wide area type prior rendering. Acceptance of operations will be permitted. Then, the overhead view image (integrated overhead view image IG) is displayed also at the time when the operation acceptance is performed and the execution after the operation is started to be performed (FIG. 430 (i)). It is displayed over a period from before the occurrence of the acceptance status to the end.

  Here, when the bird's-eye view image A2 is displayed in the wide-area type pre-effect (the first wide-area type pre-effect), the operation means (operation receiving portion) with which the 摸 image A2 is out soon Operation opportunities will always be granted. That is, in the example of the above-described effect, the overhead image A2 is made non-displayed in a place where the reception permission state is generated while maintaining the display state of the overhead image A2, and the operation target "A state in which no bird's-eye view image is not displayed" is generated, and then the bird's-eye view image looking over the operation means (the operation receiving unit) is an image (A2) different from the first image (A2) An integrated bird's eye view image IG) is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, in order to suggest that a reception allowance state with high expectation occurs, operation reception is allowed even when a habit image is displayed for a long time as a previous effect. It will be expected to prompt the operation without delaying the timing. In other words, if a habit image is displayed over a long period of time as a pre-production, and an acceptable state is generated while the ivy image is being displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance is allowed suddenly arrives. In other words, operation delays may occur frequently even though the previous performance is being executed. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance-permitted state, a cocoon image having a depiction different from that displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state is preceded. In addition to the display, after a period of time during which no haze image is displayed, a haze image that is displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state is displayed. In other words, the player can be made aware that the first acceptance-permitted state can occur only within the period after the heel image displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for an operation delay to occur while displaying a habit image for a long time as a previous effect.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the “second wide-area type front effect is executed after the execution of the second wide-area type front effect” rather than “the time required for the first wide-area type front effect” and “the time during which the bag image A2 is displayed”. It is more preferable to set such that “time until the 1st reception permission state occurs” and “time until the first reception permission state occurs after the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) is displayed” are shorter. It is clear that this is desirable. The overhead image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide area type previous effect.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) displayed in the second wide-area type front effect is “operation in the movable region” as the operation means (operation receiving unit). ”And“ behavior when operated ”are displayed dynamically (see FIG. 411 and the like), while the image A2 displayed in the first wide-area type front effect is like this It is more desirable to display without dynamic display. It should be noted that the haze image (integrated haze image IG) displayed in the second wide-area type front effect continues its dynamic display state even after the first acceptance permission state occurs. In addition, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) displayed in the narrow-area type front effect also expresses the “movement in the movable area” and “behavior when operated” as the operation means (operation receiving part). This is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display state is continued even after the second acceptance permission state occurs.

  The bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 430 (f) and the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG) in the state shown in FIG. Although they are the same, the transmittance may be varied.

  It is more desirable to display the image KTH related to the narrow-area type front effect shown in FIG. 429 as an image having a size that can cover the entire haze image (integrated haze image IG) from the front side. . Then, by performing at least one of the reduction of the display area of the image KTH or the increase of the transmittance thereof, the （image (integrated 摸 image IG) is displayed from the position where the image KTH is displayed. ) Is desirably displayed in such a manner that it gradually appears over time.

  Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 related to the wide area type front effect shown in FIG. 430, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the haze image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the haze image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the haze image (integrated haze image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the haze image (integrated haze image IG)). That is, the image HTH2 is displayed as an image of a size that can cover the entire haze image (integrated haze image IG) from the front side, like the image KTH related to the narrow area type front effect (FIG. 430 ( e)) By reducing the display area or increasing the transmittance, the image HTH2 is displayed from the position where the image HTH2 is displayed (integrated image IG). Is a mode that is gradually exposed as time passes. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed so as to make the depiction of the eyelid image A2 stand out, the disadvantage of making it difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image when giving an operation opportunity (any operation) It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not an operation opportunity is given to the means, and an operation delay occurs).

  The wide-area type pre-production is performed by sequentially executing the first wide-area type pre-production and the second wide-area type pre-production, but for the production sound output in the wide-area type pre-production, these are stored as one sound data (1 It is desirable to be output by playing back one sound effect (music).

  Further, in the narrow area type front effect shown in FIG. 429, the background image displayed from before is maintained without being changed in the narrow area type front effect, but the wide area type shown in FIG. In the pre-production, the background image displayed before this is changed in the wide-area type pre-production (here, changed at the start of the wide-area type pre-production). In such a configuration, since the background change can be executed as a part of the wide-area type pre-production, it is more effective when compared with the narrow-area type pre-production that remains in the partial production change. It will be executed as a production. It should be noted that the background image (FIG. 429 (a)) that was displayed before the narrow-area type front effect was performed, and the background image (FIG. 430 (FIG. 430) that was displayed before the wide-area type front effect was performed. It may be a background image different from a)).

  In the second wide-area type front effect shown in FIG. 430 (f), an integrated haze image integrated with “a peripheral decorative image in which a section image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)”. In the first wide-area type front effect shown in FIG. 430 (d), a cocoon image in which such a partitioned image KG is not decorated (depicted) is displayed. Thus, in the first broad-area type front effect, it is possible to enjoy the front effect without making the player mind at least the remaining time. Note that the cocoon image on which the section image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be any image that does not display the section image KG that is decorated (depicted) in the integrated cocoon image IG. In addition to the mode in which the decoration (gauge area) is not displayed, a mode in which the shape itself is different from the integrated bag image IG may be used.

  As described above, "accepting an operation when a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state is permitted, and is performed in an automatic acceptance mode" A plurality of occurrence conditions (such as fluctuation patterns) are prepared differently, and the “first acceptance acceptable state” is prepared as one of the acceptance acceptable states. However, the first wide-area-type effect (FIG. 430 (c) to (e)) in which the bird's-eye view image is displayed and made non-displayed in these acceptance acceptable states and the form across the occurrence timing of acceptance acceptable states. In addition to the first acceptance permission state in which the second wide-area type previous presentation (FIGS. 430 (e) to (g)) in which the bird's-eye view image is displayed is performed, "the bird's-eye view image is displayed and not displayed. The first wide-area type pre-rendering is not performed, and the specific reception permission where the second wide-area type pre-rendering effect (Figures 430 (e) to (g)) is displayed in which the bird's-eye view image is displayed It is desirable to include the state. That is, in this case, in the first acceptance permission state, the rate at which the post-operation effect is performed is higher than the specific acceptance permission state in a mode that appears only at the time of big hit, so that the timing at which the operation acceptance is allowed Amusement entertainment can be enhanced from the time when the previous timing (the timing at which the first wide-area type front effect appears) has arrived. In this case, the second wide-area type front effect performed when the first acceptance permission state occurs and the second wide-area type front effect performed when the specific acceptance permission state occurs may not necessarily have the same content, and It may be executed as different contents (images). The operation means to which the operation opportunity is given may be different between the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state.

  As described above, “the operation acceptance is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the non-suppression mode, and the acceptance permission state executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode” is a generation condition (variation A plurality of patterns and the like are prepared, and a “second reception permission state” is prepared as one of these reception permission states.

  The wide-area type pre-production that is performed in the first acceptance-permitted state is executed in a situation where “specific type of production sound (BGM playback)” is suppressed or not output. (BGM playback) "is executed for a longer time than the narrow-area type pre-production (second acceptance-allowed state) that is executed in the non-suppressed state, so that this is suitably maintained for the game entertainment Will be able to. In particular, the first wide-area type pre-production only among the wide-area type pre-productions is executed over a longer period of time than the narrow-area type pre-production, so that it is suitable for amusement entertainment from a long time before the admission allowed state occurs To be able to increase. The timing at which the “specific type of effect sound (BGM playback)” is suppressed or not output may arrive while the first wide-area type pre-production is being executed or before the first wide-area type sound. You may make it come before the production starts.

  According to the above-described example of the effect, when the wide-area type front effect (FIG. 430) is performed at the occurrence of the first acceptance permission state, the effect change including the background image is produced, but at the occurrence of the second acceptance permission state When the narrow-area type pre-production (FIG. 429) is performed, the background image is not changed, and the change is produced while maintaining the background image. Furthermore, in the first acceptance permission state that occurs while such wide-area type pre-representation is being performed, the background image can be further changed by post-operation rendition (automatic acceptance mode) regardless of whether or not the operation has been performed. In the second acceptance permission state that occurs while narrow-area pre-representation is being performed, the rendition is made to progress while maintaining this without changing the background image by post-operation rendition There is. According to such a configuration, the background image is changed twice before and after the first acceptance permission state in relation to the occurrence of this, so compared with the second acceptance permission state, the effect thereof It will be possible to greatly enhance the sex, it will be possible to encourage more concentration to the operation-related presentation.

  In the wide area type disappearance effect according to the above-described effect example, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 430 (j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may come later than the timing at which the wide area annihilation effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 430 (i), execution of the post-operation effect (background notice by the princess character) is started while the background image is not changed. Then, after the execution of the effect after the operation is started in this way, the wide area type disappearance effect first makes the background image displayed when it is in the reception permission state difficult or not visible (FIG. 430 (j) And the background image is changed by displaying another background image thereafter (the situation shown in FIG. 430 (k)), or The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. Other background images may be displayed in a manner of being gradually exposed in the presence of the wide area annihilation effect, or may be displayed after the wide area annihilation effect is finished. May be

  In the example shown in FIG. 430, as a post-operation effect, first, execution of a display change in the liquid crystal display (background notice by the princess character) is started, but instead, light emission by the lamp and output sound after the operation are performed. After the operation, the execution may be started first, and the display change in the liquid crystal display may be delayed (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed) to start the execution.

  As described above, a plurality of “acceptance acceptance states that are executed in the automatic acceptance mode and the wide area type disappearance effect is executed” are prepared in different generation conditions (variation patterns and the like). One of the "first acceptance permission status" is prepared. However, in these acceptance-permitted states, in addition to the “first acceptance-permitted state”, “post-operation effects (first post-operation effects) in the same manner as the first acceptance-permitted state can be executed, It is desirable to include a “special reception permission state” that is executed as a different image (the display timing may be the same). In other words, in this case, even if the same post-operation effect is performed, the disappearance effect will be different, so that it is possible to improve the performance, and it is expected to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest. become. The special reception permission state may be the above-described specific reception permission state. The specific reception permission state and the special reception permission state are executed in the same manner as the first reception permission state with respect to the display timing of the haze image, the processing related to the output of the reception permission sound, the processing related to the disappearance effect, and the like. .

  As described above, a plurality of “acceptance acceptance states in which the narrow-area annihilation effect is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode” are prepared in different generation conditions (variation patterns, etc.). As one of them, a “second reception permission state” is prepared. However, in these acceptance-permitted states, in addition to the “second acceptance-permitted state”, “post-operation effects of a type different from the second acceptance-permitted state (for example, conversation advance notice, movable body operation, etc.) However, it is desirable to include a special acceptance allowable state in which the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed as the same image (the display timing may be the same). That is, in this case, even if different post-operation effects are performed, the disappearance effect itself will be displayed as the same image, so it is easy to accept the operation regardless of the type of post-operation effects. To be able to recognize. The special reception permission state is executed in the same manner as the second reception permission state with respect to the display timing of the haze image, the processing related to the output of the reception allowable sound, the processing related to the disappearance effect, and the like.

  In the narrow area type disappearance effect, the image KSE related to the narrow area type disappearance effect is not displayed even when the haze image (integrated haze image IG) is hidden after the start of the post-operation effect. And the display state is maintained (see FIG. 429 (i)). In this regard, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) is longer than the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation effect is started) until the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) is hidden. It is desirable to set the time until the image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect is not displayed after it is hidden. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect can be confirmed while maintaining the display state of the heel image (integrated 摸 image IG) after the start of the post-operation effect. The reason why the image is not clearly exposed is not caused by the “an image with the display state maintained”, but is caused by the performance by the “image KSE related to the narrow area disappearance effect”. As it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game entertainment. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow area type disappearance effect is performed not by a fade-out that ends relatively early, but by dynamic display using an image different from the haze image. For such “dynamic display with different images” as a narrow area type disappearance effect, multiple types with different degrees of expectation are prepared and selectively appear according to the types of acceptable reception states with different generation conditions. It is more desirable to do so.

  According to the wide area type disappearance effect according to the above-mentioned example of presentation, it is possible to expect a function that suggests that the first acceptance permission state has been executed in the automatic acceptance mode. On the other hand, in the second reception-permitted state, since the operation is accepted only by the player's operation and the post-operation effect is not executed, it is easy to recognize that the post-operation effect is executed without affecting the entire screen. It can be said that it is advantageous that the image according to the annihilation effect is executed by a small narrow-area annihilation effect in that the effect after the operation can be immediately executed in a good visual recognition state. According to such a configuration, it is required to change from the background image to secure its visibility in the case of the wide-area annihilation defect, but in the case of the narrow-area annihilation defect, the background image is not changed. It is possible to ensure visibility only by performing effects after operation while maintaining the.

  As described above, in the second acceptance permission state, a plurality of modes in which the ratio (or 0% or 100%) at which the big hit symbol is stopped is different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination (first embodiment The post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed in any one of the cases (including the second mode). In this respect, in the case where the first mode (a mode having a relatively high ratio) appears and the second mode (a mode having a relatively low ratio) appear as effects after operation (effects after the second operation), In either case, the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first acceptance permission state, a plurality of modes (the third aspect) in which the percentage (may be 0% or 100%) that the big hit symbol is stopped is different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination In addition, the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed in any one of the fourth mode. In this respect, when the third mode (a relatively high ratio mode) appears and the fourth mode (a relatively low ratio mode) appears as an effect after operation (effect after the first operation), When the wide area annihilation effect is executed in different aspects (images) from each other, or when the third aspect (an aspect having a relatively high ratio) appears, the global area annihilation effect is executed, and the fourth aspect (relative It is desirable that the narrow-type extinction effect be executed when a mode with a low ratio appears. The narrow area annihilation effect at this time may be the same as or different from the narrow area annihilation effect performed corresponding to the second acceptance allowable state.

  According to such a configuration, in the first reception permission state in which the wide-area annihilation effect may occur in the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state, the annihilation effect itself has a degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the low visibility of the post-operation effect by the wide area type disappearance effect. It should be noted that, in addition to the first acceptance permissible state and the second acceptance permissible state, the fourth acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state, which will be described later, are both in the variation pattern lost in the jackpot and the variation pattern won in the jackpot. The first fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern described above, and further, the fourth fluctuation pattern and the fifth fluctuation pattern described later indicate that “the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing (at the time of selection failure) It is needless to say that they are prepared in pairs.

  Further, the second acceptance allowable state may be generated not only in the second variation pattern but also in the first variation pattern. For example, the second acceptance permission state is generated at a relatively early timing in the first variation pattern, and then the first acceptance permission state is generated at a relatively late timing.

  Timing when display output (display on the layer) related to the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) ends within the period in which the image of the extinction effect is displayed (timing from when the operation is accepted until it is hidden) May be different between the first allowable reception state and the second allowable reception state.

  When an operation is accepted in "a situation where the image KTH according to the narrow area type pre-representation is displayed" shown in FIG. 429 (d), the image KTH is not made to hide with this as a trigger. It is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while the display of the image KTH is continued. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 429 (f). After that, when the narrow area annihilation effect is started to be executed, the “image KSE applied to the narrow area annihilation effect” becomes difficult to be recognized or not visually recognized by the “image KSE applied to the narrow area annihilation effect”. It is desirable to develop the presentation as

  In addition, even when an operation is accepted in the “situation in which the image HTH2 related to the wide area type front effect is displayed” shown in FIG. 430 (g), the image HTH2 is not displayed. Instead, it is desirable to make the post-operation effect start to be performed while the display of the image HTH2 is continued. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 430 (i). After that, when the execution of the wide area type disappearance effect is started, the “image HTH2 related to the wide area type previous effect” is made difficult or invisible due to the “image HSE related to the wide area type disappearance effect”. It is desirable to improve the production.

  In the example shown in FIG. 428, in the case where operation acceptance is permitted while "effect sound of a specific type (BGM playback)" is not output, the effect sound of the "specific type ( "Background music" does not have to be re-output before the symbol is stopped. For example, at timing tC6, any of the "rendering sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction)" already in a non-output state, and the "rendering sound according to the effect after the operation" started to be output triggered by the operation acceptance Alternatively, a new special effect sound may be started to be output. The special effect sound is not output-started upon receipt of an operation, but is output-started based on arrival of a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern.

  The image related to the wide-area type pre-production and the image related to the narrow-type pre-production are displayed until the set time of the acceptance allowable state is completed (or until the automatic reception button is functioned). Also good. Further, the output state of the first allowable sound may be maintained until the setting time of the reception allowable state is ended (or until the automatic reception button is functioned).

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the cocoon image that looks like the operation receiving unit is displayed as both the wide area type front effect and the narrow area type front effect, but in the wide area type front effect (first wide area type front effect). It is made to be displayed in a mode (image data) different from a mode (image data) appearing in a period (the first reception permission state) in which the operation reception is permitted. Thereby, in the wide-area type pre-production (first wide-area type pre-production), even if the overhead image is displayed when the operation reception is not yet permitted, the operation reception is permitted. Appealing to the occurrence of an operation reception effect (reception acceptable state) can be performed while making it less likely to cause an erroneous recognition, and thereby a large-scale front effect requiring a relatively long time can be performed become. In the second wide-area pre-rendering and narrow-area prerendering, the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image) is displayed as it is in the mode (image data) that appears in the permitted period (acceptable state) It becomes more and more exposed as the pre-rendering effect is hidden (the display area decreases). That is, in this case, the bird's-eye view image displayed on the specific layer when the acceptance permission state occurs continues to be displayed from before the occurrence of the acceptance permission state until after the occurrence. The same applies to the fourth acceptance permission state described later.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the acceptance permission state executed in the "suppression operation acceptance effect" in which the effect sound of the specific type can be suppressed has a relatively high suppression degree or a non-output state In addition to the first acceptance permission state executed in the “strong suppression mode (the first mode shown in FIG. 428)”, the “weak suppression mode (the second mode shown in FIG. 427) having a relatively low suppression degree As described above, a plurality of types including at least the fourth acceptance permission state to be executed according to) are prepared. In this case, the effect sound of the specific type to be suppressed may be a different effect sound or the like, and for example, it may be output as a effect sound having the same function, such as a effect sound for BGM reproduction. Just do it.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (valid period) during which operation reception is allowed occurs, it is possible to provide a performance as to how much the specific type of performance sound is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on which of the "weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance acceptable state)" and the "strong suppression mode (the first acceptance acceptable state)" has occurred. It is desirable to make the proportions of appearance of symbols differ. Here, the ratio (expected degree) to be executed in a mode in which the “post-operation effect according to the operation reception” appears only at the time of the big hit when the “weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance acceptable state)” occurs is If the “strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptable state)” occurs, the “post-operation effect according to the operation acceptance” is lower than the rate (expected degree) executed in the mode that appears only at the time of winning the big hit ing. The ratio may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, for the "weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance acceptable state)", the effect according to the high expectation change pattern developed to SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) and even the reach state are not formed (or reach Although a state can be formed, it does not develop to SP reach) “It is possible to appear in any of the effects according to the low expectation fluctuation pattern, but“ strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptable state)) "" Does not occur in the low expectation effect pattern, but may be generated as an effect corresponding to the high expectation change pattern. Even with such a configuration, the jackpot expectation when the "weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance acceptable state)" occurs is lower than that when the "strong suppression mode (the first acceptance acceptable state)" occurs. It can be said.

  In order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more suitably, it is possible to generate a “special effect state” that can be shifted based on the fact that the special effect condition is satisfied, and in the “special effect state”, the player Each time an operation is accepted during a set time (valid period) during which an operation promotion image (such as a bag image or gauge display) that prompts an operation is displayed, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) It is desirable that after the operation according to the operation reception is performed (started), the rendition is performed while the control is being suppressed. According to such a “special effect state”, each time a set time (valid period) during which operation reception is allowed occurs, how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed. (Which of multiple modes including weak suppression mode and strong suppression mode appears) can be provided, and such performance can be provided separately from the degree of expectation suggested by post-operation effects. Since the degree of expectation is suggested also by (how much it is suppressed), it is expected to further improve the game entertainment at the time when the reception of the performance is permitted. In this case, the above-described second reception allowance state does not occur in the “special effect state”, but can be generated in an effect state (normal effect state) different from this.

  In addition, a variation pattern (for example, a high expectation variation pattern) in which “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)” and “strong suppression mode (first reception permission state)” can be sequentially executed within the symbol variation. Among them, effects corresponding to specific fluctuation patterns may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the “weak suppression mode (first acceptance permission state)” on the side with relatively low expectation occurs, the “strong suppression mode (first acceptance permission state) on the side with relatively high expectation”. ) ”May remain, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound is small (weak suppression mode). It will be.

Moreover, in order to more preferably suppress the decrease in game entertainment when the "weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance acceptable state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (the first acceptance acceptable state)"
-When a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly anticipated variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach performance with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the performance determination Even if any result is obtained as (preliminary judgment etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern is generated when it progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, while “weak suppression mode (first suppression About the operation receptionist production) "
Even if the specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production determination (notice determination, etc.), it does not occur even if the production of the specific variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (predictive determination or the like), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern occurs when the effect has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance permission state)" occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance permission state)" is the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern The rate at which performance after operation is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation when the effect is accepted in the “strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptable state)” compared to when it did not occur (an aspect that appears only at the time of big hit It is desirable to increase the rate of execution at

  In such a configuration, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptable state)" always occurs in the effect corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern, whereas the "weak suppression aspect (fourth acceptance acceptable state)" When it does not necessarily occur and the "weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance acceptable state)" occurs, a high expectation degree after operation production is executed in the "strong suppression mode (the first acceptance acceptable state)" Since the ratio becomes higher, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance acceptable state)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance acceptable state)" ) Can be improved.

  However, the “weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptance acceptable state)” may not necessarily occur with the same variation pattern as the “strong suppression mode (the first acceptance acceptable state)”, for example, “the strong suppression aspect The “first acceptance acceptable state” may be generated in the first variation pattern, and the “weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptable state)” may be generated in the fourth variation pattern.

  FIG. 431 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance permissible state is generated under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 431 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the variation pattern in which the fourth acceptance permission state occurs.

  Now, for example, assuming that the fourth variation pattern is selected as a result of the start condition being satisfied (hold and taken) in the above “special effect state” and the variation pattern determination is performed, the surrounding control MPU 1511 a First, an effect determination (for example, an advance notice determination) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and notice is made within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “fourth variation pattern” itself.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is as shown in FIG. 431 (b). In addition, when the timing tD3 when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative design SZ is reached, the fourth reception permission state (valid period) in which the operation reception regarding the fourth post-operation effect is permitted. Is generated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptance permission state (valid period),
Set a set time (valid period) in which operation acceptance is permitted in the "non-suppressed mode" in which "sound of BGM playback" corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is output, but within the set time (valid period) When the operation is accepted in the above-described manner, the “accepted BGM playback” is changed from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (a mode in which the suppression degree is relatively low). 431 (a) and (b)) and when the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tD3 to tD4) in which the operation acceptance is permitted, the operation corresponding to the fourth acceptance acceptable state “Non-automatic reception mode (refer to FIG. 431 (h))” that does not generate a post-production (post-operation after-production)
It is made to generate as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception effect" executed by In addition, as a method of outputting the "sound of BGM reproduction" in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (maximum "100") for the channel to which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is assigned is the case of the strong suppression mode (for example, A method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, a volume value (audible volume) “10”) whose suppression degree is lower than the volume value (audible volume “0”) can be adopted.

  According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic acceptance effect (fourth acceptance acceptable state)", "a specific type of effect sound (BGM unless the operation is accepted by the operation by the player. It is shown that "non-suppression reception effect (first acceptance permission state)" shown in FIG. 427 is generated because the state of "the sound of reproduction) is not shifted to the state of being output in the suppression mode". Will be able to. That is, in this case, it is recognized for the first time that it is not "suppression reception effect" by changing to "a state in which the effect sound of a specific type (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode" Since it becomes possible, it is possible to improve the game interest by providing a surprise effect.

  In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, the fourth variation enables “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 431)” to be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (preliminary determination etc.) The pattern can be selected only when it is in a special effect state (for example, a pre-reading effect zone or the like), and when it is in the special effect state, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (figure 427) "The percentage of big hit symbols appearing when symbol variation is stopped than when it is in the normal effect state where variation patterns that can be generated depending on the result of presentation determination (such as advance notice determination) can be selected (expected degree) ) Should be high. According to such a configuration, when “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production (FIG. 427)” appears. Thus, the above-mentioned surprise effect elements can be combined to improve the game entertainment.

  Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-described effects more suitably, the “strong suppression mode (first reception permitted state)” can be generated in both “normal production state” and “special production state”. In the “normal production state”, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production (FIG. 427)” is performed within the production according to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern that is paired at the time of winning). ) ”And“ suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 428) ”can be generated in sequence, and in“ special effect state ”, there is one variation pattern (one pair that has been paired at the moment) “Constrained suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 431)” and “Suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 428)” It is desirable to be able to occur.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”, when the set time (valid period) has elapsed without receiving the operation, the “specific sound effect (BGM playback sound) Will be progressed to the subsequent rendering without being shifted to the state of being output in the weak suppression mode. In other words, in this case, whether “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurred, and therefore, “normal effect state” and “special effect state” Since it is difficult to recognize which situation is present, the production after that will be advanced, so the expectation level is relatively low. Even when the “operation reception effect (effective period)” occurs, it is possible to more actively encourage the player to perform the operation.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic acceptance effect (FIG. 431)” and “non-suppression / non-automatic acceptance effect (FIG. 427)” In the case where "" occurs, the same effect sound is output over the same period of time as the above-mentioned acceptance acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound), thereby also "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic acceptance effect" (FIG. 431) ”and“ Non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 427) ”are made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 431)”, similarly to the case where “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 427)” occurs,
a. Prior to accepting the operation, a narrow-area type front effect is performed at timing tD1,
b. When a timing tD2 slightly before the set time occurs comes to start outputting the "acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)", and the output state is maintained in a form straddling the timing tD2. point,
c. The second permissible sound (for example, message sound) is not output, and the first permissible sound (for example, sound effect) is output.
d. When the timing tD2 slightly before the set time has arrived, the effect display device 1600 displays an image (an integrated image) that tricks the operation means that is the operation target in the operation reception effect. And a gauge image showing the remaining time until the set time has elapsed,
e. Even if an operation is accepted while the acceptable sound is being output, the acceptable sound that is in the output state will not be terminated halfway,
f. When the operation is accepted, the haze image (integrated haze image) and the gauge image are not hidden and the display state is continued g. Execute a narrow-band annihilation effect while the overhead image (integrated overhead image) and the gauge image are displayed, and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow area disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow area disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the operation is accepted. Each configuration is also adopted, and this also causes either “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 431)” or “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 427)”. It is difficult to recognize what you are doing. According to such a configuration, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptable reception sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the “specific type effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weak suppression mode. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the state has been changed to “a state in which it is performed”, it is expected that a sense of tension is suitably maintained every time an effect is received.

  Therefore, as a display method of a spear image, a gauge image, a narrow area type pre-production, and a narrow area type disappearance effect, as in the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 427)” occurs, for example, FIG. It is desirable to adopt the method shown, and it is desirable to adopt the same mode as the effect example shown in FIG. 427 as to the timing at which those images are not displayed. However, it is not necessary to necessarily adopt the same mode.

  In addition, even in "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic acceptance effect (Fig. 431)", when operation acceptance is performed within the set time (effective period) (timing tD3a in the figure), operation acceptance is performed. As an after-operation effect, at least an after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and an after-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated It has become. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, with regard to the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), even if the effect reception is made at any timing within the set time (effective period), it is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tD4. On the other hand, with regard to the post-operation output sound (rendering sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the operation reception is performed. However, even when the effect is accepted at any timing, when the timing tD4 has not ended, both the after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the after-operation output sound (effect sound) are output. It is required to set to maintain the state.

  Other than the effect example shown in FIG. 427 or 429, regarding the acceptance acceptable sound and the operation related display appearing in “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect production (FIG. 431)”, the previous effect, the annihilation effect, and the post operation effect. It is possible to adopt an example and a modification suitably, and it is desirable to try to use the same method mutually.

  In this production example, regarding the length of time (a predetermined time) in which “BGM playback sound” is output in a weakly suppressed manner, “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (first Even when the operation is accepted at the latest timing tD4 in the set time (valid period) of “4 acceptance permissible state” ”, the timing for ending the weak suppression mode is the end timing of the effect sound related to the post-operation effect. It is set to be the same or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode for the “BGM playback sound” ends may be set to be always the same as the timing at which the post-operation effect effect sound ends. In any of such configurations, the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted can be highlighted.

  By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) occurs, the degree of suppression is high (strongly suppressed mode or first output acceptable non-output state) or low ( As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether or not the fourth mode of acceptance of the weak suppression mode). However, when a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed, it is estimated whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether the strong suppression mode or the non-output mode or the weak suppression mode) Even if it tries, it is difficult to guess without comparison object whether it exists in a high suppression state (strong suppression aspect or non-output) or a low state (weak suppression aspect) in fact. This is especially true when there is no significant difference in the volume value when suppressed between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this creates a sense of tension when an operation acceptance effect occurs. Can be suitably maintained, and the player can be attracted to the performance.

  However, in actuality, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced if it is impossible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect element which helps to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is within the period from the start of the operation reception effect to the end thereof. The following preparations will be made in a time-series manner.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound that is output when the fourth permissible reception state is generated is output midway even if the presentation is accepted when in the output state. The first permissible sound that is output when the first permissible acceptance state is generated is accepted when the first permissible state is in the output state, whereas it is output for a predetermined time without being terminated. Based on the reception of the production, the output is terminated halfway. In such a configuration, since the first allowable sound itself is also provided with a function that helps to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, the game can not be performed because the estimation can not be performed. It can be suppressed that interest is lowered.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, since the second acceptable sound is output in addition to the first acceptable sound when the first acceptance acceptable state is generated, the second allowable By checking whether or not the sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound may not necessarily be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in any of the first acceptance permissible state and the fourth acceptance permissible state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the presentation reception is permitted includes a special mode in the first reception permission state. Display in any one of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 410 (a) to (d)), while in the fourth acceptance allowable state, any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 410 (a) to (c)) excluding the special mode. Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is not possible to estimate whether the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is in effect when the output of the acceptance sound or the operation related display is finished. Also, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the execution mode of the effect after operation. That is, in the effect after the operation according to the fourth acceptance permission state (effect after the fourth operation), both of the “effect by the liquid crystal display” and the “effect by the effect sound” are constant since “when the effect is accepted” In the effect after operation according to the first acceptance permission state (effect after the first operation), the "effect by the effect sound" is "a certain time from the time when the effect is accepted" while "it is performed over time". However, the “effect by liquid crystal display” is “finished when a predetermined timing arrives”. That is, in this case, in the effect after the operation according to the first acceptance permission state, the time from the end of the “effect by the liquid crystal display” to the end of the “effect by the effect sound” is Since it becomes variable and a large shift comes to occur, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming such a shift.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the execution mode of the pre-rendering effect or the annihilation effect in the acceptance permission state is confirmed to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. You can also. That is, in the preceding effect and the annihilation effect according to the fourth acceptance permission state, an image according to the previous effect and an image according to the annihilation effect are displayed in a relatively narrow area, and the background image is not changed at that time. However, in the previous effect or annihilation effect according to the first acceptance permission state, an image applied to the previous effect or an image applied to the annihilation effect is displayed in a relatively wide area, or the background image is changed at that time. It is supposed to be accompanied. By confirming such an aspect, it can be estimated whether it is a strong suppression aspect or a weak suppression aspect.

  However, even if production elements that are useful for guessing are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are strong suppression modes or weak suppression modes. If there is something that can't be guessed, the game entertainment will eventually decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception permitted state (weak suppression mode), the BGM playback effect sound is generated based on the fact that the effect is received within the set time (valid period). A weak suppression mode is adopted. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permission state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the setting sound of BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the setting time (effective period) is not generated yet. In the mode, a set time (valid period) is generated and the production can be accepted. According to such a structure, the timing which suppresses a specific type effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a 4th reception permission state (weak suppression mode) and a 1st reception permission state (strong suppression mode). Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

  Moreover, in the fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the operation detection is performed within the set time (effective period). If there is not, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 431 (h)). That is, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by operation reception for a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM playback) is also performed. Since there is no compensation for being unable to confirm the effect after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

  Moreover, in the 1st reception acceptance | permission state (strong suppression aspect or non-output) concerning this embodiment, the timing which the process which makes the "BGM reproduction effect sound" the strong suppression aspect is complete | finished is the completion | finish timing of post-operation production. It is set to be the same as or earlier than that. Accordingly, in the fourth acceptance-permitted state (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the processing for changing the “BGM playback effect sound” to the weak suppression mode is finished so that it can come after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by checking the timing when the “BGM playback effect sound” is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  In addition, as described above, in the fourth reception permission state according to the above-described effect example, the operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is performed regardless of which timing is received within the set time (effective period). The length of the period in which the post-display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (rendering sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permission state, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the timing at which the effect is accepted within the set time (effective period) The length of the period in which the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed.

  According to such a configuration, production performance is generated in “when to perform the production reception (operation)”, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed. Become.

  It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which “the effect sound of BGM playback” is output with a lower suppression level than the strong suppression mode can appear even when an operation opportunity is not given (when the fourth acceptance permission state does not occur). May be. That is, in this case, after the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the weak suppression mode is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without providing the operation opportunity. Then, the proportion of the degree of suppression further increased until the symbol variation is stopped as the number of occurrences of the weak suppression mode including the fourth acceptance allowable state increases in the production corresponding to one variation pattern (the first If the rate at which the one reception permission state is further executed) is increased, it is possible to further improve the rendering performance through the suppression status with respect to the “BGM playback effect sound”.

  In addition, the strong suppression mode with respect to “the effect sound for BGM reproduction” may also be able to appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first acceptance permission state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a presentation as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 431, when the fourth acceptance permission state occurs, the “effect sound of BGM playback” is suppressed based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period) (weak). It was made to make it a suppression aspect). However, instead of this, even when the fourth acceptance permission state occurs, the “BGM playback effect sound” is suppressed before the set time occurs, as in the case where the first acceptance permission state occurs. In the mode (weak suppression mode), a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted may be generated while being in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (predictive determination, etc.), “prediction sound for BGM reproduction” is set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) when the predetermined timing comes. Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, it is possible to widen the range of the effect. In the 4th acceptance acceptance state, about the timing when "rendering sound of BGM reproduction" is returned from the control mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-control mode, it is the same as the timing when the production after operation is finished or comes later It is desirable to do so.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the “specific type of effect sound” is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode and output in an audible state. Even if the strong suppression mode is to make the “specific type effect sound” non-audible (silent (audible volume is 0) or non-output (channel assignment is terminated)). Good.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned example of an effect, the case where the same operation means (operation button 410) is made into the operation target in any case, and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode is assumed. In this respect, in the "fourth acceptance permission state", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first acceptance permission state", as described above, the result of the advance presentation judgment There are “when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when selecting the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)”. Therefore, when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that it is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that in the case of selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode) and the case of selecting the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode), the effect is accepted. The corresponding post-operation effects have the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is:
A first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion touched when the player operates) when the set time (effective period) is generated, and the operation receiving portion by the driving force when the set time (effective period) is generated An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode to be moved to a specific position. Here, the “first operation mode” assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” gives an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001. Referring to FIG. 198 (A3) and the like that the sword decorative body 5001 is “thing that can give an operation opportunity to the player in a state where the sword ornament 5001 has moved to a specific position”. As described above. However, one operation means (one operation receiving unit) may have a “first operation mode” and a “second operation mode”, and an operation opportunity may be given according to any of these modes. Further, as described above, in the first acceptance permission state, an operation opportunity may be provided to the sword decorative body 5001 without fail.

  According to the above-described example of rendering, the “acceptable state (suppression) is set such that the effect after operation is executed while“ effect sound of BGM reproduction ”is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. In the case of the reception effect), when the bag image (integrated bag image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 410 (d)), the reception permission state is “first reception permission state (strong suppression mode)”. In other words, when the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410 (a)), the reception permission state is “first reception permission state”. (Strong suppression mode or non-output) "or" fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode) ".

  In other words, in this case, when the bag image (integrated bag image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 410 (d)), if an operation is accepted under a situation in which the reception allowable sound is being output, this is ended. (1st acceptance status). On the other hand, when the bird's-eye view image (an integrated bird's-eye view image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410 (a)), the operation is ended halfway when the operation acceptance is accepted In some cases, the process is not terminated halfway (first reception permission state, fourth reception permission state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the spear image (integrated spear image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410 (a)).

  In addition, when the haze image (integrated haze image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 410 (d)), the reception permission state is executed in the automatic reception mode (first reception permission state). On the other hand, when the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410 (a)), the case where the acceptance permission state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode and the non-automatic acceptance mode is performed. Will occur (the first acceptance acceptable state, the fourth acceptance acceptable state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the overhead view image (integrated overhead view image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410 (a)).

  In this regard, when the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410 (a)), the display is performed when the first acceptance permission state occurs and when the fourth acceptance permission state occurs. You may make it differ in the magnitude | size which is applied. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the reception-acceptable sound is terminated in the middle, or whether it is executed in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode.

  In addition, according to the above-mentioned example of the effect, it is confirmed whether the pre-effect is executed in the “wide-range type pre-effect” or the “n-range type pre-effect”, to obtain a specific type of effect sound (for BGM reproduction When the sound is in the suppression mode, it can be easily confirmed whether it is the "weak suppression mode" or the "strong suppression mode or non-output". After that, when the operation is performed while the acceptance permission sound is output, it is checked whether the mode is “weak suppression mode (not ended halfway)” or “strong suppression” by confirming whether this is ended halfway The reconfirmation as to whether the “mode or non-output (finished halfway)” can be performed while the post-operation effect is performed.

  Further, according to the above-described example of the effect, when the strongly suppressed mode or the non-output is adopted, the wide-range type front is made while the effect sound of the specific type (sound of BGM reproduction) is made into the strongly suppressed mode or not. When a weak suppression mode is adopted while a rendition is performed, a narrow-area pre-rendering is performed while the special type of sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is not set to the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it is possible to preferably maintain the presentation performance when the narrow-area type front presentation is performed.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the ratio in which the aspect in which the first acceptance permission state appears only at the time of big hit as the effect after the operation is higher than the second acceptance permission state (the degree of expectation is It is as described above. This percentage may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each production example described above, when the first reception permission state (special reception permission state) occurs from when the operation is received, the second reception permission state (predetermined reception permission is permitted). Since a different effect content (acceptable sound, bird's-eye view image, previous effect, etc.) appears depending on when the condition occurs, a second acceptance permission state may be generated (or such an effect content) (or If the player knows in advance that this is happening), there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fifth acceptance permissible state (specification based on the fact that the fifth condition is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination) as one of a plurality of acceptance acceptable states (specification An acceptance permission state is further prepared, and the operation acceptance is performed while making it difficult to distinguish the second acceptance permission state until the operation acceptance is made with respect to the fifth acceptance permission state. After that, by realizing the production progress that reminds of the first reception permission state, it is made difficult for the game entertainment to be lowered at least until the operation is received. In order to preferably obtain such an effect, when the fifth acceptance permissible state occurs, the first acceptance permissible state is thereafter performed until the symbol is stopped, rather than when the second acceptance permissible state occurs. It is desirable to set the rate of occurrence to be high. In addition, it is desirable to set the ratio of the big hit symbols to be stopped different from each other when the second acceptance permission state occurs and when the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. These percentages may be 0% or 100%.

  While making it difficult to distinguish between the second acceptable reception state and the fifth acceptable reception state, after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptable reception state, an effect that makes the first acceptable reception state recall is realized. As a technique to do this, for example, the same mode is output as the acceptable reception sound when the second acceptable reception state occurs and when the fifth acceptable reception state occurs, but the first acceptable reception state occurs. In such a case, an aspect that cannot be output as the acceptable sound in either the second acceptable sound state or the fifth acceptable sound state (for example, different types of sound as the first acceptable sound, Further, output modes, etc. are output. Then, when the operation is accepted in the second acceptance permission state, the post-operation effect (effect after the second operation) is executed while the sound that was in the output state at the time of the operation acceptance being continued is continuously output. In contrast, when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance permissible state or the fifth acceptance permissible state, all (all) sounds that were in the output state when the operation was accepted are output in a suppressed manner. In the state or the non-output state, the post-operation effect (the effect after the first operation or the effect after the fifth operation) is performed while being in the state. In this respect, if the specific effect movable body is used as a target for causing a change in any of the effects after the first operation and the effects after the fifth operation, the second acceptance permission state and the fifth acceptance permission state can be distinguished. However, after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, it is possible to realize a performance development that reminds the first acceptance-permitted state. As a result, the possibility that the first acceptance permission state has occurred (possibility that the acceptance permission sound has been mistakenly heard) comes to be conscious, and it is expected to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment interest. .

  In other words, in this case, in the first acceptance permission state, at least an effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect). Performing movable effects (such as effects shown in FIGS. 237 (C) and (D) and FIGS. 238 (CC1) to (CC3)) for moving the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 Is possible.

  On the other hand, even in the fifth acceptance permission state, at least an effect using a specific effect movable body is executed as an effect after operation (effect after fifth operation), but as the effect, the first operation It is desirable to execute the post-production with the content of the production greatly different. In other words, the fifth reception permission state is merely “even if the operation reception is at least accepted even if a situation in which the appearance of the previous presentation or the reception allowable sound suggests the possibility of the second reception permission state having low expectation appears. Until it is made, it is prepared for the purpose of making it possible to maintain the gaming interests, and gives the misrecognition that the first acceptance-permitted state has occurred at the time when the post-operation effect is executed. If this happens, it will be inevitable that the game will be less enjoyable when a misrecognition is noticed.

  Therefore, as such post-operation effect (effect after the fifth operation), it is desirable to perform effects with a tendency suppressed more than in the case of the post-first operation effect, for example, operation acceptance is performed. The effect change that does not operate the specific effect movable body that is in the light emission state at the time of the operation (does not generate driving force), reduces the light emission range, or makes it non-light emission state Can be performed as an effect that In addition, in the effect after the second operation, there is no effect change in the suppression tendency such as the light emission range of the specific effect movable body being reduced or being in the non-light emitting state. In this case, the specific movable decorative body has a predetermined light emitting portion.

  According to such a configuration, the first acceptance permission state (the effect after the first operation) is recalled by causing the effect change using the specific effect movable body, whereby the second acceptance permission state (second While being made to recognize that it is not a production after operation), while the content of the suppressed production is gradually exposed, it is calmly judged that it is not the first acceptance permission state (production after the first operation) As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In order to more suitably execute the fifth post-operation effect as an effect having a tendency to be suppressed compared to the case of the first post-operation effect, the post-first operation effect is set as an operation target. The operating means (operation receiving part such as a production button) emits light (or causes a change in light emission) when the operation is accepted, and driving means (motor or the like) provided corresponding to the operating means ) Is caused to cause a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), while in the post-fifth stage effect, the operation means (operation receiving part such as an effect button) that is the operation target is operated. When the reception is made, the light is turned off (may be a mode of gradually turning off), and a predetermined movement is performed without driving a driving means (such as a motor) provided corresponding to the operation means. ( It is desirable to ensure that does not cause the dynamic, etc.). In this way, while performing after-operation effects (effect after the first operation, effect after the fifth operation) for the same movable decorative object in the first acceptance permission state and the fifth acceptance permission state, the fifth The effects described above can be favorably achieved by causing the effects after the first operation and the fifth post-operation effects to appear so that the contents of the effects are exactly opposite.

  FIG. 432 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth acceptance permissible state is generated under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 432 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the variation pattern in which the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. The fluctuation pattern will be described as the fifth fluctuation pattern, but may be the first fluctuation pattern as described above.

  Now, assuming that the start condition is established (holding digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction), and “fifth change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect depiction according to the fifth variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and notice is made within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect corresponding to the result of the effect determination (preliminary effect) is to be executed additionally to the selected “fifth fluctuation pattern” itself.

Then, as described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 432 (b), the fifth operation occurs when the timing tE3 when the fifth predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started. The fifth acceptance permission state (effective period) in which the operation acceptance regarding the post effect is permitted is generated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fifth acceptance permission state (effective period) is:
-"Non-suppression acceptance permission state (" The suppression sound is allowed to be accepted while the sound of BGM playback (effect sound of a specific type) according to the fifth variation pattern maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. " (See FIGS. 432 (a) and (b)) ”and when the operation on the operation means to be operated is not detected within the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which the operation acceptance is permitted. Even so, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started “automatic reception mode (see FIG. 432 (i))”
It is made to generate as "non-suppression / automatic receptionist production" executed by The timing tE3c does not necessarily arrive within the set time, and may arrive at or after the set time ends.

  According to such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second acceptance permission state is generated until the post-operation effect is started to be executed, but the post-operation effect is started to be executed by the automatic reception mode. If it is done, the progress of the performance as if reminiscent of the first acceptance permission state is realized, so that it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the post-operation effect starts to be executed. .

  Also, in the fifth reception permitted state, similarly to the second reception permitted state, as shown in FIGS. 432 (b), (e), and (j), a set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which the operation reception is permitted. ) Occurs at a timing tE2 slightly before the occurrence of the “acceptance acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)”, and the output state is changed in a manner that crosses the timing tE3 at which the set time occurs. I try to keep it. The length of time from when the first permissible sound starts to be accepted until the operation is accepted is also the same. In addition to the fact that the sound itself output as the first allowable sound is also the same, the point that the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output is also similar to the second acceptance allowable state. As a result, the same aspect appears in the second reception permitted state and the fifth reception permitted state with respect to the acceptable reception sound until the operation is accepted, so that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. Be expected.

  However, as described above, in the second acceptance permissible state, the operation is performed at timing tB3a (FIG. 427 (e)) in which the “acceptable acceptable sound (first acceptable tone)” is in the output state after the set time (effective period) has occurred. When the reception is made, the set time itself is ended, while the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not interrupted, and the timing at which the first allowable sound is output (no operation is performed). The output state is maintained until the same timing tB3c (FIG. 427 (e)) as in the case of the first reception allowance. When the operation is accepted at the timing tE3a (FIG. 432 (e)) in which the “acceptable sound” is in the output state, not only the set time itself is terminated but also the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” Also With regard to the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)”, such a behavior (a halfway end) appears when the operation acceptance is performed in the first acceptable state. Because of the presence (FIG. 428 (e)), despite the situation where the fifth acceptance permission state is occurring, the rendering progress as if to recall the first acceptance permission state is realized, It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 432, when an operation is accepted within the set time of the fifth acceptance-permitted state (in the figure, timing tE3a), an effect display device is provided as an after-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance. In the display effect (liquid crystal display) after operation in 1600 (first effect member) and the output sound (effect sound) after operation by the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 432 (d) reference). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) maintains the execution state until timing tE5 regardless of the time when the operation is received, and the post-operation output sound (rendering sound) is in the execution state only for a predetermined time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not necessarily executed.

  Although illustration is omitted, in this effect example, a post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) corresponding to the fifth reception-permitted state and a post-operation effect (first operation corresponding to the first reception-permitted state). In any of the “post-operation effects”, at least an “effect using a specific effect movable body” is executed. About each production contents of "a production using a specific production movable body" corresponding to the 1st acceptance permission state and "a production using a specific production movable body" corresponding to the 5th reception acceptance condition, It is. For example, as the effect after the first operation, the movable effect for moving the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 237 (C), (D); It is possible to perform the effects shown in). In addition, as the effect after the fifth operation, the effect change such as reducing the light emission range of the specific effect movable body that was in the light emission state at the time when the operation acceptance is performed, or making it not light emission It can be performed as a production.

  According to such a configuration, the first acceptance permission state (the effect after the first operation) is recalled by causing the effect change using the specific effect movable body, whereby the second acceptance permission state (second While being made to recognize that it is not a production after operation), while the content of the suppressed production is gradually exposed, it is calmly judged that it is not the first acceptance permission state (production after the first operation) As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  Also in the effect example (fifth acceptance acceptable state) shown in FIG. 432, similarly to the effect example (second acceptance acceptable state) shown in FIG. 427, than the timing tE3 at which the setting time of the acceptance acceptable state is set When the previous timing tE2 comes, the overhead display image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 looking over the operation means to be operated, and a gauge image is displayed that suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. Each is done. Further, the display mode of the haze image and the gauge image is the same as that in the second reception allowable state, and is displayed as an integrated haze image IG, for example. The same is true in that the special image shown in FIG. 410 (d) is not displayed as the integrated haze image IG. As a result, with regard to the bird's-eye view image and the gauge image, the same mode appears in the second acceptance permission state and the fifth acceptance permission state until the operation acceptance is performed, so that the game entertainment is suitably maintained. It is expected.

  In this example as well, the timing at which the haze image is displayed is the same as the timing when the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) starts to be output, but this is not restrictive, and either one starts earlier You may be made to do. Alternatively, only one of the overhead image and the acceptance permission sound (for example, only the overhead image) may be started prior to the timing tE3. However, even when these other examples and the other examples described above are adopted, the configuration until the operation is accepted should be matched between the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 432 (c) to (f), when the timing tE3a arrives while the integrated bird's-eye view image (the bird's-eye view image, the gauge image) is displayed and the operation acceptance is performed. Is assumed. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the effect after the fifth operation (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decoration Although at least one of the rendering operation by the body is to be started, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated overhead view image (the overhead view image, the gauge image) at the time when the presentation after the fifth operation is started Is not hidden and remains displayed. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, a change due to the integrated bird's-eye view image (specific layer) does not occur at that time (timing tE3a), and a short time (a predetermined time) Until the timing tE3b has passed, the “display on the integrated 摸 image (摸 image, gauge image)” in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. Thus, the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before.

  Then, when the timing tE3b arrives, an image (an extinction effect) that is displayed in a state where it is difficult to see or make a part or the whole of the integrated coffin image (the coffin image, gauge image) in the display state invisible or invisible. Make it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, the integrated bird's-eye view image (the bird's-eye view image, the gauge image) is not hidden even when such an image (disappearing effect) is started to be displayed. Maintain state. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer where the integrated cocoon image (摸 image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated 摸 image (摸 image, gauge) The resulting change in the image does not occur, and the display area of the gauge image is made to develop the reduction in the same manner as before. However, when the annihilation effect is displayed on the layer on the front side, the overhead image or the gauge image is difficult to view or can not be viewed.

  That is, in this case, although it is in the situation where the image of the annihilation effect is displayed on the predetermined layer for the purpose of making it difficult to visually recognize the bird's eye image or the gauge image (integrated bird's eye image)摸 image or gauge image (integrated 摸 image) displayed on a specific layer (behind a predetermined layer (a lower priority side)) itself remains as it was when operation acceptance was allowed The display is maintained so that no change occurs. Moreover, the display which continues the reduction of the display area is continued over the operation reception also about a gauge image. As a result, even if it is in the process of making it difficult to visually recognize the bird's-eye view image or the gauge image (integrated bird's-eye view image) or making it impossible to visually recognize, the mode (at least a part of them) It becomes possible to visually recognize.

  Moreover, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated bird's-eye view image (the bird's-eye view image, the gauge image) is ended within the period (timing tE3b to tE3e) where the image of the annihilation effect is displayed (display on layer) The image of the disappearance effect is displayed in a situation where the habit image (habit image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer.

  With regard to such a display method after the operation acceptance is made regarding the bird's-eye view image and the gauge image, since the first acceptance permission state and the fifth acceptance permission state are common, the game interest is reduced by this. There is no.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 432, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 427, when the timing tE1 before the timing tE3 at which the fifth acceptance permission state occurs, less than half of the predetermined display area A narrow-area pre-rendering operation using only the region of is started to be performed. Then, during the period when the image according to such a narrow area type pre-display is displayed, first, the display of a bird's-eye view image (here, an integrated bird's-eye view image) looking over the operation receiving unit and Output is started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image) is started, it becomes difficult for a part or the whole of the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image) to be visually recognized by the image related to the narrow area type pre-production Yes. That is, as the time lapses, the display range of the image related to the narrow area type pre-production is reduced or the transmittance is increased, so that “摸 image (integrated 摸A performance such as “increasing the visibility of (image) gradually” is provided. In this respect, even in the fifth acceptance acceptable state, the fifth acceptance acceptable state is performed while the narrow-area pre-rendering effect is executed and the overhead image (here, the integrated overhead image) is displayed. The timing tE3 at which the occurrence of the occurrence of the operation is received and the operation reception is permitted, and the narrow-area type pre-production is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permission state occurs.

  Here, as an image used for such a narrow-area type pre-production, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed may be used. And display the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image) and the image (narrow-range pre-rendering effect) as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the bird's-eye view image (integrated bird's-eye view image IG) becomes gradually It may be designed to express the state of being enhanced. However, as for the image of the narrow area type previous effect corresponding to the fifth acceptance allowable state, it is desirable to use the same image as the image of the narrow area type anterior effect corresponding to the second acceptance allowable state.

  Note that, in the narrow-area type pre-production, not only the image display on the production display device 1600 but also the production of the production sound related thereto may be performed. However, in view of the fact that the second acceptance permission state is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension regarding operation-related, the narrow-area pre-rendering is It can be said that it is desirable to increase the concentration of the production effect without performing the output of the production sound related to this, and executing it as the image display in the production display device 1600.

  As described above, the same mode appears in the second reception permitted state and the fifth reception permitted state with respect to the narrow-area type front effect that occurs before the operation reception is permitted. It is expected to maintain suitably.

  According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the effect is developed in the same manner as the effect contents shown in FIGS. 429 (a) to (e). Even if the player knows in advance that the first acceptance permission state with high expectation has not occurred, it has an interest in whether the second acceptance permission state or the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. It will be possible to control the decline in the entertainment interest of the game.

  However, as described above, after the operation by the player is detected in the fifth acceptance permission state and the post-operation effect (effect after the fifth operation) is started, it is not the second acceptance permission state but the first acceptance permission state The production will be developed in such a manner as to recall.

  In other words, in the effect example shown in FIG. 432, when an operation by the player is detected (operation accepted) in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, the sound that is in the output state in an unsuppressed manner at the time when the operation is accepted ( All of the above are set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or to the non-output state, and this is terminated halfway. In the example shown in FIG. 428 (first reception permissible state), when an operation is accepted, the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound” that were in the output state in the non-suppression mode are displayed in the strong suppression mode. In this example (fifth reception permission state) shown in FIG. 432, when an operation is accepted, the output state is not suppressed. The “BGM playback sound” and the “first permissible sound” that are in the output state in the mode are set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or in the non-output state, and these are terminated halfway. As a result, regarding the sounds (all of them) that were in the output state in a non-suppressed manner before the operation is accepted, the operation acceptance is triggered in both the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state. As a result, the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state will be entered, so that the first acceptance allowable state can be recalled at the timing tE3a shown in FIG. It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In this case, either the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state may be set in response to the operation reception, but the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state It is desirable to perform the same process in For example, in the second reception permission state, if the sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode until then is set to the non-output state in response to the operation reception, the operation reception is also triggered in the fifth reception permission state. The sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode until then will be in the non-output state.

  In contrast, in the example shown in FIGS. 432 (g) to 432 (k), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptance-permitted state has ended) without detecting an operation by the player. As described above, since the fifth acceptance permission state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the operation acceptance is performed when the predetermined timing tE3c comes without the operation by the player being performed. The same process will be performed.

  Therefore, at the timing tE3c, the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect) is not only started to be executed, but also the sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed manner until then (here, the sound of BGM playback) is strongly suppressed. Either the output state in the mode or the non-output state is set, and these are terminated halfway. Also in the first acceptance permitted state (FIG. 428), a predetermined sound (for example, the first acceptable sound) is output in the non-suppression mode until the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated comes, in the timing tC4f. In FIG. 5, the output state may be set in the strong suppression mode or may be in the non-output state, and this may be terminated halfway.

  Further, at the timing tE3d, while the post-fifth operation effect is already in the execution state, the execution of the “wide area disappearance effect” is started as the above-described disappearance effect. The "wide area type disappearance effect" is not necessarily the same as the image in the case of the first acceptance permission state but the image itself is not necessarily the same, but is accompanied by a change from the background image displayed until the operation acceptance is performed. It is desirable to be implemented as an effect. In other words, in this case, it goes without saying that it is executed using at least half of the display area. Thereby, also regarding the disappearance effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed), the same mode (the wide area-type disappearance effect) is the same in both the second acceptance permission state and the fifth acceptance permission state. Therefore, after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed, the first acceptance permission state can be recalled, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. The manner of the disappearance effect is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is activated (timing tE3c). Also in the case of the first acceptance permission state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 432, the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect) ends at the timing at which the “BGM playback sound” is output again in the non-suppressed manner in the fifth acceptance-permitted state. However, it may be the timing when the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, or the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect) may be set. It may be timing to arrive after the end.

  Also, in the first acceptance-permitted state, similarly to the fifth acceptance-permitted state, the timing at which the “BGM playback sound” is set to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode is set when the operation is accepted. It is also good.

  In the first reception permission state or the fifth reception permission state, a process of setting the sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppression mode until then to “output in the suppression mode” or “non-output state”; About the process to which it is made to output, execution does not necessarily need to be started at the same timing, and all those processes should just be started execution based on operation reception being made.

  In addition, as described above, when the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance permission state, the specific effect movable body that has been in the light emission state until that time is turned off for a predetermined time (the fifth operation). When the operation is received in the first reception permitted state, the driving force is applied to the specific effect movable body so that a predetermined effect operation appears (after the first operation). Production) is desirable. At this time, in the effect after the first operation, a driving force is generated for the drive means corresponding to the operation means set as the operation target so that a predetermined movement (such as vibration) appears in the operation means. On the other hand, it is desirable not to perform such processing in the fifth post-operation effect. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, the light emission mode of the operation means that is the operation target is changed, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the light emission in the operation means that is the operation target is turned off. It is desirable to make it. It is desirable that these processes in the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state be an aspect that can appear when the same result (for example, a big hit win) is obtained as a result of the big hit determination.

  In addition, when a movable effect by the specific effect movable body is performed in the post-first operation effect, it is desirable that light can be emitted in a manner that does not appear when the specific effect movable body is not operating.

  Moreover, in the effect after the first operation, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is started to be output and then continuously output, whereas in the effect after the fifth operation, the effect sound according to the operation reception When it is output for a predetermined time, it is desirable that a state where no effect sound is output in the non-suppressed mode (a state output in the strongly suppressed mode or a non-output state) appears. According to such a configuration, in the effect after the fifth operation, the effect sound according to the operation reception is properly performed, but the tendency is suppressed by this compared to the effect after the first operation. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, it is desirable to make the acceptance acceptable sound outputted at the time of their occurrence different between the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state. That is, as described above, in the first acceptance permissible state, the first permissible sound (sound effect) and the second permissible sound (message sound) are output, while in the fifth acceptance permissible state, the second permissible sound is output. The allowable sound (message sound) is not output and the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable that the first allowable sound (sound effect) itself be output as a different sound.

  Moreover, as above-mentioned, it is shown by the same aspect (FIG. 410 (a)-(c)) as a haze image (integrated haze image) in the 1st reception permission state and the 5th reception permission state (2nd reception permission state). Aspect) is made displayable. However, even when the same mode is displayed as the heel image (integrated heel image) in the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state (second reception permission state), the size of the display is large. It is desirable that the fifth acceptance status (the second acceptance status) be displayed in a manner smaller than that of the first acceptance status in the fifth acceptance status (the second acceptance status). However, the size is displayed in the same manner in the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state. It should be noted that in the first acceptable state, a special mode can be displayed as a coffin image (integrated coffin image), but in the fifth acceptable state (second acceptable state), the coffin image (integrated coffin image) It is also as mentioned above that the special aspect is not displayed as.

  In addition, in the effect after the first operation according to the first acceptance permission state, the effect sound which is not triggered by the operation reception (variation pattern) while the output sound after the operation according to the operation reception is audibly output in the non-suppression mode It is desirable that the production sound output at a predetermined timing is started to be output in a non-suppressing manner (for example, BGM is restored). On the other hand, in the effect after the fifth operation according to the fifth acceptance permission state, the effect sound not triggered by the operation reception while the output sound after the operation according to the operation reception is audibly output in the non-suppression mode ( It is desirable that the effect sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern is not started to be output in the non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is set to the non-output state, the effect sound that is not triggered by the operation reception (the effect sound output at a predetermined timing in the variation pattern) is not generated. Since the output is started in the suppression mode, it is possible to preferably maintain the game fun by adopting such a suppressed mode as compared with the case of the first acceptance permission state.

  Further, as described above, the second acceptance permission state can be generated in both the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permission state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permission state does not occur. When a state occurs, the first acceptance permission state may be generated within the period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. In addition, the fifth acceptance permission state is generated by allowing the fifth acceptance permission state to occur in both the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permission state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permission state does not occur. When it does, it may be made to have the possibility that the 1st acceptance acceptance state may occur within the period until the design fluctuation which is in execution state is stopped. However, in this case, when the fifth acceptance permission state occurs, the rate at which the first acceptance permission state occurs during the period until the symbol variation is stopped is higher than when the second acceptance permission state occurs. It is desirable to set to. The ratio may include 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the player detects in advance that the first acceptance permission state has not occurred before the time when the operation is accepted, the fifth acceptance permission state has occurred. Since the possibility can be expected, a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  According to the production example described above, as a result of the operation being accepted when the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (d)), the operation is accepted. If the acceptable reception sound is not terminated on the basis of reception, not only the acceptable reception sound but also other sounds that are in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (such as “BGM playback sound”) The output state is maintained (see FIG. 427). On the other hand, as a result of the operation being accepted when the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (d)), based on the operation reception When the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway, not only the acceptance acceptable sound but also other sounds (such as “sound for BGM playback”) that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode are output or non-output in the strongly suppressed mode (See FIG. 432).

  According to the above-described production example, in a situation where a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, an operation is accepted when the haze image (integrated haze image) is displayed, and as a result, the operation is accepted based on the operation acceptance. When the permission sound is terminated halfway, "if the specific effect movable body is made to emit light in the predetermined mode and the specific effect operation is generated (Fig. 428)" based on the operation acceptance, "the light emission state was in While the process of reducing or extinguishing the light emission area of the specific effect movable body is performed, there is a case where no effect operation is caused (FIG. 432). Therefore, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment in a situation where the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway. It should be noted that "when the specific effect movable body is made to emit light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (Fig. 428)", the process of "reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body or turning off" It is desirable that the light emitting portion is also made to emit light.

  In each of the effects described above, the integrated overhead view image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. In addition, when the overhead image and the gauge image are displayed separately as separate images instead of the integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

  In each of the above-described examples, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output so that there is a time when the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output. However, after the first allowable sound has been output, The output may be started.

  In addition, in the acceptance-permitted state according to each example described above, the cocoon image is displayed as the integrated cocoon image IG including the gauge image GG, but may not necessarily be displayed as an image including the gauge image GG.

  The acceptance allowance state according to each example described above can occur in both the variation pattern at the time of big hit and the variation pattern at the time of loss.

  In each of the above reception acceptance states, the annihilation effect is executed as an image different from the overhead image when the post-operation effect is executed, but the post-operation effect is executed as a result of being executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode It is desirable to make the annihilation effect execute by fading out the bird's-eye view image itself only when it is not done, in order to make it impossible to recognize the degree of expectation. In this case, the process which changes from the mode when the haze image itself displayed on the specific layer is in the acceptance-permitted state is executed.

  In each of the above-described acceptance allowance states, even if the acceptance acceptance state is the same, depending on the degree of expectation as a mode related to a post-operation effect when winning a big hit, when winning a big hit, The type of extinction effect may be changed.

  The wide area type disappearance effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow area type extinction effect is set to less than half of the display screen. It does not have to satisfy the condition of more than half or less than half. As for the previous production, the wide-area type production is set to be more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-type production type is less than half of the display screen. ", It is not always necessary to satisfy the conditions of more than half or less than half.

  The post-operation effect may be executed by any one of liquid crystal display, sound output, and light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5. In short, anything that causes some change in display, sound, light emission, etc., triggered by the acceptance of the operation.

  Further, the “specific type of effect sound” may be a BGM playback sound output during normal fluctuations, or may be a BGM playback sound output across a plurality of fluctuations.

  The fourth acceptance permission state may not necessarily be executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode, and may be executed in the automatic acceptance mode.

  In addition, effects after operation when the operation acceptance is made in the first acceptance permission state (effects after the first operation) and effects after operation when the operation acceptance is performed in the fourth acceptance permission state (effect after the fourth operation) It is desirable to make the presentation contents different from each other.

  When the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, a process (such as increasing the transmittance) for reducing the visibility of the integrated haze image IG (specific layer) itself may also be performed.

  The image applied to the annihilation effect (wide area annihilation effect, narrow area annihilation effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance, and in this case, the entire overhead view image (integrated overhead view image) Even if the images are displayed so as to overlap with each other, it is possible to confirm the mode of the haze image (integrated haze image).

  In each of the above-described production examples, the “narrow region type production” is “the background change (the background image that has been displayed so far cannot be visually recognized, and the production is performed in a state where a new background image is displayed. It is good also as "a pre-effect" which does not accompany an effect to do. In this case, "wide-area-type effect" means "change in background (effect to make the background image that has been displayed so far not visible and to be able to perform the effect while a new background image is displayed)" It means "pre-production with". The background image may be an image of black only or white only.

  In each effect example described above, the aspect shown in FIG. 410D may be omitted as an aspect of the integrated overhead image. In this case, the “special aspect” is an operation means (an aspect (shown in FIG. 410 (c)) in which the shape of the eyelid image itself with the operation receiving portion is the same and the shape of the peripheral decorative image is different. Will be used.

  In each of the above-described effects, when a cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed, the cocoon image displays “operation in a movable region” or “behavior when operated” as an operation means (operation receiving unit). As described above, this is dynamically displayed in the form of expression. In this regard, it is desirable that such dynamic display be continued on a specific layer until the display is made non-display even after the operation is accepted.

  In each production example described above, the display method related to the cocoon image is appropriately changed or added to the contents described in FIGS. 410 to 426, the explanatory text corresponding to these drawings, or other examples. It may be. In addition, regarding the bag image, gauge image, reception allowable sound, and post-operation effect when the first reception permission state occurs, “BGM” in FIG. 390 to FIG. 426 and explanatory texts and other examples corresponding to these drawings The description may be changed or added as appropriate to the description applied to the description and the other examples described with respect to the “effective period generated while the sound of reproduction is in the strong suppression mode”. . In addition, regarding the bag image, the gauge image, the acceptable reception sound, and the post-operation effect when the second acceptable state of occurrence occurs, “BGM” among FIGS. 390 to 426 and explanations and other examples corresponding to these drawings The description may be changed or added as appropriate to the explanation applied to the description and the other examples described with respect to the “effective period generated while the sound of reproduction is in a non-suppressed manner”. .

  The present invention has been described with reference to some embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. Improvements and design changes are possible.

  For example, there is a case where a display such as “auto button is being set” is performed in each of the above-described effects related to the automatic effect function, but this display is not necessarily performed. In particular, when not being pachinko machine 1 which is set to automatic production mode, when it is realized as pachinko machine 1 which is always in the state where automatic production function can be activated and processing itself such as "setting to production state" is not installed. It is desirable not to display such as “auto button is being set”. In the pachinko machine 1 in which the processing itself such as “setting to the production state” is not installed, the effective period in which the automatic production function is played and the automatic production function are provided according to the type of the operation reception production that is allowed to be operated by the player. An effective period that can not be played may be generated.

  Further, in each of the above-described effects, the “摸 image” may be an image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and is always an operation target, such as an arrow image that moves up and down while pointing downward. It does not have to be displayed as an image with manipulation means taken.

  In addition, when the automatic production function is adopted in each production example described above, the timing for automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) within the operation effective period is set to any timing within the operation effective period. It may be. In order to suitably give an operation opportunity to a player, an operation is performed when an operation is not detected until a predetermined timing after the operation effective period has elapsed and more than half the time has elapsed. Preferably, the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, and a post-operation effect is generated based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to be started. In addition, in each of the above-described presentation examples relating to the automatic rendering function, in the case where the bar display is not hidden and maintained even after the expiration period ends, the operation to be operated according to the timing when the expiration period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). As a result, even when the bar display is not hidden but is continued to be displayed, it is expected that the player is prevented from making a false recognition such as "Was the validity period continuing?" Become so.

  In addition, in each production example described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 303 and the production example described with reference to FIG. 387, after the operation with the haze image (or bar display) maintained without being hidden. The time from when the operation is detected to when the overhead image (or bar display) is not displayed (the period from timing tf2 to tf4, the period from timing tg3 to tg5, As for “the period from th3 to th4, etc.”, there may be at least several frames (for example, two frames). Alternatively, there may be only one frame time. Even if there is only such time, the period during which the spear image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps with the period after the start of the post-operation effect, and may be recognized by some players. In some cases.

  In the example of production related to the above-described “improving production using the automatic production function (see FIG. 300)”, the automatic production function is not activated in the state where the hold display on the production display device 1600 is hidden. An automatic reception effect and an automatic reception effect that enables the automatic effect function may be generated. According to such a configuration, the reception effect can be generated while it is difficult to grasp whether the number of holdings is large or small, that is, it is difficult to activate the automatic performance function. Become. Furthermore, for example, when a non-automatic reception effect is generated in the non-display state of the hold display, the subsequent symbol variation stops more than when the non-automatic reception effect is generated in the state of the hold display. If the ratio of the automatic reception effects to be further increased until it is released, it will be effective when the hold display is hidden and it is difficult to grasp the ease of enabling the automatic effect function. Interestingness can be added.

  In addition, in the explanation example of “help image for prompting understanding of production”, a ruler is exemplified as “a guide image showing a unit of length in the horizontal direction”, but other images are used. May be In short, it is sufficient if the player operates a display image that is drawn without being affected by the special effect. For example, it is not an image intended to promote understanding of the effect, but has other functions. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image that suggests the degree of expectation, an image that suggests the current production state, an image that suggests a state related to production settings, etc.) is drawn to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. In addition, such an image does not necessarily need to be drawn by one, but may be drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction as a whole by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

  Also, in the example of “Preventing Mischief against Multiple Operating Means”, mischief acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto. It may also lead to profits. Therefore, the image appearing based on the detection of the operation by the player (including the image appearing in the process of causing the specific moving image to appear) is realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. It is also good. In short, when an operation by a player is performed on a plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), a “game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is executed in the effect display device 1600. Display (playback) a specific video that cannot appear in the current state (it may be a video that has nothing to do with prevention of mischief (for example, a transition to a state in which a predetermined movie is played) ) ”,“ Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, changes in the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound will not be accepted, and the current volume setting value will not be displayed. ” Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the brightness setting value for the brightness of the effect lamp can not be accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. As long as it performs control to generate me. Note that in this case, the player can generate a function restriction period during which the above-mentioned specific moving image is played by his / her own intention by operating a plurality of operation means with a predetermined pattern (procedure). It is.

  In the example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operation means”, in the state where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the partial restriction period may be controlled.

  In addition, for the explanation example of "preventing noise due to adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening a store", it is important to control to the normal state that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after power on. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to a normal state after a restriction state in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not allowed to be output, and the restriction state is terminated early when the game is started in the restriction state. It is only necessary to be able to be controlled in a normal state, and the length of time that is maintained as a restricted state may be set appropriately (set from a few seconds to a few hours). Good. If the length of time to be maintained in the restricted state is set too short, the above-mentioned effects in the game period immediately after the store opening will not be achieved, but the noise when the hall side sets the volume immediately after turning on the power It is possible to suppress this.

  Moreover, in the explanation example of "control concerning the sound volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the effect importance", it is in advantageous conditions by the time of being in the time of the change of the first special symbol and in the time of the change of the second special symbol Although the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the second special symbol on the side that is made playable, the change of the first special symbol on the side that can be played under adverse conditions is not The case where a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is exemplified. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology to a gaming machine in which the second special symbol is not loaded, for example, preparing a specific symbol in which a lottery is performed under a condition that is more disadvantageous than the first special symbol. However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played under advantageous conditions, but the side that can be played under disadvantageous conditions The sound volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output during the change of the specific symbol.

  In addition, in the explanation example of “Performance of Operation Acceptance Period (Effective Period) itself”, Acceptable Sound Accompanied with Generation of Special Operation Reception Effect and Accompanying Generation of First and Second Operation Reception Effects An effect sound different from the acceptable reception sound may be used. In FIG. 388, the acceptable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11). However, as “one sound data” straddling the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA. It may be made to output.

  The bird's-eye view image looking over the operation receiving unit receiving the operation and the peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery thereof are individually prepared as image data, and may be displayed as an integrated bird's eye image combining those respective image data. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 410, when “normal button 摸 image BMGa” is displayed when giving an operation opportunity to one operation means (FIGS. 410 (a) and (c)), There are cases where “special button bag image BMGb” having a different shape is displayed (FIGS. 410B and 410D). However, when the “normal button 摸 image BMGa” is displayed (FIGS. 410 (a) and (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving portion), and the “special button” In the case where the “butterfly image BMGb” is displayed (FIGS. 410B and 410D), the second operation means (second operation receiving section) different from the first operation means (first operation receiving section) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given.

  In each of the above-described explanation examples, members (operation means) prepared as operation objects include those that require a pressing operation (buttons, etc.), those that require an insertion / removal operation (such as sword decoration), and non-contact. Alternatively, it may be realized as a device requiring a touch operation (proximity sensor or the like).

  Although the peripheral decoration image SSG does not hesitate the peripheral decoration part actually provided at the periphery of the “operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is given”, at least a part of the peripheral decoration image It may be anything that is not, and there may be a part that frowns the peripheral decorative part.

  Regarding the second effective period in which the operation-related image (such as the integrated bag image IG) is displayed in the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG” or the effective period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, The predetermined setting time is not limited and may be continued indefinitely unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is satisfied.

  When the specific image TG is displayed within the effective period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

  With respect to the “automatic reception effect” described in FIG. 410 and thereafter, any of the realizing methods related to the “automatic reception effect” exemplified before that may be adopted. Any of the above-described implementation methods may be adopted as to how a bird's-eye view image or a gauge image is displayed when an automatic reception effect is performed.

  That is, although the embodiment shows the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 1st special symbol indicator 1404 1st special reserve number indicator 1405 2nd special symbol indicator 1406 2nd special reserve Number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Large winning opening

In such a conventional gaming machine, Yu Technical interest is concern that a decrease.

Means 1: determination means for performing determination;
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means;
An operation receiving section for receiving an operation by a player ;
Is capable of generating reception allowable period for which the operation opportunity is given, the operation acceptance means for generating display change is operation reception in receiving with acceptable period,
Wherein in the reception allowable period, displaying the摸image display if the operation receiving unit is an object operation opportunity is given, as an integral摸image display integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image to decorate the periphery of該摸image display Possible integrated 摸 image display means,
A plurality of modes including special modes are prepared as the integrated bird's-eye view image display ,
The acceptance acceptance period includes a first acceptance acceptance period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, and a second acceptance acceptance period that occurs when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. And
When said first reception allowable period occurs, it becomes a state where the operation reception is permitted, or the operation reception reception allowable noise suggests that is in a state allowed is outputted, the receiving with acceptable sound When an operation is accepted while in the output state, the output state is terminated halfway based on the acceptance of the operation ,
When the second acceptance allowable period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance is allowed or the operation acceptance is allowed is not output,
When the operation is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the integrated bag image display may be displayed in the special mode in the first acceptable time period in which the output state is terminated halfway. The gaming machine characterized in that the integrated bag image display is not displayed in the special mode during the second reception allowable period in which the reception allowable sound is not output .

Claims (1)

Determining means for performing the determination;
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means;
An operation receiving section for receiving an operation by a player;
An operation accepting means capable of generating an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity is given in a predetermined gaming state, and causing a display change when the operation is accepted in the acceptance permission state;
When the acceptance-permitted state occurs, the cocoon image showing the operation receiving unit to which an operation opportunity is given is displayed as an integrated cocoon image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the cocoon image Possible integrated 摸 image display means,
As the integrated bag image, a plurality of modes including a special mode are prepared,
Upon the occurrence of the acceptance-permitted state, an acceptance-permitted sound suggesting that the operation acceptance is allowed or the operation acceptance is allowed can be output.
At least a part of the period during which the acceptable sound for reception is output overlaps with the acceptable state for reception. A game machine characterized in that the output state is ended based on.